JP2016198145A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine characteristic in notification means.SOLUTION: If a 14th round and a 16th round are rounds where long openings are performed, and in the 14th round if a game ball did not enter an area where a second count switch SW2 that functions as a V passing switch is disposed, a decorative symbol display device 208 performs in a 15th round a shooting method instruction 2 presentation instructing "Aim V". The decorative symbol display device 208 can perform the shooting method instruction 2 presentation while an island simultaneous presentation is being performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 430

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, such game machines are known that are provided with notification means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the notification means.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in a notification means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A first variable winning means;
A second variable winning means,
A second area into which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter;
A notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area, the second game state can be started,
The first jackpot game consists of multiple rounds,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “first round”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in a second state,
One round (hereinafter referred to as “second round”) started after the first round among the plurality of rounds is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the first state. And
One round (hereinafter referred to as “third round”) that is started after the second round of the plurality of rounds, the second variable winning means is in the second state. Round,
The second round is a round in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter,
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications is a notification prompting entry of a game ball into the second area (hereinafter referred to as “game ball entry promotion notification”),
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round,
The first round is a round that is longer than a round in which the period of the second state is the shortest period;
The third round is a round having a longer period than the round in which the period of the second state is the shortest period;
The notifying means is means for executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the second round when the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round,
One of the multiple types of effects is an island simultaneous effect,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball approach promotion notification during execution of the island simultaneous production.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by the notification means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 1st embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A-1) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of Special Figure 1, and (a-2) shows the stop symbol aspect (First Symbol aspect) of Special Figure 2. An example is shown, (b) shows an example of a decorative design, and (c) shows an example of a usual stop design mode (second design mode). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for common figure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for common figure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination, (D) is a figure which shows the low probability table for the success / failure determination, and (e) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 1, (b) is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 2, (c) FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a table used in the table set, and FIG. 4D is a diagram for explaining a timer number. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the table set 1, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the table set 2, (c)-(e) is a figure which shows the table 1. FIG. . (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the table 2, (d)-(f) is a figure which shows the table 3. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the table 4 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display to win a big hit, and (b) in order to determine the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes a loss irrespective of the number of pending | holdings. (C) is a diagram showing the table 5 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be a big hit, (d) is a symbol that loses regardless of the number of pending It is a figure which shows the table 5 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of a fluctuation | variation display. (A) is a time chart showing an example when the second game condition is satisfied and the third game condition is also satisfied, and (b) is a time chart when the second game condition is satisfied and the third game condition is satisfied. It is a time chart which shows an example when the game condition of is not satisfied, and (c) is a time chart which shows an example when the first game condition is satisfied. (A) is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400, (c) is 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process regarding special figure 2 among special figure prefetch processes. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process regarding Special Figure 1 among special figure prefetch processes. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the sub side prefetch notice execution process at the time of a start winning prize. (A) is a figure which shows the hold change prefetch notice lottery table used in a non-electric support state, (b) is a figure which shows the hold change prefetch notice lottery table used in an electric support state (C) is a figure which shows the hold display (normal hold) of a default display mode, (d) is a figure which shows the display mode of hold notice A, The figure (e) is a hold notice B It is a figure which shows the display mode of. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the sub side notice execution process at the time of a change start. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 23. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 24. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 25. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 26. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 27. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 28. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example which occurs rarely in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 30. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 32. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 34. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example in which the 100th symbol variation display has been reached without making a big hit from the state shown in FIG. 35 (26). (A-1) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, and (a-2) is an example of the second embodiment. An example of the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine is shown, and (b) is a diagram summarizing the actions of the attacker during the big hit game of the special figure 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 38. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 39. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example in which the 50th symbol variation display is reached without making a big hit from the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 39 (7). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the operation example of an attacker at the time of winning special figure B by special figure 1. FIG. (A-1) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and (a-2) is an example of the third embodiment. FIG. 2 shows an example of the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine, and (b) is a diagram summarizing the actions of the attacker during the big hit game of the special figure 1, ( (c) is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 1, (d) is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 2. FIG. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the table used by a table set, (b) is a figure for demonstrating a timer number, (c) is the table set 1 in 3rd Embodiment. (D) is a figure for demonstrating the table set 2 in 3rd Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a flow of decorative symbol determination processing of the first sub-control unit 400. (A) is a figure which shows the jackpot decoration symbol determination table for special figure 1, (b) is a figure which shows the temporary stop symbol lottery table at the time of "333" "777" selection for special figure 1, (c ) Is a diagram showing a special symbol 2 jackpot decorative symbol determination table, and (d) is a diagram showing a temporary stop symbol lottery table when “333” and “777” are selected for special diagram 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the special figure 1 low probability notice lottery table, (b) is a figure which shows the special figure 2 high probability notice lottery table. (A) is a figure which shows the notice lottery table for special figure 2 low probability electric support, (b) is a figure which shows the notice lottery table for special figure 2 low probability. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100A of 4th Embodiment from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 51. 53 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 52. FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a concrete effect in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. 56 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 55. FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 56. It is a figure which shows the other example of production in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. 59 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 58. FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing another effect example that follows the specific effect example shown in FIG. 53. It is a figure which shows the other example of production in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. 62 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 61. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 62. FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing another effect example that follows the specific effect example shown in FIG. 53. It is a figure which shows the example of a concrete effect in the jackpot game of 15R jackpot of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 65. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 66. FIG. It is a figure which shows the table set selection table used in the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 1, (b), It is a figure which shows the table set selection table at the time of big hit in special figure 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the table set selection table used in the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the table set 1, (c) is a table set. (D) is a diagram for explaining the table set 3, (e) is a diagram for explaining the table set 4, and (f) is a table for explaining the table set 3. It is a figure for demonstrating the table used by a set. (A) is a figure which shows the table 6 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which makes a big hit, (b) is a figure which shows the table 6 for deciding the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost. (C) is a figure which shows the table 7 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which makes a big hit, (d) is the table 7 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes a loss. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon used for special figure 1 hold display, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon used for special figure 2 hold display. It is a figure showing the front of the attacker unit applied to the pachinko machine of 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the attacker unit shown in FIG. 72 from the back surface. It is a figure explaining the internal structure of a 2nd variable winning a prize mouth, Comprising: (a) shows that the V shutter is a closed state, (b) shows that the V shutter is an open state. ing. It is a timing chart which shows each operation timing of the 1st variable prize opening, the 2nd variable prize opening, and V shutter in the 1st round of a big hit game from the end to the end. It is a figure explaining the concept of the present invention. (A-1) is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment, (a-2) is the figure of 8th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in a pachinko machine, (b-1) is an example of the action | operation of the attacker in the big hit game of the special figure 1, and a big hit game It is the figure shown about the game state transferred later, (b-2) is the figure shown about the example of the action | operation of the attacker during the big hit game of the special figure 2, and the game state transferred after the big hit game. (A) is the figure which represented schematically the external appearance structure of the 1st variable winning opening 234a and the 2nd variable winning opening 235a, (b) is the 1st variable winning opening 234a and the 2nd variable winning opening 234a. It is the figure which represented schematically the internal structure of the winning opening 235a, (c) is a figure which represented that the V shutter 2352a is an open state, (d) is the V shutter 2352a. Is a diagram schematically showing that is closed, (e) is a diagram schematically showing the appearance of another embodiment of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is there. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing in the big hit game when special figure B is displayed in special figure 1 and the big hit (15R big hit) is made, and (b) is a special timing chart in FIG. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation timing in the big hit game when FIG. A is displayed and it becomes a big hit (16R special big hit), (c) is a special figure B in special figure 1 and a big hit (15R It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation timing in a big hit game when it becomes a big hit. (A) is a timing from when the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed until the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the next round. FIG. 6B is a timing chart showing a first example of the first variable winning opening 234a (second) in the next round after the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed. (C) is a second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in at least two rounds in the jackpot game. 12 is a timing chart for explaining an example of an opening / closing pattern of a second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) when the player opens / closes. It is a timing chart which shows an example of operation | movement from the start of the fluctuation | variation display of the special figure which becomes a big hit until the big hit game is complete | finished. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. (A-1) is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment, (a-2) is the figure of 9th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in a pachinko machine, (b-1) is an example of the action | operation of the attacker in the big hit game of the special figure 1, and a big hit game It is the figure shown about the game state transferred later, (b-2) is the figure shown about the example of the action | operation of the attacker during the big hit game of the special figure 2, and the game state transferred after the big hit game. (A) is a figure explaining each operation | movement of the 1st variable winning opening and 2nd variable winning opening in 4 rounds (substantially 3 rounds) jackpot, (b) is the 1st in 4 round special jackpots It is a figure explaining each operation | movement of a variable prize opening and a 2nd variable prize opening, (c) is a figure explaining each operation | movement of the 1st variable prize opening and the 2nd variable prize opening in 16 round special jackpots. (D) is a diagram for explaining each operation of the first variable winning award and the second variable winning award in 16 rounds (substantially 3 rounds) big hit. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in the jackpot game of 4R special jackpot. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. It is a figure which shows the other example of the specific example of an effect in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in the big hit game of 4R big hit (substantial 3R big hit). It is a figure which shows the other example of the specific example of an effect in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. (A-1) is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment, (a-2) is the figure of 10th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in a pachinko machine, (b-1) is an example of the action | operation of the attacker in the big hit game of the special figure 1, and a big hit game (B-2) is a diagram showing an example of the action of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG. 2, and the game state that is shifted after the jackpot game, (C) is a figure which shows an example of the operation | movement aspect of the attacker in the 14th round of the jackpot game to which special figure A is displayed and transferred in special figure 1. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the table set selection table used in the case of big hit in special figure 1, (b) is the table set selection table used in the case of big hit in special figure 1 It is a figure which shows the example of. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in the big hit game of 16R big hit (substantial 13R big hit). It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. (A) is a front view explaining an example of a start winning device, (b) is a perspective view explaining another example of a starting winning device, and (c) explains an example of a jackpot generating device. (D) is a figure explaining an example of the lamp module for performing the various displays controlled by the main control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a series of effects. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in the symbol fluctuation | variation used as big hit. It is a figure which shows the other example of the specific effect example in the symbol fluctuation | variation used as big hit. It is a figure which shows the specific example of an effect in jackpot game. It is a figure for demonstrating the visual recognition state in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of an operation in the case of releasing a long in all four consecutive rounds, and (b) is a long release only in the first round of the four consecutive rounds. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when short-opening in other rounds, and (c) is a probability change operation region solenoid set when a round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is released is started. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the period which is an operation | movement pattern of this, and a probability change operation area | region effective state. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of an operation in a case where only the second round of the four consecutive rounds is opened short and the other rounds are opened long, (b) is a continuous 4 It is a timing chart which shows an example of operation | movement in the case of releasing short only in the 2nd round of one round, and releasing long in other rounds. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation when the first attacker opens long in all two consecutive rounds, and (b) is the first of the three consecutive rounds. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when the first attacker opens long only in a round and the second attacker opens short in other rounds. (A) is a timing chart showing an operation in a case where a long release is performed in all four consecutive rounds, and (b) is a long release only in the first round of the four consecutive rounds. And it is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation | movement in the case of short open in other rounds. (A) is a timing chart which shows an example of operation | movement in a small hit game, (b) is a timing chart which shows an example of operation | movement in a big hit game. (A) shows an example of a special symbol jackpot stop symbol pattern and an action pattern of an attacker for each round in the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, and (b) shows a big prize opening (variable) in the jackpot game. An example of a specific operation pattern of (winning mouth) is shown. (A) shows an example of the effect pattern in the jackpot game executed with the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the effect content for each round. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. 116 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 116. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 118. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 120. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 14th embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. (A) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on process, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process. It is a flowchart of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of special drawing related lottery processing, and (b) is a flowchart of lottery processing per special drawing. It is a flowchart of the process during symbol variation. It is a flowchart of a special figure display confirmation weight process. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start wait process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special power release process. It is a flowchart of a special power combination operation process. It is a flowchart of a special power combination control process. (A) is a figure explaining the content of the special electric power role operation pattern data table, (b) is a figure explaining the content of the special electric power role operation | movement data table. It is a flowchart of a special electric role remaining sphere detection process. It is a flowchart of a special electric power operation end process. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. (A) is a flowchart of an effect control process executed in the first sub-control unit main process, (b) is a flowchart of an over winning sound output control process, and (c) is a flowchart of a winning number display control process. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on 14th Embodiment in steps. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of effects in another case stepwise following FIG. 156 (q). It is a timing chart explaining the operation from the start to the end of the big hit game. It is a timing chart explaining the operation timing of the 1st variable prize opening (1st attacker) and the 2nd variable prize opening (2nd attacker) in a big hit game. It is the figure which showed the mode of the big hit game in 15R probability variation big hit in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the jackpot game in 15R special jackpot shown in FIG. 160 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the jackpot game in 15R special jackpot shown in FIG. 161 in steps. It is a figure explaining the other display mode in jackpot game with 15R special jackpot, Comprising: It is the figure shown in steps about a mode that the number of winnings for every round is displayed. It is a figure explaining other display modes in the big hit game with 15R special big hit, and is a diagram showing step by step how to display according to the total number of game balls won from the start of the big hit game to the variable winning opening It is. It is a figure explaining the other display mode in the big hit game with 15R special big hit, Comprising: It is the figure which showed stepwise about a mode that the number of winnings for every round was displayed for every variable winning a prize mouth. It is a figure explaining another embodiment in the jackpot game with 15R special jackpot, and it is a figure showing in a stepwise manner how the first variable winning opening is won across rounds. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the jackpot game in the 15R special jackpot shown in FIG. 166 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the jackpot game in 15R special jackpot shown in FIG. 167 in steps. It is a figure explaining the other display mode in jackpot game, Comprising: It is the figure which showed the mode of the effect display performed whenever a game ball wins a variable winning opening. (K ') is a figure explaining the other display mode following FIG.169 (h), (l') is a figure explaining the other display mode following FIG.169 (h). It is a timing chart explaining the operation from the start to the end of the big hit game with 15R big hit (substantially 8R-RUB). It is the figure which showed the mode of the big hit game in 15R big hit (substantially 8R-RUB) in steps. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the continuation of the big hit game with 15R big hit (substantially 8R-RUB) shown in FIG. 172 in stages; It is a figure showing the front of the attacker unit applied to the pachinko machine concerning a 15th embodiment. 175 is a view of the attacker unit shown in FIG. 174 as viewed from the back. FIG. It is a figure explaining the internal structure of a 2nd variable prize opening, Comprising: (a) is a figure which shows that the V shutter is a closed state, (b) is that the V shutter is an open state. FIG. It is a timing chart explaining the operation timing of the 1st variable prize opening and the 2nd variable prize opening in the big hit game with 15R special big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in the pachinko machine which concerns on 15th Embodiment in steps. It is the figure which showed the mode of the big hit game in 15R special big hit in steps. It is a figure explaining an example of an over winning effect. It is a figure which shows the mode when there is a power failure recovery in a big hit game. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning a 16th embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the setting screen. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the structure of the usual drawing effect. (C)-(e) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of a setting screen and a usual drawing effect. (A) It is the time chart which showed the flow of the usual usual drawing effect. (B) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the sound output from a sound output means, a special figure change game, a general drawing effect, and a setting screen. (C) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of a special figure change game, a general drawing effect, and a setting screen. It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of a usual drawing effect and a setting screen. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the setting screen. It is the figure which showed an example of the usual drawing effect in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the usual drawing effect in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the usual drawing effect in the setting screen display in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the usual drawing effect in the setting screen display in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the usual drawing effect in the setting screen display in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the usual drawing effect in the setting screen display in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the movement aspect of (a)-(d) movable body. (E) It is the figure which showed the modification of the shape of a movable body. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the movement start opportunity of the movable body CB. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the movement start of the movable body CB. It is the time chart which showed an example of the movement timing of the movable body CB. It is the state transition diagram which showed an example of the operation state of a movable body. (A)-(k) It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the initial operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (L)-(p) It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the initial operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (A)-(k) It is the figure which showed the specific example 3 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (A)-(h) It is the figure which showed the specific example 4 of the initial stage operation | movement of a movable body in time series. (A)-(h) It is the figure which showed the specific example 5 of the initial operation | movement of a movable body in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the function of the operation means in each state. It is the figure which showed an example of the operation means. It is the figure which showed an example of the structure of an operation means. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the internal structure of the operation information storage area. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation information queue. It is the figure which showed the example of the function of the operation means in time series. It is the figure which showed the example of the function of the operation means in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of an operation means. It is the figure which showed an example of the display transition in (a-1)-(a-4) volume adjustment mode in time series. (B-1) It is the figure which showed an example of the menu screen. (B-2) It is the figure which showed an example of the customization screen. (C-1)-(c-2) It is the figure which showed the display transition at the time of transfering to a volume adjustment mode during the display of a menu screen in time series. (A-1)-(a-3) It is the figure which showed a mode that the door open sound was output after completion | finish of volume control mode in time series. (B-1)-(b-4) It is the figure which showed a mode that the door open sound was output in the volume adjustment mode in time series. (A-1)-(a-5) It is a figure for demonstrating the island simultaneous effect in volume adjustment. (B-1)-(b-4), (c-1)-(c-3) It is a figure for demonstrating the decoration design fluctuation | variation display during volume adjustment. It is a figure for demonstrating the universal drawing effect which concerns on a modification. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 17th embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is shown. (B) An example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is shown. (C) An example of a decorative design is shown. (D) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing only a main part of a basic circuit 302 extracted from a main control part 300. (A) It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU304. (B) It is the figure which showed the I / O map of CPU304. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initialization process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of main control part power-on. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a return starting process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an initial stage starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main loop process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command reception interruption process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of 1 ms timer interruption processing. (D) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 10 ms timer interruption process. (E) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a DMA interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a liquid-crystal control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a liquid-crystal control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a liquid crystal control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of VDP. It is a figure explaining the example of the flow of a series of effects when a special figure variable game is a big hit. It is a figure explaining the continuation of the example of the flow of a series of effects when a special figure variable game is a big hit. It is a figure explaining the example of the flow of a series of effects in case a special figure variable game is disjoint. It is the figure which showed the mode of 15R special jackpot game in steps. 237 is a diagram showing the continuation of the 15R special big hit game shown in FIG. 237 step by step. FIG. It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the various processes which the pachinko machine 100 performs after power activation. (A) It is the front view which showed a mode that the power-on alert | report is performed only with the game machine A of the some game machines A and B. FIG. (B) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the various processes after power activation in the game machines A and B. (A) It is the front view which showed a mode that several game machines A and B are performing power-on notification (power-on simultaneous notification) simultaneously. (B) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of various processes from power-on in the game machines A and B to power-on simultaneous notification. (A) It is the front view which showed a mode that several game machines A and B are performing the demonstration screen display (demonstration screen simultaneous display) simultaneously. (B) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the various processes from power-on in the game machines A and B to demo screen simultaneous display. (A) It is the front view which showed a mode that several game machines A and B are performing simultaneous island production. (B) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of various processes from power-on in the game machines A and B to island simultaneous production. It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of control of the various displays which the pachinko machine 100 performs after power activation. It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the various displays after power activation in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the various displays after power activation in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of the liquid crystal loading display in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of the liquid crystal loading display in time series. It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of control of how to notify. It is the figure which showed an example of the correspondence of a game state and a hitting notification. It is the figure which showed the specific example of how to alert | report in time series. It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow until the game machines C and D start an island simultaneous production. (A) It is the figure which showed typically the effect data which comprise an island simultaneous effect. (B) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the restart process of an island simultaneous effect. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of island simultaneous production in time series. It is the figure which showed the example of the restart process of the island simultaneous production in time series. (A) It is an example of the volume setting table which shows the setting value of the volume (sound pressure) of the sound output from the speaker 120. FIG. (B) It is a front view of the 1st output setting switch 190. FIG. (C) It is a front view of the 2nd output setting switch 194. FIG. It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the volume setting in special production (island simultaneous production) in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the volume setting in special production (island simultaneous production) in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 3 of the volume setting in special production (demonstration production) in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 4 of the volume setting in special production (Island simultaneous production) in time series. (A) It is a front view which expands and shows the setting operation part 195 demonstrated using FIG. It is a front view which expands and shows the power saving mode setting switch 195a arrange | positioned at the setting operation part 195. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the volume luminance setting table. (A)-(c) It is a front view which shows a mode that the light of different brightness | luminance was output from the light emission means of the game stand. It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the brightness | luminance setting in special production (Island simultaneous production) in time series. It is the figure which showed the continuation of the specific example 1 of the brightness | luminance setting in special production (Island simultaneous production) in time series. It is the figure which showed the continuation of the specific example 1 of the brightness | luminance setting in special production (Island simultaneous production) in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the brightness | luminance setting in the special effect (Island simultaneous effect) in power saving mode in time series. It is the figure which showed the continuation of the specific example 2 of the brightness | luminance setting in the special effect (Island simultaneous effect) in power saving mode in time series. It is the figure which showed the continuation of the specific example 2 of the brightness | luminance setting in the special effect (Island simultaneous effect) in power saving mode in time series. (A) It is the figure which showed the other example of the setting by the power saving mode setting switch 195a. (B) It is the figure which showed the other example of the volume adjustment screen. (C) It is the figure which showed in time series the example which can adjust brightness | luminance during island simultaneous production. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 3A is an external perspective view of an operation button unit provided in the slot machine 1000. FIG. (B) It is a top view of the operation button unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation in the display means which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation in the display means which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram of the effect means which can perform the production (production including production A and production B) concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the time measuring means which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a table which shows an example of the relation between execution of production A and production B concerning another embodiment of the present invention, and other functions. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the correspondence of the execution pattern of the production | presentation A by the production | presentation means which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and the production | presentation B. It is an outline figure showing an example of composition of production (production data) concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timetable which shows an example of production time of production A and B concerning one embodiment of the present invention, and production start time. It is an example of the time table in case the some production | presentation which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is set. It is a figure shown about production A and production B concerning one embodiment of the present invention, (a) and (b) are timing charts, and (c) is a time table. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the production | presentation which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and the display area which displays them. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the production | presentation which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and the display area which displays them. It is a figure explaining the display area D (Main display area D1, Sub display area D2) concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows an example of execution of production A and production B concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart showing an example of effects A and effects B according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows an example of execution of production A and production C concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows other examples of execution of production B, specific game state, and production C concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows other examples of execution of production B, specific game state, and production C concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows other examples of execution of production B, specific game state, and production C concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows an example of execution of production B, special game state, specific game state, and production C concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the other example of execution of the production | presentation B which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, a special game state, a specific game state, and the production C. It is a timing chart which shows the other example of execution of the production | presentation B which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, a special game state, a specific game state, and the production C. It is a timing chart which shows the execution example in the case of performing the effect A and the effect B which concern on one Embodiment of this invention simultaneously. It is a timing chart which shows the other execution example in the case of producing simultaneously the effect A and the effect B which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the other execution example in the case of producing simultaneously the effect A and the effect B which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the effect (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the effect (effects B and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed other examples of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed other examples of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects B and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of the production | presentation (effects A and C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the example of a display of the production (production A, production B) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the other example of a display (effect A, effect C) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an external appearance perspective view which shows an example of simultaneous production by the movable body 224 which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed an example of the game island provided in the game store, and simultaneous production. It is the figure which showed an example of the game island provided in the game store, and simultaneous production. It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning a 19th embodiment from the back side. (A)-(e) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st output setting switch and the 2nd output setting switch. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. 3 is a block diagram showing peripheral circuits of a sound control circuit 431 and a lamp control circuit 420 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. (A) It is the block diagram which extracted and showed the various circuits (sound control related circuit) used for sound control among the circuits which comprise the above-mentioned 1st sub-control part 400. FIG. (B) It is the block diagram which showed an example of the connection of the reset signal line of a sound control related circuit. It is the block which showed the modification of the connection of a reset signal line. (A) It is a block diagram which shows the sound control circuit 431 schematically. (B) It is a block diagram which shows roughly the various processes in the reproduction sound output setting of the sound control circuit 431. (A) An example of a memory map of the control RAM provided in the sound control circuit 431 is shown. (B) It is the figure which showed the corresponding relationship of a channel 1 * control RAM-channel 32 * control RAM, and a channel. (C) It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the use of a channel and a sound. (D) It is an example of a sound list. It is an example of production execution timing data. It is an example of ramp data. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the brightness | luminance control of a lamp (LED). (B) It is a figure explaining the duty ratio of LED. (A) It is an example of sound selection data. (B) An example of the waveform of the sound data amplified by the amplifier circuit 442 is shown. (A) It is a table | surface which shows an example of the setting value of the volume (sound pressure) of the sound output from the speaker 120, and the brightness | luminance of various lamps 418. FIG. (B) It is the table which showed an example of the use. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the brightness | luminance. It is the figure which showed the relationship between the brightness | luminance of a lamp | ramp, and time. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a command reception interruption process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of 1 ms timer interruption processing. (D) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 10 ms timer interruption process. (E) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a DMA interruption process. (A) It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the player setting screen display process. (B) It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the sound control loop process. (C) It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the sound driver process. (A) It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the volume switch process. (B) It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the volume value change process. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the administrator setting value control process. 4 is a time chart showing the relationship between a special figure variation display by the main control unit 300 and a decorative symbol variation display by the first sub-control unit 400; (A) It is the figure which showed Example 1 of the display timing of a special figure fluctuation display and a demonstration screen. (B) It is the figure which showed Example 2 of the display timing of a special figure fluctuation display and a demonstration screen. (C) It is the figure which showed the example which displays a setting screen before the demonstration screen display of Example 1. FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed the example which displays a setting screen during the demonstration screen display of Example 1, and interrupts demonstration screen display. (B) It is the figure which showed the example which displays a setting screen, without interrupting a demonstration screen display during the demonstration screen display of Example 1. FIG. (C) It is the figure which showed the example which displays a setting screen, without interrupting demonstration screen display just before the end of demonstration screen display of Example 1. FIG. (A) It is the time chart which showed the example in which volume adjustment was not performed before the special figure fluctuation display was started. (B) (c) It is the time chart which showed the example in which volume adjustment was performed before the special figure fluctuation display was started. (A) It is the time chart which showed the example in which volume adjustment was performed before the special figure fluctuation display was started. (B) It is the time chart which showed the example in which volume adjustment was performed during the display of the setting screen. (C) It is the time chart which showed the example by which the setting screen display was forcibly terminated. (A) It is the time chart which showed the example by which the setting screen display was forcibly terminated. (B) It is the time chart which showed the example which another event generate | occur | produced before completion | finish of a setting screen. (A), (b) It is the time chart which showed the example in which the setting screen was displayed during the demonstration and volume adjustment was performed. (C) It is the time chart which showed the example which another event generate | occur | produced before completion | finish of the setting screen in demonstration. (A), (b) It is the time chart which showed the example which changed the volume on the setting screen in demonstration. (C) A time chart when an error occurs. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition until it displays a volume adjustment screen and a brightness adjustment screen in time series. It is the figure which showed the volume adjustment example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the volume adjustment example 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed volume adjustment example 3 in time series. It is the figure which showed volume adjustment example 3 in time series. It is the figure which showed volume adjustment example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed volume adjustment example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed volume adjustment example 5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the volume adjustment example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the volume adjustment example 7 in time series. It is the figure which showed the volume adjustment example 8 in time series. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the demonstration display in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed the example which performs a demonstration display from the beginning after volume adjustment. (C) It is the figure which showed the example which performs a demonstration display from the middle after volume adjustment. (A) It is an example of the production mode selection screen for making a specific production mode select from several production modes. (B) It is an example of a member menu related screen for inputting a password for authenticating login. (C) This is an example in which an error display is superimposed and displayed on at least a part of an image constituting the volume adjustment screen. The circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 20th embodiment is shown. A part of the circuit block diagram of the control unit is extracted and shown. 1A is a front view of a pachinko machine 100. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the movable body. It is the time chart which showed the pattern of execution time of the 1st operation and the 2nd operation. It is a time chart which showed an example of the initial operation of a movable body. (A) It is the time chart which showed an example of the normal operation | movement of a movable body. (B) It is the time chart which showed an example of the return operation | movement of a movable body. It is a time chart which showed an example of operation of a movable body. It is the time chart which showed an example of operation | movement of a movable body and a light output means. It is a time chart which showed an example of operation of a movable body and a display means. It is a time chart which showed an example of operation of a movable body and a display means. It is the time chart which showed an example of operation | movement of the movable body and light output means in return operation | movement. It is the time chart which showed an example of the relationship between operation | movement data and operation | movement. It is the time chart which showed an example of the relationship between operation | movement data and operation | movement. It is the time chart which showed an example of the some operation | movement by a display means. It is the figure which showed the operation example 1 of the movable body in the prefetch effect in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation example 2 of the movable body in the prefetch effect in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation example 3 of the movable body in the prefetch effect in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of production in the case where the start condition of island simultaneous production is not satisfied in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation in case the start condition of an island simultaneous production was satisfied in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the initial operation | movement of the movable body after power activation in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the return operation | movement of the movable body in the case of a symbol fluctuation stop in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the return operation | movement of the movable body based on opening of a front frame door in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation operation | movement 1 of the movable body in the time of symbol fluctuation | variation display in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation operation | movement 2 of the movable body in a pattern fluctuation display in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation operation | movement 3 of the movable body in the design fluctuation display in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation operation | movement of the movable body based on operation by an operation means in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation operation | movement of the movable body based on a start opening prize in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification of the movable body. It is the figure which showed the production | presentation operation | movement of the movable body in time series when the return operation | movement of a movable body is completed during a pattern fluctuation stop. It is the figure which showed the production | presentation operation | movement of the movable body in time series when the return operation | movement of a movable body is completed during a pattern fluctuation stop. It is the figure which showed the production | presentation operation | movement of the movable body in time series when the return operation | movement of a movable body is completed during a pattern fluctuation stop. It is the figure which showed the production | presentation operation | movement of the movable body at the time series when the return operation | movement of a movable body was not completed during the symbol fluctuation stop. It is the figure which showed the production | presentation operation | movement of the movable body at the time series when the return operation | movement of a movable body was not completed during the symbol fluctuation stop. (A-1)-(f-1) It is the figure which showed the production | presentation operation | movement of the movable body at the time series when the return operation | movement of a movable body was completed during the symbol fluctuation stop. (A-2)-(h-2) It is the figure which showed the production | presentation operation | movement of the movable body in time series when the return operation | movement of a movable body was not completed during the symbol fluctuation stop. (A-1)-(f-1) It is the figure which showed the production | presentation operation | movement of the movable body in jackpot game in time series. (A-2)-(f-2) It is the figure which showed the operation | movement of the movable body at the time series when a power failure and a power recovery generate | occur | produce during a big hit game. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation operation | movement after the return operation | movement of the movable body based on opening of a front frame door in time series. It is the figure which showed in a time series an example of the production | presentation operation | movement of a movable body based on the start opening prize during the return operation | movement of a movable body. It is the figure which showed in a time series an example of the return operation | movement of a movable body based on opening of the front frame door during production operation. It is drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of this invention. It is drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of this invention. It is drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the sound production in 21st Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the other example of the sound production in this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the sound production by the 1st production to the 3rd production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the sound production by the 4th production and the 5th production. It is a figure which shows the other example of the 4th effect started based on the time information of RTC. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the animation of the production | presentation mode which is selected in the production | presentation mode display apparatus 208 after selecting production | presentation mode after turning on a power supply. 406 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of FIG. 406. FIG. 407 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of FIG. 407. FIG. 408 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of FIG. 408. It is a figure which shows the modification of the selection effect after FIG. 409 (k). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in a big hit game. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect in a big hit game. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation based on the time information of RTC. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the operation related to the effect B after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine. It is a figure explaining the specific effect example of the effect B as an example of the link effect in this embodiment. FIG. 415 is a diagram showing a continuation of a specific effect example of effect B shown in FIG. 415. FIG. 417 is a diagram showing a continuation of a specific effect example of the effect B shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the some pachinko machine A and B which are the electric support states are synchronizing and performing the link effect. (A) is a timing chart showing the execution example of the production B, (b) is a timing chart showing the second embodiment showing the execution state of the production B. (A) is a timing chart showing the execution example of the production B, (b) is a timing chart showing the fourth embodiment showing the execution state of the production B, (c) is 12 is a timing chart illustrating a fifth example illustrating an execution state of effect B. FIG. (A) is a timing chart showing the execution example of effect B, and (b) is a timing chart showing the seventh example showing the execution state of effect B. (A) is a timing chart showing the execution example of effect B, and (b) is a timing chart showing the ninth example showing the execution state of effect B. (A) is a timing chart showing the tenth example showing the execution state of effect B, (b) is a timing chart showing the eleventh example showing the execution state of effect B. It is a timing chart explaining operation | movement accompanying progress of a game. (A) is a front view of the pachinko machine 100 of another example, (b) is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 shown in (a). It is a conceptual diagram which shows the example of a data structure for performing the production | presentation operation | movement by the movable body which concerns on the production B, (a) shows a 1st data structure example, (b) shows a 2nd data structure example. , (C) shows a third data configuration example. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. (A) shows an example of the special symbol jackpot stop symbol mode and the action pattern of the attacker for each round in the pachinko machine of the 23rd embodiment, and (b) shows a big prize opening (variable) in the jackpot game An example of a specific operation pattern of (winning mouth) is shown. It is a figure explaining typically the shape and arrangement of a variable prize opening. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine which concerns on 24th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the following description, a pachinko machine will be described as an example, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

[First Embodiment]
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player Built in the ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a player's balance of the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying a player's balance and card unit status are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided. In the present embodiment, a setting switch 161 is provided on the first sub-board 160. The setting switch 161 is, for example, a dial-type switch, and can start various settings related to effects according to the position of the dial.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol display device (hereinafter referred to as a “first special symbol display device”) around it. 212, a second special symbol display device (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second special symbol display device") 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, 2 A special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are examples of symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be an example of a symbol display unit.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of first variable games that are on hold (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, a general figure variable game) is displayed. 4). In the following description, “lamp” is an example of light emitting means, and various light emitting devices such as LEDs and EL can be applied to the light emitting means.

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of second variable games that are held (detailed variable games to be described later in detail). It is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). Here, the term “hold” means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery process) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, there are a general winning opening 226, a general opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting port 232, a first variable winning opening 234, and the like around the effect device 206. A second variable winning opening 235 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change. Such a first special figure starting port 230 may be referred to as a second region.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed below the first special figure starting port 230. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the center of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. This corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip. The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Such a second special figure starting port 232 may be referred to as a second region.

  In the present embodiment, only one first variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, only one second variable winning opening 235 is disposed obliquely downward to the right of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning award 235 may be referred to as a first area. Both the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 include a variable winning opening and a door member that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening is sometimes called an attacker. Accordingly, the first variable winning opening 234 includes the first variable winning opening and the first door member 2341, and is a first attacker. The second variable winning opening 235 includes the second variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening. 2nd door member 2351, and is a 2nd attacker. Hereinafter, when the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are described without particular distinction, the variable winning opening (234, 235), the variable winning opening, the door member (2341), or the like. , 2351) or an attacker. The door member (2341, 2351) changes its state from either one of the closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable prize opening than the closed state. . Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state at the variable winning opening (234, 235) of the present embodiment is that the door members (2341, 2351) are closed. The game board 200 is in a stationary state that matches the surface of the player side. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and in the open state at the variable winning opening (234, 235) of the present embodiment, the door members (2341, 351) are substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is a stationary state rotated to the player side. The variable winning opening (234, 235) is kept closed until the jackpot game to be described later is started, and the first variable winning opening 234 is in the open state and the closed state in rounds 14 to 14 of the jackpot game. The state change is repeated, and the second variable winning opening 235 is still in the closed state. When the big hit game enters the 15th round, the second variable winning opening 235 repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state for 15 rounds. On the other hand, during the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 234 is kept closed. In other words, the first variable winning opening 234 can be won in the first period during the jackpot game (here, the period from 1 round to 14 rounds), and the second variable winning opening 235 is in the jackpot game. It is possible to win in the second period (here, a period of 15 rounds). Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter the game ball, in addition to the completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening (234, 235), the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. To do. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening (234, 235) is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening (234, 235)) ) Or the start opening (the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232), without winning any of the winning openings or start openings, or only passing through the ordinary start opening 228 To reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative design display device 208, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the production means, and among these, the decorative design display device 208 is the production display means. It corresponds to an example.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 A payout control unit 600 that mainly performs control related to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are: The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means. Each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 includes a plurality of boards (for example, a plurality of control boards, one or more relay boards, and one or more control boards). It may be constituted by. Further, when the combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is regarded as sub-control means, in the pachinko machine 100 described here, the main control unit 300 and sub-control means (first sub-control) Unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500) are provided on separate boards, and the boards are directly connected by electric signal lines, but the electric signals between these boards are further connected by another relay board. The transmission / reception may be relayed.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing Yes. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, various data representing predetermined information and the like are stored in the ROM 306 for each address, and when referred to as a table in the following description, a condition for determining which address in the ROM 306 is designated is displayed in a table format. May refer to a summary. The same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random value generation circuits). 1), the main body opening sensor 1041, the front frame door sensor 1061, the door sensor with ball storage tray 1082, and the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and disturbs the result of amplification and comparison with reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a drive circuit for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 24, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected to this.

  The main control unit 300 is a game control unit that performs game control, and includes a success / failure determination unit, a start information prefetching unit, and a prior determination unit, which will be described later.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, the general winning opening 226, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the first variable winning opening 234, and the second variable winning prize. A sensor that detects a sphere that has won a predetermined winning opening such as the mouth 235, or a sensor that detects a sphere that passes through the normal start opening 228 can be given.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is a one-way communication. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 detects a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. A chance button detection sensor 426 and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 are connected.

  Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The sub-control unit that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives a command signal from the main control unit 300 that is a game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device The effect means such as 208 is controlled.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and awards based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be stopped will be described.

  Fig.5 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 1. FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). 1 variation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “fluctuation display of special figure 1” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special figure 1 may be referred to as the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  Fig.5 (a-2) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2. FIG. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” (special figure). 2 variation games). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation in the special figure 2 has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “fluctuation display of special figure 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special figure 2 may be referred to as the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 5 (a-1) and FIG. 5 (a-2), six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In both FIG. 5A-1 and FIG. 5A-2, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

  In this embodiment, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 are common. However, the special figure 2 has more advantageous game characteristics than the special figure 1, and in the special figure 2, the big hit symbols are all 15 round (R) special big hits. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" are 15R special big hits, and "Special Figure C" and "Special Figure D" are 14R special big hits.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In this embodiment, the number of operations of the variable prize opening (234, 235) is represented, and the 15th round is one or more opening / closing operations of the first variable prize opening 234 (one operation). After this operation is continued 14 times, one or more opening / closing operations of the second variable prize opening 235 are performed once (one operation), and this operation is performed once. 15 rounds means that one or more opening / closing operations of the first variable prize opening 234 is one time (one operation), and after this operation has continued 14 times, one or more times of the second variable prize opening 235 is performed. This means that this opening / closing operation is performed once (one operation). Each round is one of a predetermined round end condition (for example, entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. Or the process ends. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit or the short time big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit or short time big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  In the present embodiment, in the special figure 2, when the big win symbol (special figures A to D) is stopped and displayed and the second variable prize opening 235 which is in the open state (for example, the open state for 30 seconds) at the 15th R is won, After the big hit game ends, the control state becomes a special figure high probability state. If the second variable winning opening 235 is not won at 15R, the control state remains in the special figure low probability state after the big hit game ends. That is, it can be said that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs the transition to the special figure high probability state by a structure such as the second variable winning opening 235. That is, in the present embodiment, for example, there is a case where the probability variable function operating region is inside the second variable winning opening 235 and the probability variable function operating region is called a high probability variation determining region switch (or “probability changing region switch”). ) And the pachinko machine 100 is disclosed that shifts to the special figure high probability state on condition that the game ball passes to the high probability variation determination area switch. Furthermore, in the high probability variation determination region valid state set while the second variable winning opening 235 is in the open state, the state shifts to a special high probability state on condition that the game ball passes to the high probability variation determination region switch. You may make it do. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, "Special figure A" or "Special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and the special figure high probability state is entered after the big hit game is completed on condition that the second variable winning opening 235 of the 15R is won. "Special figure C" or "Special figure D" is a 14R big hit, and since there is no 15R, it does not become a special figure high probability state and remains in a special figure low probability state. In other words, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the 15th round jackpot is a jackpot that gives the right to shift to a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and is the second variable prize opening that is opened only at the 15th round. On condition that 235 is won, the game shifts to the special figure high probability state after the big hit game.

  The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game is finished is sometimes referred to as a special figure probability change. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state or simply a probability variation. In this embodiment, in the case of jackpot with probability change, after the jackpot game ends, while the symbol variation display is performed 100 times, the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) is maintained, and the 101st time is a non-probability variation state. (Special figure low probability state) The probability variation state may be maintained until the next big hit.

  In the present specification, description will be made using a term indicating a state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) as a control state, but the term “control state” includes a concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the big hit is won, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). In the electric support state, after the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game is finished, the symbol change display is performed 100 times in the case of a big hit with probability variation, and the symbol variation display of 50 times in the case of a big hit without probability variation. This is a predetermined state that is maintained while the player is performing and the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 is opened three times in the electric support state (for example, 3 to open for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chow releases. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a predetermined number of the variable winning holes (234, 235) during the big hit game and a large amount at the second special figure start opening 232 until the game ball enters. In order to solve this problem, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during the big hit increases the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit and the gambling is increased. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state.

  In the present embodiment, in the special figure 2, the jackpot symbol (special symbols A to D) is stopped and displayed, and when the second variable prize opening 235 which is opened at the 15th R is won, the symbol 100 times after the big hit game ends. While the variable display is performed, the probability change state and the electric support state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) are maintained, and the 101st time the non-probable state and the non electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). ), And if the second variable prize opening 235 is not won at 15R, the electric support state (normal figure high probability) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times in the non-probability change state after the big hit game ends. State) is maintained, and the 51st operation shifts to a non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state). As described above, in the present embodiment, the first condition is always easily established when a big hit is made in the variable game of FIG.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 1, “special figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed on the condition that the 15R second variable prize opening 235 is won, and after the big hit game is finished, 100 symbol variation displays are displayed. While being performed, the probability change state and the electric support state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) are maintained, and the 101st transition to the non-probability change state and the non electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) However, if there is no winning in the second variable winning opening 235 at 15R, the electric support state (ordinary figure) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times in the non-probability changing state after the big hit game is finished. The high probability state) is maintained, and the 51st operation shifts to the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state). Also, in the special figure 1, when “Special figure C” or “Special figure D” is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game is finished, the symbol change display is performed while 50 symbols change display is performed in the non-probable state. The state (normal high probability state) is maintained, and the 51st shift to the non-electric support state (normal low probability state).

  In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  In the present embodiment, a small hit is not prepared, but a small hit may be prepared. In this small hit, during the small hit game, the first door member 2341 of the first variable prize winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the first door member 2341 operates once. The open state is maintained for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. In opening the first door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is obtained. Once acquired, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

  In the big hit game, the variable winning opening (234, 235) is opened, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  In this embodiment, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. The special figure E shown in FIG. 5 (a-1) and FIG. 5 (a-2) is the first lose symbol, and the special figure F is the second lose symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door members (2341, 2351) of the variable prize opening (234, 235) are not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. In addition, a losing symbol (for example, a third losing symbol, etc.) other than “Special E” and “Special F” may be prepared. In this embodiment, the losing symbol includes a plurality of types of symbols. It is a waste.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hit control state of the second advantage with a high advantage of the player and the first advantage with a lower advantage than the second advantage. A loss control state is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 takes either one of a hit control state (second control state) and a loss control state (first control state). The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, other symbols corresponding to “Special Figure A” are prepared, and the same applies to other symbols such as “Special Figure B”.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are notifying means for informing the determination result (lottery result), and the pattern mode ( This corresponds to an example of symbol display means for performing symbol variation display until the special symbols A to F) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying 14R big hit (normal big hit) or 15R special big hit (big hit with probability variation), “decorative combination 1” (for example, “decoration 1” in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 1-Decoration 1 "and" Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. Further, “decoration pattern combination 2” (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”) in which the same three odd-numbered ornamental symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Etc.) is stopped, the 15R special big hit (big hit with probability variation) is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol combination 2 corresponds to a second combination. Further, the combination of the decorative symbols 1 other than the decorative symbol combination 2 corresponds to the first combination.

  It should be noted that the stop symbol mode (see FIGS. 5A-1 and 5A-2) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the left middle right of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. The decorative pattern (see FIG. 5B) is larger in the stop pattern mode (see FIG. 5B) of one decorative pattern to be performed.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (2nd symbol mode). In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general diagram B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are illuminated.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a jackpot special figure 1 random number counter, a lost special figure 1 random number counter, and a counter for these counters in the special figure 2. In addition, the RAM 308 stores the special figure 1 holding number, the special figure 1 winning random value, the jackpot special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, the special figure 1 success / failure determination result, the special figure 1 determination result, The special figure 1 variation time, and the number of reservations, the random number value, and the result for special figure 2 are stored. In addition, the RAM 308 has a separate storage section divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 separately. ing. As will be described later, the reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 includes 5 of special figure 1 winning random number value, jackpot special figure 1 random value, loss special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variation time determining random value. One random number value is set as one set, and these five random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation permission and initial value setting are performed. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, four initial value generating random number counters for generating initial values of the regular winning random number counter, the big hit special figure random value counter, and the lost special figure random value counter, Three random number counters for generating the normal timer random number value, the special figure 1 variation time determination random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random numbers is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232 It is determined that there has been a ball entry or a normal start port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 234, 230 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Special-purpose timer random numbers, jackpot special figure 1 random value, lose special figure 1 random value, special figure 1 variation time determining random value, jackpot special figure 2 random value, lose special figure 2 random value, and special figure 2. Update a random number counter for generating each random time value for determining the variation time. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random value related to the special figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value related to the special figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning holes 234, 230 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, if there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of special figure 1 variable games on hold is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment), a predetermined Get startup information. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the special figure 1 winning random number value, the jackpot special figure 1 random value, the loss special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 variation time determining random value are acquired. The special figure 1 winning random value acquired here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the jackpot special figure 1 random value, the loss special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 variation time determining random value are values obtained by processing software random numbers derived from the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software Random number value + R register value + 1). The combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing generates and derives start information, and start information deriving means This corresponds to an example of (first start information deriving means, second start information deriving means). The various random number values (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of FIG. The The special storage unit of FIG. 1 stores the start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The first start-up information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage section and the temporary area shown in FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of holdings in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit. As for special figure 2, each random value which is starting information is acquired similarly to special figure 1, and the acquired random number value is similarly stored as a set of starting information in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. In addition, 1 is added to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 stores the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to a possible second starting information storage means. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area in FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment), the general map at that timing is used. The value of the random number counter for generating the winning random number is acquired as the starting winning random number value which is the starting information, and stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 different from that for the special drawing. In this winning acceptance process, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to win (winning) the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, or the variable winning port (234, 235). Sphere) is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the variable prize opening (234 235), winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) is set.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability variation flag. When a winning (winning) of the second variable winning opening 235 is detected, the probability variation flag is set to ON. In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag is not set to ON and remains off unless a winning (entrance) of the second variable winning opening 235 is detected.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the start information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 in this way corresponds to an example of a variable start region control unit that performs variable start region control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal operation is not set, and no signal is sent to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232. Is not output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321, and it is closed in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area, set “Normal” inactive. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  Subsequently, in the step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. Make a hit determination (determining whether or not to win a normal figure).

  FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a common figure determination high probability table, and FIG. 8B is a figure showing a common figure determination low probability table. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains the normal winning random number value, it refers to the short time flag, and if the short time flag is on, it is in a high probability state, and therefore the normal winning random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 99) is derived as a universal figure determination result based on which random number range in the general figure determination high probability table shown in FIG. The hit probability in the usual high probability state is 99/100. The hit probability in the normal high probability state may be 100%.

  On the other hand, if the time flag is off, it is a normal low probability state. In this embodiment, the hit probability in the normal low probability state is 1/100. In the ordinary low probability state, the loss may be 100%. In such a case, in the ordinary low probability state (non-electric support state), the electric chew may not be released and a random lottery may be performed. It does not have to be done.

  As a result of the general drawing lottery, when winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the determination of whether or not the normal figure is determined, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random number described above is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of values are determined based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time to display the variable map on the general map display device 210 is selected from the variable time, and this variable display time is stored in the general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. . Note that the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the general figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308. A value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. In addition, the random number value that is used for determining whether or not it is normal is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. This special figure prefetch process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225), Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure in the special figure related lottery process to be described later Based on the determination result (stop pattern mode of the special figure), the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set to represent. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs a fixed display of any one of the special symbols shown in FIG. 5A-2. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player.

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S233) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the 15R big hit flag is turned on. When the 15R jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 Is set in the setting area of the special figure 2 and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, waiting for a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In order to do this, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the first variable winning opening 234 detects the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) (to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332 of the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234). In addition, a signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the first door member 2341 of the first variable prize winning opening 234, and the door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 is managed. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, after the opening / closing control of the first door member 2341 is repeated 14 times (for 14 rounds), a predetermined number of balls (for example, 30 seconds or the second variable prize opening 235, for example) A signal for holding the second door member 2351 in an open state to the solenoid (332) for driving to open and close the second door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235) And information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Next, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the second door member 2351 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the second door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235, and the door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 is managed. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the timer. Thus, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts after performing the opening / closing control of the second door member 2351 once (for one round), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display device Information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by 208 is to be ended is displayed. To do. In the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 performs the special electric operation while the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 (which may be referred to as special electric accessories) are open. A bonus release signal is output. Further, the special electric combination actuating signal is output during the opening of the special electric combination and during the closing period described above. The special electric accessory actuating signal is output in an effective period for processing the winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 in the closing period, instead of the closing period described above. You may comprise. In the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs an accessory continuous operation signal during the execution of the big hit game. That is, it can be said that the jackpot game is being executed while the accessory continuous operation signal is being output. These output signals may be output to an external hall computer via the information output circuit 336, may be output from a test output port, or output information. It may be output from both the circuit 336 and the test output port.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the opening / closing state of the door members (2341, 2351) of the variable winning opening (234, 235) during the big hit gaming state. It corresponds to. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members (2341, 2351) of the variable prize opening (234, 235), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 receives a special drawing from the ROM 306. An open / close pattern corresponding to the determination of whether or not the variable game is successful is acquired.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a winning (winning) of the second variable winning opening 235 is detected, the probability variation flag is set to ON. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag in addition to the probability variation flag. Further, the RAM 308 is also provided with a number storage unit. In the present embodiment, the time reduction flag is set to ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game. If the probability variation flag is set to ON, 100 is set in the number storage unit, and if the probability variation flag remains OFF, the power support count is set to 50 in the number storage unit. It should be noted that 100 times may be set in the number-of-times storage unit at the stage where the winning (winning) of the second variable winning opening 235 is detected. Also, the winning flag is turned on when a winning at the second variable winning opening 235 is detected, and the probability variation flag is set to ON on condition that the winning flag is turned on at the end of the big hit game. You may do it. Further, in this embodiment, after the big hit game is over, when shifting to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the control state continues until the symbol variation display of 100 times is performed, and the special figure low probability In the case of transition to the normal figure high probability state, the control state continues until the symbol variation display of 50 times is performed. Even when transitioning to the low probability normal pattern high probability state, for example, the symbol variation display count that the control state continues is set to the same number in any control state, for example, it is continued until 100 symbol variation displays are performed. May be.

  When a value is set in the number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 subtracts 1 from the value if the value is 1 or more, and the subtraction result is 1 to 0. If it becomes, the time reduction flag is turned off. If the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation flag is also turned off when the subtraction result in the number storage unit is changed from 1 to 0.

  Also during the big hit game, the probability variation flag and the hourly flag are turned off. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state (second control state).

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is 15R special big hit, the 15R big hit flag is turned on, and if the result is 14R big hit, the 14R big hit flag is turned on. When the 15R jackpot flag is on, the process is the same as the process described in the special figure 2 state update process described above, in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”.

  On the other hand, when the 14R big hit flag is on, the opening / closing control of the second door member 2351 at the second variable winning opening 235 is not performed, and the opening / closing of the first door member 2341 at the first variable winning opening 234 is not performed. After performing the closing control, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the same control as that described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed. Therefore, the probability variation flag remains off and the time reduction flag is set to on, but the number of times of electric support is set to 50 in the number storage unit.

  The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229)), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)). Do. As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), so that the first special figure start port 230 can be operated at the same timing. When starting information is acquired based on a game ball entering and starting information is acquired based on a game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, or a special figure 2 variable game start condition Even if the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game is satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is first Therefore, the special figure 1 variable game does not start to change. That is, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs special figure 2 priority fluctuation, and the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure start port 232 (determination of special figure 2) is determined as the first special figure start. This is prioritized over a lottery based on winning a prize in the mouth 230 (a determination of success / failure in FIG. 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random number value is stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum hold number, and the second special start area In the case where a game ball is won, the winning random number storage area stores up to the maximum number of reserved random numbers in the second random number value storage area, and both the first random number value storage area and the second random number value storage area When a random number value is stored, the random number value is stored in the first random value storage area and the random number value is stored in the second random value storage area regardless of the stored random number value. The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the second random value storage area, the random value is not stored in the first random value storage area, and the second random value storage area If a random value is stored in the second random number The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the value storage area, the random value is not stored in the second random value storage area, and the random value is stored in the first random value storage area. In the case where it is determined, a determination unit is provided for determining whether or not it is correct based on the random number value stored in the first random value storage area. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. Based on the determination result, the start information of FIG. 1 is used as the start information in which the determination result is not performed. In the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 of the start information of the special figure 2 remains, and the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly stored start of the special figure 2 The notification of the result of the determination based on the information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination based on the startup information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means. It should be noted that the special figure 2 related lottery process is performed first after the special figure 2 state update process of step S225, and then the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 is performed, and then the special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. It may be. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs the special figure 2 priority fluctuation, but it is determined whether or not the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are awarded according to the winning order (winning). (Forward fluctuation) may be performed. For example, when winning in the order of the second special figure starting port 232, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, the pachinko machine 100 that changes the winning order changes the special figure 2 The determination is made in the order of determination of success / failure determination of FIG.

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the execution of the success / failure determination (lottery) for the special figure 2, determination of the special figure to be stopped, and determination of the variation time are performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. In the special figure 2 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this determination, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is displaying the special figure variation or the stop display, and if any one is being displayed, the main controller timer interrupt processing is performed. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt Returning to the processing, if the special figure is not in operation, it is determined that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. The determination as to whether or not the game is successful is determined by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable game held is larger than zero. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the start information stored most recently from the holding storage unit of FIG. Random value for set (Special figure 2 winning random value, Special figure 2 random value for jackpot, Special figure 2 random value for lost, and Special figure 2 variable time determining random value) is taken out and stored in its reserved storage The start information (a set of random values) that has been stored is transferred from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 winning random value, the jackpot special figure 2 random value, the lost special figure 2 random value, and the special figure 2 variable time determining random number value) The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the process of taking out) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  FIG. 8C is a diagram showing a high / bad determination table, and FIG. 8D is a low probability table for determination. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag. If the probability variation flag is on, the special diagram high probability state is obtained. Based on which random number range in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 10 (c) belongs to the numerical range to be obtained, “big hit” or “lost” To derive. The big hit probability in the special figure high probability state is 1 / 65.536.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it is in the special figure low probability state. Therefore, based on which random number range in the special figure 2 winning random number table shown in FIG. Then, “big hit” or “losing” is derived as the result of the special figure 2 determination. The big hit probability in the special figure low probability state is 1 / 262.144.

  Next, the symbol of the special figure 2 is determined based on the special figure 2 determination result.

  FIG. 8E shows a special figure determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the special figure determination table, a random number range corresponding to the stop pattern form of the special figure (see FIG. 5A-2) is defined for each success / failure determination result.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, if the special figure 2 determination result is a big hit, the special figure 2 random number value for big hit (taken out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308. The numerical value range to be obtained is 0 to 99), it is determined which random number range of the jackpot the result of determination of the success / failure in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure D” are determined. All random number ranges are 25%, and the distribution probability is the same. The distribution probability may be different for each symbol.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 win / fail judgment is a loss, the special figure 2 random value for the loss (a numerical value range that can be taken is 0 to 0) among the random values for one set previously acquired from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308. 99) determines which random number range out of the misses the result of determination of the success / failure in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. Determine “Special Figure F”. The special figure 2 decision result decided here is information representing the symbol form of special figure 2 to be stopped and displayed by the second special figure display device 214.

  Deriving “big hit” or “losing” may be determined as the success / failure determination, but determining the special symbol of the stop symbol form may also be determined as the success / failure determination.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation time (special symbol 2 variation time) in the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is determined based on the special symbol 2 determination result. First, the special symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231) is determined here. The determination of FIG. 1 determination result and the special figure 1 to be stopped will be described.

  First, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, one set of random values (special figure 1 winning random number value, jackpot special figure 1 random value, loss special figure 1 random value, And a special figure 1 variation time determination random number value) are taken out, based on one set of random values (starting information), execution / non-use determination (lottery) for special figure 1 and determination of special figure to be stopped and displayed I do. In the execution of the appropriateness determination, the appropriateness determination table shown in FIG. 8C and FIG. 8D is used, and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. In the case of special figure 1, special figure A and special figure B are big hits of 15 rounds, and there is a possibility of big hits with certainty. The probability of a big hit of 15 rounds in Special Figure 1 is 50%. However, if the second variable prize opening 235 is not won in the fifteenth round, the probability variation is not provided, and the number of time reductions is reduced to 50.

  In both the special figure 2 lottery process and the special figure 1 related lottery process, when the special figure to be stopped (special figure determination result) is determined, the special figure variable display is performed based on the special figure determination result. Determine the symbol variation time. In addition, in this embodiment, since there is almost no chance that the symbol variation display is executed for the special symbol 2 in the low probability state of the ordinary figure, the symbol variation display related to the special symbol 2 in the low probability state of the common symbol is not all. The same symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) may be used. At this time, the symbol variation time may be different between the symbol variation display that is lost and the symbol variation display that is a big hit.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. 1, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. These tables are also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal figure low probability state, the general drawing lottery is only hit with a probability of 1/100, so the electric chew is almost not opened, and the probability of winning the second special figure starting port 232 is low. The table shown in FIG. 9 (a) corresponds to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure low probability (special figure low probability normal figure low probability) state. FIG. 9A shows a control state after the big hit game corresponding to the stop pattern at the time of the big hit in the special figure 1 for reference. A circle mark indicates that there is a mark, and a cross mark indicates that there is no mark (hereinafter the same).

  On the other hand, in the ordinary high probability state, the electric Chu is almost open, and the big hit in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the big hit in the special figure 1, so the player aims at the second special figure starting port 232. The table shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure high probability (special figure high probability normal figure high probability, special figure low probability normal figure high probability) state. In FIG. 9B, for reference, the control state after the big hit game corresponding to the stop pattern at the time of the big hit in the special figure 2 is shown.

  9A and 9B, it is not possible to change with certainty unless the second variable winning opening 235 which is opened in the 15th round is won.

  From the table shown in FIG. 9A and the table shown in FIG. 9B, when the special figure determination result is a big hit (15R big hit) symbol that the second special figure start port 232 opens, a table set When 1 is selected and the special figure determination result is a big hit (14R big hit) symbol that the second special figure start port 232 does not open, the table set 2 is selected.

  FIG. 9C is a diagram for explaining tables used in the table set.

  In the table set, as will be described in detail later, a table to be used is defined in accordance with the number of symbol fluctuations of the special figure after the big hit game ends.

  There are five types of tables 1 to 5 used in the table set. Table 1 is a table originally used in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and the default gaming state of the table 1 Becomes a low probability state of special maps. Table 2 is a table originally used in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the default gaming state of the table 2 is the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The table 3 is originally a table used in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the default game state of the table 3 is the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. The table 4 is originally a table used in the state immediately before falling in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the default gaming state of the table 4 becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The table 5 is a table that is originally used in the state immediately before falling in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the default gaming state of the table 5 is the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. Thus, in this embodiment, the table used according to a control state differs.

  Each table is used when selecting a variable time (timer number) to be used, as will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 9D is a diagram for explaining timer numbers.

  FIG. 9D shows the variation time corresponding to each timer number. Further, it is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) according to the control state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). The production mode is also shown for reference. In the present embodiment, the variation time (timer number) of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one according to the gaming state. That is, if the gaming state is different, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol display device 208 is different even if the timer number is the same. For example, even when the timer number is 4 (10 seconds), in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, it becomes the rendering mode of Battle Gase Aori 1, and the special figure low probability ordinary figure low. In the probabilistic state, it becomes a normal losing effect mode. Even if the timer number is 6 (30 seconds), the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state becomes the effect mode of battle A defeat, and the special figure low probability normal figure low In the probabilistic state, it becomes an effect mode of Super Reach A Loss. As described above, depending on whether the normal figure high probability state or the normal figure low probability state is used, the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different even though the variation time is the same.

  The main control unit 300 may determine the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the variation time of the special figure, but in the present embodiment, information indicating the variation time determined here and the current game Information representing the state is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the variation time according to the gaming state.

  The effect forms in the decorative symbol display device 208 include an effect aspect with a reach effect and an effect aspect without a reach effect. “Super-shortening”, “shortening”, “normal”, and “Battle Gase Aori” are production modes that do not involve reach production, and other than these are production modes that involve reach production. Note that “Battle Gase Aori” is an effect mode that expresses what is likely to develop into a reach effect.

  In the present embodiment, normal reach and super reach (SP reach) are prepared as reach effects. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are displayed in the same manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is stopped. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed (reach state), that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (the symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), the predetermined jackpot symbol This is a state in which the combination (“decorative symbol combination 1” or “decorative symbol combination 2” shown in FIG. 5B) is stopped and displayed. Super reach is a type of reach that improves the production effect by adding special variation display to normal reach. In this embodiment, super reach (SP reach) A, super reach (SP reach) B, battle A and battle B are prepared. That is, both Battle A and Battle B are effects accompanied by super reach.

  In addition, long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, and the like are known as super reach, and special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like are also known. In the present specification, the term “reach” means a variation of the decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special reach. This reach is an effect of notifying the player after the success / failure determination and notifying the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the special determination's success / failure determination (lottery) will be the winning determination result. Thus, whether or not to perform reach is determined after determining whether or not to reach. In the case of no reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively short, in the super reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively long, and in the normal reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is the time between no reach and the super reach.

  In addition, “-” shown in FIG. 9D represents a prohibition process, and the effect mode is not originally performed. In other words, if the actual gaming state is different from the default gaming state of the variable time selection table, if the actual gaming state has a performance mode that matches the gaming state, The production is executed, but when the prohibition process is applied in the actual gaming state, the production is executed using the production mode of the default gaming state in the table for selecting the variation time instead.

  Here, the prohibition process in the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, as a premise, the gaming state, the effect display, and the variation time are in a correspondence relationship in principle. However, since the table for selecting the variation time or the variation time (here, the table set and the tables 1 to 5 correspond to each other, hereinafter simply referred to as a table) is determined prior to the determination of the gaming state. There may occur a case where the variation time or the table does not correspond to the gaming state or the effect display. That is, a special state occurs. At this time, there may be an effect that is not supposed to be performed in the game state and the effect display. The performance time of the production that should not be performed originally is a time during which a prohibition is applied as a variation time corresponding to the gaming state. For example, in the case of losing performance, basically, the combination of different decorative designs is stopped, so there is no problem even if there is a difference in time. Conversely, the difference in time uses the player's uncomfortable feeling. It may be a notification of the special state. Moreover, in the case of reach production, the reach production used in another game state can be performed. In the present embodiment, the same kind of production is performed visually with or without electric support. For example, a reach B that does not appear originally may appear. Even in this case, there is no sense of incongruity of the player as an effect, but on the other hand, there may be a sense of incongruity in that it appears in a gaming state that does not originally appear.

  In the present embodiment, although the variation time is the same depending on whether the special figure high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is not prohibited or not processed. May be provided and the production mode may be different.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram for explaining the table set 1.

  The table set 1 is used when shifting to the probability changing state after the end of the big hit game. After the big hit, until the 99th symbol variation display, the table 3 for the special symbol high probability common symbol high probability state is used, and in the symbol variation display of the 100th symbol, that is, the symbol variation display in the probability variation state and the last electric support state. Table 5 is used. That is, the table 5 is used in the state immediately before the fall when the player's advantage is the second advantage last. When the 101st symbol variation display is started, the state is shifted to the non-probable change state and the non-electric support state, and the table 1 for the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is used.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram for explaining the table set 2.

  The table set 2 is used when shifting to the electric support state in the non-probable change state after the big hit game is over. After the big hit, until the 49th symbol variation display, the table 2 for the special symbol low probability normal symbol high probability state is used. In the 50th symbol variation display, that is, the symbol variation display at the end of the electric support state, the table 4 Is used. That is, the table 4 is used in the state immediately before the fall when the player's advantage is the first advantage. Note that the above-described second advantage is higher for the player than the first advantage. When the 51st symbol variation display is started, the state is shifted to the non-electric support state, and the table 1 for the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is used.

  Tables 1 to 5 show a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display for which the big hit symbol is stopped, that is, the symbol variation display for which the big hit symbol is stopped, that is, the variation time of the symbol variation display for which the loss symbol is stopped, that is, loses. A table for determination is prepared. In the table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display that is lost, a plurality of types are prepared according to the number of suspensions when the variation time is determined. In this embodiment, the variation time is determined based on the number of holdings of one of the special figures 1 and 2 (here, special figure 1). The variation time may be determined based on the number. In addition, although a common table is used in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the tables used in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be divided.

  For the determination of the fluctuation time, a random number value for determining a special figure fluctuation time (a possible numerical range is 0 to 65535) out of one set of random values previously obtained from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 is used.

  FIG. 10C to FIG. 10E are diagrams showing the table 1. 10 (c) to 10 (e) show the effects in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9 (d). Shown for reference.

  FIG.10 (c) is a figure which shows the table 1 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which makes a big hit.

  The super shortened big hit of the timer number 1 (1 second) is selected only with a very low probability of 1/65536, and is almost the big hit of the super reach system. That is, the reach A big hit of timer number 7 (35 seconds) is selected with a probability of 19999/65536, and the reach B big hit of timer number 9 (65 seconds) is selected with a probability of 45536/65536.

  FIG.10 (d) is a figure which shows the table 1 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost when the number of pending | holdings of special figure 1 is 4, The figure (e) is a special figure. It is a figure which shows the table 1 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost when the holding | holding number of 1 is 0-3.

  In the ordinary low probability state (during non-electric support), the special figure 1 almost fluctuates (the fluctuation of the special figure 2 has a low probability), so in the table 1 of this embodiment, based on the number of reservations of the special figure 1 Determine the variation time. Even when the special figure 1 changes substantially (for example, 99%), the fluctuation time may be determined based on the number of holdings in the special figure 1.

  Note that even if the number of holds in the special figure 1 is “0” and the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize, the number of holds in the special figure 1 once becomes “1”.

  In the table used when the number of holds in FIG. 1 shown in FIG. 10D is 4, the deviation from the shortening of the timer number 3 (5 seconds) is selected with a considerably high probability (62000/65536), and the hold is made. High-speed digestion is achieved.

  On the other hand, in the table used when the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 10E, the normal deviation of the timer number 4 (10 seconds) is selected with a high probability (55000/65536). The

  FIG. 11A to FIG. 11C are diagrams showing the table 2. 11 (a) to 11 (c) show the effects in the special figure low probability normal figure high / low probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9 (d). Shown for reference.

  FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a table 2 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display that is a big hit.

  The super shortened big hit of timer number 1 (1 second) is selected only with a low probability of 500/65536, and in many cases it is a big hit of a super reach with a battle. That is, the battle effect is not performed in the usual low probability state, but the battle effect may be performed in the usual high probability state.

  FIG.11 (b) is a figure which shows the table 2 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost when the number of pending | holdings of special figure 2 is 3 or 4, It is a figure which shows the table 2 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost when the pending | holding number of special figure 2 is 1 or 2. FIG.

  In the normal figure high probability state (during electric support), the special figure 2 fluctuates substantially. Therefore, in the table 2 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is determined based on the number of holdings in the special figure 2.

  Further, even when the second figure drawing start port 232 wins in the state where the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 is “0”, the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 once becomes “1”.

  In the table used when the number of holds in Fig. 2 is 3 or 4 shown in Fig. 11 (b), the super-shortening of timer number 2 (2 seconds) is selected with a very high probability (63000/65536). And high-speed digestion on hold is achieved.

  On the other hand, in the table used in the case where the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0 to 2 shown in FIG. 11 (c), the battle number 1 of the timer number 4 (10 seconds) is selected with a high probability (64150/65536). Is done. In the usual high probability state, in the case of losing, there is a case where an effect is given that says that it is likely to develop into a super reach with a battle.

  FIG. 11D to FIG. 11F show the table 3. In these FIG. 11 (d) to FIG. 11 (f), there is an effect mode in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) also shown in FIG. 9 (d). Shown for reference.

  FIG. 11D is a diagram showing a table 3 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display that is a big hit.

  In the special figure high probability state, even if it is a big hit, a super shortened big hit of timer number 1 (1 second) is selected with a considerable probability (30000/65536), and the rest will be a battle of timer number 7 (35 seconds) It will be a big hit with the accompanying super reach.

  FIG. 11 (e) is a diagram showing a table 3 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display that is lost when the number of holdings in FIG. 2 is 4; FIG. 11 (f) It is a figure which shows the table 3 for determining the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation | variation display which becomes lost when the holding | holding number of 2 is 1-3.

  In the table used in the case where the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4 shown in FIG. 11 (e), the super shortening of the timer number 2 (2 seconds) is selected with a considerably high probability (63000/65536). High-speed digestion on hold is achieved. Further, in addition to the battle gasase tilt 1 of the timer number 4 (10 seconds), the battle A defeat of the timer number 6 (30 seconds) may be selected.

  On the other hand, in the table used when the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 11 (f), Battle Gaseori 1 with timer number 4 (10 seconds) is selected with high probability (62500/65536). In some cases, a battle A loss of timer number 6 (30 seconds) is also selected.

  FIG. 12A is a diagram showing the table 4 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be a big hit, and FIG. 12B is the variation time of the symbol variation display that is lost regardless of the number of holdings. It is a figure which shows the table 4 for determining. In the diagrams showing these tables 4, the effect mode in the special figure low probability common figure high probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9D is also shown for reference. Yes.

  As described above, the table 4 is a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display at the end of the electric support state after shifting to the electric support state in the non-probable change state.

  In the big hit symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12A, a longer variation time is always selected, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs super-reach with a battle. On the other hand, in the case of the loss symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12 (b), the battle gaze tilt 2 with the timer number 5 (12 seconds) is always selected. As a result, if it develops into a battle production, it will be a big hit. Therefore, the interest of the game is easily improved by Battle Gase Aori 2.

  FIG. 12C is a diagram showing the table 5 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be a big hit, and FIG. 12B is the variation time of the symbol variation display that is lost regardless of the number of holds. It is a figure which shows the table 5 for determining. The tables showing these tables 5 show, for reference, effects in the special figure high probability common figure high probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9D. Yes.

  As described above, the table 5 is a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display in the probability variation state and the power support state last after the transition to the probability variation state and the power support state.

  In the big hit symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12C, a longer variation time is always selected, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the battle A victory of the timer number 7 (35 seconds) is always selected. On the other hand, in the case of the loss symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12 (d), the battle gaze tilt 2 with the timer number 5 (12 seconds) is always selected. As a result, even if it develops into a battle production here, the big hit is confirmed, and the interest of the game is likely to be improved by the battle gasase 2.

  In the present embodiment, there may be an effect that can be selected only by the table 3 or the table 5 used in the table set 1, or an effect that can be selected only by the table 2 or the table 4 used in the table set 2. There may be.

  To summarize the above explanation, in FIG. 1, winning special figure A or special figure B corresponds to an example of establishment of the second game condition. In FIG. 2, winning the big hit corresponds to an example of establishment of the second game condition. In other words, whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is won, winning the 15R jackpot corresponds to an example of establishment of the second game condition. When the second game condition is satisfied, the 15th round is awarded as a big hit game. The fifteenth round is a round in which the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is only opened, and when the second variable winning opening 235 is won, the game shifts to a probable change state after the big hit game. Although winning in the second variable winning opening 235 corresponds to an example of establishment of a third game condition (in the following description, sometimes referred to as “first condition”), the second variable winning opening 235 is, for example, In the case of a game machine that is released from the first round, the second game condition is established by winning a big hit. That is, the second game condition is a precondition for establishing the third game condition, and the third game condition is not established before the second game condition is established, This is a condition that can be satisfied after the game condition is satisfied. In other words, the third game condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the second game condition is established than before the second game condition is established.

  In the special figure 1, winning the special figure C or the special figure D corresponds to an example of establishment of the first game condition.

  When the second game condition is satisfied and the third game condition (or the first condition) is also satisfied, after the big hit game, 100 symbol variation displays are performed (in the first period). Equivalent), transition to the promiscuous state and the electric support state (corresponding to an example of the second gaming state), and use of the table set 1 (corresponding to an example of the second group) shown in FIG. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state continues only 100 times. However, the probability variation state may be repeated 80 times, for example, by increasing the type of jackpot symbol (hit type) or by lottery. There may be 150 cases. Further, the number of continuations of the electric support state in the probability variation state may be changed by a big hit symbol or the like or by lottery. For example, if a big hit symbol is a big hit, the probability variation state has a continuation count of 100, while the power support state has a continuation count of 50 times. Any support state may be such that the number of continuations is 100 times. Further, the falling lottery may be performed every time the symbol variation display is performed, and when the falling lottery is won, the probability variation state may be terminated.

  FIG. 13A is a time chart showing an example when the second game condition is satisfied and the third game condition (or the first condition) is also satisfied. In FIG. 13, time elapses from left to right.

  On the other hand, if the second game condition is satisfied but the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied, the game shifts to the electric support state after the big hit game, but remains in an uncertain change state. Yes (corresponds to an example of the first gaming state). However, since the second game condition is satisfied, the table set 1 shown in FIG. 10A (corresponding to an example of the second group) is used until the next big hit. The table set 1 corresponding to an example of the second group is a table set used when the second game condition is satisfied. Here, the electric support state (first game state) is maintained while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times (corresponding to the second period) after the big hit game. In this embodiment, the electric support state continues only 50 times in the uncertain change state, but the number of times of the electric support state continues 30 times by increasing the type of jackpot symbol (big hit type) or by lottery etc. There may be a case of 70 times, or a case of 120 times. Further, a falling lottery may be performed every time the symbol variation display is performed, and the electric support state may be terminated when the falling lottery is won.

  FIG. 13B is a time chart showing an example when the second game condition is satisfied and the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied.

  The second gaming state and the first gaming state are distinguished by whether or not they are in a promiscuous state regardless of whether they are in the electric support state (short-time state) or not. The correspondence relationship with the gaming state to be changed may be changed so as to be distinguished depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state, regardless of whether or not it is in the probability variation state. That is, if it is an electric support state, whether it is a probability change state or a non-probability change state, it is set as the second gaming state, and if it is a probability change state or a non-probability change state, it is the first case if it is a non-electric support state. It is good also as a game state. In any case, the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state. In addition, the following examples are given as the first gaming state and the second gaming state. For example, the non-probability change state and the non-electric support state can be set as the first gaming state, and the probability change state and the electric support state can be set as the second game state. Also, the non-probability change state and the electric support state can be set as the first game state, and the probability change state and the electric support state can be set as the second game state. Further, the non-probability change state and the non-electric support state can be set as the first game state, and the non-probability change state and the electric support state can be set as the second game state. Further, the non-probability and non-electric support state can be set as the first gaming state, and the probability change state and the non-electric support state can be set as the second gaming state. Further, the probability change state and the non-electric support state can be set as the first game state, and the probability change state and the electric support state can be set as the second game state. Furthermore, the first game state and the second game state can also be applied to the following cases. For example, the first gaming state is a non-probability change state and the electric support state and the electric support state is low, and the second game state is the non-probability change state and the electric support state and the electric support state is high. It can be in a gaming state. In addition, a game state in which the number of continuations of the electric support state in the probability change state and the electric support state is small is set as the first game state, and a game state in the probability change state and the electric support state in which the electric support state is continued frequently is the second game state. It can also be.

  When the first game condition is satisfied, the electric support state corresponding to an example of the first game state is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times after the big hit game (corresponding to an example of the second period). The table set 2 shown in FIG. 10B (corresponding to an example of the first group) is used until the next big hit. The table set 2 corresponding to an example of the first group is a table set used when the first game condition is satisfied.

  FIG.13 (c) is a time chart which shows an example when the 1st game condition is satisfied.

  Here, when the second game condition is satisfied, in most cases, if the player launches a game ball aiming at the second variable winning opening 235 in the 15th round, the third game condition (or the first game condition) One condition) can be established. However, if the player does not know or forgets that he must aim at the second variable prize opening 235 in the 15th round, the third game condition (or the first condition) is for some reason. Even if is not established, the player expects to shift to a probable state after the big hit game by winning the 15R big hit or entering the 15th round. However, if there is no winning in the second variable winning opening 235, the third game condition (or the first condition) is not established, and the state does not shift to the probability changing state. In the present embodiment, when the transition is made to the probability variation state, the electrical support state is maintained during the 100 symbol variation display (first period), and when the transition to the probability variation state is not performed, the transition is made to the electrical support state. Even in this case, the electric support state is maintained only during 50 symbol variation displays (second period). On the other hand, if the 15R jackpot is won, the table set 1 is set regardless of whether or not the second variable winning opening 235 is won (the third game condition (or the first condition) is established / not established). Selected.

  As shown in FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B, in the table set 1, the table 99 is used for the first 99 symbol variation displays after the end of the big hit game. For this reason, in the case of losing in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, if the special figure 2 hold is full, in most cases, it will be a super-shortened lose and the hold will be digested at high speed. If the hold is not full, in most cases, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the battle gaze tilt 1 that does not develop into the reach state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), even if there is no winning at the second variable winning opening 235, even in the 50th symbol variation display after the end of the big hit game, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. From Fig. 9 (d) and Fig. 11, from Fig. 9 (d) and Fig. 11, if the special figure 2 hold is full, in most cases it will result in a super shortened loss, and if the special figure 2 hold is not full, most cases The effect of Battle Gase Aori 1 is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, the table set 1 is used in common regardless of whether or not the second variable winning opening 235 is won (the third game condition (or the first condition) is established / not established). Thus, a player who has confirmed that he won the 15R jackpot or entered the 15th round won a prize for the second variable prize slot 235 even if he did not win for the second variable prize slot 235. As if there were, you can enjoy the game.

  On the other hand, when the special figure C or the special figure D is won in the special figure 1 (when the first game condition is satisfied), the table set 2 is selected. Some players are delighted only by winning the jackpot and overlook whether they win the 15R jackpot or the 14R jackpot. In particular, if the number of rounds is not significantly different from 15R and 14R as in this embodiment, it tends to be overlooked. As shown in FIG. 13C, in the table set 2, the table 49 is used for the first 49 times after the big hit game ends. For this reason, in the case of a loss in the special figure low-probability high-probability state, if the special figure 2 hold is full, in most cases it will be a super-shortened lose and the hold will be digested at high speed. If the hold is not full, in most cases, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the battle gaze tilt 1 that does not develop into the reach state. That is, in the table 3 in the table set 1 and the table 2 in the table set 2, many of the same variation times are used as the variation times selected in the case of the loss. Here, only the fluctuation time with the highest selection probability may be shared. Strictly speaking, the 60 second variation time of the timer number 8 that is not selected in the table 3 in the table set 1 can be selected in the table 2 in the table set 2. Further, only the fluctuation time with the highest selection probability may be shared. Also, the same variation time is used in Table 3 and Table 2 for the variation time selected in the case of winning. Again, only the fluctuation time with the highest selection probability may be shared. Strictly speaking, the 65 second variation time of the timer number 9 that is not selected in the table 3 in the table set 1 can be selected in the table 2 in the table set 2. As described above, the one or more variation times included in the table set 1 (second group) are the same variation time as the variation time of at least a part of the variation times included in the table set 2 (first group). is there. By doing this, even if the player who missed whether he won the 15R jackpot or the 14R jackpot, the game would be the same regardless of whether it was a 15R jackpot or a 14R jackpot Can have fun.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13 (c), in the table set 2, the table 4 is used in the 50th symbol variation display after the big hit game ends. For this reason, in the case of losing, the effect of the battle gasase tilt 2 that does not develop into the reach state is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, which is not much different from the case where the table 3 is used. In Table 4, instead of timer number 5, timer number 4 that is highly likely to be selected in table 3 may be selected 100%. That is, the same variation time may be easily selected. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variation time. That is, by using similar or the same variation time, even if the relationship between the gaming state and the table for selecting the variation time becomes irregular, it prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable. You may be able to.

  However, in the table 3 in the table set 1, the timer number 6 which is a kind of super reach loss can also be selected. As described above, the table 4 in the table set 2 always has a big hit when it develops to reach presentation. Therefore, if the reach presentation is performed at the 50th symbol variation display after the big hit game ends, A player who thinks that 2 is used may feel uncomfortable and may notice that the table set 1 is being used. In addition, there may be a case where the entertainment of the game can be improved by using the fact that the relationship between the gaming state and the table for selecting the variation time is irregular.

  It should be noted that Table 3 and Table 2 are completely the same table, that is, a table (Table 3) that is used for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation display for the first first number of times (here, 99 times) in the probability variation state after the big hit game ends. ) And the table (table 2) used in the variation time selection of the symbol variation display of the first second number of times (here 49 times) in the non-probability variation state after the big hit game is ended as a common table, You may make it not understand in the change time or the production according to the change time. In addition, even if the variation time is different, the effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same so that it cannot be understood.

  In addition, the table 3 and the table used in the variation time selection of the symbol variation display at the third number of times (here, the 50th time) in the electric support state after the end of the big hit game, that is, from the electric support state to the non-electric support state. Is different from the table 4 used in the state immediately before falling, whether or not a short variation time (in this case, timer number 1 or timer number 2) can be selected. On the contrary, a short variation time may not be selected in the table 3 as well.

  Furthermore, although the table used for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation display of the first second number of times (here 49 times) in the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game is the table 3, the table number 1 is the third number of times. The table used for selecting the variation time for the first (50th in this case) symbol variation display is the table 4 used immediately before the fall from the electric support state to the non-electric support state in the table set 2, and the following number of times The table used for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation display of the first number from the first (here 51-99) is also Table 3, and the fourth number (here 100th) in the probability variation state after the big hit game is over. Table 5 is a table used for selecting the variation time of the symbol variation display), that is, the table used immediately before the fall from the probability variation state to the non-probability variation state. Ri game end after the third number-th table to be used for (eyes 50 times, for example), may be a table set 2 common table (same table).

  As for the first time and the second time, which are common times, as a modification example, only the reach time may be shared, or only the outlier time may be shared (also in the following description) the same). Further, a time that exists only in one group (table set) may exist only in the other group (table set), or may exist in both groups (table set 1 and table set 2). You may make it (it is the same also in the following description).

  In addition, here, the second gaming state is a probabilistic state and an electric support state, and the first gaming state is a non-probable state and an electric support state, but this is not a limitation (in the following description) The same). That is, it may be in a state in which the presence or absence of probability change, the presence or absence of electric support (short time), the so-called number of STs or the difference in the number of electric support, etc. are arbitrarily combined. Further, a combination of the probability variation state / electric support state and the non-probability variation state / non-electric support state, or the combination of the probability variation state / electric support state / non-probability variation state / electric support state may be set as the second gaming state. The first gaming state may be set. In other words, the second gaming state or the first gaming state may be constituted by a plurality of gaming states including state transition.

  As described above, in both the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), the variation time in the special figure symbol variation is determined.

  In step S233, which is performed following the special drawing 1 related lottery process in step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, per round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special figure. Bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (result of determining a special symbol), information indicating a control state, and the like, a winning effect start command and an end effect start are included. In the case of a command, information indicating a control state is included, and in the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating a control state, a per-round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning in the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234 Includes the presence or absence of a prize.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information representing the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing the control state, and information representing the special figure variation time stored in the RAM 308 as command data. The information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is on hold is set.

  In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state that are stored in the RAM 308 and are output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the winning effect start command transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the winning effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the winning effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds), The jackpot game starts.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for informing the player that the big hit is to be ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). finish.

  In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation held. Information indicating the number of games is set.

  Also, general command special figure hold increase processing is performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance.

  Further, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. Note that the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 start (do) the usual figure change stop command indicating that the usual change display has stopped (do), or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7, an external output signal setting process (step S235) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step 205 are read, and the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored. When the lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame opening error or lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the various symbol 332 shown in FIG. 4 is driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the first variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like are set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on in order to determine whether or not a power supply interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 4, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In this command processing, power recovery sub-side flag setting processing and the like are performed, and details will be described later.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In this effect control process, a start-side winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process, a change start sub-side notice execution process, and a power recovery sub-side flag setting process are also performed. Each of these processes will be described later in detail.

  In step S311, when the pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S343 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like. Ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

<Special figure look-ahead processing>
Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing relating to special figure 2 in special figure prefetching processing.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to the time reduction flag in the RAM 308 and determines whether or not power support is in progress (step S224a). When the time reduction flag is in the off state and the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S224i of the processing relating to FIG. 1, and when the time reduction flag is in the on state and the electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S224b. . In step S224b, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232. In this determination, the determination is made by determining whether or not the retention in the retention storage unit of the special map 2 of the RAM 308 has increased. That is, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the second special figure starting port 232 that falls within the upper limit number (four in this case) of the reserved storage of the special figure 2. If it is determined in step S224b that there has been a winning (increase in the number of holdings in FIG. 2), the process proceeds to step S224c. If it is determined that there has been no winning, the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  In step S224c, first, a set of start-up information acquired in the previous winning acceptance process (step S217) is pre-read from the reserved storage unit of FIG. 2 provided in the RAM 308. That is, with the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 as a trigger, the starting information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, the newest starting information is prefetched before the determination of validity (based on the special figure 2 lottery process) based on the starting information is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this prefetching corresponds to an example of start information prefetching means. In the prefetching here, only the winning portion (holding increment) is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that pre-reading here means that the start information is read first before the validity determination (main lottery), but in the following explanation, the word pre-reading is referred to as the predecessor (result of true / false determination (main lottery)). Sometimes used to mean read.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a pre-determination high probability table having the same contents as the contents of the high / failure determination probability table shown in FIG. 8C and a low-probability determination probability table shown in FIG. A low probability table for pre-judgment with the same content is prepared. In step S224c, the probability variation flag is referred to, and either one of the high probability table for pre-determination and the low probability table for pre-determination is selected, and the special information of the pre-read start information is selected using the selected table. FIG. 2 Based on the winning random number value, it is determined in advance whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit determination result (a specific determination result). In other words, with the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 as a trigger, it is determined in advance whether or not the winning / failing determination result based on the starting information generated based on the winning becomes the big hit determination result. Therefore, this pre-determination is executed before the determination of success / failure based on the start information (the special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this pre-determination corresponds to an example of a pre-determination unit. Here, the result determined in advance is treated as a result of prior determination in FIG.

  If the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit determination result, the process proceeds to step S224e. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit determination result, the process proceeds to step S224g.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prior determination table having the same contents as the special figure determination table shown in FIG. Using the special figure predetermination table, in step S224e, the big hit symbol predetermination is performed based on the big hit special figure 2 random value in the pre-read start information, and in step S224g, the special figure 2 disorder for loss is detected. Based on the numerical value, the losing symbol is determined in advance. The special figure pre-determination in step S224e and step S224g is also executed before the success / failure determination (special figure 2 related lottery process) based on the pre-read start information is performed, and the result of the pre-determination here is the special figure 2 pre-determination result. Are treated as

  Subsequent to step S224e or step S224g, step S224h is executed. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, tables having the same contents as the contents of various tables for determining the variation time of the special drawings shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are also prepared. Using these tables, in step S224h, the special figure fluctuation time is preliminarily determined based on the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination random value in the pre-read start information. The preliminary determination of the variation time in step S224h is also executed before the determination of whether or not the vehicle is determined (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) based on the pre-read start information. Be treated. Instead of the variation time, the effect mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be determined in advance. Further, the production mode and the variation time may be grouped, and it may be determined in advance which group belongs.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one, and the fact that the variation time is selected means that the variation pattern is selected. You can also see it. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes step S224h corresponds to an example of a pattern selection unit.

  When the execution of step S224h is completed, the process related to special figure 2 ends, and the process proceeds to the process related to special figure 1.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing relating to special figure 1 in special figure prefetching processing.

  The process related to special figure 1 (steps S224i to S224o) is the same as the process related to special figure 2 (steps S224b to S224h), and the description thereof will be omitted. A set of starting information acquired in the previous winning acceptance process (step S217) is pre-read from the holding storage unit, and the special figure 1 pre-determination result, the special figure 1 pre-determination result, and the special figure 1 variable time pre-determination result. Get.

  Special figure 1 or 2 pre-determined result (special figure successful / pre-determined result), special figure 1 or 2 pre-determined result (special figure pre-determined result), and special figure 1 or 2 variation time pre-determined The result (special map variation time preliminary determination result) is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 308 as the preliminary determination information in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the order of the hold in the predetermined upper limit number. The newly stored pre-determined information (special map rejection pre-determined result, special figure pre-determined result, special figure variation time pre-determined result) is pre-determined as special figure 1 or special figure 2 information. It is included in the command data of the increase command and transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400.

  After executing the special figure prefetching process described above, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure related lottery process, and based on the same start information as the prefetched start information targeted in the special figure prefetch process, The determination result, the special figure determination result, and the fluctuation time of the special figure are obtained again.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 obtains the special figure advance determination result and the special figure variation time preliminary determination result, but the main control unit 300 does not obtain these advance determination results, and the pre-read start information. Is included in the command data of the special figure hold increase command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 obtains the special figure advance determination result and the special figure variation time prior determination result as necessary. An aspect may be sufficient.

<Sub-side pre-reading notice execution process at start prize>
Next, the start winning time sub-side pre-reading notice execution process executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the flow of the sub-side pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting winning a prize.

  The start side winning side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 17 is an effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process that is determined to have received the special figure hold increase command in the command setting process (step S307). ) Is executed. The RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a pre-reading execution flag. First, in step S3091a, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading execution flag is set to on, and is set to on. If so, the process proceeds to step S3091g, and if it remains off, the process proceeds to step S3091b.

  As described above, the command data of the special figure hold increase command includes the special figure pre-determined result, the special figure pre-determined result, and the special figure variation time pre-determined result as information on the pre-determined special figure 1 or special figure 2. Is included. In step S3091b, it is determined whether or not the special figure change time prior determination result included in the special figure hold increase command determined to have been received in the previous command setting process (step S307) is a predetermined change time. If it is not the variation time, the process proceeds to step S3091h, and if it is the predetermined variation time, the process proceeds to step S3091d. The special figure variation time prior determination result included in the special figure hold increase command is divided into special figure 1 and special figure 2 as the preliminary determination information in the preliminary determination result storage area prepared in the RAM 408, and the above predetermined upper limit number. Are stored only in the pending order.

  FIG. 18A is a diagram showing a pending change pre-reading notice lottery table used in the non-electric support state, and FIG. 18B is a hold change pre-reading notice lottery used in the electric support state. It is a figure which shows a table. Both tables are stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400.

  The predetermined fluctuation time here is the fluctuation time defined in the table shown in FIG. 18A in the non-electric support state, and is 30 seconds, 35 seconds, 60 seconds, and 65 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of the electric support state, the fluctuation time is defined in the table shown in FIG. 18B, which is 10 seconds, 35 seconds, and 65 seconds. In the table shown in FIG. 18, an effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown.

  In the present embodiment, special figure 1 hold display is performed on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and special figure 2 hold display is performed on the right side thereof. These hold displays are displays corresponding to one set of start information stored in the special hold storage unit provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and the number of hold displays corresponds to the number of holds. In this embodiment, the predetermined display mode (default display mode) in the hold display is a mode in which a round graphic is displayed in a pattern and in one color.

  FIG. 18C is a diagram showing a hold display (normal hold) in the default display mode.

  Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a hold increase command to the second sub control unit 500 in step S3091g, which will be described later. Based on the command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of hold displays by one. On the other hand, every time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a hold reduction command to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs decoration based on the hold reduction command. The symbol display device 208 is controlled to reduce the number of pending displays by one. The hold display may be referred to as a hold icon, and the combination of the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the start hold number notifying unit.

  Further, in both the table shown in FIG. 18A and the table shown in FIG. 18B, a random number range is defined for each of the hold notice A and the hold notice B. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice is performed based on the preliminary determination result made by the main control unit 300. This pre-reading notice is based on the result of the pass / fail determination performed in the special drawing related lottery process before the special figure related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) shown in FIG. This is a notice for the advance notice. In addition, the notification may be made in advance that a predetermined big hit (for example, a big hit advantageous to the player, more specifically, a big hit of 15R) will be announced. “No change” shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B means that the pre-reading notice using the hold display is not executed, and the display form of the hold display is the default display form shown in FIG. It means that it remains. In addition, “pending notice A” and “pending notice B” shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B change the display mode of the hold display from the default display form to a special display form, and display the hold display. The pre-reading notice is performed by displaying in the special display mode.

  FIG. 18D is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold notice A, and FIG. 18E is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold notice B.

  The display mode of the hold notice A is a long-length character, and the display form of the hold notice B is a character of the main character. The hold display (hold notices A and B) of these display modes, which also serves as a pre-reading notice, may be displayed larger than the default display form shown in FIG.

  In step S3091c shown in FIG. 17, a lottery process using the table shown in FIG. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 99) from the RAM 408 at the timing of executing step S3091c, and based on the acquired dedicated random number, the gaming state (here, the electric support state) Or lottery according to non-electric support status). The lottery here is a lottery triggered by winning a prize at the special drawing start opening (230, 232). When a lottery of whether or not to perform a pre-reading notice and a pre-reading notice are performed, the lottery is selected from a plurality of types of notices. It will be a lottery to select one type of notice mode.

  In the above description, it has been described that the prefetching notice is a notification for notifying that the result of the determination of success / failure will be a big hit, but this prefetching notification will be a big hit even if the result of the determination of success / failure does not become a big hit. It also includes a fake look-ahead notice that makes a false notice. In other words, the pre-reading notice indicates that the result of the success / failure determination may be a big hit, is a prior notice that suggests to the player, or a prior notice that makes the player expect that the result of the success / failure determination will be a big hit. It can be said that there is.

  In this embodiment, if a change in hold occurs and the battle effect is started with the symbol variation display for the hold represented by the hold display changed in hold, the big hit is confirmed.

  Although the table shown in FIG. 18 is a table irrelevant to the number of holds, the notice execution probability or the notice mode selection probability may be changed according to the number of holds.

  In step S3091d executed subsequent to step S3091c, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pre-reading notice in step S3091c has been won. The winning here is a lottery for whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed, and means that the pre-reading notice is won. If it is unsuccessful (no pre-reading notice), the process proceeds to step S3091g. If it is successful (pre-reading notice is made), the number of pre-reading notices is set (step S3091e), and the process proceeds to step S3091f. The pre-reading notice based on the lottery using the table shown in FIG. 18 corresponds to an example of the first notice notice. The pre-reading notice based on the lottery using the table shown in FIG. 18 is a prior notice for notifying that the result of the determination of success / failure based on the predetermined starting information will be a big hit. In this embodiment, the number of executions of the pre-reading notice is set in the symbol variation display unit of one special figure, and here, the same number as the number of holdings is set as the number of executions in the execution number setting area prepared in the RAM 408. . More specifically, in the case of the electric support state, the number of holdings in FIG. 2 is set as the number of executions, and in the case of the non-electric support state, the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is set as the number of executions.

  In step S3091f, the pre-reading execution flag prepared in the RAM 408 is set to ON. The pre-reading execution flag is a flag that determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice is executed based on the lottery using the table shown in FIG. 18, and the state shown in FIG. 18 is used when the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON. This is a state in which a pre-reading notice based on the lottery is performed. In addition, based on the fact that the pre-reading execution flag is set to OFF, the pre-reading notice based on the lottery using the table shown in FIG. 18 is canceled, and in the state where the pre-reading execution flag is still set to OFF, No pre-reading notice based on the lottery using the table shown in FIG. Next, a hold increase command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 (step S3091g), and this start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process is ended.

<Sub-notice execution process at the start of change>
Next, the variation start sub-side notice execution process executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of the sub-side notice execution process at the start of change.

  19 is executed in the effect control process (step S309) in the first sub-control unit main process determined to have received the symbol change start command in the command setting process (step S307). Is done.

  In step S3092a, it is determined whether the prefetching execution flag prepared in the RAM 408 is set to ON. Here, the state in which the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON is a state in which a pre-reading advance notice is performed in which the display mode of the hold display is changed based on a lottery using the table illustrated in FIG. If the prefetching execution flag remains off, the process proceeds to step S3092e. If the prefetching execution flag is set to on, the process proceeds to step S3092b. In step S3092b, 1 is subtracted from the value of the execution count setting area prepared in the RAM 408, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the execution count setting area has become 0 (step S3092c). If the value of the execution count setting area is 0, the process proceeds to step S3092d, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3092e.

  In step S3092d, the prefetching execution flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S3092e.

  In step S3092e, a normal notice lottery process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3092f. In this normal notice lottery process, whether or not the normal notice is executed is determined by lottery, and when it is executed, the notice mode is also determined by lottery. The normal notice here is a notice concerning the symbol variation display started by the symbol variation start command received this time. In other words, the result of determining whether or not the symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the advance notice is given or the special figure informed in the symbol change display in which the announcement is given is the subject of the announcement. The lottery for whether or not the advance notice is executed or the lottery for the notice mode is performed by obtaining a dedicated random number. As the notice mode of the normal notice, display of a predetermined character, sound output, and a notice form of lamp lighting are prepared.

  In step S3092f, a normal notice command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a normal notice based on the normal notice command. When the execution of step S3092f is completed, the change start sub-side notice execution process ends.

  The first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, and the decoration that execute the start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 17 and the change start sub-side notice execution process shown in FIG. A combination of the symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a notice means.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20A, “decoration 7”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 and the second special figure 1 hold display h12, which indicate the hold of the special figure 1, are both displayed in the default display mode. 20 also shows a first special figure display device 212, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure display device 214, and a second special figure hold lamp 220.

  In FIG. 20 (2), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested and only the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is displayed. In addition, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 20 (2) has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decoration symbol. During the symbol variation display, the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking in which all of the seven segments are turned on, turned off for a moment, and all of the seven segments are turned on again. Further, at this time, after the hold is digested and the symbol variation display is started, one variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the fluctuation icon may be the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold display h11, for example. Even in the case where the suspension of special figure 2 to be described later is digested, the variation icon may be displayed in the same manner.

  It should be noted that the special symbol display device (212, 214) may start the symbol variation of the special symbol and reduce the hold display indicating the suspension of the symbol variation at the same time or substantially simultaneously, or may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The start of the decorative symbol variation display and the decrease of the hold display indicating the hold may be performed simultaneously or substantially simultaneously. Further, after the decorative symbol variation display is started, the hold display may disappear, or after the suspension display disappears first, the decoration symbol variation display may be started. Furthermore, at the three timings of the special symbol variation start timing, the decorative symbol variation display start timing, and the hold display disappear timing, the special symbol variation start timing is simultaneously with other timings. It may be the earliest including. The above also applies to the following specific examples.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (3), during the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 started in FIG. It has been reported.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (4) has developed into a reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (5) has started a super reach A effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (6), the super reach A effect is continued and the jackpot finalizing effect is displayed.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 21 (7), the symbol form of the special figure C (see FIG. 5 (a-1)) is stopped and displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the character display of “big hit” is also displayed. . Some players know that only 14R jackpots were won from the combination of the stop symbol pattern of the first special symbol display device 212 and the decorative symbol display device 208, but the 15R jackpot Some people don't know if they won or won 14R jackpot.

  Eventually, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 of the 12th round is shown in FIG. 21 (8). During the big hit game, the hold display disappears (hidden). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (8) displays the opening of button effects. The button effect here is an effect that if the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed and a longest character appears, the player proceeds to the 15th round and has a chance to acquire certainty. Since it is an effect to the last and only 14R jackpot is won, the jackpot game ends in 14 rounds without actually proceeding to 15 rounds.

  In FIG. 21 (9), the 13th round is entered, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the pattern 136 a of the chance button 136 and displays the characters “PUSH” prompting the user to press the chance button 136. . In addition, a remaining time display bar 136b representing the remaining time of the acceptance period for pressing the chance button is also displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (10), the player presses the chance button 136. As a result, an old character appears in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (10), and a character display of “sorry” is also displayed. That is, it is reported that the program does not proceed to the 15th round. The button operation timing and the production start timing based on the operation are earlier in the button operation timing (the same applies to the following specific examples).

  In FIG. 21 (11), the player enters the 14th round, which is the final round. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In other words, in the jackpot game here, there was no winning in the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) without progressing to 15 rounds. In this end effect, the hold display is resumed, and the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is revived and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  Here, the first game condition is established by winning the special figure C, and when the big hit game ends, the symbol change display is performed 50 times (corresponding to an example of the second period). It shifts to the electric support state with the certain change state. Further, until the next big hit, the table set 2 (corresponding to an example of the first group) shown in FIG. 10B is used.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 22 (13), the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first special figure 1 hold display h11 shown in FIG. 21 (12) is digested, and the first special figure display device 212 has started the symbol variation display. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. The variation time of the 49 symbol variation display including this symbol variation display is determined using the table 2 shown in FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c). Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a normal start opening (gate) 228 and a second variable winning opening 235 in the right region, and during the electric support and the second variable winning prize. This is a pachinko machine that needs to be right-handed when aiming at the mouth 235 (second attacker). When the 14-round jackpot game is over, the game is shifted to the electric support state, and while the electric support state continues, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character for prompting a right hand and a remaining number display. Also on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Also, the remaining number of times “49 remaining” is displayed. The remaining number of times display represents a period until the player's advantageous state ends. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (13), it is notified that the electric support state continues for another 49 symbol variation displays.

  While the symbol variation display started in FIG. 22 (13) is being executed, the game ball passes through the general diagram start opening (gate) 228, and the electoral determination of the normal diagram is won. There is a three-ball winning at the second special figure starting port 232.

  In FIG. 22 (14), the suspension of special figure 2 has been consumed, the second special figure display device 214 has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decoration symbol. The symbol variation display here is also a symbol variation display based on Table 2. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (14) includes a first special figure 2 hold display h21 and a second special figure 2 hold display h22 that represent the remaining hold of the special figure 2, respectively. It is displayed in the default display mode. Furthermore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (14) also displays a character for urging the right hand and displays the remaining number of times “48 times remaining”.

  Even during the execution of the symbol variation display started in FIG. 22 (14), the game ball passes through the general diagram start gate (gate) 228, and the electoration determination is made. There are two or more winnings in the second special figure starting port 232, and the special figure 2 hold is full. In addition to the first special figure 2 hold display h21 and the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (15) has a third special figure 2 hold display h23 and a fourth special display 2nd display. Each special figure 2 hold display h24 is displayed in the default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (16), “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, are stopped (determined).

  In FIG. 22 (17), the hold of special figure 2 is digested and the hold display becomes three, the second special figure display device 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also displays the variation display of the decoration symbol. Has been started. The symbol variation display here is also a symbol variation display based on Table 2. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (17) also displays a character for urging the right hand and displays the remaining number of times “47 remaining”.

  In this way, the symbol variation display based on the table 2 is repeatedly performed until the big hit game is started. During the big hit game, since the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the table 1 is used. In this example, after the big hit game shown in FIG. 21, the symbol change display is stopped in 48 symbols change display, and in FIG. 22 (18), the 49th symbol change display is started after the big hit game ends. ing. This symbol variation display corresponds to the last symbol variation display based on Table 2.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (19) does not win even the 49th symbol variation display, and “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped. Displayed (confirmed display).

  In FIG. 23 (20), the 50th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the 50th symbol variation display is determined using the table 4 shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (20) displays characters “Last”. The character display of “Last” corresponds to an example of the remaining number display of “Remaining 0 times”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (21), an effect as if developing into a battle effect is performed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, a girl character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a notification that "Battle starts when reaching reach" is made. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (22), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (23), while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b, the fluctuation variation occurs in the right symbol display area 208 c, and “decoration 4” and “decoration 5” are displayed. There is an effect that either one of them stops. Here, if “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, a reach state is reached and a battle effect is started. As described above, in the 50th symbol variation display, that is, the symbol variation display based on the table 4, if a battle effect, which is a kind of super reach effect, is started, the big hit is confirmed.

  However, in this example, the reach state is not reached, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (24) performs the second stop, and shows that “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Has been. The effects described above in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 23 (21) to (23) are the effects of the battle gasase tilt 2. In the present embodiment, in the symbol variation display immediately before the fall, an effect encouraging development to a battle effect (super reach) is always executed.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the 50th symbol variation display in this example, the effect of Battle Gase Aori 2 is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, and since it is in a state immediately before falling, a big hit is expected, but it does not develop to reach, and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5, “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”, which are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss, are stopped (determined). The variation time of the 50th symbol variation display is 12 seconds, and even if it is a loss symbol variation, a certain amount of variation time is given compared to the super shortening variation or shortening variation, and the player is in the electric support state. Finally, there are cases where the special figure 2 hold can be full. In this example, one step does not reach the reserved full tank of special figure 2 and the number of holds is three. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Two special figure 2 hold displays h22 and a third special figure 2 hold display h23 are both displayed in the default display mode.

  When the 50th symbol variation display is completed, the gaming state shifts to a non-electric support state. That is, a transition is made from the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. This special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal state) continues until the next jackpot game ends.

  In FIG. 24 (26), the 51st symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. From the 51st symbol variation display, the variation time is determined using the table 1 shown in FIGS. 10 (c) to 10 (e). Since the electric support state has ended, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (26) is displayed with characters that prompt the user to return to the left. The remaining number display is finished and disappears.

  During the execution of the symbol variation display started in FIG. 24 (26), there is one winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (27), “decoration 8”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 0”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped (determined). In addition, a first special figure 1 hold display h11 representing the first hold of special figure 1 is displayed.

  The pachinko machine of this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority fluctuation machine in which the symbol fluctuation of special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol fluctuation of special figure 1, and the first special fluctuation machine shown in FIG. 24 (27). The FIG. 2 hold display h21 is digested first, and then the second special figure 2 hold display h22 is digested. Due to the transition to the non-electric support state, the electric Chu is not released, the special figure 2 hold is not accumulated, and the special figure 2 hold number becomes zero. On the other hand, while the special figure 2 hold is being digested, there is another winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 has a hold number of two.

  In FIG. 24 (28), the special figure 2 is no longer on hold, the special figure 1 hold is digested and the hold display becomes one, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display is displayed. In the device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation display here is also the symbol variation display based on Table 1, and in the case of a loss, since the suspension of the special diagram 1 is not full, the symbol variation display is almost 10 seconds (timer number 3). .

  During the execution of the symbol variation display started in FIG. 24 (28), there is one winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding is increased by one. As shown in FIG. 24 (29), the hold display indicating the hold in FIG. 1 increased here is displayed in the display mode of the hold notice A after changing the hold. That is, the second special figure 1 hold display h12 is a hold display that also serves as a pre-reading notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (30), “decoration 7”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, are stopped (determined).

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 25 (31), the suspension of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. The second special figure 1 hold display h12 also serving as a pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 24 (30) shifts and is displayed as the first special figure 1 hold display h11 in FIG. 25 (31). .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (32), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped (determined). The combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 25 (32) is a chance to notify that a big hit is near.

  In FIG. 25 (33), the symbol variation display for the hold indicated by the first special figure 1 hold display h11 that also serves as the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 32 (32) is started, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. In 208, an effect as if developing into a battle effect is performed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, a girl character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a notification is made that “Large chance”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (35), “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. In addition, in the middle symbol display area 208b in which the decorative symbol fluctuating display continues, the characters “Intense heat” are also displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (36) develops into super reach. In the super reach state, the “decoration 5” that has been stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed in a small size in the lower left corner, and the main character appears on the entire screen to announce the start of the game. . Note that the hold display disappears (is not displayed) when the super reach state is entered.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (37), a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy and wins is displayed, and three “decoration 5” are displayed side by side in the upper left corner. The effects described above in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 25 (34) to 26 (37) are the effects of reach B big hit.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 26 (38), the symbol form of the special figure A (see FIG. 5 (a-1)) is stopped and displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, an odd number of decorative symbol combinations such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5” are stopped and displayed (determined display), and a “big hit” character is also displayed. ing. In the present embodiment, the stop display of an odd number of decorative symbol combinations such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5” can be said to be an example of a first effect. When the super reach state ends, the on-hold display is resumed. Here, there is a winning of three balls at the first special figure starting port 230 during the super reach state, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 208 includes, in addition to the first special figure 1 hold display h11 and the second special figure 1 hold display h12, a third special figure 1 hold display h13 and a fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. It is displayed in the default display mode.

  Eventually, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 of the 12th round is shown in FIG. 26 (39). During the big hit game, the hold display disappears (hidden). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (39), an opening of button effect is displayed. The button effects shown in FIGS. 26 (39) and (40) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 21 (8) and (9), and the chance character 136 shown in FIG. Will appear in the 15th round, and the chance to win a certainty will come. In addition, since 15R big hit is won here, it actually advances to 15 rounds.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (41), the player presses the chance button 136. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (41), the character of the bancho appears and the character display “Yataze” is also displayed. That is, it is notified that the process proceeds to the 15th round. That is, the display as shown in FIG. 26 (41) is an example of the first effect.

  In Fig. 26 (42), the player enters the 14th round, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 42 (42) notifies that the attacker is to win a prize in the next round, that is, the 15th round. This notification is a notification for obtaining a probability change, that is, for establishing the third game condition (or the first condition). Here, although only the attacker is notified here, notification that prompts the second attacker (second variable winning opening 235) to win may be performed. Moreover, you may perform the alert | report which encourages a right strike.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 27 (43) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the 15th round. FIG. 27 (43) also shows a state in which the second attacker (second variable winning opening 235) is opened.

  In FIG. 27 (44), there is a winning at the second attacker (second variable winning opening 235), and the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the probability variation has been confirmed. Thus, it can be said that the notification of probability variation acquisition as shown in FIG. 27 (44) is an example of the fifth effect. That is, the fifth effect can be said to be an effect that can at least notify that the second gaming state is reached after the big hit game is finished.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (45), an end effect of the big hit game is performed. Further, in this example, the special figure 1 hold gradually increases from FIG. 25 (35), and at the end of the big hit game, the special figure 1 hold is full. In addition, during the big hit game, 1/100 probability of hitting the normal figure is determined, the electric Chu (second special figure starting port 232) is opened, and the special figure 2 hold is also full. In the end effect of the big hit game, the hold display is resumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (45) displays the hold display of special figure 1 and the hold display of special figure 2 by four. (H11-h14, h21-h24).

  Here, the second game condition is established by winning the special figure A, and the third game condition (or the second game condition) (or the second attacker) has won a prize. , The first condition) is also established, and when the big hit game is completed, the display changes to the probability variation state and the electric support state while the symbol variation display is performed 100 times (corresponding to an example of the first period). Further, until the next big hit, the table set 1 (corresponding to an example of the second group) shown in FIG. 10A is used.

  In FIG. 27 (46), since it is a special figure 2 priority change machine, the special figure 2 hold indicated by the first special figure 2 hold display h211 is digested, and the second special figure display device 214 displays the symbol fluctuation display. The decorative symbol display device 208 has also started displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner. The variation time of the symbol variation display for 99 times including the symbol variation display is determined using the table 3 shown in FIGS. 11 (d) to 11 (f). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (46) has a character display for urging the right hand, a character display of “probability change” for notifying that the state of probability change is present, and a remaining number display of “99 times remaining”. Has been made. The remaining number display here is informed that the probability variation state (or the power support state) continues for another 99 symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display based on the table 3 is repeatedly performed until the big hit game is started. In this example, after the big hit game is finished, the loss symbol is stopped and displayed in 98 symbol variation displays. In (47), the 99th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. This symbol variation display corresponds to the last symbol variation display based on Table 3. Even in the 99th symbol variation display, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (48) has “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss. Stop display (determined display). During the 99th symbol variation display, there is a single winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and the special figure 2 hold is full.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 28 (49), the 100th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the 100th symbol variation display is determined using the table 5 shown in FIGS. 12 (c) and 12 (d). On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (49), the characters “Last” are displayed. The character display of “Last” corresponds to an example of the remaining number display of “Remaining 0 times”. In addition, there is an effect that seems to develop into a battle effect. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, a girl character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a notification that "Battle starts when reaching reach" is made. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (50), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (51), while the decorative symbol continues to be variably displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b, shaking fluctuation occurs in the right symbol display region 208c, and “decoration 7” and “decoration 6”. There is an effect that either one of them stops. Here, if “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, a reach state is reached and a battle effect is started. As described above, in the symbol variation display for the 100th time, that is, the symbol variation display based on the table 5, if a battle effect (reach state) which is a kind of super reach effect is started, the big hit is confirmed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (52), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, a reach state is formed, a character display of “battle start” is made, and the big hit is confirmed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (53), a battle effect A is performed, and a samurai character and a Tono-sama character appear. In addition, a character is displayed as “Push out the spear with a button” to press the chance button 136 to perform a battle and urge the spear character to be expelled from the screen. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the pattern 136a of the chance button 136, and also includes a remaining time display bar 136b indicating the remaining time of the acceptance period of the chance button press. It is displayed.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 29 (55), the player presses the chance button 136. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (55), the big hit confirmation effect is displayed, “decoration 7” is displayed in large size, and a Tono-like character that performs a peace sign is also displayed. The effect described above in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 28 (49) to 29 (55) is the battle effect A. Note that FIGS. 28 (49) to 28 (51) can be seen as inferior portions of the battle effect, and the battle effect A can be seen as FIGS. 28 (52) to 29 (55).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (56) shows a state where the third stop is performed and three “decorations 7” are stopped and displayed (confirmed display). The variation time of the 100th symbol variation display is 35 seconds. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (56), four special figure 1 hold indications representing the hold of the special figure 1 are displayed (h11 to h14), and the special figure 2 indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The hold display is also increased by one and displayed four (h21 to h24).

  Next, a specific example of an effect that rarely occurs in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect that rarely occurs in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the state shown in FIG. 30 (1), as in the state shown in FIG. 26 (38), the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the symbol form of the special figure A (see FIG. 5 (a-1)). In the decorative symbol display device 208, an odd number of decorative symbol combinations such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5” are stopped and displayed (determined display), and a “big hit” character is also displayed. It is in a state. It should be noted that four special figure 1 hold displays representing the hold in special figure 1 are displayed (h11 to h14), and no special figure 2 hold display representing the hold in special figure 2 is displayed.

  Eventually, the big hit game is started, and FIG. 30 (2) to FIG. 30 (6) are the same as FIG. 26 (39) to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 31 (7) shows the state of a 15-round jackpot game. FIG. 31 (7) shows a state immediately before the opened second attacker (second variable winning opening 235) is closed after the opening time has elapsed. In other words, in this example, the player does not know that the player must aim at the second variable prize opening 235 in the 15th round or forgets that the second variable prize opening 235 has no prize. This is an example in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (7), a character display indicating that the third game condition (or the first condition) has not been established as “what are you doing” along with the character display of the bancho. It has also been made. However, for those who have been alerted to win the attacker in the 15th round in FIG. 30 (5), but who have not noticed this alert at all, or who have missed this alert, this character The display may not make sense. Thus, it can be said that the effect as shown in FIG. 31 (7) is an example of the sixth effect. That is, the sixth effect can be said to be an effect that can at least notify that the first gaming state is reached after the big hit game is finished.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (8), the end effect of the big hit game is performed. In addition, on this decorative symbol display device 208, four special figure 1 hold displays representing the hold of special figure 1 are displayed (h11 to h14), and four special figure 2 hold displays representing the hold of special figure 2 are also displayed. (H21 to h24).

  Here, the second game condition is established by winning the special figure A, but the third game condition (or the first game condition) is not obtained because the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) has not been won. The first condition) is not established, and when the big hit game is completed, the display shifts to the electric support state in the non-probable change state while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times (corresponding to an example of the second period). Further, until the next big hit, the table set 1 (corresponding to an example of the second group) shown in FIG. 10A is used. As described above, the second game condition is satisfied, but the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied, so the state shifts to the electric support state with the uncertain change state, and the table is set until the next big hit. The state in which set 1 is used corresponds to the first state.

  In FIG. 31 (9), since it is a special figure 2 priority change machine, the special figure 2 hold indicated by the first special figure 2 hold display h21 is digested, and the second special figure display device 214 displays the symbol fluctuation display. The decorative symbol display device 208 has also started displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner. The variation time of the symbol variation display for 99 times including the symbol variation display is determined using the table 3 shown in FIGS. 11 (d) to 11 (f). However, even if the big hit game ends, the non-probability change state remains, and the electric support state continues only for 50 symbol variation displays after the big hit game ends. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (9), a character display for urging the right hand and a remaining number display of “49 remaining times” are displayed. The remaining number display here is informed that the electric support state continues for another 49 symbol variation displays. In addition, since it is a non-probability change state, the character display of "probability change" is not made.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display based on the table 3 is repeatedly performed until the big hit game is started. In this example, after the big hit game is finished, the loss symbol is stopped and displayed in all 48 symbol variation displays. In (11), the 49th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. This symbol variation display also corresponds to the symbol variation display based on the table 3.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  Even in the 49th symbol variation display, no big hit is made, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (13) has “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss. Stop display (determined display). In addition, on this decorative symbol display device 208, four special figure 1 hold displays indicating the hold of special figure 1 are displayed (h11 to h14), and four special figure 2 hold displays indicating the hold of special figure 2 are also displayed. (H21 to h24).

  In FIG. 32 (14), the 50th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the 50th symbol variation display is also determined using the table 3 as before. However, since it is the symbol variation display in which the power support state is the last, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (14) displays “Last”. The character display of “Last” corresponds to an example of the remaining number display of “Remaining 0 times”. Even in Table 3, in the case of the display of fluctuations in the pattern of the loss, there is a case where the battle gaze tilt 1 is performed, but since the number of holdings of the special figure 2 here is four, the table shown in FIG. In many cases, the timer number 2 (2 seconds) becomes an extremely shortened loss. In this example as well, the variation time of the 50th symbol variation display is 2 seconds, and the effect of Battle Gase Aori 1 is not performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. "Decoration 5"-"Decoration 5"-"Decoration 4" are stopped and displayed (determined display). The decorative symbol display device 208 displays four special figure 1 hold displays (h11 to h14) representing the special figure 1 hold, and three special figure 2 hold displays representing the special figure 2 hold. (H21 to h23).

  As explained with reference to FIG. 23, if the game is in the electric support state (game nature using the table set 2), the last (change immediately before the fall) symbol variation display is a case of loss. Even battle gasase tilt occurs. However, in the table set 1 based on the special figure A, since the table 3 is used, there is a high probability of producing an uncomfortable effect in which the losing is confirmed by the ultrashort fluctuation of 2 seconds. In some cases, the effect that remains uncomfortable can function as a notification effect for notifying a portion different from the original game performance of a so-called structure probability change machine, in which a probability change state is not given unless a predetermined area is won.

  When the 49th symbol variation display is completed, if the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 is 3 or less, the table shown in FIG. 11 (f) is used. There is a case where it is possible to perform an effect without a sense of incongruity with a high probability of occurrence.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  When the 50th symbol variation display is completed, the gaming state shifts to a non-electric support state. That is, a transition is made from the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. This special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal state) continues until the next jackpot game ends. However, the variation time of the symbol variation display is still determined using Table 3. However, even when the same table 3 is used, the variation time is the same, but in the electric support state (normal high probability state) and the non-electric support state (normal low probability state), the decorative symbol display device 208 There may be cases where the production mode is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 9 (d), if it is the fluctuation time of timer number 4 (10 seconds), the performance mode of Battle Gaseori 1 is performed in the electric support state (normally high probability state), If it is a support state (ordinary low-probability state), a production mode of deviation is usually performed. Moreover, if it is the fluctuation time of the timer number 6 (30 seconds), the effect mode of battle A defeat is performed in the electric support state (general figure high probability state), but in the non electric support state (general figure low probability state). If there is, a super reach A losing effect mode is performed. Furthermore, if it is the fluctuation time of timer number 7 (35 seconds), the battle A victory effect mode is performed in the electric support state (general figure high probability state), but in the non electric support state (general figure low probability state). If there is, the reach aspect of reach A jackpot is performed.

  In FIG. 33 (16), the 51st symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (16), a character display that prompts the user to return to the left is displayed since the non-electric support state has been entered. The remaining number display is finished and disappears. Here, the remaining three special figure 2 holds are digested in order. The 51st symbol variation display is a 10-second variation time of the timer number 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a normal loss effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (17), the symbol variation display for the last hold of the remaining special figure 2 is finished, and “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost. -“Decoration 6” is stopped (determined). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (17) does not display any special figure 2 hold display indicating the hold of the special figure 2, but the special figure 1 hold display indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is not displayed. Four are displayed (h11 to h14).

  In FIG. 33 (18), the first special symbol display device 212 has started the symbol variation display, and the ornamental symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the ornament symbol. The ornament symbol display device shown in FIG. In 208, “decoration 7”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the loss, is stopped (determined). In the decorative symbol display device 208 here, the special figure 1 hold display is reduced by one and displayed three (h11 to h13).

  In the case of the losing symbol variation display after the 51st time based on the table 3, the variation time of 10 seconds of the timer number 4 is almost all cases, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the normal losing effect. Only when the number of holdings in FIG. 2 is four, the timer number 2 is subjected to a super-short fluctuation of 2 seconds. However, in this embodiment, one universal start port 228 is provided in the right region. The timer number 2 is not selected unless it is intentionally right-handed. When the actual gaming state is the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state, the rendering mode corresponding to the timer number 2 is prohibited, so the default gaming state of the table 3 used (the table 3 used) The production is executed using the production mode of the super shortening loss used in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) instead.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 34 (20), the 52nd symbol variation display is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 has “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss. The state of the stop display (determined display) is shown.

  In FIG. 34 (21), the 53rd symbol variation display is started, the first special symbol display device 212 has started symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variation symbol display. . Note that there is only one special figure 1 hold display h11.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (22), during the 53rd symbol variation display started in FIG. 21 (21), a girl character is displayed as a normal notice, and may be developed into a reach. Is informed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (23) has developed into a reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (24) has started a super reach A effect. The 53rd symbol variation display is a symbol variation display of timer number 6 for 30 seconds. At the stage of FIG. 24 (24), there is a single winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 becomes two.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (25), the super reach A effect is continued, and the losing confirmation effect is displayed. Even at this stage, there is another winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the special figure 1 is held on the number 3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displaying the losing effect is displayed. Three displays (h11 to h13) are displayed.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (26) shows a state in which “decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). ing. In addition, there is another one-game winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and four special figure 1 hold displays are displayed (h11 to h14).

  In FIG. 35 (27), the 54th symbol variation display is started, and “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. The state of the stop display (determined display) is shown.

  In FIG. 35 (28), the 55th symbol variation display is started, the first special symbol display device 212 has started symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variation symbol display. . Note that there are two remaining special figure 1 hold indications h11.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 35 (29), the design mode of the special figure A (see FIG. 5 (a-1)) is stopped and displayed, and the decorative design display device 208 has no reach effect. Suddenly, an odd number of combinations of decorative symbols such as “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are stopped and displayed (determined display), and “big hit” characters are also displayed. That is, in the 55th symbol variation display, a super shortened big hit such as 1 second of the timer number 1 is performed based on the table 3 shown in FIG. In the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the table 1 shown in FIG. 10C is originally used, and the selection probability of the super-shortened jackpot of the timer number 1 is 1/65536, but here, FIG. The use of the table 3 shown in d) increases the selection probability to about 45%. Thus, compared with the case where the table 1 is used, in appearance, there is a high probability that it will be a huge hit with overwhelmingly super shortening. That is, there is a case where it is possible to hit a big hit with a very rare change that can hardly be seen in normal times, and it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lost due to missed probability change.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example in which the 100th symbol variation display is reached without making a big hit from the state shown in FIG. 35 (26).

  The 99th symbol variation display is performed, and the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 36A displays the special symbol F (see FIG. 5A-1) in a stopped manner, and the decorative symbol is displayed. On the display device 208, “decoration 7”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3”, which are combinations of decorative patterns for losing, are stopped (determined). The 99th symbol variation display is the last symbol variation display based on Table 3. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36A, two special figure 1 hold displays are displayed (h12, h12).

  In FIG. 36 (b), the 100th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the 100th symbol variation display is determined using the table 5 shown in FIGS. 12 (c) and 12 (d). Even if it is a big hit symbol variation display in which the timer number 7 of 35 seconds is always selected, or a loss variation variation display in which the timer number 5 of 12 seconds is always selected, the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability In the state, the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the reach production of super reach A is performed and a big hit is made, or the reach production of normal reach is performed and lost.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36C, a reach state is formed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 7 ”-“ Decoration 4 ”is stopped (determined). That is, in this example, the effect is a normal reach loss. In the table 1 shown in FIG. 10 (d) and FIG. 10 (e), which are originally used in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the normal reach loss of 12 seconds is performed. There are cases where it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity by changing the production mode according to the gaming state.

  In the case of a big hit, the reach production of Super Reach A shown in FIG. 20 is always performed.

  Here, as long as the time approximates to 12 seconds, it is possible to adopt time adjustment by fluctuation of fluctuation or the like. By shaking fluctuation, it can give a little uncomfortable feeling and can notify that it was in a special state, but it can also be said that the uncomfortable feeling is minimized.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above.

  FIG. 37 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) of FIG. 1 in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 (a-2) The example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine of 2 embodiment is shown.

  In FIG. 37 (a-1) and FIG. 37 (a-2), six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display.

  Also in the second embodiment, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 are common. In the second embodiment, all the big hits are big hits with 15 rounds of electric support, but in Special Figure 2, the big hit symbols are all big hits (special big hits) scheduled to acquire certain variation. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are jackpots (special jackpots) scheduled to be probable, and “Special Figure C” and “Special Figure D” are scheduled to acquire probable changes. There is no jackpot.

  FIG. 37 (b) is a diagram summarizing the actions of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG.

  The special figure A in the special figure 1 is that the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) in the 15th round. Opens for 25 seconds.

  The special figure B in the special figure 1 is that the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) in the 15th round. First opens for 0.1 seconds, goes through a 3 second closure period and opens for 24.9 seconds.

  In the special figure C and D in the special figure 1, the first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable winning opening 235 (second Attacker) is only open for 0.1 seconds, and there is almost no chance of winning.

  Also in the second embodiment, the third game condition (or the first condition) is established by winning the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) in the 15th round. Therefore, in the special figures C and D of the special figure 1, although the possibility of the probability variation acquisition is not 0%, the possibility is very low, and it is a big hit that the probability variation acquisition is not scheduled. On the other hand, in the special figures A and B of the special figure 1, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is sufficient, which is a big hit that is expected to acquire a certain variation.

  Further, the action of the attacker in the case of the special figure A and B in the special figure 2 is the same as the action of the attacker in the case of the special figure A in the special figure 1, and the attacker in the case of the special figures C and D in the special figure 2 The operation of is the same as the operation of the attacker in the case of special figure B in special figure 1. Therefore, all of the jackpot symbols (special charts A to D) of the special figure 2 have a sufficient opening time of the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker), and are big hits that are expected to be acquired with certainty. It should be noted that the operation of the attacker in the case of the special drawings A to D in the special drawing 2 may be the same as the operation of the attacker in the case of the special drawing A in the special drawing 1.

  Moreover, the table set and each table in 2nd Embodiment are the same as what is shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 38 (1), the symbol form of the special figure C (see FIG. 37 (a-1)) which is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired is stopped and displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the character display of “big hit” is also displayed. . Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (1) displays four special figure 1 hold displays (h11 to h14). In this way, an effect that is not scheduled to acquire a certain variation such that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped (determined display) is equivalent to the second effect. To do.

  Eventually, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 of the 12th round is shown in FIG. 38 (2). The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the opening of the button effect. The button effect here is that when a chance character 136 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed and a longest character appears, the second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) is played for a long time (for example, 25 seconds) in 15 rounds. And 24.9 seconds), and there is a chance that the chance to acquire certainty will come. In addition, since it is an effect to the last, and only the special figure C is won, in fact, the second attacker does not open for a long time (for example, 25 seconds, 24, 9 seconds), and for a short time (here, 0. 0). 1 second) Only open.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (3), the player presses the chance button 136. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (3), an old character appears, but a character mark “chance” is displayed with a question mark.

  In FIG. 38 (4), the 14th round is entered, and in FIG. 38 (5), the 15th round of the final round is started. FIG. 38 (5) shows a state in which the second attacker (second variable winning opening 235) is opened, but the second attacker's opening time here is a short 0.1 second. It is difficult to expect a prize.

  However, in FIG. 38 (6), it is shown that the second attacker opened by chance for 0.1 second has been won, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed with a letter indicating that the probability change has been obtained, such as “Probability change”.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that the third game condition (or the first condition) may be satisfied even when the first effect is not performed.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (7), an end effect of the big hit game is performed. Also, in this example, during the jackpot game, 1/100 probability of hitting the normal figure, the electric Chu (second special figure start port 232) is opened, and the special figure 2 hold increases to full. ing. In the end effect of the big hit game, the hold display is resumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (7) displays the hold display of special figure 1 and the hold display of special figure 2 by four. (H11-h14, h21-h24).

  Here, assuming that special figure C is won in special figure 1, it is assumed that the second game condition is satisfied, but the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied, and FIG. ) After the big hit game, the table set 2 shown in FIG. 10B is used. In addition, the game state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the electric support state is maintained while the symbol variation display is performed 50 times after the big hit game. However, in this example, because the third game condition (or the first condition) is also established by chance, the game state after the big hit game becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state, and the big hit game After that, while the symbol variation display is performed 100 times, the electric support state is maintained. The table set 2 is used as the table set. In this way, after the second performance is performed, the third game condition (or the first condition) is established, so that the state changes to the probability change state and the table set 2 is used until the next big hit. This state corresponds to the fourth state.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 38 (6), if the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied because there is no winning for the second attacker, The table set 2 shown in FIG. 10B is used. As described above, after the second performance is performed, the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied, the electric support state is entered, and the table set 2 is used until the next big hit. Such a state corresponds to the third state.

  The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority change machine, and in FIG. 39 (8), the special figure 2 hold represented by the first special figure 2 hold display h211 is digested, and the second special figure display device. Reference numeral 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the ornament symbol display device 208 also starts the variation symbol display. Also, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (8) has a character display that prompts the user to make a right stroke, a character display that indicates “probable change”, and a remaining number display that indicates “99 remaining times”. Has been made. The remaining number display here is informed that the probability variation state (or the power support state) continues for another 99 symbol variation displays.

  In addition, the variation time of the 49 symbol variation displays including the symbol variation display is determined using the table 2 shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display based on the table 2 is repeatedly performed until the big hit game is started. In this example, in the first symbol variation display after the big hit game is finished, as shown in FIG. On the symbol display device 208, “decoration 0”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped (determined). Also, in the 25th symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 39 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (here, “decoration 4” − “decoration 0” − “decoration 7”). ) Is stopped (confirmed).

  In FIG. 39 (11), the 26th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. This symbol variation display is also a symbol variation display based on Table 2. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (12), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (13), while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b, the fluctuation variation occurs in the right symbol display area 208 c, and “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are displayed. There is an effect that either one of them stops. Here, if “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, a reach state is reached and a battle effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (14), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, a reach state is formed, and the characters “battle start” are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (15), it is informed that the battle effect B is started, the Tono-sama character appears, and the bowling battle is started. In this bowling battle, it is also notified that a big hit is confirmed if a strike occurs.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (16), the bowling battle is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The effect described above in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 40 (14) to (17) is the battle effect B. This battle effect B is an effect that does not originally appear in the table 3 of the table set 1. In other words, when the table set is 1, special figure 1 is won when special figure A or special figure B is won and a certain change is obtained as scheduled, it is an effect that does not appear. Most of the players who have seen this battle production B do not feel uncomfortable, but some players who are familiar with this pachinko machine understand that it is a rare value production. May function as a special state notification.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (18), an odd number of combinations of decorative symbols such as “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are stopped (determined) and “big hit” is displayed. Is also displayed. As described above, in this embodiment, the effect of stopping and displaying (decision display) an odd number of decorative symbol combinations such as “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” that is determined to be a 15R special big hit is provided. It can be said to be an example of the first effect.

  In the present embodiment, the super reach like the battle effect may be executed only when the reach state is formed by the “decoration 7” in the effect of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. Alternatively, the super-reach executed when the reach state is formed by the “decoration 7” has a higher degree of reliability than the case where the reach state is formed by other decorative symbols and the super-reach is developed. You may comprise. Alternatively, when the reach state is formed by “decoration 7”, it may be configured to be a big hit.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example in which the 50th symbol variation display is reached without making a big hit since the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 39 (7).

  The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 of the 49th time is performed, and the symbol form of the special figure F (see FIG. 37 (a-2)) is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4”-“decoration 0”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is stopped (determined). The 49th symbol variation display is a symbol variation display based on Table 2. In addition, in the 1st special figure display apparatus 212 shown to Fig.41 (a), the symbol aspect of special figure C (refer FIG.37 (3a-1)) is stopped display, and if it is original, an uncertain change state ( It should be a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), but here it is a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41A displays four special figure 1 hold displays (h11 to h14) and four special figure 2 hold displays (h21 to h24).

  In FIG. 41B, the 50th symbol variation display is started after the end of the big hit game. The variation time of the 50th symbol variation display is determined using the table 4 shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b). Even if it is a jackpot symbol variation display in which either one of 35 seconds timer number 7 or 65 seconds timer number 9 is always selected, it is a loss symbol variation display in which 12 seconds timer number 5 is always selected. However, as in the special figure low-probability normal figure high-probability state, the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. In other words, even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the battle reach super-reach is performed to make a big hit, or the battle gaze tilt 2 effect is made to lose. When the actual game state is the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state, the default game of the table 4 that is the table used is applied because the production mode corresponding to the timer number 9 is prohibited. An effect is executed using the effect mode of battle B victory used in the state (the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) instead.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (c), an effect as if developing into a battle effect is performed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, while the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner, a girl character appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a notification that "Battle starts when reaching reach" is made. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41D, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (e), while the decorative symbol continues to be variably displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b, shaking fluctuation occurs in the right symbol display region 208c, and “decoration 7” and “decoration 6”. There is an effect that either one of them stops. Here, if “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, the reach state is reached. However, in the ornamental symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (f), the second stop is performed and the right symbol display area 208 “Decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in 208c, and the reach state is not formed. The effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 41 (c) to 41 (f) is the effect of the battle gasase tilt 2.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  In the case of the 50th symbol variation display in this example, in the case of a loss, the effect of the battle gasse tilt 2 is always performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. “Decoration 7”-“Decoration 7”-“Decoration 6”, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped (determined).

  In FIG. 42 (h), the symbol variation display of the 51st special drawing 2 is started. From the 51st symbol variation display, the variation time is determined using the table 1 shown in FIGS. 10 (c) to 10 (e). In Table 1, if the suspension of the special figure 1 is full, the symbol fluctuation display of timer number 3 is likely to be a five-second symbol fluctuation display in the case of the loss symbol fluctuation display. On the other hand, when the table 3 is used, if the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is full, the symbol number 2 of the timer number 2 is likely to be changed, and a difference of 3 seconds occurs in the changing time. However, the difference of 3 seconds can be adjusted by fluctuation of shaking. In the first place, in the probability variation state, a long variation time of 65 seconds is not prepared in the table 3, and the symbol variation display of the super-shortening system is repeated probabilistically, so that the hold is quickly digested, and the player is in an advantageous state. Although a special state can be notified by repeating the 5-second symbol variation display of timer number 3 in addition to the regular route probability change state using table set 1 (using table 3). It is also possible that the case) is slightly more advantageous to the player from the standpoint of digestion efficiency than the irregular probability change state using the table set 2 (when using the table 1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (i), “decoration 4”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, are stopped and displayed.

  If the 100th symbol variation display of the big hit game is lost, when using the table set 1, the timer number 5 is always selected from the table 5, and the decoration symbol display device 208 produces the effect of the battle gasase tilt 2 Is done. On the other hand, even when the table set 2 is used, if the timer number 5 having the same variation time is selected from the table 1, the effect of the battle gasase tilt 2 is performed (see FIG. 9D). If the 100th symbol variation display of the jackpot game is a jackpot, when using the table set 1, the timer number 7 is always selected from the table 5, and the decoration symbol display device 208 produces an effect of battle A victory. Is done. On the other hand, even when the table set 2 is used, if the timer number 7 having the same variation time is selected from the table 1, a battle A victory effect is performed (see FIG. 9D). Furthermore, even when a variable time not selected in Table 5 is selected in Table 1, for example, if timer number 4 is used, the effect of Battle Gaseori 1 is performed, and in other cases, the time is adjusted by the effect. .

  FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of the attacker when the special figure B is won in the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

  43 (a) to 43 (c) are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (2) to (3), and thus description thereof is omitted. In FIG. 43 (d), the 15th round of the final round is started. At this stage, the old and middle characters are still displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and there is a strong possibility that the special figure C or the special figure D that is not scheduled to be acquired is likely to be a big hit. In this state, the second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) performs a short opening of 0.1 second once. The opening for 0.1 second here has an effect that makes it seem for a moment that it is the opening of 15 rounds of special drawings C and D in FIG.

  After a short opening of 0.1 second for the second attacker, after a closing period of 3 seconds, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Appears and the second attacker (second variable prize opening 235) starts opening for a long time of 24.9 seconds.

  FIG. 43 (f) shows that the second attacker who has opened the game has won a prize, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The characters to be displayed are displayed.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above.

  FIG. 44 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) of FIG. 1 in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 44 (a-2) The example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine of 2 embodiment is shown.

  In FIG. 44 (a-1) and FIG. 44 (a-2), six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display.

  Also in 3rd Embodiment, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 are common. In the third embodiment as well as in the second embodiment, the big hits are all 15-round probability variable big hits (special big hits). Big hit), which is the same as in the second embodiment. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" are probable big hits (special big hits) scheduled to acquire electric support, and "Special Figure C" and "Special Figure D" acquire electric support. It is a promising big hit (special jackpot) that is not scheduled.

  FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram summarizing the actions of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG.

  The special figure A in the special figure 1 is that the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) in the 15th round. Opens for 25 seconds.

  The special figure B in the special figure 1 is that the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) in the 15th round. First opens for 0.1 seconds, goes through a 3 second closure period and opens for 24.9 seconds.

  In the special figure C and D in the special figure 1, the first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 25 seconds from the first round to the 14th round, and the second variable winning opening 235 (second Attacker) is only open for 0.1 seconds, and there is almost no chance of winning.

  In the third embodiment, the third game condition (or the first condition) is established by winning the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) in the 15th round, and the electric support is provided after the big hit game. A state (short-time state) is given. Therefore, in the special figures C and D of the special figure 1, the possibility of acquiring electric support is not 0%, but the possibility is extremely low, and it is a big hit that is not scheduled to acquire electric support. On the other hand, in the special figures A and B of the special figure 1, the opening time of the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is sufficient, and it is a big hit scheduled to acquire electric support.

  Further, the action of the attacker in the case of the special figure A and B in the special figure 2 is the same as the action of the attacker in the case of the special figure A in the special figure 1, and the attacker in the case of the special figures C and D in the special figure 2 The operation of is the same as the operation of the attacker in the case of special figure B in special figure 1. Therefore, all of the big hit symbols (special illustrations A to D) of the special figure 2 are the big hits where the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is sufficiently open and the electric support is scheduled to be acquired. It should be noted that the operation of the attacker in the case of the special drawings A to D in the special drawing 2 may be the same as the operation of the attacker in the case of the special drawing A in the special drawing 1.

  FIG. 44 (c) is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. 1, and FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. These tables are also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Even in the third embodiment, in the low-probability state of the ordinary figure, the ordinary drawing lottery is only hit with a probability of 1/100. Therefore, the electric chew is hardly opened, and the probability of winning the second special figure starting port 232 is low. The table shown in FIG. 44C corresponds to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure low probability (special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability, special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability) state. For reference, FIG. 44 (c) shows a control state after the big hit game corresponding to the stop pattern at the time of the big hit in the special figure 1. A circle mark indicates “added”, and a cross mark indicates “none”.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary high probability state, the electric Chu is almost open, and the big hit in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the big hit in the special figure 1, so the player aims at the second special figure starting port 232. The table shown in FIG. 44D corresponds to a table set selection table that is often used in the case of the normal figure high probability (special figure high probability normal figure high probability) state. For reference, FIG. 44D shows a control state after the big hit game corresponding to the stop pattern at the time of the big hit in the special figure 2.

  Note that in both FIG. 44C and FIG. 44D, electric support is not provided unless the second variable winning opening 235 opened in the 15th round is won.

  From the table shown in FIG. 44 (c) and the table shown in FIG. 44 (d), when the special figure determination result is a big hit symbol in which the second special figure starting port 232 is opened for a long time, the table set 1 is If it is selected and the special figure determination result is a big hit symbol in which the second special figure starting port 232 is only opened for a short period, the table set 2 is selected.

  FIG. 45A is a diagram for explaining tables used in the table set.

  In the third embodiment, since all jackpot symbols have certain probability variations, there is no special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. For this reason, there are only three types of tables used in the table set: Table 1, Table 3, and Table 5. Table 3 is a table originally used in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and table 5 is a table originally used in the state immediately before the fall in the special figure high probability general figure high probability state. In the third embodiment, the table 1 is originally a table used in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and is also a table used in the special figure high probability general figure low probability state.

  FIG. 45B is a diagram for explaining timer numbers.

  The diagram shown in FIG. 45 (b) is a diagram obtained by deleting the effect mode of the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state from the diagram shown in FIG. 9 (d). In addition, the rendering mode performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) according to the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state is decorated according to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state which is the same non-electric support state. This is the same as the effect mode performed by the symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 45C is a diagram for explaining the table set 1 in the third embodiment.

  The table set 1 in the third embodiment is used when shifting to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game. After the big hit, until the 99th symbol variation display, the table 3 for the special symbol high probability common symbol high probability state is used, and in the symbol variation display of the 100th symbol, that is, the symbol variation display in the probability variation state and the last electric support state. Table 5 is used. When the 101st symbol variation display is started, the state is shifted to the non-probable change state and the non-electric support state, and the table 1 for the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is used.

  FIG. 45D is a diagram for explaining the table set 2 in the third embodiment.

  The table set 2 in the third embodiment is used when the non-electric support state remains after the big hit game ends. That is, when the special figure C or the special figure D is won in the special figure 1, only the table 1 is set, and the table 1 is continuously used until the next big hit game is finished. For this reason, compared with 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment, the production which becomes uncomfortable during a special state increases, or a production is biased.

[Embodiment 4]
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above.

  In the first to third embodiments described above, at the timing when the special figure is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, it corresponds to the type of special figure to be stopped and displayed. In the embodiment described below, the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (determined display) on the decorative symbol display device 208. However, in the embodiment described below, the first special diagram display device 212 or the second special diagram display device 214 is used. Before the special figure is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 when the symbol pattern ("Special figure A" to "Special figure D") is a big hit In addition, after temporarily stopping (temporarily stopping) the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols (temporary stop symbol) of a plurality of types on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbols are displayed again (re-displayed). Strange Display), and an effect mode for deriving and displaying a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols to be finally stopped (determined display) at the timing when the special figure is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 What has the function which can implement is demonstrated.

  In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 is an example shown in FIG. 37 (a-1), and the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 is FIG. An example shown in a-2) will be described below. It should be noted that the first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) and the second variable at each big hit in special figure A to special figure D in special figure 1 and each big hit in special figure A to special figure D in special figure 2 Since the operation mode of the winning opening 235 (second attacker) is as described above in the second embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

<First sub-control unit decoration design determination process>
Next, the first sub-control unit decoration symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of the decorative symbol determination process of the first sub-control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit decoration symbol determination process shown in FIG. 46 is an effect in the first sub-control unit main process that is determined to have received the symbol variation start command in the command process (FIG. 14A: step S307). This is a process executed in the control process (step S309).

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 acquires information representing the special symbol stop symbol included in the symbol variation start command described above (step S3093a).

  CPU404 determines whether the information acquired in step S3093a is the information which shows the stop symbol of special figure 2 (step S3093b). When the CPU 404 does not determine that the acquired information is information indicating the stop symbol of the special figure 2, that is, when it is determined that the acquired information is information indicating the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (step S3093b: NO). ), A combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is determined based on the decorative symbol determination table for special figure 1 (step S3093c).

  FIG. 47A is a diagram showing a special hit determination design table for special figure 1.

  When the stop symbol of the special figure 1 is from “special figure A” to “special figure D”, the CPU 404 refers to the special figure 1 jackpot decorative symbol determination table shown in FIG. The special figure 1 jackpot decoration symbol determination table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  For example, the CPU 404 extracts a dedicated random number value that is stored in the RAM 408 and whose numerical value is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and displays a combination of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed from the stopped symbol of the special figure 1 and the extracted random number value. decide. For example, when the stop symbol of special figure 1 is “special figure A” or “special figure B”, “decoration 0” − “decoration 0” − “decoration 0” is 8% as a combination of the ornamental symbols. "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 1" is 10%, "Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2" is 8%, "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 3"-"Decoration 3" 15%, "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" 8%, "decoration 5"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5" 10%, "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-" Decoration 6 is 8%, Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7 is 15%, Decoration 8-Decoration 8-Decoration 8 is 8%, Decoration 9-Decoration 9 ”-“ decoration 9 ”is selected at a rate of 10%. That is, when the special symbol 1 is “Special A” or “Special B”, an odd number of decorations is used rather than a combination of three even numbered decorative symbols (a combination of the first decorative symbols). The combination of three symbols (second decorative symbol combination) is configured to be more easily selected. Further, for example, when the special symbol 1 is “Special C” or “Special D”, 18% of “decoration 0”-“decoration 0”-“decoration 0” are combinations of the ornamental symbols. “Decoration 1” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 1” is 3%, “decoration 2” — “decoration 2” — “decoration 2” is 18%, “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” "0%", "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" 18%, "decoration 5"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5" 3%, "decoration 6"-"decoration 6" -"Decoration 6" is 18%, "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7" is 0%, "Decoration 8"-"Decoration 8"-"Decoration 8" is 18%, "Decoration 9"- “Decoration 9”-“Decoration 9” is selected at a rate of 4%. That is, when the stop symbol of Special Figure 1 is “Special Figure A” or “Special Figure B”, the combination of three odd-numbered decorative symbols is better than the combination of three even-numbered decorative symbols. When the stop symbol of special figure 1 is “special figure C” or “special figure D”, an even number of decorations is used rather than a combination of three odd number of decorative figures. The combination of three symbols is configured to be easily selected. As a result, the player greatly expects that the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is a combination of three odd-numbered decorative symbols that the game is a 15R special big hit. On the other hand, even when the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped (determined) is a combination of three even-numbered decorative symbols, the player is expected to lose the expectation of being a 15R special big hit. Can be suppressed. In addition, the combination of decorative patterns (third decorative pattern combination) of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” The stop symbols are configured to be selected only in the case of “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”. Therefore, the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is the second variable prize opening 235 (first It can be said that the third game condition (or the first condition) that is established by winning 2 (attacker) is a combination that is easily established. That is, in the present embodiment, the third combination of decorative symbols corresponds to the second combination. Further, the combination of the first decorative symbols corresponds to the first combination. Furthermore, the combination of the second decorative symbols and the combination of the decorative symbols other than the third decorative symbol combination corresponds to the first combination.

  In addition, when the stop symbol of Special Figure 1 is “Special Figure E” and “Special Figure F”, that is, when it is a lost symbol, for example, the fluctuation determined as described above in the first embodiment. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is determined in accordance with the time and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed (determined display) is determined as described above in step S3093c, the CPU 404 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped (step S3093d).

  Specifically, it is a combination of decorative symbols in which three combinations of decorative symbols to be stopped are displayed, and “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — In the case of a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”, the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of temporary stop is determined as the combination of decorative symbols to be determined and displayed. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols that are temporary stop symbols is set to be the same as the decorative symbols that are finally displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of temporary stop may be determined by lottery and may be set so as to be different from the combination of decorative symbols to be confirmed and displayed. In this case, the combination of the decorative symbols at the time of temporary stop is “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” —displayed only when the special symbols 1 are “special symbol A” and “special symbol B”. It is preferable not to use a combination of “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”, but this is not restrictive.

  FIG. 47B is a diagram showing a temporary stop symbol lottery table when “333” and “777” are selected for special figure 1.

  When the combination of the decorative symbols to be confirmed and displayed is a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. The combination of the decorative symbols for temporary stop is determined with reference to the temporary stop symbol lottery table when “333” and “777” for special figure 1 shown in 47 (b) are selected. The temporary stop symbol lottery table at the time of selecting “333” and “777” for the special figure 1 is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  For example, the CPU 404 extracts a dedicated random number value that is stored in the RAM 408 and whose numerical value is updated within a range of 0 to 99, and finally stops temporarily from a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed and the extracted random number value. Determine the combination of decorative symbols when For example, when the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”, the combination of the decorative symbols when temporarily stopping is “decoration 0”-“ "Decoration 0"-"Decoration 0" is 1%, "Decoration 1"-"Decoration 1"-"Decoration 1" is 2%, "Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2"-"Decoration 2" is 1%, "Decoration" 3 "-" decoration 3 "-" decoration 3 "89%," decoration 4 "-" decoration 4 "-" decoration 4 "1%," decoration 5 "-" decoration 5 "-" decoration 5 "2 %, "Decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6" is 1%, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is 0%, "decoration 8"-"decoration 8"-"decoration" “8” is selected at a rate of 1%, and “decoration 9”-“decoration 9”-“decoration 9” is selected at a rate of 2%. Further, for example, when the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7”, “decoration 0” is used as the combination of decorative symbols when temporarily stopped. -"Decoration 0"-"decoration 0" is 1%, "decoration 1"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" is 2%, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is 1%, “Decoration 3” — “Decoration 3” — “Decoration 3” is 0%, “Decoration 4” — “Decoration 4” — “Decoration 4” is 1%, “Decoration 5” — “Decoration 5” — “Decoration 5” 2%, "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6" 1%, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" 89%, "decoration 8"-"decoration 8"- "Decoration 8" is selected at a rate of 1%, and "Decoration 9"-"Decoration 9"-"Decoration 9" are selected at a rate of 2%. In other words, the combination of three odd-numbered decorative symbols (the combination of the second decorative symbols) is tentatively stopped as compared with the case where the temporary stop is performed with the combination of three even-numbered decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol combination). In the case of stopping, the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” after the third change (third decorative design) It is configured so that it can be confirmed and displayed easily. Thereby, the expectation with respect to the combination of the decoration symbol finally stopped and displayed (determined display) can be varied depending on the type of the temporary stop symbol to be displayed. Also, before the special figure is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, it becomes a big hit game in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is likely to be established. You can have a sense of expectation about and improve your interest.

  When the CPU 404 determines the combination of decorative symbols when temporarily stopping in step S3093d as described above, the first sub-control unit decorative symbol determining process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines in step S3093b that the acquired information is information indicating the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (step S3093b: YES), the CPU 404 displays the stop based on the decorative symbol determination table for the special figure 2 The combination of decorative symbols to be determined is determined (step S3093e).

  FIG. 47 (c) is a diagram showing a big hit decoration symbol determination table for special figure 2.

  When the stop symbol of special figure 2 is from “special figure A” to “special figure D”, the special figure 2 jackpot decoration symbol determination table shown in FIG. 47C is referred to. The special figure 2 jackpot decoration symbol determination table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  For example, the CPU 404 extracts a dedicated random number value that is stored in the RAM 408 and whose numerical value is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and displays a combination of the decorative pattern that is fixedly displayed from the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the extracted random number value. decide. In the present embodiment, in the special figure 2, any of the special figures A through D is established by winning the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) during the big hit game. Since the 3R game condition (or the first condition) is a stop symbol that is a 15R special big hit, the combination of the decorative symbols to be displayed is “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” It is comprised so that it may become "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". That is, when the stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is a stop symbol that is a big hit ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure D"), the combination of the decorative symbols to be displayed for stoppage is always "decoration 3"-"decoration 3". "-" Decoration 3 "or" decoration 7 "-" decoration 7 "-" decoration 7 ". The selection ratio of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is 50%, but the selection ratios are different. You may do it.

  In addition, when the stop symbol of special figure 2 is “special figure E” and “special figure F”, that is, when it is a lost symbol, for example, the fluctuation determined as described above in the first embodiment. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is determined in accordance with the time and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, in the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variable display on the second special symbol display device 214, the reach state is “decoration 3” or “decoration 7”. In this case, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is surely displayed. When the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is a lost symbol, the combination of the decorative symbols is determined so that the reach state by the “decoration 3” and the “decoration 7” is not formed.

  When the combination of the decorative symbols to be confirmed and displayed is determined as described above in step S3093e, the CPU 404 determines the combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped (step S3093f).

  FIG. 47 (d) is a diagram showing a temporary stop symbol lottery table when “333” and “777” for special figure 2 are selected.

  Specifically, the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. In this case, the combination of the decorative symbols for temporary stop is determined with reference to the temporary stop symbol lottery table for selecting special symbol “333” and “777” shown in FIG. 47 (d). The temporary stop symbol lottery table at the time of selecting “333” and “777” for the special figure 2 is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  For example, the CPU 404 extracts a dedicated random number value that is stored in the RAM 408 and whose numerical value is updated within a range of 0 to 99, and finally stops temporarily from a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed and the extracted random number value. Determine the combination of decorative symbols when For example, when the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”, the combination of the decorative symbols when temporarily stopping is “decoration 0”-“ "Decoration 0"-"decoration 0" is 4%, "decoration 1"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" is 10%, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is 4%, "decoration" 3 ”-“ decoration 3 ”-“ decoration 3 ”is 50%,“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 4 ”is 4%,“ decoration 5 ”-“ decoration 5 ”-“ decoration 5 ”is 10% %, "Decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6" is 4%, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is 0%, "decoration 8"-"decoration 8"-"decoration" “8” is selected at a rate of 4%, and “decoration 9”-“decoration 9”-“decoration 9” is selected at a rate of 10%. Further, for example, when the combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7”, “decoration 0” is used as the combination of decorative symbols when temporarily stopped. -"Decoration 0"-"decoration 0" 4%, "decoration 1"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" 10%, "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" 4%, "Decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is 00%, "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is 4%, "decoration 5"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5" 10%, "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6" 4%, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" 50%, "decoration 8"-"decoration 8"- "Decoration 8" is selected at a rate of 4%, and "Decoration 9"-"Decoration 9"-"Decoration 9" are selected at a rate of 10%. In other words, the combination of three odd-numbered decorative symbols (the combination of the second decorative symbols) is tentatively stopped as compared with the case where the combination is temporarily stopped by the combination of the three even-numbered decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol combination). In the case of stopping, the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” after the third change (third decorative design) (Combinations) are easy to stop (determined display).

  In the present embodiment, when the reach state is formed by “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” in the variable display of FIG. A combination of decorative symbols of “-decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is derived and displayed. Therefore, in the case of performing a lost reach effect in the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the symbol variable display on the second special symbol display device 214, other than “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”. It is necessary to form a reach state with the decorative pattern. However, when the stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is a stop symbol that is a big hit, the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed is always "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" or "decoration 7"- It is comprised so that it may become "decoration 7"-"decoration 7". For this reason, in the present embodiment, the combination of three decorative symbols, other than “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7”. A combination of decorative symbols can be set as a temporary stop symbol, and the decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed by changing display. By providing a function for deriving and displaying the combination of the above, when the stop symbol of the special figure 2 becomes a lost symbol, the reach state may be formed by a decorative symbol other than “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”. Thus, it is possible to display effects that are not necessarily lost, and it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display in the second special symbol display device 214.

  When the CPU 404 determines the combination of decorative symbols when temporarily stopping in step S3093f as described above, the first sub-control unit decorative symbol determining process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined from the stop symbol of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 and the extracted random number value. However, the special symbol variation time included in the symbol variation start command is determined. It may be determined on the basis of information representing.

  In the present embodiment, in order to draw lots about whether or not to execute the normal notice and the notice mode when the notice is executed in the normal notice lottery process executed in step S3092e of the change start sub-side notice execution process shown in FIG. The notice lottery table used is provided. The notice lottery table includes a game state (a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, a special figure high probability general figure high probability state) and a special figure display device (first display) A plurality of special figure display devices 212 and second special figure display devices 214) are provided.

  FIG. 48A shows the special figure 1 low probability notice lottery table. FIG. 48B is a diagram showing the special figure 2 high-probability notice lottery table. FIG. 49A is a diagram showing a special drawing 2 low probability electric support notice lottery table. FIG. 49B is a diagram showing the special drawing 2 low probability notice lottery table. These notice lottery tables are stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  The special figure 1 low probability notice lottery table is a table used when the symbol variation display is performed on the first special figure display device 212 in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The special figure 2 high-probability notice lottery table is a table that is used when symbol variation display is performed on the second special figure display device 214 in the special figure high-probability normal figure high-probability state. The special figure 2 low probability electric support notice lottery table is a table used when the symbol variation display is performed on the second special figure display device 214 in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The special figure 2 low-probability notice lottery table is a table used when symbol variation display is performed on the second special figure display device 214 in the special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state.

  In particular, the special figure 2 low-probability lottery table is used less frequently than other notice lottery tables, and the special figure 2 suspension that remains when the electric support state ends is mainly It is used when the symbol variation display is performed after the support state is completed, that is, based on the reserved digest of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state, the "normal figure A" which is a hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, and the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. This is also used when the special figure 2 is put on hold at the second special figure starting port 232 and the symbol variation display is executed based on this. That is, the special figure 2 low-probability notice lottery table can be said to be a notice lottery table that can be used only under specific circumstances.

  For example, the CPU 404 selects a notice lottery table according to the control state and the special-figure display device that is variably displayed, and extracts a dedicated random number value that is stored in the RAM 408 and whose numerical value is updated in the range of 0 to 99. As described above, the symbol variation start command includes information representing the special symbol variation time, and the notice mode (from the timer number specified from the information representing the special symbol variation time and the extracted random number value) Any one of “preliminary notice P” to “preliminary notice S” is selected (or the notice is not selected). Here, the notice mode of “notice P” to “notice S” is a notice of display of a character notice or the like on the decorative symbol display device 208, a sound notice of outputting a notice sound from the speaker 120, or a lamp by blinking of various lamps 418. A notice or a notice by a movable body can be cited as an example, but various kinds of notices can be adopted, and one or a combination of two or more of these may be used. Moreover, the content of the notice mentioned above is an example, and is not limited to these. In the following description, the notice modes of “notice P” to “notice S” will be described as a notice regarding the special figure during the change display (the change notice), but can be applied to a pre-read notice. The contents of the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the timer number shown in each notice lottery table in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 and the game state are shown in FIG. Since it is the same as that described above, a detailed description thereof is omitted here. Here, the fluctuation time of the timer number 7 is set to 5 seconds longer than the fluctuation time of the timer number 6, and the fluctuation time of the timer number 9 is set to 5 seconds longer than the fluctuation time of the timer number 8. This is the time provided for executing the above-described re-variation display after performing the effect corresponding to timer number 6 (or timer number 8) and displaying the temporary stop symbol.

  For example, when symbol variation display is performed on the first special figure display device 212 in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure 1 low probability notice lottery table shown in FIG. 48A is selected. Is done. Then, the notice mode is selected from the timer number and the extracted random number value. Specifically, when a super-short jackpot corresponding to timer number 1 is executed by the symbol variation start command, “notice R” is executed at a rate of 1%, and a normal notice is executed at a rate of 99%. It is decided not to. In addition, when the shortening error corresponding to the timer number 3 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the normal deviation corresponding to the timer number 4 is executed, it is determined that “notice P” is executed at a rate of 40% and that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 60%. When the normal reach deviation corresponding to the timer number 5 is executed, the “notice P” is executed at a rate of 20%, the “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 3%, and is normally set at a rate of 77%. It is decided not to carry out the notice. When the SP reach A deviation corresponding to the timer number 6 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 10%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 2%, and a rate of 88% In general, it is decided not to execute the advance notice. When SP reach A jackpot corresponding to timer number 7 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 50%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 49%, and “notice R” is executed. Is executed at a rate of 1%. Further, when the SP reach B corresponding to the timer number 8 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 6%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 4%, and a rate of 90% In general, it is decided not to execute the advance notice. When SP reach B jackpot corresponding to timer number 9 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 70%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 29%, and “notice R” is executed. Is executed at a rate of 1%.

  In addition, in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, when the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 is performed, the special figure 2 high probability notice lottery table shown in FIG. 48B is selected. Is done. Then, the notice mode is selected from the timer number and the extracted random number value. Specifically, when a super-shortening jackpot corresponding to timer number 1 is executed by the symbol variation start command, “notice S” is executed at a rate of 1%, and a normal notice is executed at a rate of 99%. It is decided not to. Further, when the super shortening corresponding to the timer number 2 is executed, it is determined not to execute the normal notice at a rate of 100%. Further, when the battle gasase tilt 1 corresponding to the timer number 4 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the battle gasase tilt 2 corresponding to the timer number 5 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. When the battle A defeat corresponding to the timer number 6 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 20%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 70%. It is decided not to execute the normal notice. When a battle A victory corresponding to timer number 7 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 40%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 30%, and “notice S” is set. It is determined that the notification is executed at a rate of 20%, and the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, when the symbol variation display is performed on the second special figure display device 214, the special figure 2 low probability electric support notice lottery table shown in FIG. 49 (a). Is selected. Then, the notice mode is selected from the timer number and the extracted random number value. Specifically, when a super shortened jackpot corresponding to timer number 1 is executed by the symbol variation start command, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 1%, and “notice Q” is a rate of 1%. It is determined that “notice S” is executed at a rate of 1%, and the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 97%. In addition, when the super shortening corresponding to the timer number 2 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 1%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 1%, and at a rate of 98%. It is decided not to execute the normal notice. Further, when the battle gasase tilt 1 corresponding to the timer number 4 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the battle gasase tilt 2 corresponding to the timer number 5 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. When the battle A defeat corresponding to the timer number 6 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 20%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 70%. It is decided not to execute the normal notice. When a battle A victory corresponding to timer number 7 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 40%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 30%, and “notice S” is set. It is determined that the notification is executed at a rate of 20%, and the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 10%. Further, when the battle B defeat corresponding to the timer number 8 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 10%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to execute the normal notice. When the battle B victory corresponding to the timer number 9 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 40%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 30%, and “notice S” is set. It is determined that the notification is executed at a rate of 20%, and the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, when the symbol variation display is performed on the second special figure display device 214, the special figure 2 low probability notice lottery table shown in FIG. 49B is selected. Is done. Then, the notice mode is selected from the timer number and the extracted random number value. Specifically, when a super-short jackpot corresponding to timer number 1 is executed by the symbol variation start command, “notice R” is executed at a rate of 1%, and a normal notice is executed at a rate of 99%. It is decided not to. In addition, when the shortening error corresponding to the timer number 3 is executed, it is determined that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the normal deviation corresponding to the timer number 4 is executed, it is determined that “notice P” is executed at a rate of 40% and that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 60%. Further, when the normal reach deviation corresponding to the timer number 5 is executed, it is determined that “notice P” is executed at a rate of 20% and that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 80%. Further, when the SP reach A deviation corresponding to the timer number 6 is executed, it is determined that “notice P” is executed at a rate of 10% and that the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 90%. When SP reach A jackpot corresponding to timer number 7 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 50%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 49%, and “notice R” is executed. Is executed at a rate of 1%. When the SP reach B deviation corresponding to the timer number 8 is executed, it is determined that the “notice P” is executed at a rate of 6% and the normal notice is not executed at a rate of 94%. When SP reach B jackpot corresponding to timer number 9 is executed, “notice P” is executed at a rate of 70%, “notice Q” is executed at a rate of 29%, and “notice R” is executed. Is executed at a rate of 1%.

  In this way, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, when the “notice R” is executed, the jackpot symbol is always stopped and displayed. That is, “Notice R” is a jackpot confirmation notice. Further, the “notice R” is a special notice mode that can be executed only in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Furthermore, in a normal game, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, since the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 is hardly performed, the “notice R” is almost always the first special figure. It can be said that this is a special notice mode that can be executed only in the symbol variation display on the display device 212. It should be noted that the “notice R” may be implemented only when the symbol form of the special figure to be stopped becomes “special figure A” and “special figure B” with 15R special jackpots. “Notice R” can be said to correspond to the first effect suggesting that the second state starts after the big hit game. Alternatively, the “notice R” corresponds to a first effect that suggests that the third game condition (first condition) is likely to be satisfied when the game ball wins the second variable winning opening 235. You can also.

  Further, in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, when the symbol change display is performed on the second special figure display device 214, the “notice S” is executed. Always stops and displays the 15R special jackpot symbol. That is, “notice S” is a 15R special jackpot finalizing notice, and can be said to correspond to a first effect that suggests that the second state is started after the jackpot game. Alternatively, the “notice S” corresponds to the first effect that suggests that the third game condition (first condition) is likely to be satisfied when the game ball wins the second variable winning opening 235. You can also. The “notice S” is a special notice mode that can be executed only in the normal high probability state (electric support state).

  In addition, the “notice Q” indicates that the symbol of the 15R special jackpot is always displayed only when the symbol variation display on the second symbol display device 214 is performed in the special symbol low probability low symbol probability state (first situation). The notice mode is displayed in a stopped state. That is, the “notice Q” is a 15R special jackpot finalizing notice in the first situation, and can be said to correspond to a first effect suggesting that the second state is started after the jackpot game. Alternatively, the “notice Q” corresponds to a first effect that suggests that the third game condition (first condition) is likely to be satisfied when the game ball wins the second variable winning opening 235. You can also.

  In the present embodiment, the “notice R” is a notice that may be executed in the first game state (for example, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and the second game state (for example, the special game state, for example, This is an example of the first notice that is not executed in the high probability normal figure high probability state or the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state.

  Further, the “notice S” is an example of a second notice that may be executed in the second gaming state and is not executed in the first gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is hardly performed. Under normal conditions, the lottery of the normal notice using the notice lottery table is not performed, and any notice is not executed, but the notice is executed by drawing the normal notice lottery using the notice lottery table. You may comprise.

  In the present embodiment, the 15R special jackpot notice (so-called premium notice) is configured to be executable, but a 15R jackpot notice other than the 15R special jackpot may be configured to be executable. Further, in the present embodiment, the notification can be executed regardless of the type of jackpot, but only the 15R special jackpot notice may be performed, or only the 15R jackpot notice other than the 15R special jackpot may be performed. It may be. In this embodiment, the jackpot notice that is not a premium notice may be an example of the second effect.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100A used in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100A used in the present embodiment is different in that the configuration of the door 108A with a ball storage tray is different from the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the differences will be described in detail, and the other components will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted. Needless to say, the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment is also applicable to the first to third embodiments described above.

  The door 108A with a ball storage tray in the present embodiment is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100A so as to be locked and openable. This ball storage tray door 108A is opened by pressing an open lever that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a door sensor with a ball storage tray that detects that the door 108A with the ball storage tray is opened is also provided. The door 108A with a ball storage tray is provided with an upper plate 126 in which a plurality of game balls can be stored and a passage for guiding the game ball to the launching device 110 (see FIG. 1 and the like) is provided. A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the tray 126 to the game ball collection container, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player is a game area 124 of the game board (see FIG. 3). A ball launching handle 134 for launching to the side, a chance button 136 for changing the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by the player's operation, and various operation buttons 137 such as a ball rental operation button and a return operation button A content-related operation button 139 for browsing the game history and various contents in the pachinko machine 100A by the player's operation on the decorative symbol display device 208, It includes a touch panel type display device 209, a. Although the door 108A with a ball storage tray in the present embodiment is configured not to include a lower tray, it is needless to say that the configuration may include a lower tray.

  The content-related operation button 139 includes, for example, up / down / left / right keys, an OK key, and a cancel key, and is electrically connected to the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 via a sensor circuit or the like. The content-related operation button 139 can instruct the movement of the cursor displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the execution of the item indicated by the cursor, for example, by the player's operation.

  The touch panel display device 209 includes an image display device 209a such as a liquid crystal display device, and a touch panel 209b provided so as to cover the entire surface of the display panel of the image display device 209a. For example, it is electrically connected to the basic circuit of the first sub control unit 400. The touch panel type display device 209 detects the position touched by the player by the touch panel 209b, outputs the detection signal to the first sub control unit 400, and displays an image corresponding to an image display instruction from the first sub control unit 400. Can be displayed on the image display device 209a. The image display device 209a can be applied to any display device that can display an image, such as an organic EL, a plasma display, and a projector, in addition to a liquid crystal display device. The touch panel 209b can appropriately employ a known detection method such as a resistance film method or a capacitance method. The touch panel type display device 209 has, for example, a known torque limiter mechanism and is pivotally supported in the horizontal direction with respect to the ball storage tray door 108A, and can be tilted at an arbitrary angle by the player's operation. It may be configured. Further, the various operation buttons 137 and the content related operation buttons 139 may function as alternative operation means for the touch panel display device 209.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (1), “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is fixedly displayed. Further, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 and the second special figure 1 hold display h12, which indicate the hold of the special figure 1, are both displayed in the default display mode.

  51 also shows the first special figure display device 212, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure display device 214, and the second special figure hold lamp 220. In FIG. 51 (1), since the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. 1 is two, two lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit.

  In addition, on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, the special symbol “special drawing E” is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 variably displayed corresponding to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 and the display state of the second special symbol display device 214. The special figure 2 and the 4th symbol t2 variably displayed are displayed. In FIG. 51 (1), the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 correspond to the “special symbol E” that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the “x” that is a lost symbol is stopped. It is displayed in the displayed state. The special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are in a state where, for example, the “x” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the “special symbol E” which is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214. It is displayed. In FIG. 51 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 and the 4th symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the 4th symbol t2 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a manner in which the symbols that are stopped and displayed can be recognized. However, in practice, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is preferable that the symbols that are stopped and displayed are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize.

  The touch-sensitive display device 209 has a plurality of touch detection areas set so as to be arranged in a 4 × 6 matrix. In this embodiment, the touch detection area to which the touched position belongs can be determined from the detection result of the touch position by the player. In FIG. 51 (1), for convenience of explanation, numbers 1 to 24 are assigned to the touch detection areas. Note that the touch detection area may not be set.

  In FIG. 51 (2), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested and only the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is displayed. In addition, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 51 (2) has started the symbol variation display, and the decoration symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decoration symbol. At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed so that the speed of the variable display gradually increases. During the symbol variation display, the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking in which all of the seven segments are turned on, turned off for a moment, and all of the seven segments are turned on again. In response to the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in a manner that the symbol “-” blinks.

  FIG. 51 (3) shows a state during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 started in FIG. 51 (2). At this time, the decorative symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are variably displayed at high speed, making it difficult for the player to recognize the decorative symbols.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (5), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (6), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 still continues, and the first special figure display device 212 continues the above-described blinking operation of seven segments.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  When the first stop to the third stop of the decorative symbols are performed as described above, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), the symbols are stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. The displayed decorative design begins to fluctuate.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the special symbol E, which is a losing symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is displayed. At t 1, “L”, which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed in correspondence with “Special Figure E” stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212. Correspondingly, a combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 8” decoration symbols is stopped (determined display) on the ornamental symbol display device 208, and a variable game of one special symbol is displayed. finish. As described above, the effect display in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 51 (1) to 52 (8) shows an example of an effect display that is normally out of order with a variation time of 10 seconds.

  In the following specific effects, explanation will be made on the assumption that the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of decorative symbols in the order shown in FIGS. 51 (1) to 52 (7). Some illustrations may be omitted for convenience.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 52 (9), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the hold display disappears, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol and the special figure. 1 Fluctuation display of the 4th symbol t1 is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (10), after the variable symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 has been displayed at a high speed, the touch panel type display device 209 has a notice that the notice will be started. As a start effect, together with a child panda character with a fan, an image of an elliptical touch button and a character (character information) “Take a notice by touch” to promote touch operation on the touch button are displayed. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (11), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the first stop, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. On the other hand, in the touch panel display device 209, a touch effective area TA1 for enabling a touch operation on the touch button is set. Specifically, the 9th to 11th and 15th to 17th touch detection areas shown in FIG. 51A are set as the touch effective area TA1. In FIG. 52 (11), the touch effective area TA1 is surrounded by a broken line. In the example shown in FIG. 52 (11), the shape of the touch effective area TA1 is different from the area where the touch button image is displayed, but the area where the touch button image is displayed. The same shape may be used.

  It should be noted that the stop display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the setting of the touch effective area TA1 in the touch panel display device 209 may be performed simultaneously or substantially simultaneously, or the timing may be changed. Good. In this case, the touch effective area TA1 may be set after the decoration symbol stop display is performed, or the decoration symbol stop display may be performed after the touch effective area TA1 is set. The above also applies to the following specific examples.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. On the other hand, FIG. 52 (12) shows a state in which the player is performing a touch operation on the touch effective area TA1 in the touch panel display device 209. Needless to say, the timing of the touch operation by the player may be the same timing as the timing of the second stop of the decorative symbol or the timing before and after.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character (character information) “reach” for notifying that a reach state has been formed. On the other hand, in the touch panel type display device 209, as a result of the touch operation performed on the touch effective area TA1 by the player, the character of the number length is displayed together with the character information suggesting that a chance may come. Is called. The display of the character with the longest length corresponds to an example of the “notice Q” described above.

  It should be noted that the decorative symbol stop display by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character display on the touch panel display device 209 may be performed simultaneously or substantially simultaneously, or the timing may be changed. In this case, the character may be displayed after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol may be stopped after the character is displayed. The above also applies to the following specific examples.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display that develops into super reach. This super reach is, for example, SP reach B. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. A screen is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in screen on which the main character and the swordsman of the main character confront each other, and the main character tells the start of the game. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (16), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the protagonist defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Decoration 3” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is scheduled to be temporarily stopped. The On the other hand, on the touch panel type display device 209, a character (character information) “Yataze” congratulating that three identical decorative symbols will be arranged is displayed. Note that the display timing of the characters “Yataze” on the touch-panel display device 209 may be the same as the winning screen on the decorative symbol display device 208 or may be displayed before and after. Good. In the present embodiment, when the temporary stop display is performed with a combination of “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3”, it is promised that 15R will be a special jackpot as described above. It can be said that the display as shown in FIG. 53 (16) corresponds to the first effect suggesting that the second state is started after the big hit game. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be satisfied. The same applies to the case where the temporary stop display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”.

  When the first stop to the third stop of the decorative symbols are performed as described above, as shown in FIG. 53 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, and The decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c start to fluctuate. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) “re-change” which notifies that re-change display is started. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 still continues, and the first special figure display device 212 continues the above-described blinking operation of seven segments. In addition, the display timing of the character “re-change” on the touch panel type display device 209 may be the same as the start timing of the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be before and after. Good. In the present embodiment, a temporary stop display is made with a combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” decoration symbols, thereby promising a 15R special big hit, so FIG. 53 (17). As shown in FIG. 1, the temporary stop display with the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is a first indication that the second state starts after the big hit game. It can be said that it corresponds to the production of. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be satisfied. The same applies to the case where a temporary stop display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols that have been fluctuated in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c are rapidly changed all at once. The re-variable display to be displayed is started.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 54 (19) shows a state where re-variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, it is determined in advance that the combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is finally stopped and displayed. If so, the combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed from the speaker 120. May be issued in advance, such as by outputting a confirmation sound for promoting in advance, or turning off a decorative lamp such as the frame lamp 122 for a certain period of time. As for these promotion confirmation notifications, as a result of the re-variable display, the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” and “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped When it is scheduled to be performed, it is determined whether or not to execute by lottery, but it may be performed without fail. Further, in addition to notification by sound output and blinking of the lamp, notification by various means such as a notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the touch panel type display device 209 is possible. The notification may be executed by a combination of two or more. In this way, the promotion confirmation notification finally displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” (stop display ( Since it is promised that a 15R special jackpot will be announced in advance, it will correspond to the first effect that suggests that the second state will start after the jackpot game. be able to. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be satisfied.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol “decoration 3” in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Start fluctuation. On the other hand, in the touch panel type display device 209, as a result of the re-variable display, the decoration pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is displayed. The character “Lucky” (character information) for notifying that the combination of the two is derived and displayed is displayed. In this embodiment, the promotion effect is implemented in this way. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 still continues, and the first special figure display device 212 continues the above-described blinking operation of seven segments. In addition, the display timing of the character “Lucky” on the touch panel type display device 209 may be the same as the start timing of the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be before or after. In the present embodiment, as a result of the re-variable display being performed, a promotion effect in which a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is derived and displayed is performed. It can be said that such promotion effect corresponds to the first effect suggesting that the second state is started after the big hit game. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be satisfied. The same applies to the promotion effect in which the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is derived and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (21), the special figure display device 212 stops and displays “Special figure A” as a 15R big hit symbol at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses. In the symbol t1, “A”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the “special symbol A” that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” (determined display), and one special game of variable game is displayed. finish. As described above, the effect display in the decorative symbol display device 208 from FIGS. 52 (9) to 54 (21) shows an example of the effect display of SP reach B jackpot having a variation time of 65 seconds. In the present embodiment, when the stop display (decision display) is performed with a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”, it is promised that 15R will be a special big hit. It can be said that such a display corresponds to the first effect suggesting that the second state is started after the big hit game. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be satisfied. The same applies to the case where the display is stopped (determined display) with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7”.

  Next, another example of the re-variable display described above will be described. Here, FIGS. 54 (17a) to 54 (20a) show other effects examples corresponding to the effects shown in FIGS. 53 (17) to 54 (20).

  54 (17a), the suspension of the special symbol (first suspension) is digested, and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started together with the start of the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212. A state in which the swing variation is performed in a state where three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c via the reach effect such as SP reach B described above. Is shown. In this production example, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and after reaching the reach effect, “decoration 4” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. As shown in FIG. 54 (17a), it is displayed that the vehicle has been temporarily stopped. In the state shown in FIG. 54 (17a), as described above with reference to FIG. 47, it is promised that it will be a big hit, but whether or not it will be a 15R special big hit is still in the promised state. It is not. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) “re-variation” for notifying that re-variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (18a), the re-variable display as shown in FIG. 53 (18) and described above is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (20a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol “decoration 3” in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Start fluctuation. On the other hand, in the touch panel type display device 209, as a result of the re-variable display, the decoration pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is displayed. The character “Lucky” (character information) for notifying that the combination of the two is derived and displayed is displayed. In this embodiment, the promotion effect can also be implemented in this way. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 still continues, and the first special figure display device 212 continues the above-described blinking operation of seven segments. In the present embodiment, as a result of the re-variable display being performed, a promotion effect in which a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is derived and displayed is performed. It can be said that such promotion effect corresponds to the first effect suggesting that the second state is started after the big hit game. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be satisfied. The same applies to the promotion effect in which the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is derived and displayed. After the presentation as shown in FIG. 54 (20a) is performed, the 15R special big hit symbol is displayed on the first special figure display device 212 as shown in FIG. "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed, and Special Figure 1 4th symbol t1 is a 15R special big hit symbol corresponding to "Special Figure A" stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212. “A” is stopped and displayed. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” (determined display), and one special game of variable game is displayed. finish.

  In the above-described effect example, it goes without saying that the above-described promotion confirmation notification may be performed during the re-variable display.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot will be described. In the following description, an example of an effect in a big hit game that is started when “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 will be described, but “Special Figure B” is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. The same can be applied to the effect in the jackpot game that is started after being stopped.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a specific effect example in the big hit game of the 15R special big hit.

  As described above, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. It is displayed that the game is in the first round, and the player operates the ball launch handle 134 to the maximum extent (rotates) to roll the game ball to the right side of the game area 124 (hereinafter “right-handed”). Is displayed). In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. On the other hand, in the touch panel type display device 209, when a touch effect is generated in a big hit game together with a child panda character having a fan, the second variable winning opening 235 is likely to win in the 15th round (third game condition (or Character information indicating that there is a chance that the first condition) is likely to be satisfied is displayed.

  When the round progresses as described above and becomes the 12th round, as shown in FIG. 55 (2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 12th round of the big hit game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the opening of the Janken game effect. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the bancho character and the panda character are displayed side by side, and if the bancho is panda and the bancho wins the janken, the second variable prize opening in the 15th round. A display indicating that a great chance of becoming a state where 235 is likely to win a prize (a state where the third game condition (or the first condition) is likely to be satisfied) is reached. At this time, the display for instructing right-handing is continued, but is displayed small on the upper right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, on the touch panel type display device 209, a character (character information) “select by touch” which is an instruction to perform a touch operation on the touch panel 209b to select is displayed. The effect shown in FIG. 55 (3) may be executed when a predetermined time has passed since the 12th round, or may be executed simultaneously with the 12th round. Also good.

  Subsequently, at the 13th round, as shown in FIG. 55 (4), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 13th round of the jackpot game. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character (character information) “Choose with a touch panel”, which is an instruction to perform a touch operation on the touch panel 209b of the touch panel type display device 209, is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays the “goo” janken symbol, the “choki” janken symbol, and the “par” janken symbol, and enables touch operation for each janken symbol. Areas TA2 to TA4 are set. In FIG. 55 (4) and FIG. 55 (5), the touch effective areas TA2 to TA4 are respectively surrounded by broken lines. Specifically, the 13th, 14th, 19th, and 20th touch detection areas shown in FIG. 51 (1) corresponding to the “good” Janken symbol are set as the touch effective area TA2, and “ The touch detection areas of No. 3, No. 4, No. 9, and No. 10 corresponding to the Janken symbol are set as the touch effective area TA3, and No. 17, 18, No. 23, and No. 24 corresponding to the “Par” Janken symbol. No. touch detection area is set as the touch effective area TA4.

  In addition, the display timing of the character information “Choose on the touch panel”, the display timing of each Janken symbol, and the setting timing of the touch effective areas TA2 to TA4 may be the same as the 13th round, It may be the timing after the 13th round. These may be performed all at the same time, may be performed at different timings, or only two of them may be performed at the same time. Further, the order of executing these can be set as appropriate. The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (5), the player performs a touch operation on the touch effective area TA4 in the touch panel display device 209. That is, the player performs a touch operation on the touch effective area TA4 in order to select the “par” Janken symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters (characters that will win with a par) indicating that the player will compete with the Janken symbol selected by the player (the “Parken” Janken symbol). Information) is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a large “Jan” symbol of “Par”, which is the Janken symbol selected by the player.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the 14th round, as shown in FIG. 56 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 14th round of the jackpot game and that the Janken game is started. The characters (character information) are displayed. Note that the longest character and the panda character that were displayed side by side are displayed separately from each other. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) indicating a sense of expectation for winning the Janken game together with a child panda character having a fan.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character (character information) “HOI” indicating that the Janken game has been executed and is close to the character of the number-long character. The “Par” Janken symbol selected by the player is displayed at the position, and the “Go” Janken symbol defeated by “Par” is displayed at a position close to the panda character. On the other hand, on the touch panel type display device 209, a character (character information) of “win” indicating that the Janken game has been won is displayed. In the present embodiment, when an effect of winning the victory is performed, the second variable winning opening 235 is likely to win in the 15th round (a state in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is easily established). Therefore, it can be said that such an effect corresponds to the first effect that suggests that the second state starts after the big hit game. Or it can correspond to the 1st production which suggests that a game ball wins to the 2nd variable prize opening 235, and the 3rd game condition (1st condition) is easy to be satisfied.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is to be awarded in the next round, that is, the fifteenth round. The This notification is a notification for obtaining a probability change, that is, for establishing the third game condition (or the first condition). On the other hand, on the touch panel type display device 209, a character (character information) “do not stop firing” is displayed to instruct not to stop the firing of the game ball. As a result, even if the second variable winning opening 235 is in a state where it is easy to win, it is possible to reduce the possibility of incurring the disadvantage of not shifting to the probable state by losing the opportunity to win.

  Thereafter, at the 15th round, as shown in FIG. 56 (10), the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is opened and the decorative symbol display device 208 is the 15th round of the big hit game. Is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “Make an attacker win a prize” for promoting the winning of the second attacker.

  If there is a prize for the second attacker at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (11), the third game condition (or the first condition) is established, as shown in FIG. 56 (12). The decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed, together with the long-length character. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “congratulations” congratulating that the probability change has been confirmed.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  Then, when the fifteenth round is completed, as shown in FIG. 57 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an end effect of the big hit game. In the above-mentioned big hit game, the third game condition (or the first condition) is established by winning the second attacker in the 15th round, so that the symbol variation display is performed 100 times after the big hit game. In the meantime, it shifts to a probabilistic state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state). For this reason, in the end effect of the big hit game, a character (character information) of “probability rushing” to shift to the probability change state is displayed. In this case, the table set used until the next big hit may be determined as described above in the first embodiment, for example.

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, as shown in FIG. 57 (14), the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”. In this state, the state is shifted to a probable change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state). At this time, the touch panel type display device 209 displays two child panda characters having a fan and displays the remaining number of times “100 times” together with the characters (character information) of “probability change start” for notifying the start of the probability change. Is made. At this time, since neither the holding of special figure 1 nor the holding of special figure 2 exists, it is in a standby state for waiting for symbol variation display. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “right-handed” characters (character information) prompting right-handing.

  Next, another example of the effect in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot will be described. In the example of production described below, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is derived and displayed, and 15R special jackpot This is an example of a performance in a jackpot game that may be executed when it is promised.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating another effect example in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot.

  58 (1) shows that “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and “Decorative 3”-“Decoration 3”-“Decoration 3” decorative symbols are displayed on the decorative design display apparatus 208. FIG. The contents of the effect when the jackpot game is started after being stopped and displayed in combination. Here, the difference from the example of production shown in FIG. 55 (1) is that the touch panel type display device 209 promotes the player to win the second attacker in the 15th round, “let the attacker win 15R”. Characters (character information) are displayed. Such an effect display is continued until the 13th round, and the effect of the Janken game described above with reference to FIGS. 55 (3) to 56 (9) is omitted.

  After that, when the game progresses to the 14th round, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 14th round of the big hit game, and the next character is displayed along with the next character. A character (character information) of “Are you ready” is displayed prompting the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) to win in the round, that is, the 15th round. Such a display is a form of notification for obtaining a probability change, that is, for establishing the third game condition (or the first condition). The character information displayed here may be as shown in FIG. 56 (9).

  Thereafter, at the fifteenth round, as shown in FIG. 58 (3), the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is opened, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 15 of the big hit game together with the watch character. A round is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “Make an attacker win a prize” for promoting the winning of the second attacker. In this production example, the display content displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 56 (10) is slightly different, for example, in that a character with a long length is displayed, but in FIG. 56 (10). It may be a display mode as shown.

  59 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  If there is a prize for the second attacker at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (4), the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the probability variation has been confirmed, as shown in FIG. 59 (5). “V” is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “congratulations” congratulating that the probability change has been confirmed. This effect is the same as that described above with reference to FIG.

  When the fifteenth round is completed, after the big hit game end effect is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 59 (6), the probability change state (the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 59 (7). ). This effect is the same as described above with reference to FIGS. 57 (13) and 57 (14).

  Next, another example of the re-variable display described above will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating another effect example of re-variation display. Here, FIGS. 60 (17b) to 60 (21b) show other examples of effects corresponding to the effects shown in FIGS. 53 (17) to 54 (21).

  In FIG. 60 (17b), the suspension of the special symbol (first suspension) is digested and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started together with the start of the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212. A state in which the swing variation is performed in a state where three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c via the reach effect such as SP reach B described above. Is shown. In this production example, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and after reaching the reach effect, “decoration 4” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. As shown in FIG. 60 (17b), the temporary stop display state is displayed as being stopped. In the state shown in FIG. 60 (17b), as described above with reference to FIG. 47, it is promised that it will be a big hit, but whether or not it will be a 15R special big hit is still a promised state. It is not. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) indicating “re-change” informing that re-change display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (18b), the re-variable display as shown in FIG. 53 (18) and described above is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (20b), the decorative symbol display device 208 causes the decorative symbol “decoration 4” to be displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Start fluctuation. On the other hand, in the touch panel type display device 209, as a result of the re-variable display, the decoration pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is displayed. A character (character information) “sorry” for notifying that the combination of the symbols is not derived and displayed is displayed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 still continues, and the first special figure display device 212 continues the above-described blinking operation of seven segments. As described above, in this effect example, the re-variable display is performed, but the decoration pattern of “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” or “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7”. The combination is not derived and displayed, and the promotion failure effect that the promotion fails is performed, and it is not guaranteed that the 15R special big hit will become a promiscuous state after the big hit game. It is suggested that the state shifts to a support state (a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). Such a promotion failure effect can be said to correspond to a second effect suggesting that the first state is started after the big hit game. In other words, such a promotion failure effect corresponds to a second effect that suggests that the third game condition (first condition) is difficult to be satisfied.

  Then, after the effect as shown in FIG. 60 (20b) is performed, the special figure 1 is stopped in the first special figure display device 212 as shown in FIG. 60 (21b) at the timing when the variation time elapses. Display is performed. In this effect example, “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special big hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212. Further, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 also have a special 15R special jackpot symbol “A” corresponding to the “special symbol A” stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. Stopped display. On the other hand, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped (determined). In this way, one special variation game is completed. At this time, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “expected during jackpot” which suggests that the Janken game is executed in the jackpot game.

  In this way, the combination of three decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols, which are “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7”. An effect in which a combination of decorative symbols other than the decorative symbol combination is stopped and displayed is not guaranteed to be a 15R special big hit and will be in a promising state after the big hit game, that is, the electric support state ( It is suggested to shift to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). Therefore, such an effect corresponds to a second effect that suggests that the first state is started after the big hit game (or that the third game condition (first condition) is difficult to be established). It can be said.

  Next, another example of the effect in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot will be described. In the example of the effect described below, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is derived and displayed, but “special diagram A” is stopped and displayed on the first special diagram display device 212. This is an effect example showing a state in which a jackpot game of 15R special jackpot is executed.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing another example of the effect in the jackpot game of 15R special jackpot, and FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific example of the effect shown in FIG.

  The effects in the jackpot game shown in FIG. 61 (1) to FIG. 62 (10) are different except that the combination of the decorative symbols displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is different. Since it is the same as that described above with reference to FIGS. 55 (1) to 56 (10), description thereof is omitted here. This effect example is a first effect (for example, “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3”) suggesting that the second state (probability variation state) is started after the big hit game in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, the jackpot game is started without performing the “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” decoration symbol combination display, but in the jackpot game, the first effect (for example, It can be said that it is an example of an effect in which an effect of winning the Janken game is performed. In other words, this effect example indicates that in the symbol variation display, the game ball is awarded to the second variable winning opening 235 and the first game condition (first condition) is likely to be satisfied. Although the big hit game is started without performing the above-mentioned production, it can be said that the first production is performed in the big hit game.

  FIG. 62 (11) shows the state of the big hit game in the 15th round. FIG. 62 (11) shows a state immediately before the opened second attacker (second variable winning opening 235) is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Then, when the second variable winning opening 235 is closed in a state where there is no winning in the second variable winning opening 235, an effect as shown in FIG. 62 (12) is performed. In other words, in this example, the player does not know that the player must aim at the second variable prize opening 235 in the 15th round or forgets that the second variable prize opening 235 has no prize. This is an example in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied. As shown in FIG. 62 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “banden” as well as a character length display indicating that the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied. The character (character information) is also displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 also displays a character (character information) “sorry” that rejoices that the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied. In the present embodiment, an effect as shown in FIG. 62 (12) may not be performed.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  Then, when the fifteenth round is completed, as shown in FIG. 63 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an end effect of the big hit game is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition (or the first condition) is not established because the winning of the second attacker in the 15th round is not established, so that 50 after the jackpot game. While the symbol variation display is performed for the first time, the electronic support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is entered. For this reason, in the end effect of the big hit game, a “short time entry” character (character information) indicating the transition to the electric support state is displayed. In this case, the table set used until the next big hit may be determined as described above in the first embodiment, for example. In addition, although the performance as shown in FIG. 63 (13) was a 15R special big hit, there was no winning in the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker), so the third game condition (or It may be a dedicated effect that is executed only when the first condition) is not satisfied and the big hit game is finished in this state and the state is shifted to the electric support state (irregular time shortening).

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, as shown in FIG. 63 (14), the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decoration symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. In this state, it is shifted to the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). At this time, only one child panda character with a fan is displayed on the touch panel display device 209, and the remaining number of times “50 times” is displayed together with the characters (character information) of “short time start” to notify the start of time reduction. Display is made. At this time, since neither the holding of special figure 1 nor the holding of special figure 2 exists, it is in a standby state for waiting for symbol variation display. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “right-handed” characters (character information) prompting right-handing.

  Next, another example of the re-variable display described above will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing another example of re-variation display. The example of the re-variable display shown in FIGS. 64 (17c) to 64 (21c) is the same as the example shown in FIGS. 60 (17b) to 60 (21c) and described above, but FIG. 64 (21c). As shown in FIG. 5, “Special figure C” which is 15R big hit which is not 15R special big hit is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 1 fourth figure t1 in the decorative design display device 208 is 15R big hit symbol. The difference is that “C” is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in this effect example, the re-variable display is performed, but the decoration pattern of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is used. The combination is not derived and displayed, and the promotion failure effect that the promotion fails is performed, and it is not guaranteed that the 15R special big hit will become a promiscuous state after the big hit game. It is suggested that the state shifts to a support state (a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). Such a promotion failure effect can be said to correspond to a second effect suggesting that the first state is started after the big hit game. In other words, such a promotion failure effect corresponds to a second effect that suggests that the third game condition (first condition) is difficult to be satisfied.

  Also, a combination of three decorative symbols, including “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” — “decoration 3” and “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” The effect in which the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed is not guaranteed to be a 15R special big hit and will be in a promising state after the big hit game, that is, the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high after the big hit game) (Probability state) is suggested. Therefore, such an effect corresponds to a second effect that suggests that the first state is started after the big hit game (or that the third game condition (first condition) is difficult to be established). It can be said.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the 15R jackpot game will be described.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific effect example in the big hit game of 15R jackpot, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. In the following description, an example of an effect in a jackpot game that is started when “Special Figure C” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 will be described, but “Special Figure D” is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. The same can be applied to the effect in the jackpot game that is started after being stopped.

  65 (1) to 66 (7), in the jackpot game, the first special chart display device 212 stops and displays “Special Figure C”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 displayed in the corner, the 15R jackpot symbol “C” is stopped and displayed corresponding to the “special symbol C” stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. Except for this point, it is the same as that described above with reference to FIGS. 61 (1) to 61 (7), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, after the effect that the Janken game shown in FIG. 66 (7) is started, the Janken game is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 66 (8). “Hoi” character (character information) is displayed to the effect, and the “Par” janken symbol selected by the player is displayed at a position that approximates the character of the bancho, and the position that approximates the panda character Next, the “Janken” symbol of “Choki” that wins “Par” is displayed. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays the character (character information) of “defeat” indicating that the game is defeated. In the present embodiment, when an effect of defeating Janken is performed, the second variable winning opening 235 does not easily win in the 15th round, so the third game condition (or the first condition) is satisfied. It is difficult, that is, it is suggested that after the big hit game, it shifts to the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state). Therefore, such an effect corresponds to a second effect that suggests that the first state is started after the big hit game (or that the third game condition (first condition) is difficult to be established). It can be said.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (9), the notification for prompting the player to win the second attacker is not performed in the 15th round, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the player is instructed to make a right turn. On the other hand, on the touch panel type display device 209, the character (character information) of “It was disappointing” that hesitates that the second variable winning opening 235 is not in a state where it is easy to win in the 15th round is displayed.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the 15th round, as shown in FIG. 67 (10), the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is opened, but the opening time of the second attacker here is a short time. It is 0.1 seconds, and it is difficult to expect a prize. However, as shown in FIG. 67 (10), an irregular state in which the player wins the second attacker who is open for 0.1 seconds happens by chance.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability change has been confirmed, together with the long character. On the other hand, the touch panel type display device 209 displays a character (character information) of “congratulations” congratulating that the probability change has been confirmed.

  When the fifteenth round is completed, a big hit game end effect as shown in FIG. 67 (12) is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (12) and 67 (13) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (13) and 57 (14), and a description thereof will be omitted.

(Modification 1)
In the production example described above, since the second attacker's opening time in the fifteenth round is short, it is not easy to win the second attacker. For example, the second attacker as shown in FIG. Although the display for promoting the winning of the second attacker is not performed, such a display may be performed.

(Modification 2)
Moreover, in the production example described above, when a winning to the second attacker occurs, the display as shown in FIG. 67 (11) is performed, but such a display may not be performed.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above-described effect example, when the 15th round is completed, a display to the effect change state is performed as shown in FIG. 67 (12), but such a display is not performed. May be.

(Modification 4)
In the above-described effect example, after the big hit game is ended, the start of the probability change is notified as shown in FIG. 67 (13), but such notification may not be performed.

  In the production example described above, only one of the productions shown in the first to fourth modifications may be executed, or two or more productions may be executed in combination. Moreover, it may replace with the production | presentation shown in the modifications 1-4, and the special production performed only when the irregular state mentioned above arises may be performed.

  According to the embodiment described so far, the third game condition (or the first condition) is more in the case where the first effect is performed than in the case where the second effect is performed. It can be said that it is a condition that is easily established.

  Further, in the embodiment described so far, for example, when the display is stopped (decision display) with a combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” decoration symbols, or during a big hit, After the first presentation such as when winning, the third game condition (or the first condition) is likely to be satisfied (the second variable prize opening 235 is likely to win). Although configured, the third game condition (or the first condition) may be easily established without performing the first effect.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above.

  FIG. 68A is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. 1, and FIG. 68B is a diagram showing a table set selection table when a big hit is made in FIG. These tables are also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Even in the fifth embodiment, in the ordinary figure low probability state, the ordinary figure lottery is only hit with a probability of 1/100, so the electric chew is almost not opened, and the probability of winning the second special figure starting port 232 is low. The table shown in FIG. 68 (a) corresponds to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure low probability (special figure low probability normal figure low probability) state. In FIG. 68 (a), for reference, the winning symbol at the big variable game 235 (second attacker) in the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “V winning”) in the special jackpot is shown in FIG. The control state after the big hit game corresponding to whether or not there is) is shown. In the V-winning column, a circle indicates that there is a V winning, and a cross indicates that there is no V winning. Further, in the column of the control state (probability change, electric support), a circle mark indicates an add and a cross mark indicates no.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary high probability state, the electric Chu is almost open, and the big hit in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the big hit in the special figure 1, so the player aims at the second special figure starting port 232. The table shown in FIG. 68B corresponds to a table set selection table that is often used in the case of the normal figure high probability (special figure high probability normal figure high probability, special figure low probability normal figure high probability) state. For reference, FIG. 68 (b) shows the control state after the end of the big hit game corresponding to the stop pattern at the time of the big hit in special figure 2 and the possibility of V winning in the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, from the table shown in FIG. 68 (a) and the table shown in FIG. 68 (b), the table set 1 is selected when there is a V win in the big hit game regardless of the special figure determination result. When there is no V prize in the big hit game, the table set 2 is selected.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, after the big hit game, the second gaming state (for example, the probability variation state) is started (or the game ball is won at the second variable prize opening 235 and the third gaming condition ( The first effect (for example, “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” or “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”) When the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied (for example, winning in the second variable winning opening 235) after the combination of the decorative symbols is derived (displayed) In the case of the first gaming state (for example, the electric support state (irregular time)) that shifts after the big hit in the case of (1)), the effect corresponding to the first gaming state (effect using the table set 2: second effect) Is executed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the first gaming state (for example, the electric support state) is started after the big hit game (or the third gaming condition (first condition) is not easily established). The third game condition (or the first condition) after the suggested second performance (for example, the derivation display of the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”) is performed. ) Is established (for example, winning in the second variable winning opening 235) (in the fourth case), in the second gaming state (for example, probability variation state (regular variation)), An effect (effect using table set 1: fourth effect) corresponding to the gaming state is executed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, after the big hit game, the second gaming state (for example, the probability variation state) is started (or the game ball wins the second variable prize opening 235 and the third gaming condition ( If the third game condition (or the first condition) is satisfied after the first performance that suggests that the first condition is likely to be satisfied) In the second game state to be transferred, an effect corresponding to the second game state (effect using table set 1: first effect) is executed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the first gaming state (for example, the electric support state) is started after the big hit game (or the third gaming condition (first condition) is not easily established). In the first gaming state in which the third game condition (or the first condition) is not satisfied after the suggested second effect is performed (the third case), An effect corresponding to one game state (effect using table set 2: third effect) is executed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the table set selection table is set as described above, it depends on the type of special figure, the availability of V winnings, and the control state (game state) after the big hit game ends. Thus, the variation time (table for determining the variation time) can be determined.

  The contents of the table set, the contents of each table used in the table set, the variable time corresponding to the timer number and the control state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) that can be selected from each table. About the effect aspect, what was mentioned in 1st Embodiment-3rd Embodiment can be used suitably.

  Further, as described above, there may be an effect that can be selected only by the table 3 or the table 5 used in the table set 1, or an effect that can be selected only by the table 2 or the table 4 used in the table set 2. There may be. In this embodiment, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state that shifts after a big hit game with an irregular short time (first case) even in a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state that transitions after a big hit game with 15R jackpot However, since the table set 2 is selected, in such a case, an effect corresponding to only the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state may be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, for example, even in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state that shifts after a big hit game in the case of winning a V in a big hit game with 15R special big hit (first case), an irregular probability change ( Since the table set 1 is selected even in the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability that shifts after the big hit game in the fourth case), in such a case, only the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability is supported. Production may be performed.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above.

  FIG. 69A is a diagram showing a table set selection table in the case of big hit in FIG. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Even in the sixth embodiment, in the ordinary figure low probability state, the ordinary figure lottery is only hit with a probability of 1/100, so the electric chew is almost not opened, and the probability of winning the second special figure starting port 232 is low. The table shown in FIG. 69A corresponds to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure low probability (special figure low probability common figure low probability) state. In FIG. 69 (a), for reference, it corresponds to whether or not a winning (V winning) in the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) in the big hit game and the stop design at the big hit in the special figure 1 in the special figure 1, The control state after the big hit game is shown. In the V-winning column, a circle indicates that there is a V winning, and a cross indicates that there is no V winning. Further, in the column of the control state (probability change, electric support), a circle mark indicates an add and a cross mark indicates no.

  In this embodiment, from the table shown in FIG. 69 (a), the special figure determination result is a 15R special big hit that makes it easy to win (V prize) in the second variable winning slot 235 (second attacker) in the big hit game. If there is a V win in the jackpot game, the table set 1 is selected, the special figure determination result is 15R special jackpot, and there is no V prize in the jackpot game (Irregular (Short time), the table set 4 is selected, and the special figure determination result is a 15R big hit that does not make it easy for the second variable winning slot 235 (second attacker) to win a prize (V prize) in the big hit game, and If there is a V win in the jackpot game (irregular probability change), the table set 3 is selected, the special figure determination result is 15R jackpot, and the jackpot If there is no V winning in trick, table set 2 is selected.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the table set selection table is set as described above, it depends on the type of special figure, the availability of V winnings, and the control state (game state) after the big hit game ends. Thus, the variation time (table for determining the variation time) can be determined. In the present embodiment, a special table set is selected when a situation that is difficult to occur in a normal game occurs, such as the above-mentioned irregular short time and irregular probability change, In the subsequent control state (gaming state), the player can be given a sense of incongruity, a profit, etc.

  In the present embodiment, only the table set selection table in the case of big hit in FIG. 1 is shown, but the table set selection table in FIG. 69A is also shown for the table set selection table in the case of big hit in FIG. A table may be used, or the table set selection table in the first, third, and fifth embodiments may be used. Also, in the case of a big hit in Special Figure 2, all are 15R special big hits, so if there is a V win in the big hit game, table set 1 is selected, and there is no V win in the big hit game ( For irregular time, a table set selection table having a configuration in which the table set 4 is selected may be used.

  FIG. 69B is a diagram for explaining the table set 1, and FIG. 69C is a diagram for explaining the table set 2. The contents of the table set 1 and the table set 2 are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B, respectively, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 69D is a diagram for explaining the table set 3, and FIG. 69E is a diagram for explaining the table set 4.

  The table set 3 is used when shifting to the probability variation state after the big hit game which is the irregular probability variation described above. The table 3 for the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is used until the 99th symbol variation display after the big hit game ends, but in the table set 3, the symbol variation display of the 100th rotation, that is, the probability variation state In addition, the last symbol variation display in the electric support state is characterized in that the configuration is different from the table set 1 in that the table 6 is used. That is, according to the table set 3, the table 6 is used instead of the table 5 in the state immediately before the fall when the player's advantage is the second advantage. When the 101st symbol variation display is started, the state is shifted to the non-probable change state and the non-electric support state, and the table 1 for the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is used.

  The table set 4 is used when shifting to the electric support state in the non-probability change state after the end of the big hit game, which is the above-mentioned irregular short time. After the big hit, until the 49th symbol fluctuation display, the table 2 for the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is used, but in the table set 4, the symbol fluctuation display of the 50th rotation, that is, the electric support state The last symbol variation display is characterized in that the configuration is different from the table set 2 in that the table 7 is used. That is, according to the table set 4, the table 7 is used instead of the table 4 in the state immediately before the fall when the player's advantage is the first advantage. When the 51st symbol variation display is started, the state is shifted to the non-electric support state, and the table 1 for the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is used.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a situation that is difficult to occur in a normal game occurs, such as the above-mentioned irregular short time and irregular probability change, the advantageous control state falls to the more unfavorable control state. A special table is selected in the symbol variation display immediately before the game is performed, and as a result, the player can be given a sense of incongruity, a good deal, and the like.

  FIG. 69 (f) is a diagram for explaining tables used in the table set.

  There are seven types of tables 1 to 7 used in the table set of this embodiment. Here, since the tables 1 to 5 are as described above with reference to FIG. 9C, description thereof is omitted here. The table 6 is a table used in the state immediately before the fall in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state that shifts after the big hit game which is the irregular probability change described above, and the table 7 is the big hit which is the above irregular short time. It is a table used in the state just before falling in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state that shifts after the game ends.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (d), the effect modes according to the control time performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display unit) and the variation time corresponding to the timer number, which can be selected from each table. Is used.

  The contents of the tables 1 to 5 used in the present embodiment are as described above with reference to FIGS. 10C to 10E, FIG. 11 and FIG.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram showing a table 6 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be a big hit, and FIG. 70 (b) is a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be lost. FIG. The tables showing these tables 6 show, for reference, effects in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9D. Yes.

  As described above, the table 6 is a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display in the probability variation state and the last electric support state after the transition to the probability variation state and the electric support state after the end of the big hit game which is an irregular probability variation. It is.

  In the big hit symbol variation display shown in FIG. 70 (a), the super shortened big hit with timer number 1 (1 second) is always selected. In a normal game, the transition to the probability change state is made when there is a V prize at the 15R special jackpot, and in the probability change state that is shifted at this time, the table set 1 is selected. When the symbol variation display at the end of the probability variation state and the power support state (100th rotation) is a big hit, the table 5 for determining the variation time of the big symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12C is selected. The Therefore, in normal cases, the battle A victory with timer number 7 (35 seconds) is always selected. However, in the probability change state after the big hit game, which is an irregular probability change, a different effect is performed. With this, it is possible to produce an effect without any special problem in control while giving a sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the loss symbol variation display shown in FIG. 70B, the battle A defeat of the timer number 6 (30 seconds) is always selected. In the normal game in which the table set 1 is selected, when the symbol variation display in the probability variation state and the last electric support state (100th rotation) is lost, the symbol variation display that results in the loss shown in FIG. The table 5 for determining the variation time is selected. Therefore, under normal circumstances, the battle number 2 of the timer number 5 (12 seconds) is always selected and the reach state is not reached, but the reach state is always reached in the probability change state after the end of the big hit game which is an irregular probability change. As a result, the fluctuation time can be long, and there are cases where more suspensions of the special figure 2 can be generated in the state immediately before the probability variation state and the electric support state are finished.

  FIG. 70 (c) is a diagram showing a table 7 for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be a big hit, and FIG. 70 (d) is a table for determining the variation time of the symbol variation display to be lost. FIG. The tables showing these tables 7 show, for reference, effects in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) shown in FIG. 9D. Yes.

  As described above, the table 7 is a table for determining the variation time of the last symbol variation display in the electric support state after the transition to the electric support state with the non-probability changing state after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular short time. is there.

  In the big hit symbol variation display shown in FIG. 70 (c), the super shortened big hit with timer number 1 (1 second) is always selected. In the normal game, the transition to the electric support state is made when the big hit game is completed without winning the V prize at the 15R big hit that is not the 15R special big hit. Since the table set 2 is selected, when the symbol variation display at the end of the electric support state (50th rotation) is a big hit, the variation time of the big hit symbol variation display shown in FIG. 12A is determined. Table 4 is selected. Therefore, normally, super reach with a battle is always performed, but in the electric support state that transitioned after the big hit game that is irregular short-time, a different effect is performed, so while giving a sense of incongruity in the production, It is possible to produce effects without any special problems in control.

  In the loss symbol variation display shown in FIG. 70 (d), the super shortened loss of the timer number 2 (2 seconds) is always selected. In a normal game in which the table set 2 is selected, when the symbol variation display at the end of the electric support state (50th rotation) results in a loss, the variation time of the symbol variation display that results in a loss shown in FIG. The table 4 for determining is selected. For this reason, in the normal case, the battle gasase tilt 2 with the timer number 5 (12 seconds) is always selected, and in the state immediately before the power support state is ended, there are cases where more suspensions of the special figure 2 can be generated. However, in the electric support state shifted after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular time, the variation time of the symbol variation display at the end of the electric support state is short, so in the state immediately before the end of the electric support state, FIG. Is not likely to occur, and it may be disadvantageous for the player when the game is shifted to the electric support state after the big hit game, which is irregular shortening.

  Next, a hold icon applicable as a hold display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the first to sixth embodiments will be described. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a hold icon used for the special figure 1 hold display. FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a hold icon used for special figure 2 hold display.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the hold icon to be displayed changes according to the control state and the reliability.

  For example, a hold icon as shown in FIG. 71A is used as the hold icon used for the special figure 1 hold display.

  That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, for example, the white circle hold icon is used as the default display mode, the panda character hold icon is used as the low reliability hold notification display mode, and the reliability As the display mode of the high hold notice, the hold icon of the face of the Bancho is used.

  Further, in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state), for example, a white circle hold icon is used as a default display mode, and a child panda character hold icon is used as a low reliability hold notice display mode. Is used, and the hold icon of the longest character is used as the display mode of the hold notification with high reliability. The display mode of the default hold icon in the electric support state is the same display mode as the default hold icon in the special figure low probability normal map low probability state.

  Further, in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state), the hold icon is not displayed.

  Also, in the electric support state transitioned after the big hit game, which is an irregular short time, for example, a white square-shaped hold icon is used as the default display mode, and the display of the hold notification of low reliability is used for The hold icon is used, and the hold icon of the old character is used as the display mode of the hold notice with high reliability.

  In addition, in the probability change state after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular probability change, a white upward triangle-shaped hold icon is used, and a hold icon of an Afro student character is used as a display form of a low-reliability hold notice. As the display mode of the high-reliability hold notice, the hold icon of the character with the longest broken clothes is used.

  Thus, the special figure 1 hold display uses a hold icon of a different character depending on the reliability of the hold notice.

  Further, for example, as a hold icon used for the special figure 2 hold display, a hold icon as shown in FIG. 71 (b) is used.

  That is, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, for example, a white parallelogram hold icon is used as a default display mode, and a green parallelogram hold icon is used as a low reliability hold notification display mode. In addition, a red parallelogram-shaped hold icon is used as a display mode of the high-reliability hold notice. In the special 2 hold display, the shape of the hold icon used in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is made the same, and only the color differs according to the reliability.

  Further, in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state), for example, a white circle hold icon is used as a default display mode, and a child panda character hold icon is used as a low reliability hold notice display mode. Is used, and the hold icon of the longest character is used as the display mode of the hold notification with high reliability. The hold icon used in the electric support state in the special 2 hold display is the same as the hold icon used in the electric support state in the special 1 hold display.

  Further, in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state), the hold icon is not displayed.

  Also, in the electric support state transitioned after the end of the jackpot game, which is an irregular short time, for example, a white diamond-shaped hold icon is used as the default display mode, and turned to the right as a display mode for the low-reliability hold notice The holding icon of the Sabohani character is used, and the holding icon of the Sabohani character facing left is used as a display mode of the holding notice of high reliability. In the electric support state transferred after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular short time, the display mode of the holding notice is such that the direction of the character is different depending on the reliability.

  In addition, in the probability change state that has been transferred after the end of the jackpot game, which is an irregular probability change, a white downward triangle-shaped hold icon is used, and a hold icon of "Yatsushiro Shogun" is used as a display mode of a low-reliability hold notice The hold icon of the main character is used as the display mode of the hold notice with high reliability.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the electric support state that has been shifted after the end of the big hit game, which is irregular, and the probability change state, which has been shifted after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular probability change, ) Can be changed.

  In the present embodiment, the high-reliability hold notice icon may be a jackpot confirmed hold notice icon or a 15R special jackpot confirmed hold notice icon. In this case, it can be said that the 15R special jackpot confirmed hold notice icon is an example of the first effect.

  In the present embodiment, a dedicated hold icon is used in the electric support state that is shifted after the end of the big hit game, which is irregular, and the probability change state, which is shifted after the end of the big hit game, which is an irregular probability change. Is displayed, but such a dedicated hold icon may not be used.

  Further, these hold icons can be used as the above-described variable icons.

  Further, in this embodiment, the common hold icon is used in part for the special 1 hold display and the special 2 hold display, but may be used in common for all, and the special 1 hold display and There is no need to use a common hold icon for the special 2 hold display.

  Moreover, between the special 1 hold display and the special 2 hold display, the law of change of the display mode of the hold icon may be made common or may not be made common.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the third game condition (or the first condition) is established in the big hit game, the probability change state is set after the big hit game is finished. The icon is configured not to appear.

  In the present embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed in the probability change state. However, the control state in which the hold icon is not displayed and the control state in which the hold icon is displayed are arbitrarily set. be able to. For example, it is possible not to display the hold icon in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, or to display the hold icon in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. In the present embodiment, as described above, the hold icon is not displayed according to the control state. However, the hold icon may be displayed regardless of the control state.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when displaying a variation icon, the variation icon according to a control state can also be displayed by using the hold icon mentioned above. It is also possible to set a control state in which no change icon is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the same hold icon may be used in the power support state and the probability change state for the hold icon according to FIG. 1 in which the variable game is not prioritized, or different hold icons may be used. Good.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating the front of the attacker unit 2340, and FIG. 73 is a diagram of the attacker unit 2340 as viewed from the back.

  The attacker unit 2340 includes a first variable winning opening 234a as an example of a first variable winning means and a second variable winning opening 235a as an example of a second variable winning means, and the first variable winning opening 235a shown in FIG. Instead of the winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, for example, it is attached to the lower right of the game area 124 in the game board 200.

  The attacker unit 2340 has, for example, a flat plate shape, and includes an attachment base 2340a for attaching to the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b attached to the front surface of the attachment base 2340a with a predetermined interval. .

  In the mounting base 2340a, a rectangular opening is formed in the approximate center near the upper end, and a plate-like first door member 2341a is attached so as to cover the opening. The lower end of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by driving the solenoid SOL1 mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. The solenoid SOL1 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above.

  A second variable prize opening 235a, which will be described later, is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b. Hereinafter, the configuration of the second variable prize winning opening 235a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). FIG. 74 is a view for explaining the internal structure of the second variable winning opening 235a, and FIG. 74 (a) is a view showing that the V shutter 2352a as an example of the variable pitching means is in a closed state. FIG. 74B is a diagram showing that the V shutter 2352a is in an open state. In FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b), the decorative member 2340b is shown in a transparent manner in order to easily describe the internal structure of the second variable prize winning opening 235a.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b), the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. The decoration member 2340b is formed with a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 on which a game ball can roll by a wall surface, and an open portion behind the first rolling region SP1 is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

  The upper part of the first rolling region SP1 is open, and a plate-like shutter member 2351a is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the open part. The shutter member 2351a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 73). The solenoid SOL2 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. That is, in this embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state of being advanced forward (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is closed and the first ball of the game ball is closed. When the entry to the rolling area SP1 is blocked and the vehicle is in the backwardly retracted state (open state), the first rolling area SP1 is opened and the game ball enters the first rolling area SP1. Entry is allowed.

  At a position where the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2 are communicated with each other, a winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passing of the game ball is disposed, and the first rolling area SP1 is entered. When the played game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided leftward, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passing of a game ball to the winning count switch SW1, it detects a winning to the second variable winning opening 235a and pays out a winning ball based on the winning. Perform the process.

  The game ball that has passed the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling area SP2. In the second rolling region SP2, a V passage 2340g (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first region) and a general passage 2340h are juxtaposed in the left-right direction, and the received game ball is placed in one of the passages. It is configured to guide and discharge downward. The V passage 2340g is provided with a V passing switch SW2 as an example of a detecting means, and the game ball guided to the V passage 2340g is configured to pass through the V passing switch SW2. Thus, it can be said that the V passage 2340g is an area provided at a position where at least a game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a can enter. The V-pass switch SW2 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2, the third game condition (or the first condition) described above is assumed that the game ball has passed through the V passage 2340g. ) Can be determined. A plate-like V shutter 2352a is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the upper portion of the V passage 2340g. The V shutter 23521a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid SOL3 (see FIG. 73). The solenoid SOL3 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), when the V shutter 2352a is in the forwardly advanced state (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the game ball to the V passage 2340g The game ball that has been prevented from entering and has entered the second rolling region SP2 rolls on the upper surface of the V shutter 2352a and is guided to the general passage 2340h. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of being retracted backward (open state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the game ball is allowed to enter the V passage 2340g. The game ball that has entered the second rolling region SP2 is guided to the V passage 2340g. Further, a discharge ball detection switch SW3 is disposed in the general passage 2340h, and a game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW. The discharged ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

  In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the second variable winning of the game ball is determined by the number of passes of the game ball of the prize count switch SW1 and the number of passes of the V pass switch SW2 and the discharge ball detection switch SW3. By monitoring in / out to the mouth 235a, it may be possible to monitor illegally passing a game ball to the V passage 2340g. Examples of the illegal act include an act using a ball with a thread or a game ball having a size larger than a regulation (so-called decaball).

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a can enter the V path 2340g, and the game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234a has the above-described configuration. It is configured not to enter 2340g.

  Subsequently, the first variable winning port 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning port 235a (second attacker) from the start to the end of one round of the big hit game of the pachinko machine equipped with the above-described attacker unit 2340. Each operation timing of the V shutter 2352a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a timing chart showing the operation timings of the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, and the V shutter 2352a from the start to the end of one round of the big hit game.

  First, the operation timing of the first variable winning opening 234a in the round in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) opens and closes will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when the round is started, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON at the timing t0, and the first door member 2341a is opened from the closed state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fifth state). Displacement to a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a sixth state). Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of t4, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a closing time after the round (first closing time: for example, 1.5 seconds) is set. Thereafter, the round ends when the closing time elapses after the round and the timing of t6 is reached. Since the first variable winning opening 234a is not provided with a V shutter, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the operation relating to the V shutter is not performed.

  Next, a round in which the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) opens and closes, and the second variable winning opening 235a is open for a long time (for example, open for a maximum of 25 seconds: long open) (for example, The operation timings of the second variable prize opening 235a and the V shutter 2352a in the 15th round of the 15R special big hit described above will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (c) and 75 (d), when the round starts, the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON at the timing t0, and the shutter member 2351a is sometimes closed (hereinafter referred to as a first state). ) To the open state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state), and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on to open the V shutter 2352a from the closed state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the third state). Displacement to a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a fourth state). At this time, a first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set. When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t1, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V closing time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. When the first V closing time elapses and the timing becomes t3, the solenoid SOL3 is turned ON again, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of t4, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set, and a post-round closing time (first closing time) is set. When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t5, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Thereafter, the round ends when the closing time elapses after the round and the timing of t6 is reached. The above-described opening / closing operation of the V shutter 2352a is performed based on the first opening pattern data stored in the ROM 406 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  Next, a round in which the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) opens and closes, and the second variable winning opening 235a is opened for a short time (for example, a maximum of 0.1 second opening: short opening) ( For example, the operation timings of the second variable prize winning opening 235a and the V shutter 2352a in the 15th round of 15R big hit described above will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and 75 (f), when the round starts, the solenoid SOL2 is turned on at the timing t0, the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the closed state to the opened state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on. Thus, the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the first V opening time described above is set. When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t1, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, but the opening time of the second variable prize winning opening 235a is also 0. Since it is 1 second, the solenoid SOL2 is turned off at the same time t1, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a post-round closing time (first closing time) is set. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has passed and the timing of t2 is reached, the round ends. Also in this case, the opening / closing operation of the V shutter 2352a is performed based on the first opening pattern data described above. However, as shown by the chain line in the timing chart shown in FIG. 75 (f), the round ends at the timing t2 before the V shutter 2352a is opened again, so that the game ball to the V passage 2340g. The chance to pass is only a very short period of the first V opening time immediately after the start of the round. In this way, even if the game ball wins the second variable winning opening 235a in the round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is short-opened, the passing of the gaming ball to the V passage 2340g is performed as described above. This makes it difficult to suppress the transition to an unintended control state. On the other hand, even when the second variable winning opening 235a is short-opened, the V shutter 2352a is opened, so that an opportunity for the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g is secured. In addition, the same opening pattern data is used as the data for determining the opening / closing pattern of the V shutter 2352a regardless of whether the second variable winning opening 235a is a round that opens long or short round. For example, the control burden such as switching data to be used is reduced depending on whether or not it is a special big hit.

  The operation timing described above is applied to a pachinko machine provided with two variable winning openings. For example, only one variable winning opening having a V passage is provided as in the second variable winning opening 235a. In the pachinko machine, for example, with regard to the round for determining whether or not the third game condition (first condition) is established by allowing passage through the V passage, FIGS. 75 (c) and (d) Alternatively, the operations shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and (f) are performed, and the other functions are performed for the other rounds by performing the operations shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and (b). Can be realized.

  In the pachinko machines of the first embodiment to the seventh embodiment described above, the relationship between the gaming state and the table set (data used when determining the variation time) becomes irregular due to partial diversion of the variation time. Even so, both the effect of reducing the sense of incongruity and the effect of showing an interesting behavior even when becoming irregular, which is the opposite of the effect, are exhibited.

  That is, there may be a case where it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort due to the variation time. More specifically, by using a part of the variation time, even if the relationship between the gaming state and the table set becomes irregular, it may be possible to produce an effect without a sense of incongruity. On the other hand, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by using the fact that the relationship between the game state and the table set is irregular for the production.

  Further, since the big hit symbol is related to the gaming state, the big hit symbol can be associated with the table set. In some cases, the game can be sharpened by selecting an irregular table set. Further, during the big hit gaming state, the game ball is being fired in order for the attacker to win the game ball. Therefore, the third condition (or the first condition) may be easily established.

  In the above embodiment, a dedicated table (for example, the table 5 or the table 4) is used before the gaming state is switched. However, the timing for using the dedicated table can be arbitrarily set, for example, You may make it use a table for exclusive use for the 1st rotation at the time of switching of a gaming state by a table set.

  Further, although the description has been given taking the effect by the decorative symbol display device 208 (effect display means) as an example, the present invention may be applied to an effect by a movable body, a lamp, or sound.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the production | presentation which can alert | report that it is a special state, eliminating the sense of incongruity about a change time using a dedicated sub production | presentation mode.

  Further, the operation probability of the movable body may be refrained from being in the irregular state, or conversely, the irregularity state may be notified by increasing the appearance rate. In other words, it may be set with priority given to either the effect of eliminating the uncomfortable feeling or intentionally notifying.

  Also, if the jackpot symbol without power support is stopped, if the gaming state before the big hit game is a special low-probability normal figure low-probability state, even after the big hit game ends ( (Non-electric support state) is maintained, and if the game state before the big hit game is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (electric support state), it will shift to the normal figure high probability state. May be. In addition, the jackpot symbol that does not have the electric support may be a symbol that is not selected in the special figure 2 that is mainly drawn in a high probability state. In this case, the game state after the big hit game is determined according to the big hit symbol and the game state at the time of the big hit (which may vary as a result), and the variable time group (table set) after the big hit is decided. May be.

  Furthermore, you may comprise so that irregularity may not arise reliably. For example, in the second embodiment, the third condition is met (winning of special figure C or D in special figure 1), and the first condition is also established (to the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker)). In a special state (irregular state) in which the second variable winning slot 235 (predetermined winning area) cannot be won under the first condition (for example, it does not open or does not reach 15 rounds) ).

  In any of the embodiments, the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is opened in the 15th round, but the second attacker is abolished and only the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is provided. It is good. In this case, right-handing is not necessary, and the third condition is established by winning the first variable winning opening 234 in the 15th round. On the contrary, the first attacker may be abolished and only the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) may be used. In this case, it is always necessary to make a right-hand hit during the big hit game, and the third condition is established by winning the second variable winning opening 235 in the 15th round.

  In the above embodiment, the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened in the 1st to 14th rounds, and the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is opened in the 15th round. Although it is configured, it is possible to appropriately set which variable prize opening is to be opened in which round. For example, the round in which the second variable prize opening 235 is opened may be a round other than the last round. Moreover, it may be configured to determine which variable winning opening is to be opened in which round according to the type of the big hit symbol.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is set to a time sufficient for easy winning (for example, 25 seconds) depending on the type of jackpot symbol, and it is extremely difficult to win. It was decided to select a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but the opening time for each round of the first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) is determined according to the type of jackpot symbol. You may make it determine whether it is sufficient time which can win easily, or very short time when winning is difficult. For example, the opening time of the first variable winning opening 234 is made extremely short (for example, 0.1 second) in all rounds in which the first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) is opened due to the jackpot symbol. (2) The opening time of the variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is set to a time sufficient for easy winning (for example, 25 seconds), so that the winning in the big hit game is suppressed and the specification is shifted to the probable state. It is also possible, and game design can be performed freely.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an error notification may be made when a winning is made at the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) that has almost no possibility of winning in the 15R big hit that is not the 15R special big hit. As a result, for example, when an illegal winning is made, it becomes possible to easily notify a store clerk or the like of the game hall.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 have different entrance routes, so that it is possible to hold only up to four in a normal game. For example, it is configured so that the entrance is shared and the subsequent route is alternately distributed between the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232. In the normal game state, it is possible to hold a total of eight variable games for the first special figure and the second special figure, and then execute the above-mentioned winning order fluctuation, and in normal time The present invention can also be applied to an eight-holding winning order variation machine (so-called eight chance machine).

  Moreover, although the thing of the structure which performs a 1st effect and a 2nd effect was shown in the said embodiment, it is good also as a structure which does not perform a 2nd effect but performs only a 1st effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, the number of consecutive big hits (number of consecutive games) that do not go through the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like. Also good. Moreover, it is also possible to change the display mode of the number of consecutive resorts displayed when a big hit is made in the gaming state (probability changing state or electric support state) shifted from the above-mentioned irregular short time or irregular probability change to a special display mode. . Further, the number of consecutive resorts may not be displayed in such a special display mode.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, you may perform the tutorial production | presentation which is a display explaining the content of production | production, and this tutorial production | presentation can also be functioned as a preliminary announcement. In this case, the tutorial effect can be an example of the first effect and the second effect. For example, when a content such as “V Attacker is easy to open after a big hit at 777” or a content such as “Reach 7 is super hot” is displayed, this is the case when the 15R special big hit This display can be adopted as the first effect. Further, by combining these displays and other effects, it is possible to function as the first effect and the second effect. For example, if the first notice and the second notice are each executed independently, the jackpot is not confirmed, but if both the first notice and the second notice are executed, the 15R special jackpot is confirmed. In such a case, it can be said that these first notice and second notice correspond to an example of the first effect. In addition, for example, the third notice and the fourth notice will not be a big hit if they are executed independently, but if both the third notice and the fourth notice are executed, the 15R special big hit If the 15R big hit is not confirmed, it can be said that the third notice and the fourth notice correspond to an example of the second effect. Of course, it is also possible to combine three or more notices into the first effect or the second effect.

  Next, the concept of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the concept of the present invention.

  Specifically, in FIG. 76A, for example, as described in the embodiments so far, the decorative symbols “decoration 4” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 4” are displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. After the first effect A that indicates that it is difficult to establish the third game condition during the big hit game, such as stop display (determined display) in combination, for example, the second display shown in FIG. The big hit game ends (the first requirement is satisfied) without the game ball passing through the V passing switch SW2 provided in the probability variation area in the variable winning opening 235a (the third game condition is satisfied) (first game) This shows the situation when the first condition is satisfied. In the following description, it is needless to say that the present invention can be similarly applied to an embodiment in which the third game condition is established when a winning is made to the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. Yes. In the present embodiment, the V pass switch SW2 may be referred to as a probability change region switch.

  In such a case, the effect of transitioning to the first game state (electric support state: special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) after the big hit game is executed as the end effect of the big hit game (FIG. 76 (a ), After the first effect B is executed), the big hit game is finished and the state shifts to the first game state. Here, an effect such as represented by the first effect B that at least suggests that the game will shift to the first game state after the big hit game may be referred to as the first effect. The same applies to the following description.

  In other words, with respect to FIG. 76 (a), after an effect related to the probability variation area non-passing open pattern is executed, if there is no passage of the game ball to the probability variation area, the effect is to shift to a non-probability gaming state. It can be said that after (first production) is performed, the concept of shifting to an uncertain gaming state is shown. In the present embodiment, the probability variation region may be referred to as a high probability variation determination region, and may be referred to as a probability variation function operation region.

  In FIG. 76B, for example, as described in the previous embodiments, the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped at the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7”. After the second effect A is executed, which indicates that the third game condition is likely to be satisfied during the big hit game, such as displaying (determined display), the game ball passes through the V pass switch SW2 (third game) This shows the situation when the big hit game is completed after the condition is established. Note that the second effect A may be an effect in a mode of explicitly notifying that the third game condition is easily established during the big hit game.

  In such a case, the effect of transitioning to the second game state (probability change state: special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) after the big hit game is executed as the end effect of the big hit game (FIG. 76 (b)). In (2), after the second effect B is executed), the big hit game is finished and the state shifts to the second game state. Here, an effect that at least suggests that the game is shifted to the second gaming state after the big hit game, as represented by the second effect B, may be referred to as a second effect. The same applies to the following description. Note that the second effect may be an effect representing transition to the second game state after the big hit game.

  In other words, in FIG. 76 (b), when the game ball passes into the probability variation area after the performance related to the probability variation area passage opening pattern is executed, the game state is changed to the probability variation. It can be said that the concept of shifting to a probable gaming state after the production (second production) is performed is shown.

  In FIG. 76C, for example, as described in the previous embodiments, the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped with a combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 4”. After the first effect A is executed, which at least suggests that it is difficult to establish the third game condition during the big hit game, such as displaying (determined display), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch SW2 (third The game condition is established) (the second requirement is satisfied) and the second condition is established by the end of the big hit game. The first effect A may be an effect indicating that it is difficult to satisfy the third game condition during the big hit game.

  Even in such a case, as the end effect of the big hit game, an effect (first effect) to shift to the first gaming state after the big hit game is executed (in FIG. 76 (c), the first effect B is Executed).

  In other words, with respect to FIG. 76 (c), after the performance related to the probability variation area non-passing release pattern is executed, the game state is shifted to the non-probability game state even when the game ball has passed to the probability variation area. It can be said that the concept that the effect of the effect is performed and then the game state is shifted to a certain game state is shown.

  When the concept shown in FIG. 76 (c) is realized, for example, in a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established, so-called care for passing the game ball by hand with respect to the V-pass switch SW2. If a fraudulent act such as a goth act using a ball with a thread or a game ball larger than a prescribed size (deca ball) is performed, the third game condition is established for a player who has cheated Sometimes it can make you think it has failed. Alternatively, it may be possible for a player who has performed fraud to make a player think that fraud has been detected. As a result, the deterrence of fraudulent acts works, and in some cases, it may be possible to prevent the disadvantages of the game shop.

  Hereinafter, some embodiments applicable to the concept of the invention described above with reference to FIG. 76 will be described. It should be noted that the embodiments described below are merely examples included in the concept of the present invention, and it goes without saying that the scope of the invention is not limited thereto.

[Eighth Embodiment]
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74. Of course, the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. Embodiments can also be applied.

  FIG. 77 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) of FIG. 1 in the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 77 (a-2) The example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine of 8 embodiment is shown.

  77 (a-1) and FIG. 77 (a-2) also show six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display.

  Also in the eighth embodiment, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 are common. Also, in the eighth embodiment, the big hits are big hits with 16 rounds of electric support, but in Special Figure 2, the big hit symbols are all big hits (special big hits) that are scheduled to acquire a probable change. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure C" are jackpots (special jackpots) scheduled to change, and "Special Figure B" and "Special Figure D" are scheduled to acquire probability changes. There is no jackpot. In this way, "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure C" in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 in "Special Figure" will be special special jackpots where the second jackpot gaming state that is likely to shift to the second gaming state is started. A "to" Special Figure D "may be referred to as the second symbol, and the jackpot at which the first jackpot gaming state is not started (that is, it is difficult to shift to the second gaming state) is not scheduled to acquire the probability variation. “Special figure B” and “Special figure D” in special figure 1 may be referred to as a first symbol.

  FIG. 77 (b-1) shows an example of the action of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG. 1 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game. FIG. 77 (b-2) An example of the operation of the attacker during the jackpot game of 2 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game are shown.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure A is displayed in the special figure 1, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 15th round, 2 The variable prize winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special figure A in the special figure 1 is a pattern indicating that a large number of game balls are 16 round big hits that can enter the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure B is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 15th round, The two variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. In other words, Special Figure B in Special Figure 1 shows that many game balls can enter the variable prize opening in any round from 1 to 15 rounds, but in the 16th round, it is possible to enter the variable prize opening. It is a pattern which shows that it is a substantial 15 round jackpot with almost no possibility of a sphere.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure C is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the fourth round, but from the fifth round to the 15th Until the round, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. In the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special figure C in the special figure 1 is that a lot of game balls can enter the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 4 rounds and 16 rounds, but variable from 5 rounds to 15 rounds. It is a pattern which shows that it is a real 5 round big hit that there is almost no possibility of entering a winning opening.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure D is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the fourth round, but the fifth round to the 15th Until the round, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. Further, in the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. That is, the special figure D in the special figure 1 is that from 1 round to 4 rounds, many game balls can enter the variable prize opening in any round, but from 5 rounds to 16 rounds to the variable prize opening. It is a pattern which shows that it is a real 4 round jackpot with almost no possibility of entering.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure A to D is displayed in the special figure 2 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 15th round, The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, special figures A to D in special figure 2 are symbols indicating that 16 game rounds are a big hit that allows a lot of game balls to enter the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds.

  In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game with any of the above-mentioned symbols, there are 16 rounds, and the game balls that are entered while the second variable winning opening 235a is opened are provided in the probability changing area in the second variable winning opening 235a. When the V passing switch SW2 is passed, the probability variation operation area is turned ON, and after the big hit game is finished, while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times, the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state which is an example of the second game state is displayed. Maintained. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, the probability variation operation region is not turned ON (the probability variation operation region remains OFF), and after the big hit game ends, 100 symbols. While the variable display is performed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state which is an example of the first gaming state is maintained.

  In the eighth embodiment, the third game condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 of the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) in the 16th round. Therefore, the big hit by the special figures B and D of the special figure 1 is not a 0% possibility of the probability variation acquisition, but the possibility is very low and it can be said that the jackpot is not scheduled to acquire the probability variation. On the other hand, the big hit by the special figures A and C of the special figure 1 has a sufficient opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and there is a possibility of passing the game ball to the V passage switch SW2. It is expensive and can be said to be a big hit scheduled to win.

  Further, the operation of the attacker in the jackpot game to which the special illustrations A to D are displayed in the special illustration 2 is the same as the operation of the attacker in the special illustration A in the special illustration 1. Therefore, any of the big hits by the special winning symbols (special illustrations A to D) of the special figure 2 has a sufficient opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 The possibility of passing is high, and it can be said that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire certainty. It should be noted that the operation of the attacker in the big hit according to the special figures A to D in the special figure 2 may be different from the operation mode of the attacker in the big hit according to the special figure A in the special figure 1.

  Thus, the jackpot gaming state in which the third gaming condition is difficult to be satisfied may be referred to as the first jackpot gaming state, and the third gaming condition is likely to be satisfied, and the second game is more than the first jackpot gaming state. The jackpot gaming state where the state is likely to start may be referred to as a second jackpot gaming state.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the external configuration of the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a, and FIG. 78 (b) is the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 234a. It is the figure which represented roughly the internal structure of the winning opening 235a. FIG. 78C schematically shows that the V shutter 2352a is in an open state, and FIG. 78D schematically shows that the V shutter 2352a is in a closed state. FIG. FIG. 78 (e) is a diagram schematically showing the external appearance of another embodiment of the first variable prize winning opening and the second variable prize winning opening.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), a winning count switch SW4 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a is provided in the first variable winning opening 234a. Yes. The game ball that has passed the winning count switch SW4 is guided to the discharge passage and discharged out of the pachinko machine 100. The winning count switch SW4 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passing of a game ball to the winning count switch SW4, it detects a winning to the first variable winning opening 234a and pays out a winning ball based on the winning. Perform the process. Note that the internal configuration of the second variable prize opening 235a is the same as that described in the seventh embodiment, and therefore the same reference numerals are used and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (c), when the V shutter 2352a is in the open state, the second variable winning opening 235a is allowed to enter the game ball into the V passage 2340g and passes through the winning count switch SW1. Then, the game ball that has entered the second rolling region SP2 passes through the V passage switch SW2 and is guided to the V passage 2340g. As shown in FIG. 78 (d), when the V shutter 2352a is in the closed state, the second variable winning opening 235a is prevented from entering the game ball into the V passage 2340g, and the winning count switch SW1. The game balls that have passed through and entered the second rolling region SP2 roll on the upper surface of the V shutter 2352a, pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW3, and are guided to the general passage 2340h.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening are configured as described above. However, as shown in FIG. 78 (e), the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening. As an example, the first variable prize winning opening 234b and the second variable prize winning opening 235b may be applied.

  Inside the first variable winning opening 234b, a first passing detection switch SW5 and a second passing detection switch SW6 for detecting a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234b are provided. The game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234b passes through one of the first passage detection switch SW5 and the second passage detection switch SW6 and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 100. .

  Inside the second variable winning opening 235b, a third passing detection switch SW7 and a fourth passing detecting switch SW8 for detecting a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235b are provided. The game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235b passes through one of the third passage detection switch SW7 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 100. .

  The first passage detection switch SW5 to the fourth passage detection switch SW8 can function as follows.

  That is, for example, (1) a game that causes the first passage detection switch SW5 to the fourth passage detection switch SW8 to function as a winning count switch and that has passed through the first passage detection switch SW5 and the third passage detection switch SW7. For example, FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 78 (d) show the game balls that pass through the second passage detection switch SW6 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 while guiding the ball to the general passage. It is good also as a structure guided to any one of V passage and a general passage by such an internal structure. Note that at least one of the second passage detection switch SW6 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 is configured to guide the general passage, and the other is as shown in FIGS. 78 (c) and 78 (d). It is good also as a structure guided to any one of V channel | path and a general channel | path by this internal structure.

  (2) The first passage detection switch SW5 and the third passage detection switch SW7 function as a winning count switch, and the second passage detection switch SW6 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 function as a V passage switch. A configuration may be adopted. In this case, a V shutter as described above is provided that can be changed between a state that prevents passage to the second passage detection switch SW6 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 that function as a V passage switch and a state that allows passage. May be. Further, for example, one or a plurality of game balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234b or the second variable winning opening 235b are retained on the upstream side of the passage detection switch functioning as a V passing switch, You may make it provide the retention member which can change to the state which cancels | releases retention. For example, the stay member may be configured to make it easy to pass through the V-pass switch or make it difficult to pass through by appropriately setting the timing of releasing the stay of the game ball. Moreover, you may comprise so that a game ball may be retained in order to accelerate | stimulate the passage to V passing switch. Further, in order to promote the passage to the fourth passage detection switch SW8 functioning as a V passage switch, a staying member is provided for retaining one or more game balls that have entered the second variable winning opening 235b. You may do it. One of the second passage detection switch SW6 and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 may function as a winning count switch instead of the V passage switch. Further, any one of the first passage detection switch SW5 and the third passage detection switch SW7 may function as a V passage switch instead of a winning count switch.

  (3) The first passage detection switch SW5 to the fourth passage detection switch SW8 may all function as a winning count switch and may not have a configuration such as a V path. In such a configuration, for example, as described above, the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 100 in which the third game condition is established by winning a game ball in the second variable winning opening 235c (second attacker). Can do. Note that all of the first passage detection switch SW5 to the fourth passage detection switch SW8 may function as a V passage switch.

  Next, the operation timings of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker), the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker), and the V shutter 2352a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. explain.

  FIG. 79A is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing in the big hit game when the special figure B is displayed in the special figure 1 and the big hit (15R big hit) is obtained, and FIG. FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing in the jackpot game when the special figure A is displayed in FIG. 1 and a big hit (16R special big hit) is obtained. FIG. 79 (c) is a special chart B in FIG. It is a timing chart which shows an example of operation timing in a big hit game when it is displayed and it becomes a big hit (15R big hit). Here, A, B and C in the figure respectively indicate the types of gaming states, A is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, B is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, C is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

  First, the operation timing in the big hit game when special figure B is displayed in special figure 1 and the big hit (15R big hit) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), when the big hit game starts at the timing of t1, the big hit start effect is executed. Thereafter, the first round is started at the timing t2, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Here, a part or all of the period from t1 which is the start timing of the big hit game to t2 which is the timing at which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the first round is shown. Sometimes called a big hit start state. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the post-round closing time (first closing time: for example, 1.5 Second) is set. Thereafter, when the closing time elapses after the round, the first round is finished, and then the second round is started. Thereafter, the same operation is repeated until the 15th round is completed. Note that the operation relating to the V shutter 2352a is not performed from the first round to the fifteenth round. Here, the first to fifteenth rounds where the first variable winning opening 234a is opened may be referred to as the second round.

  When the 15th round is completed and the 16th round is started at the timing t3, the solenoid SOL2 is turned on and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the closed state to the opened state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on and the V shutter 2352a is turned on. Displace from the closed state to the open state. At this time, a first opening time (for example, 0.1 second) as an opening time of the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) and a first V opening time (as an open state of the V shutter 2352a) For example, 0.1 second) is set. In the following description, this first opening time may be referred to as a first period. In addition, in this way, the 16th round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened may be referred to as the first round. Further, although not shown, a V passing effective period is set as a period in which the passing of the game ball to the V passing switch SW2 is treated as being effective (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a first area effective state). Is done. Here, the first region effective state may be referred to as a high probability variation determination region effective state. The V passing effective period is, for example, a time slightly longer than the first opening time (for example, a time longer by 0.1 second than the first opening time). Such a V passage effective period may be referred to as a first detection period. Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that the first detection period overlaps at least partly with the first period. Note that the V passing effective period is not limited to that described above, and for example, a period during which the special electric accessory (the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a) is open may be set as the V passing effective period. Further, for example, during the opening of the special electric accessory and the closing period (or the effective period for processing the winning balls of the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a in the closing period) V It is good also as a passage effective period. Further, the period during which the big hit game is executed may be set as the V passing effective period. When the first opening time and the first V opening time elapse and the timing of t4 is reached, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF, the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF. Thus, the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a post-round closing time (first closing time) indicated by a period D in the figure is set. At this time, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not a game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 during the V pass effective period (that is, whether or not the second requirement is satisfied). Note that it may be determined whether or not a game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 in the V pass effective period at a timing t5 described later. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has passed and the timing of t5 comes, the 16th round ends. The post-round closing time set in the 16th round may be the same time as the post-round closing time of other rounds, or may be a different time. As described above, in the big hit game in which the operation shown in FIG. 79A is performed, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a is very short and the opening time of the V shutter 2351a is also extremely short. Even if a game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, in most cases, the V shutter 2351a is closed before reaching the V passage 2340g to prevent the game ball from entering. Therefore, the transition to an unintended control state can be suppressed. On the other hand, even when the second variable winning opening 235a is short-opened, the V shutter 2352a is opened, so that an opportunity for the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g is secured. In this embodiment, a V passing effective period is set corresponding to the opening time of the V shutter 2352a, and at least a timing other than the V passing effective period is entered into the V passage 2340g (that is, the V passing switch). If there is a detection of the passing of a game ball to SW2, an error may be determined. Here, the V passage effective period may be set so as to overlap at least partly with the opening time of the shutter member 2351a, or may be set so as not to overlap.

  Then, when the closing time after the round elapses and the timing becomes t5, the jackpot end effect time indicated by the period E in the figure is set. In the jackpot end effect time, for example, the first effect B described above with reference to FIG. 76 is executed as the jackpot end effect.

  Thereafter, the big hit game ends at the timing of t6, and the game state shifts. In the present embodiment, the third requirement is satisfied by the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the big hit game, since there was no detection of the passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2, at the timing of t6, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (first Transition to one gaming state).

  Here, part or all of the period D and the period E in the figure may be called a big hit end state.

  Next, the operation timing in the big hit game when the special figure A is displayed in the special figure 1 and a big hit (16R special big hit) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the big hit game starts at the timing of t1, the big hit start effect is executed. Thereafter, the first round is started at the timing t2, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the post-round closing time (first closing time: for example, 1.5 Second) is set. Thereafter, when the closing time elapses after the round, the first round is finished, and then the second round is started. Thereafter, the same operation is repeated until the 15th round is completed. Note that the operation relating to the V shutter 2352a is not performed from the first round to the fifteenth round.

  When the 15th round is completed and the 16th round is started at the timing t3, the solenoid SOL2 is turned on and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the closed state to the opened state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on and the V shutter 2352a is turned on. Displace from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set together with the second opening time (for example, 29.0 seconds; long time opening (long opening)). When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t4a, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V closing time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. On the other hand, since the second variable winning opening 235a is set to the second opening time, the shutter member 2351a continues to be in the open state even after the V shutter 2352a is closed. In the following description, this second opening time may be referred to as a second period. When the first V closing time elapses, the solenoid SOL3 is turned ON again, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. After that, for example, when the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a passes through the V pass switch SW2 at the timing of S2, a detection signal is output from the V pass switch SW2. That is, the third game condition is established. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of t4b, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) is set, and a post-round closing time (first closing time) indicated by a period D in the figure is set. In the jackpot game shown in FIG. 79 (b), the V passage effective period (second detection period) is set corresponding to the opening time of the V shutter 2352a. The second detection period is longer than the first detection period. When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t4c, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not a game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 during the V pass effective period (that is, whether or not the second requirement is satisfied). In addition, it may be determined whether or not a game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 in the V pass effective period at a timing t5a described later. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has passed and the timing of t5a is reached, the 16th round ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the period during which the second variable winning opening 235a set to open for a long time (long opening) is in an open state may be referred to as a second period. It can be said that this second period is at least longer than the first period described above.

  Then, when the closing time after the round elapses and the timing becomes t5a, the jackpot end effect time indicated by the period E in the figure is set. In the jackpot end effect time, for example, the second effect B described above with reference to FIG. 76 is executed as the jackpot end effect.

  Thereafter, the big hit game ends at the timing of t6a, and the game state shifts. In the present embodiment, the third requirement is satisfied by the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (b), since the passing of the game ball to the V passing switch SW2 was detected in the big hit game, at the timing of t6a, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (first (Second gaming state). On the other hand, in the big hit game, when the passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 is not detected, that is, the game is not detected that the game ball has entered the V passage 2340g at least in the second detection period. If the condition is satisfied, a transition from the big hit gaming state to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (first gaming state) is made.

  Next, the operation timing in the big hit game when the special figure B is displayed in the special figure 1 and the big hit (15R big hit) will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (c). FIG. 79 (c) shows an example of the operation timing when the passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 is detected in the big hit game, unlike FIG. 79 (a). Hereinafter, the description of the same operation as that in FIG. 79A will be omitted, and a different operation will be described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 79 (c), the 15th round ends and the 16th round starts at the timing t3, and the shutter member 2351a and the V shutter 2352a are displaced from the closed state to the open state as described above. Thereafter, the passage of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 is detected at the timing of S1 until the shutter member 2351a and the V shutter 2352a are changed from the open state to the closed state. That is, the third game condition is established. In other words, the jackpot game shown in FIG. 79 (c) is a jackpot game that is an irregular probability change. As described above, the V passage effective period (first detection period) is set while the V shutter 2352a is displaced to the open state at least. During this period, the detection of the game ball to the V passage switch SW2 is performed. If there is, the second requirement will be satisfied.

  Thereafter, the jackpot end effect time indicated by the period E in the figure is set at the timing t5, and the jackpot end effect is executed in the period E, but the game state is shifted to the second game state after the jackpot game ends. First, the first effect B, which is an effect indicating the transition to the first gaming state, is executed as the jackpot end effect. In the present embodiment, for example, the first effect B is executed as the jackpot end effect corresponding to “Special Figure B” which is a 15R jackpot symbol. That is, the first effect B is not an effect that is executed on condition that the second requirement is satisfied. In other words, the execution condition of the first effect B does not include that the second requirement is satisfied. Alternatively, the first effect B executed during the big hit big hit game with the 15R big hit symbol (for example, “Special Figure B”) is based on information on whether or not the game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 (directly). (E.g., indirectly or indirectly), for example, based on information on the jackpot symbol. Note that the first effect B is an effect that may be executed when the second requirement is satisfied in the jackpot game with 15R jackpot (for example, the jackpot in “Special Figure B”). Good.

  Thereafter, the big hit game ends at the timing of t6 (that is, the third requirement is satisfied), and the gaming state shifts, but unlike the example shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the big hit game, the V pass switch SW2 is switched to. Since the passing of the game ball is detected, the big hit game state is shifted to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (second game state) at timing t6.

  Next, an example of the operation timing of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a between rounds will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 80A shows the timing from when the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed until the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the next round. FIG. 80 (b) is a timing chart showing a first example of the first variable winning opening 234a (second) in the next round after the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing a second example of timing until the first attacker) is opened. FIG. 80 (c) shows an opening / closing pattern of the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) when the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) opens and closes in at least two rounds in the big hit game. It is a timing chart explaining an example. Here, A, B and C in the figure respectively indicate the types of gaming states, A is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, B is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, C is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

  First, the first variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed until the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the next round. An example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), when a round in which the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) opens at the timing of t1 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on and the first variable prize opening 234a (first The first door member 2341a of the attacker is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, an effective period (attacker 1 effective period) for winning a prize to the first attacker for surely detecting a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is set. The Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing t2, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the closing time after the round (second closing time: for example, 0.9 seconds) indicated by the period F in the figure is set, and the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the open state. In order to reliably detect the game ball that has entered, the valid period for winning the first attacker is extended by a third time (for example, 1 second). In this embodiment, the third time is set longer than the second closing time, but the third time may be set shorter than the second closing time, or the same It may be set to time. The second closing time and the third time can be set to arbitrary times.

  Subsequently, after the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is closed, when the second closing time has elapsed and the timing of t3 comes, the next round starts and the solenoid SOL2 is turned on. Thus, the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the closed state to the opened state, and the solenoid SOL3 is turned on, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the opened state. At this time, a valid period (Attacker 2 valid period) for winning the second attacker to ensure the detection of the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker), and V passing A V passing effective period is set as a period in which the passing of the game ball to the switch SW2 is treated as effective. At this time, the first V opening time (for example, 0.1 second) described above is set. When the first V opening time elapses and the timing becomes t4, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a first V closing time (for example, 3 seconds) is set. Further, at this time, the V passing effective period is extended by a fourth time (for example, 0.1 second) so that the game ball passed while the V shutter 2352a is in the open state can be reliably detected. The On the other hand, at the timing of t4, the above-described attacker 1 valid period ends. Needless to say, the valid period of the attacker 1 may not be the same as the timing of the displacement of the V shutter 2352a to the closed state. Then, when the fourth time elapses and the timing of t5 comes, the V passing effective period ends. On the other hand, since the second variable prize opening 235a is set to open for a long time (long open) with an open time of 29.0 seconds, the shutter member continues after the V shutter 2352a is closed. 2351a remains open.

  Thereafter, when the first V closing time elapses and the timing becomes t6, the solenoid SOL3 is turned ON again, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At the same time, a V passage effective period is set. Thereafter, for example, when the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a passes the V-pass switch SW2 at the timing of t7, a detection signal is output from the V-pass switch SW2. That is, the third game condition is established. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of t8, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, a post-round closing time (third closing time: for example, 0.9 seconds) indicated by a period G1 in the drawing is set, and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened in the open state. In order to reliably detect the game ball that has entered, the valid period for winning the second attacker is extended by a third time (for example, 1 second). In addition, a second V opening time (for example, 1.1 seconds) is set so that a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the open state can pass through the V passing switch SW2. ) Is set. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80 (a), the second V opening time is set so as to end 0.1 seconds after the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is closed. Yes. Further, the V passing effective period is extended by a fifth time (for example, 1.2 seconds) so that a game ball passed while the V shutter 2352a is open can be reliably detected. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80A, the V passage effective period is set so as to end 0.1 seconds after the V shutter 2352a is closed. In the present embodiment, the second closing time and the third closing time are set to the same time, but may be set to different times.

  Then, after the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed, when the third closing time has elapsed and the timing of t9 comes, the next round starts and the solenoid SOL1 is turned on. Thus, the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the valid period of the attacker 1 is set as described above.

  On the other hand, when the third time elapses and the timing becomes t10, the above-described attacker 2 effective period ends. Thereafter, when the second V opening time set as described above elapses and the timing becomes t11, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Subsequently, when the fifth time has elapsed and the timing of t12 is reached, the V passing effective period ends.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 80A, the timing from t10 to t12 is the timing after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened, and the attacker between rounds It may be possible to reduce the loss of game balls due to so-called waste by shortening the closing time.

  Next, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed at the second timing after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the next round after the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is closed. An example will be described. This example is the same as the first example shown in FIG. 80 (a) except that the closing time after round set at the timing of t8 is different as shown in FIG. 80 (b). Only points will be described, and description of the same points will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the second example, a post-round closing time (fourth closing time: for example, 1.3 seconds) indicated by a period G2 in the drawing is set at the timing t8, and thereafter When the fourth closing time has elapsed and the timing of t13 is reached, the next round starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is reached. Is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the valid period of the attacker 1 is set as described above.

  In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 80 (b), after the timing of t10 to t12, the next round starts and the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is set to the open state. Yes. Therefore, after the processing related to the first round in which the second attacker is released can be completed, the processing of the second round executed following the first round can be started. May be mitigated.

  FIG. 80 (c) shows a second variable winning opening 235a (when the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened and closed in at least two rounds (for example, the 14th and 16th rounds) in the jackpot game. It is an example of an opening / closing pattern of a second attacker).

  In this example, the opening / closing pattern of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the first V opening round (14th round) and the second variable winning opening in the second V opening round (16th round). Although the opening / closing pattern of 235a (second attacker) is different, the opening / closing pattern of the V shutter 2352a is the same in both the first V opening round and the second V opening round.

  Next, the operation from the start of the variation display of the special figure that becomes a big hit until the end of the big hit game will be described.

  FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation from the start of the variation display of the special figure that is a big hit until the end of the big hit game. This example shows the operation when special figure B is displayed in special figure 1 and a substantial 15R big hit is achieved. Here, A, B and C in the figure respectively indicate the types of gaming states, A is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, B is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, C is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the variation display start condition in FIG. 1 is satisfied, the variation in FIG. 1 is started at the timing t1. At this time, the gaming state is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Thereafter, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is stopped at the timing t2, and the display result (for example, the special figure B) is derived. Subsequently, after the big hit game is started at the timing of t3 and the big hit start effect is executed, the first round starts at the timing of t4 and the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened from the closed state. Displace to the state. Thereafter, when the round end condition is satisfied, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the open state to the closed state at the timing of t5, and an inter-round effect is executed. Subsequently, at the timing of t6, the second round starts and the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and when the round end condition is satisfied, the second round is reached at the timing of t7. The one variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and an inter-round effect is executed. The above-described operation is repeated until the 15th round is completed. Thereafter, when the 16th round starts at the timing t8, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the V shutter 2352a is also displaced from the closed state to the open state. In this example, since the second attacker is open for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), there is almost no possibility of winning a game ball to the second attacker. Thereafter, at the timing of t9, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) and the V shutter 2352a are both displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the big hit game end effect is executed. Thereafter, the big hit game ends at the timing of t10, the gaming state is shifted, and the variable display of FIG. 1 is started. At this time, when the start of the variable display of the special figure 2 is suspended, the variable display of the special figure 2 is started in preference to the special figure 1. In this example, there is no passing of the game ball to the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, so after the big hit game, the state shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, a series of effects can be executed in the period indicated by H in the drawing. As a series of effects, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 20 to 36, the effects shown in FIGS. 38 to 43, the effects shown in FIGS. 51 to 67, and FIGS. 82 to 87 described later. 90-95, examples shown in FIGS. 98-100, examples shown in FIGS. 103-106, examples shown in FIG. 108, etc. are applicable. It is.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of specific effects in the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (a), “decoration 3” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, is fixedly displayed. Also, any one of the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, the third special figure 1 hold display h13, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. Are also displayed in the default display mode.

  82 also shows a first special figure display device 212, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure display device 214, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. In FIG. 82A, since there are four variable display hold numbers in FIG. 1, four lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit.

  In addition, on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, the special symbol “special drawing E” is stopped and displayed. In the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 variably displayed corresponding to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 and the display state of the second special symbol display device 214. The special figure 2 and the 4th symbol t2 variably displayed are displayed. In FIG. 82A, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 correspond to the “special symbol E” that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, a white circle that is a lost symbol is stopped. It is displayed in the displayed state. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is in a state in which, for example, a white square mark that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the “special figure E” that is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. It is displayed. In FIG. 82 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 and the 4th symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the 4th symbol t2 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbols that are stopped and displayed can be recognized. However, in actuality, the symbols that are stopped and displayed are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special figure 1 4th symbol t1 and the special figure 2 4th symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner recognizable to the player.

  In FIG. 82 (b), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, and only the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed. In addition, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 82 (b) has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decorative symbols. Note that various effects are possible in the decorative symbol variation display, and such an effect executed during the decorative symbol variation display is an example of a third effect. The third effect is not limited to display on the decorative symbol display device 208, but can also be executed by outputting sound from the speaker 120, blinking various lamps 418, or the like. Further, the third effect may include a pre-reading notice effect, a notice effect in the change, and the like. During the symbol variation display, the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking in which all of the seven segments are turned on, turned off for a moment, and all of the seven segments are turned on again. In response to the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in a manner that the colors shown in the circles change into a plurality of types.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop and the second stop are performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively. And a reach state is formed. At this time, you may make it perform the effect which alert | reports that it became the reach state. The effect of informing that such a reach state has been reached is an example of a third effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display that develops into super reach. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner. Such an effect in super reach is an example of a third effect.

  Thereafter, when super reach is finished, as shown in FIG. 82 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the third stop, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The symbol begins to fluctuate. In other words, a temporary stop display is made with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (f), the special figure A, which is the 16R jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the first special figure 1 is displayed in the fourth figure t1. A black circle symbol corresponding to “Special Figure A” that is stopped and displayed on the figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. Correspondingly, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” in a stopped manner (determined display), and one special game of variable game is played. finish.

  When “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 executes a big hit start effect as shown in FIG. 82 (g). At this time, a display for instructing right-handed is also performed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect is finished and the process proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 82 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), a display to that effect is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. "First time" is displayed. In the lower center part of FIG. 82 (h), the control state in the main control unit 300 is shown, indicating that the control state is the first round of the big hit game.

  FIG. 82 (i) shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. As shown in FIG. 82 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is determined whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable winning opening 235a is open for a long time and easily passes V in the 16th round. The suggested promotion effect is performed, and as a result, the content of the effect that succeeded in the promotion effect is executed. That is, it is notified that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is easily established. As shown in FIG. 82 (i), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the fourth round.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game progresses and the 15th round is reached, an effect as shown in FIG. 82 (j) is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 15th round of the big hit game, and allows V to pass in the next round, that is, the 16th round. “Aim at V at next R” is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to reliably pass V. As shown in FIG. 82 (j), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the 15th round.

  Thereafter, at the 16th round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened, and the V shutter 2352a is opened so that V can be easily passed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the display indicating that the current game is the 16th round is displayed, and the display “V Aim” is displayed to promote the passage of V. As shown in FIG. 82 (k), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the 16th round.

  If there is a game ball passing (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (l), as shown in FIG. The display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. That is, the display of “V”, which is a notification that the probability change has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that V has passed.

  Thereafter, when the 16th round is completed, a big hit game end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 82 (n). In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is established by passing V in the 16th round, so 150 symbols of change display are made after the jackpot game is over (after the third requirement is satisfied). While it is being performed, it shifts to a probable change state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, the “Yoshimune mode entry” display (second effect) indicating the transition to the probable change state is performed.

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to a probability change state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state), and as shown in FIG. 82 (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a probability change state. The “Yoshimune Mode” effect is executed, and “Defeat the enemy and hit the jackpot” is explained to explain the contents of the jackpot display. At this time, since there was no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 and there were three hold of the variable display of the special figure 1, the hold (the first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display 212 is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. The decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the remaining number of symbol variation displays in which the probability variation state can be executed is displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is decremented by one each time symbol variation display is started. Further, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special figure 2 hold display are displayed. Although h24 is displayed, since there is no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2, it is displayed that both are blank. In addition, the display of the number of consecutive resorts and the display for instructing the right-hand hit, which have been displayed in the big hit game, are continued.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display of the first special figure display device 212, if there are at least four game balls winning in the second special figure start port 232, the fluctuation display of the four special figures 2 is suspended. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (p), all four holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lit. In addition, in the first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24, the hold display in the default display mode is performed.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (e) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (e) and described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the example shown in FIG. 83 (f), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” stopped (determined display). The special display B, which is a 16R big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the graphic display device 212, and the special graphic B is stopped and displayed on the first special graphic display device 212 in the special graphic 1 and the fourth graphic t1. The corresponding blue circle symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When “Special Figure B” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 executes a big hit start effect as shown in FIG. 83 (g). Note that the effects shown in FIG. 83 (g) and FIG. 83 (h) are the same as those shown in FIG. 82 (g) and FIG. 82 (h), and will not be described here.

  Thereafter, in the fourth round, the production contents as shown in FIG. 83 (i) are executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 83 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the contents of the effect that failed in the promotion effect as a result of the promotion effect described above. That is, it is informed that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established. Such a failure effect is continued until the 15th round, as shown in FIG. 83 (j).

  After that, when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 16th round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened and the V shutter 2352a is opened. However, both are open for a very short time. V passing is extremely difficult. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 83 (k), the above-described failure effect is continuously performed even in the 16th round.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (l), there is no passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2, and as shown in FIG. 83 (m), when the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 83 (n). The end effect of the big hit game is performed in such a manner. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition was not satisfied because there was no V pass in the 16th round, so 100 games after the jackpot game ended (after satisfying the third requirement). While the symbol variation display is performed, the electronic support state (the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is entered. In the end effect of the big hit game, a “search mode entry” display (first effect) indicating that the state is shifted to the electric support state is performed.

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. An effect of “search mode” to a certain extent is executed, and a display of “big hit with princess discovery” explaining the contents of the effect display that is a big hit is performed. At this time, since there was no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 and there were three hold of the variable display of the special figure 1, the hold (the first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display 212 is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. The decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the remaining number of symbol variation displays that can execute the electric support state is displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is decremented by one each time symbol variation display is started. Further, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special figure 2 hold display are displayed. Although h24 is displayed, since there is no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2, it is displayed that both are blank. In addition, the display of the number of consecutive resorts and the display for instructing the right-hand hit, which have been displayed in the big hit game, are continued.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display of the first special figure display device 212, if there are at least four game balls winning in the second special figure start port 232, the fluctuation display of the four special figures 2 is suspended. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (p), all four holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lit. In addition, in the first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24, the hold display in the default display mode is performed.

  In the probability variation state or the electric support state, even in the big hit game that is transferred when the third game condition such as special figure B in FIG. There is a case. Or in such a case, you may perform the specific production different from this production example.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 84 (a) to 84 (h) are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (h) and will not be described here.

  FIG. 84 (i) shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. That is, as shown in FIG. 84 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the promotion effect described above, the content of the effect that failed in the promotion effect is executed. That is, at this time, it is suggested that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is hardly established.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 84 (j), in the fourteenth round, the resurrection effect is performed, and the effect contents indicating that the promotion effect is successful is executed in the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is informed that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is easily established.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 84 (k) to 84 (q) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 82 (j) to 82 (p).

  Note that, as in this production example, for example, the opening pattern of the second variable winning opening 235a may be different between the jackpot game where the revival effect is performed after the failure effect and the jackpot game where the success effect is performed. In addition, as a result, it may be possible to differentiate the profit by changing the number of balls in the jackpot game.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (k) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (k), and the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 85 (l) shows a state in which a game ball has passed (V passage) to the V passage switch SW2, unlike the example shown in FIG. 83 (l). Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. In this case, “V” may not be displayed. Further, a unique display other than the display of “V” may be performed. Further, instead of displaying “V”, notification may be performed by other notification means (for example, output of sound, blinking of a lamp, etc.) other than the display. Further, when the notification that the probability variation has been confirmed is executed by a plurality of types of means (for example, a notification means by voice output and a notification means by display), the notification may be executed only by some means. .

  Then, when the 16th round is finished, a big hit game finish effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 85 (n). In this production example, although there was a V pass in the 16th round, it occurred in a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be satisfied (that is, an irregular V pass), so that the transition to the probability change state is made. “Yoshimune mode entry” is not displayed (second effect), but “search mode entry” is displayed (first effect) indicating that the mode is shifted to the electric support state, as shown in FIG. 85 (n). ) Is performed. In this case, you may make it display that the period which is an electric support state is until symbol change display of 100 times is performed. In this embodiment, whether or not to display the “search mode entry” is determined based on, for example, the type of jackpot symbol, and is displayed based on whether or not there is a V pass is not. In addition, regarding whether or not to display “search mode entry”, it is a big hit game that has made a big hit with a big hit symbol (for example, “special figure B”) indicating that it is a big hit that the third game condition is difficult to be established. In the state, the determination may be made based on the presence of V passage.

  When the big hit game is completed as described above, the state shifts to the probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), and the effects as shown in FIGS. 85 (o) and 85 (p) are executed. The effects shown in FIG. 85 (o) and FIG. 85 (p) are the same as those shown in FIG. 82 (o) and FIG. 82 (p), and will not be described here.

  In the above-described effect example, one kind of effect in the probability variation state and one effect in the electric support state are shown, but there may be a plurality of kinds, for example, different depending on the type of the special figure that is stopped and displayed. It may be. Also, one type of each of the first effect and the second effect is shown, but there may be a plurality of types. For example, in the first effect, the effect of displaying the above-mentioned “search mode entry”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 85 (q), an effect of displaying “adventure mode entry” may be executed. The same applies to the second performance.

  In the probability variation state or the electric support state, even in the big hit game that is transferred when the third game condition such as special figure B in FIG. There is a case.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (k) are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (k) and will not be described here.

  In FIG. 86 (l), unlike the example shown in FIG. 82 (l), there is no passing of the game ball (V passage) to the V passage switch SW2, and the state where the 16th round is completed is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (m), a “search mode entry” display (first effect) indicating the transition to the electric support state is performed. In this production example, the game is in the second big hit game state that is likely to be shifted to the probable change state, but because the third game condition is not satisfied due to the absence of V passing in the 16th round (that is, by the irregular This indicates that the first effect is being performed (because V has not passed).

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to the electric support state (the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), and the effects as shown in FIGS. 86 (n) and 86 (o) are executed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 86 (n) and 86 (o) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 83 (o) and 83 (p), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, in the production example described above, the case where there is no V passage after the success production is performed is shown. However, as shown in FIG. 84, the revival production is performed after the failure production, and then V passes. The same effect is also performed when there is no. Here, when the revival effect is performed after the failure effect, and there is no V passage after that, for example, an effect having a content different from that shown in FIG. 86 (m) may be performed as the first effect. Good. Further, the effect in the electric support state may be different from the “search mode”.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 87 is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 86 except that the effect shown in FIG. 86 (m) is different from the effect shown in FIG. 87 (m). Only the point will be described, and the description of other points will be omitted.

  In FIG. 87 (m), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 86 (m), a “Yoshimune mode entry” display (second effect) indicating that the state is to be changed to the probability change state is performed. In this production example, in the second jackpot gaming state that is likely to be shifted to the probability variation state, even if the third gaming condition is not satisfied due to the absence of V passage in the 16th round, the state is shifted to the electric support state. The second effect is performed without displaying the “search mode entry” indicating “the first effect”. In this case, for example, the second effect is to determine whether or not to display based on the type of jackpot symbol without determining whether or not to display based on whether or not V has passed. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to display based on whether or not V has passed.

  In the present embodiment, in the second big hit gaming state, when any irregular V is not passed, only one of the effect example shown in FIG. 86 and the effect example shown in FIG. 87 is executed. Alternatively, both may be executed.

[Ninth Embodiment]
A ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74. Of course, the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. Embodiments can also be applied.

  FIG. 88 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 88 (a-2) An example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine of 9 embodiment is shown.

  In FIG. 88 (a-1) and FIG. 88 (a-2), five types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display.

  Also in the ninth embodiment, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 are common. In the ninth embodiment, there are big hits of 16 rounds and big hits of 4 rounds, both of which are big hits with electric support. Specifically, in Special Figure 2, the jackpot symbols are all jackpots (special jackpots) that are expected to be probable, and “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are 16 round jackpots. "C" is a big hit for 4 rounds. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are jackpots (special jackpots) scheduled to be probable, and “Special Figure C” is a jackpot that is not scheduled to acquire a probable change, “Special Figure A” is a big hit for 16 rounds, and “Special Figure B” and “Special Figure C” are a big hit for 4 rounds. In this way, "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 in Special Figure, which are special jackpots where the second jackpot gaming state that is likely to shift to the second gaming state is started. A "to" Special Figure C "may be referred to as the second symbol, and the jackpot at which the first jackpot gaming state is not started (that is, it is difficult to shift to the second gaming state) is not scheduled to acquire the probability variation. “Special figure C” in special figure 1 is sometimes referred to as a first symbol.

  FIG. 88 (b-1) shows an example of the action of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG. 1 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game. FIG. 88 (b-2) shows the special chart. An example of the operation of the attacker during the jackpot game of 2 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game are shown.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure A is displayed in the special figure 1 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the third round, and in the fourth round, the first round The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds, and the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the 5th round to the 16th round. That is, the special figure A in the special figure 1 is a pattern indicating that a large number of game balls are 16 round big hits that can enter the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure B is displayed in the special figure 1 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the third round, and in the fourth round, the first round 2 The variable prize winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special figure B in the special figure 1 is a pattern indicating that a large number of game balls can be put into the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 4 rounds.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure C is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the third round, but in the fourth round, The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) opens only for 0.1 second. That is, in the special figure C in the special figure 1, from 1 to 3 rounds, many game balls can enter the variable winning opening in any round, but in the 4th round, entering the variable winning opening. It is a design showing that it is a real 3 round jackpot with almost no possibility of.

  In the jackpot game to which the special chart 2 is displayed with “special chart A” and “special chart B” displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is 29.0 seconds from the first round to the third round. The second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds in the 4th round, and the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is 29.0 in the 5th to 16th rounds. Release seconds. In other words, special figure A and special figure B in special figure 2 are symbols indicating that 16 gaming rounds are possible to enter a variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds. is there.

  In the jackpot game to which transition is made with “Special Figure C” displayed in the special figure 2, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the third round, and in the fourth round The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special figure C in the special figure 2 is a pattern indicating that a large number of game balls can be placed in the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 4 rounds.

  In the present embodiment, in any jackpot game with any of the above-mentioned symbols, there are four rounds, and the game balls that are entered while the second variable winning opening 235a is opened are provided in the probability changing area in the second variable winning opening 235a. When the V passing switch SW2 is passed, the probability variation operation area is turned ON, and after the big hit game is finished, while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times, the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state which is an example of the second game state is displayed. Maintained. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, the probability variation operation region is not turned ON (the probability variation operation region remains OFF), and after the big hit game ends, 100 symbols. While the variable display is performed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state which is an example of the first gaming state is maintained.

  In the ninth embodiment, the third game condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 of the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) in the fourth round. Therefore, the big hit by special figure C of special figure 1 is not 0%, but the possibility is very low, and it can be said that it is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. On the other hand, the big hit by the special figures A and B of the special figure 1 has a sufficient opening time of the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker), and there is a possibility that the game ball passes to the V passage switch SW2. It is expensive and can be said to be a big hit scheduled to win.

  Also, the action of the attacker in the jackpot game to which the special figure A and B are displayed in the special figure 2 is the same as the action of the attacker in the special figure A in the special figure 1. Also, the action of the attacker in the jackpot game to which the special figure C is displayed in the special figure 2 is the same as the action of the attacker in the special figure B in the special figure 1. Therefore, in any of the big hits by the special jackpot symbol (special graphics A to C) of the special figure 2, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is sufficient, and the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 The possibility of passing is high, and it can be said that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire certainty. It should be noted that the operation of the attacker in the big hit according to the special figures A to C in the special figure 2 may be different from the operation mode of the attacker in the big hit according to the special figure A or the special figure B in the special figure 1.

  In this way, the big hit gaming state in which the third gaming condition is difficult to be satisfied is called the first big hit gaming state, as in the big hit game with the four round big hit that is displayed and transferred in the special figure C in the special figure 1. Yes, special figure A in special figure 1 and special figure A and special figure B in special figure 2 are displayed and the big hit game by 16 round big hits, special figure B in special figure 1 and special figure in special figure 2 The jackpot gaming state in which the third gaming condition is more likely to be established and the second gaming state is easier to start than the first jackpot gaming state, as in the jackpot gaming by the four round jackpot in which C is displayed and transferred. There is a second big hit game state.

  Next, each operation of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the big hit game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram for explaining the operations of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the big round (substantially three rounds) big hit. FIG. 89 (b) is a diagram for explaining the operations of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in the 4-round special big hit. FIG. 89C is a diagram for explaining the operations of the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) in the 16 round special jackpot, and FIG. Are the operations of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) in 16 rounds (substantially 3 rounds) of big hit. Is a diagram illustrating Te.

  In this embodiment, the round in which the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened is the fourth round in any big hit. That is, in any big win, the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is opened in the same round, and V passage can occur.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a specific effect example in the jackpot game of 4R special jackpot. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  As described above, when “Special Figure B” is stopped and displayed in the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the game is in the first round is displayed, and a display for instructing the player to make a right turn is performed. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this big hit game, since it is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), the display of the number of consecutive games is “first”.

  In this effect example, when the big hit game is started, an effect is made in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the 16th round big hit is executed up to the 16th round. That is, at the start of the big hit game, the performance is performed in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit of 4 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds.

  FIG. 90B shows the contents of the effect in the second round. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is determined whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable winning opening 235a is open for a long time and easily passes V in the fourth round. The suggested promotion effect is performed, and as a result, the content of the effect that succeeded in the promotion effect is executed. That is, it is notified that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is easily established.

  Thereafter, in the third round, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the third round of the jackpot game, and in the next round, that is, the fourth round. The message “Aim at V at next R” is displayed to prompt the user to pass V. As a result, the player may be able to reliably pass V.

  Thereafter, in the fourth round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened, and the V shutter 2352a is opened to facilitate passage of V. In the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. 90 (d) As shown in FIG. 4, a display indicating the fourth round is performed, and a display “V AIM” is displayed to promote the passage of V.

  If there is a passing of a game ball (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable prize winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (e), as shown in FIG. The display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed.

  In this example effect, an effect for notifying whether or not the fifth round or later (extra round) is executed during the big hit game may be performed. In this case, for example, a failure effect may be performed to notify that the fifth and subsequent rounds are not executed.

  Thereafter, when the fourth round is completed, a big hit game end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 90 (g). In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied by passing V in the fourth round, so the probability variation state (special high probability map) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times after the jackpot game. (High probability state). In the end effect of the big hit game, a “Yoshimune mode entry” display (second effect) indicating the transition to the probable change state is performed.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a specific effect example in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  As described above, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the game is in the first round is displayed, and a display for instructing the player to make a right turn is performed. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this big hit game, since it is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), the display of the number of consecutive games is “first”.

  Also in this production example, when the big hit game is started, an effect is made in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the 16 round big hit is executed up to the 16th round. That is, at the start of the big hit game, the performance is performed in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit of 4 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 91 (b) to 91 (f) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 90 (b) to 90 (f).

  In this production example, following the notification that there is a V passage and the probability variation acquisition is confirmed as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the fifth and subsequent rounds (extra round) as shown in FIG. 91 (g). An effect of displaying “extra round get” to be executed is performed. That is, it is notified that it is a 16 round special big hit. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “SUPER” characters indicating that it is a 16-round special big hit below the decorative symbol combination displayed in the upper left corner.

  In this production example, the notification that the extra round is executed after the notification that the probability variation has been confirmed (display of “V”) is performed, but the extra round is executed. After the display, the notification that the probability variation acquisition is confirmed may be performed, or these may be performed simultaneously. Further, in this effect example, the indication that the extra round is executed is the V passage timing, but it may be displayed at a timing other than the V passage. For example, at the end of the fourth round, It may be executed when the first notification time has elapsed since the start of the round.

  Thereafter, up to the 16th round, after the big hit effect as shown in FIG. 91 (h) is executed, the end effect of the big hit game is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 91 (i). In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied by passing V in the fourth round, so the probability variation state (special high probability map) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times after the jackpot game. (High probability state). In the end effect of the big hit game, a “Yoshimune mode entry” display (second effect) indicating the transition to the probable change state is performed.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing another example of specific effects in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 91, this effect example is an effect in which an effect in a state in which it has been notified that it is a 16-round special jackpot since the jackpot game is started is executed.

  As described above, when “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed in the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the game is in the first round is displayed, and a display for instructing the player to make a right turn is performed. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. Here, “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols, and further below that “SUPER” indicates that it is a 16-round special jackpot Is displayed. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, so that the second variable winning opening 235a is open for a long time and easily passes V in the fourth round. It is notified in advance that a great chance to become a state has arrived, and by displaying the word “SUPER”, it is notified in advance that an extra round will be executed. In this example, when the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, the characters “SUPER” are always displayed at the start of the big hit game. The execution of the extra round is notified in advance, but the character “SUPER” is not displayed even when the combination of the decoration pattern “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped. It may be difficult to recognize whether it is a 4-round big hit or a 16-round big hit at the start of the big hit game. In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed. In this big hit game, since it is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), the display of the number of consecutive games is “first”.

  Thereafter, until the second round, the big hit effect as shown in FIG. 92 (b) is continuously performed. In this production example, at the start of the big hit game, it is informed that the second variable prize winning opening 235a is open for a long time in the fourth round, and a great chance that it is easy to pass V has arrived. There will be no promotion. It should be noted that the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth round, the second variable winning opening 235a is open for a long time and is easy to pass V Even if it is notified in advance at the start of the jackpot game that the big chance will come, the promotion effect may be performed during the jackpot game.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 92 (c) to 92 (f) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 91 (c) to 91 (f).

  In this production example, as described above, it is informed in advance that the extra round will be executed at the start of the big hit game, so that notification that the probability variation acquisition has been confirmed (display of “V”) has been performed. A display indicating that the extra round will be executed later is not performed, and the above-mentioned jackpot effect is executed as shown in FIG. This jackpot effect is executed until the end of the 16th round, as shown in FIG. 92 (h). Also in this effect example, an effect of displaying that the extra round is executed may be executed in the manner as shown in FIG. 91 (g).

  In this way, after the big hit effect is executed up to the 16th round, the big hit game end effect is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 92 (i). In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied by passing V in the fourth round, so the probability variation state (special high probability map) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times after the jackpot game. (High probability state). In the end effect of the big hit game, a “Yoshimune mode entry” display (second effect) indicating the transition to the probable change state is performed.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific effect example in the big hit game of 4R big hit (substantially 3R big hit). The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  As described above, when “Special Figure C” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the game is in the first round is displayed, and a display for instructing the player to make a right turn is performed. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this big hit game, since it is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), the display of the number of consecutive games is “first”.

  In this production example, when the big hit game is started, the player makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the 16th round big hit is executed up to the 16th round. That is, at the start of the big hit game, the performance is performed in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit for four rounds (or a big hit for three rounds) or a big hit for 16 rounds.

  FIG. 93B shows the content of the effect in the second round. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described promotion effect is performed, and as a result, the effect content that failed in the promotion effect is executed. That is, it is informed that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established.

  Thereafter, in the third round, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the above-described jackpot effect is executed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, in the fourth round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened and the V shutter 2352a is opened. However, since both are opened for a very short time, it is very difficult to pass V. It has become. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), the above-mentioned jackpot effect is continuously performed even in the fourth round.

  FIG. 93 (e) shows a state where the game ball has passed (V pass) to the V pass switch SW2 in the fourth round. Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed.

  When the fourth round is completed, a big hit game end effect is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 93 (g). In this production example, there was a V pass in the fourth round, but it occurred in a big hit game in which the third game condition was difficult to be satisfied (that is, an irregular V pass), so that the transition to the probability change state is made. “Yoshimune mode entry” is not displayed, but as shown in FIG. 93 (g), “search mode entry” is displayed (first effect) indicating the transition to the electric support state.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing another example of specific effects in the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (d) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (d) and are not described here.

  FIG. 94 (e) is different from the example shown in FIG. 91 (e), and there is no passing of the game ball (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2, and the state where the fourth round is completed is shown. Then, at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 94 (f), the “extra round get” indicating that the fifth round and thereafter (extra round) are executed. An effect of displaying is performed. That is, it is notified that it is a 16 round special big hit. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “SUPER” characters indicating that it is a 16-round special big hit below the decorative symbol combination displayed in the upper left corner.

  In this production example, the indication that the extra round is executed at the timing when there is no V passing and the second variable prize opening 235a is closed is performed. However, the extra round is executed. The display timing is not limited to this.

  Thereafter, up to the 16th round, after the big hit effect as shown in FIG. 94 (g) is executed, the end effect of the big hit game (indicating that the state shifts to the electric support state) is performed as shown in FIG. 94 (h). “Search mode entry” is displayed (first effect). In this production example, the second big hit gaming state that is easily shifted to the probable change state is entered, but the third gaming condition is not satisfied because there is no V passing in the fourth round (that is, by the irregular This indicates that the first effect is being performed (because V has not passed).

  The example of the effect is applicable even when the effect is executed in a mode in which it is informed that it is a 16-round special jackpot since the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 92, for example. Needless to say, in such a case, an effect that the extra round is executed at the timing shown in FIG. 94 (f) may be further performed.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 95 is an example of the effect that is executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 and the jackpot game is started in the probability variation state described above.

  FIG. 95A shows a state in which the symbol variation display is performed by the second special figure display device 214 during the production of the “Yoshimune mode” indicating that the probability variation state is described above. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed in a plurality of types, for example, in the square mark. Fluctuation display is performed in a changing manner. At this time, the fluctuation display of the two special figures 1 is held, and the two lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are lit. In the present embodiment, the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, and the third special figure 1 hold that represent the hold in FIG. Although the display h13 and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are not displayed, these hold displays may be performed. On the other hand, in the probability variation state, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special display are displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold display h24 of FIG. 2 is displayed. Here, since there is no suspension of the variable display of the special figure 2, a display indicating that both are blank is made.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the remaining number of symbol variation displays that can execute the probability variation state is 39. In addition, at this time, since the first jackpot game is executed from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and then the probability change state after the two big hit games are executed in the probability change state or the electric support state, In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the “third time” is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the “special diagram D” indicating the first loss symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 214. At the same time, the decoration symbol display device 208 stops the display (decision display) of the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 6”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 3” and notifies that it is a loss.

  Subsequently, since there is no hold of the variable display of FIG. 2 and there are two hold of the variable display of FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the hold (first hold) of FIG. As a result of the digestion, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbol and the special symbol first symbol fourth symbol t1. At this time, the display of the remaining number of times on the decorative symbol display device 208 is decremented by 1 to 38 times.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), the special figure A, which is the 16R big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the first special figure 4 has a first special figure t1. A black circle symbol corresponding to “Special Figure A” that is stopped and displayed on the figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” in a stopped manner (determined display), and the special-game variable game ends.

  Then, when “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 executes the big hit start effect as shown in FIG. 95 (e). The

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect is finished and the process proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 95 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. In this production example, in the probability variation state or the electric support state, since the big hit game in the special figure 1 is shifted to the big hit game in the special figure 1, the display of the number of consecutive resorts is reset to “first time”. Yes. It should be noted that the number of consecutive games may not be reset even in the case of the big hit in FIG.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 95 (g) to 95 (m) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 82 (i) to 82 (o).

  In this production example, the number of consecutive games is reset when a big hit is made in the special figure 1 in the probability variation state or the electric support state. For example, when there is an irregular V passage, The number of times may be reset. Further, even when there is an irregular V passage, the number of consecutive resorts may be incremented without being reset. In addition, when there is an irregular V passing, the number of consecutive resorts may not be incremented and may not be updated while maintaining the current state.

[Tenth embodiment]
A tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74. Of course, the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. Embodiments can also be applied.

  FIG. 96 (a-1) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) of FIG. 1 in the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 96 (a-2) An example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine of 10 embodiment is shown.

  In FIG. 96 (a-1) and FIG. 96 (a-2), five types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display.

  Also in the tenth embodiment, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 and the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 are common. Further, in the tenth embodiment, the big hits are big hits with 16 rounds of electric support, but in Special Figure 2, the big hit symbols are all big hits (special big hits) scheduled to acquire probability variation. On the other hand, in Special Figure 1, only “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are jackpots (special jackpots) that are scheduled to change with certainty, and “Special Figure C” is a jackpot that is not scheduled to acquire certain changes. In this way, "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 in Special Figure, which are special jackpots where the second jackpot gaming state that is likely to shift to the second gaming state is started. A "to" Special Figure C "may be referred to as the second symbol, and the jackpot at which the first jackpot gaming state is not started (that is, it is difficult to shift to the second gaming state) is not scheduled to acquire the probability variation. “Special figure C” in special figure 1 is sometimes referred to as a first symbol.

  FIG. 96 (b-1) shows an example of the action of the attacker during the jackpot game of FIG. 1 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game. FIG. 96 (b-2) shows the special chart. An example of the operation of the attacker during the jackpot game of 2 and the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game are shown.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure A is displayed in the special figure 1 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 13th round, 2 variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds, the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds in the 15th round, and the second variable in the 16th round. The winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special figure A in the special figure 1 is a pattern indicating that a large number of game balls are 16 round big hits that can enter the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure B is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 13th round, but in the 14th round, The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. In the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is released for 29.0 seconds, and in the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 325a (second attacker) is released for 29.0 seconds. . That is, the special figure B in the special figure 1 is that many game balls can enter the variable winning opening in any of the rounds 1 to 13 and 15 to 16 but variable in the 14th round. It is a pattern which shows that it is a substantial 15 round big hit with almost no possibility of entering a winning opening.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figure C is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 13th round, but in the 14th round, The second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) opens only for 0.1 seconds, and in the 15th round, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) opens only for 0.1 seconds, and 16 rounds. Then, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened only for 0.1 second. That is, in the special figure C in the special figure 1, from 1 round to 13 rounds, many game balls can enter the variable prize opening in any round, but from 14 rounds to 16 rounds, to the variable prize opening. It is a pattern which shows that it is a substantial 13 round big hit with almost no possibility of entering.

  In the jackpot game to which the special figures A to C are displayed in the special figure 2 and transferred, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the 13th round, The second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is released for 29.0 seconds, and in the 15th round, the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is released for 29.0 seconds, and in the 16th round, the second 2 The variable prize winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29.0 seconds. That is, the special drawings A to C in the special drawing 2 are symbols indicating that 16 game rounds can be made in any number of rounds from 1 round to 16 rounds in which a lot of game balls can enter the variable winning opening.

  In the present embodiment, in any jackpot game with any of the above-mentioned symbols, the number of game balls entered during the opening of the second variable winning opening 235a becomes 14 rounds or 16 rounds, and the probability variation area in the second variable winning prize opening 235a When passing through the V passing switch SW2 provided in, the probability variation operation region is turned ON, and after the big hit game is completed, while the symbol variation display is performed 150 times, the special figure high probability normal figure high which is an example of the second game state The probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, the probability variation operation region is not turned ON (the probability variation operation region remains OFF), and after the big hit game ends, 100 symbols. While the variable display is performed, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state which is an example of the first gaming state is maintained.

  In the tenth embodiment, the third game condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 of the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) in the 14th or 16th round. Therefore, the big hit by special figure C of special figure 1 is not 0%, but the possibility is very low, and it can be said that it is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. On the other hand, the big hit by the special figures A and B of the special figure 1 has a sufficient opening time of the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker), and there is a possibility that the game ball passes to the V passage switch SW2. It is expensive and can be said to be a big hit scheduled to win.

  Also, the action of the attacker in the jackpot game to which the special figures A to C are displayed in the special figure 2 is the same as the action of the attacker in the special figure A in the special figure 1. Therefore, in any of the big hits by the special jackpot symbol (special graphics A to C) of the special figure 2, the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is sufficient, and the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 The possibility of passing is high, and it can be said that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire certainty. Note that the operation of the attacker in the jackpot according to the special figure A to C in the special figure 2 may be different from the operation mode of the attacker in the big hit according to the special figure A in the special figure 1, for example, the special figure A in the special figure 2 The operation mode of some or all of the big hits by ~ C may be the same as the operation mode of the attacker by big hits by the special figure B in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit gaming state in which the third gaming condition is difficult to be satisfied is changed to the first big hit like the big hit game by the 16 round big hit in which the special figure C in the special figure 1 is displayed and shifted. It may be called a game state, and the third game condition is established, such as a big hit game with 16 rounds big hit that is displayed and transferred as special figures A and B in special figure 1 and special figures A to C in special figure 2 The big hit gaming state in which the second gaming state is more likely to be started than the first big hit gaming state may be referred to as the second big hit gaming state.

  Further, in the jackpot game to which the special figure A is displayed in the special figure 1 and is transferred, the operation mode of the attacker is the same in the 14th round and the 16th round, but it may be different. It is good also as an operation | movement aspect shown by 96 (c). FIG. 96 (c) is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation mode of the attacker in the 14th round of the jackpot game to which the special figure A is displayed and shifted in the special figure 1. FIG.

  That is, in the 14th round, the second variable winning award 235a (second attacker) is operated in such a manner that it is once closed for 0.1 seconds and then closed for 39.0 seconds and then opened again for 29.0 seconds. .

  FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a table set selection table in the case of a big hit in FIG. 1, and FIG. 97 (b) is another example of the table set selection table in the case of a big hit in FIG. FIG.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal figure low probability state, the general drawing lottery is only hit with a probability of 1/100, so the electric chew is almost not opened, and the probability of winning the second special figure starting port 232 is low. The tables shown in 97 (a) and 97 (b) correspond to a table set selection table that is frequently used in the case of the normal figure low probability (special figure low probability normal figure low probability) state.

  The table set selection table shown in FIG. 97 (a) is configured so that the type of table set used differs depending on the type of special figure that is stopped and whether or not the probability variation operation area is ON. That is, when the big hit is made in the special figure A and the probability changing operation area is turned ON, the table set 1A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. When the big hit is made in the special figure A and the probability variation operation area is OFF, the table set 1B is used in the gaming state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure B and the probability changing operation area is turned ON, the table set 2A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure B and the probability variation operation region is OFF, the table set 2B is used in the game state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure C and the probability changing operation region is turned ON, the table set 3A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit in the special figure C and the probability variation operating region is OFF, the table set 3B is used in the game state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted.

  The table set selection table shown in FIG. 97 (b) is different from the table set selection table shown in FIG. 97 (a). When the probability change operation area is turned on in the big hit game, the big hit game is ended. The table set used in the probability change state to be transferred is configured to be different depending on the type of special figure that is stopped and displayed. However, if the probability change operation area is OFF, the big hit game is terminated and the table is transferred. The table set used in the electric support state is configured to be the same regardless of the type of special figure displayed in a stopped state. Specifically, when the big hit is made in the special figure A and the probability changing operation area is turned ON, the table set 1A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. When the big hit is made in the special figure A and the probability variation operation area is OFF, the table set 1B is used in the gaming state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure B and the probability changing operation area is turned ON, the table set 2A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure B and the probability variation operation area is OFF, the table set 1B is used in the gaming state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit is made in the special figure C and the probability changing operation region is turned ON, the table set 3A is used in the gaming state (the probability changing state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted. Further, when the big hit in the special figure C and the probability variation operating region is OFF, the table set 1B is used in the gaming state (electric support state) in which the big hit game is finished and shifted.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific effect example in the big hit game of 16R big hit (substantial 13R big hit). The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  As described above, when “Special Figure C” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A message indicating that the game is in the first round is displayed, and a display for instructing the player to make a right turn is performed. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this big hit game, since it is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), the display of the number of consecutive games is “first”.

  Thereafter, at the fourth round, the contents of the effect as shown in FIG. 98 (b) are executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, there is a great chance that the second variable winning opening 235a is open for a long time and easily passes V in the 14th and 16th rounds. The promotion effect which suggests whether it arrives is performed, As a result, the content of the effect which failed in the promotion effect is performed. That is, it is informed that the game is a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established. Such a failure effect is continued until the 13th round as shown in FIG. 98 (c).

  Thereafter, when the big hit game progresses and the 14th round is reached, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and the V shutter 2352a is opened, but both are open for a very short time. V passing is extremely difficult. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the above-described failure effect is continuously performed even in the 14th round.

  FIG. 98 (e) shows a state in which the game ball has passed the V pass switch SW2 (V pass) in the 14th round. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed.

  FIG. 98 (g) shows the effect contents when the 14th round is completed. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have passed the winning count switch SW1 and the number of game balls that have passed the V pass switch SW2 and the discharge ball detection switch SW3 are counted, and the numbers differ at the end of the round. In this case, it is determined that a big prize opening error has occurred, and an error is notified. In this production example, since a big prize opening error has occurred in the 14th round, as shown in FIG. "A big prize opening error" is displayed on the display. For example, in the 14th round, such an error occurs when the winning pass switch SW1 is not passed and the V passing switch SW2 is passed by an illegal act such as care. This “big prize opening error” is displayed continuously until the power is turned off, for example. It should be noted that the period during which the “big prize opening error” is displayed can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be terminated when the big hit game ends. In the present embodiment, the display of “V” and the display of “big prize opening error” are started at different timings, but the display may be started at the same timing. In this embodiment, the “big prize opening error” is displayed over the “V” display. However, the “V” display is carried out over the “large prize opening error” display. Also good. In this embodiment, the fact that a big prize opening error has occurred is notified by displaying the fact on the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is notified by outputting by voice or blinking the lamp. Also good.

  Thereafter, when the 16th round ends, a big hit end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 98 (h). In this production example, there was a V pass in the 14th round, but it occurred in a big hit game in which the third game condition was difficult to be satisfied (that is, an irregular V pass), so that the transition to a probable change state was made. “Yoshimune mode entry” is not displayed, but as shown in FIG. 98 (h), “search mode entry” is displayed (first effect) indicating the transition to the electric support state. At the same time, the above-described “Large Winner Error” is continuously displayed. This “big prize opening error” display is superimposed on the “search mode entry” display. It should be noted that “search mode entry” may be displayed on top of the “big prize opening error” display.

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), and as shown in FIG. 98 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a probability change state. Production of “Yoshimune mode” is performed. At this time, since there was no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 and there were three hold of the variable display of the special figure 1, the hold (the first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display 212 is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. Also at this time, the above-mentioned “Large Winner Error” is continuously displayed. The “big prize opening error” is displayed so as to overlap the “Yoshimune mode” effect.

  In this production example, if V does not pass in the 14th round, the failure production is continued until the big hit game is finished. It can be said that it is an example of the 1st production showing the shift to the electric support state.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the tenth embodiment.

  As described above, when “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, the big hit effect is started as shown in FIG. 99 (a). In this effect example, the number of prize balls acquired by winning an attacker is displayed above the display of the number of consecutive resorts on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 99 (a), the winning ball number is displayed as “00000” since there is no winning for the attacker yet. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired by winning the first variable prize opening 234a and the second variable prize opening 235a is 15. However, the number of prize balls other than 15 may be used. Further, the number of winning balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the number of winning balls acquired by winning the second variable winning opening 235a may be the same or different.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), in the first round, ten game balls are won in the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker), and the display of the number of winning balls is “00150”. It has become. In this production example, when 10 game balls are won by the attacker, the round end condition is satisfied and the attacker is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the round is ended. As shown in FIG. 99 (d), when one more game ball wins the first variable winning opening 234a in a state where the attacker has shifted from the open state to the closed state, The display becomes “00165” and an over winning sound is output from the speaker 120. At this time, the number of prize balls may be highlighted as shown in FIG. 99 (d). In addition, although an effect indicating that there has been an overwinning is realized by voice output, it may be effected by display on the decorative symbol display device 208, blinking of a lamp, or the like. In addition, the effect related to the over-winning may be executed together with the display of “V” described above. In the present embodiment, there is a case where it is possible to give the player a feeling of feeling by performing an effect indicating that there has been an overwinning. In the present embodiment, the round end condition is satisfied when there is a winning of 10 game balls to the attacker. However, the number of winning game balls to the attacker who satisfies the round end condition may be 9 or less. 11 or more.

  Further, another production example will be described. As described above, when “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. 99 (e). The big hit production is started.

  FIG. 99 (f) shows a situation when the second round is entered. As shown in FIG. 99 (g), when the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is displaced from the closed state to the open state in the second round, as shown in FIG. 99 (h), The second round is displayed and a round start sound is output from the speaker 120. In addition, although the effect which alert | reports the start of a round was implement | achieved by the audio | voice output, you may make it produce by the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, blink of a lamp, etc. In addition, the effect related to the start of the round may be executed together with the display of “V” described above.

  Further, another example of the production will be described. For example, in the big hit game in which “Special Figure B” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened at the 16th round. At the same time, the V shutter 2352a is in an open state and the V passage is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 16th round as shown in FIG. 99 (i). At the same time, “V Aim” is displayed to promote passing V.

  If there is a game ball passing (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (j), as shown in FIG. The display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. In this effect example, V winning sound is output from the speaker 120 together with the display of “V”. In this embodiment, the V winning effect is executed in this way. The output timing of the V winning sound may be simultaneous with the display of “V”, the V winning sound may be output after the display of “V”, or after the V winning sound is output. “V” may be displayed. Alternatively, only the V winning sound may be output without displaying “V”.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  Further, another production example will be described. For example, in the jackpot game in which “Special Figure B” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened at the 16th round. At the same time, the V shutter 2352a is opened and the passage of V is facilitated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the 16th round as shown in FIG. 100 (a). At the same time, “V Aim” is displayed to promote passing V.

  When there is a passing of a game ball (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (b), as shown in FIG. In the display measure 208, a hold continuous tone is output from the speaker 120 together with a display of “VV”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. The display of “VV” is executed when the symbol variation display of the reserved special figure 1 is pre-read and a symbol variation display that is a big hit is included. In this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is configured as described above. It should be noted that, even if a symbol variation display that is a big hit is included as a result of the prefetching, “VV” may be displayed without displaying “VV”. Further, even when the symbol variation display that is a big hit is not included, “VV” may be displayed as a false prefetch notice. The output timing of the hold continuous tone may be simultaneous with the display of “VV”, the hold continuous tone may be output after the display of “VV”, or after the hold continuous tone is output. “V” may be displayed. Alternatively, only the hold continuous tone may be output without displaying “VV”. Further, only the pre-reading of the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 that is put on hold may be performed and the pre-reading regarding the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 may not be performed, or any of the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. You may make it read ahead about.

  Further, another example of the effect will be described. For example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), the big hit effect is started. The In this effect example, the number of prize balls acquired by winning an attacker is displayed above the display of the number of consecutive resorts on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (d), the winning ball number is displayed as “00000” since there is no winning for the attacker yet. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired by winning the first variable prize opening 234a and the second variable prize opening 235a is 15. However, the number of prize balls other than 15 may be used.

  FIG. 100 (e) shows the contents of effects in the seventh round. At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (e), the display of the number of prize balls is “00990”. In this state, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), when one game ball is won in the first variable winning opening 234a, the display of the number of winning balls is updated to “01005” as shown in FIG. 100 (g). In addition to the display, “GET1000pt” indicating that 1000 prize balls have been acquired is displayed below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the winning sound 1000 acquired sound is output from the speaker 120. In addition, although the effect that 1000 prize balls were acquired is realized by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output from the speaker 120, only one of them may be implemented. Further, the output timing of the winning ball 1000 acquisition sound may be simultaneously with the display of “GET1000pt”, the winning ball 1000 acquisition sound may be output after the display of “GET1000pt”, or the winning ball 1000 acquisition “GET1000pt” may be displayed after the sound is output. In addition, the effect that 1000 prize balls have been acquired may be executed together with the display of “V” described above. Moreover, in this production example, when 1000 prize balls were acquired, notification to that effect was made. However, the number of winning balls to be notified is not limited to this. For example, 500, 1500, 2000, 10,000 You may make it alert | report when a prize ball is acquired. Further, the number of notifications is not limited to one, but may be performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 100 (h) to FIG. 100 (k) are diagrams for explaining an example of effects when the first variable winning opening 234b and the second variable winning opening 235b described above with reference to FIG. 78 (e) are applied. is there.

  In the example shown in FIG. 100 (h), the first passing detection switch SW5 of the first variable winning opening 234b functions as a winning count switch, the second passing detection switch SW6 functions as a round continuation switch, and the second variable. The third passage detection switch SW7 of the winning opening 235b functions as a winning count switch, and the fourth passage detection switch SW8 functions as a round continuation switch. In this production example, the player can move to the next round on condition that the game ball passes to the round continuation switch while the attacker opens, and if there is no game ball passing to the round continuation switch, the round The big hit game is configured to end. In this production example, each of the first variable winning opening 234b and the second variable winning opening 235b is provided with a round continuation switch. However, in this case, only one of them may be provided. For example, in a round where an attacker who is not provided with a round continuation switch is opened, it is necessary to make a transition to the next round, and in a round where an attacker who is provided with a round continuation switch is opened, You may comprise so that it may transfer to the next round on condition of passage of the game ball to a continuation switch. Further, in such a configuration, for example, an attacker who is not provided with a round continuation switch in the first round may be opened, and the transition to the second round may be performed without fail.

  With the pachinko machine configured as described above, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, the big hit effect is started as shown in FIG. The variable winning opening 234b is opened, and the first round starts. Then, when the game ball passes through the second passing detection switch SW6 that functions as a round continuation switch at the timing of FIG. 100 (j) and wins the first variable winning opening 234b, as shown in FIG. 100 (k). In addition, “continuation” indicating that the condition for shifting to the next round is satisfied is displayed at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a continuous sound is output from the speaker 120. In addition, although the effect of continuing the round indicating that the condition for shifting to the next round is satisfied is realized by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output from the speaker 120, even if only one of them is performed Good. Further, the output timing of the continuous sound may be simultaneously with the display of “continuation”, the continuous sound may be output after the display of “continuation”, or “continuation” after the continuous sound is output. May be displayed. In addition, the effect of continuing the round may be executed together with the display of “V” described above.

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned “big prize opening error” display, an effect indicating that there has been an overwinning, an effect related to the start of a round, a V winning effect, a pre-reading notice effect, an effect indicating that 1000 prize balls have been acquired, and Two or more effects among the effects of continuing the round may be performed simultaneously.

  Next, various configurations applicable to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 101 (a) is a front view for explaining an example of the start winning device, FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view for explaining another example of the start winning device, and FIG. 101 (c). FIG. 101 is a front view for explaining an example of a jackpot generator, and FIG. 101D is a diagram for explaining an example of a lamp module for performing various displays controlled by the main control unit.

  In the embodiment described above, instead of the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232, for example, a start winning device 2300 shown in FIG. 101 (a) can be applied.

  The start winning device 2300 includes a ball entrance 2301 into which a game ball can enter at the upper end, a first guide passage 2303 and a second guide passage 2304 through which game balls entered from the ball entrance 2301 flow down, A rotating body 2302 that distributes a game ball entered from the ball opening 2301 to one of a first guide passage 2303 and a second guide passage 2304 is provided.

  The rotating body 2302 has three blades 2302a, 2302b, 2302c standing rearward on the back surface of the disk-shaped main body, and these three blades 2302a, 2302b, 2302c are centered on the main body at equal intervals. Are arranged radially toward the outer periphery. When the rotating body 2302 rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction), the blade 2302a abuts against the inner wall of the second guide passage 2304 and restricts the rotation of the rotating body 2302 beyond a certain level. At this time, the first ball receiving portion 2305a formed by the blades 2302b and 2302c is directed upward to be able to receive the game ball. Further, the blade 2302c abuts against the inner wall of the first guide passage 2303 when the rotating body 2302 rotates counterclockwise (CCW direction), and restricts the rotation of the rotating body 2302 beyond a certain level. At this time, the second ball receiving portion 2305b formed by the blades 2302a and 2302b is directed upward to be able to receive the game ball.

  The first guide passage 2303 communicates with a first special figure starting port (not shown), and the game balls guided by the first guide passage 2303 win a prize at the first special figure starting port. Further, the second guide passage 2304 communicates with a second special figure start port (not shown), and the game ball guided by the second guide passage 2304 wins the second special figure start port.

  Since the start winning device 2300 is configured as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 101A, the blade 2302a abuts against the inner wall of the second guide passage 2304 and the first ball receiving portion 2305a. When the game ball enters from the entrance port 2301 while the player faces upward, the game ball is received by the first ball receiving portion 2305a. Then, the rotating body 2302 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball. The rotating body 2302 stops rotating when the blade 2302c comes into contact with the inner wall of the first guide passage 2303. The first ball receiving portion 2305a faces the first guide passage 2303, and the game ball received by the first ball receiving portion 2305a flows down the first guide passage 2303 and wins the first special figure starting port. To do.

  In this state, since the second ball receiving portion 2305b faces upward, at this time, when a game ball enters from the entrance port 2301, the game ball is received by the second ball receiving portion 2305b. Then, the rotating body 2302 rotates clockwise by the weight of the game ball. The rotating body 2302 stops rotating when the blade 2302a abuts against the inner wall of the second guide passage 2304. The second ball receiving portion 2305b faces the second guide passage 2304, and the game ball received by the second ball receiving portion 2305b flows down the second guide passage 2304 and wins the second special figure starting port. To do.

  In this way, the start winning device 2300 can alternately win the first special figure starting port and the second special figure starting port.

  Further, for example, a start winning device 2300A shown in FIG. 101 (b) can be applied.

  The start winning device 2300A includes a ball entrance 2301A, a first guide passage 2303A, a second guide passage 2304A, and a rotating body 2302A. Since the entrance 2301A, the first guide passage 2303A, and the second guide passage 2304A are the same as the start winning device 2300 shown in FIG. 101 (a), the specific configuration of the rotating body 2302A will be described here. Description of the other is omitted.

  The rotating body 2302A is provided with three blades (not shown) like the rotating body 2302 of the start winning device 2300, but the rear end of the rotating shaft is connected to the motor M1. That is, the rotating body 2302A can be rotated counterclockwise and clockwise by driving the motor M1. For example, since the motor M1 can change the position of the rotating body 2302A periodically or randomly, the first special figure start opening and the second special figure start opening at the timing when the game ball enters the entrance 2301. A game ball can be distributed to either of them.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, a big hit generator 2500 as shown in FIG. 101 (c) may be provided. The jackpot generating device 2500 is a device for starting a jackpot game by passing after stopping display (definite stop) with a jackpot symbol as a result of the symbol variation display in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.

  The big hit generating device 2500 has an entrance 2501 through which a game ball can enter at the upper end, a first guide passage 2503 and a second guide passage 2504 through which the game ball entered from the entrance 2501 flows down, A distribution member 2502 is provided that distributes the game balls that have entered from the ball opening 2501 to one of the first guide passage 2503 and the second guide passage 2504.

  The distribution member 2502 is formed in a plate shape, and is configured to be rotatable with one end connected to a rotation shaft. For example, the rotation shaft is connected to a motor. As a result, the distribution member 2502 periodically or randomly connects the entrance port 2501 and the first guide passage 2503, and connects the entrance port 2501 and the second guide passage 2504. It is possible to change to

  The first guide passage 2503 is provided with a first big hit generation switch SW11 for generating a big hit, so that a game ball flowing down the first guide passage 2503 can be detected. The game ball that has passed through the first big hit generation switch SW11 is, for example, discharged from the lower end and returned to the game area 124 of the game board 200.

  The second guide passage 2504 is provided with a second big hit generation switch SW12 for generating a big hit, so that a game ball flowing down the second guide passage 2504 can be detected. The game ball that has passed through the second big hit generation switch SW12 is, for example, discharged from the lower end and returned to the game area 124 of the game board 200.

  In the above-described embodiment, by using the jackpot generating device 2500, for example, the jackpot game can be started and the number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game can be determined. For example, when a game ball passes through the first jackpot generating switch SW11, a 10-round jackpot game is started, whereas when a game ball passes through the second jackpot generating switch SW12, a 4-round jackpot game is started. Either a game or a 16-round jackpot game is drawn, and a jackpot game of the number of rounds won is started.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, the first special figure display device, the second special figure display device, the normal symbol display device, the normal symbol hold lamp, the first special figure hold lamp, the second special figure hold lamp, the number of rounds. A lamp module 2000 in which a display lamp, a status display lamp, etc. are arranged on one module can be provided, for example, outside the game area 124 of the game board 200.

  More specifically, the lamp module 2000 includes a first special figure display lamp 2212, a second special figure display lamp 2214, a round number display lamp 2328, a normal symbol display lamp 2210, a normal symbol hold lamp 2216, A first special figure holding lamp 2218 and a second special figure holding lamp 2220 are provided.

  The first special figure display lamp 2212 is composed of eight LEDs, and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be specified by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LEDs.

  The 2nd special figure display lamp 2214 is comprised by eight LED, The stop symbol of special figure 2 can be pinpointed by the combination of lighting and extinction of these LED.

  The round number display lamp 2328 is configured by eight LEDs, and the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game can be specified by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LEDs.

  The normal symbol display lamp 2210 is constituted by four LEDs, and the stop symbol of the normal symbol can be specified by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LEDs.

  The normal symbol hold lamp 2216 includes four LEDs, and the number of usual variable display holds can be represented by the number of LEDs lit.

  The first special figure hold lamp 2218 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of fluctuation displays held in the special figure 1 can be represented by the number of lighted LEDs.

  The second special figure holding lamp 2220 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of fluctuation displays held in the special figure 2 can be expressed by the number of lighting LEDs.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 102 (a) shows an example of effects that can be realized in the pachinko machine 100 using the start winning device 2300 shown in FIG. 101 (a) or the start winning device 2300A shown in FIG. 101 (b), for example. ing. In this production example, the special symbol variation display is started in the winning order regardless of whether the first special figure starting port or the second special figure starting port is won, not the special figure 2 priority changing machine. This is applied to a piece-holding winning order variation (8-holding order) machine.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the first special symbol display device 212 starts the variable symbol display of the special symbol 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable symbol variation correspondingly. It has been broken. In FIG. 102 (a), since the number of holdings of the variable display in FIG. 1 is one, one holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 is lit, and the number of holdings of the variable display in FIG. Therefore, the two holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lit.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, the suspended display of the symbol variation on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed without distinguishing between the special diagram 1 and the special diagram 2. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 includes the first special figure hold display h01, the second special figure hold display h02, the third special figure hold display h03, the fourth special figure hold display h04, and the fifth special figure hold display h04. A figure hold display h05, a sixth special figure hold display h06, a seventh special figure hold display h07, and an eighth special figure hold display h08 are displayed. Since the fluctuation display of one special figure 1 and the fluctuation display of two special figures 2 are held, the first special figure holding display h01 to the third special figure holding display h03 are respectively in the default display mode. It is displayed. In either case, it is displayed in a form in which it is difficult to specify whether it is the hold display of FIG. 1 or the hold display of FIG. On the other hand, the fourth special figure hold display h04 to the eighth special figure hold display h08 are all displayed blank. In the effect example shown in FIG. 102A, the variation icon h00 is displayed side by side with the first special figure hold display h01. The variation icon has, for example, a display form related to the special figure hold display, and is displayed in the same display form as the hold display. For example, the change icon can execute a notice about the display result of the change display (the change notice) according to the display mode. The variation icon is deleted when the variation display ends. Note that the erasure timing of the variation icon is not limited to this, and for example, the variation icon may be erased during the variation display.

  FIG. 102 (b) performs the same effect display as FIG. 102 (a), but is displayed in a manner in which it is possible to specify whether the display is the hold display of FIG. 1 or the hold display of FIG. ing. Specifically, the second special figure hold display h02 indicates the hold display of the special figure 1, and the first special figure hold display h01 and the third special figure hold display h03 are the hold of the special figure 2. The display is shown. Further, the fluctuation icon h00 indicates that the fluctuation display of FIG.

  102 (a) and FIG. 102 (b), for example, in the decorative symbol variation display executed together with the symbol variation display of Special Fig. 1, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-" When a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7” is displayed, it is possible to notify that the third game condition is likely to be established as a special jackpot, while the jackpots of special figure 2 are all the third game condition. If it is a special big hit that is likely to be established, and it is a big hit in the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2, it is always displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” (confirmed) In the case of (display), the reach state may be formed by a decorative symbol other than “decoration 7” to enhance the interest of the game. In this case, for example, three decorative symbols other than “decoration 7” are arranged and temporarily stopped and then displayed again, and then stopped by a combination of “decoration 7”, “decoration 7” and “decoration 7”. It is conceivable to produce effects such as displaying.

  Further, the same effect may be performed by the decorative symbol variation display executed together with the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 and the decorative symbol variation display performed together with the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2. At this time, for example, the probability of reaching the “decoration 7” may be different between the symbol variation display of FIG. 1 and the symbol variation display of FIG. Also, the same effect is produced by the decorative symbol variation display executed together with the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 and the decorative symbol variation display performed together with the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2, but the symbol variation of the special symbol 1 is performed. The time may be set longer than the symbol variation time of the special figure 2 by the time for performing the re-variation display.

  Further, for example, the contents of the performance in the big hit game may be different depending on whether the big hit is in the special figure 1 or the big hit in the special figure 2. Further, for example, the probability of notifying that the third game condition is likely to be established at the start of the big hit may be different depending on whether the big hit in FIG. 1 or the special hit in FIG. Specifically, when a big hit is made in FIG. 2, a notification that the third game condition is likely to be established is notified with a probability of 100% at least at the start of the big hit game. When a big hit is made, the notification may be made only with a probability of 90% at the start of the big hit game, which is a special big hit.

  FIG. 102 (c) shows an example of effects that can be realized in the pachinko machine 100 including the jackpot generator 2500 shown in FIG. 101 (c), for example. In this production example, any of the special figure 2 priority changing machine and the 8-sequential ordering machine is applicable.

  FIG. 102 (c) corresponds to the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 in the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 while the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. The fourth symbol of the mode is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped (determined).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 102 (c), even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is not started, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, The big hit game is started by the passing of the game ball to the first big hit generation switch SW11 or the second big hit generation switch SW12, and any of the first big hit generation switch SW11 and the second big hit generation switch SW12 The number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is determined by the passing of the game ball.

  For this reason, in the effect example shown in FIG. 102 (c), a display indicating that the game ball is launched aiming at the big hit generating device 2500 is performed at the timing when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212.

  FIG. 102 (d) displays the same effect as in FIG. 102 (c), but due to the passing of the game ball to the first jackpot generation switch SW11 or the second jackpot generation switch SW12. It is shown that the display showing that there is a high possibility that the transferred jackpot game is a jackpot game in which the third game condition is likely to be established is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 102 (c) and FIG. 102 (d), when the game ball passes to the first jackpot generation switch SW11 or the second jackpot generation switch SW12, the third game You may make it perform the production | presentation which suggests that the big hit game in which conditions are easy to be satisfied is started.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 that can start the small hit game, for example, when the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 (or special figure 2), before the symbol variation display is finished. Alternatively, an effect as shown in FIG. 102 (c) or FIG. 102 (d) may be performed. Thereby, for example, by passing the game ball to the first jackpot generating switch SW11 or the second jackpot generating switch SW12, the player is expected to start the jackpot game or the small jackpot game. You may be able to have it. In this case, the small hit game can be started without passing the game ball to the first big hit generation switch SW11 or the second big hit generation switch SW12 after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 102 (e) shows an example of an effect that can be realized in the pachinko machine 100 that can start the above-described small hit game, for example. In this embodiment, for example, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special graphic display device 214 and the small winning symbol is reached, the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is 0. A small hit game is executed in which an operation that is opened for only one second is performed a plurality of times (for example, three times). Note that the number of times the attacker opens and closes is not limited to 3, and may be 1 or 2 or 4 or more times. Further, the opening time of the attacker at the small hit is not limited to 0.1 seconds, and may be set to a time sufficient for allowing one or more game balls to win a prize (for example, 1.0 second). . Also, in the big hit game, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened in the first round, for example, several times (for example, three times) to open for 0.1 seconds, 29 The operation of releasing for 0 second is performed. This operation may be executed only in some jackpot games.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 102 (e), the symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the special symbols 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. The fourth symbol of the aspect corresponding to the symbol is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped (determined).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 102 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 simply stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. It is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

  Therefore, in the production example shown in FIG. 102 (e), the “attacker” indicates that attention should be paid to the operation of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) that performs the opening / closing operation by shifting to the big hit game or the small hit game. It is shown that the display of “Long open and big hit” is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereby, the player pays attention to the opening / closing operation of the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker), and confirms the long-time opening after three short-time opening / closing, for example, It may be possible to recognize that.

  FIG. 102 (f) performs the same effect display as FIG. 102 (e). However, in the case of shifting to the big hit game, there is a possibility that the third big game condition is likely to be established. Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, an example of notification of information relating to a game history implemented in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 102 (g) shows a standby state in which the fluctuation display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is not suspended. At this time, as shown in FIG. 102 (h), when a predetermined operation is performed, a game history as shown in FIG. 102 (i) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 102 (h), an operation for displaying the game history is performed by rotating the dial of the setting switch 161 so that the management information is displayed, and then pressing the chance button 136. This is done by pressing. The operation method is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko machine 100 that does not include the setting switch 161, the operation method may be performed by a predetermined number of operations of the chance button 136. In this case, the chance button 136 may be operated once or plural times.

  When the operation for displaying the game history is performed as described above, as shown in FIG. 102 (i), for example, the number of times the third game condition is established or not established in the jackpot game is the type of jackpot game. Each is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Information regarding other game histories may be displayed.

  In the embodiment described so far, the general start port 228 is arranged on the right side of the game area 124, and in the normal game state where the probability change state and the electric support state are not present, the French start port 228 is almost played. Since the ball does not pass through, it is unlikely that a general-purpose variable game will be executed, but a general-purpose variable start game 228 is also provided on the left side of the game area 124 so that a general-purpose variable game is also possible in a normal game state. May be executed. In this case, for example, it is possible to set a plurality of types of hitting symbols of the usual drawing so that the time during which the second special figure starting port 232 is in the open state varies depending on the type of the winning symbol. Further, for example, when the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is performed in the normal gaming state, for example, a special effect such as displaying a character on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be performed.

  Next, an example of a series of effects executed in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described. The production example described below is executed during a period (for example, a period indicated by H in FIG. 81) until the special figure is stopped and displayed, or until the big hit game ends. It is a possible production. In addition, the effect example demonstrated below is an effect which may be performed irrespective of whether the 3rd game condition was satisfied.

  FIG. 103 shows an example of a series of effects. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (a) displays the appearance of a hero with a sword on the left side of the display screen.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display of “swordsman visit” and the appearance of the enemy swordsman.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen where the main character shouts “She is a game” informing the start of the game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen showing how the main character and the enemy swordsman are moving toward each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for expecting which of the protagonist and the enemy swordsman will win as a result of the game.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen on which the game has been decided. In this case, a screen that suggests that the hero's lord won the game is displayed by expressing the appearance of the hero's lord defeating the enemy swordsman. On the other hand, it may represent a situation where the enemy swordsman defeated the protagonist.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the enemy swordsman has exhausted and the hero's lord has completely won.

  Next, another example of a series of effects will be described.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (i), while the hero's lord sprints, it is a condition for shifting to an advantageous situation such as a big hit, "Find Princess or Princess Chibi" Is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the main character, Tono-sama, finds a spear that the princess or Chibi princess seems to be hiding behind.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for expecting whether or not a princess starts to open and whether the princess or the little princess is on the other side of the heel.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display that the princess appears when the eyelids open and the state shifts to an advantageous situation. In this case, there is a case where a little princess appears instead of the princess and a transition is made to an advantageous situation. Display may be performed.

  Needless to say, the series of effects described above are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

  Next, a specific effect example that can be executed in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a specific effect example in the symbol variation that becomes a big hit. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  Note that in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 104, the sub effect display device 208 </ b> A is disposed adjacent to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub effect display device 208A can employ various display means having a size smaller than that of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, and an LCD is used in FIG. The sub effect display device 208A is connected to an actuator such as a motor via a link member, for example, and is driven by the second sub control unit 500 to have a first position that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208, It is configured to be able to be displaced to a second position that overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, a part of the sub effect display device 208 </ b> A may overlap the decorative design display device 208, or all of the sub effect display device 208 </ b> A may overlap the decorative design display device 208. Good.

  FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which a display that changes to super reach is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 212.

  Here, since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 3, the three lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit. Corresponding to this, the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are all displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 as a default display mode. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed as blank. On the other hand, since there is no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2, none of the second special figure hold lamps 220 is lit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 perform the variable display in the manner as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the pattern of the chance button 136 that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 and the characters “press”. The sub-effect display device 208A displays the characters “Yoshimune”. According to this effect, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the player may be given a sense of expectation that a jackpot confirmation display may be performed.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (c), the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the first position to the second position as shown in FIG. 104 (d). In the sub-effect display device 208A, a display for changing the color of the background on which the character display of “Yoshimune” is performed is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), after the decorative symbol “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” To start swinging. At this time, the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the second position to the first position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 is expected to see whether or not the display is changed to a decorative symbol combination promised to be a 16R special jackpot by performing re-variable display. Promotional performance is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c that are fluctuating are displayed again in the upper left corner. A “promotion challenge” message indicating that a promotion effect is performed, a symbol of the chance button 136 prompting the user to press the chance button 136, and a character display “press” are displayed.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (g), the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the first position to the second position as shown in FIG. 104 (h). In the sub-effect display device 208A, a display for changing the color of the background on which the character display of “Yoshimune” is performed is performed. Thereby, it can be informed that it will be confirmed that the display will be changed to the combination of decorative symbols promised to be a 16R special jackpot by performing re-variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol that has fluctuated is changed to a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7”. The At this time, the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the second position to the first position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (j), the special special symbol winning symbol 16R is stopped and displayed on the first special graphic display device 212, and the first graphic t1 of the special graphic 1 includes the first graphic t1. The black circle symbol corresponding to “Special Figure A” that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the variable game of the special symbol is ended.

  Thereafter, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the big hit start effect as shown in FIG. At this time, a display for instructing right-handed is also performed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect is finished and the first round is started, as shown in FIG. 104 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), a display to that effect is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. "First time" is displayed. Thereafter, the jackpot game proceeds in the same manner as in the embodiments described so far.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing another example of a specific effect example in the symbol variation that becomes a big hit. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (g) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (g), and a description thereof will be omitted here.

  In FIG. 105 (h), unlike in FIG. 104 (h), the sub effect display device 208A does not move in the first position even though the chance button 136 is pressed. Thereby, it is notified that the display is not changed to the combination of the decorative symbols promised to be the 16R special jackpot by performing the re-variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the shaking fluctuation is continuously performed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 4”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (j), “Special Figure A”, which is the 16R special jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the first figure 4 includes the first symbol The black circle symbol corresponding to “Special Figure A” that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the special-game variable game ends. In this production example, the jackpot game to be started is a 16R special jackpot that easily satisfies the third game condition, but it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the jackpot game to be started is a 16R special jackpot. It has become.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 105 (k) to 105 (l) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 104 (k) to 105 (l).

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a specific effect example in the big hit game. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  As described above, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. A start effect is executed. Note that the jackpot game started this time is a jackpot game started after the stop display (determined display) with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. However, it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is a 16R special big hit.

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect is finished and the process proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the big hit effect and displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. Is done. Further, the sub effect display device 208A is arranged at the first position, and the characters “Yoshimune” are displayed.

  FIG. 106C shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), in the fourteenth round, a promotion effect is performed that suggests whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable prize opening 235a is open for a long time and is easy to pass V. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a letter “press” together with the pattern of the chance button 136 that prompts the user to press the chance button 136, and accepts the pressing of the chance button. A remaining time display bar indicating the remaining time of the period is also displayed. The sub-effect display device 208A displays the characters “Yoshimune”. According to this effect, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the player feels that the current jackpot game may be notified that the third game condition is likely to be a 16R special jackpot. May be able to have.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (d), as shown in FIG. 106 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the contents of the effect that has been successfully promoted are executed. The effect display device 208A is displaced from the first position to the second position. In the sub-effect display device 208A, a display for changing the color of the background on which the character display of “Yoshimune” is performed is performed. As a result, it is notified that the current big hit game is a 16R special big hit that is likely to satisfy the third game condition.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (f), the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the second position to the first position. Thereafter, the jackpot game proceeds in the same manner as in the embodiments described so far.

  Further, another example of the production will be described. When “Special Figure C” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the big hit game is started, as shown in FIG. At 208, a big hit start effect is executed. Note that the jackpot game started this time is a jackpot game started after the stop display (determined display) with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. However, it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is a 16R special big hit. The jackpot game started this time is a jackpot game started by stopping and displaying “Special Figure C”, which is a 16R (substantially 13R) jackpot symbol in which the third game condition is difficult to be established.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 106 (h) to 106 (j) are performed. These effects are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 106 (b) to 106 (d).

  106 (k) to 106 (l), unlike FIGS. 106 (e) to 106 (f), the decorative design display device 208 executes the content of the effect that failed in the promotion effect, and the sub effect display device. 208A does not move in the first position. As a result, it is notified that the current big hit game is a 16R big hit that is unlikely to satisfy the third game condition. In this production example, in the subsequent jackpot game, for example, the above-mentioned revival presentation is performed. If it is a 16R special jackpot, the revival presentation is successfully performed. If it is a 16R jackpot that is not a 16R special jackpot, a revival presentation is performed. You may make it perform further the production which fails.

  In this production example, after that, when the big hit game proceeds and becomes the 14th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and the V shutter 2352a is opened. Since it is in the open state, it is very difficult to pass V. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 106 (m), the failure effect is continuously performed even after the 14th round.

  FIG. 106 (n) shows a state in which the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW2 (V pass) in the 14th round. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. At this time, the display of “V” is superimposed on the display of the failure effect.

  Further, another example of the production will be described. When the big hit game progresses and becomes the 14th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and the V shutter 2352a is opened, both of which are extremely short. Since it is in an open state only for time, it is very difficult to pass V. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 106 (p), the failure effect is continuously performed even after the 14th round.

  FIG. 106 (q) shows a state in which the game ball has passed the V pass switch SW2 (V pass) in the 14th round. In this production example, at this time, as shown in FIG. 106 (r), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed, and only the failure production continues. Has been done. That is, in this production example, in the big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established, even if there is a V pass, the player recognizes that it will shift to a probable change state after the big hit game ends. It can be difficult.

  Next, the visual recognition state (degree of visibility) in the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described. FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining a visual recognition state on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the “object” in the figure means a tangible or intangible object that can change the visual recognition state (degree of visibility) of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, an image (for example, a hold icon, Fluctuating icons, texture images that constitute reserved animation, various images used for production, images used for notice, character images), movable bodies (eg, production movable bodies, shielding devices), glass or resin The transparent plate member or the like is included.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 1A and 1A, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the first object ob1, so that at least the first of the display regions of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the first. The display area covered by the object ob1 is not visible from the front (or difficult to see). Further, in this example, by covering a part of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the first object ob1 with the second object ob2, the display area of the decorative design display device 208 is The display area covered only by the second object ob2 is also invisible (or difficult to see) from the front, and the part of the first object ob1 covered by the second object ob2 is also from the front. Visible (or difficult to see).

  That is, in this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1 and the second object ob2, and a part of the first object ob1 is also covered by the second object ob2. Covered. Although not shown, after the display is performed so that the first object ob1 and the second object ob2 do not overlap with each other in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are shown in FIGS. Thus, a part of the first object ob1 is obscured by the second object ob2, and all the first objects ob1 are covered by the second object ob2, as shown in FIGS. The cover-up display may be executed continuously.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the first object ob1, and the entire first object ob1 is covered with the second object ob2. As a result, among the display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208, at least the display area covered by the second object ob2 is made invisible (or difficult to view) from the front. In addition, the example shown in FIGS. 6A and 6C is the same as that shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B in that the display area covered by the second object ob2 is invisible (or difficult to view) from the front. ), But the range that is not visible (or difficult to view) is expanded by the second object ob2 as compared with the example shown in FIGS. In this way, the outside of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be invisible (or difficult to see). In other words, in the example shown in FIGS. 3A and 3C, the second object ob2 has a part of a side of the decorative symbol display device 208 invisible (or difficult to see). it can.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 2B and 2B, the positional relationship between the first object ob1 and the second object ob2 shown in FIGS. In this example, by covering a part of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 with the second object ob2, the display area covered with at least the second object ob2 in the display area of the decorative design display device 208. However, it cannot be visually recognized from the front (or difficult to see). Further, in this example, by covering a part of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the second object ob2 with the first object ob1, the display area of the decorative design display device 208 is The display area covered only by the first object ob1 is also invisible (or difficult to see) from the front, and the portion of the second object ob2 covered by the first object ob1 is also from the front. Visible (or difficult to see).

  In other words, in this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1 and the second object ob2, and a part of the second object ob2 is also covered by the first object ob1. Covered.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 3C and 1C, the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the first object ob1 and the third object ob3. Among these, the display area covered by at least the first object ob1 and the third object ob3 is not visible (or difficult to see) from the front. In this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the first object ob1, and a part of the third object ob3 are further covered with the second object ob2, thereby decorating the decoration. Of the display area of the symbol display device 208, the display area covered only by the second object ob2 is also not visible (or difficult to see) from the front, and the first object ob1 and the third object ob3 are not visible. Of these, the portion covered with the second object ob2 is also not visible (or difficult to view) from the front.

  That is, in this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1, the second object ob2, and the third object ob3, and the first object ob1 and the third object ob3. A part of the object ob3 is also obscured by the second object ob2.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 2C and 2C, the position of the third object ob3 is changed from the example shown in FIGS. In this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1, the second object ob2, and the third object ob3 as shown in FIGS. Although it is the same as an example, since the position of the 3rd object ob3 is moved to the range which is not covered with the 2nd object ob2, the 3rd object ob3 is made visible from the front.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 3C and 3C, the position of the third object ob3 is changed from the examples shown in FIGS. In this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1, the second object ob2, and the third object ob3 (c) (1), ( 2) Although the same as the example shown in 2), since the position of the third object ob3 is moved to a position covering the first object ob1, the third object ob3 is visible from the front. Part of the first object ob1 is obscured by the third object ob3.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 4C and 4C, the position of the third object ob3 is changed from the examples shown in FIGS. In this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1, the second object ob2, and the third object ob3. 3) Although it is the same as the example shown in 3), since the position of the third object ob3 is moved to a position covering the second object ob2, the third object ob3 is visible from the front side. Part of the second object ob2 is obscured by the third object ob3.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 5C and 5C, the position of the third object ob3 is changed from the examples shown in FIGS. In this example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is obscured by the first object ob1, the second object ob2, and the third object ob3. 4), but since the position of the third object ob3 is moved to a position covering the first object ob1 and the second object ob2, the third object ob3 is visible from the front. On the other hand, a part of the first object ob1 and the second object ob2 is obscured by the third object ob3.

  FIG. 6D is a diagram showing variations in the shape of the second object ob2. The second object ob2 may have a rectangular shape as shown in FIGS. 4 (d) and (1), or an opening may be formed in a part thereof as shown in FIGS. 2 (d) and (2). Therefore, the rear may be configured to be visible through the opening. Further, as shown in FIGS. 3D and 3C, a notch portion may be formed in a part of the outer edge so that the rear side can be visually recognized through the notch portion. As shown in 4), both the opening and the notch may be formed.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the tenth embodiment. In this production example, the first variable prize winning opening 234b and the second variable prize winning opening 235b shown in FIG. 78 (e) are used as the first variable winning prize opening and the second variable winning prize opening. The description will be made on the assumption that the fourth passage detection switch SW8 provided in the two variable prize winning opening 235b functions as a V passage switch.

  For example, when “Special Figure C”, which is a 16R jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special chart display device 212, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the jackpot effect is executed and the jackpot game is started. In this effect example, the number of prize balls acquired by winning an attacker is displayed above the display of the number of consecutive resorts on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (a), the winning ball number is displayed as “00000” since there has not yet been a prize for the attacker. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired by winning the first variable prize opening 234b and the second variable prize opening 235b is 14, but the number of prize balls other than 14 may be used.

  FIG. 108 (b) shows the content of the effect in the fourth round. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (b), the display of the number of prize balls is “00504”. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a failure effect that failed in the promotion effect described above. This failure effect continues until the end of the 16th round.

  FIG. 108 (c) shows the contents of the effect at the end of the 15th round. At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (c), the display of the number of prize balls is “01988”.

  Thereafter, at the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 235b is in an open state. However, since it is in an open state for a very short time, it is very difficult to pass V. In the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), the above-described failure effect is continuously performed even in the 16th round.

  FIG. 108 (e) shows a state where one game ball has won a prize in the second variable prize opening 235b in the 16th round. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the number of prize balls is updated to “2002”, and 2000 prize balls are acquired below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The message “GET2000pt” is displayed. At this time, the winning ball 2000 acquisition sound is output from the speaker 120. In addition, although the effect that 2000 prize balls were acquired is realized by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output from the speaker 120, only one of them may be implemented. The output timing of the winning ball 2000 acquired sound may be simultaneous with the display of “GET2000pt”, the winning ball 2000 acquired sound may be output after the display of “GET2000pt”, or the winning ball 2000 is acquired. “GET2000pt” may be displayed after the sound is output.

  FIG. 108 (g) shows a state where the game ball that has won the second variable winning opening 235b has passed through the fourth passage detection switch SW8 that functions as a V passage switch. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed, and outputs a V winning sound from the speaker 120. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V” superimposed on the above-described “GET2000pt” display. Note that “GET2000pt” may be displayed on top of “V”. Further, in this production example, the notification that the probability variation has been confirmed is realized by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output from the speaker 120, but only one of them may be implemented. The V winning sound may be output simultaneously with the display of “V”, the V winning sound may be output after the display of “V”, or after the V winning sound is output. “V” may be displayed.

  In this example, the effect that the winning ball has been acquired and the notification that the probability variation has been confirmed are overlapped, but these are only described as an example of a combination of effects. The combinations of effects that can be executed are not limited to those described above. In addition, among a plurality of types of effects, a certain effect combination (for example, a first effect combination) may not be executed redundantly. In addition, for example, when a combination of certain effects (for example, a combination of the first effects) is executed according to the game conditions, a combination of certain effects (for example, a combination of the first effects) is overlapped. For example, in a big hit game in which the third game condition is difficult to be established, the effect that the prize ball has been won and the notification that the probability change has been confirmed overlap. In a jackpot game that is not executed and the third game condition is likely to be established, the effect that the winning ball has been acquired and the notification that the probability variation has been confirmed may be executed in an overlapping manner.

[Eleventh embodiment]
An eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74. Of course, the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. Embodiments can also be applied. In the above description, the second variable winning opening 235 and the V passage 2340g are defined as an example of the first area. However, in the following description, the second variable winning opening 235 and the V passage 2340g are defined as the first area. It will be described as an example of the second area.

  With reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, an example of operation timings of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) between rounds will be described.

  FIG. 109 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation in the case of releasing the long in all four consecutive rounds, and FIG. 109 (b) is the first round of the four consecutive rounds. FIG. 109C is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when only a long opening is performed and a short opening is performed in other rounds, and FIG. 109C is set when a round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened is started. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation pattern of the probability variation operation region solenoid and a period in which the probability variation operation region is valid. Here, in any case of FIG. 109 (a) to FIG. 109 (c), the big hit game is indicated, and the signal indicating the special game is continuously in the ON state. Note that the four consecutive rounds described below may include the final round, may include the first round, and includes both the final round and the first round. It may be not included, and may include both the last round and the first round. The same applies to the case of three consecutive rounds and the case of two consecutive rounds.

  First, with reference to FIG. 109 (a), an example of the operation in the case of releasing long in all four consecutive rounds will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 109 (a), the first attacker long-releases in the first round of the four consecutive rounds, the second attacker long-releases in the second round, It is shown that the first attacker is long open in the third round and the second attacker is long open in the fourth round. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 109 (a) is an operation pattern that may be executed with a big hit (special big hit) scheduled to acquire probability variation. The jackpot game including the operation pattern shown in FIG. 109 (a) is an example of a third jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), when a round (round RA) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of a01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on to turn on the first variable winning opening. The first door member 2341a of 234a (first variable winning means) is displaced from the closed state (first state) to the open state (second state). That is, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured to be able to change between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter at least and an open state in which a game ball can enter at least. At this time, for example, the big prize opening 1 opening signal and the big prize opening 1 operating signal output from the main control unit 300 are turned ON, and the period of the big prize opening 1 valid state is set. Here, the special winning opening 1 opening signal is a signal indicating the operating state of the solenoid SOL1. That is, the special winning opening 1 opening signal indicates whether the first attacker is in an open state or a closed state. The special winning opening 1 opening signal may be a drive signal for the solenoid SOL1, or the large winning opening 1 opening signal may not be output. The signal indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is operating is a signal indicating whether or not it is a period for detecting the game ball that has entered the first attacker with the winning count switch SW4, and will be described later after the round starts. It shows the period until the interval between rounds is started. Further, the period in which the winning opening 1 is in an effective state corresponds to the above-described attacker 1 effective period shown in FIG. 80, and indicates a period in which a game ball passing through the winning count switch SW4 is treated as being effective. is there. It should be noted that the period in which the grand prize opening 1 is valid can be arbitrarily set. For example, the period in which the big prize opening 1 is valid may be set after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. The jackpot game may be set from the start to the end, or may be set in at least a part of the period when the second attacker is in the open state. Further, a game ball passing through the winning count switch SW4 may be handled as valid even outside the valid period of the attacker 1. In this case, it may be invalid while the second attacker is open. In the following description, the winning count switch SW4 may be referred to as an example of a first area.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of a02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. After that, when a predetermined post-round closing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) elapses and the timing becomes a03, the special winning opening 1 operating signal is turned OFF and the round RA ends. Here, the period from a02 to a03 may be referred to as a remaining sphere detection period. By providing this remaining ball detection period, it may be possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the attacker from being detected by the winning count switch after the next round is started. In the present embodiment, it is defined that the round ends at the timing of starting the interval time between rounds to be described later (for example, timing of a03), but the timing of starting the next round (for example, timing of a04) ) May be defined as the end of the round. Moreover, you may define that a round is complete | finished at the timing (for example, timing of a02) when solenoid SOL1 turned OFF and the 1st door member 2341a displaced to the closed state. In other words, it may be defined that a part of the period in which the attacker is closed between rounds is not included in the round, or the entire period in which the attacker is closed between rounds is included in the round. You may define it as not. Further, the period during which the attacker is closed between rounds may be defined as belonging to any one of the rounds.

  When a predetermined interval time (for example, 0.1 second) elapses after the timing of a03, the next round (round RB) starts at the timing of a04. At this time, the period of the grand prize opening 1 valid state is ended, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable prize opening 235a (second variable winning means) is closed (first state). To the open state (second state). That is, the second variable winning opening 235a is configured to be able to change between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter at least and an open state in which a game ball can enter at least. The period in which the winning opening 1 is valid ends at the timing when the next round is started, but may be ended after the next round is started. Further, the period in which the big winning opening 1 is valid may be continued until the big hit game is ended after being set once. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, for example, the big prize opening 2 opening signal and the big prize opening 2 operating signal output from the main control unit 300 are turned ON, and the period of the big prize opening 2 valid state and the period of the probability change operation region valid state are set. Is set. Here, the special winning opening 2 opening signal is a signal indicating the operating state of the solenoid SOL2. That is, the special winning opening 2 opening signal indicates whether the second attacker is in an open state or a closed state. The signal indicating that the winning opening 2 is in operation is a signal indicating whether or not it is a period for detecting the game ball that has entered the second attacker with the winning count switch SW1. It shows the period until the interval starts. Further, the period in which the special winning opening 2 is in an effective state corresponds to the period in which the attacker 2 is effective as shown in FIG. 80, and indicates a period in which a game ball passing through the winning count switch SW1 is treated as being effective. is there. It should be noted that the period in which the special winning opening 2 is valid can be arbitrarily set. For example, the period in which the special winning opening 2 is valid may be set after the power is turned on until the power is shut off. The jackpot game may be set from the start to the end, or may be set in at least a part of the period when the first attacker is in the open state. Further, the period in which the probability changing operation area is in an effective state corresponds to the above-described V passage effective period shown in FIG. 80, and a game ball passing through the V passage switch SW2 (second area) is treated as being effective. Indicates the period. In the following description, the probability variation operating region effective state may be referred to as a second region effective state. Note that the period during which the probability change operation region is valid can be arbitrarily set. For example, the period of the probability change operation region valid state may always be set after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. It may be set from the start to the end of the game. After the V shutter 2352a is opened at the timing a04, the V shutter 2352a is once closed when a predetermined first shutter opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and then the predetermined first shutter is closed. When the time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, it is operated so as to be opened again. The operation pattern and operation time of the V shutter 2352a can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of a05, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 2 release signal is also turned OFF. In the following description, for example, a period in which the second variable prize winning opening 235a is in an open state, such as a period from a04 to a05, may be referred to as a first period. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round described above has elapsed and the timing becomes a06, the special winning opening 2 operating signal is turned OFF and the round RB ends. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the period of the probability changing operation region valid state is also ended. Here again, the period from a05 to a06 is the remaining sphere detection period. In the following description, the round RB may be an example of a first round including at least a first period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of a06, the next round (round RC) starts at the timing of a07. At this time, the period of the special winning opening 2 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set. Hereinafter, the operations performed at the timings indicated by a08 to a13 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by a02 to a07, respectively. When the round RD is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing a12. Further, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of a12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of a13. When the round RD is not the final round, the next round may be started when the interval time between rounds has passed after the timing of a12 and the timing of a13 is reached. In the following description, for example, a period in which the second variable winning opening 235a is closed and the first variable winning opening 234a is in an open state, such as a period from a07 to a08, is referred to as a second period. Sometimes. In the following description, for example, a period in which the second variable winning opening 235a is in an open state, such as a period from a10 to a11, may be referred to as a third period. In the following description, the round RC may be referred to as an example of a second round including at least a second period, and the round RD may be referred to as an example of a third round including at least a third period. There is. As described above, the second period can be said to be a period that starts after the first period, and the third period is a period that starts after the second period. It can be said that. In the following description, for example, a period in which the second variable winning opening 235a is in an open state, such as a period from a04 to a05 or a period from a10 to a11, may be referred to as a sixth period.

  As described above, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 109A, in the round RB and the round RD, the second attacker is opened long, and the game ball can easily enter the V-pass switch SW2. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109 (b), an example of an operation in the case where only the first round of the four consecutive rounds is opened long and the other rounds are opened short will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 109 (b), the first attacker in the first round of the four consecutive rounds is long open, the second attacker in the second round is short open, In the third round, the first attacker is short-opened, and in the fourth round, the second attacker is short-opened. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 109 (b) is an operation pattern that may be executed with a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. The jackpot game including the operation pattern shown in FIG. 109 (b) is an example of a first jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (b), when the round (round RA) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of b01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on to turn on the first variable winning opening. The first door member 2341a of 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of b02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has elapsed and the timing of b03 is reached, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RA ends. Here again, the period from b02 to b03 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds has elapsed after the timing of b03, the next round (round RB) starts at the timing of b04. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, for example, the big prize opening 2 release signal and the big prize opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period for the big prize opening 2 valid state and the period for the probability variation operating area valid state are set.

  Since the round RB is a short open round, the open time of the attacker in the round RB is shorter than the long open round (short open time) (for example, 0.5 seconds). Therefore, when the short opening time has elapsed from the start of the round RB, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing of b05, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF, and the shutter member 2351a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, the round RB can be said to be a round in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker. Here, after the solenoid SOL3 (probability changing operation solenoid) for driving the V shutter 2352a is opened at the timing of b04 as shown by the broken line in FIG. 109 (c), the first shutter opening described above is performed. After the time has elapsed, the drive setting is performed so that the first shutter is closed and then the first shutter closing time described above is opened again. In the short open round, the first shutter is set. Since the round end condition is satisfied at the timing when the opening time elapses (or before the first shutter closing time elapses), the round is ended without performing the subsequent driving operation. The same applies to the period during which the probability variation operating region is valid. Accordingly, it can be said that in the round RB, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2. In this way, the period from b04 to b05 can be regarded as an example of the first period. The short opening time of the second attacker may be the same time as the short opening time of the first attacker or may be a different time. In this case, the short opening time of the second attacker may be longer, or the short opening time of the first attacker may be longer.

  Thereafter, when the closing time after the round described above elapses and the timing becomes b06, the special winning opening 2 operating signal is turned OFF and the round RB ends. At this time, since the solenoid SOL3 remains OFF, the V shutter 2352a also remains closed, while the period of the probability variation operating region valid state ends at this timing. Here again, the period from b05 to b06 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described inter-round interval time elapses after the timing of b06, the next round (round RC) starts at the timing of b07. At this time, the period of the special winning opening 2 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Since the round RC is also a short opening round, the attacker's opening time in the round RC is the short opening time described above. Therefore, when the short opening time elapses from the start of the round RC, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing b08, the solenoid SOL1 is turned off, and the first door member 2341a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, it can be said that the round RC is a round in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first attacker. In this manner, the period from b07 to b08 can be regarded as an example of the second period.

  Thereafter, when the closing time after the above-described round passes and the timing becomes b09, the signal indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RC ends. Here again, the period from b08 to b09 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of b09, the next round (round RD) starts at the timing of b10. Thereafter, the operations performed at the timings indicated by b10 to b13 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by b04 to b07, respectively. Therefore, it can be said that in the round RD, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2. When the round RD is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of b12. Alternatively, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of b12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of b13. When the round RD is not the final round, the next round may be started when the inter-round interval time elapses after the timing b12 and the timing b13.

  Thus, the period from b10 to b11 can be said to be an example of the third period. Further, in the following description, for example, a period in which the first variable winning opening 234a is in an open state, such as a period from b01 to b02 or a period from b07 to b08, may be referred to as a fourth period. , B04 to b05, and b10 to b11, the period during which the second variable winning opening 235a is open may be referred to as a fifth period.

  FIG. 110 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when only the second round of the four consecutive rounds is short-released and the other rounds are long-open, and FIG. 110 (b) is a timing chart. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation in a case where only the second round of the four consecutive rounds is opened short and the other rounds are opened long. Here, in both cases of FIG. 110 (a) and FIG. 110 (b), the big hit game is shown, and the signal indicating the special game is continuously in the ON state.

  With reference to FIG. 110 (a), an example of the operation in the case where only the second round of the four consecutive rounds is short-released and the other rounds are long-released will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 110 (a), the first attacker in the first round of the four consecutive rounds is long open, the second attacker in the second round is short open, It is shown that the first attacker is long open in the third round and the second attacker is long open in the fourth round. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 110 (a) is an operation pattern that may be executed with a big hit (special big hit) scheduled to acquire probability variation. In the following description, the jackpot game including the operation pattern shown in FIG. 110A may be referred to as an example of a second jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when a round (round RA) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of c01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on to turn on the first variable winning opening. The first door member 2341a of 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of c02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the above-described closing time after the round has passed and the timing becomes c03, the signal for operating the special winning opening 1 is OFF and the round RA ends. Here again, the period from c02 to c03 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of c03, the next round (round RB) starts at the timing of c04. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, for example, the big prize opening 2 release signal and the big prize opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period for the big prize opening 2 valid state and the period for the probability variation operating area valid state are set.

  Since the round RB is a short opening round, the opening time of the attacker in the round RB is a short opening time. Here, the operations performed at the timings indicated by c04 to c07 related to the round RB are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by b04 to b07 in FIG. 109 (b), respectively. Accordingly, it can be said that in the round RB, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2. Thereafter, the operations performed at the timings indicated by c07 to c13 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by a07 to a13 in FIG. 109 (a), respectively.

  As described above, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 110A, in the round RD, the second attacker is opened long, and the game ball can easily enter the V-pass switch SW2. When the round RD is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of c12. Alternatively, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of c12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of c13. When the round RD is not the final round, the next round may be started when the inter-round interval time elapses after the timing of c12 and the timing of c13 is reached.

  As described above, the period from c04 to c05 can be referred to as an example of the first period, the period from c07 to c08 can be referred to as an example of the second period, and the period from c10 to c11 can be referred to as an example of the third period. It can be said. In the present embodiment, the third period (c10 to c11) can be said to be longer than the first period (c04 to c05), and the second period (c07 to c08). It can be said that this period is longer than the first period (the period from c04 to c05). The period from c01 to c02, the period from c07 to c08 can be referred to as an example of the fourth period, the period from c04 to c05, and the period from c10 to c11 can be referred to as an example of the fifth period.

  The specific opening may be constituted by the short opening of the second attacker and the long opening of the second attacker. This specific release may be constituted by a plurality of rounds or may be constituted by the same round.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110 (b), an example of an operation in a case where only the second round of the four consecutive rounds is short-opened and the other rounds are long-opened will be described. The example shown in FIG. 110B is the same as the example shown in FIG. 110A except that the operation in the round RD is different. That is, the operation pattern shown in FIG. 110 (b) is an operation pattern that may be executed with a big hit (special big hit) scheduled to acquire probability variation. The jackpot game including the operation pattern shown in FIG. 110 (b) can be regarded as an example of a second jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the operations performed at the timings indicated by d01 to d10 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by c01 to c10 in FIG. 110 (a), respectively. In this effect example, a period in which the second variable prize opening 235a is in an open state (short open), such as a period from d04 to d05, may be referred to as a first period.

  When the round RD is started at the timing of d10, the period of the large winning opening 1 valid state is ended, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned on to release the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a from the closed state. It is displaced to. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special prize opening 2 release signal and the special prize opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period for the special prize opening 2 valid state and the period for the probability variation operating area valid state are set. Here, after the shutter member 2351a is opened at the timing of d10, the shutter member 2351a is temporarily closed when a predetermined attacker 2 opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and then the predetermined attacker 2 closing time. When (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, it is operated so as to be opened again. Here, the attacker 2 closing time may be the same as the period from when the round end condition is satisfied and the attacker is in the closed state until the next round is started and the attacker is in the open state, The attacker 2 closing time may be longer, or the attacker 2 closing time may be shorter. In addition, the time from when the second attacker is in the closed state in the round in which the second attacker is short-opened to the time in which the second attacker is in the open state in the round in which the second attacker is long-opened, and the attacker 2 The closing time may be the same time or a different time. At this time, the closing time of the attacker 2 may be longer, or after the second attacker is in the closed state in the round in which the second attacker is short-opened, the second in the round in which the second attacker is long-opened The time until the attacker becomes an open state may be longer. Further, the attacker 2 opening time may be the same time as the opening time (short opening time) of the second attacker in the round RB, or may be a different time. In other words, the time for performing the short opening in the round in which the second attacker performs the short opening and the long opening and the opening time of the attacker in the round in which only the short opening is performed may be the same time or different times. It may be. At this time, the opening time of the attacker 2 may be longer, or the short opening time of the second attacker may be longer. On the other hand, the operation pattern of the V shutter 2352a is the same as that shown in FIG. In the operation pattern shown in FIG. 110 (b), in the round RD, the second attacker performs a short release and performs a long release operation after closing for a certain period of time. When I was disappointed that it was not a game, after that the second attacker opened a long game and found that it was a special big hit, so that I could increase my expectation for the gaming state to move to after the big hit game There is. In the present embodiment, the above-described attacker 2 closing time (for example, 2 seconds) is shorter than the above-described first shutter closing time (for example, 3 seconds). Alternatively, the attacker 2 closing time may be longer.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of d11, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 2 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the above-described round has elapsed and the timing of d12 is reached, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 2 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RD ends. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and the period of the probability changing operation region valid state is also ended. Here again, the period from d11 to d12 is the remaining sphere detection period. As described above, in this effect example, the period from the time when the second attacker is opened at the timing of d10 to the time when the above-described attacker 2 opening time elapses and is closed (short opening) is the first period. It can be said that it is an example of a period, and the period from the time when the second attacker 2 is closed to the time when the attacker 2 closing time elapses until it is opened again can be called the second period. The period from the time when the attacker is in the open state to the time when it is closed at the timing of d11 can be called a third period. Here, either or both of the above-described period from d04 to d05 and the timing from d10 to the time when the second attacker opens and the time when the attacker 2 opening time elapses to the closed state are set as the first. It can also be said that the period. When round RD is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of d12. Further, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of d12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of d13. When the round RD is not the final round, the next round may be started when the inter-round interval time elapses after the timing of d12 and reaches the timing of d13.

  In this effect example, another period may be interposed between the first period, the second period, and the third period. For example, in the case of (1) short opening- (2) long closing- (3) short opening- (4) short closing- (5) long opening operation for the second attacker, the first period is (1 ) In the case of short opening, the second period can be either (2) long closing or (4) short closing.

  FIG. 111 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation when the first attacker opens long in all two consecutive rounds, and FIG. 111 (b) shows one of the three consecutive rounds. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when the first attacker opens long for only the first round and the second attacker opens short for the other rounds. FIG. Here, in both cases of FIG. 111 (a) and FIG. 111 (b), the big hit game is shown, and the signal indicating the special game is continuously in the ON state.

  First, with reference to FIG. 111 (a), an example of an operation when the first attacker opens long in all two consecutive rounds will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 111 (a), the first attacker is long open in the first round of two consecutive rounds, and the first attacker is long open in the second round. The situation is shown. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 111 (a) is an operation pattern that may be executed in both the big hit (special big hit) scheduled to acquire probability variation and the big hit not scheduled to acquire probability variation.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), when a round (round RE) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of e01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on to turn on the first variable winning opening. The first door member 2341a of 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of e02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the above-described closing time after the round elapses and the timing becomes e03, the signal indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RE ends. Again, the period from e02 to e03 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of e03, the next round (round RF) starts at the timing of e04. At this time, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable prize winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 operating signal are turned ON. On the other hand, the period in which the special winning opening 1 is valid continues without ending.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of e05, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round described above elapses and the timing becomes e06, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF and the round RF is ended. Here again, the period from e05 to e06 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the interval time between rounds described above elapses after the timing of e06, the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state ends at the timing of e07. When the round RF is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of e07. The big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of e06. When the round RF is not the final round, the next round may be started when the interval time between rounds elapses after e06 timing and e07 timing is reached.

  Next, referring to FIG. 111 (b), in the case where the first attacker opens long only in the first round of three consecutive rounds, and the second attacker opens short in other rounds. An example of the operation will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 111 (b), the first attacker in the first round of the three consecutive rounds is long open, the second attacker in the second round is short open, In the third round, the second attacker is shown short open. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 111 (b) is an operation pattern that may be executed with a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (b), when a round (round RG) in which the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of f01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on and the first variable prize opening is set. The first door member 2341a of 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of f02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has elapsed and the timing of f03 is reached, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF and the round RG ends. Similarly, the period from f02 to f03 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds has elapsed after the timing of f03, the next round (round RH) starts at the timing of f04. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special prize opening 2 release signal and the special prize opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period for the special prize opening 2 valid state and the period for the probability variation operating area valid state are set.

  Since the round RH is a short opening round, the opening time of the attacker in the round RH is the short opening time described above. Therefore, when the short opening time has elapsed from the start of the round RH, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing f05, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF, and the shutter member 2351a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, it can be said that in the round RH, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2.

  Thereafter, when the above-described closing time after the round elapses and the timing becomes f06, the signal for operating the winning prize opening 2 is turned OFF and the round RH ends. At this time, since the solenoid SOL3 remains OFF, the V shutter 2352a also remains closed, while the period of the probability variation operating region valid state ends at this timing. Similarly, the remaining ball detection period is from f05 to f06.

  When the above-described inter-round interval time elapses after the timing of f06, the next round (round RI) starts at the timing of f07. At this time, the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable prize winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (probability change operation region solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special prize opening 2 release signal and the special prize opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the probability variation operating region valid state is set. On the other hand, the period in which the special winning opening 2 is valid continues without ending.

  Since the round RI is also a short opening round, the attacker's opening time in the round RI is the short opening time described above. Therefore, when the short opening time has elapsed from the start of the round RI, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing f08, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF, and the shutter member 2351a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, it can be said that in the round RI, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2.

  Thereafter, when the above-described closing time after the round has passed and the timing becomes f09, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 2 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RI ends. At this time, since the solenoid SOL3 remains OFF, the V shutter 2352a also remains closed, while the period of the probability variation operating region valid state ends at this timing. Similarly, the remaining ball detection period is from f08 to f09.

  After the timing of f09, when the above-described interval time between rounds has elapsed, the period of the big winning opening 2 valid state ends at the timing of f10. When the round RI is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of f10. Also, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of f09. When the round RI is not the final round, the next round may be started when the inter-round interval time elapses after the timing f09 and the timing becomes f10.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 111B, the period from f04 to f05 can be referred to as an example of the first period, the period from f05 to f07 can be referred to as an example of the second period, and f07. To f08 can be considered as an example of a third period.

  Next, an example of the operation timing of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) between rounds will be described with reference to FIG. In the embodiment described so far, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, it is configured to shift to a probable change state after the big hit game ends, but in the embodiment shown in FIG. During the execution of the round game opened by the second attacker, the game is configured to be able to shift to the next round on condition that the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 provided in the second attacker. That is, the V pass switch SW2 functions as a continuation area. In the present embodiment, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the round game is ended, and the game proceeds to the next round when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 in the round game. However, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 during execution of the round game, the round game may be ended and the next round may be started. In any case, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 112, a game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch SW2 during execution of a round game in which at least the second attacker (an attacker with the V-pass switch SW2) is opened. When the round game ends, the big hit game ends without shifting to the next round.

  FIG. 112 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation in the case of releasing the long in all four consecutive rounds, and FIG. 112 (b) is the first round of the four consecutive rounds. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation when only a long opening is performed and a short opening is performed in other rounds. Here, in both cases of FIG. 112 (a) and FIG. 112 (b), the big hit game is indicated, and the signal indicating the special game is continuously ON. Further, in this embodiment, at least during the big hit game, the duration of the continuous area valid state is set. The period of the continuous area valid state indicates a period in which the game ball passing through the V pass switch SW2 is treated as valid. Note that the duration of the continuous area valid state may be set even in a gaming state other than the big hit game, may be set only during the operation of the second variable winning opening 235a, or the large winning opening 2 is activated. It may be set only while the medium signal is ON.

  First, with reference to FIG. 112 (a), an example of the operation in the case of long release in all four consecutive rounds will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 112 (a), the first attacker in the first round of the four consecutive rounds is long open, the second attacker in the second round is long open, It is shown that the first attacker is long open in the third round and the second attacker is long open in the fourth round.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (a), when a round (round RJ) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of g01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON and the first variable winning opening is opened. The first door member 2341a of 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of g02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round elapses and the timing of g03 is reached, the signal for operating the winning prize opening 1 is turned OFF and the round RJ is completed. Here again, g02 to g03 are the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of g03, the next round (round RK) starts at the timing of g04. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (in this embodiment, the continuation area solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 2 release signal and the special winning opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 2 valid state is set. After the V shutter 2352a is opened at the timing of g04, the V shutter 2352a is temporarily closed when the first shutter opening time described above has elapsed, and then is again opened when the first shutter closing time described above has elapsed. It works to be. The operation pattern of the V shutter 2352a is determined in advance. For example, the V shutter 2352a may be operated in a predetermined operation pattern from the start of the big hit game, or the second attacker opens. The operation of the V shutter 2352a may be started with an operation pattern predetermined at the timing. Further, when the round in which the second attacker opens long is started as in round RK, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed to indicate that the continuation area is aimed.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF at the timing of g05, and the shutter member 2351a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 2 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round has passed and the timing of g06 is reached, the signal indicating that the winning prize opening 2 is in operation is turned OFF and the round RK is completed. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 is turned OFF and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Similarly, the period from g05 to g06 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  After the time of g06, when the above-mentioned interval time between rounds has elapsed and the timing of g07 is reached, the period of the big winning opening 2 valid state is over and the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V passing switch SW2 in the round RK, the next round (round RL) is started. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK, that is, if the game ball has not passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK, the big hit game without shifting to the round RL. An end effect is executed, and then the big hit game ends.

  When the round RL is started, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set. Thereafter, the operations performed at the timings indicated by g08 to g13 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by g02 to g07, respectively. When the round RM is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of g12. Further, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of g12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of g13. When the round RM is not the final round, the following condition is satisfied on the condition that the round interval RM has passed the V-pass switch SW2 when the interval time between rounds has elapsed and the timing of g13 is reached after the timing of g12. The round may be started.

  As described above, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 112A, in the round RK and the round RM, the second attacker is opened long, and the game ball can easily enter the V-pass switch SW2. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 (b), an example of the operation in the case where only the first round of the four consecutive rounds is opened long and the other rounds are opened short will be described. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 112 (b), the first attacker in the first round of the four consecutive rounds is long open, the second attacker in the second round is short open, In the third round, the first attacker is short-opened, and in the fourth round, the second attacker is short-opened. In the operation pattern shown in FIG. 112 (b), in most cases, it is difficult to pass the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 in the second round (round RK). The big hit game will end. That is, the operation pattern shown in FIG. 112 (b) is an operation pattern in which the big hit game is substantially ended in round RJ.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), when a round (round RJ) in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened at the timing of h01 starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on and the first variable winning opening is opened. The first door member 2341a of 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of h02, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the above-described closing time after the round elapses and the timing becomes h03, the signal indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF and the round RJ ends. Here again, the period from h02 to h03 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the above-described interval time between rounds elapses after the timing of h03, the next round (round RK) starts at the timing of h04. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the solenoid SOL3 (continuation area solenoid) is turned ON, and the V shutter 2352a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, for example, the special winning opening 2 release signal and the special winning opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 2 valid state is set.

  Since the round RK is a short opening round, the opening time of the attacker in the round RK is a short opening time. Therefore, when the short opening time has elapsed from the start of the round RK, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing of h05, the solenoid SOL2 is turned OFF, and the shutter member 2351a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, it can be said that in the round RK, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2.

  After that, when the closing time after the round described above has elapsed and the timing of h06 is reached, the signal indicating that the special winning opening 2 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RK ends. At this time, since the solenoid SOL3 remains OFF, the V shutter 2352a also remains closed. Here again, the period from h05 to h06 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  After the time of h06, when the above-mentioned interval time between rounds has passed and the timing of h07 is reached, the period of the big winning opening 2 valid state is over and the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V passing switch SW2 in the round RK, the next round (round RL) is started. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK, that is, if the game ball has not passed through the V pass switch SW2 in the round RK, the big hit game without shifting to the round RL. An end effect is executed, and then the big hit game ends.

  When the round RL is started, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set.

  Since the round RL is also a short opening round, the attacker's opening time in the round RL is the short opening time described above. Therefore, when the short opening time elapses from the start of the round RL, the round end condition is satisfied at the timing of h08, the solenoid SOL1 is turned off, and the first door member 2341a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, it can be said that the round RL is a round in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first attacker.

  Thereafter, when the closing time after the round described above elapses and the timing becomes h09, the winning prize 1 operating signal is turned OFF and the round RL ends. Here again, the period from h08 to h09 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  When the inter-round interval time described above elapses after the timing of h09, the next round (round RM) starts at the timing of h10. Thereafter, the operations performed at the timings indicated by h10 to h13 are the same as the operations performed at the timings indicated by h04 to h07, respectively. Accordingly, it can be said that in the round RM, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second attacker and it is also difficult to enter the V-pass switch SW2. If the round RM is the final round, the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of h12. Alternatively, the interval time between rounds may elapse after the timing of h12, and the big hit game end effect may be started at the timing of h13. If the round RM is not the final round, the following condition is satisfied on the condition that the round interval RM has passed through the V-pass switch SW2 when the interval time between rounds has elapsed and the timing of h13 has been reached after the timing of h12. The round may be started.

  In the present embodiment, rounds opened by an attacker (second attacker) having a continuation area are the second and subsequent rounds, but may be the first round.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one or a plurality of rounds for short-opening an attacker (first attacker) having no continuation area is executed so as to make it difficult for the player to know how many rounds are. It may be configured.

  Next, an example of the operation timing of the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) in the small hit game and the big hit game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation in the small hit game, and FIG. 113 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation in the big hit game. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2 in the big hit game, the game is shifted to the probability changing state after the big hit game is finished. In this embodiment, the general discharge passage (also referred to as a first discharge passage) for discharging the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a and passed through the winning count switch SW4 is referred to as a general discharge passage. An effect area that is provided with another effect discharge passage (sometimes referred to as a second discharge passage) and is displaceable between a state that allows the game ball to enter the effect discharge passage and a state that prevents entry. A shutter is provided. The effect area shutter is configured to be displaceable, for example, by driving an effect area solenoid, and the effect area solenoid is configured to be driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  First, an example of the operation in the small hit game will be described with reference to FIG. That is, the example shown in FIG. 113 (a) shows a state where the first attacker opens shortly a plurality of times (for example, twice) when the small hit game is started.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (a), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the small hit game is started at the timing of i01. At this time, a signal indicating a special game is turned ON, and, for example, a small hit game start effect is started.

  Thereafter, when the small hit game start effect ends and the timing of i02 is reached, the solenoid SOL1 is turned ON, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set. After the first door member 2341a is opened at the timing of i02, the first door member 2341a is temporarily closed when a predetermined first big winning opening 1 opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and thereafter When the first grand prize winning opening 1 closing time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the open state is resumed. After that, when a predetermined second big winning opening 1 opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, it is closed at the timing of i03. In addition, the 1st big winning opening 1 opening time and the 2nd big winning opening 1 opening time may be the same time, and may be different time. Further, the first closing time 1 closing time may be the same time as the first closing time 1 opening time or may be a different time. Further, the first closing time 1 closing time may be the same time as the second closing time 1 opening time or may be a different time.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined production area solenoid drive start time (for example, 0.1 seconds) elapses from the timing i02, the production area solenoid is driven and the production area shutter allows the game ball to enter the production discharge passage. Displace to the state. The effect area shutter maintains a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the effect discharge passage until a predetermined effect area release time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses. It shifts to a state that prevents the game ball from entering the discharge passage. Since the effect area shutter operates as described above, in the small hit game, even if the game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, the effect is given before the game ball enters the effect discharge passage. The area shutter is in a state of preventing entry into the effect discharge passage.

  After the timing of i03, when the post-round closing time described above elapses and the timing of i04 is reached, the special winning opening 1 operating signal is turned OFF. The closing time after the round in the small hit game may be the same time as the closing time after the round in the big hit game, or may be a different time. Again, the period from i03 to i04 is the remaining sphere detection period.

  After the timing of i04, when a predetermined small hit end interval time (for example, 0.1 second) elapses and the timing of i05 is reached, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state ends. At this time, for example, a small hit game end effect is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of i06, the small hit game end effect ends, and the small hit game ends. At this time, the signal indicating the special game is turned off.

  Next, an example of the operation in the big hit game will be described with reference to FIG. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the big hit game is started, the first attacker opens shortly a plurality of times (for example, twice) and then opens long. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special display device 212 or the second special display device 214, the big hit game is started at the timing of j01. At this time, a signal indicating a special game is turned ON, and, for example, a big hit game start effect is started. Here, the content of the big hit game start effect to be started may be the same as, for example, the above-described small hit game start effect. You may be able to improve your interest by having a sense of expectation.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game start effect ends and the timing of j02 is reached, the first round (round RN) starts, the solenoid SOL1 is turned on, and the first door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. To the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal and the special winning opening 1 in-operation signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 1 valid state is set. After the first door member 2341a is opened at the timing of j02, it is once closed when the above-mentioned first big prize opening 1 opening time has elapsed, and then the first big prize opening 1 described above. When the closing time elapses, it is opened again. After that, when the above-mentioned second grand prize opening 1 opening time elapses, the timing becomes j03 and the closed state is reached. At the timing of j04, the open state is resumed.

  On the other hand, when the above-described effect area solenoid drive start time elapses from the timing of j02, the effect area solenoid is driven and the effect area shutter is shifted to a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the effect discharge passage. When the above-described effect area release time elapses, the effect area shutter is temporarily closed, and then when the above-described effect area solenoid drive start time elapses after the first attacker is opened at the timing of j04, The effect area solenoid is driven, and the effect area shutter is again displaced to allow the game ball to enter the effect discharge passage.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied, the solenoid SOL1 is turned OFF at the timing of j05, and the first door member 2341a is displaced from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the special winning opening 1 release signal is also turned OFF. Thereafter, when the closing time after the round described above elapses and the timing becomes j06, the signal indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is in operation is turned OFF, and the round RN ends. Similarly, the period from j05 to j06 is the remaining sphere detection period. On the other hand, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) elapses from the timing of j06, the effect area shutter is turned off so that the effect area solenoid is turned off and the game ball is prevented from entering the effect discharge passage.

  After the timing of j06, when the above-described interval time between rounds has elapsed, j07 is reached and the next round (round RO) starts. At this time, the period of the big winning opening 1 valid state ends, and the solenoid SOL2 is turned ON, and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. At this time, the special winning opening 2 release signal and the special winning opening 2 operating signal are turned ON, and the period of the special winning opening 2 valid state is set.

  As described above, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 113 (b), the effect area shutter operates as described above. Therefore, in the big hit game, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a enters the effect discharge passage. For example, it is possible to execute an effect of notifying that a big hit has been triggered by the passage of the game ball to the effect V passing switch provided in the effect discharge passage.

  In the description of FIGS. 109 to 113, the period between timings such as ON / OFF of each signal is not limited to that illustrated. For example, the length of one of the above periods may be the same as the length of another period other than the one period, or may be longer than the other period other than the one period. There may be a shorter period than other periods other than the one period. Each timing may be included in one period and other periods other than the one period.

[Twelfth embodiment]
A twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above. Note that the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74, but of course the present invention is also implemented in the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. Forms can also be applied.

  FIG. 114 (a) shows an example of a special symbol jackpot stoppage pattern and an action pattern of an attacker for each round in the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 114 (b) shows a big hit in the jackpot game. An example of the specific operation | movement pattern of a winning opening (variable winning opening) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the jackpot symbols in the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment are “symbol 1” to “symbol 9”, “symbol A”, “symbol C”, “symbol E”, and “symbol F”. ]. Among them, the jackpot symbols of Special Figure 1 are “symbol 1” to “symbol 9”, “symbol A”, “symbol C”, “symbol E”, and “symbol F”. , “Design 1”. In the present embodiment, the operation pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit game differs depending on the big hit symbol. In addition, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can display a lost symbol or a small hit symbol. In addition, you may not provide a small hit. In addition, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 2 may be able to display symbols other than “symbol 1”.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (b), nine types of action patterns of the special winning opening are prepared, and the operation of the special winning opening for each round is based on any one of these operation patterns.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 1”, the first variable prize opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for a maximum of 29 seconds in the first to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds, and then the closing time after the round (closed state) It closes for 1.9 seconds as 1), and then closes for 0.1 seconds as the interval time between rounds (closed state 2) (pattern 6). In the 14th and 16th rounds, after the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 29 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as a post-round closing time, and thereafter, the interval time between rounds is set to 0.00. Close for 1 second (Pattern 9). In other words, “symbol 1” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls are 16 round big hits that can be entered into the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds. In addition, in the 14th and 16th rounds, the second attacker becomes long open, and it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the V passing switch SW2, so that “symbol 1” indicates that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a certain probability change. It is a design. In the present embodiment, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 1” can be said to be an example of a third jackpot game.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 2”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds. In the 14th round, the second variable winning opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, closed for 3 seconds, opened for 28 seconds, and then closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round. After that, it is closed for 0.1 second as an interval time between rounds (pattern 8). In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol 2” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls are a 16-round big hit that can be entered into the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass, “symbol 2” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire probability variation. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 3”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to thirteenth and thirteenth rounds. In the 14th round, after the second variable prize opening 235a (second attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval between rounds The time (closed state 2) is closed for 0.1 second (pattern 7). In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol 3” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls is a big hit of 15 rounds that can be entered into the variable winning opening in rounds 1 to 13, 15 and 16 rounds. In addition, in the 16th round, the second attacker becomes long open, and the V passing switch SW2 becomes easy to pass through. Therefore, “symbol 3” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire probability variation. In the present embodiment, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 3” can be said to be an example of a second jackpot game.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 4”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to thirteenth rounds. In the fourteenth and sixteenth rounds, the attacker operates according to the pattern 7 described above. In the fifteenth round, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval time between rounds As (closed state 2), it is closed for 0.1 second (pattern 1). In other words, “symbol 4” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be placed in the variable winning opening in the first to thirteenth rounds and is a big hit of 13 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is short open in both the 14th round and the 16th round, and the V passing switch SW2 becomes difficult to pass through, the “symbol 4” is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. It is a pattern which shows. In the present embodiment, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 4” can be said to be an example of a first jackpot game.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 5”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first and second rounds. In the third to twelfth to twelfth rounds and the fifteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 1 described above is performed. In the 13th round, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval time between rounds As (closed state 2), it is closed for 8.1 seconds (pattern 3). In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol 5” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls are a big hit of 4 rounds that can be entered into the variable winning opening in 1 round, 2 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass through, the “symbol 5” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a probable change. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 6”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to sixth rounds. In the seventh to eleventh rounds and the fifteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 1 described above is performed. In the twelfth round, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval time between rounds As (closed state 2), it is closed for 4.1 seconds (pattern 2). In the thirteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 3 described above is performed. In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol 6” is a symbol indicating that a lot of game balls can win a variable winning opening in 1 round to 6 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds, and that is a big hit of 8 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the 14th round and the 16th round, and the V passing switch SW2 easily passes, the “symbol 6” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a probability variation. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 7”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to sixth rounds. In the seventh to eleventh rounds and the fifteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 1 described above is performed. In the twelfth round, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval time between rounds As (closed state 2), it is closed for 20.1 seconds (pattern 5). In the thirteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 3 described above is performed. In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. That is, “symbol 7” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can win a variable winning opening in 1 to 6 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass, “symbol 7” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a probability change. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 8”, the attack operation according to the pattern 6 described above is performed in the first to sixth rounds, the thirteenth round, and the fifteenth round. In the seventh to twelfth rounds, the attacker operation according to the above-described pattern 1 is performed. In the fourteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 7 described above. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 8 described above. That is, “symbol 8” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be put into a variable winning opening in 9 to 13 rounds, 13 rounds, 15 rounds, and 16 rounds, and is a big hit of 9 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the 16th round and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass, “symbol 8” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire probability variation.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 9”, the attack operation according to the pattern 6 described above is performed in the first to sixth rounds, the thirteenth round, and the fifteenth round. In the seventh to twelfth rounds, the attacker operation according to the above-described pattern 1 is performed. In the fourteenth and sixteenth rounds, the attacker operates according to the pattern 7 described above. That is, “symbol 9” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can win a variable winning opening in 1 to 6 rounds, 13 rounds, and 15 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is short open in both the 14th round and the 16th round, and the V passing switch SW2 becomes difficult to pass through, the “symbol 9” is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. It is a pattern which shows.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol A”, the attacker operates according to the above-described pattern 6 in the first to eighth rounds. In the ninth to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds, the above-described attacker operation according to pattern 1 is performed. In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. That is, “symbol A” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be put into a variable winning opening in 10 to 16 rounds in 1 to 8 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass through, the “symbol A” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a probability variation. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol C”, the attack operation according to the above-described pattern 1 is performed in the first to eleventh and fifteenth rounds. In the twelfth round, after the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval time between rounds (Closed state 2) is closed for 12.1 seconds (pattern 4). In the thirteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 3 described above is performed. In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol C” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be placed in the variable winning opening in 14 rounds and 16 rounds, and that is a big hit of 2 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass, the “symbol C” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire a probability variation. .

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol E”, the attack operation according to the above-described pattern 1 is performed in the first to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds. In the fourteenth and sixteenth rounds, the attacker operates according to the pattern 7 described above. That is, “symbol E” is a symbol indicating that all rounds of 1st to 16th rounds are short-opened and are substantially a big hit of 0 rounds. Also, in both rounds 14 and 16, the second attacker is short open and the V-pass switch SW2 becomes difficult to pass, so “symbol E” is a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired. It is a pattern which shows.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol F”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first to eighth rounds. In the ninth to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds, the above-described attacker operation according to pattern 1 is performed. In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In the sixteenth round, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In other words, “symbol F” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be put into the variable winning opening in 10 to 16 rounds in 1 to 8 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the V passing switch SW2 is easy to pass through, the “symbol F” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit scheduled to acquire a probability variation. .

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation display according to the special figure 1 can be referred to as a symbol variation display in which the second jackpot game is easier to start than the symbol variation display according to the special figure 2, and according to the special figure 2 The symbol variation display can be said to be a symbol variation display in which the third big hit game is easier to start than the symbol variation display in FIG.

  FIG. 115 (a) shows an example of the effect pattern in the jackpot game executed by the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 115 (b) shows an example of the effect content for each round. Is.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the pachinko machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, nine effect patterns of pattern 01 to pattern 09 are prepared. It is configured to be. Which production pattern is selected is based on, for example, jackpot symbols and lottery.

  The effect pattern of pattern 01 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot that is not scheduled to be acquired.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 01 is executed, for example, a combination of decorative symbols promised to be a special jackpot (for example, “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”) in the variation display of the ornamental symbol that is a big hit -A combination of decorative symbols other than "decoration 3" decorative symbols: a combination of probable big hit symbols) (for example, "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4": non-probable) Temporary stop display at a combination of jackpot symbols) ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 01, after the big hit start effect is first executed ((4) big hit start effect), the offense / defense effect in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is performed as the effect content of “Burn 2” ((5 ) Skill 2 (offense and defense) production). After that, as a result of the offense / defense effect, the enemy character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of losing the defense and defeating is performed ((6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect). Thereafter, as the contents of the production of “Ruri 3”, a survival restoration effect is produced that directs whether or not the defeated ally character succeeds in survival ((7) Brilliance 3 (Rebirth) production). Thereafter, as a result of the revival effect, an effect in which the ally character fails to revive is performed ((8) chance 3 (success / failure success) effect). After that, the effect of 1 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). The content of the effect during the big hit can be an appropriate content, but in the present embodiment, for example, the content of the effect indicates that there is a high possibility that the game will be in an uncertain change state after the big hit game. After that, the jackpot end effect 1 is performed as the jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game ends ((15) jackpot end effect). The content of the big hit end 1 can be set as appropriate, but in this embodiment, for example, it is notified that the game will shift to the electric support state (special low probability normal figure high probability state) after the big hit game ends. The contents are directed.

  The effect pattern of pattern 02 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot that is not scheduled to be acquired.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 02 is executed, for example, a temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable change big hit symbols is performed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 02, after the big hit start effect is first executed ((4) big hit start effect), the above-mentioned attack / defense effect is performed as the effect content of “Ruri 2” ((5) Beat 2 (offense / defense) effect) ). After that, as a result of the offense / defense effect, the enemy character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of losing the defense and defeating is performed ((6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect). Thereafter, the above-described effect 1 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). Thereafter, the jackpot end 1 effect described above is performed as the jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game ends ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 03 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 03 is executed, a temporary stop display is performed with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols, for example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In pattern 03, after the jackpot start effect is first executed ((4) jackpot start effect), the above-described attack / defense effect is performed as the effect content of “Burn 2” ((5) Beat 2 (offense / defense) effect) ). After that, as a result of the offense / defense effect, the enemy character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of losing the defense and defeating is performed ((6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect). After that, the above-mentioned survival return effect is performed as the content of the “Ruri 3” effect ((7) Ruri 3 (survival) effect). Thereafter, as a result of the revival effect, an effect in which the ally character fails to revive is performed ((8) chance 3 (success / failure success) effect). Thereafter, the above-described effect 1 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). Thereafter, a resurrection character appearance effect that a resurrection character appears and a chance is obtained is performed ((10) chance 4 (resurrection character) effect). When the revival character effect is performed, the player may be able to recognize that the big hit game being executed is a special big hit game. After that, the acquisition display indicating that the chance has been acquired is continuously displayed until the round in which the second attacker is long open ((11) chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect). The content of the effect of the big hit end 2 can be an appropriate content, but in the present embodiment, for example, an effect of notifying that the state will shift to a probable change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) after the big hit game ends. It is a content.

  The effect pattern of pattern 04 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  In the case where the effect pattern of pattern 04 is executed, temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols, for example, is performed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 04, after the jackpot start effect is first executed ((4) jackpot start effect), the above-described attack / defense effect is performed as the effect content of “Ruri 2” ((5) Beat 2 (offense / defense) effect) ). After that, as a result of the offense / defense effect, the enemy character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of losing the defense and defeating is performed ((6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect). Thereafter, the above-described effect 1 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). Thereafter, the above-mentioned resurrection character appearance effect is performed ((10) chance 4 (resurrection character) effect). After that, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the second attacker opens a long round ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 05 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 05 is executed, a temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols is performed, for example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In pattern 05, after the jackpot start effect is first executed ((4) jackpot start effect), the above-described attack / defense effect is performed as the effect content of “buzz 2” ((5) hit 2 (attack / defense) effect ). After that, as a result of the offense / defense effect, the enemy character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of losing the defense and defeating is performed ((6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect). After that, the above-mentioned survival return effect is performed as the content of the “Ruri 3” effect ((7) Ruri 3 (survival) effect). Thereafter, as a result of the revival effect, an effect that the ally character succeeds in revival is performed ((8) chance 3 (success / failure success) effect). After that, the effect of 2 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) during the big hit). The content of the performance during the big hit 2 can be an appropriate content, but in the present embodiment, for example, the content of the performance indicates that there is a high possibility that the game will be in a probable state after the big hit game ends. It should be noted that the production of the big hit 1 and the production of the big hit 2 may be the same production contents or different production contents. After that, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the round in which the second attacker is long open ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 06 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special drawing indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 06 is executed, for example, a temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols is performed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 06, first, after the big hit start effect is executed ((4) big hit start effect), the above-mentioned offense and defense effect is performed as the effect content of the “buzz 2” ((5) hit 2 (offense and defense) effect. ). Thereafter, as a result of the attack / defense effect, the teammate character is attacked by the enemy character, and a defense success effect is obtained to the effect that the defense has succeeded and the chance has been acquired ((6) Chance 2 (win / lose) effect). By performing this defense success effect, the player may be able to recognize that the big hit game being executed is a special big hit big hit game. Thereafter, the above-described effect 2 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). After that, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the round in which the second attacker is long open ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 07 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot that is scheduled to be acquired.

  When the effect pattern 07 is executed, for example, temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols is performed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (determined display) is performed again with the combination of the non-probable change big hit symbol ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 07, after the big hit start effect is first executed ((4) big hit start effect), the above-mentioned attack / defense effect is performed as the effect content of “Ruri 2” ((5) Beat 2 (offense / defense) effect) ). Thereafter, as a result of the offense / defense production, a teammate character attacks the enemy character, and a successful attack production is performed to the effect that the attack has succeeded and the opportunity has been obtained ((6) Chance 2 (win / loss) production). By performing this successful attack presentation, the player may be able to recognize that the big hit game being executed is a special big hit game. Thereafter, the above-described effect 2 during the big hit is performed as the effect during the big hit ((9) effect during the big hit). After that, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the round in which the second attacker is long open ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 08 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 08 is executed, a temporary stop display with a combination of non-probable big hit symbols is performed, for example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, stop display (determined display) is performed with a combination of probability variation jackpot symbols ((3) chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In the pattern 08, after the big hit start effect is first executed ((4) big hit start effect), three big hit results are performed as the big hit effect ((9) big hit effect). The content of the performance during the big hit 3 can be an appropriate content, but in the present embodiment, for example, the content of the performance indicates that there is a high possibility that the game will be in a probable state after the end of the big hit game. It should be noted that the effect of the big hit 3 and the effect of the big hit 2 may be the same effect content or different effect contents. Further, the effect of 3 in the big hit and the effect of 1 in the big hit may be the same effect contents or different effect contents. Further, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the second attacker has a long open round ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  The effect pattern of pattern 09 is an effect pattern that may be executed in a jackpot game that has been transferred with a special figure indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  When the effect pattern of pattern 09 is executed, a temporary stop display with a combination of probability variation big hit symbols is performed, for example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit ((1) decorative symbol temporary stop effect). After that, the promotion effect as described above is executed as the effect content of “buzz 1” ((2) turn 1 (design promotion) effect). After that, as a result of the promotion effect, a stop display (definite display) is again performed with the combination of the probable big hit symbols ((3) Chance 1 (promotion success / failure) effect).

  In pattern 09, after the big hit start effect is first executed ((4) big hit start effect), four big hit results are performed as the big hit effect ((9) big hit effect). The content of the effect during the big hit 4 can be an appropriate content, but in the present embodiment, for example, the content of the effect indicates that there is a high probability that the game will be in a probable state after the end of the big hit game. It should be noted that the effect of 4 in the big hit and the effect of 3 in the big hit may be the same effect contents or different effect contents. Further, the effect of 4 in the big hit and the effect of 2 in the big hit may be the same effect contents or different effect contents. Further, the effect of 4 in the big hit and the effect of 1 in the big hit may be the same effect contents or different effect contents. Further, the above-described acquisition display is continuously displayed until the second attacker has a long open round ((11) Chance acquisition effect). After that, in the round immediately before the first round in which the second attacker becomes long open, as an instruction content of “Instruction 1”, an instruction is given to instruct the game ball to pass through the V passage 2340g in the next round. An effect is executed ((12) hitting instruction 1 effect). Thereafter, in the round in which the second attacker is first released long, the effect of instructing the game ball to pass through the V path 2340g is executed as the content of the “instruction 2” ((13) strike Direction instruction 2). Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, an effect indicating that the V prize has been won is executed ((14) V winning effect). Thereafter, as a jackpot game end effect executed after the jackpot game is ended, a jackpot end 2 effect is performed ((15) jackpot end effect).

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), the effect content for each round is determined by the pattern selected from the patterns 01 to 09.

  When the pattern 01 is selected, the (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effect is executed in the first to third rounds, the (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect is executed in the fourth round, and the fifth round (7) Brill 3 (survival) production and (8) Chance 3 (survival success or failure) production are executed, and (9) Big hit production is executed in the 6th to 16th rounds.

  When pattern 02 is selected, (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effects are executed in the first to third rounds, and (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effects are executed in the fourth and fifth rounds. Then, during the 6th to 16th rounds, (9) a big hit effect is executed.

  When pattern 03 is selected, (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effects are executed in the first to third rounds, and (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effects are executed in the fourth round. In the eyes, the (7) roll 3 (survival) production and (8) chance 3 (survival success / failure) production are executed, the (9) big hit effect is executed in the 6th to 14th rounds, and the (10) ) Chance 4 (resurrection character) effect and (12) hitting instruction 1 effect are executed and (11) chance acquisition effect is started, and (13) hitting instruction 2 effect is executed in the 16th round, passing V When the switch SW2 passes, (14) V winning effect is executed.

  When the pattern 04 is selected, the (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effect is executed in the first to third rounds, and the (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect is executed in the fourth and fifth rounds. In the sixth to fourteenth rounds, (9) a big hit effect is executed, and in the fifteenth round, (10) chance 4 (resurrection character) effect and (12) hitting instruction 1 effect are executed (11 ) The chance acquisition effect is started, and in the 16th round, (13) the hitting instruction 2 effect is executed, and (14) the V winning effect is executed when the V passing switch SW2 is passed.

  When the pattern 05 is selected, the (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effect is executed in the first to third rounds, and the (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect is executed in the fourth round. In the eyes, the (7) roll 3 (survival) production and the (8) chance 3 (survival success / failure) production are executed, and the (11) chance acquisition production is started, and the (9) big hit in the 6th to 12th rounds An effect is executed, (12) a hitting instruction 1 effect is executed in the 13th round, and (13) a hitting instruction 2 effect is executed in the 14th round. (14) V winning effect is executed. Note that (13) the hitting instruction 2 effect is continuously performed regardless of the transition of the round until the V passing switch SW2 passes.

  When the pattern 06 is selected, the (5) turn 2 (attack and defense) effect is executed in the first to third rounds, and the (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effect is executed in the fourth round ( 11) The chance acquisition effect is started, the (9) big hit effect is executed in the 5th to 12th rounds, the (12) hitting instruction 1 effect is executed in the 13th round, and (13) in the 14th round A hitting instruction 2 effect is executed, and if there is a passage of the V pass switch SW2, the (14) V winning effect is executed up to the 16th round.

  When pattern 07 is selected, (5) turn 2 (offense and defense) effects are executed in the first to third rounds, and (6) chance 2 (win / loss) effects are executed in the fourth round ( 11) The chance acquisition effect is started, the (9) big hit effect is executed in the 5th to 12th rounds, the (12) hitting instruction 1 effect is executed in the 13th round, and (13) in the 14th round A hitting instruction 2 effect is executed, and if there is a passage of the V pass switch SW2, the (14) V winning effect is executed up to the 16th round.

  When the pattern 08 is selected, the (9) big hit effect is executed in the first to twelfth rounds, the (12) hitting instruction 1 effect is executed in the thirteenth round, and (13 ) A hitting instruction 2 effect is executed, and when there is a passage of the V pass switch SW2, (14) V winning effect is executed up to the 16th round.

  When the pattern 09 is selected, the (9) big hit effect is executed in the first to twelfth rounds, the (12) hitting instruction 1 effect is executed in the thirteenth round, and (13 ) A hitting instruction 2 effect is executed, and when there is a passage of the V pass switch SW2, (14) V winning effect is executed up to the 16th round.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the pachinko machine according to the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the specific effect example illustrated in FIG. 116. 116 to 117 show an example of the effect pattern of pattern 01 among the nine effect patterns shown in FIG. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  In FIG. 116 (1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively. Later, a display that evolved into super reach was made. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner. In FIG. 116, the first special figure display device 212 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 as the first symbol display means, and the second special figure display device 214 and the second special symbol display means 218 as the second symbol display means. A special figure hold lamp 220 is also shown. In FIG. 116 (1), since there are three variable display suspensions in FIG. 1, three lamps in the first special diagram retention lamp 218 are lit. On the other hand, since the variable display hold in FIG. 2 is 0, none of the second special figure hold lamps 220 is lit. Further, the first special figure display device 212 performs the variable display as described above, and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the lost symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12 and the third special figure 1 indicating the hold of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of the special figure 1 hold. The special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed as blank. In addition, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and a special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are provided in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In response to the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol display device 212, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, for example, are subjected to variable display in such a manner that the color represented in a circle changes into a plurality of types. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed in a state in which, for example, a white square mark which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed corresponding to the lost symbol which is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214. Yes. In the present embodiment, the sub effect display device 208 </ b> A is arranged adjacent to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub effect display device 208A is in a position (first position) that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where “Yoshimune” is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the picture of the chance button 136 prompting the user to press the chance button 136 and the characters “press”.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (3), the sub effect display device 208A overlaps the decorative design display device 208 from the first position as shown in FIG. 116 (4). Displace to the position (second position). In the sub-effect display device 208A, a display for changing the color of the background on which the character display of “Yoshimune” is performed is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (5), after the decorative symbol “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 4” To start swinging. At this time, the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the second position to the first position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, whether or not the display is changed to a combination of decorative symbols (probability variable symbols) that are displayed again and promised to be a 16R special jackpot. Promotional production that makes you expect about is performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c that are fluctuating are displayed again in the upper left corner. A “promotion challenge” message indicating that a promotion effect is performed, a symbol of the chance button 136 prompting the user to press the chance button 136, and a character display “press” are displayed.

  Then, although the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (7), the sub effect display device 208A does not move in the first position as shown in FIG. 116 (8). Thereby, it is notified that the change is not changed to the combination of probability variation symbols promised to be the 16R special jackpot by performing the re-variation display.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (9), the decoration symbol display device 208 continuously performs fluctuation fluctuation with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (10), “symbol 4” which is a substantial 13-round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the first symbol t4 in the special diagram 1 includes the first symbol A blue circle symbol corresponding to “symbol 4” stopped on the special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the special-game variable game ends. In this production example, the jackpot game to be started is a 16R jackpot (substantial 13 round jackpot) in which the third game condition is difficult to be satisfied, but the player has a third jackpot game to be started. It is difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit that is likely to be established. The final stop timing of the decorative symbol and the special symbol may be simultaneous, the decorative symbol may be earlier than the special symbol, or the special symbol may be earlier than the decorative symbol. The final stop timing may be early.

  Thereafter, the big hit game is started, and the big symbol start effect as shown in FIG. 116 (11) is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, a display for instructing right-handed is also performed. The start timing of the big hit start effect may be the same as the start timing of the right hit instruction display, the start timing of the big hit start effect may be earlier than the start timing of the right hit instruction display, The start timing of the instruction display may be earlier than the start timing of the big hit start effect.

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect is finished and the first round is entered, as shown in FIG. 116 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the first round of the big hit game. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive chunks is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), a display to that effect is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. "First time" is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the above-described attack / defense effects are performed. The start timing of the attack / defense effect may be the same as the start of the first round, may be before the start of the first round, or may be after the start of the first round. Good.

  FIG. 116 (13) shows the contents of the effect in the third round. As shown in FIG. 116 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as part of the offense / defense effect, the second variable winning opening 235a is long open in the fourteenth or sixteenth round, and V passes easily. There is an effect that suggests whether or not a great chance to become a state will come. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a letter “Let's hit repeatedly” together with a picture of the chance button 136 that prompts the chance button 136 to be repeatedly hit, and the success of the hits is shown. And a remaining time display bar representing the remaining time of the acceptance period of pressing the chance button. In the production of the pattern 01, this indicator is not displayed to the maximum. According to this effect, there is a case where the player can have a sense of expectation that the result of the offense and defense may be a successful result by continuously hitting the chance button 136 and displaying the indicator to the maximum. The start timing of the effect display that prompts the chance button 136 to be struck may be the same as the start of the third round, may be before the start of the third round, or the start of the third round It may be later.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (14), after the chance button 136 is continuously hit by the player, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time display bar expires. Is displayed. At this time, the indicator shows that the achievement degree of repeated hits is 3/5.

  FIG. 116 (16) shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. As shown in FIG. 116 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the teammate character is attacked by the enemy character, and the effect of defeating the defense failure is executed. At this time, the sub effect display device 208A does not move in the first position. Thereby, it is notified that there is a high possibility that the current big hit game is a big hit in which the third game condition is hardly established. It should be noted that the start timing of the content of the defeat due to failure of defense may be at the same time as the start of the fourth round, may be before the start of the fourth round, It may be after the start.

  FIG. 116 (17) shows the contents of the effect in the fifth round. As shown in FIG. 116 (17), the above-mentioned survival effect is executed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a letter “press and revive” together with a picture of the chance button 136 that prompts the user to press the chance button 136. A remaining time display bar indicating the remaining time of the reception period is also displayed. According to this effect, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the player feels that the current jackpot game may be informed that the third game condition is likely to be a special jackpot. You may be able to have it. It should be noted that the start timing of the effect that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 may be simultaneously with the start of the fifth round, may be before the start of the fifth round, or the start of the fifth round It may be later.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (18), as shown in FIG. 117 (19), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the effect of the content that fails to survive. Thereby, it is notified that there is a high possibility that the current big hit game is a big hit in which the third game condition is hardly established.

  Thereafter, in the sixth to sixteenth rounds, as shown in FIGS. 117 (20) to 117 (24), one big hit effect is performed as a big hit effect. This effect during the jackpot is actually an effect that is executed when the jackpot game is started, and is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until the timing of FIG. 117 (20). The second sub-control unit 500 is controlled so that the contents of the effect progress. Then, at the timing of FIG. 117 (20), one effect during the big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 with the contents of the effect after progress. That is, it can be said that the video in one production during the big hit is progressing behind the scenes. By being configured in this way, for example, in the first to third rounds, one effect is performed during the big hit, and in the fourth round and thereafter, promotion effects such as an offense and defense effect and a survival effect are executed, while the big hit 1 It is also possible to cause the production to proceed internally, and then to resume one production during the big hit with the content of the production after the eighth round. It should be noted that one effect during the big hit may be started at the timing of FIG. 117 (20). The same applies to the 2 effects during the big hit, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, when the second variable winning opening 235a is in the 14th round where the short opening is made, as shown in FIG. 117 (22), it is displayed on the center upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 up to the 13th round. The round number display is cleared. In the following description, the round number display corresponds to the first effect. Here, it can be said that the display of the number of rounds is an example of an effect related to the big hit round. Then, as shown in FIGS. 117 (22) to 117 (24), the round number display is continuously erased until the big hit game is completed. In the present embodiment, by clearing the round number display in the round in which the second variable prize opening 235a is short-opened, it is possible to obscure the rounds with the possibility of passing V. For example, a revival effect is performed. There is a case where interest can be improved by giving expectation to V passing. The round number display may be erased only in the 14th and 16th rounds opened by the second attacker, and the round number may be displayed in the 15th round. Further, the round number display may not be deleted. Further, the round number display may not be deleted.

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 117 (25), the above-mentioned effect of the big hit end 1 is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition was not satisfied because there was no V passing in the 14th or 16th round. In addition, while the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the electronic support state (the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) is entered.

  Thus, according to this embodiment, it can be said that the first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the fourth period, and the first effect is not executed at least in the fifth period. It can be said that it is a production. It can also be said that the first effect is an effect executed in at least a part of the fourth period.

  The first effect is not limited to the display of the number of rounds, and various effects related to the big hit round may be applied. For example, the effect may be an audio output at the start of the round. Further, only one of the effects related to the multiple types of big hit rounds may be the first effect, or two or more of the effects related to the multiple types of big hit rounds may be set as the first effect. All of the effects related to the type of big hit round may be the first effects.

  118 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the pachinko machine according to the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the specific effect example illustrated in FIG. 118. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 118 to 119 show an example of the effect pattern of the pattern 05 among the nine effect patterns shown in FIG. 115. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 118 (1) to 118 (18) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 116 (1) to 116 (18), and thus description thereof is omitted here. In the example of production shown in FIGS. 118 (1) to 118 (18), as shown in FIG. 118 (10), “symbol 1”, which is a 16-round big hit symbol, is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. It is different from the example effects shown in FIGS. 116 (1) to 116 (18) in that the jackpot game is started after being stopped.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (18) during execution of the above-mentioned survival effect, the main character of the main character is cut in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 119 (19). The effect of the content displayed by IN is executed, and then, as shown in FIG. 119 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the effect display indicating that the survival was successful. In addition, when an effect display indicating that the survival is successful is started, the above-described acquisition display is displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This acquisition display is continued until the 14th round is started, as shown in FIGS. 119 (20) to 119 (23). Thereby, it is notified that the current big hit game is a big hit where the third game condition is likely to be established. In addition, the display start timing of the acquisition display may be simultaneous with the start timing of the effect display that the survival is successful, or may be after the start of the effect display that the survival is successful, It may be before the start of the effect display indicating that the survival was successful.

  Thereafter, in the sixth round to the twelfth round, as shown in FIGS. 119 (21) to 119 (22), two effects during the big hit are performed. Note that the start timing of the big hit effect may be simultaneous with the start of the round (for example, the sixth round), or may be after the start of the round.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 13th round, as shown in FIG. 119 (23), the above-described hitting instruction 1 effect is executed. In other words, as shown in FIG. 119 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 13th round of the jackpot game, and allows V to pass in the next round, that is, the 14th round. “Aim at V at next R” is displayed. This may allow the player to reliably pass the V in the next round. Note that the start timing of the hitting instruction 1 production may be the same as the start of the 13th round, may be before the start of the 13th round, or after the start of the 13th round. There may be.

  Thereafter, when the 14th round is reached, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened long and the V passage is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the 14th round as shown in FIG. 119 (24). Is displayed, and a hitting instruction 2 effect “V Aim” for promoting the passage of V is executed. In addition, the start timing of the hitting instruction 2 production may be simultaneous with the start of the 14th round, may be before the start of the 14th round, or after the start of the 14th round. There may be. In this embodiment, when the 14th and 16th rounds are long open, the display of the number of rounds is not erased, so the player may be surely notified of the current number of rounds. is there. The round number display may be deleted after the 14th round.

  If there is a game ball passing (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (25), as shown in FIG. The effect to the effect is executed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. As shown in FIGS. 119 (26) to 119 (28), this effect is continuously performed until the 16th round is completed. In this example, if there is a V passage at the 14th round, the two effects during the big hit may be resumed at the 15th and 16th rounds.

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 119 (29), the above-described effect of the big hit end 2 is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied because V passed in the 14th round. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends (after the third requirement is satisfied), a predetermined number of times (for example, , 150 times) while the symbol variation display is performed, the state changes to the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state).

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, it can be said that the first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the sixth period.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 121, for example, when there is a V passage in the 14th round when the second variable prize opening 235a is short-opened, the above-mentioned production of winning the V prize is not performed. In the 16th round, the above-described hitting instruction 2 effect may be executed, and when the V variable is passed in the 16th round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is long open, the effect that the V prize is won for the first time may be performed. . Also, for example, when V passes in the 14th round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is short-opened, an effect that a V prize has been made is performed, but a direction instruction 2 effect is further executed in the 16th round. May be.

  120 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the pachinko machine according to the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the specific effect example illustrated in FIG. 120. 120 to 121 show an example of the effect pattern of the pattern 03 among the nine effect patterns shown in FIG. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 120 (1) to 121 (22) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 116 (1) to 117 (22) and are not described here. 120 (1) to 121 (22), as shown in FIG. 120 (10), the first special figure display device 212 is a symbol 15 which is a big hit symbol “symbol 3”. Is displayed in a stopped state and the big hit game is started, which is different from the production examples shown in FIGS. 116 (1) to 117 (22). Also in this production example, when the second variable winning opening 235a becomes the 14th round when the short opening is made, the display of the number of rounds displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until the 13th round is erased, and the big hit game ends. Will continue until.

  FIG. 121 (23) shows the contents of the effect in the 15th round. As shown in FIG. 121 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described resurrection character effect is executed, and then, for example, a hitting instruction 1 effect as shown in FIG. 119 (23) is executed. The start timing of the resurrection character production may be the same as the start of the 15th round, may be before the start of the 15th round, or after the start of the 15th round. Also good.

  Thereafter, at the 16th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened long and the V passage is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Production is performed.

  When the game ball passes (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (25), as shown in FIG. 121 (26), V winning The effect to the effect is executed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. This effect is continued until the 16th round is completed. In the present embodiment, the round number display is erased also in the 15th and 16th rounds when the attacker opens long, but the round number display is erased in the 14th round, and the 15th and 16th rounds are erased. The eyes may redisplay the number of rounds.

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 121 (27), the effect of the big hit end 2 described above is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied due to the passing of V in the 16th round. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends (after the third requirement is satisfied), a predetermined number of times (for example, , 150 times) while the symbol variation display is performed, the state changes to the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state).

  Thus, according to this embodiment, it can be said that the first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the fourth period, and the first effect is not executed at least in the fifth period. It can be said that it is a production. It can also be said that the first effect is an effect executed in at least a part of the fourth period.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the pachinko machine according to the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the specific effect example illustrated in FIG. 122. 122 to 123 show an example of the effect pattern of pattern 05 among the nine effect patterns shown in FIG. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 122 (1) to 123 (24) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 118 (1) to 119 (24) and described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 123 (24) shows the contents of the effect in the 14th round. As shown in FIG. 123 (24), at the 14th round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened long, and the V passing is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is as shown in FIG. 123 (24). In addition, a display indicating that it is the 14th round is performed, and the above-described hitting instruction 2 effect is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (25), when there is no game ball passing through the V pass switch SW2 and the 14th round is completed, the process proceeds to the 15th round as shown in FIG. 123 (26). However, the hitting instruction 2 effect described above is continuously performed. In the present embodiment, at least some of the effects of the plurality of types switch the contents of the effect triggered by the fact that the round is switched, but in this effect example, this direction-of-play instruction 2 effect is switched between rounds. However, it is an example of what does not change the production contents with this as a trigger.

  FIG. 123 (27) shows the contents of the effect in the 16th round. As shown in FIG. 123 (27), at the 16th round, the second variable prize winning opening 235a is opened long and the V passage is easy. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, even when the 16th round is entered, the above-described hitting instruction 2 effect continues to be performed.

  If there is a passing of a game ball (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (28), as shown in FIG. The effect to the effect is executed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. This effect is continued until the 16th round is completed.

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 123 (30), the above-mentioned effect of the big hit end 2 is performed. In the above jackpot game, there was no V pass in the 14th round, but the V game pass in the 16th round resulted in the third gaming condition, so after the jackpot game ended (third requirement ) Is satisfied, while the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times), the state changes to the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state).

  FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the pachinko machine according to the twelfth embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 124 shows an example of the effect pattern pattern 07 of the nine effect patterns shown in FIG. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 124 (1) to 124 (11) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 118 (1) to 118 (11) and are not described here.

  FIG. 124 (12) shows the contents of the effects in the first round. That is, when the big hit start effect is finished and the process proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 124 (12), the decorative design display device 208 performs the above-described attack and defense effect.

  FIG. 124 (13) shows the contents of effects in the third round. As shown in FIG. 124 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect in which a teammate character attacks an enemy character is performed as an attack / defense effect. At this time, the sub effect display device 208A is displaced from the first position to the second position. In the sub-effect display device 208A, a display for changing the color of the background on which the character display of “Yoshimune” is performed is performed. The start timing of the offense / defense production may be the same as the start of the third round, may be before the start of the third round, or may be after the start of the third round. Good. Further, the operation start timing of the sub effect display device 208A may be the same as the start of the attack / defense effect, may be before the start of the attack / defense effect, or after the start of the attack / defense effect. Also good.

  FIG. 124 (14) shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. As shown in FIG. 124 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described successful attack effect is performed, and the above-described acquisition display is displayed in the lower right corner. Thereby, it is notified that the current big hit game is a big hit where the third game condition is likely to be established. The start timing of the successful attack production may be simultaneous with the start of the fourth round, may be before the start of the fourth round, or after the start of the fourth round. Also good. Further, the display start timing of the acquisition display may be simultaneous with the start of the successful attack presentation, may be before the start of the successful attack presentation, or after the start of the successful attack presentation. Also good.

  Thereafter, in the fifth to twelfth rounds, as shown in FIG. 124 (15), the above-described effect of the big hit 2 is performed. Thereafter, for example, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 119 (21) to 119 (29) are performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the presence / absence of the performance and the execution mode of the performance differ depending on the timing at which it is notified that the third game condition is likely to be a special big hit. For example, there is a case where an accessory moves and a case where it does not move depending on the timing at which it is notified that it is a special big hit, and the type of the movable accessory may be different. Further, there are cases where an effect of operating the chance button 136 is executed depending on the timing when it is notified that it is a special big hit, and there is a case where it is not executed.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the twelfth embodiment. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 125 shows a state in which an enemy character that is displayed when the probability is changed in a 16R special big hit, for example, is selected. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 125 (1) shows a state in which a jackpot game of 16 round special jackpot is being executed. FIG. 125 (1) shows the contents of the effect in the tenth round. In the present embodiment, at the 10th round, it becomes possible to select an enemy character displayed in the probability variation state. As shown in FIG. 125 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-mentioned acquisition display is displayed in the lower right corner, and this big hit game is a big hit game that easily satisfies the third game condition. It has been reported. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the text “Please select a character” to promote the selection of enemy characters. On the left side, a character list CL is displayed. In the character list CL, items of character A, character B, and character C are displayed in a list in the vertical direction, and the player can move the cursor CSL by operating a cursor key (not shown), for example. it can. The item indicated by the cursor CSL may be changed every predetermined time. In FIG. 125 (1), the cursor CSL indicates the character A, and the item of the character A is highlighted. The start timing of the enemy character selection effect can be set arbitrarily.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (2), as shown in FIG. 125 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a character selection effect indicating that the character A is selected. Is done. At this time, a sound notifying that the character A has been selected is output from the speaker 120. Note that the start timing of the character selection effect indicating that the character A is selected may be the same as or different from the output timing of the sound for notifying that the character A is selected. Also, audio output may not be performed. Character selection effects are continuously performed until the big hit game is completed, as shown in FIGS. 125 (3) to 125 (8).

  After that, when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 14th round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened long and the V passage is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 125 (4), A display indicating that the game is in the 14th round is performed, and a hitting instruction 2 effect “V Aim” for promoting the passage of V is executed. Different from FIG. 119 (24), the hitting instruction 2 effect during the execution of the character selection effect is such that the character display “V Aim” is displayed small in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (5), if there is a game ball passing (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a, as shown in FIG. The effect to the effect is executed by interrupting the character selection effect. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. At this time, a sound for notifying that a V prize has been won is output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that the start timing of the effect indicating that the V prize has been won and the output timing of the sound for notifying that the V prize has been won may be the same or different. Also, audio output may not be performed. Further, the effect indicating that the V prize has been won may be displayed overlapping the character selection effect.

  Thereafter, at the fifteenth round, as shown in FIG. 125 (7), the character selection effect is resumed. At this time, for example, the character selection effect continues on the control while the effect of winning the V prize is performed. When the 15th round is reached, the character selection effect is resumed with the content after the progress. It has become so. When the character selection effect is resumed, it may be performed from the beginning of the effect. As shown in FIG. 125 (8), the character selection effect is executed until the 16th round ends (until the big hit game ends).

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 125 (9), the above-described effect of the big hit end 2 is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied due to the passing of V in the 14th round. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends (after the third requirement is satisfied) It shifts to a high probability state (high probability state).

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) and, as shown in FIG. 125 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a probability change state. “Yoshimune mode” is executed, and “Defeating the enemy is a big hit” is displayed to explain the content of the big win. The character A that is the enemy character to be defeated is displayed. . At this time, since there was no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 and there were three hold of the variable display of the special figure 1, the hold (the first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display 212 is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. The decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the remaining number of symbol variation displays in which the probability variation state can be executed is displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is decremented by one each time symbol variation display is started. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (10), after the symbol variation display is started, at least four game balls have been won at the second special diagram starting port 232, and the variation display of the four special diagrams 2 has been suspended. Therefore, all four holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lit. On the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special figure 2 hold display are displayed. h24 is provided. At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (10), since the fluctuation display of the four special figures 2 is held, the first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24 are all default displays. The hold display in the aspect is performed. In addition, the display of the number of consecutive chunks and the display for instructing a right-hand hit which have been displayed in the big hit game are continued.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the pachinko machine according to the twelfth embodiment. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 126 shows a state of selecting an enemy character that is displayed when the probability is changed in a 16R special big hit, for example. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 126 (1) shows a state in which a jackpot game of 16 round special jackpot is being executed. The effect shown in FIG. 126 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 125 (1) and described above.

  FIG. 126 (2) shows the contents of the effect when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 14th round. In this effect example, the enemy character has not yet been selected, and therefore the effect shown in FIG. 126 (1) is continuously executed. In the fourteenth round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened long, and the V passing is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the above-described hitting instruction instruction 2 effect. This striking method instruction 2 effect is a mode in which the character display “V Aim” is displayed small in the lower center of the enemy character selection screen that is being continued.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (3), if there is a passing of the game ball (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a, as shown in FIG. The effect to the effect is executed by interrupting the enemy character selection screen. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. At this time, a sound for notifying that a V prize has been won is output from the speaker 120. In addition, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 can accept the operation of the cursor key and the chance button 136 related to the selection of the enemy character even during the execution of the effect indicating that the V prize is won. That is, even if the enemy character selection screen is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the position of the cursor CSL can be changed by internal control using a cursor key or the like, and internal control can be performed by operating the chance button 136. The item indicated by can be selected. The effect of winning the V prize may be displayed overlapping the enemy character selection screen.

  Thereafter, although not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (5) in a state where the cursor CSL indicates the character A in the internal control by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. When 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 126 (6), a character selection effect that character A is selected from speaker 120 is executed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect of winning the V prize is continuously performed even though the chance button 136 is operated. Note that the effect of winning the V prize may be displayed overlapping the character selection effect. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the display may be switched from the effect of winning the V prize to the character selection effect.

  Thereafter, effects as shown in FIGS. 126 (7) to 126 (10) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 126 (7) to 126 (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 125 (7) to 125 (10) and described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the twelfth embodiment. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 127 shows a state where, for example, an enemy character that is displayed in a probabilistic state at 16R special big hit is selected. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 127 (1) to 127 (6) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 126 (1) to 126 (6), and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 127 (7) shows the content of the effect in the 15th round. In this effect example, after the effect of winning the V prize is performed, as shown in FIGS. 127 (7) to 127 (8), the game continues until the 16th round ends (until the big hit game ends). The character selection effect described above is not executed.

  When the 16th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 127 (9), the above-described effect of the big hit end 2 is performed. In the jackpot game described above, the third game condition is satisfied due to the passing of V in the 14th round. Therefore, after the jackpot game ends (after the third requirement is satisfied) It shifts to a high probability state (high probability state).

  When the big hit game is completed as described above, the state shifts to a probability change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state), and an effect as shown in FIG. 127 (10) is executed. The effect shown in FIG. 127 (10) is the same as that shown in FIG. 125 (10) and described above.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
A thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above. Note that the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment is described as an example provided with the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 74, but of course the present invention is also implemented in the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 as shown in FIG. Forms can be applied. In the present embodiment, the general discharge passage (first discharge passage) for discharging the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a and passed through the winning count switch SW4 is different from the general discharge passage. A discharge passage (second discharge passage) is provided, and an effect area shutter that is displaceable between a state in which the game ball enters the effect discharge passage and a state in which the game ball is prevented from entering is provided. The effect area shutter is configured to be displaceable by, for example, driving the effect area solenoid, and the effect area solenoid is configured to be driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, for example. In addition, an effect V passage switch SW9 is provided in the effect discharge passage so that a game ball that has entered the effect discharge passage passes therethrough. Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is prepared, and when a small hit symbol is displayed on either the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the game shifts to a small hit game. It is configured to be controllable. In the small hit game, for example, the operation described above with reference to FIG. 113 (a) is performed. In addition, at least one of the multiple types of big hit games is configured to be able to execute the operation described above with reference to FIG. 113B, for example, in the first round.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the pachinko machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  In FIG. 128 (a1), the jackpot symbol (for example, 16R special jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the ornament symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 1”-“decoration star”. A combination of decorative symbols (chance symbols) such as “mark”-“decoration 1” is stopped (determined). Further, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, in a red circle symbol corresponding to the stop display result. Note that the combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 128 (a1) may be displayed in the case of a big hit, or may be displayed in the case of a big hit. The timing for stopping the finalization of the decorative symbol and the special symbol may or may not be simultaneous. In FIG. 1, since there are three variable display holds, three lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the first special figure 1 hold display h11 and the second special figure 1 are displayed. The hold display h12 and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are both displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, on the second special symbol display device 214, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also correspondingly stopped and displayed with, for example, a white square symbol. In addition, since the variable display hold of special figure 2 is 0, none of the second special figure hold lamps 220 is lit.

  When the big hit game is started and the game proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 128 (a2), a big hit acquisition chance effect that a big hit is notified when the game ball passes the effect V passing switch SW9 is displayed. For example, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an arrow indicating the direction in which the first variable winning opening 234a (first attacker) is arranged, together with the character information “Chance get when V enters a ball”. Is done. In the first round, the first variable winning opening 234a is opened long after performing a plurality of short opening, and the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a enters the production discharge passage. The production area shutter is driven and controlled so as to be easy.

  If there is a game ball passing (effect V passing) to the effect V passing switch SW9 in the first variable winning opening 234a at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (a3), as shown in FIG. 128 (a4). The effect that the effect V has passed is executed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the game has been shifted to the 16R special jackpot game.

  FIG. 128 (b1) also shows a state in which the symbol pattern (for example, the symbol pattern for 16R special jackpot) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212. The effect shown in FIG. 128 (b1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 128 (a1) and described above.

  When the big hit game is started and the process proceeds to the first round, as shown in FIG. 128 (b2), the big hit acquisition chance effect described above is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 128 (b3) to 128 (b4), even when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed without passing the game ball to the effect V passing switch SW9, FIG. As shown in b5), the effect that the effect V has passed is executed. In other words, in the jackpot game that has been displayed with the jackpot symbol pattern stopped and displayed, whether the game ball has passed or not passed through the effect V passing switch SW9. This effect is executed, and the player is informed that the game has been shifted to the jackpot game of 16R special jackpot.

  In FIG. 128 (c1), the small symbol pattern is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration such as “decoration 1” — “decoration star” — “decoration 1” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A combination of symbols (chance symbols) is stopped (determined). Further, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, in a green circle symbol corresponding to the stop display result. The timing for stopping the finalization of the decorative symbol and the special symbol may or may not be simultaneous.

  When the small hit game is started, as shown in FIG. 128 (c2), the above big hit acquisition chance effect is executed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning opening 234a is only opened a plurality of times and is not opened a long time. The effect area shutter is driven and controlled so that a game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234a is unlikely to enter the effect discharge passage.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (c3), when the small hit game is ended without passing the game ball to the effect V passing switch SW9, the small hit game end effect as shown in FIG. 128 (c4) is executed. The In the small hit game end effect, a character display of “sorry” indicating that the game has not shifted to the big hit game is displayed.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 129 shows a state of a big hit game with a 16R special big hit, for example. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 129 (a1) shows a state in which a jackpot game of 16R special jackpot is being executed. FIG. 129 (a1) shows the content of the effect in the sixth round. In addition, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a big hit effect. In the present embodiment, the sixth round is a round in which the first variable prize opening 234a is opened. Here, the round which the 2nd variable winning opening 235a opens may be sufficient.

  Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied and the first variable winning opening 234a is closed, as shown in FIG. 129 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an interval effect between rounds. In the inter-round interval effect, for example, a part of the round number display displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and only the letter “R” is displayed. Note that the round number display may be entirely deleted. Further, the number of rounds may be displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize. For example, the display form is gradually changed from “6R” indicating the sixth round to “7R” that is the seventh round. It may be. Thereafter, when the seventh round is started, as shown in FIG. 129 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “7R” indicating that it is the seventh round.

  FIG. 129 (b1) shows a state in which a jackpot game of 16R special jackpot is being executed. FIG. 129 (b1) shows the content of the effect in the sixth round. In addition, as shown in FIG. 129 (b1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a big hit effect. In this effect example, the number of prize balls acquired by winning an attacker in the big hit game is displayed at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b1), a character display of “795pt” indicating that 795 prize balls have been acquired is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the 16th round ends, a big hit end effect is performed as shown in FIG. 129 (b2). In the big hit this time, the number of winning balls won by winning the attacker is 2430, so the character display “TOTAL: 2430pt” is displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. . Further, since the number of winning balls won by winning the attacker in this big hit has exceeded 2400, the character display of “2400 pt GET” is displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 130 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 130, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 130 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and uses the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  In the embodiments described so far, the special jackpot in which the big hit game in which the second attacker is short-opened is executed and the special jackpot in which the big hit game in which the second attacker is not short-opened is executed. Although it is configured to be possible, it may be configured such that only a big hit game in which the second attacker opens shortly is executed. In other words, in the big hit game, the second attacker may be configured to always open short.

  In the embodiments described so far, the round in which the first attacker opens may or may not be included before the specific opening, and the round in which the first attacker opens may be included. In this case, the number of rounds set may be one or plural. In addition, a round that the first attacker opens after the specific opening may or may not be included, and the number of rounds that is set when the round that the first attacker opens is included is There may be one or more. Further, a round in which the first attacker opens may or may not be included between the short opening of the second attacker and the long opening of the second attacker in the specific opening. The number of rounds set when a round that an attacker can open may be one or more.

  In the embodiments described so far, the first attacker may not perform the short opening and the long opening in the same round. In the round in which the first attacker opens short, a plurality of short opens may be performed, or a plurality of short opens may not be performed in one round. Further, the first attacker may open only one round or a plurality of rounds. Further, the first attacker may perform short opening and long opening in the same round. The first attacker may be configured to be able to execute a big hit game constituted by a round in which short opening and long opening are performed, a round in which only short opening is performed, and a round in which only long opening is performed. Also, the short opening of the first attacker may not be performed.

  Moreover, in embodiment described so far, the open pattern of the 2nd special figure starting port 232 in non-electric support may be the same as the open pattern of the 2nd special figure start port 232 in electric support. And may be different. Further, the opening time of the second special figure starting port 232 during non-electric support and the opening time of the second special figure starting port 232 during electric support may be the same or different.

  Further, in the embodiment described so far, the passing of the game ball to the probability variation operation area may be valid for a part or all of the period of the winning prize opening 2 valid state, and invalidated outside the period. However, it may be effective outside the period. In this case, it may be invalid while the first attacker is open.

  In the embodiment described so far, the number of winning balls to an attacker in a single big hit game is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, when a round finish condition is satisfied when 10 attackers win a round) And in the case of a pachinko machine capable of 16 round games with one big hit game, if there are more than 30 surplus prizes (180 or more), it will be judged as a surplus prize error (over prize error) The notification to that effect may be performed. At this time, an error may be notified when a predetermined number or more of winnings have been made, or may be notified at the end of the big hit game. Further, for example, an error notification may be made at the timing when an effect indicating that there has been an overwinning as shown in FIG. 99 (d) is started.

  In the embodiment described so far, in the small hit game, the same attacker as the opener in the first round of the big hit game is released, but a different attacker may be opened. For example, when the attacker opened in the first round of the big hit game is the first attacker not provided with the V pass switch SW2, the second attacker provided with the V pass switch SW2 is opened in the small hit game. You may do it. In this case, when the game ball enters the V-pass switch SW2, it may be shifted to the probability changing state after the small hit game is completed. At this time, if the execution time of the small hit game end effect is shorter than the execution time of the big hit game end effect, for example, a small hit game end effect that makes the player feel uncomfortable may be executed. Although the same effect as the big hit game end effect is executed, it may be ended in the middle of the effect. Further, even when a game ball enters the V-pass switch SW2 in the small hit game, it may be prevented from shifting to the probability changing state. Also, the opening / closing pattern of the attacker in the small hit game may be the same as or different from the opening / closing pattern of the attacker in the big hit game.

  In the embodiments described so far, the positions at which the first attacker and the second attacker are provided may be any positions in the game area, respectively, and the first attacker and the second attacker. The shape can be an appropriate shape. For example, an attacker to which an open / close door such as a shutter shape that moves in the horizontal direction or intersecting with the board surface of the game board 200 may be applied, or the horizontal or intersecting direction with the board surface of the game board 200 is rotated. An attacker to which an open / close door such as a door shape tilting as an axis is applied may be used.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far, all the big hits may be special big hits scheduled to be acquired with certainty. Also, some of the big hits in the special figure 2 may be big hits that are not scheduled to be acquired with certainty.

  Also, in the embodiment described so far, in the case of a big hit game with a special jackpot scheduled to win a probability change, in the case of a big hit game with a jackpot that is not scheduled to get a probability change without deleting the round number display Alternatively, the round number display may be deleted. In addition, the round number display may be erased or may not be performed in a round in which an attacker (for example, the second attacker) provided with the V-pass switch SW2 is short-opened. Further, the round number display may be erased or may not be performed in a round in which an attacker (for example, the second attacker) provided with the V-pass switch SW2 is opened long. In addition, the round number display may be erased or not performed in a round in which an attacker (for example, the first attacker) that does not include the V-pass switch SW2 is short-opened. Further, the round number display may be erased or not performed in a round in which an attacker (for example, the first attacker) not provided with the V-pass switch SW2 is opened long.

  In the embodiments described so far, the big hit game in which the second attacker opens only one round may be executable. In this case, for example, when executing a special jackpot big hit game including a round in which the second attacker opens long, the number of rounds is displayed in the round opened by the second attacker, and the second attacker is short. When a special jackpot game including a round of opening and long opening is executed, the round number display is deleted in the round opened by the second attacker, and the second attacker only performs short opening. In the case of executing a big hit big hit game that does not include a special big hit, the round number display may be deleted in the round opened by the second attacker. Here, when a special jackpot big hit game including a round in which the second attacker performs short opening and long opening is executed, when the second attacker opens short in the round in which the second attacker opens. Alternatively, the round number display may be deleted, and then the round number may be displayed again when the second attacker opens long.

  Further, the embodiments described so far can also be applied to a pachinko machine that can execute the above-described winning order variation. In this case, for example, a jackpot game that is executed with a big hit in the special figure 1, and a special jackpot game including a round in which the second attacker opens short and a round in which the second attacker opens long is executed. In this case, the round number display is erased in both the round in which the second attacker opens shortly and the round in which the second attacker opens long, and the big hit game is executed with a big hit in FIG. In case of executing a jackpot game that is not a special jackpot including two rounds that the second attacker opens shortly, the round number display is deleted in both of the two rounds, When a jackpot game to be executed and a special jackpot game including two rounds in which the second attacker opens long, the two jackpot games are executed. It may not be performed to erase the display number of rounds in any of und.

  In the embodiments described so far, the number of rounds may be displayed only for the current number of rounds, the number of remaining rounds may be displayed, or the maximum number of rounds. And the current round number may be displayed together.

  In the embodiment described so far, the display mode of the jackpot decorative symbol displayed in the jackpot game may be the same as or different from the display mode of the decorative symbol displayed during the symbol variation display. It may be.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far, when displaying the number of winning balls acquired by winning the attacker in the jackpot game, the number of winning balls displayed is the number of winning balls acquired only in the jackpot game. Or, including the first jackpot, the number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) won in all jackpot jackpot games that occurred without going through the non-electric support state (special low probability normal figure low probability state) It may be. In this case, the number of winning balls acquired by the over winning as described above may or may not be included.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far, a display indicating that a right hit instruction is given during the big hit game may or may not be performed.

  In the embodiments described so far, instead of the character selection effect or together with the character selection effect, the music selection effect for selecting the music to be output as BGM in at least one of the big hit game and the probability variation state may be performed. Good. Further, the character selection effect and the music selection effect may be executed at least after being notified that the game is a special jackpot jackpot game, or before being notified that the game is a special jackpot jackpot game. Also good. Further, it may be executed in a big hit game that is not a special big hit.

  In the embodiments described so far, a jackpot game including three or more rounds opened by the second attacker may be executable. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine capable of executing a big hit game including three rounds opened by the second attacker, and the second attacker opens in the big hit game executed with a big hit in FIG. In one of the three rounds, the second attacker opens long, and in the other two rounds the second attacker opens short, while in the big hit game executed with big hit in Special Figure 2, The second attacker may be opened long in all three rounds opened by the second attacker.

  Further, in the embodiment described so far, the round configuration may be different between the jackpot game that has been hit and transferred in FIG. 1 and the jackpot game that has been hit and transferred in FIG. That is, for example, the round in which the second attacker opens may be different between the big hit game that has been hit by big hit in FIG. 1 and the big hit game that has been hit by big hit in FIG. In addition, when the configuration of the rounds is the same for the jackpot game that has been hit with a big hit in FIG. You may make it vary the round which an attacker substantially opens.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far, when the winning ball switch is passed after the remaining ball detection period elapses and before the attacker is released in the next round, there is an over winning as described above. You may make it perform the effect to the effect and the effect to win an attacker. Further, after passing the remaining ball detection period, when the V passing switch SW2 is passed until the next round and the attacker is released, the effect of winning the V prize may not be performed. Further, the V prize may be invalidated.

  Further, in the embodiment described so far, when the winning ball count switch is passed during the remaining ball detection period, the above-described effect indicating that there has been an over winning or the effect indicating that the attacker has been awarded may be performed. . Further, when the V passing switch SW2 is passed during the remaining ball detection period, an effect that a V prize has been made may be performed.

  Further, in the embodiment described so far, in the big hit game executed in the big hit in FIG. 2, the round number display may not necessarily be deleted. In other words, the number of rounds may be displayed in all rounds during the big hit game. Further, even during a continuous chain, in the big hit game executed with big hit in FIG. 1, the round number display may be deleted. Further, the display of the round number display may be performed continuously over a plurality of rounds or may be performed intermittently.

  Moreover, in embodiment described so far, you may be comprised so that both the above-mentioned probability change operation | movement area | region and the continuation area | region mentioned above may be provided. In this case, the attacker (first attacker) that does not have the probability variation operation region may have a continuation region, or the attacker (second attacker) that has the probability variation operation region may have the continuation region. Good.

  When the attacker (first attacker) that does not have the probability variation operation region is configured to have the continuation region, the attacker (second attacker) that has the probability variation operation region may be opened in the first round. In this case, for example, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker does not want to pass through the probability variation operation area, the second attacker may be opened short. Further, it may be configured such that an attacker (second attacker) having a probability changing operation area is long opened in a round executed at the end of the big hit game (final round) to make a V prize.

  In addition, when the attacker having the probability changing operation region (second attacker) has the continuation region, the attacker (first attacker) not having the probability changing operation region is opened long in the first round. Also good. In this case, the game ball cannot pass through the probability change operation area in the first round. Further, in a round in which an attacker (second attacker) having a probability variation operation region is opened, the game ball may be allowed to pass through either the probability variation operation region or the continuation region. The game ball may be allowed to pass through only one of the regions, or the game ball may not be allowed to pass through either the probability changing operation region or the continuation region.

  In addition, a continuation effect for notifying that when the continuation area is passed may be executed. In this case, the continuation effect may be executed simultaneously with the above-described effect of winning the V prize. An effect indicating that a V prize has been won may be executed later, or a continuous effect may be executed after an effect indicating that a V prize has been executed. At this time, the above-described over winning effect and the display of the number of winning prize balls may be performed simultaneously.

  In the above description, the second attacker is described as being open short and long. However, the second attacker is long open and the V shutter 2352a is short open and long. The same can be applied to the one to be opened. That is, the operation example of the second attacker can be similarly applied to the V shutter.

In the above description,
“A symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214) capable of at least performing symbol variation display;
Fluctuation time determination means capable of determining at least one fluctuation time from a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, a timer number) (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes special drawing related lottery processing (steps S229 and 231)) When,
Multiple variable time tables;
A game machine equipped with
The variation time is an execution time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a first variable time table (for example, table set 2 or table 2),
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a second variable time table (for example, table set 1 or table 3),
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state),
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in a first period (for example, a period in which 50 symbol variations are performed after the jackpot game is finished),
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in a second period (for example, a period in which 50 symbol variations are performed after the big hit game is finished),
The fluctuating time determining means is configured to determine the first gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability) in the first period (for example, a period in which 50 symbol variations are performed after the big hit game is finished). In the state), the variation time can be determined at least from the first variation time table (for example, table 2),
The fluctuating time determining means is configured to determine the first gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability) in the second period (for example, a period in which 50 symbol fluctuations are performed after the big hit game is finished). In the state), at least the variation time can be determined from the second variation time table (for example, table 3).
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  According to the conventional gaming table, it is difficult to balance the gaming state and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation, and even in the same period in the same gaming state, the player can change to the current situation that he expects. May feel uncomfortable, such as the fluctuation time being too long or too short, or the player may continue to anticipate the wrong situation.

  According to this gaming table, even in the same period in the same gaming state, the table used when determining the variation time may differ depending on other conditions. However, even if the tables are different, the variation time included in the tables is set to the same time or a similar time, so that the player feels uncomfortable with the variation time and the difference in performance contents according to the variation time. Can be made difficult to occur. On the other hand, if the variation time included in the table is varied to such an extent that the difference can be recognized, the player may be made aware of whether or not other conditions are satisfied.

Further, “at least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time (for example, timer number 6),
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time (for example, timer number 8),
The first variation time (for example, timer number 6) is at least included in the first variation time table (for example, table 2),
The first variation time (for example, timer number 6) is at least included in the second variation time table (for example, table 3),
The second variation time (for example, timer number 8) is at least included in the first variation time table (for example, table 2),
The second variation time (for example, timer number 8) is at least not included in the second variation time table (for example, table 3).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state (for example, a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state),
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in a third period (for example, a period in which 100 symbol variations are performed after the big hit game is finished),
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in a fourth period (for example, a period in which a symbol variation of 100 times is performed after the jackpot game ends)
The variation time determining means is configured to determine the second game state (for example, a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability) in the third period (for example, a period in which 100 symbol variations are performed after the big hit game is finished). In the state), the variation time can be determined at least from the first variation time table (for example, table 2),
The variation time determining means is configured to determine the second gaming state (for example, a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability) in the fourth period (for example, a period in which 100 symbol variations are performed after the big hit game is finished). In the state), at least the variation time can be determined from the second variation time table (for example, table 3).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the first gaming state is that the first condition (for example, winning the big win of special figure C or D) is established, then the third condition (for example, the 15th R is awarded to the second attacker) ) Is not established, it is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the first period (for example, a period in which 50 symbol variations are performed after the big hit game ends),
In the first gaming state, after the second condition (for example, winning the big win of special figure A or B) is established, the third condition (for example, winning the second attacker at 15R) If it is not established, the game state is executable at least in the second period (for example, a period in which 50 symbol variations are performed after the big hit game is finished),
The second gaming state (for example, the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) is the third condition after the first condition (for example, winning the special figure C or D jackpot) is established. A game that can be executed at least in the third period (for example, a period in which 100 symbol changes are made after the big hit game is finished) when a win is made in the second attacker on the 15th R, for example. State
In the second gaming state (for example, the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state), the third condition is satisfied after the second condition (for example, winning the special figure A or B is won). A game that can be executed at least in the fourth period (for example, a period in which 100 symbol changes are made after the big hit game is completed) when (for example, winning the second attacker at 15R) is established. State
The first condition is different from the second condition,
The first period is the same period as the second period (for example, a period in which 50 symbol variations are performed after the big hit game is finished),
The third period is the same period as the fourth period (for example, a period in which the symbol variation is performed 100 times after the big hit game is finished).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A determination unit for determining whether or not it is possible to perform at least determination (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes a special drawing related lottery process (steps S229 and 231));
The symbol variation display is capable of at least stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after starting symbol variation,
The symbol variation display is capable of stopping and displaying at least the first symbol aspect (for example, the special symbol C or D) when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit,
The symbol variation display is capable of at least stopping and displaying the second symbol aspect (for example, the special symbol A or B) when the determination result is a big hit,
The second symbol aspect is a symbol aspect that is at least different from the first symbol aspect,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the first symbol form is stopped and displayed (for example, winning the big win of special figure C or D),
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the second symbol form is stopped and displayed (for example, winning a big hit of special figure A or B),
The third condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, winning the second attacker on the 15th R),
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “a winning area (for example, a second variable winning opening) in which a game ball can win at least in a fifth period (for example, a period of a predetermined round and a period of 15 rounds in the embodiment) during execution of the jackpot game. 235 (second attacker)),
The third condition is established when a game ball wins the winning area in the fifth period,
The third condition is not established when the game ball does not win the winning area in the fifth period.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the third condition (for example, winning the second attacker on the 15th R) is the second condition than after the first condition (for example, winning the big win of special figure C or D) is satisfied. This is a condition that is more likely to be satisfied after the condition (for example, winning the second attacker on the 15th R) is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “a symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least a symbol variation;
Storage means (for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300) capable of storing at least the symbol variation time (hereinafter referred to as "variation time") in a plurality of groups;
Fluctuation time determination means for determining one fluctuation time among the fluctuation times stored in the storage means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process (steps S229 and 231));
Control means capable of starting at least one of the plurality of gaming states (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure state updating process (steps S225 and 227));
With
Each of the plurality of groups includes one or a plurality of variable times (for example, a timer number),
At least one group of the plurality of groups is a second group (for example, table set 1),
At least one group of the plurality of groups is a first group (for example, table set 2),
At least one gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state (for example, special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state),
At least one gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state),
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is at least different from the first gaming state,
The second game state is at least when a second condition (for example, winning a big hit of special figure A or B) and a third condition (for example, winning the second attacker at 15R) are satisfied. A game state that can be started,
In the first gaming state, when the second condition is satisfied and the third condition is not satisfied (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a “first special state”). At least a gaming state that can be started,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when a first condition (e.g., winning a big win of special figure C or D) is established,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued for a seventh period (for example, a period in which 100 symbol changes are made after the big hit game is finished),
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued for a sixth period (for example, a period in which 50 symbol variations are made after the big hit game is finished),
The sixth period is at least a part of the seventh period;
The third condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the second condition is established than before the second condition is established,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the second group in the second gaming state (for example, a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state),
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least a variation time from the first group in the first gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) due to the establishment of the first condition. And
The fluctuating time determining means is configured to use the first gaming state (for example, a state where the special attacker A or B is a big hit but the second attacker has not won a prize at 15R) through the first gaming state ( For example, in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), the variation time can be determined at least from the second group,
One or more variation times included in the second group (for example, timer numbers included in the table 3) are included in the variation times included in the first group (for example, timer numbers included in the table 2). The variation time is the same as the variation time of at least a part of
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Here, the variation time determination means can determine at least the variation time from the second group when the second condition is satisfied,
The variation time determining means may be capable of determining at least a variation time from the first group when the first condition is satisfied. That is, the variation time determination means can determine at least the variation time from the second group when the second condition is satisfied regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied. .

  The variation time determination means may be capable of determining at least the variation time from the second group in the first gaming state where the third condition is not satisfied.

  Further, the sixth period may be a period shorter than the seventh period.

In addition, “the first gaming state is the case where the first condition is satisfied and the third condition is not satisfied (for example, the big win of special figure C or D is won and Is a game state that can be started at least,
The second gaming state starts at least when the first condition is satisfied and the third condition is satisfied (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a “second special state”). A possible gaming state,
The third condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the second condition is established than after the first condition is established;
In the second gaming state that has passed through the second special state (for example, the state of winning the second attacker at 15R while being a big hit of special figure C or D), At least the variable time can be determined from the second group;
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Here, “a symbol display means capable of displaying at least a symbol variation,
Storage means capable of storing at least the time of symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as “variation time”) into a plurality of groups;
A variation time determining means for determining one variation time from among the variation times stored in the storage means;
Control means capable of starting at least one of the plurality of gaming states;
With
Each of the plurality of groups includes one or more variable times,
At least one of the plurality of groups is a second group;
At least one of the plurality of groups is a first group;
At least one gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state,
At least one gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is at least different from the first gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the second condition and the third condition are satisfied,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied and the third condition is not satisfied.
The second game state is a game that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied and the third condition is satisfied (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a “special state”). State
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued for a seventh period,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be continued for a sixth period,
The sixth period is at least a part of the seventh period;
The third condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the second condition is established than after the first condition is established;
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the second group in the second gaming state,
The variation time determination means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the second group in the second gaming state via the special state.
The variable time determination means is capable of determining at least a variable time from the first group in the first gaming state,
The one or more variation times included in the second group are the same variation times as the variation times of at least some of the variation times included in the first group.
A game stand characterized by that. It may be.

Further, “a determination unit that can derive at least one determination result among a plurality of types of determination results (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process (steps S229 and 231)); ,
A symbol determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special symbol related lottery process (steps S229 and 231)) capable of determining at least the symbol mode according to the determination result;
With
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least the symbol aspect determined by the symbol determining means after displaying the symbol variation,
One of the plurality of types of success / failure determination results is a jackpot success / failure determination result,
The control means is capable of at least starting a jackpot gaming state after the jackpot symbol form corresponding to the jackpot success / failure determination result is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means.
As the jackpot symbol aspect, a plurality of types of symbol aspects are prepared,
At least one of the plurality of types of symbol aspects is a second symbol aspect (for example, special figure A or B shown in FIG. 5 (a-1)),
At least one of the plurality of types of symbol aspects is a first symbol aspect (for example, special figure C or D shown in FIG. 5 (a-1)),
The second symbol aspect is a symbol aspect different from the first symbol aspect,
The second condition is established as at least one establishment requirement that the symbol determining means determines the second symbol aspect,
The first condition is established as at least one establishment requirement that the symbol determining means determines the first symbol aspect,
The third condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least during the continuation of the jackpot gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The sixth period may be shorter depending on the result of the determination.

In addition, “a winning area (for example, a second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker)) in which winning is allowed only during at least a part of the duration of the jackpot gaming state,
The third condition is established as at least one formation requirement that at least a game ball has won the winning area.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the symbol display means is a plurality of symbol display means,
At least one symbol display means of the plurality of symbol display means is a first symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212),
At least one symbol display means of the plurality of symbol display means is second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214),
The first symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a first symbol variation (for example, the symbol variation of the special symbol 1),
The second symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a second symbol variation (for example, the symbol variation of the special symbol 2),
The second symbol variation is a symbol variation that can be executed in preference to the first symbol variation.
The second gaming state is at least an electric support state,
The second gaming state is at least a probable state,
The first gaming state is at least a power support state,
The first gaming state is at least an uncertain change state,
The seventh period is a period that starts at least after the jackpot gaming state ends,
The sixth period is a period that starts at least after the jackpot gaming state ends.
A game table (for example, the game table of the first embodiment). ”Was also explained.

  Here, the probability variation state may be a state in which the success / failure determination unit is more likely to derive the jackpot determination result than the non-probability variation state.

In addition, it has a variable start area that can change the size of the winning opening between an easy-to-win state in which game balls can be easily won and a difficult-to-win state in which game balls are difficult to win,
The electric support state may be a state in which the variable start area is likely to be in the winning easy state than the non-electric support state.

In addition, “the symbol display means is a plurality of symbol display means,
At least one symbol display means of the plurality of symbol display means is a first symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212),
At least one symbol display means of the plurality of symbol display means is second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214),
The first symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a first symbol variation (for example, the symbol variation of the special symbol 1),
The second symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a second symbol variation (for example, the symbol variation of the special symbol 2),
The second symbol variation is a symbol variation that can be executed in preference to the first symbol variation.
The second gaming state is at least an electric support state,
The second gaming state is at least a probable state,
The first gaming state is at least a non-electric support state,
The first gaming state is at least a probable state,
The seventh period is a period that starts at least after the jackpot gaming state ends,
The sixth period is a period that starts at least after the jackpot gaming state ends.
A game table (for example, a game table according to the third embodiment). ”Was also explained.

In addition, “at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a third gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state),
The third gaming state is at least a non-electric support state,
The third gaming state is at least an uncertain change state,
The control means is capable of at least starting the third gaming state when the seventh period ends,
The control means is capable of at least starting the third gaming state when the sixth period ends,
The variation time determining means can determine at least a variation time from the second group when the third gaming state is started via the second gaming state,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least a variation time from the first group when the third gaming state is started via the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, "game area and
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
With
The gaming area has a first area (for example, a right area),
The gaming area has a second area (for example, a left area),
The electric support state is a state that recommends launching a game ball toward the first area,
The non-electric support state is a state in which it is recommended to launch a game ball toward the second area.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  That is, a first way of firing a game ball toward the first region (for example, right-handed) and a second way of firing a game ball toward the second region (for example, left) It may be a game machine that is prepared.

  The second area may be the entire area of the game area.

In addition, there is provided an effect display means capable of displaying at least the effect,
The effect display means may be arranged between the first area and the second area.

  Furthermore, the winning area may be provided in the first area.

In the above description,
“First effect (for example, an effect of stopping and displaying (decision display) a combination of odd-numbered decorative symbols such as“ decoration 7 ”-“ decoration 7 ”-“ decoration 7 ”) A symbol display device 208);
Control means capable of starting at least one of a plurality of states (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300);
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state and the table set 1 is used),
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (e.g., a special figure high probability common figure high probability state and the table set 1 is used),
The first state is a state that can be started at least when a first condition (for example, winning to the second variable winning opening 235) is not satisfied,
The second state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The second state is a more advantageous state than the first state,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the first performance is performed,
The first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is easily satisfied (for example, an effect shown in FIG. 26 (38)).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the production means.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of further executing effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production.

  The control means may be capable of starting only one of a plurality of states, or may necessarily start one of the plurality of states.

  The first state may be a state that is always started when the first condition is not satisfied, or is a state that is started only when the first condition is not satisfied. Also good. Further, the first state may not be started when the first condition is not satisfied. Furthermore, the first state may be a state that is started when the first condition is not satisfied and another condition is satisfied.

  Further, the second state may be a state that is always started when the first condition is satisfied, or may be a state that is started only when the first condition is satisfied. Further, the second state may not be started when the first condition is satisfied. Furthermore, the second state may be a state started when the first condition is satisfied and another condition is satisfied.

  Further, the first condition may or may not always be satisfied after the first performance is performed.

  In addition, the first effect may be an effect that only suggests that the first condition is easily established, or further includes an effect other than an effect that suggests that the first condition is easily satisfied. It may be.

  The first condition may be a condition that is more likely to be established after the first effect is performed than after the second effect is performed.

  In addition, the first condition may be a condition that is established during the big hit game, or may be a condition that is established outside the big hit game.

Further, “the control means is means capable of starting at least one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure high probability state),
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state (for example, a special figure high probability common figure high probability state),
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state at least included in the first state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state at least included in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the control means may be capable of starting only one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states, or may necessarily start one state among a plurality of gaming states. Good.

  Further, the first gaming state may be a gaming state that includes only the first state, or may be a gaming state that further includes states other than the first state.

  Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state including only the second state, or may be a gaming state further including a state other than the second state.

“The effect means stops and displays a combination of even-numbered decoration symbols such as“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 4 ”shown in FIG. )) Is at least a means that can be executed,
At least one of the plurality of states is a third state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state and a table set 2 is used),
The third state is a disadvantageous state than the second state,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the second performance is performed,
The third state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the second performance is performed,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there is a case where the interest of the game is not impaired even when the irregular second state is started.

  Here, the effect means may execute only the second effect, or may always execute the second effect.

  Further, the first condition may be a condition that is always satisfied after the second performance is performed, or may be a condition that is not necessarily satisfied.

  Further, the third state may be started only when the first condition is not satisfied after the second effect is performed, and after the second effect is performed. It may be always started when the first condition is not satisfied.

  The second effect may be an effect that only suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied, or further includes an effect other than the effect that suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied. It may be.

  The first condition may be a condition that is less likely to be established after the second presentation is performed than after the first presentation is performed.

Further, “at least one of the plurality of states is a fourth state (for example, a special figure high probability common figure high probability state and the table set 2 is used),
The fourth state is an advantageous state over the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state,
The fourth state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the second performance is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where an advantageous state can be expected even when the second performance is performed.

  Here, the fourth state may be started only when the first condition is satisfied after the second performance is performed, and after the second performance is performed, It may be always started when one condition is satisfied.

Further, “a symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;
A variation time determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of determining at least one variation time from among a plurality of variation times;
With
The variation time is an execution time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, 10 seconds, 12 seconds, 30 seconds, 35 seconds, 60 seconds shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, 65 seconds)
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, 10 seconds, 12 seconds, 30 seconds, 35 seconds shown in FIGS. 10 to 12),
The first variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the first gaming state,
The second variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the second gaming state,
The first state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the second variation time,
The second state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the second variation time,
The third state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the first variation time,
The fourth state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the first variation time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a case where a special effect can be performed in a state where irregularity occurs due to the variation time and the gaming state (for example, the first state and the fourth state).

  Here, the symbol display means may execute only symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute symbol variation display.

  The variation time determining means may be capable of determining only one variation time from among a plurality of variation times, or always determining one variation time from among a plurality of variation times. May be.

  Further, the first variation time may be a variation time corresponding only to the first gaming state, or may be a variation time corresponding to a gaming state different from the first gaming state, It may be a variable time that always corresponds to the first gaming state.

  The second variation time may be a variation time corresponding only to the second gaming state, or may be a variation time corresponding to a gaming state different from the second gaming state, It may be a variable time that always corresponds to the second gaming state.

  In addition, the first state may be a state in which the variation time determination means always determines the second variation time.

  Further, the second state may be a state in which the variation time determining means always determines the second variation time.

  Further, the third state may be a state in which the variation time determining means always determines the first variation time.

  Further, the fourth state may be a state in which the variation time determining means always determines the first variation time.

In addition, “including a display means (decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least the decorative symbol variation display,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit, the decoration pattern is displayed in a first combination (for example, a combination of decoration patterns of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”). It is a display that can display at least the symbol,
The variation display of the decorative symbol is a second combination (for example, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) when the result of the determination of success / failure is the jackpot. It is a display that can at least confirm the decorative design,
The first effect is an effect including at least that the second combination is confirmed and displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second effect is an effect including at least the fact that the first combination is fixedly displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second combination is a combination different from the first combination.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be expected to satisfy the first condition at the time of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, it may be possible to display the decorative symbol only in the first combination or the second combination, or when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, The decorative pattern may be definitely displayed in the first combination or the second combination.

  The first effect may be only an effect in which the second combination is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, and an effect other than the effect in which the second combination is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation display is further provided. It may be included.

  The second effect may be only an effect in which the first combination is determined and displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, and an effect other than the effect in which the first combination is determined and displayed in the decorative symbol variation display is further provided. It may be included.

Further, “the control means is a means capable of starting at least a big hit game (for example, a 15R special big hit game (first big hit game) or a 15R big big hit game (second big hit game)),
The first effect (for example, the effect of winning the Janken game shown in FIG. 56 (8)) is an effect that can be started during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, the 15R special jackpot),
The second effect (for example, the effect of defeating the Janken game shown in FIG. 66 (8)) is an effect that can be started during execution of the jackpot game (for example, 15R jackpot),
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied during execution of the jackpot game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the interest of the big hit game may be improved.

  Here, the control means may be a means that can surely start a big hit game.

  In addition, the first effect may be an effect that can be started only during the execution of the jackpot game, or may be an effect that must be started during the execution of the jackpot game.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect that can be started only during the execution of the jackpot game, or may be an effect that is always started during the execution of the jackpot game.

  Further, the first condition may be satisfied only during execution of the big hit game, or may be always satisfied during execution of the big hit game.

In addition, “the first condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the first effect is performed than after the second effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first condition may be a condition that is not satisfied after the second performance is performed.

In addition, “the second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the third state is started,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be an effect that only suggests that the third state is started, or further includes an effect other than the effect that suggests that the third state is started. It may be a thing.

In addition, “the second state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the first performance is performed,
The first state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the first performance is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second state may be a state that can be started only when the first condition is satisfied after the first effect is performed, or after the first effect is performed. It may be in a state that always starts when the first condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the first state may be a state that can be started only when the first condition is not satisfied after the first effect is performed, or after the first effect is performed. In the case where the first condition is not satisfied, the state may always be started.

In addition, “a game area where a game ball can enter at least (for example, the second variable winning opening 235),
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when a game ball enters the entrance area,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where attention can be paid to the movement of the game ball that is determined to satisfy the first condition depending on whether or not the game ball has entered.

  Here, the entrance area may be one in which only a game ball can enter, or one in which a game ball necessarily enters.

  In addition, the first condition may be established only by entering a game ball in the entry area, or it is always established by entering a game ball in the entry area. May be.

  In addition, the entrance area may be an entry area for game balls.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the second state is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect that only suggests that the second state is started, or further includes an effect other than the effect that suggests that the second state is started. It may be a thing.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“At least a first effect (for example, an effect to stop display (determine display) an odd number of combinations of decorative symbols such as“ decoration 5 ”—“ decoration 5 ”—“ decoration 5 ”shown in FIG. 26 (38)). Possible presentation means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208);
Control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least starting the second gaming state (for example, the special figure high probability general figure high probability state);
A game machine equipped with
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when a first condition (for example, winning in the second variable winning opening 235) is established,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the first performance is performed,
The first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is likely to be satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied even when the first performance is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the production means.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of further executing effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production.

  Further, the control means may be capable of starting only the second gaming state, or may necessarily start the second gaming state.

  Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state that can be started only when the first condition is satisfied, or may be a gaming state that always starts when the first condition is satisfied. .

  Further, the first condition may be a condition that is always satisfied after the first performance is performed.

  In addition, the first effect may be an effect that only suggests that the first condition is easily established, or further includes an effect other than an effect that suggests that the first condition is easily satisfied. It may be.

  The first condition may be a condition that is more likely to be established after the first effect is performed than after the second effect is performed.

  In addition, the first condition may be a condition that is established during the big hit game, or may be a condition that is established outside the big hit game.

In addition, “the effect means stops and displays a combination of an even number of decorative symbols such as“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 4 ”shown in FIG. )) Is at least a means that can be executed,
The control means is means capable of at least starting a first gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure high probability state),
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the second performance is performed,
The first condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the first effect is performed than after the second effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention (expectation) to the first performance.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the second effect, or may be capable of further executing effects other than the second effect. Further, the effect means may always execute the second effect.

  Further, the control means may be capable of starting only the first gaming state, or may necessarily start the first gaming state.

  The first gaming state may be a gaming state that can be started only when the first condition is not satisfied, or a gaming state that is always started when the first condition is not satisfied. There may be.

  The second effect may be an effect that only suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied, or further includes an effect other than the effect that suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied. It may be.

  Further, the first condition may be a condition that is satisfied only after the second effect is performed, or may be a condition that is always satisfied after the second effect is performed.

  The first condition may be a condition that is less likely to be established after the second presentation is performed than after the first presentation is performed.

Further, “the control means is a means capable of starting at least a big hit game (for example, a 15R special big hit game (first big hit game) or a 15R big big hit game (second big hit game)),
The first effect is an effect that can be started before the jackpot game (for example, the 15R special jackpot game (first jackpot game)) is started,
The second effect is an effect that can be started before the jackpot game (for example, 15R jackpot game (second jackpot game)) is started,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied during execution of the jackpot game (for example, 15R special jackpot game (first jackpot game) and 15R jackpot game (second jackpot game)),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a case where a gaming state after the end of the big hit game can be expected from the start of the big hit game.

  Here, the control means may be means capable of starting only the big hit game when the big hit start condition is satisfied, or may be means for surely starting the big hit game.

  The first effect may be an effect that starts only before the big hit game is started, or may be an effect that is always started before the big hit game is started.

  Further, the second effect may be an effect that starts only before the big hit game is started, or may be an effect that is always started before the big hit game is started.

  Further, the first condition may be a condition that is satisfied only during execution of the big hit game, or may be a condition that is always satisfied during execution of the big hit game.

In addition, “including a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit, the decorative symbol variation display is a first combination (for example, a combination of an even number of decorative symbols such as “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”). It is a display that can at least confirm the decorative design,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is the jackpot, the decorative symbol variation display is a combination of an odd number of decorative symbols such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”. ) Is a display capable of at least confirming the decorative design,
The first effect is an effect including at least that the second combination is confirmed and displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second effect is an effect including at least the fact that the first combination is fixedly displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second combination is a combination different from the first combination.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be expected to satisfy the first condition at the time of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, it may be possible to display the decorative symbol only in the first combination or the second combination, or when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, The decorative pattern may be definitely displayed in the first combination or the second combination.

  The first effect may be only an effect in which the second combination is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, and an effect other than the effect in which the second combination is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation display is further provided. It may be included.

  The second effect may be only an effect in which the first combination is determined and displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, and an effect other than the effect in which the first combination is determined and displayed in the decorative symbol variation display is further provided. It may be included.

In addition, “the control means is means capable of at least starting a big hit game,
The first effect (for example, the effect of winning the Janken game shown in FIG. 56 (8)) is an effect that can be started during the execution of the jackpot game.
The second effect (for example, the effect of defeating the Janken game shown in FIG. 66 (8)) is an effect that can be started during the execution of the jackpot game.
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied during execution of the jackpot game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it can be described in the effect during the big hit game.

  Here, the control means may be a means capable of starting only the big hit game, or may be a means for surely starting the big hit game.

  In addition, the first effect may be an effect that starts only during execution of the big hit game, or may be an effect that always starts during execution of the big hit game.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect that starts only during the execution of the big hit game, or may be an effect that always starts during the execution of the big hit game.

  Further, the first condition may be a condition that is satisfied only during execution of the big hit game, or may be a condition that is always satisfied during execution of the big hit game.

In addition, “including a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit, the decorative symbol variation display is a first combination (for example, a combination of an even number of decorative symbols such as “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”). It is a display that can at least confirm the decorative design,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is the jackpot, the decorative symbol variation display is a combination of an odd number of decorative symbols such as “decoration 5”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”. ) Is a display capable of at least confirming the decorative design,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a third effect,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a fourth effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started before the jackpot game is started,
The fourth effect is an effect that can be started before the jackpot game is started,
The third effect is an effect including at least that the second combination is fixedly displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The fourth effect is an effect including at least that the first combination is confirmed and displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second combination is a combination different from the first combination,
The first effect is an effect executed after the third effect is performed,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed after the fourth effect is performed,
The second effect is an effect executed after the fourth effect is performed,
The second effect is an effect that is not executed after the third effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when a combination of decorative symbols which are disadvantageous in the decorative symbol display (for example, a combination of an even number of decorative symbols such as “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”) is displayed. Even if it exists, it may be made to expect that the 1st production which is easy to satisfy the 1st condition will be performed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, it may be possible to display the decorative symbol only in the first combination or the second combination, or when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, The decorative pattern may be definitely displayed in the first combination or the second combination.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the third effect, or may necessarily execute the third effect.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the fourth effect, or may necessarily execute the fourth effect.

  In addition, the third effect and the fourth effect may be effects that can be started only before the jackpot game is started, or may be effects that always start before the jackpot game is started. .

  Further, the third effect may be only an effect in which the second combination is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, or an effect other than the effect in which the second combination is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation display. May further be included.

  In addition, the fourth effect may be only an effect in which the first combination is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, and an effect other than the effect in which the first combination is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation display. May further be included.

  Further, the first effect may be always executed after the fourth effect is performed, or may not be executed after the fourth effect is performed.

Further, “a symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;
A variation time determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of determining at least one variation time from among a plurality of variation times;
With
The variation time is an execution time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, 10 seconds, 12 seconds, 30 seconds, 35 seconds, 60 seconds shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, 65 seconds)
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, 10 seconds, 12 seconds, 30 seconds, 35 seconds shown in FIGS. 10 to 12),
The first variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the first gaming state,
The second variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the second gaming state,
The control means is means capable of starting at least one of a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state;
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state;
At least one of the plurality of states is a third state;
At least one of the plurality of states is a fourth state;
The first state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the second variation time,
The second state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the second variation time,
The third state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the first variation time,
The fourth state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the first variation time,
The first state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the first performance is performed,
The second state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the first performance is performed,
The third state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the second performance is performed,
The fourth state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the second performance is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, there may be a case where a special effect can be performed in a state where irregularity occurs due to the variation time and the gaming state (for example, the first state and the fourth state).

  Here, the symbol display means may execute only symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute symbol variation display.

  The variation time determining means may be capable of determining only one variation time from among a plurality of variation times, or always determining one variation time from among a plurality of variation times. May be.

  In addition, the first variation time may be a variation time corresponding only to the first gaming state, or may be a variation time that always corresponds to the first gaming state.

  Further, the second variation time may be a variation time corresponding only to the second gaming state, or may be a variation time corresponding to the second gaming state.

  In addition, the first state may be a state in which the variation time determination means always determines the second variation time.

  Further, the second state may be a state in which the variation time determining means always determines the second variation time.

  Further, the third state may be a state in which the variation time determining means always determines the first variation time.

  Further, the fourth state may be a state in which the variation time determining means always determines the first variation time.

  The first state may be a state that can be started only when the first condition is not satisfied after the first effect is performed, or after the first effect is performed. It may be in a state that is always started when the first condition is not satisfied.

  In addition, the second state may be a state that can be started only when the first condition is satisfied after the first effect is performed, or after the first effect is performed. It may be in a state that is always started when the above condition is satisfied.

  The third state may be a state that can be started only when the first condition is not satisfied after the second effect is performed, or after the second effect is performed. It may be in a state that is always started when the first condition is not satisfied.

  Further, the fourth state may be a state that can be started only when the first condition is satisfied after the second effect is performed, or the first state after the second effect is performed. It may be in a state that is always started when the above condition is satisfied.

  Note that any state of the first state to the fourth state may be a state unrelated to the control state (game state) or may be a state related to the control state.

In addition, “the second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first gaming state is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be an effect that only suggests that the first game state is started, or an effect other than the effect that suggests that the first game state is started. Further, it may be included.

In addition, “the effect means is a means capable of executing at least a fifth effect (for example, an effect as shown in FIG. 31 (7)),
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a sixth effect (for example, an effect as shown in FIG. 27 (44)),
The fifth effect is an effect informing that the first condition is not satisfied,
The sixth effect is an effect informing that the first condition is satisfied,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the gaming state may be easily recognized by the notification effect.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the fifth effect, or may necessarily execute the fifth effect.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the sixth effect, or may necessarily execute the sixth effect.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the sixth effect, or may necessarily execute the sixth effect.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the second gaming state is started,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect that only suggests that the second gaming state is started, or an effect other than the effect that suggests that the second gaming state is started. Further, it may be included.

In addition, “a game area where a game ball can enter at least (for example, the second variable winning opening 235),
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when a game ball enters the entrance area,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the entrance area may be one in which only a game ball can enter, or one in which a game ball necessarily enters.

  In addition, the first condition may be established only by entering a game ball in the entry area, or it is always established by entering a game ball in the entry area. May be.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First effect (for example, the effect of winning the Janken game shown in FIG. 56 (8), or the stop display of a combination of decorative patterns of“ decoration 7 ”-“ decoration 7 ”-“ decoration 7 ”) ) At least capable of performing (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Control means capable of starting at least one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300);
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure high probability state),
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state (for example, a special figure high probability common figure high probability state),
The first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is likely to be satisfied,
The second gaming state is when the first condition (for example, winning to the second variable winning opening 235) is satisfied after the first performance is performed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). Is a gaming state that can be started at least,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the first performance is performed (hereinafter referred to as “second case”). Yes,
The effect means is means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the second gaming state in the first case [for example, an effect corresponding only to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state],
The effect means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the first gaming state in the second case [for example, an effect corresponding only to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the production means.

  Even if irregularities occur, the player may not feel uncomfortable in the performance.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of further executing effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production.

  Further, the control means may be capable of starting only one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states, or may necessarily start one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states. Good.

  In addition, the first effect may be an effect that only suggests that the first condition is easily established, or further includes an effect other than an effect that suggests that the first condition is easily satisfied. It may be.

  In addition, the second gaming state may be a gaming state that can be started only in the first case, or may be a gaming state that can be started even if different from the first case. The gaming state may always be started in the first case.

  Further, the first gaming state may be a gaming state that can be started only in the second case, or may be a gaming state that can be started even if it is different from the second case. The gaming state may always be started in the second case.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the effect corresponding to the second gaming state in the first case, or necessarily executing the effect corresponding to the second gaming state in the first case. You may do.

  The effect means may be capable of executing only the effect corresponding to the first game state in the second case, or necessarily executing the effect corresponding to the first game state in the second case. You may do.

  The first case may be a case where the first condition is satisfied, or may be a case where the first condition is satisfied after the first performance is performed.

  The second case may be a case where the first condition is not satisfied, or a case where the first condition is not satisfied after the first performance is performed. Also good.

  The first condition may be a condition that is more likely to be established after the first effect is performed than after the second effect is performed.

  In addition, the first condition may be a condition that is established during the big hit game, or may be a condition that is established outside the big hit game.

In addition, “the effect means at least displays the second effect (for example, an effect indicating that the game is defeated in the Janken game shown in FIG. 66 (8), or a stop display (decision display) of an even number of decorative symbols). A viable means,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the second performance is performed (hereinafter referred to as “third case”). Yes,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the second presentation is performed (hereinafter referred to as “fourth case”),
The effect means is means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the first gaming state in the third case [for example, an effect corresponding only to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state],
The effect means is means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the second gaming state in the fourth case [for example, an effect corresponding only to a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the production means.

  Even if irregularities occur, the player may not feel uncomfortable in the performance.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the second effect, or may be capable of further executing effects other than the second effect. Further, the effect means may always execute the second effect.

  The second effect may be an effect that only suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied, or further includes an effect other than the effect that suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied. It may be.

  Further, the first gaming state may be a gaming state that can be started only in the third case, or may be a gaming state that is always started in the third case.

  Further, the first gaming state may be a gaming state that can be started only in the fourth case, or may be a gaming state that is always started in the fourth case.

  The effect means may be capable of executing only the effect corresponding to the first gaming state in the third case, or necessarily executing the effect corresponding to the first gaming state in the third case. You may do.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the effect corresponding to the second gaming state in the fourth case, or necessarily executing the effect corresponding to the second gaming state in the fourth case. You may do.

  The third case may be a case where the first condition is not satisfied, or a case where the first condition is not satisfied after the second performance is performed. Also good.

  The fourth case may be a case where the first condition is satisfied, or may be a case where the first condition is satisfied after the second effect is performed.

  The first condition may be a condition that is less likely to be established after the second presentation is performed than after the first presentation is performed.

In addition, “the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied during the execution of the jackpot game,
The first condition is a condition that is more easily established when the first effect is performed than when the second effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention (expectation) to the first performance. In addition, there are cases where the interest of the big hit game can be improved.

  The first condition may be a condition that is not satisfied after the second performance is performed.

In addition, “including a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a decorative symbol variation display,
When the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit, the decorative symbol variation display is a first combination (for example, a combination of an even number of decorative symbols such as “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”). It is a display that can at least confirm the decorative design,
The variation display of the decorative symbol is a second combination (for example, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”) when the result of the determination is a big hit. It is a display that can at least confirm the decorative design,
The first effect is an effect including at least that the second combination is confirmed and displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second effect is an effect including at least the fact that the first combination is fixedly displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second combination is a combination different from the first combination.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be expected to satisfy the first condition at the time of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, it may be possible to display the decorative symbol only in the first combination or the second combination, or when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, The decorative pattern may be definitely displayed in the first combination or the second combination.

  Further, the first effect may be only an effect in which the second combination is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, and an effect other than the effect in which the second combination is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation display. May further be included.

  In addition, the second effect may be only an effect in which the first combination is confirmed and displayed in the decorative symbol variation display, and an effect other than the effect in which the first combination is confirmed and displayed in the decoration symbol variation display. May further be included.

In addition, “the second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first gaming state is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be an effect that only suggests that the first game state is started, or an effect other than the effect that suggests that the first game state is started. Further, it may be included.

In addition, “with a symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214) capable of at least performing symbol variation display,
The control means is means capable of determining at least one variation time from a plurality of variation times,
The variation time is an execution time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, 10 seconds, 12 seconds, 30 seconds, 35 seconds, 60 seconds shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, 65 seconds)
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, 10 seconds, 12 seconds, 30 seconds, 35 seconds shown in FIGS. 10 to 12),
The first variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the first gaming state,
The second variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even when the gaming state is irregular, there may be no sense of incongruity in the execution time of the symbol variation display. In particular, it may be advantageous when, for example, the presence / absence of electric support is included in the difference between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  Here, the symbol display means may execute only symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute symbol variation display.

  Further, only one variation time may be determined from among a plurality of variation times, or one variation time may be necessarily determined from among a plurality of variation times.

  In addition, the first variation time may be a variation time corresponding only to the first gaming state, or may be a variation time that always corresponds to the first gaming state.

  Further, the second variation time may be a variation time corresponding only to the second gaming state, or may be a variation time corresponding to the second gaming state.

In addition, “the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, "We have notice means that can execute at least multiple kinds of notices,
At least one of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice (for example, notice R shown in FIGS. 48 to 49, icon of old man shown in FIG. 71),
At least one of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice (for example, notice S shown in FIGS. 48 to 49, an icon of a dress leader who has broken clothes shown in FIG. 71)
The second notice is a notice different from the first notice,
The first notice is a notice that may be executed in the first gaming state,
The first notice is a notice that is not executed in the second gaming state,
The second notice is a notice that may be executed in the second gaming state,
The second notice is a notice that is not executed in the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the game in each game state can be boosted by a notice corresponding to the game state.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only one notice of a plurality of kinds of notices or may necessarily execute one notice of a plurality of kinds of notices. .

  Further, the first notice may be executed only in the first gaming state, may be executed in the first gaming state, or in the first gaming state. It may not be executed.

  Also, the second notice may be executed only in the second gaming state, may be executed in the second gaming state, or in the second gaming state. It may not be executed.

In addition, “The first notice is a look-ahead notice with a hold icon,
The second notice is a look-ahead notice with a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the second gaming state is started,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect that only suggests that the second gaming state is started, or an effect other than the effect that suggests that the second gaming state is started. Further, it may be included.

In addition, “We have at least a game area where game balls can enter,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when a game ball enters the entrance area,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the entrance area may be one in which only a game ball can enter, or one in which a game ball necessarily enters.

  In addition, the first condition may be established only by entering a game ball in the entry area, or it is always established by entering a game ball in the entry area. May be.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Directing means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a plurality of types of effects;
Control means capable of starting at least one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300);
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure high probability state),
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state (for example, a special figure high probability common figure high probability state),
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when a first condition (for example, end of jackpot game after satisfying the first requirement) is satisfied,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when a second condition (e.g., end of jackpot game after satisfying the second requirement) is satisfied,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied including at least the first requirement (for example, the game ball has not passed to the V pass switch SW2 in the V pass effective period),
The second condition is satisfied at least including the second requirement (for example, in a jackpot game that is not scheduled to acquire probability variation, the game ball has passed to the V pass switch SW2 during the V pass effective period). Is a condition to
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, “search mode entry” indicating the transition to the electric support state shown in FIG. 85 (n)),
The first effect is an effect that may be executed after satisfying the first requirement (for example, as shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. 86, the V pass switch SW2 is switched to the V pass effective period as shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. 86). If there is no passing game ball, the effect executed at the end effect of the jackpot game),
The first effect is an effect that may be executed after the second requirement is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 85, in a big hit game in which a probability variation is not scheduled to be acquired, V passing is effective. When the game ball passes to the V passing switch SW2 during the period, the effect executed in the end effect of the big hit game)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the production means.

  Also, for example, in a jackpot game that is not scheduled to acquire a probability change, if an illegal act such as passing a V through maintenance to acquire a probability change is performed, it is assumed that the person who made the fraudulent said the act was unsuccessful. In some cases, fraudulent acts can be suppressed and attracted, which can prevent the disadvantage of the amusement store.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only one effect among a plurality of types of effects, or may necessarily execute one effect among a plurality of types of effects. .

  Further, the control means may be capable of starting only one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states, or may necessarily start one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states. Good.

  In addition, the first gaming state may be a gaming state that can be started only when the first condition is satisfied, or a gaming state that can be started even when different from the first condition. Alternatively, it may be a gaming state that is always started when the first condition is satisfied.

  Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state that can be started only when the second condition is satisfied, or a gaming state that can be started even when different from the second condition. It may be a gaming state that is always started when the second condition is satisfied.

  Further, the first condition may be a condition that is established only by the first requirement, or may be a condition that is established by the first requirement and one or more other requirements.

  Further, the second condition may be a condition that is satisfied only by the second requirement, or may be a condition that is satisfied by the second requirement and one or more other requirements.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may necessarily execute the first effect.

  In addition, the first performance may be always executed after satisfying the first requirement, or may not be executed after satisfying the first requirement.

  In addition, the first performance may be always executed after satisfying the second requirement, or may not be executed after satisfying the second requirement.

In addition, “a first area where game balls can enter at least (for example, V passage 2340 g),
Detection means (for example, V passing switch SW2) capable of at least detecting that a game ball has entered the first area;
With
The second requirement is that a second round (for example, 16 rounds) in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened for at least the first detection period (for example, the first opening time (for example, 0.1 second)). It is detected that a game ball has entered the first area during the V pass effective period (for example, 0.1 second longer than the first opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)) in the round) It is a requirement,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first region may be one in which only a game ball can enter, or one in which a game ball can surely enter.

  Further, the detection means may be able to detect only that a game ball has entered the first area, or may necessarily detect that a game ball has entered the first area.

Further, “the control means is a means capable of starting at least one big hit gaming state among a plurality of types of big hit gaming states,
At least one of the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states is a first jackpot gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state started as a 16R jackpot),
At least one of the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states is a second jackpot gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state started as a 16R special jackpot),
The second jackpot gaming state is a jackpot gaming state in which the second gaming state is easier to start than the first jackpot gaming state,
The second requirement is a requirement that may be satisfied at least in the first jackpot gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the control means may be capable of starting only one jackpot gaming state among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, or necessarily starting one jackpot gaming state among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states. You may do.

  The second jackpot gaming state may be a jackpot gaming state in which the second gaming state is always started, and the first jackpot gaming state is a jackpot gaming state in which the second gaming state is not necessarily started. There may be.

  Further, the second requirement may be a condition that is established only in the first jackpot gaming state, a condition that is established in a jackpot gaming state other than the first jackpot gaming state, It may be a condition that is always satisfied in the big hit gaming state.

In addition, the first variable winning means (for example, the second variable winning opening 235a shown in FIG. 74) is provided.
The first variable winning means can be changed at least from one of a first state (for example, a closed state) and a second state (for example, an open state) in the first jackpot gaming state. Means,
The first variable winning means is means capable of changing at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other in the second jackpot gaming state,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the first variable winning means than the first state,
The first area is an area in which a game ball that has entered at least the first variable winning means can enter,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in the first jackpot gaming state, the first variable winning means may always change from one of the first state and the second state to the other. In the gaming state, any one of the first state and the second state may be changed from one to the other. Further, the first variable winning means may be any one of the first state and the second state in a gaming state (for example, a small winning game state) other than the first jackpot gaming state and the second jackpot gaming state. It may be possible to change from one to the other.

  Further, the first area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can enter, or a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means may not enter. Alternatively, it may be an area where game balls that have entered the first variable winning means enter.

In addition, “the first variable winning means has at least the second state in the first period (for example, first opening time (for example, 0.1 second)) in the first jackpot gaming state. Means that
The first detection period is a period at least partially overlapping the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first variable winning means may be in a second state in a period other than the first period in the first jackpot gaming state, or in the first jackpot gaming state, It may be in the second state only in one period, or in the first jackpot gaming state, it may be in the second state without fail in the first period.

  Further, the first detection period may be the same period as the first period, may be a period longer than the first period, or may be a period shorter than the first period. Good. Further, the first detection period may be a period that entirely overlaps the first period, or may be a period that coincides with the first period. Further, the first period may be a period that overlaps with the first detection period.

Further, “the first variable winning means is in the second jackpot gaming state, a second period (for example, a second opening time (for example, 29.0 seconds)) that is at least longer than the first period. ) At least in the second state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first variable winning means may be in the second state in a period other than the second period in the second jackpot gaming state, or in the second jackpot gaming state, It may be in the second state only in the second period, or in the second jackpot gaming state, it may be in the second state without fail in the second period.

Further, “equipped with variable pitching means (for example, V shutter 2352a) that can be changed to a plurality of states,
The variable pitching means is a means that can be changed at least from one of a third state (for example, a closed state) and a fourth state (for example, an open state) to the other,
The fourth state is a state in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means is more likely to enter the first region than the third state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the variable pitching means may be changed only from one of the third state and the fourth state to the other, or one of the third state and the fourth state. It may be changed from one to the other.

In addition, “a second variable winning means (for example, a first variable winning opening 234a) is provided,
The second variable winning means can be changed at least from one of a fifth state (for example, a closed state) and a sixth state (for example, an open state) in the first jackpot gaming state. Means,
The second variable winning means is means capable of changing at least from one of the fifth state and the sixth state to the other in the second jackpot gaming state,
The sixth state is a state in which a game ball is easier to enter the second variable winning means than the fifth state,
The first variable winning means is means for entering the second state at least in the first round (for example, the 16th round) in the first jackpot gaming state,
The second variable winning means is means for entering the sixth state in at least the second round (for example, the first round to the 15th round) in the first jackpot gaming state,
The second round is a round different from the first round,
The first variable winning means is means for entering the second state at least in the first round in the second jackpot gaming state,
The second variable winning means is means for entering the sixth state at least in the second round in the second jackpot gaming state,
The first area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means cannot enter at least.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second variable winning means may be one that must be changed from one of the fifth state and the sixth state to the other in the first jackpot gaming state. In the gaming state, any one of the fifth state and the sixth state may be changed from one to the other. The second variable winning means may be any one of a fifth state and a sixth state in a gaming state other than the first jackpot gaming state and the second jackpot gaming state (for example, a small winning game state). It may be possible to change from one to the other.

  Further, the first variable winning means may be a second winning state other than the first round (for example, the second round) in the first jackpot gaming state. In the big hit gaming state, it may be the second state only in the first round, or in the first big hit gaming state, the second state will always be in the first round. Also good.

  Further, the second variable winning means may be a sixth winning state in a round other than the second round (for example, the first round) in the first jackpot gaming state. In the big hit game state, it may be the sixth state only in the second round, or in the first big hit game state, it must be the sixth state in the second round. Also good.

  Further, the first variable winning means may be in a second state in a round other than the first round (for example, the second round) in the second jackpot gaming state, In the big hit game state, it may be the second state only in the first round, or in the second big hit game state, it must be in the second state without fail. Also good.

  In addition, the second variable winning means may be a sixth state in a round other than the second round (for example, the first round) in the second jackpot gaming state, In the big hit game state, it may be the sixth state only in the second round, or in the second big hit game state, it must be the sixth state in the second round. Also good.

  In addition, the first area may be an area where a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means cannot enter, or only a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means cannot enter. It may be a region.

In addition, “including a symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of symbols,
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is a first symbol (for example, “Special B” or “Special D” shown in FIG. 77 (a-1)),
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is a second symbol (for example, “Special A” or “Special C” shown in FIG. 77 (a-1)),
The control means is means capable of at least starting the first jackpot gaming state when the first symbol is displayed;
The control means is means capable of at least starting the second jackpot gaming state when the second symbol is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may always display a plurality of types of symbols, or may display only a plurality of types of symbols.

  Further, the control means may be able to start the first jackpot gaming state only when the first symbol is displayed, or when the symbol other than the first symbol is displayed. The big hit gaming state may be able to be started, or when the first symbol is displayed, the first big hit gaming state may be surely started.

  In addition, the control means may be able to start the second jackpot gaming state only when the second symbol is displayed, or when the symbol other than the second symbol is displayed. The big hit game state may be able to be started, or when the second symbol is displayed, the second big hit game state may be surely started.

Also, “equipped with a variation time determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of determining at least one variation time from among a plurality of variation times,
The symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least symbol variation display,
The variation time is a time for executing the symbol variation display.
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, 10 seconds, 12 seconds, 30 seconds, 35 seconds, 60 seconds shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, 65 seconds)
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, 10 seconds, 12 seconds, 30 seconds, 35 seconds shown in FIGS. 10 to 12),
The first variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the first gaming state,
The second variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the second gaming state,
The variation time determination means is a means capable of determining the first variation time in the second gaming state started when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the variation time determining means may be capable of determining only one variation time from among a plurality of variation times, or always determining one variation time from among a plurality of variation times. There may be.

  Further, the symbol display means may execute only symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute symbol variation display.

  The first variation time may be a variation time corresponding only to the first gaming state, or may be a variation time corresponding to a gaming state different from the first gaming state, It may be a variable time that always corresponds to the first gaming state.

  Further, the second variation time may be a variation time corresponding only to the second gaming state, or may be a variation time corresponding to a gaming state different from the second gaming state, It may be a variable time that always corresponds to the second gaming state.

  Further, the variation time determining means may be capable of determining the first variation time only in the second gaming state started when the second condition is satisfied, or the second condition is satisfied. The first variation time may always be determined in the second gaming state started in this manner. The variation time determining means may be capable of determining the first variation time even in a game state different from the second game state started when the second condition is satisfied, In the second gaming state started when the above condition is satisfied, a variation time different from the first variation time may be determined.

In addition, “the first requirement is a requirement that a game ball has not entered the first region.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first requirement is a requirement that it was not detected that a game ball entered the first region at least during the first detection period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first requirement may be satisfied even when it is not detected that a game ball has entered the first area during a period different from the first detection period. It may be established only when it is not detected that a game ball has entered the first area during the first detection period, or a game ball has entered the first area during the first detection period. It may always be established when no is detected.

In addition, “the first requirement is at least a second detection period (for example, a V passing effective period set corresponding to the opening time of the V shutter 2352a in the 16R special big hit shown in FIG. 79B) It is a requirement that it was not detected that a game ball entered the first area,
The second detection period is a period that is at least longer than the first detection period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first requirement may be satisfied even when it is not detected that a game ball has entered the first area in a period different from the second detection period. It may be established only when it is not detected that the game ball has entered the first area during the detection period, or the game ball has entered the first area during the second detection period. It may always be established when no is detected.

  Further, the second detection period may be a period that is necessarily longer than the first detection period.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first gaming state is started,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect that only suggests that the first gaming state is started, or an effect other than the effect that suggests that the first gaming state is started. Further, it may be included.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“At least a first area where a game ball can enter (for example, V passage 2340 g),
Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state (for example, short-time gaming state: special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state),
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state (for example, probability variation gaming state: special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state),
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is started when a first condition (for example, an end of jackpot game after satisfying the first requirement) is established,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is started when a second condition (for example, an end of jackpot game after satisfying the second requirement) is established,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The establishment requirement of the first condition is a requirement including at least the first requirement (for example, the game ball did not pass to the V pass switch SW2 in the V pass effective period),
The requirement for establishment of the second condition is at least the second requirement (for example, in a big hit game that is not scheduled to acquire probability variation, the game ball passed to the V pass switch SW2 during the V pass effective period). Including requirements,
The second requirement is a requirement that a game ball enters the first region in a first region effective state (for example, a state in which the passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 is treated as valid). And
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, “search mode entry” indicating the transition to the electric support state shown in FIG. 85 (n)),
The first effect is an effect that is executed after the first requirement is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 83 and 86, the passing of the game ball to the V pass switch SW2 during the V pass effective period). If there is no, the effect that is executed in the end effect of the jackpot game)
The first effect may be executed after the second requirement is satisfied (for example, in the big hit game in which the probability variation is not scheduled to be acquired as shown in FIG. 85, the V passing effective period) When the game ball passes to the V pass switch SW2, the effect is executed in the end effect of the big hit game).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the production means.

  In addition, for example, in a big hit game that is not scheduled to acquire a probability change, if an illegal act such as passing a V by a goto action etc. to acquire a probability change is performed, the person who made the fraud that the act ended in failure In some cases, fraudulent behavior can be suppressed and attracted, which can prevent the disadvantage of the amusement store.

  Here, the first region may be one in which only a game ball can enter, or one in which a game ball can surely enter.

  In addition, the effect means may be capable of executing only one effect among a plurality of types of effects, or may always execute one effect among a plurality of types of effects.

  In addition, the first gaming state may be a gaming state that is started only when the first condition is satisfied, or when a condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The game state may be started, or may be the game state that is always started when the first condition is satisfied. Further, the first gaming state may be a gaming state that does not start when the second condition is satisfied, or a gaming state that does not necessarily start when the second condition is satisfied. It may be a gaming state that does not start only when the second condition is satisfied.

  Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state that is started only when the second condition is satisfied, or when a condition different from the second condition is satisfied. May be started, or may be a game state that is always started when the second condition is satisfied. Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state that does not start when the first condition is satisfied, or a gaming state that does not necessarily start when the first condition is satisfied. It may be a gaming state that does not start only when the first condition is met.

  Further, the first condition may be a condition that is established only by the first requirement, or may be a condition that is established by the first requirement and one or more other requirements. Further, the requirement for establishing the first condition may be a requirement not including the second requirement.

  Further, the second condition may be a condition that is satisfied only by the second requirement, or may be a condition that is satisfied by the second requirement and one or more other requirements. In addition, the requirement for establishing the second condition may be a requirement that does not include the first requirement.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may necessarily execute the first effect.

  In addition, the first performance may be executed after the first requirement is satisfied, or may not be executed after the first requirement is satisfied.

  In addition, the first performance may be always executed after the second requirement is satisfied, or may not be executed after the second requirement is satisfied.

In addition, “the first requirement is a requirement that a game ball does not enter the first region in the first region effective state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first requirement may be a requirement that is satisfied even when a game ball does not enter the first region in a state different from the first region effective state, or the first region effective It may be established only when the game ball does not enter the first area in the state, or it must be established if the game ball does not enter the first area in the first area valid state. You may do.

In addition, “at least one of the plurality of gaming states is a third gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state started as a 16R jackpot),
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a fourth gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state started as a 16R special big hit),
The first gaming state is a short-time gaming state,
The second gaming state is a probability variation gaming state,
The third gaming state is a jackpot gaming state,
The fourth gaming state is the jackpot gaming state,
The first requirement is a requirement that may be satisfied in the third gaming state,
The first requirement is a requirement that may be satisfied in the fourth gaming state,
The second requirement is a requirement that may be satisfied in the third gaming state,
The second requirement is a requirement that may be satisfied in the fourth gaming state,
The fourth gaming state is a gaming state in which the second requirement is more easily satisfied than the third gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth gaming state may be a gaming state in which the second requirement is always satisfied, and the third gaming state may be a gaming state in which the second requirement is not necessarily satisfied. The fourth gaming state may be a gaming state in which the first requirement is less likely to be satisfied than in the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state is a gaming state in which the first requirement is not necessarily satisfied. There may be.

In addition, “the period of the first area valid state in the third gaming state is set corresponding to the opening time of the V shutter 2352a in the first period (for example, 16R big hit shown in FIG. 79A). V pass effective period)
The period of the first area valid state in the fourth gaming state is a second period (for example, V set to correspond to the opening time of the V shutter 2352a in the 16R special big hit shown in FIG. 79B). Pass validity period),
The second period is a period longer than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second period may be a period that is necessarily longer than the first period.

In addition, “at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an indication of“ Yoshimune mode entry ”indicating the transition to the probability change state shown in FIG. 82 (n)),
The second effect is an effect that may be executed after the second requirement is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the second effect, or may necessarily execute the second effect.

  In addition, the second performance may be executed only after the second requirement is satisfied, may be executed after the second requirement is satisfied, or the second requirement is satisfied. It may not be executed later.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect that is executed after the second requirement is satisfied in the third gaming state (for example, a big hit that is not scheduled to be acquired as shown in FIG. 85). In the game, when the game ball passes to the V pass switch SW2 in the V pass effective period, the effect is executed in the end effect of the big hit game)
The second effect is an effect that is executed after the second requirement is satisfied in the fourth game state (for example, in a jackpot game where a probable change is scheduled, as shown in FIG. 82, When the game ball passes to the V pass switch SW2 during the V pass effective period, the effect is executed in the end effect of the big hit game).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect that is always executed after the second requirement is satisfied in the third gaming state, or the second requirement is satisfied in the third gaming state. It may be an effect that is executed only later.

  Further, the second effect may be an effect that is always executed after the second requirement is satisfied in the fourth gaming state, or after the second requirement is satisfied in the fourth gaming state. It may be an effect that is executed only.

In addition, “first control means (for example, main control unit 300);
Second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500);
With
The first control means is a control means capable of starting at least one gaming state of the plurality of gaming states,
The second control means is a control means capable of executing at least an effect according to a command from the first control means,
The second control means is a control means capable of executing at least control of the effect means according to the command.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first control means may be capable of starting only one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states, or necessarily starting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states. It may be.

  Further, the second control means may be capable of executing only an effect according to the command from the first control means, or necessarily executes an effect according to the command from the first control means. It may be a thing.

  Further, the second control means may be capable of executing only the control of the rendering means in response to the command, or may necessarily execute the control of the rendering means in response to the command. .

In addition, the second control means may be configured to receive a first effect condition (for example, in a jackpot game that is not scheduled to acquire a probability change, in a jackpot game that is scheduled to acquire a probability change, If the game ball does not pass to the V pass switch SW2 during the V pass effective period and the end effect start command is received), the effect means is caused to execute the first effect. Control means for executing the control,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second control means may execute at least control for causing the effect means to execute the first effect only when the first effect condition is satisfied. When the production condition is satisfied, the control unit may be able to execute only the control for causing the production unit to execute the first production, or when the first production condition is established, You may perform at least control which performs a 1st production. Further, the second control means may be capable of executing control for causing the effect means to execute the first effect only when the first effect condition is satisfied, Only when the condition is satisfied, only the control for causing the effecting means to execute the first effect may be executed.

In addition, “the requirement for establishment of the first performance condition does not include that the second requirement is satisfied,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, "we have a plurality of control boards,
At least one of the plurality of control boards is a first control board (for example, the main board 156),
At least one of the plurality of control boards is a second control board (for example, the first sub board 160 and the second sub board 164),
The first control means is a control means configured to include at least the first control board,
The second control means is a control means configured to include at least the second control board.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first control means may be constituted only by the first control board.

  Further, the second control means may be configured only by the second control board.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect that may be executed after it is determined whether or not the second requirement is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect that is always executed after it is determined whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, and it is determined whether or not the second requirement is satisfied. It may also be an effect that may not be performed after.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect that may be executed after a requirement that a game ball enters the first region in the first region effective state is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Second variable winning means (for example, second variable winning opening 235a);
A second area (for example, a V passage 2340g) into which at least a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter;
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area, a second gaming state (for example, a probability variation state: a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) is configured to be started,
A part of the second jackpot game (for example, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 3” shown in FIG. 114A) (hereinafter referred to as “first period (for example, shown in FIG. 114)”). Thus, “the second variable prize winning opening 235a is in an open state at the 14th round in the jackpot game that is started when“ symbol 3 ”is displayed”))). Is the period of time
A part of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 114,“ symbol 3 ”as shown in FIG. 114, the second variable at the 15th round in the jackpot game started). The period during which the winning opening 235a is in the closed state) ”) is a period during which the second variable winning means is in the first state.
A part of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “third period (for example, as shown in FIG. 114, as shown in FIG. 114, the second variable is set in the 16th round in the jackpot game started by displaying“ symbol 3 ”). The period during which the winning opening 235a is in the open state) is a period during which the second variable winning means is in the second state.
The first state is a state where a game ball cannot enter (for example, a closed state),
The second state is a state where a game ball can enter (for example, an open state),
The second period is a period starting after the first period;
The third period is a period starting after the second period;
The third period is a period longer than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the big hit game. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the big hit game.

  In addition, for example, when a ball clogging occurs in the second variable winning means in the first period and the second area cannot be passed, until the second variable winning means is released in the third period. In some cases, it may be possible to secure time for calling up the store clerk to clear the clogging.

  In addition, in the first period, it was unfortunate that it was difficult to enter the second variable winning means, and in the third period, the second variable winning means was entered. By making the game easier, it is possible to give a sense of security that the second gaming state is started and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, it is difficult to understand when the round for passing the second area, which is a condition for starting the second gaming state by setting the second variable winning means to the second state in a short period of time. In some cases, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by giving a sense of expectation for a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state for a long period of time.

  Here, the second area may be an area in which only a game ball entered in the second variable winning means can enter, or there may be an area that can enter in addition to the game ball, It may be an area where a game ball always enters, or a game ball may not be able to enter.

  Further, only the second game state may be configured to be executable, or a game state (for example, the first game state) different from the second game state may be configured to be executable. In addition, the second gaming state may be always executed, or the second gaming state may not be executed.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second area, the second gaming state may be necessarily started, or the second gaming state may not be started. Also good.

  Further, only the second jackpot game may be configured to be executable, or a jackpot game other than the second jackpot game (for example, the first jackpot game or the third jackpot game) can be performed. The second jackpot game may be executed without fail, or the second jackpot game may not be executed.

  The period in the second jackpot game may include a period other than the first period. Further, the first period includes a case where the second variable winning means does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the second state changes from the first state to the second state.

  In addition, the period in the second jackpot game may include a period other than the second period. In addition, the second period includes a case where the second variable winning means does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the second state changes from the second state to the first state.

  The second period may include a period in which the second variable winning means is in the first state in one round, or the second variable winning means is in the first state between rounds. Period may be included.

  In addition, the period in the second jackpot game may include a period other than the third period. Further, the third period includes a case where the second variable winning means does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the second state changes from the first state to the second state.

  Further, the first state may be a state in which only a game ball cannot enter, or there may be a game ball other than a game ball that cannot enter.

  In addition, the second state may be a state where only a game ball can be entered, or there may be a game ball that can be entered in addition to a game ball, or a game ball must be entered. There may be a state in which a game ball may not be entered.

  In addition, the second period may be started continuously after the first period, or after the first period, a period different from the first period may be started before the second period. .

  In addition, the third period may be started continuously from the second period, or after the second period, a period different from the second period may be started before the third period. .

  In addition, the third period may be necessarily longer than the first period, or the third period may be the same length as the first period. The period may be a period shorter than the first period.

In addition, “when the game ball does not enter the second area, the first game state (eg, electric support state: special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) can be started,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the first gaming state may be configured to be executable, a gaming state different from the first gaming state may be configured to be executable, or the first gaming state is It may be configured to always be executed.

  In addition, when the game ball does not enter the second area, only the first game state may be started, or a game state other than the first game state may be started. The first gaming state may be always started, or the first gaming state may not be started.

  In addition, the first gaming state may be any gaming state, for example, a probability change state without electric support (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure). It may be a low probability normal figure high probability state) or a non-electric support state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). That is, the first gaming state is applicable to any gaming state as long as the gaming state is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-probable change state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state),
The second gaming state is a probability change state (for example, a special figure high probability common figure high probability state),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first gaming state is an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), but a non-electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure low probability state) Also good.

  Here, the second gaming state may be an electric support state. That is, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state may be used. Further, a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state may be used.

In addition, “the second jackpot game is composed of at least a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds),
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “first round (for example, 14th round)”) is a round including at least the first period;
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “third round (for example, 16th round)”) is a round including at least the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second jackpot game may be executable only in a plurality of rounds, may necessarily execute a plurality of rounds, or may not execute a plurality of rounds. May be.

  Further, the first round may be a round including only the first period, a round including a period other than the first period, or a round including the first period. There may be.

  In addition, the third round may be a round including only the third period, a round including a period other than the third period, or a round always including the third period. There may be.

In addition, the first variable winning means (for example, the first variable winning opening 234a) is provided,
The second period is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “second round (for example, 15th round)”) is a round including at least the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second round may be a round including only the second period, a round including a period other than the second period, or a round always including the second period. It may be.

In addition, “the second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter, or there may be an area that cannot enter other than the game ball. .

In addition, “comprising a first area (for example, a winning count switch SW4) into which at least a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can enter,
When a game ball enters the first area, a prize ball is paid out.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means may enter, or there may be an area that can enter in addition to the game ball, It may be an area where a game ball always enters, or a game ball may not be able to enter.

In addition, “the second round is a round started after the first round,
The third round is a round started after the second round;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second round may be started after the first round, or after the first round, a round different from the first round may be started before the second round. Good.

  Further, the third round may be started after the second round, or after the second round, a round different from the second round may be started before the third round. .

In addition, “when the game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state (for example, the probability variation operation area effective state shown in FIG. 110 (a)), the second big hit game After the end, the second gaming state is configured to start,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second gaming state may be able to be started after the second big hit game is completed only when a game ball enters the second region in the second region effective state. Even if a game ball enters the second area in a state different from the second area effective state, it may be possible to start after the end of the second jackpot game, When a game ball enters the second area in the area effective state, the game may be started after the end of the second big hit game, or the game may enter the second area in the second area effective state. Even when a ball enters, it may not start after the second jackpot game ends.

Further, “the second period is a period longer than the first period,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second period may be necessarily longer than the first period, the second period may be the same length as the first period, There may be a case where the second period is a period shorter than the first period.

In addition, “first symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212) capable of executing the first symbol variation display (for example, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1),
A second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing a second symbol variation display (for example, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2);
With
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, may necessarily execute the first symbol variation display, Display other than the symbol variation display may be executable.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute the second symbol variation display. Display other than the symbol variation display may be executable.

  In addition, the second symbol variation display may always be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display, or may not be performed in preference to the first symbol variation display. Good.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First variable winning means (for example, first variable winning opening 234a);
A second variable winning means (for example, a second variable winning opening 235a) capable of changing at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state;
A second region (eg, V passage 2340 g);
A game machine equipped with
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter at least (for example, a closed state),
The second state is a state where a game ball can enter at least (for example, an open state),
The second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter at least,
The second area is an area where a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter at least,
When a game ball enters the second area during execution of the second jackpot game (for example, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 3” shown in FIG. 114 (a)), After the end of the second big hit game, the second game state (for example, the probability variation state: special figure high probability common figure high probability state) is configured to be able to start at least,
At least a part of the second jackpot game is a period during which the second variable winning means is in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “first period (for example,“ 3 ”is a period in which the second variable winning opening 235a is in an open state in the 14th round in the jackpot game that is started and displayed.
At least a part of the second jackpot game is a period during which the second variable winning means is in the first state (hereinafter referred to as “second period (for example,“ 3 ”is a period in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened and the second variable winning opening 235a is closed in the fifteenth round in the jackpot game starting with“ 3 ”displayed.
At least a part of the period of the second jackpot game is a period during which the second variable winning means is in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “third period (for example,“ 3 ”is a period in which the second variable winning opening 235a is in an open state in the 16th round in the jackpot game that is started and displayed.
The second period is a period starting after the first period;
The third period is a period starting after the second period;
The third period is a period longer than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the big hit game. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the big hit game.

  In addition, for example, when a ball clogging occurs in the second variable winning means in the first period and the second area cannot be passed, until the second variable winning means is released in the third period. In some cases, it may be possible to secure time for calling up the store clerk to clear the clogging.

  In addition, in the first period, it was unfortunate that it was difficult to enter the second variable winning means, and in the third period, the second variable winning means was entered. By making the game easier, it is possible to give a sense of security that the second gaming state is started and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, it is difficult to understand when the round for passing the second area, which is a condition for starting the second gaming state by setting the second variable winning means to the second state in a short period of time. In some cases, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by giving a sense of expectation for a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state for a long period of time.

  Here, the second variable winning means may be changeable from only one of the first state and the second state to the other state, or the first state and the second state. It may be possible to change to a state different from the state of, and even if it always changes from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state Alternatively, there may be a case where the state does not change from one of the first state and the second state to the other state.

  Further, the first state may be a state in which only a game ball cannot enter, or there may be a game ball other than a game ball that cannot enter.

  In addition, the second state may be a state where only a game ball can be entered, or there may be a game ball that can be entered in addition to a game ball, or a game ball must be entered. There may be a state in which a game ball may not be entered.

  In addition, the second area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter, or there may be an area that cannot enter other than the game ball.

  Further, the second area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter, or there may be an area that can enter in addition to the game ball. It may be an area where a ball always enters, or a game ball may not be able to enter.

  The second area may be provided in the second variable winning means, or may not be provided in the second variable winning means.

  Further, only the second jackpot game may be configured to be executable, or a jackpot game other than the second jackpot game (for example, the first jackpot game or the third jackpot game) can be performed. The second jackpot game may be executed without fail, or the second jackpot game may not be executed.

  Further, only the second game state may be configured to be executable, or a game state (for example, the first game state) different from the second game state may be configured to be executable. In addition, the second gaming state may be always executed, or the second gaming state may not be executed.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second area during execution of the second jackpot game, only the second game state may be started after the second jackpot game ends. In addition, a game state other than the second game state may be configured to be able to start, or the second game state may be configured to be surely started, or the second game state is started. The structure which may not be carried out may be sufficient.

  Further, the period in the second jackpot game may be a period consisting only of the first period, may include a period other than the first period, or necessarily includes the first period. It may be a period. Further, the first period includes a case where the second variable winning means does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the second state changes from the first state to the second state.

  In addition, the period in the second jackpot game may be a period consisting only of the second period, may include a period other than the second period, or necessarily includes the second period. It may be a period. In addition, the second period includes a case where the second variable winning means does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the second state changes from the second state to the first state.

  The second period may include a period in which the second variable winning means is in the first state in one round, or the second variable winning means is in the first state between rounds. Period may be included.

  In addition, the period in the second jackpot game may be a period consisting only of the third period, may include a period other than the third period, or necessarily includes the third period. It may be a period. Further, the third period includes a case where the second variable winning means does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the second state changes from the first state to the second state.

  In addition, the second period may be started continuously after the first period, or after the first period, a period different from the first period may be started before the second period. .

  In addition, the third period may be started continuously from the second period, or after the second period, a period different from the second period may be started before the third period. .

  In addition, the third period may be necessarily longer than the first period, or the third period may be the same length as the first period. The period may be a period shorter than the first period.

In addition, “the second jackpot game is a jackpot game that can execute at least a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds),
A first round (for example, the 14th round) of the plurality of rounds is a round including at least the first period;
A third round (for example, the 16th round) of the plurality of rounds is a round including at least the third period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second jackpot game may be executable only in a plurality of rounds, may necessarily execute a plurality of rounds, or may not execute a plurality of rounds. May be.

  Further, the first round may be a round including only the first period, a round including a period other than the first period, or a round including the first period. There may be.

  In addition, the third round may be a round including only the third period, a round including a period other than the third period, or a round always including the third period. There may be.

In addition, “the first variable winning means is variable winning means that can change at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state,
The second period is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
A second round (for example, the 15th round) of the plurality of rounds is a round including at least the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first variable winning means may be changeable only from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state, or the first state and the second state. It may be possible to change to a state different from the state of, and even if it always changes from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state Alternatively, there may be a case where the state does not change from one of the first state and the second state to the other state.

  Further, the second round may be a round including only the second period, a round including a period other than the second period, or a round including the second period. There may be.

In addition, “the second gaming state is a probability variation state (for example, a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second gaming state may be an electric support state. That is, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state may be used. Further, a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state may be used.

In addition, “the second game state is a game ball in the second region in the second region effective state in the second jackpot game (for example, the probability variation operation region effective state shown in FIG. 110 (a)). Is a gaming state that can be started at least when
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second game state may be started only when a game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state in the second jackpot game, It may be possible to start even when a game ball enters the second area in a state different from the second area effective state in the big hit game, or the second area effective in the second big hit game It may be started when a game ball enters the second area in the state, or even when a game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state in the second jackpot game It may be something that may not start.

Further, “the second period is a period longer than the first period,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second period may be necessarily longer than the first period, the second period may be the same length as the first period, There may be a case where the second period is a period shorter than the first period.

In addition, when a game ball does not enter the second area during execution of the second jackpot game, the first game state (for example, electric support state: special figure low probability normal figure high probability state ) Is configured to start at least,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the first gaming state may be configured to be executable, a gaming state different from the first gaming state may be configured to be executable, or the first gaming state is It may be configured to always be executed.

  In addition, if a game ball does not enter the second area during execution of the second jackpot game, only the first game state can be started after the end of the second jackpot game. Alternatively, a gaming state other than the first gaming state may be configured to be able to start, or the first gaming state may be configured to be started without fail, or the first gaming state may be configured. The configuration may not be started.

  In addition, the first gaming state may be any gaming state, for example, a probability change state without electric support (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure). It may be a low probability normal figure high probability state) or a non-electric support state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). That is, the first gaming state is applicable to any gaming state as long as the gaming state is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-probable change state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first gaming state is an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), but a non-electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure low probability state) Also good.

Further, “first symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least the first symbol variation display (for example, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1),
A second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display (for example, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2);
With
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the second jackpot game is more easily started than the second symbol variation display (for example, “symbol 3” in which a jackpot game of substantially 15 rounds is started). May be selected in Special Figure 1 but not in Special Figure 2)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, may necessarily execute the first symbol variation display, Display other than the symbol variation display may be executable.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute the second symbol variation display. Display other than the symbol variation display may be executable.

  In addition, the second symbol variation display may always be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display, or may not be performed in preference to the first symbol variation display. Good.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the control means is capable of at least performing control for suspending the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding condition is established,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control to hold the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is established,
The control means is capable of executing at least control for operating the first symbol display means when the first suspended digestion condition is established,
The control means is capable of executing at least control for operating the second symbol display means when the second suspended digestion condition is established,
The second suspended digestion condition includes at least that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended,
The first reserved digestion condition includes at least that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended and the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First variable winning means (for example, first variable winning opening 234a);
A second variable winning means (for example, a second variable winning opening 235a);
A second area (for example, a V passage 2340g) into which at least a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter;
Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area, a second gaming state (for example, a probability variation state: a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) is configured to be started,
A part of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “fourth period (for example, as shown in FIG. 114,“ symbol 3 ”is displayed and the first to thirteenth rounds in the jackpot game started and displayed). The period during which the first variable prize winning opening 234a is in the open state in the fifteenth round) is a period during which the first variable winning means is in the second state.
A part of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “fifth period (for example, as shown in FIG. 114,“ symbol 3 ”is displayed and the 14th and 16th rounds in the jackpot game are started). The period during which the second variable winning opening 235a is in the open state) ”is a period during which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter,
One of the multiple types of effects (hereinafter referred to as “first effect”) is an effect related to the big hit round (for example, the number of rounds displayed),
The first effect is an effect executed in at least a part of the fourth period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (12) to 121 (21), the first round to the 13th round In the eyes, the number of rounds is displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208),
The first effect is an effect that is not executed in the fifth period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 121 (22) to 121 (26), in the 14th and 16th rounds, the decorative symbol display device The number of rounds displayed in the upper center of 208 is deleted),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by a big hit game.

  In addition, it is difficult to understand the period (round) in which the second variable winning means is in the second state, and the game has an expectation for the period (round) in which the second variable winning means is in the second state. You may be able to improve your interests.

  Further, the second area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter, or there may be an area that can enter in addition to the game ball. It may be an area where a ball always enters, or a game ball may not be able to enter.

  Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of production.

  Further, only the second game state may be configured to be executable, or a game state (for example, the first game state) different from the second game state may be configured to be executable. In addition, the second gaming state may be always executed, or the second gaming state may not be executed.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second area, only the second game state may be started, or a game state other than the second game state may be started. Alternatively, the second gaming state may be surely started, or the second gaming state may not be started.

  Further, only the second jackpot game may be configured to be executable, or a jackpot game other than the second jackpot game (for example, the first jackpot game or the third jackpot game) can be performed. The second jackpot game may be executed without fail, or the second jackpot game may not be executed.

  In addition, the period in the second jackpot game may include a period other than the fourth period. Further, the fourth period includes a case where the first variable winning means does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the first state changes from the first state to the second state.

  Further, the period in the second jackpot game may include a period other than the fifth period. Further, the fifth period includes a case where the second variable winning means does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the second state changes from the first state to the second state.

  In addition, the first performance may be executed only in the fourth period, may be executed in a period other than the fourth period, It may be always executed during the period, or may not be executed during the fourth period. In addition, the first effect may be performed during a part of the fourth period, or may be performed during the entire fourth period. Note that the present invention can also include a case where the start timing of the fourth period and the start timing of the first effect do not necessarily match. For example, there may be a time lag due to command transmission / reception or command analysis between the timing at which the fourth period starts and the timing at which the first presentation starts, and such cases are also included in the present invention. Is possible.

  Further, the first effect may not be executed only in the fifth period, or may not be executed in a period other than the fifth period.

In addition, “a third jackpot game (for example, a jackpot game started by displaying“ symbol 1 ”shown in FIG. 114 (a)) (hereinafter,“ sixth period (for example, As shown in FIG. 114, “the period during which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened in the 14th and 16th rounds in the jackpot game that is started when“ symbol 1 ”is displayed” is referred to as the above. A period in which the second variable winning means is in the second state;
The first effect is an effect that is executed at least in the sixth period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 119 (24) to 119 (28), in the fourteenth and sixteenth rounds, decorative symbols are used. The number of rounds is displayed at the upper center of the display device 208),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the third jackpot game may be configured to be executable, or a jackpot game different from the third jackpot game (for example, the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game) can be executed. The third jackpot game may be executed without fail, or the third jackpot game may not be executed.

  Further, the period in the third jackpot game may include a period other than the sixth period.

  In addition, the first performance may be executed only in the sixth period, may be executed in a period other than the sixth period, It may be always executed during the period. Note that the present invention can also include a case where the start timing of the sixth period and the start timing of the first effect do not necessarily coincide. For example, there may be a time lag due to command transmission / reception or command analysis between the timing at which the sixth period is started and the timing at which the first presentation is started. Such cases are also included in the present invention. Is possible.

In addition, “when the game ball does not enter the second area, the first game state (eg, electric support state: special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) can be started,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the first gaming state may be configured to be executable, a gaming state different from the first gaming state may be configured to be executable, or the first gaming state is It may be configured to always be executed.

  Further, when the game ball does not enter the second area, only the first game state may be configured to be started, or a game state other than the first game state may be started. The first gaming state may be always started, or the first gaming state may not be started.

  In addition, the first gaming state may be any gaming state, for example, a probability change state without electric support (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure). It may be a low probability normal figure high probability state) or a non-electric support state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). That is, the first gaming state is applicable to any gaming state as long as the gaming state is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-probable change state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state),
The second gaming state is a probability change state (for example, a special figure high probability common figure high probability state),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first gaming state is an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), but a non-electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure low probability state) Also good.

  The second gaming state may be an electric support state or a non-electric support state. That is, it may be a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state.

In addition, “when the game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state (for example, the probability variation operation area effective state shown in FIG. 110 (a)), the second big hit game After the end, the second gaming state is configured to start,
When the game ball has entered the second area in the second area valid state, the second game state is configured to start after the third big hit game ends. A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the fifth period is a period started after the fourth period,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fifth period may be started continuously after the fourth period, or after the fourth period, a period different from the fourth period may be started before the fifth period. Good.

In addition, “partial period in the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as“ seventh period ”(for example, as shown in FIG. 114,“ symbol 3 ”is displayed and displayed in the sixth round in the jackpot game. The period during which the first variable prize winning opening 234a is in the closed state over the seventh round) is a period during which the first variable winning means is in the first state.
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
The first effect is an effect that is not executed in the seventh period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a1) to 129 (a3), the first variable prize is applied from the sixth round to the seventh round. During the period in which the mouth 234a is in the closed state, the round number display displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the period in the second jackpot game may include a period other than the seventh period. Note that the case where the start timing of the seventh period and the end timing of the first effect do not necessarily coincide can be included in the present invention. For example, there may be a time lag due to command transmission / reception or command analysis between the timing at which the seventh period starts and the timing at which the first presentation ends, and such cases are also included in the present invention. Is possible.

  Further, the first state may be a state in which only a game ball cannot enter, or there may be a game ball other than a game ball that cannot enter.

  In addition, the first effect may not be executed only in the seventh period, or may not be executed in a period other than the seventh period.

In addition, “the seventh variable winning opening 234a is in a closed state from the 13th to the 14th round in the jackpot game started with the display of“ symbol 3 ”as shown in FIG. Is a period in which the first variable winning opening 234a is in an open state in the 13th round in the jackpot game started with the display of “symbol 3” as shown in FIG. 114, for example. ) Starting after
The fifth period (for example, as shown in FIG. 114, the period in which the second variable winning opening 235a is in the open state in the 14th round in the jackpot game starting with the display of “symbol 3”) It is a period that starts after the seventh period,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the seventh period may be started consecutively after the fourth period, or after the fourth period, a period different from the fourth period may be started before the seventh period. Good.

  Further, the fifth period may be started continuously after the seventh period, or after the seventh period, a period different from the seventh period may be started before the fifth period. .

In addition, “first symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212) capable of executing the first symbol variation display (for example, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1),
A second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing a second symbol variation display (for example, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2);
With
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, may necessarily execute the first symbol variation display, Display other than the symbol variation display may be executable.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute the second symbol variation display. Display other than the symbol variation display may be executable.

  In addition, the second symbol variation display may always be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display, or may not be performed in preference to the first symbol variation display. Good.

In addition, “the second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter, or there may be an area that cannot enter other than the game ball. .

In addition, “comprising a first area (for example, a winning count switch SW4) into which at least a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can enter,
When a game ball enters the first area, a prize ball is paid out.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means may enter, or there may be an area that can enter in addition to the game ball, It may be an area where a game ball always enters, or a game ball may not be able to enter.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A first variable winning means (for example, a first variable winning opening 234a) capable of changing at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state;
A second variable winning means (for example, a second variable winning opening 235a) capable of changing at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state;
A second region (eg, V passage 2340 g);
Production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter at least (for example, a closed state),
The second state is a state where a game ball can enter at least (for example, an open state),
The second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter at least,
The second area is an area where a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter at least,
When a game ball enters the second area during execution of the second jackpot game (for example, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 3” shown in FIG. 114 (a)), After the end of the second big hit game, the second game state (for example, the probability variation state: special figure high probability common figure high probability state) is configured to be able to start at least,
At least a portion of the second jackpot game is a period during which the first variable winning means is in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “fourth period (for example, as shown in FIG. 3 ”is a period in which the first variable winning opening 234a is in an open state in the first to thirteenth and fifteenth rounds in the jackpot game that is started when“ 3 ”is displayed).
At least a part of the period of the second jackpot game is a period in which the second variable winning means is in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “fifth period (for example, as shown in FIG. 3 ”is a period in which the second variable winning opening 235a is in an open state at the 14th and 16th rounds in the jackpot game that is started and displayed.
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect (for example, round number display),
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the fourth period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (12) to 121 (21), in the first round to the thirteenth round, a decorative symbol is used. The number of rounds is displayed at the upper center of the display device 208),
The first effect is an effect that is not executed at least in the fifth period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 121 (22) to 121 (26), in the 14th and 16th rounds, decorative symbols are displayed. The number of rounds displayed in the upper center of the device 208 is deleted)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by a big hit game.

  In addition, it is difficult to understand the period (round) in which the second variable winning means is in the second state, and the game has an expectation for the period (round) in which the second variable winning means is in the second state. You may be able to improve your interests.

  Here, the first variable winning means may be changeable only from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state, or the first state and the second state. It may be possible to change to a state different from the state of, and even if it always changes from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state Alternatively, there may be a case where the state does not change from one of the first state and the second state to the other state.

  In addition, the second variable winning means may be changeable only from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state, or the first state and the second state. It may be possible to change to a state different from the state, or may always change from one of the first state and the second state to the other state. However, there may be a case where one of the first state and the second state does not change to the other state.

  Further, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may always execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the first state may be a state in which only a game ball cannot enter, or there may be a game ball other than a game ball that cannot enter.

  In addition, the second state may be a state where only a game ball can be entered, or there may be a game ball that can be entered in addition to a game ball, or a game ball must be entered. There may be a state in which a game ball may not be entered.

  In addition, the second area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter, or there may be an area that cannot enter other than the game ball.

  Further, the second area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter, or there may be an area that can enter in addition to the game ball. It may be an area where a ball always enters, or a game ball may not be able to enter.

  Further, only the second jackpot game may be configured to be executable, or a jackpot game other than the second jackpot game (for example, the first jackpot game or the third jackpot game) can be performed. The second jackpot game may be executed without fail, or the second jackpot game may not be executed.

  Further, only the second game state may be configured to be executable, or a game state (for example, the first game state) different from the second game state may be configured to be executable. In addition, the second gaming state may be always executed, or the second gaming state may not be executed.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second area during execution of the second jackpot game, only the second game state may be started after the second jackpot game ends. In addition, a game state other than the second game state may be configured to be able to start, or the second game state may be configured to be surely started, or the second game state is started. The structure which may not be carried out may be sufficient.

  In addition, the period in the second jackpot game may be a period consisting only of the fourth period, may include a period other than the fourth period, or necessarily includes the fourth period. It may be a period. Further, the fourth period includes a case where the first variable winning means does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the first state changes from the first state to the second state.

  In addition, the period in the second jackpot game may be a period consisting only of the fifth period, may include a period other than the fifth period, or necessarily includes the fifth period. It may be a period. Further, the fifth period includes a case where the second variable winning means does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the second state changes from the first state to the second state.

  In addition, the effect means may perform only the first effect, may also perform an effect other than the first effect (for example, the second effect), or the first effect. You may be sure to do.

  The first effect may be executed only in the fourth period, may be executed in a period other than the fourth period, or may be executed in the fourth period. It may be always executed or may not be executed in the fourth period.

  Further, the first effect may not be executed only in the fifth period, or may not be executed in a period other than the fifth period.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second area during the execution of “the third jackpot game (for example, the jackpot game started by displaying“ symbol 1 ”shown in FIG. 114 (a)). , After the third jackpot game is over, the second gaming state is configured to be at least startable,
At least a part of the third jackpot game is a period during which the second variable winning means is at least in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “sixth period (for example, as shown in FIG. 114,“ The period during which the second variable winning opening 235a is in the open state at the 14th and 16th rounds in the jackpot game that is started when the symbol 1 "is displayed".
The first effect is an effect that is executed at least in the sixth period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 119 (24) to 119 (28), in the fourteenth and sixteenth rounds, decorative symbols are used. The number of rounds is displayed at the upper center of the display device 208),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the third jackpot game may be configured to be executable, or a jackpot game different from the third jackpot game (for example, the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game) can be executed. The third jackpot game may be executed without fail, or the third jackpot game may not be executed.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second area during execution of the third jackpot game, only the second game state may be started after the third jackpot game ends. In addition, a game state other than the second game state may be configured to be able to start, or the second game state may be configured to be surely started, or the second game state is started. The structure which may not be carried out may be sufficient.

  In addition, the period of the third jackpot game may consist of only the sixth period, may include a period other than the sixth period, or necessarily includes the sixth period. It may be a period.

  The first performance may be executed only in the sixth period, may be executed in a period other than the sixth period, or may be executed in the sixth period. It may be always executed.

Further, “first symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least the first symbol variation display (for example, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1),
A second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display (for example, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2);
With
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display,
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the third jackpot game is more easily started than the first symbol variation display (for example, “symbol 1” in which a 16-round jackpot game is started is In Fig. 2, when a big hit is selected, it is selected with a probability of 100%, but in Fig. 1, if it is a big hit, it is selected with a probability of less than 100%)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, may necessarily execute the first symbol variation display, Display other than the symbol variation display may be executable.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may necessarily execute the second symbol variation display. Display other than the symbol variation display may be executable.

  In addition, the second symbol variation display may always be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display, or may not be performed in preference to the first symbol variation display. Good.

In addition, “the first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the second jackpot game is more easily started than the second symbol variation display (for example, a substantial 15 round jackpot game is started”. Symbol 3 ”may be selected in Special Figure 1 but not Special Figure 2),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect related to a big hit round (for example, round number display),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect other than that related to the jackpot round, or may include both an effect related to the jackpot round and an effect other than that related to the jackpot round.

In addition, “the second gaming state is a probability variation state (for example, a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second gaming state may be an electric support state. That is, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state may be used. Further, a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state may be used.

In addition, “the second game state is a game ball in the second region in the second region effective state in the second jackpot game (for example, the probability variation operation region effective state shown in FIG. 110 (a)). Is a gaming state that can be started at least when
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second game state may be started only when a game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state in the second jackpot game, It may be possible to start even when a game ball enters the second area in a state different from the second area effective state in the big hit game, or the second area effective in the second big hit game It may be started when a game ball enters the second area in the state, or even when a game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state in the second jackpot game It may be something that may not start.

In addition, when a game ball does not enter the second area during execution of the second jackpot game, the first game state (for example, electric support state: special figure low probability normal figure high probability state ) Is configured to start at least,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the first gaming state may be configured to be executable, a gaming state different from the first gaming state may be configured to be executable, or the first gaming state is It may be configured to always be executed.

  In addition, if a game ball does not enter the second area during execution of the second jackpot game, only the first game state can be started after the end of the second jackpot game. Alternatively, a gaming state other than the first gaming state may be configured to be able to start, or the first gaming state may be configured to be started without fail, or the first gaming state may be configured. The configuration may not be started.

  In addition, the first gaming state may be any gaming state, for example, a probability change state without electric support (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure). It may be a low probability normal figure high probability state) or a non-electric support state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). That is, the first gaming state is applicable to any gaming state as long as the gaming state is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-probable change state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first gaming state is an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), but a non-electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure low probability state) Also good.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect executed in at least a part of the fourth period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 120 (12) to 121 (21), the first round In the -13th round, the number of rounds is displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but as shown in FIG. 121 (23), the number of rounds is not displayed in the 15th round).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect that is executed only during a part of the fourth period, or an effect that is executed during the entire period of the fourth period. May be.

In addition, “the second jackpot game is a jackpot game that can execute at least a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds),
A first round (for example, the 14th round) of the plurality of rounds is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
A third round (for example, the 16th round) of the plurality of rounds is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The third round is a round started after the first round;
The first round is a round whose execution period is shorter than that of the third round (for example, as shown in FIG. 114, the 14th round in the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 3” The second variable winning opening 235a is a round that opens short, and the 16th round is a round that the second variable winning opening 235a opens long)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second jackpot game may be executable only in a plurality of rounds, may necessarily execute a plurality of rounds, or may not execute a plurality of rounds. May be.

  In addition, the third round may start after the first round, or after the first round, a different round from the first round may start before the third round. Good.

  Also, the first round may have a shorter execution period than the third round, the first round may have the same execution period as the third round, The first round may have a longer execution period than the third round.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Second variable winning means [for example, second variable winning opening 235a]
A second area [for example, V passage 2340g] into which the game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter;
A notification means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of notification;
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area, the second game state [for example, probability variation state: special figure high probability normal figure high probability state] is configured to be able to start,
A portion of the jackpot game [for example, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 1” shown in FIG. 114 (a)] (hereinafter referred to as “first jackpot game [for example, as shown in FIG. 114] , The period during which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened in the 14th round in the jackpot game started with the display of “symbol 1” (see paragraph 1174)] ”). Is the period of time in the second state,
Part of the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “second jackpot period [for example, as shown in FIG. 114,“ design 1 ”is displayed and the second variable prize opening is displayed in the 14th round in the jackpot game that starts. The period until the second variable winning opening 235a is opened in the 16th round after the 235a is closed (refer to paragraph 1174)]]) is set in the second variable winning means in the first state. Is a period,
A portion of the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “third jackpot period [for example, as shown in FIG. 114,“ Character 1 ”is displayed and the second variable prize opening in the sixteenth round in the jackpot game that starts. The period during which 235a is in the open state (see paragraph 1174)] ”) is the period during which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter (for example, a closed state),
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter (for example, an open state),
The second jackpot period is a period starting after the first jackpot period;
The third jackpot period is a period starting after the second jackpot period;
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications (hereinafter referred to as “game ball entry promotion notification [for example,“ How to hit instruction V effect shown in FIG. 123 (24) ”(see paragraph 1264)]”. ) Is a notification that prompts the game ball to enter the second area,
The notification means is means capable of executing the game ball approach promotion notification in the first jackpot period,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the second jackpot period when a game ball does not enter the second area in the first jackpot period. A game table that features ]
Explained.

In addition, “in the jackpot game, when a game ball does not enter the second area, the first game state after the jackpot game is finished [for example, electric support state: special figure low probability normal figure high probability Status] is configured to start,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-probable change state [eg, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state],
The second gaming state is a probabilistic state [for example, a special figure high probability common figure high probability state],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of rounds [for example, 16 rounds]
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “first round [for example, 14th round]”) is a round including the first jackpot period,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “third round [for example, the 16th round]”) is a round including the third jackpot period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first variable winning means [for example, the first variable winning opening 234a] is provided,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “second round [for example, 15th round]”) is a round executed in a part of the second jackpot period,
The first variable winning means is variable winning means that becomes the second state in the second round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “including a first area [for example, a winning count switch SW4] into which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can enter,
When a game ball enters the first area, a prize ball is paid out.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second round is a round started after the first round,
The third round is a round started after the second round;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the jackpot game is a long-term round in which each of the plurality of rounds is in the second state for a long period of time [for example, as shown in FIG. 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a performs a long opening for a maximum of 29 seconds (see paragraphs 1173 to 1186)] and a short period round in which the period of the second state is a short period [for example, FIG. As shown in (b), the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a is either one of the rounds (see paragraphs 1173 to 1186)] in which a short opening is performed for a maximum of 0.5 seconds. Configured,
When the first round and the third round are the long-term rounds, and the game ball does not enter the second area in the first jackpot period, It is a means for executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the second period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 123 (24) to (29), the second variable winning opening in the 14th and 16th rounds. When 235a is opened for a long time and the game ball does not pass to the V pass switch SW2 in the 14th round, the hitting instruction 2 effect is performed even when the 15th round is entered. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117 (22) to FIG. 24 (24), when the second variable winning opening 235a is briefly opened in the 14th and 16th rounds, the connection to the V-pass switch SW2 is performed in the 14th round. Even when the game ball does not pass, the hitting instruction 2 effect is not performed in the fifteenth round (see paragraphs 1265 and 1244). ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “a part of the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth jackpot period [for example, as shown in FIG. 114, “symbol 1” is displayed and the first round in the jackpot game is started. The period until the second variable winning opening 235a is opened in the 14th round (see paragraph 1174)]]) is a period during which the second variable winning means is in the first state. ,
The first jackpot period is a period starting after the fourth jackpot period;
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “fourth round [for example, the 13th round in the jackpot game started by displaying“ symbol 1 ”shown in FIG. 114 (a)]”. ) Is a round executed in part of the fourth jackpot period;
The first variable winning means is variable winning means that becomes the second state in the fourth round,
The first round is a round that starts after the fourth round;
One notification of the plurality of types of notification (hereinafter referred to as “game ball advancement advance notification [for example,“ Aim at V at next R ”shown in FIG. 123 (23)”) , Paragraph 1251)]] ”) is a notification for informing in advance that a game ball should enter the second area in the first round,
The notification means is means capable of executing the game ball advance promotion advance notification in the fourth round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, in the “second region valid state [for example, the probability variation operation region valid state shown in FIG. 110 (a) (see paragraph 1084, etc.)], when a game ball enters the second region, The second gaming state is configured to start after the end of the big hit game,
The second area effective state is a state in which the entry of a game ball into the second area is treated as effective.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “indication of one of the plurality of types of notification (hereinafter,“ game ball approach notification [for example, “V” which is a notification shown in FIG. Paragraph 1253)]] ”) is a notification for notifying that a game ball has entered the second area.
The notification means is means for executing the game ball entry notification when a game ball enters the second area in the first jackpot period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notification means is means for executing the game ball entry notification in the second jackpot period when a game ball enters the second area in the first jackpot period,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notification means is means for executing the game ball approach promotion notification in a part of the first jackpot period,
The partial period in the first jackpot period is a period before the game ball enters the second area in the first jackpot period [for example, FIG. 119 (24) to FIG. As shown in (26), after the 14th round is started and the hitting instruction 2 effect is started, if there is a game ball passing to the V pass switch SW2, the effect that the V prize is won is executed. (See paragraphs 1252-1253). ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First variable winning means [for example, first variable winning opening 234a];
A second variable winning means [for example, a second variable winning opening 235a];
A second area [for example, V passage 2340g] into which the game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter;
A notification means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of notification;
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area, the second game state [for example, probability variation state: special figure high probability normal figure high probability state] is configured to be able to start,
The jackpot game [for example, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 1” shown in FIG. 114 (a)] is composed of a plurality of rounds [for example, 16 rounds]
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “the first round [for example, as shown in FIG. 114,“ Pattern 1 ”is displayed and the 14th round in the jackpot game started (see paragraph 1174)). ] ”Is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “second round [for example, as shown in FIG. 114,“ symbol 1 ”is displayed and the 15th round in the jackpot game started (see paragraph 1174)). ] ”Is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the first state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “the third round [for example, as shown in FIG. 114,“ Pattern 1 ”is displayed and the 16th round in the jackpot game started (see paragraph 1174)). ] ”Is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter (for example, a closed state),
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter (for example, an open state),
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;
The third round is a round started after the second round;
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications (hereinafter referred to as “game ball entry promotion notification [for example,“ How to hit instruction V effect shown in FIG. 123 (24) ”(see paragraph 1264)]”. ) Is a notification that prompts the game ball to enter the second area,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round,
The notification means is means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the second round when the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round,
The first variable winning means is variable winning means that becomes the second state in the second round,
The jackpot game is a long-term round in which each of the plurality of rounds is in the second state for a long period of time [for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the first variable winning opening 234a or the first round 2 rounds (see paragraphs 1173 to 1186) in which the variable variable winning opening 235a performs long opening for a maximum of 28 seconds (large winning opening operation pattern 8) or a maximum of 29 seconds (large winning opening operation patterns 6 and 9), Short period round in which the period of the second state is a short period [for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a is the shortest open time. 0.5 seconds (round winning opening operation patterns 1 to 5, 7) (see paragraph 1173 to paragraph 1186)]
The notifying means, when the first round and the third round are the long-term rounds, and the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round, It is a means for executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the second round [For example, as shown in FIGS. 123 (24) to (29), the second variable prize opening 235a in the 14th and 16th rounds. Is long open, and when the 14th round is completed without passing the game ball to the V-pass switch SW2, the batting instruction 2 effect continues even after the 15th round. Done. In other words, the hitting instruction 2 effect is performed continuously from the 14th round to the 15th round. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117 (22) to FIG. 24 (24), when the second variable winning opening 235a is briefly opened in the 14th and 16th rounds, the connection to the V-pass switch SW2 is performed in the 14th round. Even when the game ball does not pass, the hitting instruction 2 effect is not performed in the fifteenth round (see paragraphs 1265 and 1244). ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “when a game ball does not enter the second area in the jackpot game, the first game state after the jackpot game ends [for example, electric support state: special figure low probability normal figure high probability state Is configured to start,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-probable change state [eg, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state],
The second gaming state is a probabilistic state [for example, a special figure high probability common figure high probability state],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “including a first area [for example, a winning count switch SW4] into which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can enter,
When a game ball enters the first area, a prize ball is paid out.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth round [for example, the thirteenth round in the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 1” shown in FIG. 114 (a)] Is the round in which the second variable winning means is in the first state,
The first round is a round that starts after the fourth round;
The first variable winning means is variable winning means that becomes the second state in the fourth round,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification (hereinafter referred to as “game ball advancement advance notification [for example,“ Aim at V at next R ”shown in FIG. 123 (23)”) , Paragraph 1251)]] ”) is a notification that informs the player in advance that the game ball should enter the second area in the first round,
The notification means is means capable of executing the game ball advance promotion advance notification in the fourth round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, in the “second region valid state [for example, the probability variation operation region valid state shown in FIG. 110 (a) (see paragraph 1084, etc.)], when a game ball enters the second region, The second gaming state is configured to start after the end of the big hit game,
The second area effective state is a state in which the entry of a game ball into the second area is treated as effective.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “indication of one of the plurality of types of notification (hereinafter,“ game ball approach notification [for example, “V” which is a notification shown in FIG. Paragraph 1253)]] ”) is a notification for notifying that a game ball has entered the second area.
The notification means is means for executing the game ball entry notification when a game ball enters the second area in the first round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notification means is means for executing the game ball entry notification in the second round when a game ball enters the second area in the first round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notification means is means for executing the game ball approach promotion notification in a part of the period in the first round,
The game ball entry promotion notification is a notification that prompts the player to enter the game ball into the second area,
The partial period in the first round is a period before the game ball enters the second area in the first round [for example, FIG. 119 (24) to FIG. ) After the 14th round is started and the hitting instruction 2 effect is started, if there is a game ball passing to the V pass switch SW2, the effect of winning the V prize is executed (paragraph). 1252-1253). ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Subsequently, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an applicable form to which the technical idea of the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 131 to 181 are used only for the description of the applicable embodiment described below in principle, and the following description will be given even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. Then, priority is given to the code | symbol shown in FIGS. 131-181.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[Fourteenth embodiment]
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 131. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 133) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136, Chance button lamp 138 that causes the production button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 131 is provided with a lower pan full detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 131, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 132 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 131 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 134) that performs control processing for the entire game, and the processing information generated by the main control unit 300 are shown. Based on the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control section 400 (see FIG. 134) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 134) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 134) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk, A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 134) that performs control processing related to the launch of a sphere, and a power supply control section 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines (see FIG. 134). And a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. The board case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 133 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 according to the present embodiment is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is changed to a right path on the right side of the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side of the effect device 206. Can be categorized. In the present embodiment, it is easy to enter a special figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, a first variable winning port 234, a second variable winning port 235, etc., which will be described later. The game ball that falls on the right path is different from the game ball that falls on the left path.

  Each of the normal start port 228, the second special start port 232, the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235, the normal start port 228, the second special start port 232, the first Since the variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right path, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball that falls on the right path, and the game ball that falls on the left path enters the ball. Is relatively difficult or impossible. On the other hand, with respect to the first special figure starting port 230, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls along the path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying various images (moving images or still images) used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, and an effect display region 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of an effect unit capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. The decorative symbol display device 208 also functions as an example of display means that can execute a plurality of types of effect display.

  Below the game area 124, a first special symbol display device (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first special symbol display device") 212 and a second special symbol display device (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol display device"). ”214, a normal symbol display device (hereinafter sometimes referred to as“ common symbol display device ”) 210, and a first special symbol hold lamp (hereinafter referred to as“ special figure 1 hold lamp ”). 218, a second special symbol hold lamp (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 2 hold lamp”) 220, and a normal symbol hold lamp (hereinafter referred to as “normal figure hold lamp”). ) 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are examples of symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be an example of a symbol display unit.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the general figure variable game is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). Here, the term “hold” means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery process) based on start-up information described later is put on hold. The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, A first variable winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 132 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. The special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a tongue member 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid, and the combination of the tongue member 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally Is also called an electric tulip. The tongue member 2321 is a member that changes the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the tongue member 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the manner in which the tongue member 2321 is closed is an open / close state in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variable game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the winning symbol, the tongue member 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the ball to the second special figure starting port 232 is displayed. Can be entered. That is, the state where the tongue member 2321 is closed (first state) is a state where it is difficult to enter the game ball, and the state where the tongue member 2321 is opened (second state) is the state where the game ball is easy to enter. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 is a variable starting region where the ease of entry of the game ball is variable, and corresponds to an example of a second starting region. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. At the same time, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, they are arranged vertically below the game board 200 side by side. That is, it can be said that the first variable winning opening 234 is arranged at a position upstream of the second variable winning opening 235 in the flow direction of the game ball. In the present embodiment, since the game nail 238 is not disposed between the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235, the second variable prize opening 235 enters the first variable prize opening 234. It can be said that the game ball that has passed through the front of the first variable winning opening 234 without being balled is arranged at a position where it can enter without touching the game nail 238. In the present embodiment, the second special figure starting port 232 may be disposed below the second variable winning port 235. In the case of such a configuration, there is an aspect in which no other winning a prize opening is provided upstream of the first variable winning award opening 234 in the flow direction of the game ball. Both the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 include a variable winning opening and a door member that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening is sometimes called an attacker. Accordingly, the first variable winning opening 234 is a first attacker provided with the first variable winning opening and the first door member 2341, and the second variable winning opening 235 is the second variable winning opening and the second door member 2351. And a second attacker. Hereinafter, when the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are described without particular distinction, the variable winning opening (234, 235), the variable winning opening, the door member (2341), or the like. , 2351) or an attacker. The door members (2341, 2351) are in a closed state (sometimes referred to as difficult to enter, difficult to win, and inability to win), and easier to enter the game ball into the variable winning opening than in the closed state. The state is changed from any one of the open states (sometimes referred to as an easy-to-enter state, an easy-to-win state, and a winning state) to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state at the variable winning opening (234, 235) of the present embodiment is that the door members (2341, 2351) are closed. The game board 200 is in a stationary state that matches the surface of the player side. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and in the open state at the variable winning opening (234, 235) of the present embodiment, the door members (2341, 351) are substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is a stationary state rotated to the player side. The variable winning opening (234, 235) is kept closed until a jackpot game, which will be described later, is started. For example, in the odd round of the jackpot game (for example, one round, three rounds, etc.), the first variable The winning opening 234 is opened, and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened in an even number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds, 4 rounds,...). In the present embodiment, the first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 are not simultaneously opened. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter the game ball, in addition to the completely closed state. In addition, the open state may be a state where the game ball is closed a little to the extent that the game ball can enter, in addition to the state where the game ball is completely open. Further, the variable winning opening may be any as long as the game ball can be won by passing or entering the game ball, and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. The ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through a predetermined discharge passage, and is then discharged to the game island side. When the game ball passes through a predetermined passage area (first passage area) in the discharge passage (first discharge passage), it is detected by the first count switch SW1. When the passing of a game ball is detected by the first count switch SW1 within an effective period to be described later, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The In addition, the ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 by a predetermined discharge passage, and then discharged to the game island side. When the game ball passes through a predetermined passage area (second passage area) in the discharge passage (second discharge passage), it is detected by the second count switch SW2. When the passing of a game ball is detected by the second count switch SW2 within an effective period to be described later, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The As described above, the first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 are variable prize winnings that can be changed between an easy entry state where a game ball is easy to enter and a difficult entry state where a game ball is difficult to enter. It functions as an example of means. The first passing area and the second passing area function as an example of a passing area through which a game ball that has entered the variable winning means can pass. Note that the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 may be in the form of an electric tulip.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. Wins at the starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), or wins without winning any winning port or starting port, or simply passes through the normal drawing starting port 228 Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a front stage 244 are disposed in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is disposed in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 is located behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 includes a warp inlet 242a disposed at the center on the left side of the effect device 206, and a warp outlet 242b that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206. . The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is started at the center of the front stage 244 in the first special figure. A special route 244a that facilitates entry into the mouth 230 is provided.

  The effect movable body 224 of the present embodiment includes a slightly elliptical panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in a vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a shielding device 246 (see FIG. 134) including a grid-like left door and right door is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. When the left door and the right door are closed, the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 overlap to shield the decorative symbol display device 208 from being easily viewed by the player. In the state where the left door and the right door are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, the left door and the right door can be stopped at any position, for example, only a part of the decorative design is shielded so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. You can do that. The left door and the right door may be configured so that a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized from the lattice hole, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body, The display by the symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice may be completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind may be completely invisible. . Further, the shielding device 246 may be configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door and the right door are closed.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality of the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor (first count switch SW1) that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port. And the second count switch SW2), the signals output by the various sensors 320 including the front frame door open sensor, the inner frame open sensor, and the lower pan full sensor, and the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212; 2 a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of a special figure holding lamp 216, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc., and a predetermined movable member, for example, a second special figure start A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the tongue member 2321 of the opening 232 and the door members 2341 and 2342 of the variable prize opening 234 and 235 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and uses the latched value as a built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through this information output circuit 336, an external terminal version 349, an external hall computer (not shown), etc. The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors is output to the basic circuit 402. Based on the signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is opened, and outputs an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 135A to 135D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the second special figure start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 135 (a), nine types of special maps from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure I” are shown. In FIG. 135 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the tongue member 2321 is more likely to be opened than the non-electric support state (an increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the tongue member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then again for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chow releases. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of prize balls, and if the number of game balls won in the variable prize opening (attacker) 234, 235 is reduced, a player is disadvantaged. Because there are cases. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the second special figure starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 135 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 135 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2. In FIG. 135 (b), six types of special charts "Special Figure a" to "Special Figure f" are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols ("Special Figure a" to "Special Figure f"). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 135 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when 15R-RUB, 8R-RUB and 4R-RUB are notified, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 135 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol form. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 135 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

  Next, the main control unit power-on process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 136 (a) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, FIG. 136 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 136 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, stack pointer initialization is performed. In this stack pointer initial setting, a stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

  Subsequently, in step S102, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (this value). In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 9V) or higher. When the voltage value of the power source is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the process waits until the voltage value of the power source becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value, and when the voltage value exceeds the predetermined value (step S102: Yes) Proceed to step S103.

  In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initial setting, the WDT 314 is activated, the access permission to the RAM 308, the numerical value that determines the execution period of the main control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is set in each register of the timer circuit 312, and the main control unit 300 After initial processing of serial communication between the control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 and processing such as setting the maximum value of hardware random numbers, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is ON (the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the process goes to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether or not the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state, and an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated check It is determined whether or not the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal). If the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before the power interruption. Execute startup processing. On the other hand, when the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal) (No at Step S106), the process goes to Step S108 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed.

  Here, the return activation process will be described with reference to FIG. When the return activation process is started, in step S201, initial setting at the time of return activation is performed. Specifically, a process for setting information indicating “return start” in the power status information, a process for setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and a device error (an error flag due to magnetic detection, winning abnormality, etc.) Processing for clearing, processing for clearing the previous device error status, processing for clearing the device error status for security signals, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, in step S202, the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S201 is set as an address for starting RAM clearing, and then the return activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (mainly set) to the stack pointer. In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in a sub-command transmission process in a timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. .

  Next, the initial activation process will be described with reference to FIG. When the initial activation process is started, initial setting of soft random numbers is performed in step S301. Specifically, an initial setting of soft random numbers used in special drawing or ordinary drawing is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S302, the addresses after the storage area that was initially set in step S301 are set as addresses for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the initial activation process, for example, setting of prohibition of interrupt, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial activation process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, as with the power recovery command. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 136A, after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, in step SS109, a RAM clear process is performed. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

  Subsequently, in step S110, a sub-control related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, processing for setting an initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

  In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, design data, firing position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, universal signal, normal electric accessory (second special figure starting port 232, electric chew) operating signal, normal figure operation Medium signal, easy winning status signal, special signal per special signal, special signal small hit signal (limited to models equipped with small hits), special signal changing signal, special signal variable time reduction status signal, special electric accessory (variable prize) Mouth 234, 235, Attacker) Operation signal, Condition device operation signal, character continuous operation device operation signal, large winning port solenoid signal, normal electric accessory solenoid signal, design LED data, external terminal board signal, etc. Set the output port. Moreover, after finishing the process of this step S111, it transfers to the main control part main loop process. Here, the winning easy state may indicate a power support state.

  Next, a main control unit main loop process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process.

  When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above main control power-on process, the main control unit main loop process starts to execute the main control unit main loop process. After setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, a basic random number initial value update process is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value updating process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and an initial value of the general figure determining random number counter is updated. The initial value generation random number counter can be updated by, for example, obtaining a value from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 and adding 1 to the obtained value when the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0-20. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S404, after setting interrupt permission, in step S405, a subcommand transmission process is performed). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If there is a command to be transmitted, a process for transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, after performing other determination random number update processing, it progresses to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the normal diagram variation time determination random number is performed.

  In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop process. In step S408, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to “suspend”. Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Thereafter, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms). The main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S502 and step S503, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is used. The special figure variation time determination random number counter and the normal figure variation period determination random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 2 may be provided separately.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated). If the interrupt function is limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). In the case (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519, and when the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, the interrupt function is limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, the first If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub-control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. If the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in the present embodiment) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is counted for the time for displaying the symbol on the first symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S507, processing such as input port status update is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), general map starting port 228, and out port 240 via the input port of the I / O 310. The RAM 308 monitors whether or not signals relating to switches such as the first variable winning opening (first attacker) 234, the second variable winning opening (second attacker) 235, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226) are input. Store in the signal state storage area.

  If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning at the start opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area as being invalid is deleted.

  In step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning award winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in the above-described step S507, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input. Note that if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it may be determined that there has been a prize.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S507, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228.

  For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning opening counter updating process is also performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when there is a winning at the winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, The value of the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting port is read into the RAM 308, 1 is added, and the original winning ball number storage area is set.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In this winning acceptance process, whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235, The determination is made using the determination result whether or not the winning determination pattern information matches. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area.

  Further, when a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is read from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made at the first variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the first variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the first variable winning opening. The same applies to the second variable prize winning opening 235. In addition, when the random number of a special figure is acquired, special figure prefetching processing (presence / absence judgment, symbol, prefetch lottery of variation time) is also performed.

  In step S509, a prize-related error check process is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process for setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for production.

  In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. In addition, as a command which the main control part 300 transmits to the payout control part 600, the communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control part 600) transmitted after progress of the starting waiting time of the 1st sub control part 400 after power activation is passed. And a command for notifying the starting method of the main control unit 300 (initial start and return start), and a prize ball number command for instructing payout of game balls for designated prize balls.

  The command received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 includes a communication confirmation return command (response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300), a test test signal Commands that contain information on the occurrence of commands (prize ball signal output request), information on the occurrence of payout errors (including no errors), and prize ball payout operation status commands (whether or not award balls are being paid out) And a command indicating that the payout is in progress (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED).

  Next, in step S512, special figure state update processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the special figure process state. The special figure state update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S513, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the off symbol. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the bellows member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the bellows member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), during the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec), the tongue member A signal for holding the tongue member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid 332 of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S514.

  In step S513, a general drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read, the presence or absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and if a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in transmission information to be transmitted. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning ports 234, 235, and the normal symbol display device 210, the first special special unit via the display circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In the external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, a subcommand management process is performed. In this sub-command management process, preparations for transmitting various commands to the first sub-control unit 400 are made. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, and bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a change stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included. In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning ports 234, 235 Includes the presence or absence of a prize. In the present embodiment, when there is a prize at the first variable prize slot 234 and the second variable prize slot 235, a big prize slot prize command is set.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is selected by the 15R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process. The information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set.

  Further, in the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S516, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S517, display display setting processing is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as “Number of reserved balls, combination of symbols”, status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing to set data to be output. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or LED, a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S519, a sub control activation waiting wait process is performed. In this sub-control activation wait process, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, the sub-control activation wait counter is decremented by 1, and this activation wait counter becomes 0. If so, preparations for transmitting a predetermined command are made. Note that the predetermined command includes one or more commands such as a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been canceled, a lower pan full error) A command indicating that there is a payout ball shortage error, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnected error There are a command indicating that is generated, a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state), and the like.

  In step S520, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop process. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

  In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired and saved, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 140 (a), the process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 141, and the special figure shown in FIG. The display confirmation weight process, the hit start weight process shown in FIG. 143 (a), the special electric charge operation process shown in FIG. 144, the special electric charge remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 147, the special electric charge operation end process shown in FIG. One of the hit end display weight processing shown is executed.

  In step S603, the easy winning status is set to ON. In step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined. In the next step S605, the presence / absence of the state change of the special figure processing state (change in the value indicated by the special figure processing state) is determined. When there is no state change (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update process is terminated, and there is a change in the special figure processing state. If this is the case (if the value indicated by the special figure processing state has changed) (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the “waiting for change” state. If applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S606). : No), the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the “hit start display wait state”. If applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608. Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is terminated.

  In step S608, a sub-command transmission request is set (in this embodiment, after setting a transmission request for a gaming state command including a special drawing and a normal gaming state, a firing position including information on whether or not the player is in a right-handed state. After the command transmission request is set), the special figure state update process is terminated. The order of sub-command transmission requests is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or a plurality of command transmission requests may be collectively performed in one process.

  Next, the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 (a) is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

  This special figure related lottery process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “waiting for change” in step S602 of the special figure state updating process.

  In step S701 of the special figure related lottery process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball number is 0. In the case of (when there is no special figure 2 variable game hold) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when other than 0 (when there is special figure 2 variable game hold) (step S702: No), the process proceeds to step S705 to execute the process related to the special figure 2.

  In step S703, the special figure 1 reserved ball number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 1 reserved ball number is 0. When there is no variable game hold (step S704: Yes), the special drawing related lottery process is terminated, and when it is other than 0 (when there is special figure 1 variable game hold) (step S704: No). In order to execute the processing relating to the special figure 1, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the value of the number of reserved special figure 2 balls stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. When the process related to special figure 1 is executed, the process is executed in the RAM 308. The stored special figure 1 holding ball number is decremented by one. In step S706, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the random number value stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the reservations 2 to 4 in special figure 2 is stored in 3 is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to 3, and when the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 in FIG. The random number value stored in the random number storage area to be shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 1 to 3 in FIG. 1 and the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 in FIG. 1 is cleared. Thus, the game machine (pachinko machine) in this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. In addition, each of FIG. 2 and FIG. 1 can store up to 4 holds.

  In step S707, a lottery process per special figure is performed. Although details will be described later, in this special drawing lottery process, whether or not the special figure 2 variable game (or special figure 1 variable game) is successful is determined. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In the display symbol lottery process, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table (or the special symbol 1 symbol determination table) is referred to, and the second special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery processing per special symbol in step S707 and the random number value. The lottery of the special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is performed.

  151A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 151B is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is determined in the display symbol lottery process in the step S708, the special symbol 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 (a) is referred to and the special symbol by the special symbol lottery process in the step S707 is referred to. Based on the result of the determination in FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value, the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  When determining the display symbol data of the special figure 2 in the display symbol lottery process in the step S708, the special symbol lottery process in the step S707 is referred to with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 (b). On the basis of the result of the determination of special figure 2 and the numerical value range of the random number, the display symbol data of special figure 2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, symbol data to be displayed on the special symbol display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display device display setting process (step S517) in the main control unit timer interrupt process, and is controlled to be displayed on the special figure display device. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined. If the symbol data is lost, the process ends.

  When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a big hit or a small hit symbol, a process for setting data to be set at the end of the hit (data setting process after the hit is completed) is performed. The after-hit data setting process is a process for setting a gaming state set after the win according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 140A, in step S709, a special figure variation time lottery process is performed. In this special figure variation time lottery process, a variation time table (not shown) is referred to, and the result of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) by the lottery process per special figure in step S707 and the numerical value range of the random number value. Then, after selecting the special figure variation time timer, the special figure related lottery process is terminated.

<Lottery processing per special figure>
Next, with reference to FIG. 140B, the lottery process per special figure (step S707) will be described. FIG. 140B is a flowchart of the lottery process per special figure (step S707) in the special figure-related lottery process.

  In step S801 of the special figure lottery process, the lottery per special figure is performed with reference to the determination table. In the present embodiment, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are used for the lottery per special figure using the same success / failure determination table, but separate special determination tables for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are provided. You may make it prepare.

  FIG. 150A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / failure determination probability table, and FIG. 150B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability table for determination of success / failure. In the lottery process per special figure in step S801, if the special figure 1 is determined to be successful, if it is in the special figure high probability state, the special determination high probability table shown in FIG. In the case of the low-probability state in the figure, the failure determination low-probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, the big hit, the small hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of determining whether or not the special figure 2 is determined in the lottery processing per special figure in step S801, if the special figure is in a high probability state, refer to the high probability table for determining whether or not the special figure is shown in FIG. 150 (a). In the case of the special figure low probability state, the failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. 150B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  Returning to FIG. 140 (b), in step S802, it is determined whether or not the result of lottery determination (lottery result) per special drawing in step S801 is other than “big hit”. If it is not “big hit” (step S802). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S803, and in the case of “big hit” (step S802: No), the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, a special figure small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

  FIG. 150C shows an example of the small hit determination table. In the special figure small hit lottery process in step S803, the special figure small hit determination table is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determination table and the acquired random number value, the special figure is determined. Select the result of whether or not to win a small lottery. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Returning to FIG. 140 (b), in step S804, based on the determination result of lottery per special drawing (lottery result) in step S801 and the determination result of lottery (lottery result) of special lottery lottery in step S803. Is set to any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lack”. In the next step S805, information indicating “special figure changing” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 141 is called and executed.

  In step S806, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared. In the next step S807, a subcommand (special figure change start command) transmission request is set. In the next step S808, the special figure is displayed. After setting the basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the change is in progress (2) (or special figure 1), the lottery process per special figure is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the process during symbol variation executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart of the process during symbol variation executed in the special figure state update process. This symbol changing process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “special figure changing” in step 602 of the special figure state update process.

  In step S901 of the process during symbol variation, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the update target RAM is calculated according to this special figure operation type. .

  In step S902, by referring to the address destination calculated in step S901, the special figure fluctuation time timer set in step S709 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired, and whether the special figure fluctuation time timer is 0 or not. Determine whether or not. As a result of the determination, when the special figure fluctuation time timer is 0 (when the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed) (step S902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and when it is not 0 (set special figure fluctuation time) If (No has passed) (step S902: No), the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the special symbol display symbol. If it is not the update timing (step S903: Yes), the symbol variation processing is terminated, and if it is the update timing (step S903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, after the special symbol display symbol data is updated, the symbol variation processing is terminated.

  By this special figure display symbol data updating process, in the case of special figure 1, the first special figure display device 212 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. In the case of Special Figure 2, the second special symbol display device 214 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. "Change display of special figure 2" is performed.

  In step S905, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S708 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired and set, and in the next step S906, information indicating "special figure display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. To do. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure display confirmation wait process shown in FIG. 142 is called and executed.

  In step S907, the display symbol update data is cleared, and in the next step S908, basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step In S909, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON, so that the symbol determination frequency information signal is output from the external terminal board 349.

  In step S910, a transmission request for a subcommand (special symbol variation stop command) is set, and in the next step S911, symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (the symbol of the special symbol 1 shown in FIG. 135 (a), or After obtaining the special figure display confirmation timer indicating the time for maintaining the special figure stop display based on this symbol type information, the symbol is obtained after obtaining the symbol (one of the symbols of the special symbol 2 shown in FIG. 135 (b)). The process during change is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the special figure display determination wait process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the special figure display determination wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This special figure display confirmation weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special figure display weight state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. It is.

  In step S1001 of the special figure display confirmation weight process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S911 of the symbol changing process is larger than 0. If it has not elapsed (step S1001: Yes), the special figure display confirmation weighting process is terminated. If not (the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1001: No), step S1002 Proceed to

  In step S1002, the symbol determination number information signal set in step S909 of the symbol variation processing is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1003, the special symbol variation time shortening status at the time of symbol stop (special symbol variation game) (In this embodiment, a status indicating any one of the normal gaming state, the probability-changing gaming state, and the short-time gaming state) is saved in the RAM 308 as a saved special figure variation time reduction status described later.

  In step S1004, the success / failure determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired. In the next step S1005, it is determined whether or not the acquired determination result type is “big hit”. As a result of this determination, if the success / failure determination type is “big hit” (step S1005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the correct / failure determination type is other than “big hit” (step S1005: No), the process proceeds to step S1006. Then, the number of time reductions in the special figure stored in the RAM 308 is updated (one time reduction number is subtracted).

  In step S1007, the success / failure determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired. In the next step S1008, it is determined whether or not the acquired determination result type is “small hit”. As a result of this determination, if the determination type is “small hit” (step S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the determination type is other than “small hit” (step S1008: No), step In step S1009, information indicating “waiting for change” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 140A is called and executed.

  In step S1010, basic signal information (for test) indicating the special symbol winning / not-accepting type and symbol type is set, and in the next step S1011, RAM clearing in the designated range is executed. Here, the winning / not-accepting type, the number of times of operation of the special electric character, the number of winnings of the big prize opening (the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235), the operation pattern of the special electric character, the operating state of the special electric character, the total number of winnings per hit, In addition to clearing information related to a prize winning abnormality at the big prize opening, winning end display timer type, etc., at the time of big winning, further clear the easy winning status and special figure status.

  In step S1012, information indicating a “hit start display wait state” is set as the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit start wait process shown in FIG. 143 (a) is called and executed. In step S1013, the winning total winning number is set to 0, and in the next step S1014, a transmission request for a subcommand (winning start command) is set.

  In step S1015, symbol type information is set. In step S1016, a hit start display timer is set according to the symbol type information set in step S1015. In step S1017, according to the symbol type information set in step S1015. After setting other information signal setting types, the special figure display determination wait process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143 (a), the hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 143 (a) is a flowchart of the hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process. The winning start weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the “winning start display weight state” in step S602 of the special figure state updating process. .

  In step S1101 of the winning start weight process, it is determined whether or not the winning start display timer set in step S1016 of the special figure display confirmation weight process is larger than 0. If not (step S1101: Yes), the winning start weight process is terminated. If not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, after executing a special power combination release process described later, the hit start wait process is terminated.

  Next, the special electric power releasing process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 (b) is a flowchart of the special power release process (step S1102) in the hit start wait process.

  In step S1201 of the special power combination release process, information indicating “special power combination operation state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric utility operation process shown in FIG. 144 is called and executed.

  In step S1202, the value of the number of winning prizes in the RAM 308 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “main control unit winning counter”) and the operation state of the special electric character are cleared, and in the next step S1203, the subcommand (special electric power) is cleared. Set the request to release the role release command. Thereby, the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. Note that the main control unit winning counter that is cleared in step S1202 is cleared only of the value of the main control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning port to be opened of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235. The value of the main control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning opening that is not opened remains maintained. Note that any main control unit winning counter value may be cleared. In step S1204, the symbol type information set in step S1015 of the special symbol display confirmation weight process is acquired. In the next step S1205, a special electric actor action pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. For example, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-1) to FIG. 146 (a-3), the special electric combination operation pattern data tables are prepared for the number of types of special figures that are big hits and small hits. Note that FIG. 146 shows only a part of them. The special electric character operation pattern data table stores special electric character operation data indicating opening / closing patterns of the first variable winning award port 234 and the second variable winning award port 235 for each round. As shown in FIGS. 146 (b-1) to (b-3), the special electric combination operation data is information (open timer pattern, open / closed state) of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235. One or a plurality of timer pattern data including a closed timer pattern) and information on a time for maintaining the open state or the closed state (special power combination opening / closing timer) are stored. As a result, various variations can be given to the opening / closing operations of the first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 in one round.

  For example, in the big hit game in the case of big hit with special figure A, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-1), as shown in FIG. 146 (a-1), the special electric actor operation data 1 shown in FIG. After the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235) is opened for 29500 ms by the opening timer pattern 2, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed by the closing timer pattern 3 and the operation is finished. Is done. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are configured to be alternately opened for each round.

  Also, in the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure C, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-2), in the 1R to 4R, 6R to 8R, 10R to 15R, the above-mentioned special electric charge operation The data 1 is referred to perform the above-described operation, while the 5R and 9R eyes open and close the first variable winning opening 234 by referring to the special electric charge operation data 4 shown in FIG. 146 (b-3). Operation is controlled. That is, in the 5R and 9R, after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1 first, the first variable winning opening 234 is kept closed for 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1 Is executed four times, the first variable prize opening 234 is opened for 17500 ms by the opening timer pattern 3, and then the first variable prize opening 234 is closed by the closing timer pattern 3 and the operation is finished. The

  In the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-3), in the first to fourth rounds, the above-mentioned special electric power operation data 1 is referred to and the above-described operation is performed. On the other hand, in the 5R to 15R, the special electric combination operation data 2 shown in FIG. 146 (b-2) is referred to, and the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 is controlled. . That is, in the 5R to 15R, after the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235) is opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, the first variable winning opening 234 (first 2 variable prize winning opening 235) is kept closed for 2820 ms, and then the first variable prize winning opening 234 (second variable winning prize opening 235) is kept closed by the closing timer pattern 3 so that the operation ends. Controlled. Note that another closing pattern timer (for example, the closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set before the closing pattern timer 3 is set.

  In step S1206, the number of operation of the special electric combination (round number) is acquired. In the next step S1207, the acquired number of operation of the special electric combination (round number) is updated. Subsequently, in step S1208, the special power combination operation data corresponding to the updated number of operations of the special power combination (number of rounds) is read to set the operation pattern of the special power combination. In step S1209, a special power combination control process (details will be described later) is performed. In next step S1210, after the special power combination winning detection timer is cleared, the special power combination release process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the special electric power actuating process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart of the special electric utility operation process executed in the special figure state update process. This special power combination operation process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates “special power combination operation state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

  In step S1301 of the special electric actor operation process, the maximum number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in step S1302, the number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1303, the acquired maximum number of winnings is compared with the number of winnings, and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is smaller than the maximum number of winnings. : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1304. If not (when the number of winnings> = the maximum number of winnings) (step S1303: No), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special timer opening / closing timer corresponding to the open timer pattern or the closing timer pattern being executed, which is set in step S1208 of the special electric actor release process, is greater than zero. If the opening / closing timer has not elapsed (step S1304: Yes), the special electric power actuating process is terminated, and if not (when the special electric power opening / closing timer has elapsed) (step S1304: No), step S1305 is performed. Proceed to In step S1305, a special power combination control process (details will be described later) is performed. In the next step S1306, a special power combination opening / closing timer pattern is acquired. In the next step S1307, a closing timer pattern among the acquired special power combination opening / closing timer patterns. , It is determined whether or not the special power combination is being operated (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

  As a result of the determination, when the special power combination is operating (when the closing timer pattern is not set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closed timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: Yes), the special power combination operating process is terminated. When the special power combination is not operating (when the closing timer pattern is set to information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: No), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information indicating the “remaining sphere detection state” is set as the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process shown in FIG. 147 is called and executed.

  In step S1309, the special electric utility operation interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, in step S1310, other information signal transmission determination timers are cleared, and in step S1311, a transmission request for a subcommand (big prize closing command) is issued. Set.

  In step S1312, the special electric prize winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric prize winning detection timer refers to the big winning opening (first variable winning opening 234 and second variable winning opening 235 after the large winning opening (first variable winning opening 234 and second variable winning opening 235) is closed. ) Is a timer for effectively detecting the game balls remaining inside. In step S1313, after setting the drive signal (large winning port solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the large winning port (first variable winning port 234 and second variable winning port 235) to OFF, The operation process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are in the easy-to-enter state, the maximum number of winning game balls has passed to the passing area. In addition, it functions as an example of a variable winning means that changes to a difficult entry state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the special power combination control process (step S1209, step S1305) executed in the special power combination release process and the special power combination activation process will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of the special power combination control process executed in the special power combination opening process and the special power action operating process.

  In step S1401, special power combination control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, the control data of the operation pattern to be executed this time is acquired from the operation patterns of the special power combination to be executed, which is read and set in step S1208 of the special power combination release process. To do. For example, if the operation pattern of the special electric character shown in the special electric character operation data 1 is set and the round is started, “open timer pattern 2” shown in “(1)” of FIG. 146 (b-1). ”Is acquired. In addition, after the operation pattern indicated by the control data indicated by “(1)” in FIG. 146 (b-1) is completed, the “close timer” indicated by “(2)” in FIG. 146 (b-1). The control data of “Pattern 3” is acquired.

  Subsequently, in step S1402, the opening / closing information indicating whether the variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234, second variable winning opening 235) is opened or closed based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric character. To get. For example, if it is an “open timer pattern”, data (open information) for opening the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 is acquired. Data (closing information) for closing the winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is acquired. In the present embodiment, the odd variable round is a round in which the first variable winning opening 234 can be opened, and the even round is a round in which the second variable winning opening 235 can be opened.

  In step S1403, a special electric combination opening / closing timer is acquired based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric combination acquired in step S1401 and the opening / closing information acquired in step S1402. For example, when “open timer pattern 2” is acquired and the open / close information is “open information”, an open timer of 29500 ms is acquired. When “closing timer pattern 1” is acquired and the opening / closing information is “closing information”, a closing timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

  In step S <b> 1404, information indicating acceptance is set in the special power prize winning / impossible state stored in the RAM 308. When the information indicating that the special electric winning combination winning / rejecting state is acceptable is set, a ball detection sensor (a first count switch SW1 of the first variable winning opening 234 or a second variable winning prize is provided in the variable winning opening). When it is possible to accept that it has passed through the second count switch SW2) of the mouth 235 and information indicating that acceptance is not possible, a ball detection sensor (first count switch) provided in the variable winning opening Even if it passes through SW1 or the second count switch SW2), it becomes invalid. Here, only the count switch corresponding to the variable winning opening to be opened out of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 is set to be acceptable. In step S1405, special electric signal information (test signal) is set. In step S1406, preparation for updating the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. Specifically, only the big winning hole solenoid bits corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are cleared, and drive data is set for the driven big winning solenoid bits. In this process, preparation for driving the special winning opening solenoid is performed, and a drive signal is output in the output management process (step S518) in the timer interrupt process described above. In step S1407, the special power combination opening / closing timer of the special power combination opening / closing timer is set, and then the special power combination control process is terminated. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1403 is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the special electric power remaining ball detection process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric character remaining sphere detection process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “remaining sphere detection state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1501 of the special power combination remaining ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the special power combination operation interval timer set in step S1309 of the special power combination operation process is in operation. If not (step S1501: Yes), the special electric combination remaining sphere detection process is terminated. If not (when the special electric combination operation interval time has elapsed) (step S1501: No), the process proceeds to step S1502. move on.

  In step S1502, a special power combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1503, information indicating "special power combination operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric utility operation end process shown in FIG. 148 is called and executed. That is, it becomes a state of the interval between rounds.

  In step S1504, after the special power combination signal information (test signal) is cleared, the special power combination remaining ball detection process is terminated. Note that a subcommand transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set after clearing the special power signal information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the special electric utility operation end process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the special electric utility operation end process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric utility operation end process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special electric utility operation end state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1601 of the special power combination operation end process, it is determined whether or not the special power combination operation delay timer set in step S1502 of the special power remaining ball detection process is in operation. If it is in operation (step S1601: Yes). ), The special electric utility operation end processing is terminated, and if not (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, the symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol win / rejection type is a small hit. If it is a small hit (step S1602: Yes), the small hit is handled in step S1603. After acquiring the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1608. On the other hand, if the special figure win / loss type is not a small hit (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1604, and a predetermined number of times is set as the maximum winning opening number stored in the RAM 308. In step S1605, the number of times of opening the special winning opening is compared with the number of opening of the special winning combination, and it is determined whether or not the number of opening of the special winning combination is less than the maximum opening number of the large winning opening, that is, whether or not the winning is not finished. . If the winning has not ended (step S1605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1606 to execute the above-mentioned special electric character release process, and the special electric character operation end process is ended. That is, processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, if the winning is over (step S1605: No), the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, a hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired. In step S1608, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1603 or step S1607 is set. In step S1609, information indicating “hit end display wait state” is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit end display wait process shown in FIG. 149 is called and executed. In step S1610, after setting a transmission request for the subcommand (hit end command), the special electric utility operation end processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart of the hit end display wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit end display weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “hit end display wait state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1701 of the winning end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the winning end display timer set in step S1608 of the special electric utility operation end process is in operation (step S1701: Yes). The winning end display weight process is terminated. If not (step S1701: NO), the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the symbol type information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area. In step S1703, the basic signal information (for testing) is cleared. Information indicating "waiting state" is set. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 140A is called and executed.

  In steps S1705 to S1707, the display symbol data, symbol type information, and the total number of winning prizes are cleared. In step S1708, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the small hit is completed. If the small hit is completed (step S1709: Yes), the winning end display weight process is performed. When the process is finished and the process is finished with other than the small hit (when finished with the big hit) (step S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1710.

  In step S1710, setting data (probability change, short time, hidden probability change) after hitting is acquired, and in step S1711, data corresponding to the setting data after hitting (probability change status (special figure probability state status, normal figure probability state status)) , Time reduction (Special figure fluctuation time reduction fluctuation frequency, Fluctuation time correction fluctuation frequency, Easy winning status fluctuation frequency), Time reduction status (Special figure fluctuation time reduction status, Normal figure fluctuation time reduction status, Open extension status), Variation time lottery The state (information for determining the variable time lottery table and the like) is set, and the setting data after clearing the hit is cleared, and then the hit end display wait process is ended.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of a game control unit that can execute a big hit game.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 152A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S1801 of FIG. 152A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S1801. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S1803 following step S1801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1805. . In step S1805, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S1807 following step S1805, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S1809 following step S1807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S 1807, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S1811 following step S1809, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S1809 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S1813 subsequent to step S1811, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S1809, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S1815 subsequent to step S1813, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S1809, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S1817 subsequent to step S1815, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S1809, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S1819 subsequent to step S1817, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S1809, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S1821 subsequent to step S1819, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S1809, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S1803.

  FIG. 152B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S1901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 152C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S2001 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S1803 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Accordingly, in step S1803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S2003 following step S2001, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S1821) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 152 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S1813 of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S2101, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Sets an instruction to start data transfer The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S2103 following step S2101, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S2103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2105. If not (step S2103: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S2105, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S2101, the CPU 404 has information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S2107 following step S2105, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S2109 subsequent to step S2107, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S2109: Yes), The process proceeds to step S2111. If not (step S2109: NO), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S2111, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the effect control process (step S1809) in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 152 will be described. FIG. 153 (a) is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S2201 of the effect control process, an over winning sound output control process is performed, and in the next step S2203, a winning number display control process is performed. Details of the over winning sound output control process and the winning number display control process will be described later. In step S2205 following step S2203, other effect control processing is performed.

  FIG. 153 (b) is a flowchart of the over winning sound output control process. First, in step S2301 of the over winning sound output control process, the number of winnings to the variable winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235) of the currently executed round is acquired. Subsequently, in step S2303, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of winnings exceeds the maximum number of winnings, and if it exceeds (step S2303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2305 and a predetermined over winning is obtained from the speaker 120. After the effect data is updated so that the sound is output, the over winning sound output control process is terminated. Specifically, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 counts the number of received big prize winning command transmitted from the main control unit 300 after the round starts, and updates and stores the result in the RAM 408. doing. If the counting result exceeds the maximum number of winnings in one round (for example, 10), the effect data updated in step S1809 of the first sub-control unit main process is output as an over winning sound. Process to change to data. On the other hand, if the acquired number of winnings does not exceed the maximum number of winnings (step S2303: No), the over winning sound output control process is terminated without executing the process of step S2305.

  FIG. 153 (c) is a flowchart of the winning number display control process. First, in step S2401 of the winning number display control process, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the round. Whether or not it is the start timing of the round is determined by determining whether or not a special power release command is received from the main control unit 300. When it is the start timing of the round (step S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2403, and the value of the number of winning prizes in the RAM 408 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “sub-control unit winning counter”) is cleared. To do. Note that the sub-control unit winning counter to be cleared is cleared only by the value of the sub-control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning port to be opened out of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235, and is not opened. The value of the sub-control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning opening remains maintained. Note that any sub-control unit winning counter value may be cleared. On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of the round (step S2401: No), the process proceeds to step S2405 without executing the process of step S2403.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether or not a round is in progress. If the round is in progress (step S2405: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2407 to open a variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234 or second variable winning opening). 2 variable prize winning opening 235), the value of the sub-control unit winning counter is acquired. That is, the number of winning prizes in the open big winning opening is acquired. Subsequently, in step S2409, after the effect data is updated so that display according to the acquired number of winnings is performed, the winning number display control process is terminated. By executing this process, an effect display (for example, a winning number display, a winning effect, etc.) corresponding to the number of winnings is performed during the round of the big hit game.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 154 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S2501 in FIG. 154 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S2501. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S2503 subsequent to step S2501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2505. . In step S2505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S2507 following step S2505, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S2509 subsequent to step S2507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S 2507, processing such as reading effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S2511 subsequent to step S2509, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S2513 subsequent to step S2511, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2503.

  FIG. 154 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S2601 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 154 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S2601 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S2503 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S2603 subsequent to step S2601, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 155 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a general symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (a), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 155 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 155 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 155 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 155 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the second special figure start port 232. It is because it is in a state. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 in FIG. 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line defining the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 155 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG. 155 (c), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 155 (d), the moving animation continues. In FIG. 155 (e), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, in FIG. 155 (f), the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 155 (h), the valid period is reduced. In FIG. 155 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the above effective period, as shown in FIG. 155 (j), a reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 155 (k), the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol variation display becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 155 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size, in FIG. 155 (n). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be a advance notice of progress to super reach.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 155 in stages.

  In FIG. 156 (p) continuing from FIG. 155 (o), the duel scene animation continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 156 (s). In FIG. 156 (s), the main character Tono wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 156 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (v), the combination of the decorative symbol of 15R probability variation big hit fixed of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown to FIG. 156 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 156 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 156 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached in a different decorative pattern (a combination of symbols having a 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, and a 2R normal big hit) in FIG. In 156 (u ′), the fluctuation of the decoration symbol combination “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 156 (v ′) following FIG. 156 (u ′), “decoration 6—decoration”. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 156 (w ′) following FIG. 156 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram showing step by step an example of another effect following FIG. 156 (q).

  In FIG. 157 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 155 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 157 (b). In FIG. 157 (b), the main character, Tono-sama loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 157 (c), as in FIG. Eventually, in FIG. 157 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative pattern combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (e), the fourth symbol (circular figure) of Special Fig. 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” stops It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the jackpot game will be described in detail.

  FIG. 158 is a timing chart for explaining the operation from the start to the end of the jackpot game.

  In FIG. 158, in order from the top, the fluctuation state of FIG. 1, the fluctuation state of FIG. 2, the state of the large winning opening 1 solenoid that opens and closes the first variable winning opening 234, and the second variable winning opening 235. The state of the 2 winning solenoids for opening / closing driving, the special figure changing time shortening status, and the remaining number of times are shown. In FIG. 158, the period indicated by “α” indicates a period in which the special figure display confirmation timer is set, and is in a special figure display confirmation state, and is indicated by “β”. The period indicates a period in which the above-described hit start display timer is set and a big hit (small hit) start effect is performed. In the period indicated by “δ”, the above-described special electric utility operation interval timer is set. Thus, the period in which the remaining sphere is detected is indicated. The period indicated by “ε” indicates a period in which the above-mentioned special electric power operation delay timer is set and the interval effect between rounds is performed. The period indicated by “ζ” indicates a period in which the hit end display timer is set and the jackpot end effect is performed. Further, when the special figure variation time reduction status is “0”, it indicates that the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), and when it is “1”, the special figure low probability normal figure is indicated. A high probability state (short-time state) is indicated, and “2” indicates a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (probability variation state).

  As shown in FIG. 158, the symbol variation in FIG. 1 is started at the timing of ta01, and then the symbol variation in FIG. 1 is terminated at the timing of ta02. At this time, in the special figure 1, when the symbol (for example, “special figure F”) that is a 5R normal big hit stops, after the period (α1) set by the special figure display confirmation timer has elapsed, at the timing of ta03. The jackpot start effect is started, and this jackpot start effect is performed until the period (β1) set by the hit start display timer elapses.

  When the big hit start effect is finished and the timing of ta04 is reached, the first round is started, and since it is an odd number round, the big winning opening 1 solenoid is driven and the first variable winning opening 234 is opened. After that, the above-mentioned maximum number of winning game balls won in the first variable winning opening 234, or set in the first round in the case of a big hit with the set special electric action data (for example, "Special Figure F") When the opening timer set by the “special power combination operation data 1”) elapses, the driving of the large winning opening 1 solenoid is stopped at the timing ta05, and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed.

  Then, the special power combination operation interval timer is set at the timing of ta05, and when the set period (δ1) elapses and the timing of ta06 is reached, the first round is ended, and the special power operation delay timer is set. Thereafter, when the period (ε1) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of ta07 is reached, the second round is started. In this embodiment, the period (ε1) set by the special power combination operation delay timer is set as the period of the interval between rounds. Here, the period of the interval between rounds may be a period indicated by A in the figure or a period indicated by B in the figure. That is, the period indicated by A is a period from when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the big prize opening closing command from the main control part 300 to when it receives the big prize opening opening command in the next round, After the driving of the first prize winning port 1 solenoid stops and the first variable prize winning port 234 is closed, the second winning prize winning port 235 is opened in the next round until the second winning prize winning port 235 is driven. It is also a period. Further, a period indicated by B is a period from the time when the special electric utility 1 described later changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the special electric utility 2 changes from the non-operating state to the operating state in the next round. When the unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit an inter-round interval start command, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the inter-round interval start command from the main control unit 300 and then receives a big prize opening release command in the next round. It is also a period until receiving.

  When the second round is started at the timing of ta07, since it is an even number round this time, the big winning opening 2 solenoid is driven and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. Thereafter, the second variable winning slot 235 is set in the second round in the case where the above-mentioned maximum number of game balls is won, or when the special electric character action data set (for example, “Special Figure F” is a big hit) When the opening timer set by the “special electric charge operation data 1”) elapses, the driving of the large winning opening 2 solenoid is stopped at the timing of ta08, and the second variable winning opening 235 is closed.

  Then, the special electric utility operation interval timer is set at the timing of ta08, and when the set period (δ2) elapses and the timing of ta09 is reached, the second round is ended, and the special electric utility operation delay timer is set. Thereafter, when the period (ε2) set by the special electric utility operation delay timer elapses and the timing of ta10 is reached, the third round is started. Thereafter, the above-described operation is repeatedly executed until the fifth round is completed (ta10 to ta16).

  In this way, the big hit game is performed, and at the timing ta16, the big hit end effect is started, and this big hit end effect is performed until the period (ζ1) set by the hit end display timer elapses.

  When the big hit end effect is finished and the timing of ta17 is reached, the big hit game is ended and the symbol variation of special figure 1 is started. At this time, since the gaming state shifts to a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (short time state), the special figure fluctuation time shortening status becomes “1” in which the special figure fluctuation shortening is permitted, and the short time number is “ 100 ".

  The start timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the special figure is stopped and displayed, may be the timing when the variable winning opening (attacker) starts the first opening, or the big winning opening solenoid is turned on first. It may be the timing when

  On the other hand, the end timing of the big hit game may be the timing at which the variable prize opening (attacker) finally changed from “open” to “closed”, or finally the big prize opening solenoid signal turned from on to off. It may be timing.

  FIG. 159 is a timing chart for explaining operation timings of the first variable winning opening (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening (second attacker) in the big hit game.

  In FIG. 159, in order from the top, the fluctuation state of FIG. 1, the operating state of the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device, the state of the big winning port 1 solenoid that opens and closes the first variable winning port 234, the first The operating state of the special electric combination (special electric combination 1) related to the variable prize opening 234, the setting state of the special electric prize winning detection timer (special electric combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable prize opening 234, the first count switch SW1 Valid / invalid state, state of a large winning port 2 solenoid that opens and closes the second variable winning port 235, operating state of a special electric accessory (special electric role 2) related to the second variable winning port 235, second variable winning port The setting state of the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) according to H.235 and the valid / invalid state of the second count switch SW2 are shown. Here, the accessory continuous operation device refers to a special device that can continuously operate the special electric accessory (in the present embodiment, the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235), The condition device is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the continuous object operating device, and a combination of specific symbols is displayed or a game ball (when the continuous object operating device is operating) Except for those whose entrances have been opened or who have won prizes in the enlarged grand prize opening.) Are operated when passing a specific area in the big prize opening. Since the timing at which the operation of the condition device starts and the timing at which the condition device ends coincide with each other, they are represented by the same timing chart.

  As shown in FIG. 159, the special symbol 1 changes in symbol, and then the symbol variation in the special symbol 1 ends at the timing of tb01, and the symbol (for example, “special symbol A”) that becomes the 15R probability variation big hit is obtained. When the stop display is made, after the period (α1) set by the special figure display confirmation timer has elapsed, the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are changed from the non-operating state to the operating state at the timing tb02. That is, the big hit game is started at the timing of tb02. The big hit start effect is started at this timing, and this big hit start effect is performed until the period (β1) set by the hit start display timer elapses.

  When the big hit start effect is finished and the timing of tb03 is reached, the first round is started, and since it is an odd number round, the special electric utility 1 is changed from the non-actuated state to the activated state. Since the first variable winning opening 234 is opened from the start of the first round, the large winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the first variable winning opening 234 is opened. Further, the first count switch SW1 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric utility 1 is activated. Thereby, when the game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1, this can be detected effectively, and can be handled as having been awarded effectively to the first variable prize opening 234. It becomes like this. Note that the first count switch SW1 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the first variable prize winning opening 234 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, the above-mentioned maximum number of winning game balls won in the first variable winning opening 234, or set in the first round in the case of a big hit with the set special electric character operation data (for example, "Special Figure A") When the opening timer set by the “special power combination operation data 1”) elapses, the driving of the large winning opening 1 solenoid stops at the timing of tb04 and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable winning opening 234. The period set by this special electric role 1 winning detection timer may be referred to as a first valid period. In the present embodiment, in a state where the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the first count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state even after the special electric combination 1 is inactivated. The special electric role 1 is in an operating state even after the first variable winning opening 234 is closed until the round is ended, that is, until the period (δ1) set by the special electric character operation interval timer elapses. It has become.

  When the period (δ1) set by the special electric function operation interval timer elapses and the timing of tb05 is reached, the first round ends, the special electric function 1 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the special electric function operation delay timer is set. The After that, when the period (ε1) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of tb06 is reached, the second round is started, and this time is an even number round, so that the special power combination 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. Become. In this embodiment, the special electric combination 1 and the special electric combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Since the second variable winning opening 235 is opened from the start of the second round, the large winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven at this time so that the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. Further, the second count switch SW2 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special power combination 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235 passes through the second count switch SW2, this can be detected effectively, and it can be treated as having been awarded effectively to the second variable prize opening 235. It becomes like this. In the present embodiment, since the first count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period set by the special electric winning combination 1 winning detection timer elapses even after the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, When the two variable winning opening 235 is in an open state, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 in the previous round may pass through the first count switch SW1 and be detected as winning. Note that the second count switch SW2 may change from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second variable prize winning opening 235 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, when the period set by the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer elapses, the first count switch SW1 becomes invalid at the timing of tb07.

  Thereafter, the second variable winning slot 235 is set to the second round when the above-mentioned maximum number of winning game balls are won, or when the special electric combination action data (for example, “Special Figure A” is a big hit) When the opening timer set by the “special electric charge operation data 1”) elapses, the driving of the large winning opening 2 solenoid is stopped at the timing tb08, and the second variable winning opening 235 is closed. At this time, the special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second variable winning opening 235. The period set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer may be referred to as a second effective period. In the present embodiment, in a state where the special power combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the second count switch SW2 is maintained in an effective state even after the special power combination 2 is inactivated. The special power 2 is in an operating state after the second variable winning opening 235 is closed until the round is ended, that is, until the period (δ2) set by the special power operating interval timer elapses. It has become.

  When the period (δ2) set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the timing of tb09 is reached, the second round ends, the special power combination 2 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the special power combination operation delay timer is set. The After that, when the period (ε2) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of tb10 is reached, the third round is started, and this time is an odd round, so that the special power combination 1 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. Become. Since the first variable winning opening 234 is opened from the start of the third round, the large winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the first variable winning opening 234 is opened. Further, the first count switch SW1 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric utility 1 is activated. In the present embodiment, since the second count switch SW2 is in an effective state until the period set by the special electric prize 2 winning detection timer elapses even after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, When the 1 variable winning opening 234 is in an open state, a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 in the previous round may be detected as a winning through the second count switch SW2. In the present embodiment, since the same special power combination operation data (“special power combination operation data 1”) is used in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, the opening time of the first variable winning opening 234 And the opening time of the second variable prize opening 235 are the same time, but different special electric character operation data may be set for the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235, respectively. In addition, special power combination operation data that is used only in one of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 may be prepared.

  After that, when the period set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer elapses, the second count switch SW2 becomes invalid at the timing of tb11.

  Thereafter, when the above-mentioned maximum number of winning game balls have been won at the first variable winning opening 234 or when the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data has elapsed, the timing of the big winning opening 1 solenoid is reached at the timing of tb12. The driving is stopped and the first variable prize winning opening 234 is closed. Thereafter, the above-described operation is repeated until the final round 15 is completed.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a step-by-step state of a big hit game with 15R special jackpot, and FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a step-by-step continuation of the big hit game with 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the continuation of the big hit game in the 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 161 in stages.

  160 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a universal figure display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a universal figure hold. A lamp 216 is shown. FIG. 160 also shows a first variable winning opening 234 that is a first attacker and a second variable winning opening 235 that is a second attacker, and the first variable winning opening 234 corresponds to the first variable winning opening 234. Corresponding to the number of balls entered into the variable winning port 234, the main control unit winning counter 1, the sub control unit winning counter 1, and the second variable winning port 235, the number of balls entered into the second variable winning port 235, the main control A part winning counter 2 and a sub-control part winning counter 2 are shown. Here, the number of balls entered indicates the number of game balls received in the first variable winning port 234 (second variable winning port 235) in one round, and the first count switch SW1 (second count switch SW2). It does not matter whether or not it has passed. Further, the main control unit winning counter 1 and the main control unit winning counter 2 store the number of wins to the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 in one round. It is a counter shown. The sub-control unit winning counter 1 and the sub-control unit winning counter 2 are stored in the RAM 308 of the sub-control unit 400 and indicate the number of winnings to the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 in one round. It is. The sub-control unit winning counter 1 and the sub-control unit winning counter 2 are counted when a large winning opening winning command is received from the main control unit 300. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the speaker 120 is also shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 160 (a), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit. In addition, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280, the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the 4th symbol display area 284 has disappeared.

In FIG. 160 (b), the first round, which is the first round of the 15 round jackpot game, is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 160 (b) is opened, and the first variable winning opening 234 is in the open state. Also, 1R character display (number of rounds display) is made in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (b). The round number display is started at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, but may be started at the same timing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa that imitates a cactus appears as a big hit game effect, and an effect display dedicated to the first round including the character C1 is performed. In addition, “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This “decoration 7” continues to be displayed until the big hit game end effect is started.
Therefore, it continues to be displayed even in the interval between rounds. Further, FIG. 160 (b) shows a state in which one game ball is effectively won in the first variable winning opening 234. The display of “decoration 7” may be erased during the interval between rounds.

  Also in FIG. 160 (c), the first variable winning opening 234 is open, and the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state. In addition, the round number display is continued in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display dedicated to the first round is also continued. Further, in FIG. 160 (c), nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won, and further, two game balls are received by the first variable winning opening 234, and still the first count switch SW1. The state of not passing through is shown.

  In FIG. 160 (d), the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes “10” and the number of winnings to the first variable winning opening 234 becomes the maximum winning number, so the first variable winning opening 234 is closed and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. The variable winning opening 234 is in the closed state. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 1R characters in the upper left corner and “decoration 7” in the upper right corner. Furthermore, the effect display for the first round is also continued. That is, FIG. 160 (d) shows that the remaining sphere is detected. One scene of the effect display exclusive for the first round including the character C1 (one scene with a different number of shining images br) shown in FIG. 160 (d) corresponds to the opening end effect of the attacker in the first round. In FIG. 160 (d), one game ball (remaining ball) that has been accepted by the first variable winning opening 234 but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1 is transferred within the first variable winning opening 234. It is shown moving. This game ball is the eleventh game ball to be awarded to the first variable winning port 234, and can be said to be a game ball that will be won beyond the maximum number of wins (over win).

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), when the remaining sphere detection state ends and the interval between rounds is reached, the 1R character display at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears. At this time, an effect peculiar to the interval between rounds may be performed. In this embodiment, the round number display is erased at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. However, the round number display may be erased at the timing at which the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. Good. Further, the round number display may be continuously displayed until the next round (for example, the second round) starts. Further, in FIG. 160 (e), the game ball that is rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 160 (d) has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. It is shown. In the present embodiment, the period of FIG. 160 (e) may be an interval between rounds, and the effect display including the character C1 shown in FIGS. When viewed as an effect, the period of FIG. 160 (d) to FIG. Thus, in this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is a period from the end of the first round in the jackpot game to the start of the second round started after the first round. Therefore, it can be said that it functions as an example of the second effect means capable of executing the interval effect between rounds.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 161 (f), the second round is started. The second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 5F is opened, and the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect dedicated to the second round including the character C1. (An effect display in which the number of brilliant images br is different) is started, and 2R character display (round number display) is performed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 161 (f), the second variable winning opening 235 has not yet been won. On the other hand, in FIG. 161 (f), the game ball that is rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 160 (d) has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. It is shown. As described above, in this embodiment, even after the round (second round) is started, the game balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 in the previous round (first round) are still winning. It may be in a state that is not.

  In FIG. 161 (g) as well, the second variable prize opening 235 is maintained in the open state, the number of rounds is displayed at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display dedicated to the second round is also continued. Yes. In FIG. 161 (g), one game ball to the second variable winning opening 235 is effectively won, and further, one game ball is received in the second variable winning opening 235 and is still in the second count switch SW2. The state of not passing through is shown. On the other hand, FIG. 161 (g) shows a state in which the game ball that was rolling in the first variable prize winning opening 234 in FIG. 161 (f) has passed through the first count switch SW1. At this time, since the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer is set and the passing of the game ball to the first count switch SW1 is effectively handled, it is treated as an effective winning to the first variable winning opening 234, The main control unit winning counter 1 and the sub control unit winning counter 1 both count “11”, which is the eleventh winning. Then, an over winning is generated by the eleventh winning at the first variable winning opening 234, and as shown in FIG. 161 (g), the speaker 120 receives an over winning sound (the first over winning sound). (Winning sound) is output.

  FIG. 161 (h) shows a state in which the time set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer has elapsed and the first count switch SW1 has become invalid. Thus, after that, even if the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 until the special electric role 1 operates again, it is determined that the winning of the gaming ball to the first variable winning port 234 is invalid. Note that the passage of the game ball by the first count switch SW1 may not be detected. Furthermore, when a game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 in a state where the first count switch SW1 is disabled, it may be determined that an error has occurred. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit winning counter 1 and the sub control unit winning counter 1 are the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 until the first variable winning port 234 is opened next time. And is cleared when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened again. In FIG. 161 (h), a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (g) is treated as an effective winning through the second count switch SW2, and The control section winning counter 2 and the sub-control section winning counter 2 each count “2”, which is the second prize, and one more game ball is received in the second variable winning opening 235 and is still counted second. A state in which the switch SW2 is not passed is shown.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 162 (i), the main control unit winning counter 2 becomes “10”, the number of winnings to the second variable winning opening 234 becomes the maximum winning number, and the second variable winning opening 235 is closed. A state in which the remaining sphere detection state is ended and an interval between rounds is shown is shown. In FIG. 162 (i), the 2R character display displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 has disappeared. In FIG. 162 (i), one game ball (remaining ball) that has been accepted by the second variable winning opening 235 but has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2 is transferred within the second variable winning opening 235. It is shown moving. This game ball is an eleventh game ball to be awarded to the second variable winning port 235, and can be said to be a game ball to be over-winned.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 162 (j), the third round is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 6J is opened, and the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect exclusively for the third round including the character C1. (An effect display in which the number of brilliant images br is different) is started, and a 3R character display (round number display) is performed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 162 (j), the first variable winning opening 234 has not yet been won. On the other hand, in FIG. 162 (j), the game ball that is rolling in the second variable winning opening 235 in FIG. 162 (i) has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2, and is still rolling. It is shown. Thus, in this embodiment, even after the round (third round) is started, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning slot 235 in the previous round (second round) is still a prize. It may be in a state that is not.

  Also in FIG. 162 (k), the first variable winning award 234 is being maintained in the open state, the number of rounds is displayed at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display dedicated to the third round is also continued. Yes. FIG. 162 (k) shows a state where one game ball is received by the first variable winning opening 234 and has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1. On the other hand, FIG. 162 (k) shows a state in which the game ball that has been rolling in the second variable prize winning opening 235 in FIG. 162 (j) has passed through the second count switch SW2. At this time, since the special electric role 2 winning detection timer is set and the passing of the game ball to the second count switch SW2 is effectively handled, it is treated as an effective winning to the second variable winning opening 235, The main control unit winning counter 2 and the sub control unit winning counter 2 both count “11”, which is the eleventh winning. Then, an over winning is generated by the eleventh winning at the second variable winning opening 235, and as shown in FIG. 162 (k), the speaker 120 receives an over winning sound (second over winning sound) to notify that. (Winning sound) is output. Note that the over winning sound corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 and the over winning sound corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 may be the same sound or different sounds.

  Thereafter, 3 to 15 rounds are digested as described above.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the speaker 120 functions as a first effect unit that can execute an over-winning effect when a game ball enters the variable winning means exceeding the maximum number of winnings.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 in this embodiment, the area for storing the number of winnings is divided for each of the variable winning ports 234 and 235, so the first count switch SW1 is effective. Even if a game ball wins the first variable winning opening 234 during a period in which a certain period overlaps with a period when the second count switch SW2 is valid, the first sub-control unit 400 wins the first variable winning opening 234. Can be determined according to the information from the main control unit 300, and the player may be relieved.

<First Modification>
Next, a first modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining another display mode in the jackpot game with the 15R special jackpot, and is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner how the number of winnings for each round is displayed.

  FIGS. 163 (b), (c), (e), (f), and (g) are shown in FIGS. 160 (b), (c), and (e), respectively. 161 (f) and FIG. 161 (g), the difference is that the winning number display indicating the number of winnings for each round is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. This winning number display changes according to the counter values indicated by the sub-control unit winning counter 1 and the sub-control unit winning counter 2, and can be said to be an example of a winning effect. The winning number display may be an example of a winning effect that changes in accordance with the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from the start of one round in the jackpot game to the end of the round. .

  In this effect example, in FIG. 163 (e), the round number display is erased at the timing after the maximum winning number “10” is displayed in the winning number display. In addition, the winning number display is continuously displayed during the interval between rounds. The round number display may be erased at the same timing as the winning number display, or the winning number display may be erased before the interval period between rounds starts.

  In this production example, the winning number display uses both the number corresponding to the number of winnings in the first variable winning port 234 and the number corresponding to the number of winnings in the second variable winning port 235. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 163 (f), at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235 is opened after the round starts, the winning display is cleared to “0”, and the winning display is the first variable winning display. From the display corresponding to the number of winning balls to the mouth 234, the display corresponds to the number of winning balls to the second variable winning opening 235. Note that the round number display start timing and the winning number display clear timing may be the same, or the round number display may start at the timing after the winning number display is cleared. Further, the winning number display may be cleared at a timing after the round number display starts. In addition, the display mode of the winning number display is not limited to being displayed by numbers, and may be expressed by, for example, the number of symbols displayed, by characters, or by the number of icons. In addition, the winning number display is not limited to being simply expressed by numbers, and may be a mode in which character information such as “1 GET”, “2 GET”, or the like is combined. In the present embodiment, the winning number display is displayed in a count-up manner, but may be displayed in a count-down manner. In this production example, the case where the second variable prize opening 235 is opened after the first variable prize opening 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state has been described, but the second variable prize opening 235 is in the open state. If the first variable winning opening 234 is opened after the first variable winning opening 234 is closed, the winning number display is cleared to “0” at the timing when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, and the winning is achieved. The number display changes from the display corresponding to the number of winning balls to the second variable winning opening 235 to the display corresponding to the number of winning balls to the first variable winning opening 234.

  As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of a second effect unit that can execute a winning effect that changes in accordance with the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning unit.

<Second Modification>
Next, a second modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining another display mode in the jackpot game with the 15R special jackpot, in which the display according to the total number of game balls won from the start of the jackpot game to the variable winning opening is stepwise. It is the figure shown in.

  FIGS. 164 (b), (c), (e), (f), and (g) are shown in FIGS. 160 (b), (c), and (e), respectively. 161 (f) and FIG. 161 (g), the display corresponding to the total number of winnings in the variable winning opening in the jackpot game (the total number displaying the winnings) is in the center on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It differs in that it is displayed. In this production example, as the total number of winning prizes displayed, the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) that can be obtained by winning a variable winning opening in the jackpot game, and variable winnings between the start of the jackpot game and the present time The number of winning balls (acquired winning balls) acquired by winning in the mouth is displayed in such a manner that it can be specified. For example, in this production example, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning one game ball in the first variable prize slot 234 and the second variable prize slot 235 is 15, and the maximum number of prizes in one round is 10. Yes, if 10 game balls can win the variable winning slots 234 and 235 in all 15 rounds, 2250 prize balls can be obtained. 2250 "is displayed, and the value obtained by multiplying the number of game balls won in the variable winning openings 234, 235 from the start of the jackpot game to the present by the number of prize balls is displayed as the number of winning prize balls. Is done. Note that the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening may be displayed instead of the number of winning balls acquired. Further, in this production example, the amount of over-winning is not included in the number of winning balls acquired (total number of winnings in the variable winning opening in the big hit game), but may be included.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 164 (e), the total number of winning prizes is continuously displayed during the interval between rounds. It should be noted that the winning total display may be erased during the interval between rounds.

  Also, in this production example, as described above, the amount of over-winning is not included in the number of winning balls acquired, so in FIG. 164 (g), game balls to the variable winning ports 234, 235 are displayed. The number of winnings is 12, whereas the total number of winnings displayed is “165” corresponding to 11 winnings. As described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 has the maximum number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from when the variable winning means becomes easy to enter until it becomes difficult to enter. It functions as an example of a second effect means capable of executing a winning effect that can change until the number corresponds to the number. The total number display of winnings including the amount of over winnings may be “180” corresponding to twelve. Further, the display mode of the total number display of the winning prizes is not limited to being displayed by numbers, and for example, may be expressed by the number of symbols displayed, may be expressed by characters, or may be expressed by the number of icons. Also, the winning number display is not limited to being simply expressed by numbers, and may be a mode in which character information such as “1000 GET” or “2000 GET” is combined. Further, in the present embodiment, the winning total display is displayed in a count-up mode, but may be displayed in a count-down mode.

  It should be noted that, in this production example, when the over-winning portion is displayed in the acquired number of winning balls, the number of acquired winning balls is larger than the total number of winning balls that can be acquired (for example, “2280 / Display such as “2250 pt”), or a display that changes the total number of winning award balls according to the number of winning award balls (for example, the display of the original total number of winning balls that can be acquired is “2250 pt” When the number of winning prize balls is “2280”, a display such as “2280 / 2280pt” may be made. Moreover, in this effect example, although the display which increases the number of winning prize balls is performed, for example, a display which decreases from the total number of winning balls which can be acquired (for example, a display such as “remaining 2250 pt”) may be performed. In this case, the amount of over-winning may not be included or may be included. Here, in the case of not including the amount of over winning, in the case where there is a winning game ball to the variable winning opening 234, 235 in each round from the start to the end of the big hit game, respectively, the maximum winning number, For example, “remaining 0 pt” is displayed. In addition, when including an over-winning portion, “remaining 0 pt” may be displayed before a certain round (for example, the 15th round) ends, but further, the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are displayed. If there is a winning game ball, the display of “remaining 0 pt” may be continued, for example, a display using a minus such as “remaining −30 pt”, or “remaining 0 pt + bonus points” “30 pt” or “bonus points 30 pt” may be displayed so that the number of winning balls acquired by over-winning can be recognized, or over-winnings such as “Remaining, large board behavior” or “Big board behavior” It is also possible to display such that it can be recognized (display indicating that the number of winning balls is larger than the number of winning balls that can be originally acquired).

<Third Modification>
Next, a third modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining another display mode in the jackpot game with the 15R special jackpot, and is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner how the number of winnings for each round is displayed for each variable winning opening.

  FIGS. 165 (b), (c), (e), (f), and (g) are respectively shown in FIGS. 160 (b), (c), and (e). 161 (f) and FIG. 161 (g), the winning number display for each variable winning opening indicating the number of winnings for each round is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 165 (b), the number of winnings corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 is displayed in the “upper attacker” column, and the number of winnings corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 is “ It is displayed in the “Lower Attacker” column. Further, in this production example, the winning number display is performed so that the amount of over-winning is not included in the winning number, but the winning number display may be performed including the winning number.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 165 (e), the winning number display is continuously performed even during the interval between rounds. Note that the winning number display may be erased during the interval between rounds.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 165 (f), even if the second variable prize opening 235 is opened after the second round is started, the winning number display corresponding to the first variable prize opening 234 is It is maintained as “10” indicating that ten winnings have been won, and continues until the first variable winning opening 234 is opened.

  Also, in this production example, as described above, the amount of over-winning is not included in the number of acquired winning balls, so in FIG. 165 (g), the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 is displayed. While the number of winnings is 11, the winning number display corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained as “10” indicating that 10 winnings have been won. In other words, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from when the variable winning means enters the easy entering state to the difficult entering state becomes the maximum number of winnings. It functions as an example of a second effect means capable of executing a winning effect that can change until the corresponding number is reached. In addition, it is good also as "11" which shows having shown 11 number-of-wins display corresponding to the 1st variable winning opening 234 including the part which over-winned. In this production example, the case where the second variable prize opening 235 is opened after the first variable prize opening 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state has been described, but the second variable prize opening 235 is in the open state. When the first variable winning opening 234 is opened after the first variable winning opening 234 is closed, the winning number display corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 is displayed even if the first variable winning opening 234 is opened. It is maintained until the second variable winning opening 235 is opened.

<Fourth Modification>
Next, the 4th modification in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment is explained. In this modification, the sub-control unit winning counter in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is commonly used for the one corresponding to the first variable winning port 234 and the one corresponding to the second variable winning port 235. This is different from the above-described embodiment.

  FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment in the jackpot game with the 15R special jackpot, and is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner how the first variable winning opening is won across the rounds. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the continuation of the jackpot game at the 15R special jackpot shown in FIG. 166 in stages, and FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the continuation of the jackpot game at the 15R special jackpot shown in FIG. 167 in stages. is there.

  In FIG. 166, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure. A two-hold lamp 220 and a general-purpose hold lamp 216 are shown. FIG. 166 also shows a first variable winning opening 234 that is a first attacker and a second variable winning opening 235 that is a second attacker, and the first variable winning opening 234 corresponds to the first variable winning opening 234. The number of balls entered into the variable winning port 234, the main control unit winning counter 1 and the number of balls entered into the second variable winning port 235 and the main control unit winning counter 2 corresponding to the second variable winning port 235 are shown. Has been. Further, in the present embodiment, one sub control unit winning counter corresponding to both the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 is shown and provided in the RAM 308 of the sub control unit 400. The sub-control unit winning counter is counted when a large winning opening winning command is received from the main control unit 300. In FIG. 166, the speaker 120 is not shown.

  In FIG. 166 (a), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit. In addition, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280, the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the 4th symbol display area 284 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 166 (b), the first round, which is the first round of the 15 round jackpot game, is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 166 (b) is opened, and the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state. In addition, 1R character display (round number display) is made at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (b). The round number display is started at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, but may be started at the same timing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa that imitates a cactus appears as a big hit game effect, and an effect display dedicated to the first round including the character C1 is performed. In addition, “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This “decoration 7” continues to be displayed until the big hit game end effect is started. Therefore, it continues to be displayed even in the interval between rounds. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a winning number display indicating the number of winnings for each round is displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The winning number display is displayed based on the value indicated by the sub-control unit winning counter. FIG. 166 (b) shows a state in which one game ball is effectively won in the first variable winning opening 234, and the winning number display is “1”.

  Also in FIG. 166 (c), the first variable winning opening 234 is open, and the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state. In addition, the round number display is continued in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display dedicated to the first round is also continued. In FIG. 166 (c), seven game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won, and further, one game ball is received by the first variable winning opening 234, and still the first count switch SW1. The state of not passing through is shown. Therefore, the winning number display is “7”.

  In FIG. 166 (d), even if the number of winnings to the first variable winning opening 234 does not become the maximum number of winnings after the release timer set by the special power combination operation data set as described above elapses. The first variable winning opening 234 is closed, and the first variable winning opening 234 is in a closed state. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 1R characters in the upper left corner and “decoration 7” in the upper right corner. Furthermore, the effect display for the first round is also continued. That is, FIG. 166 (d) shows that the remaining sphere is detected. One scene of the effect display exclusive for the first round including the character C1 (one scene with a different number of sparkling images br) shown in FIG. 166 (d) corresponds to the opening end effect of the attacker in the first round. In FIG. 166 (d), one game ball (remaining ball) that has been accepted by the first variable prize opening 234 but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1 is transferred within the first variable prize opening 234. It is shown moving. This game ball is a game ball that is the eighth winning prize to the first variable winning opening 234. That is, in the first round in this production example, it can be said that no over-winning has occurred, but the number of winnings is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of second rendering means that can execute a winning effect even when an over winning effect is not performed.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 166 (e), when the remaining sphere detection state ends and the interval between rounds is reached, the character display of 1R in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears. At this time, an effect peculiar to the interval between rounds may be performed. In this embodiment, the round number display is erased at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. However, the round number display may be erased at the timing at which the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. Good. In FIG. 166 (e), the game ball that is rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 166 (d) has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. It is shown. In the present embodiment, the period of FIG. 166 (e) may be an interval between rounds, or the effect display including the character C1 shown in FIG. 166 (d) to FIG. Considering the effect, the period of FIG. 166 (d) to FIG.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (f), the second round is started. The second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 5F is opened, and the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect dedicated to the second round including the character C1. (An effect display in which the number of brilliant images br is different) is started, and 2R character display (round number display) is performed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the value of the sub-control unit winning counter is cleared and the winning number display is also “0”. In FIG. 167 (f), the second variable winning opening 235 has not yet been won. On the other hand, in FIG. 167 (f), the gaming ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 166 (d) has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. It is shown. As described above, in this embodiment, even after the round (second round) is started, the game balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 in the previous round (first round) are still winning. It may be in a state that is not.

  Also in FIG. 167 (g), the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained in the open state, the round number display is continued in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second round exclusive effect display is also continued. Yes. In addition, FIG. 167 (g) shows a state where the second variable winning opening 235 has not yet been entered. On the other hand, FIG. 167 (g) shows a state in which the game ball that was rolling in the first variable prize winning opening 234 in FIG. 167 (f) has passed through the first count switch SW1. At this time, since the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer is set and the passing of the game ball to the first count switch SW1 is effectively handled, it is treated as an effective winning to the first variable winning opening 234, The main control unit winning counter 1 counts “8”, which is the eighth winning prize, but the sub-control unit 400 indicates that the first variable winning opening has been won after the second round has started. Therefore, the sub-control unit winning counter counts “1” which is the first winning prize. Therefore, the winning number display is also “1”.

  FIG. 167 (h) shows a state in which the time set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer has elapsed and the first count switch SW1 has become invalid. Thus, after that, even if the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 until the special electric role 1 operates again, it is determined that the winning of the gaming ball to the first variable winning port 234 is invalid. In the present embodiment, the main control unit winning counter 1 is stored and held in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 until the first variable winning port 234 is opened next, and the first variable winning port 234 is opened again. It is cleared with. In FIG. 167 (h), three game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235, and two of these game balls pass through the second count switch SW2 and are treated as valid wins. The prize winning counter 2 indicates that “2” is counted. The remaining one game ball has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2. In this embodiment, as described above, since one game ball has passed through the first count switch SW1 after the second round has started, the sub-control unit winning counter has already counted “1”. In this state, since two game balls have won, the sub-control unit winning counter is counted as “3”, and therefore, the winning number display is also “3”.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (i), 10 game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235, and 9 of them pass through the second count switch SW2 and are treated as valid wins. The main control unit winning counter 2 indicates that “9” is counted. The remaining one game ball has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2. Then, as described above, the sub-control unit winning counter is counted “10” including the passing of one game ball to the first count switch SW1 after the second round starts. The winning number display is also “10”. However, the value of the main control unit winning counter 2 indicates “9”, and in the second round, the number of winning game balls to the second variable winning opening 235 has not yet reached the maximum winning number. The 2 variable prize winning opening 235 is kept open. In other words, FIG. 167 (i) shows a state in which the number of winnings is “10” on the display in the decorative symbol display device 208, but the second round has not been finished yet.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 167 (j), the main control unit winning counter 2 becomes “10” and the number of winnings to the second variable winning opening 234 becomes the maximum winning number, so the second variable winning opening 235 is closed. The second variable winning opening 235 is in the closed state. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 2R characters in the upper left corner and “decoration 7” in the upper right corner. In addition, the special display for the second round continues. That is, FIG. 167 (j) shows that the remaining sphere is detected. One scene of the effect display dedicated to the second round including the character C1 (one scene with a different number of sparkling images br) shown in FIG. 167 (j) corresponds to the opening end effect of the attacker in the second round. In FIG. 167 (j), there is no game ball entering the second variable winning opening 235 exceeding the maximum number of winnings. In FIG. 167 (j), as described above, the sub-control unit winning counter is “11” including the passage of one game ball to the first count switch SW1 after the second round starts. Although it is counted, the winning number display remains “10”. Thus, in this embodiment, in the second round, the number of game balls won in the second variable prize opening 235 is 10, and no substantial overwinning has occurred, but the second round starts. Since one game ball has been awarded to the first variable prize opening 234 after that, it can be said that an apparent over-winning has occurred. In this case, “11” may be displayed on the winning display.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 168 (k), when the remaining sphere detection state ends and the interval between rounds is reached, the 2R character display at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears. At this time, an effect peculiar to the interval between rounds may be performed. In this embodiment, the round number display is erased at the timing after the second variable prize opening 235 is closed. However, the round number display may be erased at the timing at which the second variable prize opening 235 is closed. Good. In the present embodiment, the period of FIG. 168 (k) may be an interval between rounds, and the effect display including the character C1 shown in FIGS. 167 (j) to 168 (k) is displayed as the interval between rounds. Considering the effect, the period of FIGS. 167 (j) to 168 (k) may be set as the interval between rounds.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 168 (l), the third round is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 1 (l) is opened, and the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in an open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect dedicated to the third round including the character C1. (An effect display in which the number of brilliant images br is different) is started, and a 3R character display (round number display) is performed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 168 (l), there is still no winning in the first variable winning opening 234.

  FIG. 168 (i ′) and FIG. 168 (j ′) are the same as FIG. 167 (i) and FIG. 168 (j), but differ in that the speaker 120 is shown and an over winning sound is output. ing. Following FIG. 168 (i ′), in FIG. 168 (j ′), as described above with reference to FIG. 167 (j), no substantial over-winning has occurred, but the sub-control unit winning counter is “ 11 ”, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120 when an apparent over-winning occurs. Note that the over winning sound that is output when a substantial over winning is generated may be the same as or different from the over winning sound that is output when an apparent over winning is generated. Also good. In addition, as shown in FIG. 168 (j ″), the winning number display is the number of winning / maximum winning numbers (for example, FIG. 168 (j ″) from the start of the round) “10/10”) may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, an over-winning sound is output when an apparent over-winning occurs. For example, there are eleven game balls at the variable winning holes 234 and 235, Over-winning sound even when an over-winning occurs (substantial over-winning occurs) in the remaining ball detection state before the opening of the variable winning openings 234, 235 after the round starts and during the interval between rounds May be output. Here, if the eleventh game ball is won after the start of the next round, the value of the sub-control unit winning counter is cleared when the second variable winning slot 235 is opened. If the eleventh game ball wins after the next round is started, no over winning sound is output.

  Further, in this production example, after the first variable winning opening 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the first variable winning opening 234 is awarded after the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. However, after the second variable winning port 235 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the first variable winning port 234 is opened and then the second variable winning port 235 is awarded. Needless to say, the same can be applied to the case.

  Further, in this production example, as in the above-described embodiment, the sub-control unit winning counter is for the first variable winning port 234 (sub-control unit winning counter 1) and for the second variable winning port 235 (sub-sub). The control unit winning counter 2) is separately provided, and the sub-control unit winning counter 1 counts the number of game balls won in the first variable winning slot 234, and wins in the second variable winning slot 235. You may comprise so that the sub control part winning counter 2 may count the number of game balls. In this case, for example, when the second round is started and the second variable prize opening 235 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the winning number display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is “0”, and the second variable prize is displayed. Display of the number of winnings for the mouth 235 is started. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 and is treated as a valid winning for the first variable winning opening 234, the number of winnings is displayed. May be configured to be counted up and displayed.

<Fifth Modification>
Next, a fifth modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 170. FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining other display modes in the jackpot game, and is a diagram showing step-by-step the state of the effect display that is performed each time the game ball wins the variable prize opening. ′) Is a diagram for explaining another display mode following FIG. 169 (h), and FIG. 170 (l ′) is a diagram for explaining another display mode following FIG. 169 (j).

  FIG. 169 shows a decorative symbol display device 208. The number of balls entered to the first variable winning port 234 corresponding to the first variable winning port 234, the main control unit winning counter 1, and the second variable winning port. The number of balls entered into the second variable winning opening 235 corresponding to 235 and the main control unit winning counter 2 are shown.

  In FIG. 169 (a), the first round, which is the first round in the jackpot game, is started, and after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, one game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234. It is shown. In addition, 1R character display (round number display) is made at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The round number display may be started at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, or may be started at the same timing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a big hit game effect, the character C2 of the Tono-sama waiting with boxing gloves on is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a plurality of haniwa characters C3 imitating cacti are displayed. The effect display which shows a state where it walks in order from the right side of the screen toward the left side is performed. Here, the number of Minowa characters C3 appearing is the same number as the maximum winning number (for example, 10). This Minowa character C3 is a character that appears in a round in which the first variable prize opening 234 opens (that is, an odd number round).

  In FIG. 169 (b), one game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 is effectively won, and another game ball is received by the first variable winning opening 234 and still passes through the first count switch SW1. The state is not shown. As shown in FIG. 169 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in response to the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234, Tono-sama character C2 pays a punch, and the punch is the head (one body). And the effect display of “Hit” to that effect is displayed superimposed on the character C3 of the leading Minowa. It should be noted that the “Hit” effect display may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the character C3 of the haniwa, or the “Hit” effect display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 169 (c) to (d), the leading mink character C3 punched by Tono-sama character C2 is deleted, and a plurality of succeeding mink characters C3 are displayed on the left side of the display screen. There is an effect display of walking in a line-up direction (that is, toward Tono-sama character C2).

  The same effect is performed for the second to eighth winning prizes at the first variable winning slot 234, and after that, when there is a ninth winning prize at the first variable winning slot 234, FIG. As shown in e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in response to the ninth prize winning in the first variable prize winning opening 234, the Tono-sama character C2 pays out a punch, and the punch is the ninth of the eaves. While hitting the character C3, an effect display of “Hit” to that effect is superimposed on the character C3 of the ninth haniwa. FIG. 169 (e) shows that the tenth game ball has been received by the first variable winning opening 234 but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 169 (f) to (g), the ninth character C3 punched by the character C2 is deleted, and the character C3 following the character is changed to the character C3. An effect display of walking toward the character C2 is performed.

  Thereafter, when there is a tenth prize in the first variable prize opening 234, as shown in FIG. 169 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the tenth prize in the first variable prize slot 234 is obtained. Correspondingly, Tono-sama's character C2 punches and the punch hits the tenth character of the haniwa C3, and an effect display of “Hit” to that effect is superimposed on the character C3 of the tenth haniwa. Is done. FIG. 169 (h) shows that the eleventh game ball has been received by the first variable winning opening 234, but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1. The first variable winning opening 234 is closed when the tenth winning prize is received.

  FIG. 169 (i) shows a state in the remaining sphere detection state. In FIG. 169 (i), the first ball is entered in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 169 (h), and the game ball that has been rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 is in the remaining ball detection state. A state is shown in which “11”, which is the eleventh prize, is counted by the main control unit prize counter 1 through the count switch SW1. Then, the eleventh winning in the first variable winning opening 234 causes an overwinning, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, one character C3 of a haniwa appears newly, and the character C2 of Tono-sama punches. When the punch is hit and hits a new eleventh character of the mink C3, as shown in FIG. 169 (j), the eleventh character of the mink C3 blows off to the right side of the display screen and disappears outside the screen. An effect display is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 169 (i) to (j), when the remaining sphere is detected, the 1R round number display displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased. However, the round number display may be continuously displayed without being erased.

  Thereafter, when the interval between rounds is reached, as shown in FIG. 169 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display that delights that the Tono-sama character C2 has won the character C3 of the haniwa.

  Subsequently, FIG. 169 (l) shows a state in which the second round is started and the second variable winning opening 234 is opened. In addition, 2R round number display is performed at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a big hit game effect, the Tono-like character C2 is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a plurality of mingle characters C4 imitating cactus are directed from the right side to the left side of the display screen. An effect display showing the state of walking in alignment is performed. Here, the number of Minowa characters C4 appearing is the same as the maximum number of winning prizes (for example, 10). This Minowa character C4 is a character that appears in a round in which the second variable prize opening 235 is opened (that is, an even number round), and has a different pattern from the Minowa character C3 shown in FIG. 169 (a). .

  Next, an effect performed when an over winning is generated in the interval between rounds will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (k ′).

  FIG. 170 (k1 ′) shows a state in which the first variable prize winning opening 234 is in a closed state, and a period in which a remaining ball is detected has elapsed, resulting in an interval between rounds. FIG. 170 (k1 ′) shows that the eleventh game ball has been received by the first variable winning opening 234, but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1. As shown in FIG. 170 (k1 ′), the contents of the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 are the same as those in FIG. 169 (k).

  In FIG. 170 (k2 ′), the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1, and the main control unit winning counter 1 is “11” which is the eleventh winning. It is shown that is counted. When an over winning is generated by the eleventh winning at the first variable winning opening 234, as shown in FIG. 170 (k2 ′) to FIG. An effect display is shown in which the thousand-thousand box image C5 in which is stored falls from above the display screen. As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the presentation is different between the case where the over winning is generated in the period of the remaining ball detection state and the case where the over winning is generated in the period of the interval between rounds. Some or all of them may be the same.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of a first effect that can start an over-winning effect during the execution of the inter-round interval effect.

  Next, an effect performed when an over winning is generated after the start of the next round will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (l ′).

  FIG. 170 (l1 ′) shows a state in which the second round is started and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. In FIG. 170 (l1 ′), the eleventh game ball is received in the first variable prize opening 234 in the first round, but after the second round starts and the second variable prize opening 235 is opened. Also, it is shown that the first count switch SW1 has not been passed yet. As shown in FIG. 170 (l1 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the same display as in FIG. 169 (l). FIG. 170 (l1 ′) shows a state in which one game ball has entered the second variable winning opening 235 but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 170 (l2-1 ′), the game ball that has been rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 passes the first count switch SW1, and the main control unit winning counter 1 is the eleventh. A winning ball “11” is counted, and a game ball that has entered the second variable winning slot 235 in FIG. 170 (l1 ′) passes through the second count switch SW2, and the main control unit winning counter 2 is set to 1. A state where “1” which is the first prize is counted is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 170 (l2-1 ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an over-winning has occurred due to the eleventh winning in the first variable winning opening 234, so "Hit" is displayed, and in response to the game ball winning in the second variable winning opening 235, Tono-sama's character C2 delivers a punch, and the punch is the leading (first body) of the Minowa While hitting the character C4, an effect display of “Hit” to that effect is displayed superimposed on the character C4 of the leading haniwa. That is, in FIG. 170 (l2-1 ′), it is shown that the effect corresponding to the over winning at the first variable winning opening 234 and the effect corresponding to the winning at the second variable winning opening 235 are performed simultaneously. Has been.

  In FIG. 170 (l2-2 ′), the game ball that has been rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 passes the first count switch SW1, and the main control unit winning counter 1 is the eleventh winning. While a certain “11” is counted, in FIG. 170 (l1 ′), it is shown that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2. As shown in FIG. 170 (l2-2 ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an over-winning has occurred due to the eleventh winning in the first variable winning opening 234. The effect of “Hit” is displayed, but there is no effect of punching the character C4 of the leading haniwa. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170 (l2-3 ′), the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 passes through the second count switch SW2, and the main control unit winning counter 2 is the first one. When the winning “1” is counted, in response to this, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-sama character C2 pays out a punch, and the punch hits the head (first body) character C4 of the heel, An effect display of “Hit” to that effect is displayed superimposed on the character C4 of the leading haniwa. As described above, an effect corresponding to the over winning in the first variable prize opening 234 and an effect corresponding to the winning in the second variable prize opening 235 may be performed before and after.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of a first effect unit that can execute an over effect when a game ball enters the variable winning means exceeding the maximum number of winnings. doing.

<Sixth Modification>
Next, a sixth modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The sixth modified example is a modified example of the rank-up bonus described above. Here, FIG. 171 is a timing chart for explaining the operation from the start to the end of the jackpot game with 15R jackpot (substantially 8R-RUB), and FIG. 172 is the jackpot game with 15R jackpot (substantially 8R-RUB). FIG. 173 is a diagram showing the continuation of the jackpot game in the 15R jackpot (substantially 8R-RUB) shown in FIG. 172 in stages. In the jackpot game in the sixth modified example, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened in the first round to the fourth round and the sixth round to the eighth round, and the second round in the fifth round and the ninth to fifteenth rounds. The variable winning opening 235 is configured to open.

  First, with reference to FIG. 171, an example of operation timings of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 between rounds in the big hit game executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In FIG. 171, in order from the top, the fluctuation state of FIG. 1, the operation state of the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device, the state of the big winning port 1 solenoid that opens and closes the first variable winning port 234, the first The operating state of the special electric combination (special electric combination 1) related to the variable prize opening 234, the setting state of the special electric prize winning detection timer (special electric combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable prize opening 234, the first count switch SW1 Valid / invalid state, state of a large winning port 2 solenoid that opens and closes the second variable winning port 235, operating state of a special electric accessory (special electric role 2) related to the second variable winning port 235, second variable winning port The setting state of the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to 235 and the valid / invalid state of the second count switch SW2 are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 171, the big hit game with 15R big hit (substantially 8R-RUB) is started, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened and closed from the first round to the seventh round, and then in the eighth round After the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, the timing of td01 is reached when the winning timer of the game ball with the maximum number of winnings to the first variable winning opening 234 or the opening timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses. Then, the driving of the first prize winning port 1 solenoid is stopped and the first variable winning prize port 234 is closed. At this time, the above-mentioned special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable winning opening 234. . In the present embodiment, in a state where the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the first count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state even after the special electric combination 1 is inactivated. The special electric role 1 is in an operating state after the first variable winning opening 234 is closed until the round is ended, that is, until the period (δ1) set by the special electric character operation interval timer elapses. It has become.

  When the period (δ1) set by the special electric function operating interval timer elapses and the timing of td02 is reached, the eighth round ends, the special electric service 1 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the special electric operation delay timer is set. The Thereafter, when the period (ε1) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of td3 is reached, the ninth round is started, and the special power combination 2 is changed from the inoperative state to the activated state. In the present embodiment, the special electric combination 1 and the special electric combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Since the second variable winning opening 235 is opened from the start of the round, the large winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. Further, the second count switch SW2 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special power combination 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235 passes through the second count switch SW2, this can be detected effectively, and it can be treated as having been awarded effectively to the second variable prize opening 235. It becomes like this. In this embodiment, since it is a big hit of substantially 8R, the opening time of the variable winning opening from the ninth round to the fifteenth round is very short (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the opening is short. It is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the 2 variable prize opening 235. In the present embodiment, since the first count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period set by the special electric winning combination 1 winning detection timer elapses even after the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, When the two variable winning opening 235 is in an open state, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 in the previous round may pass through the first count switch SW1 and be detected as winning. Note that the second count switch SW2 may change from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second variable prize winning opening 235 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, when the maximum number of game balls won in the second variable prize opening 235 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, the large prize opening 2 solenoid is driven at the timing of t04. It stops and the 2nd variable prize winning opening 235 will be in a closed state. Since the ninth round is a short opening round, the second variable winning slot 235 is not closed due to the winning of a game ball with the maximum number of winnings. The variable winning opening 235 is closed. At this time, the above-mentioned special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second variable winning opening 235. . In the present embodiment, the time set by the special power duty operation interval timer is the round in which the variable winning opening is in the short open round, for example, the round in which the variable winning opening is in the long open (for example, the eighth round described above). Although it is shorter than the set time (for example, 0.2 seconds), it may be longer than the time set for the long open round of the variable winning opening.

  When the period (δ2) set by the special electric function operating interval timer elapses and the timing of td05 is reached, the ninth round is completed, the special electric service 2 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the special electric operation delay timer is set. The In the present embodiment, the time set by the special power activation delay timer is the round in which the variable prize opening is long open (for example, the eighth round described above) when the variable prize opening is in the short open round. Although it is shorter than the set time (for example, 0.3 seconds), it may be longer than the time set for the long open round for the variable winning opening. Thereafter, when the period (ε2) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of td06 is reached, the tenth round is started, and the special power combination 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. At this time, since the second count switch SW2 is configured to be valid at the timing when the special electric combination 2 is activated, it is not necessary to count the time set by the special electric combination 2 winning detection timer. The special electric character 2 winning detection timer is cleared and is not set. In the present embodiment, even after the ninth round is finished and the tenth round is started, the period set by the special electric utility 1 winning detection timer has not elapsed, and the first count switch SW1 is turned on over two rounds. It will be valid.

  Thereafter, the above-described operation is repeatedly executed until the 15th round is completed (td06 to td16).

  In this way, the big hit game is performed, and at the timing of td16, the big hit end effect is started, and this big hit end effect is performed until the period (ζ1) set by the hit end display timer elapses.

  When the big hit end effect is finished and the timing of td17 is reached, the big hit game is finished (the continuous action device and the condition device are changed from the operating state to the non-operating state), and thereafter, it is held at the timing of td18. Symbol variation starts. In this embodiment, even after the big hit end effect is finished and the symbol variation of special figure 1 is started, the period set by the special electric utility 2 winning detection timer has not elapsed, and the big hit game is ended and the symbol variation is finished. Even after starting, the second count switch SW2 is enabled.

  Thereafter, when the period set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer elapses, the second count switch SW2 becomes invalid at the timing of td19.

  Next, a specific effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 173.

  FIG. 172 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a common figure display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a general figure hold. A lamp 216 is shown. FIG. 172 also shows a first variable winning opening 234 that is a first attacker and a second variable winning opening 235 that is a second attacker, and the first variable winning opening 234 corresponds to the first variable winning opening 234. Corresponding to the number of balls entered into the variable winning port 234, the main control unit winning counter 1, the sub control unit winning counter 1, and the second variable winning port 235, the number of balls entered into the second variable winning port 235, the main control A part winning counter 2 and a sub-control part winning counter 2 are shown. Further, the main control unit winning counter 1 and the main control unit winning counter 2 store the number of wins to the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 in one round. It is a counter shown. The sub-control unit winning counter 1 and the sub-control unit winning counter 2 are stored in the RAM 308 of the sub-control unit 400 and indicate the number of winnings to the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 in one round. It is. The sub-control unit winning counter 1 and the sub-control unit winning counter 2 are counted when a large winning opening winning command is received from the main control unit 300. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the speaker 120 is also shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 172 (a), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “rank up bonus” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit. In addition, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280, the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the 4th symbol display area 284 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 172 (b), the first round which is the first round of the 15 round big hit (substantial 8 round big hit) game is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 172 (b) is opened, and the first variable winning opening 234 is in an open state. In addition, a winning total display is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (b). In the rank-up bonus in this production example, it is difficult for the player to specify whether the expected round of playing continues up to 4 rounds, up to 8 rounds, or up to 15 rounds at least when the big hit game starts. Therefore, in FIG. 172 (b), it is assumed that the total number of winning balls can be expected to be at least 4 rounds, and 600 rounds (one game ball winning in a variable winning opening) “600 pt” corresponding to the number of winning balls (15) × maximum winning number (10) × number of rounds (4 rounds) in one round is displayed. FIG. 172 (b) shows a state in which one game ball has been effectively won in the first variable winning opening 234, and the display “15” corresponding to the number of winning prize balls (15) is decorated. This is shown by the total number of winnings displayed on the symbol display device 208. Also, below the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (b), a total of 20 winning icons indicating the number of winnings are displayed in a row, 10 in the upper row and 10 in the lower row. Each time two game balls are won in the variable winning openings 234 and 235, the winning icon is changed from the non-winning display mode to the winning display mode one by one from the upper left to the right. It has become. In other words, these 20 icons indicate the number of game balls won in the variable winning openings 234 and 235 from the first round to the fourth round.

  FIG. 172 (c) shows a state in which the fourth round is executed. As shown in FIG. 172 (c), the first variable winning opening 234 is open, and the first variable winning opening 234 is in an open state. In FIG. 172 (b), nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won, and further, one game ball is received by the first variable winning opening 234, and still the first count switch SW1. The state of not passing through is shown. In FIG. 172 (b), the number of winning prize balls is 39 × 15 = 585 since the number of winning prizes in the variable winning opening from the start of the big hit game is 39. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display “585” corresponding to the number of 585 winning balls is displayed as the total winning display. In addition, with respect to the winning icons, all the display modes are changed to the winning display mode except for the icons displayed in the lower row of the rightmost column. Of the icons whose display modes have changed, eleven winning icons are displayed in a thousand-thousand-box symbol display mode, and the remaining eight winning icons are in a default (black circle) display mode. In this production example, it may be suggested that the more winning icons that have changed to the display form of a thousand-thousand-box pattern as the display form that has been awarded, the higher the degree of expectation that the round in which the player can expect to continue will be continued after the fourth round. it can. In other words, in the case of 15R big hit (substantially 8R-RUB) or 15R big hit (15R-RUB), it is easy to change to the display mode of the symbol of the thousand-thousand boxes. On the other hand, in the case of 15R big hit (substantially 4R-RUB), it is easy to change to the default display mode.

  In FIG. 172 (d), the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes “10” and the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 becomes the maximum winning number, so the first variable winning opening 234 is closed and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. The winning opening 234 is in a closed state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display “600” corresponding to the number of 600 winning balls is displayed as the total winning display. In addition, the winning icon displayed in the lower row of the rightmost column changes from the non-winning display mode to the display mode of the symbol box pattern. In this production example, even if an overwinning occurs, display exceeding “600” is not performed, but the number of overwinnings may be added and displayed.

  FIG. 172 (e) shows that the fifth round is being executed. When the fifth round is started, the second variable winning opening 235 performs, for example, short opening (for example, opening for 0.2 seconds) a plurality of times (for example, 10 times). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, together with a button image simulating the effect button 136, a character “whether it is continued” indicating that the player expects whether or not a round in which a game can be expected continues after the fifth round. Display (continuation permission / inhibition display) is made. In addition, a remaining time display bar indicating the remaining time of the reception period of the operation of the effect button 136 is also displayed. In the big hit game with 15R big hit (substantially 4R-RUB), the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is opened shortly once in the fifth to fifteenth rounds.

  FIG. 173 (f) shows a state in which the long opening (for example, 17 seconds opening) is performed after the 10th short opening is performed by the second variable prize opening 235 in the fifth round. Yes. That is, the second variable prize opening 235 is open, and the second variable prize opening 235 is being maintained in an open state. Also, in this production example, since it is a big hit game of 15R big hit (substantially 8R-RUB), the decorative symbol display device 208 informs that the round that can be expected to continue continues after the fifth round. Character display (continuous display) is made. Thus, the player may be able to recognize that the current big hit is either a 15R big hit (15R-RUB) or a 15R big hit (substantially 8R-RUB). This continuous display is executed at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated or when the reception period of the operation of the effect button 136 elapses. Since the timing at which the second variable winning opening 235 is long opened is determined in advance, the timing of the operation by the effect button 136 is a timing considerably before the timing of the reception period of the operation of the effect button 136. In this case, the second variable winning opening 235 is in a state of waiting while the continuous display shown in FIG. In the big hit game with 15R big hit (substantially 4R-RUB), after the character display (end display) “Sorry.” Which will be described later is performed, the big hit game is ended. Further, when an over-winning occurs when the above-described continuation display or continuation permission / inhibition display is performed, an over-winning sound may be output from the speaker 120 or may not be output.

  FIG. 173 (g) shows a state after the continuous display is completed in the fifth round. In FIG. 173 (g), the display content of the total number of winning prizes is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 173 (g), it is possible for the player to recognize that at least 8 rounds will continue, so the number of total winning balls that can be expected continues until at least 8 rounds. “1200 pt” corresponding to 1200 (the number of winning balls (15) × maximum winning number in one round (10) × number of rounds (8 rounds)) for winning one game ball in the variable winning opening Is displayed. In addition, the winning icons displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (g) are all changed from the winning display mode to the non-winning display mode. As a result, it is possible to indicate the number of game balls won in the variable winning openings 234 and 235 from the fifth round to the eighth round. In addition, as shown in FIG. 172 (e), in the period in which the short opening is performed a plurality of times in the fifth round, it is normally not possible to expect a game ball to win the second variable winning opening 235. When a game ball wins the second variable winning slot 235 during this period, “615/1200 pt” may be displayed from the beginning in the display of the number of winning balls in FIG. 173 (g), or “600 / 1200 pt "may be displayed. Also, an over win for one ball has already occurred at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (d), and the over won win is displayed in a mode that does not include the number of winning wins (eg, “600/600 pt”). ), The number of award winning balls is not included even if an over-winning portion is included even if a display that increases the total number of winning award balls (for example, a display that changes from “600 pt” to “1200 pt”) is performed. You may make it display (for example, display of "600 / 1200pt"), and you may make it display the number of winning prize balls (for example, display of "615 / 1200pt") including the amount of over winning. . Alternatively, in the timing shown in FIG. 172 (d), when the number of winning prize balls is already included in the number of winning prizes, for example, “615/600 pt”, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (g). , “615/1200 pt” may be displayed, or “600/1200 pt” may be displayed without including over-winning.

  In FIG. 173 (h), during execution of the eighth round, the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes “10” and the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 becomes the maximum winning number. 234 is shown closed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display “1200” corresponding to the number of 1200 winning balls is displayed as the total winning display. In addition, the winning icons displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 have all changed to the winning display mode, and the three winning icons among the icons whose display mode has changed become the display mode of the symbols of the thousand boxes. The remaining 17 winning icons are in a default (black circle) display mode. That is, the player may recognize that the degree of expectation that the round in which the player can expect to play is continued after the ninth round is low. Further, in FIG. 173 (h), the second variable winning opening 235 is opened in the fifth round and ten game balls are won, and then the second variable winning opening 235 is not in the open state. Neither the winning prize counter 2 nor the sub-control winning prize counter 2 is cleared and remains “10”. In FIG. 173 (h), one game ball (remaining ball) that has been accepted by the first variable winning opening 234, but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, is transferred within the first variable winning opening 234. It is shown moving. This game ball h is the eleventh game ball to be awarded to the first variable winning port 234, and can be said to be a game ball that will be won beyond the maximum number of wins (over-win).

  When the eighth round ends and the interval between rounds starts, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the display shown in FIG. 172 (e) described above, and then, as shown in FIG. "Sorry .." is displayed to indicate that the expected round has ended in the eighth round. Thereby, it may be possible for the player to recognize that the rank-up bonus is substantially 8R. After that, the operation of opening the second variable prize opening 235 only once is performed in the ninth to fifteenth rounds. Note that FIG. 173 (i) shows that the game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234 in the eighth round has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. Yes. Note that, when the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 during the interval between rounds and an overwin is generated, an overwin is output during the interval between rounds.

  FIG. 173 (j) shows a state where a big hit end effect is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (j), since the rank-up bonus is 8R, the character display of “1200 pt GET sure entry” is made to notify that the number of winning prize balls is 1200. It has been broken. On the other hand, FIG. 173 (j) shows a state in which the game ball that has been rolling in the first variable prize winning opening 234 in FIG. 173 (i) has passed through the first count switch SW1. At this time, since the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer is set and the passing of the game ball to the first count switch SW1 is effectively handled, it is treated as an effective winning to the first variable winning opening 234, The main control unit winning counter 1 and the sub control unit winning counter 1 both count “11”, which is the eleventh winning. Then, an over winning is generated by the eleventh winning in the first variable winning opening 234, and as shown in FIG. 161 (g), an over winning sound for notifying the fact is output from the speaker 120. As described above, the over winning sound is generated when the special winning combination 1 winning detection timer is set regardless of whether the variable winning opening is in an open state or a closed state. Output when there is a game ball. In the present embodiment, the above-described display of the number of winning balls is not included in the over winning prize, but may be included in the over winning prize. In addition, in this production example, for example, during the execution of the big hit end production, the execution of the design fluctuation display, the execution of the production display in the standby state in which the design fluctuation is not performed and there is no hold, etc. When it is being executed, the over winning effect may not be executed. Moreover, although the data for outputting the over winning sound is set, for example, it may be configured to be overwritten by data for outputting other effect sound.

  In the above description, the description is given of the effect that is performed when an over-winning to the first variable winning port 234 occurs. It goes without saying that it is possible.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the over winning effect is configured to be executable while the winning detection timers (special feature 1 winning detection timer, special feature 2 winning detection timer) are set. Even when the detection timer is set, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the over winning effect may not be executed. For example, after the first sub control unit 400 receives the winning end command or after the winning end display timer is set by the main control unit 300, the over winning effect is not executed even when the winning detection timer is set. You may do it. Also, for example, when the winning detection timer is set after the big hit game is finished and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the waiting command for change or after the main control unit 300 times out the hit end display timer. However, the over winning effect may not be executed. Further, after the first sub-control unit 400 receives the first change start command after the big hit game ends, the over-winning effect may not be executed even if the winning detection timer is set.

[Fifteenth embodiment]
Next, a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention is described. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the embodiments described above.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating the front of the attacker unit 2340, and FIG. 175 is a diagram of the attacker unit 2340 as viewed from the back.

  The attacker unit 2340 includes a first variable winning opening 234a as an example of a first variable winning means and a second variable winning opening 235a as an example of a second variable winning means, and the first variable winning opening 235a shown in FIG. Instead of the winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, for example, it is attached to the lower right of the game area 124 in the game board 200.

  The attacker unit 2340 has, for example, a flat plate shape, and includes an attachment base 2340a for attaching to the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b attached to the front surface of the attachment base 2340a with a predetermined interval. .

  In the mounting base 2340a, a rectangular opening is formed in the approximate center near the upper end, and a plate-like first door member 2341a is attached so as to cover the opening. The lower end of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by driving the solenoid SOL1 mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. The solenoid SOL1 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. On the back side of the mounting base 2340a, there is formed a winning path for discharging the gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234a downward, and a first position that detects the passage of the gaming balls is detected at a predetermined position of the winning path. A count switch SW1 is provided.

  A second variable prize opening 235a, which will be described later, is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b. Hereinafter, the configuration of the second variable prize winning opening 235a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 176 (a) and 176 (b). FIG. 176 is a view for explaining the internal structure of the second variable winning opening 235a, and FIG. 176 (a) is a view showing that the V shutter 2352a as an example of the variable pitching means is in a closed state. FIG. 176 (b) shows that the V shutter 2352a is in an open state. In FIG. 176 (a) and FIG. 176 (b), the decorative member 2340b is shown in a transparent manner in order to easily describe the internal structure of the second variable prize winning opening 235a.

  As shown in FIGS. 176 (a) and 176 (b), the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. The decoration member 2340b is formed with a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 on which a game ball can roll by a wall surface, and an open portion behind the first rolling region SP1 is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

  The upper part of the first rolling region SP1 is open, and a plate-like shutter member 2351a is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the open part. The shutter member 2351a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 175). The solenoid SOL2 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. That is, in this embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state of being advanced forward (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is closed and the first ball of the game ball is closed. When the entry to the rolling area SP1 is blocked and the vehicle is in the backwardly retracted state (open state), the first rolling area SP1 is opened and the game ball enters the first rolling area SP1. Entry is allowed.

  A second count switch SW2 for detecting the passage of the game ball is disposed at a position where the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2 are connected to each other. When the entered game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided leftward, it passes through the second count switch SW2. The second count switch SW2 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passing of a game ball to the second count switch SW2, it detects a winning at the second variable winning opening 235a and pays out a winning ball based on the winning. Process.

  The game ball that has passed through the second count switch SW2 is guided to the second rolling region SP2. The second rolling region SP2 is configured such that a V passage 2340g and a general passage 2340h are juxtaposed in the left-right direction, and the received game ball is guided to one of the passages and discharged downward. . The V passage 2340g is provided with a V passage switch SW3, and the game ball guided by the V passage 2340g is configured to pass through the V passage switch SW3. Thus, it can be said that the V passage 2340g is an area provided at a position where at least a game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a can enter. The V-pass switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V pass switch SW3, it can be determined that the game ball has passed through the V passage 2340g. A plate-like V shutter 2352a is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the upper portion of the V passage 2340g. The V shutter 23521a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid SOL3 (see FIG. 175). The solenoid SOL3 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In other words, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), when the V shutter 2352a is in the forwardly advanced state (closed state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the game ball to the V passage 2340g The game ball that has been prevented from entering and has entered the second rolling region SP2 rolls on the upper surface of the V shutter 2352a and is guided to the general passage 2340h. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of being retracted backward (opened) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the game ball is allowed to enter the V passage 2340g. The game ball that has entered the second rolling region SP2 is guided to the V passage 2340g. In the following description, the solenoid SOL3 may be referred to as a positive variation operating region solenoid. In addition, a discharge ball detection switch SW4 is disposed in the general passage 2340h, and a game ball guided in the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW4. The discharged ball detection switch SW4 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured such that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge ball detection switch SW4, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

  In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the second variable of the game ball is determined by the number of passes of the game ball of the second count switch SW2 and the number of passes of the V pass switch SW3 and the discharge ball detection switch SW4. By monitoring in / out of the winning opening 235a, it may be possible to monitor illegally passing a game ball to the V passage 2340g. Specifically, the number of game balls detected by the second count switch SW2 of the second variable winning opening 235a is counted as the number (IN number) received by the second variable winning opening 235a and stored in the RAM 308. On the other hand, the total number of game balls detected by each of the V passing switch SW3 and the discharge ball detection switch SW4 is counted as the number discharged (OUT number) from the second variable winning opening 235a and stored in the RAM 308. . Then, for these IN number and OUT number, for example, in the above-mentioned special electric power remaining sphere detection process, a process for confirming whether the IN number and the OUT number match is executed. Is determined to be in an over-winning state, and when the number of INs is smaller than the number of OUTs, it is possible to determine a winning error by determining in an over-discharge state. Examples of the illegal act include an act using a ball with a thread or a game ball having a size larger than a regulation (so-called decaball).

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a can enter the V path 2340g, and the game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234a has the above-described configuration. It is configured not to enter 2340g.

  In the present embodiment, for example, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V pass switch SW3 in the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is over, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state), and in the jackpot game When the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch SW3, it is possible to shift to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (time-short state) after the big hit game ends.

  Further, for example, when the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a passes through the V passing switch SW3 during the period from the start to the end of the small hit game (during the period of the small hit game), the first variable You may make it perform the big hit game which opens and closes the winning opening 234a by a predetermined special electric power operation pattern.

  Next, an example of the operation timing of the first variable winning port 234a and the second variable winning port 235a between rounds in the big hit game executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a timing chart for explaining the operation timings of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening in the big hit game with 15R special big hit. Here, the 15R special jackpot means that it is easy to enter the second variable winning opening 235a and the passing of the game ball to the V-pass switch SW3 can be expected. It is a big hit that can be expected to shift.

  In FIG. 177, in order from the top, the operation state of the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device, the state of the large winning port 1 solenoid that opens and closes the first variable winning port 234a, and the special related to the first variable winning port 234a The operating state of the electric component (special electric component 1), the setting state of the special electric component winning detection timer (special electric component 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable winning port 234a, the valid / invalid state of the first count switch SW1, the second The state of the large winning opening 2 solenoid that opens and closes the variable winning opening 235a, the operating state of the special electric accessory (special electric combination 2) related to the second variable winning opening 235, and the special electric winning combination detection related to the second variable winning opening 235a The setting state of the timer (special electric role 2 winning detection timer), the validity / invalidity state of the second count switch SW2, the state of the probability variation operating region solenoid SOL3 that drives the V shutter 2352a to open and close, V Enable / Disable state of over switch (probability variation operating range) SW3, the presence or absence of detection of passage of the game ball into the probability variation operating range is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 177, after the big hit game of 15R special big hit is started, at the timing of tc01, a predetermined first round (for example, the 12th round) is started, and the special electric utility 1 is operated from the inactive state. It becomes a state. Since the first variable winning opening 234a is opened from the start of the round, the large winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the first variable winning opening 234a is opened. Further, the first count switch SW1 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric utility 1 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1, this can be detected effectively, and it can be treated as having been awarded effectively to the first variable prize opening 234a. It becomes like this.

  Thereafter, when the above-mentioned maximum number of winning game balls have been won in the first variable winning opening 234a or when the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, at the timing of tc02, The driving is stopped and the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. At this time, the above-described special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable winning opening 234a. . In the present embodiment, in a state where the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the first count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state even after the special electric combination 1 is inactivated. Note that the special electric role 1 is in an operating state after the first variable winning opening 234a is closed until the round ends, that is, until the period (δ1) set by the special electric character operation interval timer elapses. It has become.

  When the period (δ1) set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the timing of tc03 is reached, the first round is ended, and the special power combination 1 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the special power combination operation delay timer is set Is done. After that, when the period (ε1) set by the special power function activation delay timer elapses and the timing of tc04 is reached, the second round following the first round (for example, the 13th round) is started, and the special power service 2 is not yet connected. The operation state is changed to the operation state. In this embodiment, the special electric combination 1 and the special electric combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Since the second variable winning opening 235a is opened from the start of the round, the large winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the second variable winning opening 235a is opened. Further, the second count switch SW2 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special power combination 2 is activated. Thereby, when the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a passes through the second count switch SW2, this can be detected effectively, and it can be treated as having been awarded effectively to the second variable prize opening 235a. It becomes like this. In the present embodiment, since the first count switch SW1 is in an effective state until the period set by the special electric winning combination 1 winning detection timer elapses even after the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, When the two variable winning opening 235a is in an open state, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the previous round may be detected as a winning through the first count switch SW1. Note that the second count switch SW2 may change from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second variable prize opening 235a is first opened after the round starts. At the timing when the special electric combination 2 is in the operating state, the probability variation operating region solenoid SOL3 is driven and the V shutter 2352a is in the open state. Note that the V shutter 2352a is in an open state until, for example, a first V open time (for example, 1 second) elapses. Further, the probability variation operating region also changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the V shutter 2352a is opened. Thus, when the V passing switch (probability changing operation region) SW3 is passed, this is effectively detected, and the probability changing operation region can be handled as having passed the game ball effectively. At this time, a first V passage effective time (for example, 1.5 seconds) is set so that a game ball that has passed while the V shutter 2352a is open can be reliably detected. That is, the first V passing effective time is set longer than the first V opening time. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 177, the game ball passes through the probability variation operating region at a timing after the timing of tc04.

  Thereafter, when the period set by the special electric utility 1 winning detection timer elapses, the first count switch SW1 becomes invalid at the timing of tc05. In addition, when the first V opening time described above has elapsed and the timing of tc05 is reached, the driving of the probability changing operation region SOL3 is stopped and the V shutter 2352a is closed. For example, the V shutter 2352a is kept closed until a first V closing time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses. The timing at which the first count switch SW1 is disabled and the timing at which the driving of the probability change operation region SOL3 is stopped and the V shutter 2352a is closed may be the same timing or different timings. May be.

  Thereafter, when the first V passage effective time has elapsed, the probability variation operating region changes from the effective state to the invalid state. Thereby, it may be possible to suppress illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation operation region.

  Thereafter, when the first V closing time elapses and the timing becomes tc07, the probability variation operating region solenoid SOL3 is driven again, and the V shutter 2352a is changed from the closed state to the opened state. Note that the V shutter 2352a is kept open until, for example, a second V opening time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed at the maximum. Further, the probability variation operating region also changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the V shutter 2352a is opened. For example, the effective state of the probability change operation region is maintained until the second effective V passage effective time (for example, 20.5 seconds) elapses.

  After that, when the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls are won in the second variable prize opening 235 or the release timer set by the set special electric character operation data elapses, the timing of the big prize opening 2 solenoid is reached at the timing of tc08. The driving is stopped and the second variable winning opening 235a is closed. At this time, a special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second variable winning opening 235a. In the present embodiment, in a state where the special power combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the second count switch SW2 is maintained in an effective state even after the special power combination 2 is inactivated. The special electric role 2 is in an operating state after the second variable winning opening 235a is closed until the round is ended, that is, until the period (δ2) set by the special electric utility operation interval timer elapses. It has become. In the present embodiment, even when the second V opening time has not elapsed at the timing of tc08, a third V opening time (for example, 2.5 seconds) is newly set. The open state of the V shutter 2352a is maintained until the V open time elapses. Even if the second V passage effective time has not elapsed at the timing of tc08, a third V passage effective time (for example, 3.5 seconds) is newly set, and this third V passage effective time is set. The probability variation operating region is maintained in an effective state until time elapses.

  When the period (δ2) set by the special electric function operation interval timer elapses and the timing of tc09 is reached, the second round is ended, and the special electric function 2 is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the special electric function operation delay timer is set. Is done. Thereafter, when the period (ε2) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of tc10 is reached, the third round is started, and the special power combination 1 is changed from the inoperative state to the activated state. Since the first variable winning opening 234a is opened from the start of the third round, the large winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the first variable winning opening 234a is opened. Further, the first count switch SW1 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric utility 1 is activated. In the present embodiment, since the second count switch SW2 is in an effective state until the period set by the special electric winning combination 2 winning detection timer has elapsed even after the first variable winning opening 234a is in the open state, When the 1 variable winning opening 234a is in an open state, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a in the previous round may be detected as a winning through the second count switch SW2.

  Thereafter, when the third V opening time elapses and the timing of tc11 is reached, the driving of the probability change operation region solenoid SOL3 is stopped and the V shutter 2352a is changed from the opened state to the closed state. Thereafter, when the period set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer elapses, the second count switch SW2 becomes invalid at the timing of tc12. After that, when the third V passage effective time elapses and the timing of tc13 is reached, the probability variation operating region changes from the valid state to the invalid state.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example of specific effects in the pachinko machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the present embodiment, rounds 1 to 14 are rounds where the first variable prize slot 234a is opened, and rounds 15 are rounds where the second variable prize slot 235a is opened, but the first variable prize slot 234a is round. The round to be opened and the round to be opened by the second variable winning opening 235a can be arbitrarily set. This production example shows a specific production example in the case of 15R special big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (a), “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, which is a combination of losing decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. Also, any one of the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, the third special figure 1 hold display h13, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. Are also displayed in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 178, the first special figure display device 212, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the second special figure display device 214, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are also shown. In FIG. 178 (a), since there are four variable display hold numbers in FIG. 1, four lamps in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are lit.

  In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed as “Special Figure I”, which is a lost symbol, and the second special figure display device 214 is stopped and displayed as “Special Figure f”, which is a lost symbol. Yes. In the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 variably displayed corresponding to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 and the display state of the second special symbol display device 214. The special figure 2 and the 4th symbol t2 variably displayed are displayed. In FIG. 178 (a), the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 correspond to the “special symbol I” stopped on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, a white circle that is a lost symbol is stopped. It is displayed in the displayed state. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is in a state in which, for example, a white square mark that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the “special figure f” that is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214. It is displayed. In FIG. 178 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 and the 4th symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 and the 4th symbol t2 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbol that has been stopped can be recognized. However, in actuality, the symbols that are stopped and displayed are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special figure 1 4th symbol t1 and the special figure 2 4th symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner recognizable to the player.

  In FIG. 178 (b), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, and only the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed. In addition, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 178 (b) has started the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decorative symbols. It should be noted that various effects are possible in the decorative symbol variation display, and such an effect executed during the decorative symbol variation display is an example of the symbol variation rendering. The symbol variation effect can be executed not only by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 but also by voice output from the speaker 120, blinking of various lamps 418, and the like. In addition, the symbol variation effect may include a prefetch notice effect, a notice effect in the change, and the like. During the symbol variation display, the first special figure display device 212 repeats blinking in which all of the seven segments are turned on, turned off for a moment, and all of the seven segments are turned on again. In response to the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed in a manner that the colors shown in the circles change into a plurality of types.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the first stop and the second stop, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. And a reach state is formed. At this time, you may make it perform the effect which alert | reports that it became the reach state. The effect of notifying that the reach state has been reached is an example of a reach effect, and can also be an example of a symbol variation effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display that develops into super reach. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner. Such an effect in super reach is an example of a super reach effect, and can also be referred to as an example of a symbol variation effect.

  After that, when the super reach is finished, as shown in FIG. 178 (e), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the third stop, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The symbol begins to fluctuate. In other words, a temporary stop display is made with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (f), the special figure A, which is the 15R special big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the first figure 4 has a first symbol t1. The black circle symbol corresponding to “Special Figure A” that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. In accordance with this, the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, and one special game of variable game is completed.

  When “Special Figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 executes a big hit start effect as shown in FIG. 178 (g). At this time, a display for instructing right-handed is also performed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit start effect ends and the first round is entered, as shown in FIG. 178 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), a display to that effect is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. "First time" is displayed. In the lower center part of FIG. 178 (h), the control state in the main control unit 300 is shown, indicating that the control state is the first round of the big hit game.

  FIG. 178 (i) shows the contents of the effect in the fourth round. As shown in FIG. 178 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is determined whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable winning award 235a is open for a long time in the fifteenth round and is easy to pass V. The suggested promotion effect is performed, and as a result, the content of the effect that succeeded in the promotion effect is executed. That is, it is informed that the game is a big hit game in which the probability change transition condition is easily established. As shown in FIG. 178 (i), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the fourth round. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening is shown. In FIG. 178 (i), three gaming balls have won the first variable winning opening 234a. It has been shown.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 14th round, an effect as shown in FIG. 178 (j) is executed. In other words, as shown in FIG. 178 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 14th round of the jackpot game, and allows V to pass in the next round, that is, the 15th round. “Aim at V at next R” is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to reliably pass V. As shown in FIG. 178 (j), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the 14th round. FIG. 178 (j) shows that seven game balls have won the first variable winning opening 234a.

  Thereafter, at the fifteenth round, the second variable prize opening 235a is opened, and the V shutter 2352a is opened to facilitate passage of the V. The decorative symbol display device 208 uses FIG. 178 (k). As shown in FIG. 5, the display indicating that the game is in the fifteenth round is performed, and the display “V Aim” for promoting the passage of V is performed. As shown in FIG. 178 (k), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the 15th round. Further, as shown in FIG. 178 (k), the number of winning game balls to the second variable winning opening 235a is zero.

  When the game ball passes (passes V) to the probability changing operation area in the second variable prize opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (l), as shown in FIG. 178 (m), a decorative symbol display is displayed. The device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. That is, the display of “V”, which is a notification that the probability change has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that V has passed. FIG. 178 (m) shows that eleven game balls have won the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, an over winning is generated at the timing shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, when the 15th round is completed, a big hit game end effect is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 178 (n). In the jackpot game described above, the probability change transition condition is established by passing V in the 15th round. (High probability state). For this reason, in the end effect of the big hit game, “Yoshimune mode entry” indicating that the transition to the probability change state is displayed (probability change effect) is performed.

  When the big hit game is finished as described above, the state shifts to a probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) and, as shown in FIG. The “Yoshimune Mode” effect is executed, and “Defeat the enemy and hit the jackpot” is explained to explain the contents of the jackpot display. At this time, since there was no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 and there were three hold of the variable display of the special figure 1, the hold (the first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display 212 is started, and the decoration symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. The decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the remaining number of symbol variation displays in which the probability variation state can be executed is displayed at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is decremented by one each time symbol variation display is started. Further, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 2 hold display h21, the second special figure 2 hold display h22, the third special figure 2 hold display h23, and the fourth special figure 2 hold display are displayed. Although h24 is displayed, since there is no hold of the variable display of the special figure 2, it is displayed that both are blank. In addition, the display of the number of consecutive resorts and the display for instructing the right-hand hit, which have been displayed in the big hit game, are continued.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display of the first special figure display device 212, if there are at least four game balls winning in the second special figure start port 232, the fluctuation display of the four special figures 2 is suspended. Then, as shown in FIG. 178 (p), all the four holding lamps in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned on. In addition, in the first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24, the hold display in the default display mode is performed.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing a step-by-step state of the big hit game with the 15R special big hit.

  FIG. 179 shows the decorative symbol display device 208, a first variable winning opening 234a that is a first attacker, and a second variable winning opening 235a that is a second attacker, and corresponds to the first variable winning opening 234a. Corresponding to the number of balls entered to the first variable winning port 234a, the main control unit winning counter 1, the sub control unit winning counter 1, and the second variable winning port 235a, the ball entering the second variable winning port 235 Number, main control unit winning counter 2 and sub-control unit winning counter 2 are shown. Further, FIG. 179 also shows the speaker 120. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are not shown. ing.

  FIG. 179 (a) shows that the 14th round is being executed in the jackpot game with the 15R special jackpot. As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 14th round of the jackpot game and prompts the player to pass V in the next round, that is, the 15th round. The message “Aim for V at next R” is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that have been confirmed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal game state), a display to that effect is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. "First time" is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1, a black circle symbol corresponding to “special figure A” stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 179 (a), seven game balls to the first variable winning opening 234a are effectively won, and further, one game ball is received by the first variable winning opening 234a, and still the first count switch SW1. The state of not passing through is shown. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening (winning number display) is shown. In FIG. 179 (a), seven games to the first variable winning opening 234a are shown. “7” is displayed corresponding to the winning of the ball.

  In FIG. 179 (b), the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes “10” and the number of winnings to the first variable winning opening 234a is the maximum winning number, so the first variable winning opening 234a is closed and the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. The variable winning opening 234a is maintained in the closed state. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 14R characters. That is, in FIG. 179 (b), it is shown that it is in the above-mentioned remaining sphere detection state. Since the value of the sub-control unit winning counter 1 is “10”, the winning number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “10”. In FIG. 179 (b), one game ball (remaining ball) that has been accepted by the first variable winning opening 234a but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1 rolls in the first variable winning opening 234a. Is shown. This game ball is the eleventh game ball to be awarded to the first variable winning port 234a, and can be said to be a game ball that will be won beyond the maximum number of wins (over winning).

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 179 (c), when the remaining sphere detection state ends and the interval between rounds is reached, the 14R character display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears. In this embodiment, the round number display is erased at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. However, the round number display may be erased at the timing at which the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. Good. In FIG. 179 (c), the game ball that is rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a in FIG. 179 (b) has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. It is shown.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 179 (d), the fifteenth round is started. The second variable winning opening 235a shown in FIG. 179 (d) is opened, and the second variable winning opening 235a is in the open state. At this time, the V shutter 2352a is in an open state, and the V passage is easy. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 179 (d), the 15R character display indicating the 15th round is performed, and “V Aim” for promoting the passage of V is called. Display is also performed. Also in FIG. 179 (d), it is shown that the game ball that is rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. . As described above, also in this embodiment, even after the round (15th round) is started, the game balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the previous round (14th round) are still winning. It may become the state which is not. Note that FIG. 179 (d) shows a state in which one game ball has entered the second variable winning opening 235a but has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (e), after the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (d) passes through the second count switch SW2, the V passing switch SW3 is set. After passing, as shown in FIG. 179 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability variation has been confirmed. On the other hand, FIG. 179 (f) shows a state in which the game ball rolling in the first variable prize winning opening 234a in FIG. 179 (d) has passed through the first count switch SW1. At this time, since the special electric combination 1 winning detection timer is set and the passing of the game ball to the first count switch SW1 is effectively handled, it is treated as an effective winning to the first variable winning opening 234a, The main control unit winning counter 1 and the sub control unit winning counter 1 both count “11”, which is the eleventh winning. Then, an over winning is generated by the eleventh winning through the first variable winning opening 234a, and as shown in FIG. 179 (f), an over winning sound for notifying the fact is output from the speaker 120. In other words, in the effect example shown in FIG. 179 (f), an effect performed by passing the game ball to the probability variation operating region (V passing effect) and an effect performed by over winning the first variable winning opening 234a (over winning) It is shown that the effect is superimposed and performed. Depending on the timing of the game ball passing to the probability variation operation area and the timing of occurrence of the over winning, the over winning effect may be performed after the V passing effect is performed, or the over winning effect is performed. In some cases, the V passing effect may be performed later, and the V passing effect and the over winning effect may be started simultaneously. Further, when an over winning to the first variable winning opening 234a occurs during the execution of the V passing effect, the over winning effect may not be performed. Needless to say, an over winning effect may be executed when an over winning for the second variable winning opening 235a occurs.

<Other embodiments>
Next, another embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181. Here, FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining an example of an over-winning effect, and FIG. 181 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner a state in which there is a power interruption / recovery in the big hit game.

  FIG. 180 (a-1) shows a state in which the eighth round in the jackpot game is being executed, and shows a state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is in an open state. In addition, 8R character display (round number display) is performed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (a-1). Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa appears as a big hit game effect, and a big hit effect display including the character C1 is performed. In addition, “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a winning number display indicating the maximum number of winnings for each round and the number of game balls won in the first variable winning opening 234 since the start of the round is displayed. ing. 180 also shows the speaker 120. In FIG. 180 (a-1), nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won in the eighth round, and two game balls (the tenth and eleventh) are the first. 1 shows a state in which the first variable winning opening 234 has been received and has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, the number of game balls won in the first variable prize opening 234 becomes ten, and the number of wins in the first variable prize slot 234 becomes the maximum number of prizes, so the first variable prize slot 234 is closed and the first variable prize slot 234 is closed. The variable winning opening 234 is in the closed state. At this time, the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234 has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1. Thereafter, in the period in which the remaining ball is detected or the period between rounds, when the 11th game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1, As shown at 180 (a-2), an over winning sound is output from the speaker 120. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not count and display the number of game balls over won in the winning number display, and the number of game balls won in the first variable prize opening 234 after the start of the round. “10/10” is displayed.

  FIG. 180 (b-1) shows a state in which the eighth round in the jackpot game is being executed, and shows a state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is in an open state. In addition, 8R character display (round number display) is made in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (b-1). Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa appears as a big hit game effect, and a big hit effect display including the character C1 is performed. In addition, “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a total number display of winnings that can specify the number of winning balls won by winning a variable winning opening from the start of the big hit game to the present is displayed. In other words, in FIG. 180 (b-1), 79 game balls have won the first variable winning opening 234 from the start of the big hit game to the present, so in this production example, the first variable winning opening is Since the number of winning balls for winning 234 is 15 and the maximum number of winnings in one round is 10, the number of winning balls won is 1185, and “1185pt” indicating that is displayed as the total number of winnings. Yes. In FIG. 180 (b-1), nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won in the eighth round, and two game balls (tenth and eleventh) Is received by the first variable prize opening 234, and the state where it has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1 is shown.

  Thereafter, the number of game balls won in the first variable prize opening 234 becomes ten, and the number of wins in the first variable prize slot 234 becomes the maximum number of prizes, so the first variable prize slot 234 is closed and the first variable prize slot 234 is closed. The variable winning opening 234 is in the closed state. At this time, the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234 has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1. Thereafter, when the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1 and an over winning is generated, as shown in FIG. A winning sound is output. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not count and display the number of game balls that have been over-winned in the total number display of winnings, but is obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234 after the big hit game has started. The number of winning balls is 1200, and “1200 pt” indicating that is displayed as the total number of winning prizes.

  FIG. 180 (c-1) shows a state in which the eighth round in the jackpot game is being executed, and shows a state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is in an open state. In addition, 8R character display (round number display) is performed at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (c-1). Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa appears as a big hit game effect, and a big hit effect display including the character C1 is performed. In addition, “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a winning number display indicating the maximum number of winnings for each round and the number of game balls won in the first variable winning opening 234 since the start of the round is displayed. ing. In FIG. 180 (c-1), nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won in the eighth round, and two game balls (tenth and eleventh) are the first. 1 shows a state in which the first variable winning opening 234 has been received and has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, the number of game balls won in the first variable prize opening 234 becomes ten, and the number of wins in the first variable prize slot 234 becomes the maximum number of prizes, so the first variable prize slot 234 is closed and the first variable prize slot 234 is closed. The variable winning opening 234 is in the closed state. At this time, the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234 has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (c-2), the interval between rounds is set, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the interval between rounds. At this time, the winning number display is erased. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of a second effect unit that starts an interval effect between rounds instead of a winning effect (winning number display) when the first round (8th round) ends. doing. In this production example, in the interval between rounds, the 11th game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1 and an overwinning occurs. In response, an over winning sound is output.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that the speaker 120 functions as an example of a first effect unit capable of starting an over-winning effect during execution of the inter-round interval effect.

  FIG. 181 (a) shows a state in which the eighth round in the jackpot game is being executed, and shows a state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is in an open state. Also, 8R character display (round number display) is performed at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa appears as a big hit game effect, and a big hit effect including the character C1 is performed. In addition, “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a total number display of winnings that can specify the number of winning balls won by winning a variable winning opening from the start of the big hit game to the present is displayed. In other words, in FIG. 181 (a), 79 game balls have been won in the first variable prize opening 234 from the start of the big hit game to the present, so in this production example, the first variable prize opening 234 is entered. Since the number of winning balls for the winning of 15 is 15 and the maximum number of winnings in one round is 10, the number of winning balls acquired is 1185, and “1185pt” indicating that is displayed as the total number of winnings. In FIG. 181 (a), nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won in the eighth round, and two game balls (tenth and eleventh) are the first. 1 shows a state in which the first variable winning opening 234 has been received and has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, the number of game balls won in the first variable prize opening 234 becomes ten, and the number of wins in the first variable prize slot 234 becomes the maximum number of prizes, so the first variable prize slot 234 is closed and the first variable prize slot 234 is closed. The variable winning opening 234 is in the closed state. At this time, the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable prize opening 234 has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1. Thereafter, when the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1 and an over winning is generated, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), an over winning sound is output from the speaker 120. Is output. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (b), the number of game balls over-winned is also counted and displayed on the total number display of winnings. That is, the number of prize balls acquired by winning the first variable prize opening 234 after the jackpot game is started is set to 1215, and “1215pt” indicating that is displayed as the total number of prizes displayed.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 181 (c), the ninth round is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 5C is opened, and the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state, and the big symbol effect display including the character C1 is continued on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, 9R character display (round number display) is performed. In FIG. 181 (c), the first variable winning opening 234 has not been won yet, and the total number display of the winnings remains “1215pt”.

  FIG. 181 (d) shows a state in which power interruption occurs for some reason after the ninth round is started. When the power interruption occurs, the power interruption process (step S408) of the main control unit main loop described above is executed, and the output port in the I / O 310 is cleared. Therefore, the big prize for driving the first variable prize opening 234 is obtained. The drive of the port 1 solenoid is stopped, and the first variable winning port 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state.

  FIG. 181 (e) shows a state immediately after the power is restored and the return activation process in the main control unit power-on process is executed to return to the state before the power interruption. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (e), a character display “recovering power” is displayed as a return display. Further, in the main control unit 300, since the control processing for the big hit game is returned to be executable, the driving of the big winning port 1 solenoid is resumed, and the first variable winning port 234 is changed from the closed state to the opened state. FIG. 181 (e) shows a state where the ninth round is executed.

  After that, a predetermined command (for example, an inter-round interval start command) is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the sub-control unit 400, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round as shown in FIG. Interval production is performed. If a power interruption / recovery occurs during the execution of the big hit game, the data of the sub-control unit winning counter stored in the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 is cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 181 (f), the winning total number display after power restoration is also “0pt”. In the present embodiment, after the power supply is restored, the winning total display is not updated from “0 pt” until the winning game is completed, even if a game ball is won in the variable winning opening. In addition, as shown in FIG. 181 (f), the number of rounds and the “decoration 7” are not displayed after the power supply is restored. In FIG. 181 (f), the eleventh game ball has entered the first variable winning opening 234 while the first variable winning opening 234 of the ninth round is being opened, but the first count is still in progress. A state is shown in which it does not pass through the switch SW1 and rolls in the first variable prize winning opening 234. That is, it can be said that this game ball is a game ball that will be won (over-win) exceeding the maximum number of wins.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 181 (g), when a game ball that has been rolling through the first variable winning opening 234 passes the first count switch SW1 and an over winning is generated, an over winning sound for notifying that effect. Is output.

  In this embodiment, even if a power interruption / recovery occurs during the execution of the big hit game, the data of the sub-control unit winning counter stored in the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 is not cleared. The display of the total number of winnings after power restoration may be the same display as before the power interruption (display of “1215pt”).

  In this embodiment, when power interruption / recovery occurs, the sub control unit (including the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, the control circuit of the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.) returns. Even if the processing is not completed, the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to execute various controls as long as the return process of the main control unit 300 is completed. Therefore, even if a screen indicating that the power is being restored (for example, a display of “power is being restored”) is performed, the main control unit 300 may perform various controls (in this embodiment, if the restoration process is completed). , Jackpot control) can be executed. Here, when a winning to the big winning opening (first variable winning opening 234, second variable winning opening) is detected during the power restoration, the total number of winning prizes is displayed including the amount won during the power restoration. In addition, the same display as before the power interruption may be performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the content of executing the over winning effect when the over winning is generated in the big hit game is described. However, the over winning effect may be executed even when the over winning is generated in the small hit game. Good.

  In the embodiment described above, a plurality of effect means (for example, two or more effect means of the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, the various lamps 418, 532, 542, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246). An over-winning effect may be configured. In this case, if the winning detection timers (special feature 1 winning detection timer, special feature 2 winning detection timer) are set regardless of the timing, An over-winning effect may be performed by a plurality of effect means. In this case, an effect by a plurality of effect means (for example, “animation effect by decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a determined pose animation of Tono-sama character)” and “sound effect such as“ Kean ”output from a speaker”) For example, the data is managed so that the display command corresponding to the over-winning effect and the audio output are one-to-one, or the display command and the audio output are managed separately to match only the output timing. It may be configured so that the timing is synchronized by configuring the timing, or the timing may not be synchronized.

  In addition, an over winning effect is performed by a plurality of effect means (for example, two or more effect means among the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, the various lamps 418, 532, and 542, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246). In some cases, even if a winning detection timer (special electric role 1 winning detection timer, special electric role 2 winning detection timer) is set, some of the presentation means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 among the speakers 120) 120) only performs an over-winning effect (for example, output of a sound effect of “Kean”), and for other effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), an over-winning effect (for example, a determined pose of the character of Tonosama) The animation may not be performed.

  More specifically, when an over-winning has occurred at an interval between rounds, an over-winning effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, and after the start of the next round, the winning detection timer is not set. When an over-winning occurs, an over-winning effect may be executed by a part of the production means. When an over-winning occurs at an interval between rounds, a part of the plurality of effecting means When an over-winning effect is generated and an over-winning event occurs between the start of the next round and the setting of the winning detection timer, the over-winning effect may be executed by a plurality of effect means. Further, for example, when a winning detection timer is set, after the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning end command or after the winning end display timer is set by the main control unit 300, an over winning is achieved. In the event that the occurrence occurs, an over-winning effect may be executed by some effect means. In addition, for example, when a winning detection timer is set, after the big hit game ends and the first sub control unit 400 receives a change waiting command, or the main control unit 300 times out the hit end display timer. In the event that an over-winning has occurred after this, an over-winning effect may be executed by some effect means. Also, for example, when a winning detection timer is set and an over winning occurs after the first sub-control unit 400 receives the first variation start command after the big hit game ends, An over-winning effect may be executed by some effect means. In addition, when an over win is generated in a manner other than the above, an over win effect may be executed by a plurality of effect means. In addition, you may perform operation | movement contrary to these.

  The plurality of effect means may be two or more kinds of effect means. For example, the effect means may be constituted by two or more of display means, sound output means, light emitting means, effect moving means, and the like. Good. Here, the light emitting means may be a single light emitter (LED or lamp), or may be composed of a plurality of light emitters (LED or lamp) mounted on one base, One or a plurality of light emitters may be mounted on a plurality of substrates and configured as one unit. The effect moving means may be provided on the door body, the game board 200, or the like. Here, the door body may or may not include an inner frame (for example, the main body 102).

  Further, the plurality of effect means may be constituted by two or more identical effect means, for example, may be constituted by three effect moving means provided on the game board 200.

In the above description, the over winning effect is realized by the output of the over winning sound by the speaker 120 and the over winning effect display by the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, a light emitting means such as a lamp or a movable movable body such as an effect movable body is realized. It can also be realized by a member.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the second variable winning opening 235 is in an open state or a closed state, it may be a period (first effective period) set by the special electric utility 1 winning detection timer. In this case, since the first over winning sound may be output, there are cases where the player can get a good feeling and improve the interest of the game.

In the above description,
“First rendering means [eg, speaker 120, decorative symbol display device 208];
Second rendering means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208];
Variable winning means [for example, a first variable that can be changed between an easy-to-enter state where the game ball is easy to enter [for example, an open state] and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) where the game ball is difficult to enter. Winning opening 234, second variable winning opening 235],
A passing area [for example, a first passing area, a second passing area] through which a game ball that has entered the variable winning means can pass;
A game machine equipped with
The variable winning means changes to the difficult-to-enter state when the maximum number of winning balls [for example, 10] passes through the passing area after entering the easy-to-enter state. Means,
The first effect means provides an over-winning effect [for example, the over-range shown in FIGS. 164 (g) and 165 (g) when a game ball enters the variable winning means exceeding the maximum number of winnings. 169 (i) to (j) in FIG. 169 (i) to the newly appearing haniwa character C3 as shown in FIGS. 170 (k2 ′) to (k3 ′) ) Is an effect means capable of executing an effect display in which the thousand box image C5 shown in FIG.
The second effect means is an effect that changes in accordance with the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize means (hereinafter referred to as “winning effects [for example, winning number display shown in FIGS. 163, 165 to 168, The winning total number display shown in FIG. 164] ”).
The winning effect is a number in which the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from the time when the variable winning means is in the easy entering state to the difficult entering state corresponds to the maximum winning number [ For example, the production can change until 10].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there may be a case where a superiority can be given to a player who has noticed an over-winning effect.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible to prevent the effect that changes according to the number of winnings from being included in the effect for the over winning portion. There is a case where it is possible to improve the interest of the game without feeling.

  Here, the first effect means may be a means for producing an effect by displaying an image such as a display device, or a light emitting means such as an LED, in addition to a means for producing an effect by outputting sound such as a speaker. It may be a movable means such as a movable body for production, or may be a means for vibrating a member directly operated by the player, such as a ball launching handle or a production button.

  The second effect means may be a means for producing an effect by outputting sound such as a speaker, a light emitting means such as an LED, etc. in addition to a means for producing an effect by displaying an image on a display device or the like. It may be a movable means such as a movable body, or may be a means for vibrating a member directly operated by a player, such as a ball launching handle or an effect button.

  Further, the first effect means and the second effect means may be different kinds of effect means or the same kind of effect means. Further, the first effect means and the second effect means may be the same effect means (for example, the first effect means and the second effect means are realized by the display means).

  Further, the over winning effect may be different from the effect indicating the winning that is not the over winning (for example, the effect executed when the first to tenth game balls win the variable winning means) or the same. It may be.

  The second effect means is a means capable of executing a third effect different from the over-winning effect or the winning effect during the period in which the over-winning effect is being executed. The third effect may be an effect that can be executed during the period in which the big hit game is executed before the occurrence of power interruption / recovery.

  Further, the winning effect during the period in which the over winning effect is being executed may be an effect that can be executed in the execution period of the big hit game after the occurrence of power interruption / recovery.

  Further, the effect when there is only one over-winning and the effect when there are only two over-winnings may be the same or different. Further, the contents of the effects may be different depending on the number of over winning prizes, or the same effects may be applied to all the over winning numbers.

  Further, when the number of over winnings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 90 or more in one big hit game, 6 or more in one round), it may be determined as an error. At this time, you may make it alert | report to a player or a game store.

  The variable winning means may be changeable only between the easy entry state and the difficult entry state, or may be changed to a state other than the easy entry state and the difficult entry state. May be. Further, the variable winning means may always change between the easy entry state and the difficult entry state, or may not change between the easy entry state and the difficult entry state.

  In addition, the passing area may pass only the game ball that has entered the variable winning means, or may pass game balls other than the game ball that has entered the variable winning means. . Further, the passing area may be such that a game ball that has entered the variable winning means passes through, or a game ball that has entered the variable winning means may not pass.

  Further, the first effect means may be capable of executing an over-winning effect only when a game ball enters the variable winning means exceeding the maximum winning number, or variable exceeding the maximum winning number. In addition to the case where a game ball enters the winning means, an over winning effect may be executed. In addition, the first directing means may always execute an over winning effect when a game ball enters the variable winning means exceeding the maximum winning number, or the variable winning exceeding the maximum winning number may be performed. Even if a game ball enters the means, there may be a case where the over winning effect is not executed.

  Further, the second effect means may be capable of executing only the winning effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the winning effect. Further, the second effect means may always execute the winning effect, or may not execute the winning effect.

  Also, the winning effect changes until the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means reaches the number corresponding to the maximum winning number from when the variable winning means becomes easy to enter to when it becomes difficult to enter. The number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from when the variable winning means becomes easy to enter until it becomes difficult to enter corresponds to the maximum number of winnings. It may be possible other than changing until it reaches the number to be. In addition, the winning effect always changes until the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means reaches the number corresponding to the maximum winning number from when the variable winning means becomes easy to enter to when it becomes difficult to enter. The number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from the time when the variable winning means becomes easy to enter to the difficult state becomes the number corresponding to the maximum number of winnings. It may not change until.

In addition, “the second effect means is effect means capable of executing the winning effect even when the over winning effect is not executed [for example, as shown in FIG. Even if the number of game balls is less than the maximum winning number and no over winning sound is output, the winning number is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect means may be capable of executing only the winning effect even when the over winning effect is not executed, or other than the winning effect even when the over winning effect is not executed. Production may also be possible. The second effect means may always execute the winning effect even when the over winning effect is not executed, or does not execute the winning effect even when the over winning effect is not executed. There may be cases.

In addition, the game control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] capable of executing the jackpot game,
The winning effect is an effect that changes depending on the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from the start of one round in the jackpot game to the end of the round [for example, FIG. Winning number display shown in FIG. 165],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there may be a case where the number of game balls won during the round can be easily grasped.

In addition, the game control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] capable of executing the jackpot game,
The winning effect is an effect that changes in accordance with the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game [for example, the winning shown in FIG. Total number display],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the number of game balls won in the variable winning means during the big hit game can be easily grasped.

In addition, “the second presentation means is a period between the end of the first round in the jackpot game and the start of the second round started after the first round. It is an effect means capable of executing an interval effect [for example, an interval effect between rounds shown in FIG. 160 (e), FIG. 170 (k1 ′) to (k3 ′), FIG. 180 (c-2), etc.]
The over-winning effect is an effect that can be started during the execution of the inter-round interval effect [For example, as shown in FIG. 170 (k2 ′), if there is an over-winning effect during the execution of the inter-round interval effect, An effect display in which the image C5 falls from above the display screen is performed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the player is provided with a sense of benefit by providing that there is an over-winning during the inter-round interval effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the second effect means may be capable of executing only the inter-round interval effect in a period from the end of the first round in the jackpot game to the start of the second round. And in the period from the end of the first round in the jackpot game to the start of the second round, effects other than the inter-round interval effects may be executable. In addition, the second effect means may execute the interval effect between the rounds in the period from the end of the first round in the jackpot game to the start of the second round, The inter-round interval effect may not be executed during the period from the end of the first round in the big hit game to the start of the second round.

  The over winning effect may be started only during execution of the inter-round interval effect, or may be started other than during execution of the inter-round interval effect. In addition, the over winning effect may be always started during the execution of the interval effect between rounds, or may not be started during the execution of the interval effect between rounds.

Further, “the second effect means is effect means for starting the interval effect between rounds instead of the winning effect when the first round is completed [for example, FIG. 180 (c-2). As shown in the above, when the inter-round interval effect is performed, the winning number display is deleted],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the round is going to change.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Sound output means [eg, speaker 120];
A first attacker [e.g., a first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235)],
A second attacker [for example, the second variable winning opening 235 (first variable winning opening 234)],
A first passing area [for example, a first passing area] through which a game ball entering the first attacker can pass;
A game machine equipped with
After the first attacker is in the open state, the first attacker is in the closed state when a first maximum number of winning balls [for example, 10] passes through the first passing area. Attacker,
Until the first valid period [e.g., a time set by the special electric utility 1 winning detection timer (e.g., 3 seconds)] has elapsed since the first attacker changed from the open state to the closed state. It is configured so that the passing of the game ball to the first passing area is effective,
After the first attacker has changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently the second attacker has changed to the open state, the game ball is in the first effective period until the first valid period elapses. By passing through the passing area, the sound output means may output a first over winning sound [for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (g), the first variable winning opening 234 in the first round. The eleventh game ball that entered the ball becomes a prize after the second round starts, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the sound output means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand characterized by the sound output means.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, the first over winning sound may be output during the first effective period regardless of the open / closed state of the second attacker. Giving and improving the fun of the game.

  Here, the first passing area may be such that only the game ball that has entered the first attacker can pass, or a game ball other than the game ball that has entered the first attacker can also pass. It may be anything. In addition, the first passing area may be the one through which the game ball that has entered the first attacker passes, or the game ball that has entered the first attacker may not pass through. .

  In addition, after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state and then the second attacker changes to the open state, the game ball passes through the first passing area until the first effective period elapses. Thus, the first over winning sound may be always output by the sound output means, or the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and then the second attacker changes to the open state. After that, the first over winning sound may not be output by the sound output means because the game ball passes through the first passing area until the first effective period elapses.

In addition, “a configuration in which the passing of the game ball to the first passing area is also valid during the period in which the first attacker is in the open state [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, When the special electric combination 1 is activated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to an effective state, and when the special electric combination 2 is activated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to an effective state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when the first attacker is in the open state, the passing of the game ball to the first passing area may be reliably enabled.

Further, “the first maximum number of winning balls passes through the first passing area, so that the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and then the second attacker Even after the change to the open state, if the game ball passes through the first passing area and is in the first effective period, the sound output means causes the first overwinning. Configured to output sound,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first over winning sound is always output during the first effective period regardless of the open / closed state of the second attacker, so that the player can feel more effective. Giving and improving the fun of the game.

In addition, “the second passing area [for example, the second passing area] through which the game ball that has entered the second attacker can pass,
The second attacker is in the closed state when the second maximum winning number [for example, 10] game balls have passed through the second passage area after the open state. Is an attacker that changes to
During the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, it is configured that the passing of the game ball to the second passing area is valid [for example, as shown in FIG. Is activated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to an effective state, and when the electric utility 1 is activated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to an effective state]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, when the second attacker is in the open state, the passing of the game ball to the second passing area may be reliably enabled.

  Here, the second passing area may be one in which only a game ball that has entered the second attacker can pass, or a game ball other than the game ball that has entered the second attacker can also pass. It may be anything. In addition, the second passing area may be the one through which the game ball that has entered the second attacker may pass, or the game ball that has entered the second attacker may not pass through.

In addition, “a second valid period [for example, a time set by the special power winning combination 2 winning detection timer (for example, 3 seconds)] has elapsed since the second attacker changed from the open state to the closed state. Until the second passing area is configured to be effective for passing the game ball,
After the second attacker has changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently the first attacker has changed to the open state, the game ball is in the second state until the second validity period elapses. By passing through the passage area, the sound output means may output a second over winning sound [for example, as shown in FIG. 162 (k), the second variable winning opening 235 in the second round. The eleventh game ball that entered the ball is awarded after the third round is started, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the over winning sound is output for each attacker, the chance that the player can hear the over winning sound can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. There is.

  Here, after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and then the first attacker changes to the open state, the game ball passes through the second passing area until the second effective period elapses. By doing so, it may be configured that the second over winning sound is surely output by the sound output means, or the second attacker is changed from the open state to the closed state, and then the first attacker is changed to the open state. After the change, the second over winning sound may not be output by the sound output means by passing the game ball through the second passing area until the second effective period elapses.

In addition, “including a display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of effect display,
The display means displays in accordance with the number of game balls that have passed through the first passing area (hereinafter referred to as “first passing display [for example, the number of winnings in the first round shown in FIG. 163 (b)”). Display or the number of winnings displayed in the upper attacker field shown in FIG. 165] ”).
The display means displays in accordance with the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area (hereinafter referred to as “second passage display [for example, the number of winnings in the second round shown in FIG. 163 (f)”). Display or the number of winnings displayed in the lower attacker field shown in FIG. 165] ”).
The display means is means capable of starting display of the first passage display when the first attacker is in the open state [for example, in FIGS. 163 (b) and 165 (b) As shown, when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, a winning number display corresponding to the number of winning balls to the first variable winning opening 234 is started],
The display means is means capable of starting display of the second passage display when the second attacker is in the open state [for example, in FIGS. 163 (f) and 165 (f) As shown, when the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, the winning number display corresponding to the number of winning balls to the second variable winning opening 235 is started],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first passing display is started when the first attacker is opened, and the second passing display is started when the second attacker is opened. The player may be able to easily grasp the number of winnings for each attacker.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the first over winning sound may be output in a state where the second passage display is being performed, so that the player feels a sense of profits and is interested in the game. It may be possible to improve.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the plurality of types of effect display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of effect display, or may not execute a plurality of types of effect display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first passage display and the second passage display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first passage display and the second passage display. There may be. The display means may always display the first passage display and the second passage display, or may not display the first passage display and the second passage display.

  The display means may be capable of starting only the display of the first passage display when the first attacker is in the open state, or when the first attacker is in the open state. In addition, display other than the display of the first passage display may be started. The display means may always start displaying the first passing display when the first attacker is in the open state, or when the first attacker is in the open state. In some cases, the display of the first passage display may not be started.

  Further, the display means may be capable of starting only the display of the second passage display when the second attacker is in the open state, or when the second attacker is in the open state. In addition, display other than the display of the second passage display may be started. In addition, the display means may always start displaying the second passage display when the second attacker is in the open state, or when the second attacker is in the open state. In some cases, the display of the second passage display may not be started.

Further, “the display means changes to the first passing display when the second attacker enters the open state after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. This is means for starting the display of the second passing display [For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (f), the winning number display is cleared and “0” at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. The winning number display changes from the display corresponding to the number of winnings to the first variable winning port 234 to the display corresponding to the number of winning balls to the second variable winning port 235],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to recognize whether the number of winning balls for the first attacker or the number of winning balls for the second attacker.

Further, “the display means changes to the second passage display when the first attacker enters the open state after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. [For example, when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, the winning number display is cleared to “0”, and the winning number display is the second variable. From the display corresponding to the number of winnings to the winning opening 235, the display corresponds to the number of winning balls to the first variable winning opening 234],
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to recognize whether the number of winning balls for the first attacker or the number of winning balls for the second attacker.

Further, “the display means displays the first passage display when the second attacker enters the open state after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. This is means for starting the display of the second passing display as it is [For example, as shown in FIG. 165 (f), even if the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, it corresponds to the first variable winning opening 234. The winning number display to be performed is maintained as “10” indicating that ten winnings are made, and the winning number display corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 is started],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the number of winnings for the first attacker and the number of winnings for the second attacker can be clearly recognized.

Further, “the display means displays the second passage display when the first attacker enters the open state after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. This is means for starting display of the first passing display [for example, even if the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, the winning display corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained, and Start displaying the number of winnings corresponding to one variable winning opening 234],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the number of winnings for the first attacker and the number of winnings for the second attacker can be clearly recognized.

Further, “game control means capable of executing a big hit game [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300];
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of effect display;
With
The display means is a display that changes in accordance with the total number of game balls that have passed through the first passing area and game balls that have passed through the second passing area during the execution of the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “first game”). Display the total number of winnings as shown in FIG. 164, for example, to display a variable winning opening 234 between the start of the jackpot game and the present time. 235 display the number of prize balls won by winning 235 in an identifiable manner],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, even if the second attacker is in the open state, the third passing display is continuously displayed, so that it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to recognize how much the attacker has been able to win since the start of the big hit game.

  Here, the game control means may be capable of executing only the jackpot game, or may be capable of executing other than the jackpot game. Further, the game control means may always execute a big hit game or may not execute a big hit game.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the plurality of types of effect display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of effect display, or may not execute a plurality of types of effect display.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third pass display during execution of the big hit game, or may display other than the third pass display during execution of the big hit game. It may be a thing. Further, the display means may always display the third pass display during the execution of the big hit game, or may not display the third pass display during the execution of the big hit game. Good.

In addition, “the second attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state during a period in which the first attacker is in the open state [for example, as shown in FIG. Is in a non-operating state]
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state during the period in which the second attacker is in the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 1 is not activated]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, even if the first attacker is in the closed state and the second attacker is in the open state, the first over winning sound can be output during the first effective period. In some cases, the player may feel that the first over winning sound is being output even though the second attacker is in the open state, and the player can feel a profit.

In addition, “first control means [for example, main control unit 300];
Second control means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400] capable of executing control of the sound output means;
With
The first control means can transmit first passage information [for example, a big prize winning command] to the second control means when a game ball has passed to the first passage area. Control means,
The second control means is a control means having a first storage area [for example, the sub control unit winning counter 1 in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400]
The second control means receives the first passage information (hereinafter referred to as “first passage”) until the first validity period elapses after the first attacker enters the open state. It is a control means capable of counting "number of times")
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counted first passage count in the first storage area,
When the value indicating the first number of passes stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, the second control means sends the first output to the sound output means. It is a control means capable of executing control to output an over winning sound,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, an area for storing the number of winnings corresponding to the first attacker is provided, so that the number of winnings to the first attacker can be reliably grasped even after the second attacker is in an open state. Therefore, the presentation can be performed according to the information from the first control means, and the player may be relieved.

  Here, the second control means may be capable of executing only control of the sound output means, or may be capable of executing control of means other than the control of the sound output means. Further, the second control means may necessarily execute control of the sound output means, or may not execute control of the sound output means.

  Further, the first control means may be capable of transmitting the first passage information only to the second control means when the game ball has passed to the first passage area, When the game ball has passed to the first passing area, the first passing information may be transmitted to a control means other than the second control means. Further, the first control means may be capable of transmitting the first passage information to the second control means only when the game ball has passed to the first passage area, In addition to the case where the game ball has passed to the first passage area, the first passage information may be transmitted to a control means other than the second control means. Further, when a game ball has passed to the first passage area, the first passage information may be necessarily transmitted to the second control means, or the game to the first passage area may be transmitted. When there is a passage of a sphere, the first passage information may not be transmitted to the second control means.

  Further, the second control means may be capable of counting only the first number of passes, or may be capable of counting times other than the first number of passes. Further, the second control means may always count the first number of passes, or may not count the first number of passes.

  Further, the second control means may be capable of storing the counted first number of passages only in the first storage area, or the counted first number of passages other than the first storage area. It may be something that can also be stored in the area. The second control means may always store the counted first number of passages in the first storage area, or does not store the counted first number of passages in the first storage area. There may be cases.

  Further, the second control means outputs a first over winning sound to the sound output means when the value indicated by the first number of passes stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number. Only the control to be output may be executable, or when the value indicating the first number of passes stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, the sound output means Controls other than the control for outputting the first over winning sound may be executable. In addition, the second control means outputs the first over winning sound to the sound output means only when the value indicated by the first number of passes stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number. It may be possible to execute the control to output, or even in cases other than the case where the value indicated by the first number of passes stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, The sound output means may be capable of executing control to output the first over winning sound. In addition, when the value of the first number of passes stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum number of winnings, the control for causing the sound output means to output the first over winning sound is surely executed. The first over winning sound may be output to the sound output means when the value of the first passing number stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number. There is a case where the control to be executed is not executed.

  The first control means is not limited to the main control unit 300 but may be a payout control unit 600, or may be composed of only the main control unit 300, or the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 It may be constituted by. That is, the first control means may be constituted by a plurality of control means.

In addition, “equipped with a first passage detection means [for example, a first count switch SW1 (second count switch SW2)] capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the first passage region;
The first attacker is an attacker that enters the closed state when the first passage detecting means detects the passage of the first maximum number of winning balls after entering the open state. Yes,
A configuration in which the passage of the game ball by the first passage detection means can be detected until the first validity period elapses after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 159, the first count switch SW1 is maintained in a valid state until the period set by the special electric utility 1 winning detection timer elapses]
The first passage detection means until the first valid period elapses after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state and subsequently the second attacker changes to the open state. When the passing of the game ball is detected by the above, the first over winning sound may be output by the sound output means [For example, as shown in FIG. After the eleventh game ball that entered the 1 variable winning opening 234 starts the second round, the winning is made before the period set by the special electric player 1 winning detection timer elapses, and the over winning sound is heard from the speaker 120. Is output from]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, even if the first attacker is in the closed state and the second attacker is in the open state, the first over winning sound can be output during the first effective period. There may be a case where it seems that the first over winning sound is output even though the second attacker is in an open state, and the player can feel a sense of profit.

  Here, after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and then the second attacker changes to the open state, the first passage detection means causes the game ball to be When the passage is detected, the first over winning sound may be always output by the sound output means, or the first attacker is changed from the open state to the closed state, and then the second attacker is The first over winning sound is not output by the sound output means when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first passage detection means until the first valid period elapses after changing to the open state. There may be.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above explanation,
“Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of effects;
A first variable winning means [for example, a first variable winning opening 234] that can be changed between an easy entry state where a game ball is easy to enter and a difficult entry state where a game ball is difficult to enter;
A second variable winning means [for example, a second variable winning opening 235] that can be changed between the easy entering state and the difficult entering state;
A first passing area [for example, a first passing area] through which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first winning effect [for example, a display of the number of winnings related to the first variable winning port 234 shown in FIG. 166 (b)]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second winning effect [for example, displaying the number of winnings related to the second variable winning port 235 shown in FIG. 167 (f)]
The first winning effect is a winning effect that can be started when a game ball passes through the first passing area during execution of a big hit game [for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (b), When the winning of the game ball to the 1 variable winning opening 234 is valid, the winning number display relating to the first variable winning opening 234 is updated and displayed]
The second winning effect is a winning effect that can be started when a game ball wins the second variable winning means during execution of the jackpot game [for example, as shown in FIG. 167 (h). When the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning opening 235 is valid, the winning number display relating to the second variable winning opening 235 is updated and displayed]
The second winning effect is a winning effect that can be started even when a game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state. For example, as shown in FIG. 167 (g), when the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 is validated after the next round starts, the number of winnings related to the second variable winning opening 235 The display is refreshed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, although the directing means is executed as the winning effect of the second variable winning means despite having entered the first variable winning means, the player is given a sense of incongruity, In some cases, one variable winning means and the second variable winning means can be watched.

  Here, the directing means may be capable of executing only the first winning effect and the second winning effect, or may execute effects other than the first winning effect and the second winning effect. May be. Further, the effect means may always execute the first prize effect and the second prize effect, or may not execute the first prize effect and the second prize effect.

  In addition, the first variable winning means may be changeable only in the easy entry state and difficult entry state, or in a state other than the easy entry state and difficult entry state. It may be. In addition, the first variable winning means may always change between the easy entry state and the difficult entry state, or may not change between the easy entry state and the difficult entry state. Good.

  Further, the second variable winning means may be changeable only in the easy entry state and difficult entry state, or in a state other than the easy entry state and difficult entry state. It may be. Further, the second variable winning means may always change between the easy entry state and the difficult entry state, or may not change between the easy entry state and the difficult entry state. Good.

  Further, the first passing area may be one in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass, or a game ball other than a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means. Can also be passed. In addition, the first passing area may be one in which the game ball that has entered the first variable winning means passes, or the game ball that has entered the first variable winning means may not pass. There may be.

  Further, the first winning effect may be started only when a game ball passes through the first passing area during execution of the jackpot game. It may be possible to start other than when the game ball passes through the passing area. Further, the first winning effect may be started when the game ball passes through the first passing area during execution of the jackpot game, or during the execution of the jackpot game, There may be a case where it does not start when a game ball passes through the passing area.

  Further, the second winning effect may be started only when a game ball wins the second variable winning means during execution of the jackpot game, or during the execution of the jackpot game, It may be possible to start other than when the game ball wins the second variable winning means. Further, the second winning effect may be started when a game ball wins the second variable winning means during execution of the jackpot game, or during the execution of the jackpot game, It may not start when a game ball wins the variable winning means.

  Further, the second winning effect may be started only when the game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy entering state, It may be possible to start other than when the game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy entering state. The second winning effect may be always started when the game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state. There may be a case where the game does not start when the game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state.

  The effect means can be realized by sound output means for outputting sound, display means capable of effect display, light emitting means, and the like. For example, if the production means is a sound output means, it can be realized by outputting a winning sound corresponding to a winning to the first variable winning means or the second variable winning means.

  Moreover, the aspect of a 1st winning effect and the aspect of a 2nd winning effect may be the same, and may differ.

In addition, “the first winning effect is a winning effect that changes in accordance with the number of game balls that have passed through the first passing area [for example, the winning number display in the first round shown in FIG. , Winning number display displayed in the upper attacker field shown in FIG. 165],
The second winning effect is a winning effect that changes in accordance with the number of game balls won in the second variable winning means [for example, the winning number display in the second round shown in FIG. The number of winnings displayed in the lower attacker field shown in 165].
A game ball characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the number of winnings to the first variable winning means and the number of winnings to the second variable winning means by the first winning effect and the second winning effect. There is a case.

In addition, “when the first variable winning means is in the easy entering state after the first variable winning means is changed from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state, the second variable winning means is in the easy entering state. The first winning effect is ended and the second winning effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 163 (f), at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, The winning number display is cleared to “0”, and the winning number display corresponds to the number of winning balls to the second variable winning port 235 from the display corresponding to the number of winnings to the first variable winning port 234. Will be the display to be]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, after the second variable winning means has entered the easy-to-enter state, even if a game ball wins the first variable winning means, the first winning effect is not executed. In this case, the player may feel uncomfortable and be able to watch the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means.

Also, “comprising a first passage detection means [for example, a first count switch SW1] capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the first passage region,
The first effective period after the first variable winning means changes from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state [for example, the time set by the special electric utility 1 winning detection timer (for example, 3 seconds)] Until the passage of the game ball is detected by the first passage detection means,
In the second winning effect, the first variable winning means changes from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state, and then the second variable winning means changes to the easy entering state. A winning effect that is started in place of the first winning effect when the passing of the game ball is detected by the first passage detecting means before the first valid period elapses [for example, FIG. As shown in FIGS. 166 (c) to (d), the first variable winning opening 234 is closed, and subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 167 (f) to (g), the second variable winning opening 235 is set. When the passing of a game ball is detected by the first count switch SW1 until the time set by the special electric winning combination 1 winning detection timer elapses after the game is opened, the second variable winning opening 235 Winning number display is counted and displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, after the second variable winning means has entered the easy-to-enter state, the first passing detection means detects the passage of the gaming ball during the first effective period, and the first When the winning of the game ball to the variable winning means is detected, the second winning effect is started, so that the player feels uncomfortable, and the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are more closely watched. There are cases where it is possible.

In addition, “the first variable winning means is configured to be able to detect the passage of the game ball by the first passage detecting means even during the period in which it is easy to enter the ball [for example, FIG. 159 As shown in FIG. 4, when the special electric combination 1 is activated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to an effective state, and when the special electric combination 2 is activated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to an effective state. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, when the first variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state, it may be possible to reliably detect the passage of the game ball by the first passage detecting means.

In addition, “a second passing area [for example, the second count switch SW2] through which the game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can pass,
When the second variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state (hereinafter referred to as the “fourth effective period”), if a game ball has passed to the second passing area, [For example, as shown in FIG. 159, when the special electric combination 2 is activated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to an effective state, and when the special electric combination 1 is activated, 1 count switch SW1 is changed to a valid state]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, when the second variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state, it may be possible to reliably detect the passage of the game ball by the second passage detecting means.

In addition, “the second winning effect is that the game ball passes through the first passing area in a period in which the first effective period and the fourth effective period overlap. [For example, as shown in FIG. 159, the period when the special power combination 1 winning detection timer is set and the first count switch SW1 is valid, and the second count switch are executed. When the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (g) in a period overlapping with the period in which SW2 is in a valid state, the winning associated with the second variable winning opening 235 Number display is counted and displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, if the first effective period and the fourth effective period overlap, the first winning effect is not performed even if the game ball wins the first variable winning means, Since the second winning effect is performed, the player is given a sense of incongruity, and the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means can be more closely watched.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of effects is a third prize effect [for example, total number display of prizes]
It is configured to be awarded when there is a game ball passing to the first passing area,
The third winning effect is a prize that varies according to the total number of game balls won in the first variable winning means and game balls won in the second variable winning means during execution of the jackpot game. [For example, as shown in FIG. 164, by displaying the winning total number display, the number of winning balls acquired by winning the variable winning opening 234, 235 from the start of the jackpot game to the present is specified. Display as possible]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, even if the second variable winning means is in the open state, the third winning effect is continuously displayed, so that it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking. .

Further, “the effect means is a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effect display,
The first winning effect is a first winning effect display [for example, a display of the number of winnings related to the first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG.
The second winning effect is a second winning effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays [for example, winning number display related to the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 167 (f)]
The first winning effect display is a winning effect display that can be started when a game ball passes through the first passing area during execution of the jackpot game [for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (b). In addition, when the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 is valid, the winning number display relating to the first variable winning opening 234 is updated and displayed]
The second winning effect display is a winning effect display that can be started when a game ball wins the second variable winning means during execution of the jackpot game [for example, as shown in FIG. 167 (h). As described above, when the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning opening 235 is valid, the winning number display relating to the second variable winning opening 235 is updated and displayed]
The second winning effect display is a winning effect display that can be started even when a game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy entering state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 167 (g), when the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 is validated after the next round starts, the second variable winning opening 235 is displayed. The winning number display will be updated and displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the display means executes as a winning effect of the second variable winning means despite having entered the first variable winning means, which gives the player a sense of incongruity, In some cases, the variable winning means and the second variable winning means can be watched.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the first winning effect display and the second winning effect display, or displays other than the first winning effect display and the second winning effect display. It may be executable. The display means may always execute the first winning effect display and the second winning effect display, or may not execute the first winning effect display and the second winning effect display. May be.

  The first winning effect display may be started only when the game ball passes through the first passing area during execution of the big hit game, or during the execution of the big hit game, It may be possible to start other than when the game ball passes through one passing area. Also, it may be started when a game ball passes through the first passing area during the big hit game, or the game ball passes through the first pass area during the big hit game. In some cases, it may not be implemented.

  Further, the second winning effect display may be started only when a game ball wins the second variable winning means during execution of the jackpot game, or during execution of the jackpot game, It may be possible to start other than when the game ball has won the second variable winning means. The second winning effect display may always start when a game ball wins the second variable winning means during execution of the jackpot game, or during the execution of the jackpot game, There may be a case where it does not start when a game ball wins the second variable winning means.

  The second winning effect display may be started only when the game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state. Then, after the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state, it may be possible to start other than when the game ball passes through the first passing area. The second winning effect display may always start when the game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state. The game may not start when the game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state.

  The display mode of the first winning effect display and the display mode of the second winning effect display may be the same or different.

Further, “the second variable winning means is variable winning means that is in the difficult entering state during the period in which the first variable winning means is in the easy entering state [for example, FIG. As shown, during the operation of the special power combination 1, the special power combination 2 is in an inactive state]
The first variable winning means is variable winning means that is in the difficult entry state during the period in which the second variable winning means is in the easy entering state [for example, as shown in FIG. 159 , During the operation of the special power role 2, the special power role 1 is inactive state]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, even if the first variable winning means is in the closed state and the second variable winning means is in the open state, the first variable winning means can be connected to the first variable winning means during the first effective period. As a result of winning a prize, it is displayed that the player has actually won the second variable winning means, so there are cases where the player can feel a sense of profit.

Also, “sound output means [eg, speaker 120];
Counting means that can start counting the number of game balls won in the second variable winning means when the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 Sub-control unit winning counter provided in the RAM 408],
With
The second variable winning means changes to the difficult-to-enter state when the second maximum winning number [for example, 10] game balls have been won after entering the easy-to-enter state. Variable winning means to
The counting means also enters the second variable winning means even when a game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy entering state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 167 (g), if the passing of the game ball to the first count switch SW1 is detected after the next round is started, It is counted in the sub-control unit winning counter that has been counted as the winning number display related to the variable winning opening 235],
When the number of game balls counted by the counting means exceeds the second maximum winning number, a third over winning sound may be output by the sound output means [for example, FIG. As shown in ′), when the value of the sub-control unit winning counter is “11” and exceeds the maximum number of winnings (when an apparent over winning is generated), an over winning sound is output from the speaker 120. The ],
A game ball characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the maximum number of winnings to the second variable winning means, including the number of game balls won to the first variable winning means since the second variable winning means has been opened, is the maximum winning number. When an over-winning appearance that exceeds the number occurs, the third over-winning sound is output, which may make the player feel good.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the second variable winning means is opened and the first variable winning means is won, it is not determined as over winning and no over winning sound is output. In some cases, the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means can be watched.

  Here, the counting means may be capable of starting counting only the number of game balls won in the second variable winning means when the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state. In addition, when the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state, it may be possible to start other than counting the number of game balls won in the second variable winning means. The counting means may be capable of starting counting the number of game balls won in the second variable winning means only when the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state. In addition to the case where the second variable winning means changes to the easy entering state, it may be possible to start other than counting the number of game balls won in the second variable winning means. The counting means may always start counting the number of game balls won in the second variable winning means when the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state. When the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state, the counting of the number of game balls won in the second variable winning means may not be started.

  In addition, when the number of game balls counted by the counting means exceeds the second maximum winning number, the third over winning sound may be necessarily output by the sound output means, or counted by the counting means. When the number of game balls exceeds the second maximum winning number, the third over winning sound may not be output by the sound output means.

In addition, “first control means [for example, main control unit 300];
Second control means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400] capable of executing control of the sound output means;
With
The first control means is a control means capable of transmitting first passage information [for example, a big prize opening prize command] to the second control means when a game ball passes through the first passage area. And
The first control means is a control capable of transmitting second passage information [for example, a big prize opening prize command] to the second control means when a game ball wins the second variable winning means. Means,
The second control means is a control means having a third storage area [for example, a sub-control unit winning counter in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400]
The counting means is a means for counting the number of times the second control means has received the second passing information after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state,
The counting means is a means for counting the number of times the first passing information is received after the second variable winning means is changed to the easy-to-enter state.
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counting result of the counting means in the third storage area,
The second control means outputs the sound output when a value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number [for example, 10]. Control means capable of executing control to output the third over winning sound to the means [For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (j ′), the value of the sub-control unit winning counter indicates “11”. When an apparent over-winning occurs, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the number of game balls won in the first variable winning means and the number of game balls won in the second variable winning means are managed in one storage area, so the processing is simplified. There are cases where it is possible.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, the first variable winning means is in a closed state, and even if the second variable winning means is in an open state, it is difficult to enter a ball if it is during the first effective period. In some cases, it is possible to cause a sense of incongruity to be executed in relation to the game ball won in the first variable winning means, and to concentrate the player on the game.

  Here, the second control means may be capable of executing only control of the sound output means, or may be capable of executing control other than control of the sound output means. Further, the second control means may necessarily execute control of the sound output means, or may not execute control of the sound output means.

  The first control means may be capable of transmitting the first passage information only to the second control means when the game ball passes through the first passage area. When the game ball passes through the passing area, the first passing information may be transmitted other than the second control means. The first control means may be capable of transmitting the first passage information to the second control means only when the game ball passes through the first passage area. In addition to the case where the game ball has passed through the passage area, the first passage information may be transmitted to the second control means. The first control means may always transmit the first passage information to the second control means when the game ball passes through the first passage area. When the game ball passes through the area, the first passing information may not be transmitted to the second control means.

  The first control means may be capable of transmitting the second passage information only to the second control means when a game ball wins the second variable winning means, When a game ball wins the variable winning means, the second passing information may be transmitted in addition to the second control means. The first control means may be capable of transmitting the second passage information to the second control means only when a game ball has won the second variable winning means. In addition to the case where the game ball has won the variable winning means, the second passing information may be transmitted to the second control means. Further, the first control means may always transmit the second passage information to the second control means when a game ball wins the second variable winning means, When a game ball wins the variable winning means, the second passing information may not be transmitted to the second control means.

  The second control means may be capable of storing the counting result of the counting means only in the third storage area, or may store the counting result of the counting means in an area other than the third storage area. It may be possible. Further, the second control means may always store the counting result of the counting means in the third storage area, or may not store the counting result of the counting means in the third storage area. Also good.

  The second control means outputs a third over winning sound to the sound output means when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number. Only the control to be output may be executable, or when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number, the sound output means Controls other than the control for outputting the third over winning sound may be executed. In addition, the second control means outputs the third over winning sound to the sound output means only when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number. May be capable of executing the control to output, or even when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number, The sound output means may be capable of executing control for outputting the third over winning sound. In addition, when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum number of winnings, a control for causing the sound output means to output the third over winning sound is surely executed. Or a third over winning sound is output to the sound output means when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number. There is a case where the control to be executed is not executed.

  The counting means may be capable of starting counting the number of game balls that have passed through the first passing area when the first variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state. In this case, when the game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state, the counting means has the gaming ball pass through the first passing area. You may count as the game ball which passed. And the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning means, and the number of game balls that have passed through the first passing area after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state. A third over winning sound may be output when the total exceeds the second maximum winning number.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Subsequently, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an applicable form to which the technical idea of the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 182 to 427 are used only for the description of the applicable embodiment described below in principle, and the following description is provided even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. Then, priority is given to the code | symbol shown in FIGS.

[Sixteenth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

<Back of the game table>
FIG. 183 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 182 as seen from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface. The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

<Front of game board>
FIG. 184 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is a one-way communication. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate VDP 434 (image) for displaying an image on the symbol display device Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 186 (a) to 186 (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 186 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 186 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 187 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 185. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random number values is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 185 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 186 (c)) or the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 186 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 186 (a) is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart The probability flag is off, Special figure F when figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure G when first small hit flag is on, special figure H when first small hit flag is on, special figure H, first off flag on In this case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I is turned on when the special figure I is turned on and the second off-flag is turned on. In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 relation stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then main control unit main process shown in FIG. 187 is performed. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, button control processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this button control process, when an operation by the operation unit is detected, various processes corresponding to the operation unit are performed. For example, when an operation by the chance button 136 is detected, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data in response to pressing of the chance button 136 is performed. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Sets an instruction to start data transfer The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 189 (a). Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

<Setting screen>
Next, the basic concept of the “setting screen” that can be displayed on the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 (a) shows an example of the setting screen.

  The setting screen according to the present embodiment is a screen (display) configured by one or a plurality of display units, and is a screen (display) displayed on display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). It is. As a display part constituting this setting screen, for example, as shown in FIGS. 191 (a) (1) and (a) (2), the contents and purpose of the setting screen (for example, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, Selection can be made by a title part TP representing character selection, BGM selection, etc., an input part IP for allowing a player to input input information (for example, a password, a number, etc.), and an operation by an operation means (for example, a chance button 136) An example of such a selection unit SP is given as an example.

  Further, as the setting screen according to the present embodiment, for example, a volume adjustment setting screen for adjusting the volume of a sound output means (for example, a speaker 120) of a gaming table, or a light output means (for example, a lamp) of a gaming table. Light adjustment setting screen for adjusting the amount of light, password setting screen for entering a password, selection screen for selecting a character and BGM, and a game history reference screen for referring to a game history on a game console An example is given.

  The display start condition for starting the display of the setting screen is not particularly limited. For example, the display of the setting screen may be started when there is an operation by the first operation means in the power saving mode described later. The display of the setting screen may be started when there is an operation by the first operation means while the screen (for example, the demonstration screen) is displayed, and the first setting is made when there is an operation by the first operation means. Display of a screen (for example, a menu screen) is started, and a second setting screen (for example, a volume adjustment setting screen or a light intensity adjustment setting screen) is displayed when a second operation is performed while the first setting screen is displayed. May be started.

  Further, the layout of the display unit on the setting screen is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIGS. 191 (a) and (1), the title unit TP, the input unit IP, and the selection unit SP are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the vertical direction. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, the title part TP, the input part IP, and the selection part SP may be arranged in the horizontal direction at substantially equal intervals. Further, the size of the display area of each display unit is not particularly limited.

<Directed production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 191 (b), the basic concept of “general drawing effect” that can be executed by the game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. In addition, FIG. 191 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the ordinary drawing effect.

  The general drawing effect according to the present embodiment is an effect including at least an effect produced by display using a display device, and the entrance to the general diagram start port 228 and the start of a general diagram variable game by the general diagram display device 210. Or, an effect (an effect related to a general figure) that is executed in response to a pre-reading or the like of whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful. As such an ordinary drawing effect, in addition to the effect by the display, for example, the effect by the sound output from the sound output means (for example, the speaker 120), the effect by the light output from the light output means (for example, the lamp), Any one, a plurality, or all effects such as effects caused by the movement of the movable body (for example, the effect movable body 224) can be cited as an example.

  In addition, the mode of the general drawing effect is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), a general diagram introduction effect NP1 expressing whether or not to execute the general drawing main effect, and a normal map variable game A general-drawing effect NP2 that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the determination of whether or not, and a general-purpose result effect NP3 that displays the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu) when the result of the determination of whether or not the determination is correct A plurality of effects may be included, and effects may be executed in this order. In addition, as the usual figure result effect NP3, for example, an effect that suggests or clearly indicates that the second special figure start port 232 is opened in advance or suggests that the second special figure start port 232 is open or An example is a directing effect.

  Also, there may be a relationship between the ordinary drawing effect and the special figure variation game. For example, in the special figure 2 variation game after the ordinary drawing effect is executed, a special effect may be executed. Even during a period other than the game (for example, while the setting screen is being displayed), during the special figure 2 variable game by winning the second special figure starting port 232 (electricity Chu), a special effect may not be executed. Good. In addition, during the period other than the special figure variation game, only the effect by the display included in the ordinary figure variation game may be executed. During the period other than the special figure variation game, only the ordinary figure result effect NP3 of the previous example is performed. May be executed.

  In addition, there are a plurality of types of hits in the common figure variable game, and one of the types of hits is the first hit (for example, the second special figure starting port 232 is opened only for the first period), If one of the types of hits is a second hit (for example, a hit for opening the second special figure starting port 232 for a second period longer than the first period), whether or not the common figure variable game is successful The execution frequency of the usual figure effect when the determination result is the second hit may be higher than that when the determination result of the common figure variation game is the first hit. In addition, in the display area where the ordinary drawing effect is executed, other effects such as a notice of special figure variable game and a pre-reading effect may be executed. In this case, the capacity of the image data may be reduced by using at least a part of an image used for other effects (for example, a character image) for the usual effects.

  In addition, when performing a normal drawing effect using display and sound, it may be started at the same time as display and sound, output of sound may be started after a lapse of a predetermined time after the start of display, Display may be started after the elapse of a predetermined time after the start of the output.

<Display mode of setting screen and general drawing effect>
Next, with reference to FIG. 191 (c) to FIG. 19 (e), the display mode of the setting screen and the ordinary drawing effect according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 191 (c) to 191 (e) are diagrams showing an example of the display form of the setting screen and the usual drawing effect.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 191 (c) (1), at least a part of the rectangular setting screen STP2 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with at least a part of the general drawing effect NP. Is displayed (by displaying at least a part of the ordinary drawing effect NP overlapping at least a part of the setting screen STP2), so that at least a part of the setting screen STP2 is not visible from the front (or Compared to the case where the normal drawing effect NP is not executed, it is difficult to view).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 191 (c) (2), at least a part of the rectangular setting screen STP2 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed so that at least a part of the general drawing effect NP covers it. The point where the effect NP is displayed is the same as the example shown in (c) and (1) of the figure, but in this example, a part of the normal drawing effect NP (the part covering and hiding the setting screen STP2) is transmitted. At least a part of the setting screen STP2 is visible from the front.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 191 (d) (1), the setting screen STP1 (title part TP, input part IP, selection part SP) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the vertical direction at substantially equal intervals. By displaying the general drawing effect NP so that at least a part of the general drawing effect NP is covered by at least a part of the configured setting screen) (in this example, a part of the title part TP and the input part IP) ( By displaying at least a part of the general drawing effect NP overlapping at least a part of the setting screen STP1, and at least a part of the setting screen STP2 (in this example, a part of the title part TP and the input part IP) ) Is not visible from the front (or is difficult to see compared to the case where the ordinary drawing effect NP is not executed).

  Note that the setting screen STP1 shown in FIGS. 191 (d) and (1) is shown in FIGS. (D) and (2) when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, an operation by the operating means is detected). You may change to setting screen STP2. If such display control is performed, the display area of the setting screen that is covered by the ordinary drawing effect NP can be changed, and the display may have variations.

  In the example shown in FIG. 191 (e), after the same display as the example shown in FIGS. 191 (c) and (1) is performed, the general drawing effect NP is temporarily deleted, so that the entire setting screen STP2 is displayed. After the display area becomes visible from the front, the general drawing effect NP is displayed again so that at least a part of the general drawing effect NP is covered by at least a part of the setting screen STP2 (setting screen STP2 At least a part of the normal drawing effect NP is displayed on at least a part of it, and at least a part of the setting screen STP2 is not visible from the front (or the normal drawing effect NP is not executed). It is difficult to see compared to the case). If such display control is performed, the display area of the setting screen that is covered by the ordinary drawing effect NP can be changed, and the display may have variations.

<Summary of display timing of setting screen and ordinary drawing effect>
Next, the outline of the display timing of the setting screen and the general drawing effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 (a) is a time chart showing the flow of a normal ordinary drawing effect.

  In the following drawings, the line corresponding to “normal map change” (or “special map change”) indicates whether or not the general map change game (or special figure change game) is being executed. In this example, the state in which the usual figure variable game is being executed (or the special figure variable game is being executed) is indicated by a high level line (upper line), and the normal figure variable game is not being executed (or the special figure). The state of the variable game not being executed is indicated by a low-level line (lower line). In addition, the line corresponding to “general drawing effect” in the subsequent drawings indicates whether or not the general drawing effect is being executed. In this example, the state in which the normal drawing effect is being executed is set to a high level. The line is indicated by a line, and the state in which the ordinary drawing effect is not being executed is indicated by a low-level line.

  In the following drawings, a line corresponding to “electric chew release” indicates whether or not the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) is open. In this example, the electric chew release is performed. The inside state is indicated by a high-level line, and the state in which the electric Chu is closed is indicated by a low-level line. The opening / closing pattern of the electric chew is not particularly limited. For example, the opening of the first time and the closing of the first time may be performed only once or a plurality of times. And a third time longer than the second time (or a fourth time shorter than the second time) may be closed once or multiple times.

  Also, the line corresponding to “sound output” in the following drawings indicates whether or not sound is being output from the sound output means (speaker 120), and in this example, sound is output. The state is indicated by a high level line, and the state in which no sound is output is indicated by a low level line.

  For example, in the ordinary variable game indicated by reference sign a1 in FIG. 192 (a), the normal figure effect is not executed during the execution of the normal figure variable game, and in the general figure variable game indicated by reference numeral a2 in FIG. After starting the execution of the general map effect at the same time as the start of the general map variable game, the general map effect is finished before the end of the general map variable game. Also, in the general figure variable game indicated by the symbol a3 in FIG. 5A, the execution of the general figure effect is started simultaneously with the start of the general figure variable game, and then the general figure effect is ended simultaneously with the end of the general figure variable game. In the general figure variable game indicated by the symbol a4 in FIG. 9A, after the start of the general figure effect at the same time as the start of the general figure variable game, the general figure effect ends at the end of the general figure variable game, After that, the electric Chu is opened once. Also, in the general figure variable game indicated by the symbol a5 in FIG. 5A, the execution of the general figure effect is started at the same time as the start of the general figure variable game, and the normal figure effect is continued after the end of the general figure variable game. As soon as the electric Chu is closed, the usual drawing is finished.

  FIG. 192 (b) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the sound output from the sound output means, the special figure variation game, the general drawing effect, and the setting screen. In the special figure variable game indicated by reference sign b1 in FIG. 192 (a), the sound is output over the entire period from the start to the end of the special figure variable game. Further, in the special figure variable game indicated by symbol b2 in FIG. 5A, the sound is output over the entire period from the start to the end of the special figure variable game. The display of the setting screen is started after a lapse of a predetermined time after the end.

  In addition, in the special figure variable game indicated by reference numeral b3 in FIG. 6A, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the special figure variable game has ended, display of the setting screen is started and the state is shifted to a state in which no sound is output. After that, the state has shifted to a state in which sound is output simultaneously with the start of the usual drawing effect. Note that the execution frequency of the ordinary drawing effect during the setting screen display may be different from the execution frequency of the ordinary drawing effect other than during the setting screen display. For example, the latter execution frequency is set higher than the former execution frequency. It may be lower or lower.

  FIG. 192 (c) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the special figure variable game, the general drawing effect, and the setting screen. In the example shown in FIG. 192 (c), the general drawing effect is started after the setting screen display is started, and the setting screen display is erased simultaneously with the start of the special figure variable game during the execution of the normal drawing effect. The setting screen is redisplayed after a lapse of a predetermined time after the special figure variation game.

<Details of the display timing of the setting screen and ordinary drawing effects>
Next, details of the display timing of the setting screen and the general drawing effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the general drawing effect and the setting screen.

  In the following drawings, the line corresponding to “passing the normal map gate” indicates the timing at which the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228, and in this example, the passing timing is indicated by a vertical thick line. Yes. Further, the line corresponding to the “setting screen display start operation” in the subsequent drawings indicates the timing at which the operation by the operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is detected. In this example, the operation is detected. The timing is shown by a thick vertical line.

  In the timing indicated by reference numeral T1 in FIG. 193, the display of the setting screen is started based on the reception of the operation of the operating means (chance button 136), and at the timing indicated by reference numeral T2, the setting screen is displayed during the display of the setting screen. Based on the fact that the ball has passed through the starting port 220, the usual figure variation game and the usual figure effect are started.

  In addition, at the timing indicated by the reference symbol T3, based on the fact that the ball has passed through the ordinary drawing start port 220 during the period when the setting screen is not displayed, the ordinary variation game and the ordinary drawing effect are started, and the following reference symbol T4 is displayed. At the timing indicated by, the display of the setting screen is started on the basis of accepting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) during execution of the usual figure variation game and the usual figure effect.

  Further, at the timing indicated by reference numeral T5, display of the setting screen is started based on the reception of the operation of the operating means (chance button 136), and at the timing indicated by reference numeral T6, the setting screen is displayed during display. Based on the fact that the ball has passed through the start port 220, the usual figure variation game and the usual figure effect are started. At the timing indicated by the following symbol T7, the display of the setting screen is terminated, and at the timing indicated by the following symbol T8, the display of the setting screen is started based on the acceptance of the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) again. doing.

<Specific example of setting screen>
Next, a specific example of the setting screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a specific example of the setting screen.

<Specific example 1 of setting screen>
194 (a-1) to (a-3) are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the transition of the setting screen. In this example, as shown in FIG. 5 (a-1), “button effect” is based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (for example, the number of hold of the special figure variable game is 0). I do. Here, the button effect is an effect that suggests or clearly indicates that an operation can be received by a predetermined operation means. In this example, as a button effect, an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and the display of the character “display menu screen” are displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the chance button 136 This suggests that the operation can be accepted.

  Further, in this example, when an operation by the operation means (chance button 136) is received during execution of the button effect, the first setting screen (menu screen) STP1 as shown in FIG. When an operation by the operating means (chance button 136) is accepted on the first setting screen (menu screen), a second setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 as shown in FIG. indicate.

  The display content on the first setting screen (menu screen) STP1 is not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. 194 (a-2), the characters “menu screen” are applied as the title portion TP. The selected title bar TPa1 is displayed, and the selection unit SPa1 (the book) is shifted to an adjustment screen for adjusting the volume of sound output from the speaker 120 and adjusting the amount of light emitted from the lamp as the selection unit SP described above. In the example, an image with the characters “volume light intensity adjustment”) and a selection button SPa2 (in this example, an image with the characters “member registration”) for shifting to the member registration screen for member registration. And a selection button SPa3 (in this example, an image on which characters of “game history” have been applied) for shifting the past game history on the game table to a viewable browsing screen, and an operation Description part MP1 representing the operation description of the stages, respectively, are displayed on the first setting screen (menu screen) STP1.

  Further, the display content on the second setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 is not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. 194 (a-3), the title part TP has the characters “adjustment screen”. In addition to displaying the title bar TPa2 subjected to the above, as the selection unit SP described above, the volume level display SPa4 for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 and the light amount adjustment of the light emitted from the lamp are performed. Are displayed on a second setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 respectively.

<Specific example 2 of setting screen>
FIG. 194 (b) is a diagram showing a specific example 2 of the setting screen. In this example, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (for example, an operation for logging in to a member setting screen that can be viewed or set only by a member is accepted) A setting screen (password input screen) STP3 as shown is displayed. The content displayed on the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not particularly limited. In this example, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the above-mentioned title portion TP is displayed on the setting screen STP3 as “Enter password”. The title bar TPb1 with the characters "Please" is displayed, and the character selection unit SP1 capable of selecting a character by an operation with an operation means (for example, a determination button, a right button, a left button) is displayed as the selection unit SP described above. The password input field IP1 in which the password can be input character by character using the character selection unit SP is displayed as the above-described input unit IP.

<Specific example 3 of setting screen>
FIG. 194 (c) is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of the setting screen. In this example, a setting screen (character selection screen) STP4 as shown in FIG. 5C is displayed on the basis of the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (for example, winning a big win in the special figure variable game). indicate. Although the display content on this setting screen (character selection screen) STP4 is not particularly limited, in this example, as shown in FIG. 194 (c), the characters “favorite selection screen” are given as the above-mentioned title portion TP. While displaying the title bar TPc1, as the above-described selection unit SP, the selection button SPc1 for selecting the character A, the selection button SPc2 for selecting the character B, and the selection button SPc3 for selecting the character C Are displayed on the setting screen (character selection screen) STP4.

<Specific example 4 of setting screen>
FIG. 194 (d) shows a specific example 4 of the setting screen. In this example, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (for example, a condition for granting a predetermined privilege to the player is established), a setting screen (code issuance) as shown in FIG. Screen) STP5 is displayed. The display content on the setting screen (code issue screen) STP5 is not particularly limited, but in this example, the title bar TPd1 with the characters “code issue screen” is displayed as the title portion TP described above, and a predetermined content is displayed. Are displayed on the setting screen STP5 (bar code, QR code (registered trademark), etc.).

<Specific example 5 of setting screen>
FIG. 194 (e) is a diagram showing a specific example 5 of the setting screen. In this example, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (for example, a function for logging in to a member screen that can be viewed only by members and customizing the game is selected) (e A setting screen (customization screen) STP6 as shown in FIG. The display content on this setting screen (customization screen) STP6 is not particularly limited, but in this example, the title bar TPe1 with the letters “customization screen” is displayed as the above-described title portion TP, and the above-described selection is performed. As part SP, a selection button SPe1 for selecting function 1, a selection button SPe2 for selecting function 2, and a selection button SPe3 for selecting function 3 (other selection buttons are omitted), It is displayed on the setting screen (character selection screen) STP6.

<Other specific examples of setting screen>
Note that the setting screen according to the present embodiment is not limited to the setting screen described in specific examples 1 to 5, and for example, in specific example 1 described using FIGS. 194 (a-1) to (a-3). FIG. 194 (f-1) shows that the first setting screen (menu screen) STP1 is not displayed when an operation by the operation means (chance button 136) is accepted during execution of the button effect shown in FIG. A second setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 as shown in (f-2) may be displayed. Further, a second setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 as shown in FIG. 5G is displayed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game without performing a button effect. Also good.

  Further, in the specific example 3 described with reference to FIG. 194 (c), based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, winning a big hit in the special figure variable game), FIG. 194 (h A setting screen (song selection screen) STP7 as shown in FIG. In this setting screen (song selection screen) STP7, the selection button SPh1 for selecting the song A, the selection button SPh2 for selecting the song B, and the selection for selecting the song C are selected as the selection unit SP. Each button SPh3 is displayed on a setting screen (song selection screen) STP7.

<Specific examples of ordinary drawing production>
Next, a specific example of the ordinary drawing effect will be described. FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 are diagrams showing an example of a general drawing effect in time series. Each image is an excerpt of a part of a series of ordinary drawing effects, and the display interval of each image is not necessarily constant.

<Specific example 1 of ordinary drawing production>
The state shown in FIG. 195 (a) is a state before the start of the variable game. Here, one special figure holding lamp 218 is turned on to notify that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game is 1, and all the second special figure holding lamps 220 are turned off. 2 is notified that the number of suspensions of the variable game is 0, and all of the usual figure hold lamps 216 are turned off, thereby notifying that the number of suspensions of the usual game is 0.

  Further, by lighting the segment of the first special figure display device 212 in a lighting manner corresponding to the lost symbol, it is notified that the result of the determination of whether or not the immediately preceding special figure 1 variable game is a lost symbol, By lighting the segment of the special figure display device 214 in a lighting manner corresponding to the lost symbol, it is notified that the result of the determination of whether or not the immediately preceding special figure 2 variable game is a lost symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the upper right corner, the special figure 4th pattern 208e (in this example, a colorless circle image) indicating that the special figure fluctuation is stopped is displayed to notify that the special figure fluctuation is stopped. .

  In addition, by lighting the segment of the general symbol display device 210 in a lighting manner corresponding to the lost symbol, it is informed that the result of the determination of the success / failure of the previous variable symbol game is a lost symbol, and the decorative symbol display device In the upper right corner of 208, the fourth figure pattern 208f for normal drawing (in this example, a colorless square image) indicating that the normal figure change is stopped is displayed to notify that the normal figure change is stopped. .

  The state shown in FIG. 195 (b) is a state immediately after the start of the special game. Here, in the first special figure display device 212, the “variable display of special figure 1” is started by repeating the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. In each of the three display areas in the upper left corner of the symbol display device 208, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” → .. Are displayed in order to start “variable display of decorative symbols”. Further, by displaying the special figure fourth pattern 208e (in this example, a colored circle image) indicating that the special figure is changing, it is notified that the special figure is changing. In addition, by turning off one of the first special figure hold lamps 218, it is notified that the number of special figure 1 variable games held has decreased from 1 to 0, and by turning on one general figure hold lamp 216, It is informing that the number of hold of the usual variable game has increased from 0 to 1.

  The state shown in FIG. 195 (c) is a state immediately after the start of the usual variable game. Here, in the common map display device 210, the “variable display of the common map” is started by repeating the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. In addition, by displaying the 4th design 208f for normal map (in this example, a colored square image) indicating that the normal map is changing, the fact that the normal map is changing is informed. Further, by turning off one ordinary figure holding lamp 216, it is notified that the number of ordinary figure variable games held has decreased from 1 to 0.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 195 (d) is a state in which the usual drawing effect is started based on the fact that the usual figure variable game is started at the timing shown in FIG. Here, as a normal drawing effect, a display of the character image NP11 of Tono, a display of a balloon NP12 including the characters “Aim!” And a display of the target image NP13 are performed, and the normal image changes to the target image NP13. A downward arrow (↓) indicating that it is inside is displayed.

  The state shown in FIG. 195 (e) to FIG. 15 (f) is a state where the continuation of the ordinary drawing effect is being executed. Here, as a continuation of the ordinary drawing effect, after the display of the balloon NP12 is erased, an animation in which the arrow image NP14 moves from the character image NP11 to the target image NP13 is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 195 (f), the arrow image NP14 is brought into contact with the target image NP13, and the target image NP13 indicates the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure variation game is successful (in this example, the loss). Display (in this example, x mark) is displayed.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 195 (g) is a state in which the ordinary drawing effect has ended with the end of the ordinary floating game. Here, the segment of the general symbol display device 210 is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the lost symbol, thereby notifying that the result of the determination of the success / failure of the previous variable symbol game has been lost, and the decorative symbol display device In the upper right corner of 208, the fourth figure pattern 208f for normal drawing (in this example, a colorless square image) indicating that the normal figure change is stopped is displayed to notify that the normal figure change is stopped. . In this example, since the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure variation game is successful is lost, the control for opening the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 (electrical chew) is not performed.

  Also, FIGS. 195 (j) to (l) are diagrams showing an example of a general diagram effect performed in a time series when the result of determination of whether or not a general variable game is successful is a win. For example, in the case where the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure variable game started in FIG. 195 (c) is successful, the universal game shown in FIG. 195 (j) to FIG. Produce graphics.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (j), the arrow image NP14 is brought into contact with the target image NP13, and the target image NP13 is compared with the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure variation game is successful (in this example, ) (In this example, a double circle) is displayed.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (k), a balloon display NP12 ′ including the characters “Congratulations !!” is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 195 (l), the second special figure starting port 232 is displayed. Operation-related display that prompts the player to launch a ball aiming to enter (Den Cho) (in this example, the display of “Let's aim at the electric Chu!” And two downward arrows ( ↓↓) is displayed. Subsequently, in this example, since the result of the determination of whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful is a win, control is performed to open the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu).

<Typical example 2 of ordinary drawing production>
The state shown in FIG. 196 (a) is a state during special figure fluctuation. Here, the first special figure display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1”, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs “variable display of decorative symbols”. In addition, by displaying on the decorative symbol display device 208 a special symbol fourth symbol 208e (in this example, a colored circle image) indicating that the special symbol is changing, it is notified that the special symbol is changing, By displaying on the decorative symbol display device 208 the fourth symbol 208f (in this example, a colorless square image) indicating that the symbol variation has been suspended, the fact that the symbol variation has been suspended is informed. .

  Further, by turning on the two first special figure holding lamps 218, it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game is 2, and by turning off all the second special figure holding lamps 220, the special figure It is informed that the number of suspensions of the two-variable game is 0, and that the number of suspensions of the ordinary-variable game is two by illuminating two ordinary-reservation lamps 216.

  The state shown in FIG. 196 (b) is a state immediately after the start of the usual variable game. In this case, the “variable display of the general map” is started in the general map display device 210, and the fourth graphic 208f (in this example, a colored square image) indicating that the normal map is changing is displayed on the decorative pattern display device. By displaying in 208, it is informing that the normal map is changing. Further, by turning off one ordinary figure holding lamp 216, it is notified that the number of ordinary figure variable games held has decreased from two to one.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 196 (c) is a state in which the ordinary drawing effect is started based on the fact that the ordinary figure variable game is started at the timing shown in FIG. Here, as a normal drawing effect, a display of the character image NP11 of Tono, a display of a balloon NP12 including the characters “Aim!” And a display of the target image NP13 are performed, and the normal image changes to the target image NP13. A downward arrow (↓) indicating that it is inside is displayed.

  The state shown in FIG. 196 (d) to FIG. 9 (e) is a state in which the continuation of the ordinary drawing effect is executed. Here, as a continuation of the ordinary drawing effect, after the display of the balloon NP12 is erased, an animation in which the arrow image NP14 moves from the character image NP11 to the target image NP13 is displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 196 (e), the arrow image NP14 contacts the target image NP13, and the target image NP13 is subjected to the result of determination of whether or not the special figure changing game is changing (in this example, the big hit) ) (In this example, “Gekiatsu” characters) are displayed.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 196 (f) is a state in which the ordinary drawing effect is ended with the end of the ordinary floating game. Here, the segment of the general symbol display device 210 is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the lost symbol, thereby notifying that the result of the determination of the success / failure of the previous variable symbol game has been lost, and the decorative symbol display device In the upper right corner of 208, the fourth figure pattern 208f for normal drawing (in this example, a colorless square image) indicating that the normal figure change is stopped is displayed to notify that the normal figure change is stopped. . In this example, since the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure variation game is successful is lost, the control for opening the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu) is not performed.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 196 (g) is a state in which the super reach (SP) effect during the change of the special figure is started. This SP reach production is one of the productions suggesting the result of determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful (in this example, a big hit).

  In addition, the display mode of the “general drawing effect” according to the present invention is not particularly limited, and as shown in FIG. 196 (j) to FIG. Only the target image display NP13 may be performed during all or part of the usual game.

<Specific example of ordinary drawing production while setting screen is displayed>
Next, a specific example of the usual drawing effect during the setting screen display will be described. FIGS. 197 to 200 are diagrams showing a specific example of the usual drawing effect during the setting screen display in time series.

<Specific example 1 of usual drawing production during setting screen display>
FIG. 197 is a diagram showing, in time series, a specific example 1 of the ordinary drawing effect during the setting screen display. The state shown in FIG. 197 (a) is a state during special figure fluctuation. Here, the first special figure display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1”, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs “variable display of decorative symbols”. In addition, by displaying on the decorative symbol display device 208 a special symbol fourth symbol 208e (in this example, a colored circle image) indicating that the special symbol is changing, it is notified that the special symbol is changing, By displaying on the decorative symbol display device 208 the fourth symbol 208f (in this example, a colorless square image) indicating that the symbol variation has been suspended, the fact that the symbol variation has been suspended is informed. .

  Further, by turning off all of the first special figure holding lamps 218, it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game is 0, and by turning off all the second special figure holding lamps 220, the special figure 2 The fact that the number of suspensions of the variable game is 0 is informed, and the two general purpose suspension lamps 216 are turned on, thereby informing that the number of suspensions of the ordinary game is 2.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 197 (b) is a state immediately after the start of the usual variable game. In this case, the “variable display of the general map” is started in the general map display device 210, and the fourth graphic 208f (in this example, a colored square image) indicating that the normal map is changing is displayed on the decorative pattern display device. By displaying in 208, it is informing that the normal map is changing. Further, by turning off one ordinary figure holding lamp 216, it is notified that the number of ordinary figure variable games held has decreased from two to one.

  In the state shown in FIG. 197 (c), the “button effect” is performed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established during the game (in this example, the number of reserved special-game variable games is 0). It is in a state. Here, based on the reception of an operation by the operating means (chance button 136) during execution of the button effect, a setting screen (menu screen) STP1 shown in FIG. 197 (c) is displayed, and this setting screen (menu screen) ) A setting screen (password input screen) STP3 shown in FIG. 197 (d) is displayed based on accepting an operation by the operation means (chance button 136) in STP1.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 197 (e) is a state in which the usual drawing effect is started based on the fact that the usual figure variable game is started at the timing shown in FIG. Here, as a normal drawing effect, a display of the character image NP11 of Tono, a display of a balloon NP12 including the characters “Aim!” And a display of the target image NP13 are performed, and the normal image changes to the target image NP13. A downward arrow (↓) indicating that it is inside is displayed.

  At this timing, a part of the display of the title bar TPb1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is obscured by a part of the display of the balloon NP12 constituting the ordinary drawing effect (the display of the balloon NP12 is displayed). The display of the title bar TPb1 overlaps with a part of the display of the title bar TPb1, and a part of the display of the title bar TPb1 is invisible (or compared with the case where the display of the balloon NP12 is not displayed). It is difficult to see).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the display of the password input field IP1 and the character selection part SP1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not obscured by the display of the balloon NP12 (the display of the balloon NP12 is a password). Since the overlapping display is not performed so as to overlap a part of the display of the input field IP1 or the character selection part SP1, all the display of the password input field IP1 and the character selection part SP1 is visible.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 197 (f) to FIG. 10 (g) is a state in which the continuation of the ordinary drawing effect is executed. Here, as a continuation of the ordinary drawing effect, after the display of the balloon NP12 is erased, an animation is displayed in which the display of the arrow image NP14 moves from the character image NP11 to the target image NP13. In the state shown in FIG. 197 (g), the arrow image NP14 is in contact with the target image NP13, and the target image NP13 indicates the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure variation game is successful (in this example, the loss). Display (in this example, x mark) is displayed.

  During the period shown in FIGS. 197 (f) to (g), a part of the password input field IP1 constituting the setting screen (password entry screen) STP3 displays the arrow image NP14 constituting the ordinary drawing effect. (The display of the arrow image NP14 is displayed so as to overlap the display of the password input field IP1), so that a part of the display of the password input field IP1 is , Being invisible (or difficult to see compared to the case where the display of the arrow image NP14 is not displayed).

  On the other hand, during the synchronization, the display of the title bar TPb1 and the character selection part SP1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not obscured by the display of the arrow image NP14 (the arrow image NP14 Since the display is not overlapped so as to overlap a part of the display of the title bar TPb1 and the character selection part SP1, the entire display of the title bar TPb1 and the character selection part SP1 is visible.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 197 (h) is a state in which the ordinary drawing effect is ended with the end of the ordinary game. Here, all the displays that make up the general drawing effect are erased with the end of the general drawing effect, so the displays that make up the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 (title bar TPb1, password input field IP1, and characters) All of the display of the selection part SP1 is visible.

<Specific example 2 of usual drawing production while setting screen is displayed>
FIG. 198 is a diagram showing, in time series, a specific example 2 of the ordinary drawing effect during the setting screen display. The drawings shown in FIGS. 198 (a) to (f) are the same as the drawings shown in FIGS. 197 (a) to (f). (G) Each subsequent figure is demonstrated.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 198 (g), the target image NP13 is displayed with a display (in this example, a double circle) that suggests the result of determination of whether or not the normal game is successful (in this example, hit). . Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (h), the display of the balloon NP12 ′ including the characters “Congratulations !!” is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 198 (i), the second special figure starting port 232 is displayed. An operation-related display NP15 that prompts the player to launch a ball aiming to enter (Electrical Chu) (in this example, the display of the letters “Aim for Electric Chu!” And two downward arrows. (↓↓) is displayed). Subsequently, in this example, since the result of the determination of whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful is a win, control is performed to open the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 198 (h), a part of the display of the title bar TPb1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is obscured by a part of the display of the balloon NP12 ′ constituting the ordinary drawing effect. (Part of the display of the balloon NP12 'is displayed so as to overlap the part of the display of the title bar TPb1), and part of the display of the title bar TPb1 is not visible (or the display of the balloon NP12') Is difficult to see compared to the case where is not displayed.

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the display of the password input field IP1 and the character selection part SP1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not obscured by the display of the balloon NP12 ′ (the display of the balloon NP12 ′ is not displayed). The password input field IP1 and the character selection part SP1 are not displayed in an overlapping manner so as to overlap a part of the display, and the password input field IP1 and the character selection part SP1 are all visible.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (i), a part of the character selection part SP1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is covered with a part of the operation related display NP15 constituting the ordinary drawing effect. (The operation related display NP15 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the display of the character selection unit SP1), and a part of the display of the selection unit SP1 is not visible (or the operation related display NP15 is It is difficult to see compared to the case where it is not displayed.

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the display of the title bar TPb1 and the password input field IP1 constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not obscured by the operation related display NP15 (the operation related display NP15 is a title bar). Since the overlap display is not performed so as to overlap with a part of the display of TPb1 and password input field IP1, all of the display of title bar TPb1 and password input field IP1 is visible.

  In the following FIG. 198 (j) to FIG. 10 (k), in accordance with the control for opening the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 (electrical chow), a dedicated effect that is executed only during the control is performed. . This dedicated effect is not an essential effect and may not be performed.

<Specific example 3 of ordinary drawing production during setting screen display>
199 (a) to 199 (g) are diagrams showing a specific example 3 of the usual drawing effect during the setting screen display in time series. The drawings shown in FIGS. 199 (a) to (f) are the same as the drawings shown in FIGS. 197 (a) to (f), and the description thereof will be omitted. (G) Each subsequent figure is demonstrated.

  In FIG. 199 (g), when the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 shown in FIG. This is a state in which special figure variation display is started. Here, with the start of the special figure change display as a trigger, all the displays (display of title bar TPb1, password input field IP1, and character selection part SP1) constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 are erased, and the decorative design The display of the decorative symbols on the display device 208 is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (g), a part of the decorative pattern that is changing (in this example, the decorative pattern on the left side of the front view) is covered with a part of the arrow image display NP14 that constitutes the ordinary drawing effect. By being hidden (by displaying the arrow image NP14 so that the display of the arrow image NP14 overlaps with a part of the decorative design (the decorative symbol on the left side of the front view)), one of the decorative symbols (the decorative symbol on the left side of the front view) The portion is invisible (or difficult to see compared to the case where the display of the arrow image NP14 is not displayed).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the other part of the decorative pattern that is changing (in this example, the decorative pattern on the right side of the front view and the center of the front view) is not covered by the display of the arrow image NP14 (arrow The display of the image NP14 is not displayed so as to overlap with another part of the decorative pattern that is changing (the decorative pattern at the right side of the front view and the decorative pattern at the center of the front view), and the decorative pattern that is changing (right side of the front view and All the other parts of the decorative pattern (in the center of the front view) are visible.

  In addition, the decorative design to be covered by the display constituting the ordinary drawing effect is not limited to the decorative design on the left side of the front view, and may be a decorative design on the right side of the front view or the center of the front view. One, multiple, or all may be present. The decorative symbols to be covered by the display constituting the ordinary drawing effect are not limited to the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner, and one, a plurality, or all of the plurality of decorative symbols may be stopped. In addition, the display that covers the decorative design may be one, a plurality, or all of the plurality of displays constituting the ordinary drawing effect, and may be a display other than the display of the arrow image NP14.

<Specific example 4 of usual drawing production during setting screen display>
FIGS. 199 (j) to (l) are diagrams showing a specific example 4 of the usual drawing effect during the setting screen display in time series. The state shown in FIG. 199 (j) saves power based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, after the end of the special figure variable game, the predetermined time has elapsed with the number of special figure variable games held zero). It is in a state that has shifted to mode. In this power saving mode, the background color of the display area of the decorative symbol variation display device 208 is changed to black and only the character display of “power saving mode” is performed, so that the power consumed by the decorative symbol display device 208 can be saved. I have to.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (k), the variable power game is started in the power saving mode, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (l), the power saving mode is canceled based on the start of the general power fluctuation game. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is restored to the display before the transition to the power saving mode, and the normal drawing effect is started.

  In this example, as a display before the transition to the power saving mode, a decorative symbol stop display and a button effect display are performed, and as a general diagram effect after the power saving mode is canceled, the Tono character image NP11 is displayed, The balloon NP12 including the characters “!” And the target image NP13 are displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (l), a part of the decorative pattern (in this example, the decorative pattern on the right side of the front view and the center of the front view) and a part of the button effect constitute a normal drawing effect. By being obscured by a part of the display of the balloon NP12 (the display of the balloon NP12 is overlapped with a part of the decorative design (decorative pattern on the right side of the front view and the central part of the front view) and a part of the button effect. ), Part of the decorative design (decorative design on the right side of the front view and the central design of the front view) and part of the button effect are invisible (or difficult to see compared to the case where the display of the balloon NP12 is not displayed). ).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the other part of the decorative pattern that is changing (in this example, the decorative pattern on the left side of the front view) is not obscured by the display of the balloon NP12 (the display of the balloon NP12 is changed) All other parts of the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern on the left side of the front view) that is changing are visible. Is possible.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (m), the setting screen (menu screen) STP1 is displayed based on the reception of the operation by the operation means (chance button 136) during the execution of the button effect.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (m), a part of the selection unit SP constituting the setting screen (menu screen) STP1 displays the character image NP11, the balloon NP12, and the target that constitute the ordinary drawing effect. By being obscured by a part of the display of the image NP13 (the display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, and the display of the target image NP13 are overlapped so as to overlap a part of the selection unit SP. Thus, part of the selection unit SP becomes invisible (or more difficult to see compared to the case where the display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, and the display of the target image NP13 are not displayed). ing.

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the title part TP and the explanation part MP constituting the setting screen (menu screen) STP1 may be covered with the display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, and the display of the target image NP13. (The display of the character image NP11, the display of the balloon NP12, and the display of the target image NP13 are not overlapped so as to overlap the title part TP and the explanation part MP). Everything is visible.

<Specific example 5 of usual drawing production during setting screen display>
FIGS. 200A to 200D are diagrams showing, in chronological order, specific example 5 of the usual drawing effect during the setting screen display. In the state shown in FIG. 200 (a), a “button effect” is performed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (in this example, the number of reserved special-game variable games is 0). State. Further, in this example, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure hold display area 208h1 that represents the number of special figure variable games held in numbers, and the number of icons that display the number of special figure variable games held. A second special figure hold display area 208h2 is provided. In addition, in this example, while the number 0 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208h1, and the hold icon is not displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208h2, the number of hold of the special figure variable game is 0. Notifying that there is.

  In the state shown in FIG. 200 (b), the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is displayed on the basis of accepting an operation by the operation means (chance button 136) during execution of the button effect shown in FIG. It is in the displayed state.

  At the same timing, the display of the decorative pattern and the background image during the stop display is obscured by the entire setting screen (password input screen) STP3 (the entire setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is stopped and displayed. A part of the display of the decorative pattern and the background image in the stop display is not visible (or the setting screen (password input screen). ) Difficult to see compared to the case where STP3 is not displayed.

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the first special figure hold display area 208h1 and the second special figure hold display area 208h2 are not covered by the entire setting screen (password input screen) STP3, so the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not displayed so as to overlap a part of the first special figure hold display area 208h1 and the second special figure hold display area 208h2), the first special figure hold display area 208h1 and the second special figure hold display area All of the 208h2 display is visible.

  For this reason, the number of suspensions of the special figure variable game can be notified during the display of the setting screen (password input screen) STP3, and the player can display the special figure variable game even when the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is displayed. It becomes possible to grasp the number of holds.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 200 (c) is a state in which a general drawing effect is started based on the start of a general variable game. Here, on the back of the setting screen (password input screen) STP3, as a regular drawing effect, a character image display NP11, a balloon display NP12 including the characters “Aim!”, And a target image display NP13 are displayed. It is carried out.

  However, at the same timing, a part of the display of the character image NP11, the whole display of the balloon NP12, and a part of the display of the target image NP13 are obscured by the entire setting screen (password input screen) STP3. As a result, the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the display of the character image NP11, the whole display of the balloon NP12, and a part of the display of the target image NP13. Therefore, a part of the ordinary drawing effect is invisible (or difficult to see compared with the case where the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is not displayed).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the first special figure hold display area 208h1 and the second special figure hold display area 208h2 are not obscured by the display constituting the ordinary drawing effect (the display constituting the ordinary figure effect is Display of the first special figure hold display area 208h1 and the second special figure hold display area 208h2 because the first special figure hold display area 208h1 and the second special figure hold display area 208h2 are not overlapped with each other) Are all visible.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (d), the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is deleted, so that the character image NP11, the balloon NP12, the target image NP13, and the arrow are displayed. The display of the image NP14 is visible, but a part of the decorative pattern is difficult to view due to the display of the arrow image NP14.

<Specific example 6 of usual drawing production during setting screen display>
200 (f) and 200 (g) are diagrams showing a specific example 6 of the general drawing effect during the setting screen display in time series. The game table according to this example includes two display means, a first display device 2081 and a second display device 2082. At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (f), a part of the setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 (title bar TP, volume level display SP1, and light amount level display SP2) is displayed on the first display device 2081. The operation unit MP, which is another part of the setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2, is displayed on the second display device 2082.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 200 (g) is a state in which a general drawing effect has been started. At the same timing, a part of the title bar TP and the volume level display SP1 constituting the setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 includes the display of the balloon NP12, the target image NP13, and the arrow image NP14 constituting the ordinary drawing effect. (The balloon NP12 display, the target image NP13 display, and the arrow image NP14 display overlap each other in the title bar TPb1 and the volume level display SP1). When part of the title bar TPb1 and the volume level display SP1 is not visible (or the display of the balloon NP12, the target image NP13, and the arrow image NP14 are not displayed) Is difficult to see).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the display of the light level display SP2 and the explanation unit MP constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 is covered with the display of the balloon NP12, the target image NP13, and the arrow image NP14. Since it is not hidden (the balloon NP12 display, the target image NP13 display, and the arrow image NP14 display are not overlapped so as to overlap a part of the light amount level display SP2 or the display of the explanation part MP. ), All of the light level display SP2 and the display of the explanation part MP are visible.

<Specific example 7 of usual drawing production during setting screen display>
FIGS. 200 (f) and (g ′) are diagrams showing a specific example 7 of the usual drawing effect during the setting screen display in time series. At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (g ′), a part of the volume level display SP1 constituting the setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 is obscured by the display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14. (The display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14 are displayed so as to overlap with a part of the volume level display SP1), and a part of the volume level display SP1 is visually recognized. It is impossible (or difficult to see compared to the case where the target image NP13 and the arrow image NP14 are not displayed).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the title bar TP, the light amount level display SP2, and the explanation part MP constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 are displayed on the character image NP11, the balloon NP12, and the target image NP13. The display and the arrow image NP14 are not obscured by the display (character image NP11 display, balloon NP12 display, target image NP13 display, and arrow image NP14 display are title bar TP, light intensity Since the level display SP2 and the display of the explanation part MP are not overlapped with each other), all of the title bar TP, the light amount level display SP2 and the display of the explanation part MP are visible.

<Specific example 8 of usual drawing production during setting screen display>
FIG. 200 (h) is a diagram showing, in time series, specific example 8 of the usual drawing effect during the setting screen display. The game table according to this example includes two display means, a first display device 2081 and a second display device 2083, and the second display device 2083 has a predetermined interval from the first display device 2081. It is incorporated in a part of the operating means 2085 arranged in a position.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (h), a part of the volume level display SP1 constituting the setting screen (adjustment screen) STP2 is obscured by the display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14. As a result (the display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14 are displayed so as to overlap with a part of the volume level display SP1), a part of the volume level display SP1 is not visible. (Or, the display of the target image NP13 and the display of the arrow image NP14 are difficult to see compared to the case where the display is not displayed).

  On the other hand, at the same timing, the title bar TP, the light amount level display SP2, and the explanation part MP constituting the setting screen (password input screen) STP3 are displayed on the character image NP11, the balloon NP12, and the target image NP13. The display and the arrow image NP14 are not obscured by the display (character image NP11 display, balloon NP12 display, target image NP13 display, and arrow image NP14 display are title bar TP, light intensity Since the level display SP2 and the display of the explanation part MP are not overlapped with each other), all of the title bar TP, the light amount level display SP2 and the display of the explanation part MP are visible.

  As described above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a start area (for example, the second special figure start port 232), the first display means (for example, the general map display device 210), and the like. And a second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the first display means can execute at least a symbol variation display (for example, a universal symbol variation display). The second display means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display (for example, setting screen display), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display. Yes, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, and in the start area, a first symbol form (for example, a winning symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first display means. Later, at least start hitting The hit operation is an operation including at least an operation of opening the start region, and the first display is a display related to the effect setting (hereinafter referred to as “setting display”), and The second display is a display related to the hit operation (hereinafter referred to as “effect display”), and the second display means displays the second display during the execution of the first display. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is at least means capable of starting execution.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the display related to the hitting operation can be performed even during the period in which the display related to the effect setting is performed, the player is disadvantaged. Such a situation can be prevented in advance, and there may be a case where it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a characteristic display means.

  Further, the second display means is means capable of executing at least the setting display in the first display area, and the second display means is capable of executing at least the effect display in the second display area. The display area may be a display area that overlaps at least a part of the display area of the first display area.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize both the display related to the effect setting and the display related to the hitting operation, which gives the player a disadvantage while ensuring the convenience of the player. It may be possible to prevent such a situation.

  In addition, the setting display includes a plurality of types of display units (for example, as shown in FIGS. 191 (a) (1) and (a) (2)), and the contents and purpose of the setting screen (for example, volume adjustment, light intensity, etc. Adjustment, character selection, BGM selection, etc.) title part TP, input part IP for allowing the player to input input information (for example, password, number, etc.), selection by operation by operation means (for example, chance button 136) At least one of the plurality of types of display units is a first display unit, and the plurality of types At least one of the display units is a second display unit, and the first display unit is a display unit displayed in a third display region of the first display region, The second display unit A display unit that is displayed in a fourth display area of the first display area, wherein at least a part of the third display area is a display area of at least a part of the first display area. The display area may overlap with the display area.

  In addition, the effect display is a display constituted by at least a plurality of types of effect units, at least one of the plurality of types of effect units is a first effect unit, and the plurality of types of effect units At least one of them is a second rendering unit, the first rendering unit is a rendering that is executed over a first period, and the second rendering unit is in a second period. The second period may be a period different from the first period.

  The symbol variation display may be a symbol variation display of a normal symbol, and the effect display may be an effect display at least related to the symbol variation display.

  In addition, sound output means (for example, a speaker 120) capable of outputting sound may be provided, and the setting display may be a display including at least a display related to the adjustment of the sound volume. In addition, light output means (for example, a lamp or a liquid crystal display device) capable of outputting light may be provided, and the setting display may be a display including at least a display related to the adjustment of the amount of light. Further, the setting display may be a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state in the second state. The second state is a state in which at least a part of the effect display overlaps at least a part of the setting display, and the first state is a state in which at least a part of the effect display is the It may be in a state where it does not overlap at least a part of the setting display.

  In addition, the game stand includes a symbol display means and a display means, the symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least a symbol variation display, and the display means is capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display. And at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, and the first display Is a setting screen display capable of at least setting related to the game, the second display is an effect display related to at least the symbol variation display, and the second display is the first period Among them, the display is executed at least, and the first period may be a period during which the setting screen display is executed at least.

  Further, at least a part of the setting screen display may be a display overlapped by at least a part of the effect display. Further, the setting screen display is a display constituted by at least a plurality of types of display units, and at least one of the plurality of types of display units is a first display unit, and the plurality of types of display units At least one of the second display unit, at least a part of the first display unit is a display that is overlapped by at least a part of the effect display, and the second display unit May be a display that is not overlapped by at least a part of the effect display.

  Further, the effect display is a display composed of at least a plurality of types of effect units, at least one of the plurality of types of effect units is a first effect unit, and the plurality of types of effect units At least one of them is a second rendering unit, the first rendering unit is a rendering that is executed over a first period, and the second rendering unit is in a second period. The second period is a period different from the first period, and at least a part of the setting screen display is overlapped by the first effect part. The setting screen display may be a display that is not overlapped by the second rendering unit.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be a symbol variation display of a normal symbol, and the effect display may be an effect display at least related to the symbol variation display of the normal symbol. In addition, it includes a determination unit, the determination unit is a unit that can at least determine whether or not the normal symbol variation game is successful, and the effect display has a first determination result as the result of the determination. In some cases, it is an effect display executed at a first frequency, and the effect display is an effect display executed at a second frequency when the result of the success / failure determination is a second result / failure determination result. The second determination result may be a determination result different from the first determination result, and the second frequency may be a frequency different from the first frequency.

  In addition, sound output means capable of outputting sound may be provided, and the effect display may be an effect display including at least the effect by the sound. In addition, light output means capable of outputting light may be provided, and the effect display may be an effect display including at least the effect due to the light. Further, sound output means capable of outputting sound may be provided, and the setting screen display may be a display capable of adjusting at least the volume of the sound. Moreover, the light output means which can output light is provided, and the said setting screen display may be a display which can adjust the light quantity of the said light at least.

<Non-movable body and movable body>
Next, the basic concept of the non-movable body and the movable body included in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 201 (a) to 201 (d) are diagrams showing an example of the moving mode of the movable body, and FIG. 201 (e) is a diagram showing a modification of the shape of the movable body.

  The “movable body” included in the gaming machine of the present embodiment is an object configured to be movable, and for example, an accessory such as the shielding device 246 or the effect movable body 224 is applicable. In addition, the “non-movable body” included in the game table of the present embodiment is an object that is not configured to be movable, and corresponds to the outer frame 102, for example.

  The state shown in FIGS. 201A and 201A is a state in which the movable body CB has moved to the first position. This first position is a position where the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB do not overlap in front view. Moreover, the state shown to Fig.201 (a) (2) is the state which the movable body CB has moved to the 2nd position. The second position is a position where at least a part of the movable body CB and at least a part of the non-movable body NCB overlap in a front view.

  The movable body CB of this example is at least between the first position shown in FIGS. 201 (a) and (1) and the second position shown in FIGS. It is an object configured to be movable. In a state where the movable body CB has moved to the first position, the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB do not overlap in front view, and therefore the non-movable body NCB cannot be visually recognized by the movable body CB (or the movable body CB. Is not difficult to see compared to when moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, in a state where the movable body CB is moved to the second position, the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB overlap in front view, so that at least a part of the non-movable body NCB is caused by at least a part of the movable body CB. It becomes invisible (or difficult to see compared with the case where the movable body CB has moved to the first position). As shown in FIGS. 201 (a) and (2), when the non-movable body NCB is a liquid crystal display device and a rectangular image CG is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the movable body CB is at the second position. In the moved state, the movable body CB and the image CG overlap each other when viewed from the front, so that at least a part of the image CG cannot be visually recognized by at least a part of the movable body CB (or the movable body CB moves to the first position). It is difficult to see compared to the case where

  The state shown in FIGS. 201 (b) and (1) is a state in which the movable body CB is moved to a third position slightly closer to the second position than the first position. The third position is a position where at least a part of the movable body CB and at least a part of the non-movable body NCB overlap in a front view. For this reason, in a state where the movable body CB is moved to the third position, the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB overlap in front view, so that at least a part of the non-movable body NCB is at least a part of the movable body CB. This makes it invisible (or difficult to see compared to when the movable body CB is moved to the first position).

  However, the size of the area of the non-movable body NCB that becomes invisible (or difficult to view) when the movable body CB moves to the third position is visually recognized when the movable body CB moves to the second position. It is smaller than the size of the area of the non-movable body NCB that is impossible (or difficult to see).

  As shown in FIGS. 201 (b) and (2), when the non-movable body NCB is a liquid crystal display device and a rectangular image CG is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the movable body CB is at the third position. In the moved state, the movable body CB and the image CG overlap each other when viewed from the front, so that at least a part of the image CG cannot be visually recognized by at least a part of the movable body CB (or the movable body CB moves to the first position). It is difficult to see compared to the case where

  However, the size of the region of the image CG that becomes invisible (or difficult to see) when the movable body CB moves to the third position is not visible when the movable body CB moves to the second position ( Or, it is smaller than the size of the region of the image CG that is difficult to view.

  The example shown in FIG. 201 (c) includes two movable bodies, a first movable body CB1 and a second movable body CB2. The first movable body CB1 in this example is the same object as the movable body CB shown in FIGS. 201 (a) and 201 (b). In addition, the second movable body CB of the present example has a fourth position shown in FIGS. 201 (c) and (1) and a fifth position shown in FIGS. The object is configured to be movable at least between the two. In the state where the second movable body CB is moved to the fourth position, the second movable body CB2 and the non-movable body NCB do not overlap in front view, so the non-movable body NCB is the second movable body CB2. Is not invisible (or difficult to see compared to the case where the second movable body CB is moved to the fifth position).

  On the other hand, when the second movable body CB2 is moved to the fifth position, the second movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB overlap in front view, so that at least a part of the non-movable body NCB The movable body CB becomes invisible (or harder to see than when the second movable body CB2 is moved to the fourth position). In the state shown in FIGS. 201 (c) and (1), a part of the non-movable body NCB cannot be visually recognized by the first movable body CB1 (or the first movable body CB1 moves to the first position). In addition to being difficult to view), in addition to the other part of the non-movable body NCB, the second movable body CB2 is not visible (or the second movable body CB2 is in the fourth position). Is more difficult to see than when moving to

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 201 (d) and (1), when the non-movable body NCB is a liquid crystal display device and a rectangular image CG is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the movable body CB is at the first position. In the moved state, the movable body CB and the image CG do not overlap in front view, so the image CG cannot be visually recognized by the movable body CB (or compared to the case where the movable body CB has moved to the second position). And difficult to see). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 201 (d) and (2), when the movable body CB is moved to the second position, the movable body CB and the image CG overlap each other in a front view. The at least part of the movable body CB makes it invisible (or difficult to see compared to the case where the movable body CB has moved to the first position).

  The shape of the movable body CB is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIGS. 201 (e) and (1), a rectangular opening CBe1 is formed in a part of the movable body CB. As shown in FIGS. 201 (e) and (2), when the rectangular cutout portion CBe2 is formed on the outer edge of the movable body CB, the movable body CB and the non-movable body NCB (or the image CG) overlap in front view. However, in some cases, a part of the non-movable body NCB (or image CG) on the back side can be visually recognized through the opening CBe1 and the notch CBe2.

<Moving start opportunity for movable body>
Next, the movement start opportunity of the movable body CB according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 (a) is a diagram for explaining the movement start timing of the movable body CB.

  As an opportunity for the movable body CB according to the present embodiment to start moving, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, each control unit (for example, the main control unit 100, the first sub control unit 400, the second When the initial setting of the sub-control unit 500 and the liquid crystal control unit (VDP) 434) is completed, when the operation with the ball launch handle 134 is accepted, when the operation with the chance button 136 is accepted, the game ball 131 receives the start opening or winning When the ball enters (or passes) the mouth, when the initial operation of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed, when an operation by various operation units (for example, the ball lending operation button 140 and the return operation button 142) is received, etc. Can be mentioned.

  FIG. 202 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the start of movement of the movable body CB. In this example, the decorative symbol display device is arranged below the first movable body CB1 by moving the first movable body CB1 moving to the initial position downward when the power to the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. A part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not visually recognized by the first movable body CB1 (or when the first movable body CB1 is moved to the initial position by covering part of 208). Is difficult to see).

  In addition, during the movement of the first movable body CB1 (during the first initial operation), an operation means by one operation means (for example, the chance button 136) of the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 is received. As a result, the second movable body CB2 having a triangular shape in plan view that has moved to the initial position rotates about one side (performs a second initial operation), whereby the second movable body CB2 is moved. A part of the game board 200 that is covered by can be visually recognized. In addition, the third movable body CB3 having a fan shape in plan view that has moved to the initial position rotates around one point (performs a second initial operation), and is covered by the third movable body CB3. A part of the played game board 200 can also be visually recognized.

<Movement timing of movable body>
Next, the movement timing of the movable body CB according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a time chart showing an example of the moving timing of the movable body CB.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 203 (a) and (1), the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body is started when power is supplied to the game machine, and the movement of the first movable body is finished after a predetermined time. However, the second movable body is not moved (initial operation). In the example shown in FIGS. 203 (a) and (2), the operation by the operation unit is accepted after the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body is completed (the operation detection signal from the operation unit is input to the sensor). )), The movement of the second movable body (initial operation) is started, and the movement of the second movable body (initial operation) is finished after a predetermined time.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 203 (a) and 203 (3), an operation by the operation unit is accepted during the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body (the operation detection signal from the operation unit is input to the sensor). )), The movement of the second movable body (initial operation) is started while continuing the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body, and the movement of the first movable body (initial operation) after a predetermined time. The movement (initial operation) of the second movable body is finished after finishing the above.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 203 (b) (1), the movement of the first movable body (initial operation) is started when power is turned on to the game machine, and the first movable body is moved (initially) after a predetermined time. (Operation) has ended, but no effects (display by the decorative symbol display device 208, light emission by the LED, sound output by the speaker, etc.) are performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 203 (b) and (2), the operation by the operation unit is accepted after the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body is completed (the operation detection signal from the operation unit is input to the sensor). )), The production starts, and the production ends after a predetermined time. In the example shown in FIGS. 203 (b) and (3), an operation by the operation unit is accepted during the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body (the operation detection signal from the operation unit is input to the sensor). )), The production is started while continuing the movement (initial operation) of the first movable body, and the production is finished after the movement (initial operation) of the movable body is finished after a predetermined time.

<Movement of movable body triggered by power-on>
Next, the movement of the movable body triggered by turning on the power will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 204 is a state transition diagram illustrating an example of an operation state of the movable body.

  As described above, the movement start trigger of the movable body CB according to the present embodiment is not limited to power-on to the pachinko machine 100, but here, as an example, the movable body CB triggered by power-on The movement will be described. When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, power is supplied to each control unit (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, liquid crystal control unit (VDP) 434, etc.) Main processing of the control unit (main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 187, first sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. 189 (a), second control unit main processing shown in FIG. 190 (a), liquid crystal control unit (VDP ) Execution of the main process 434).

  In the main process of each control unit, the initial operation of the movable body CB is started as one of the processes in the initial setting, and each control unit shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1. For example, in the example described with reference to FIG. 202 (b), as the initial operation, the first movable body CB1 that has moved to the initial position is moved downward.

  Subsequently, the control unit that has completed the initial operation normally shifts to an operation standby state S2. In this operation standby state S2, detection signals input from various sensors connected to each control unit are detected. Here, examples of the sensor connected to the main control unit 300 include the above-described sphere detection sensor, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, and the like. Further, examples of the sensor connected to the first sub control unit 400 include the above-described shielding device sensor 430, the chance button detection sensor 426, and the like. Further, examples of the sensor connected to the second sub-control unit 500 include the above-described effect movable body sensor 424 and the like.

  On the other hand, the control unit in which the initial operation has not ended normally shifts to the error state S4. In this error state S4, after the initial operation is repeated a predetermined number of times (after retrying), if the retry fails, the operation proceeds to the operation prohibition state S5, the operation of the movable body CB is prohibited, and the retry is performed. If successful, the operation shifts to the operation standby state S2.

  Moreover, the control part which detected the signal from a sensor in operation | movement waiting state S2 transfers to operation state S3. In this operating state S3, a predetermined operation (linear movement, rotational movement, etc.) is executed for each movable body CB, and when the operation is completed, the operation shifts to the operation standby state S2. For example, in the example described with reference to FIG. 202 (b), as the operation in the operation standby state, the second movable body CB2 having a triangular shape in plan view is triggered by the detection of the signal from the chance button detection sensor 426. The third movable body CB3 having a fan shape in plan view is rotated about one side as a fulcrum, and the third movable body CB3 having a fan shape in plan view is rotated about one point as a fulcrum.

<Specific example of initial operation of movable body>
Next, a specific example of the initial operation of the movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. In this example, it is assumed that the first sub-control unit 400 performs the movement control of the movable body and the detection of the operation by the chance button 136, and the liquid crystal control unit (VDP) 434 performs the display control of the decorative symbol display device 208. I do.

  The initial operation (return operation) of the movable body is an operation that detects the current position of the movable body using a sensor and moves the movable body to the initial position when the current position does not match the initial position. That is. For example, when a plurality of movable bodies are not located at the initial position, an operation of moving the movable bodies one by one to the initial position with respect to a single fluctuation of the special figure (or ordinary figure), or a plurality of movable bodies Even when one of the movable bodies is located at the initial position, an operation of moving all the movable bodies including the movable body to the initial position is also included.

<Specific example 1 of initial operation of movable body>
205 (a) to 205 (k) are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. The state shown in FIG. 205 (a) is a state immediately after power is turned on to the pachinko machine 100, and each control unit starts initial setting in the main process and shifts to a power-on initial operation state S1.

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the initial operation of the first movable body CB1 in the first sub-control unit main process and shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 In the main process of the liquid crystal control unit, the initial operation of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started and the process proceeds to the power-on initial operation state S1.

  The subsequent states shown in FIGS. 205 (b) to (c) are states in which each control unit shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1 and executes the initial operation. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the power-on initial operation state S1, performs control to move the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 controls the power-on initial operation state. The process proceeds to S <b> 1, and the text “active” is displayed using the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 205 (d) is a state in which the liquid crystal control unit 434 has normally finished the initial operation and has shifted to the operation standby state S2. Here, when the liquid crystal control unit 434 has normally completed the initial operation, the characters “active” of the decorative symbol display device 208 are deleted, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the operation shifts to the operation standby state S2. Yes.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the power-on initial operation state S1 and continues the control of moving the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 205 (d). As shown in FIGS. 205 (e) to (g), the first movable body CB1 is controlled to move to the right in the horizontal direction. The state shown in FIG. 205 (g) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 has normally finished the initial operation and has shifted to the operation standby state S2.

  FIG. 205 (h) is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 maintains the operation standby state S2 and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to start special figure fluctuation. Here, the liquid crystal control unit 434 starts the decorative symbol variation display using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the instruction to start the special symbol variation from the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 205 (i) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the operation standby state S2 and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to execute a super (SP) reach effect. Here, the liquid crystal control unit 434 starts the super reach effect using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the execution instruction of the super reach effect from the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 205 (j) is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the operation standby state S2 and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to execute a button effect. Here, the liquid crystal control unit 434 receives a button effect execution instruction from the first sub-control unit 400 and uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to generate a button effect (in this example, “press the button”). Character display) has started.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 205 (k) is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 has received an operation detection by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to move the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction based on detection of an operation by the chance button 136.

<Specific example 2 of initial operation of movable body>
205 (l) to (p) are diagrams showing a specific example 2 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. The state shown in FIGS. 205 (l) to (o) is similar to the state shown in FIGS. 205 (g) to (j). In this example, in addition to the first movable body CB1, The difference is that the second movable body CB2 is provided.

  The state shown in FIG. 205 (p) is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 has received an operation detection by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to move the second movable body CB2 upward in the vertical direction based on detection of an operation by the chance button 136, and control to move the first movable body CB1 is performed. Not performed.

<Specific example 3 of initial operation of movable body>
206A to 206K are diagrams showing a specific example 3 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. The state shown in FIGS. 206 (a) to (g) is similar to the state shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to (g). In this example, in addition to the first movable body CB1, The difference is that the second movable body CB2 is provided.

  The state shown in FIG. 206 (h) is a state where the first sub control unit 400 has received an operation detection by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 upward in the vertical direction as shown in FIGS. 206 (h) to (i) based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136. Then, as shown in FIGS. 206 (j) to (k), the second movable body CB2 is controlled to move downward in the vertical direction.

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136. For example, as shown in FIG. 206 (l) The first sub-control unit 400 instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to perform a predetermined display (in this example, an image display based on the operation) based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 A predetermined display may be performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on receiving an instruction to execute a predetermined display from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Specific example 4 of initial operation of movable body>
207 (a) to (h) are diagrams showing a specific example 4 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. Note that the states shown in FIGS. 207 (a) to (d) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to (d), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (e) is during the period in which the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the power-on initial operation state S1 and continues the control of moving the first movable body CB1 to the left in the horizontal direction. This is a state in which detection of an operation by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) has been received. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 vertically upward as shown in FIGS. 207 (e) to (g) based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136. Control (initial operation of the second movable body CB2) is performed, and the movement control of the first movable body CB1 is continued.

  In the subsequent period shown in FIG. 207 (g) to FIG. 207 (h), the first sub-control unit 400 ends the movement control of the first movable body CB1, but maintains the power-on initial operation state S1, Control to move the second movable body CB2 downward in the vertical direction (initial operation of the second movable body CB2) is continued.

  In this example, the example in which the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second movable body CB2 based on the detection of the operation by the chance button 136 has been described. For example, as illustrated in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 performs control to move the first movable body CB1 (initial operation of the first movable body CB1), and controls the liquid crystal control unit 434 to perform predetermined control based on detection of an operation by the chance button 136. Is displayed (in this example, an image is displayed based on an operation), and the liquid crystal control unit 434 receives a predetermined display execution instruction from the first sub-control unit 400, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. You may comprise so that a predetermined display may be performed using.

  With such a configuration, when the first movable body CB1 is moved onto the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first movable body CB1 overlaps with a predetermined display in a front view. At least a part of the display is invisible by at least a part of the first movable body CB1 (or difficult to see compared to the case where the first movable body CB1 is moved out of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208). )become. For this reason, the visual recognition state of a predetermined display can be changed easily, and there may be a case where a production effect can be enhanced.

<Specific example 5 of initial operation of movable body>
FIGS. 208A to 208H are diagrams showing a specific example 5 of the initial operation of the movable body in time series. The state shown in FIGS. 208 (a) to (g) is the same as the state shown in FIGS. 206 (a) to (g), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The state shown in FIG. 208 (h) is a state in which the first sub control unit 400 has received an operation detection by the chance button 136 (detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426) in the operation standby state S2. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to move the second movable body CB2, and instructs the liquid crystal control unit 434 to display the above setting screen based on detection of an operation by the chance button 136. The liquid crystal control unit 434 displays the setting screen using the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the instruction to execute the display of the setting screen from the first sub-control unit 400.

  With this configuration, when the second movable body CB2 is moved onto the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second movable body CB2 and the display of the setting screen overlap in front view. At least a part of the screen is invisible by at least a part of the second movable body CB2 (or difficult to see compared to the case where the second movable body CB2 is moved out of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208). )become. For this reason, the visual recognition state of the display of a setting screen can be changed easily, and there may be a case where a production effect can be improved.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has an operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 202 (b)) and a plurality of movable bodies (for example, FIG. a game machine comprising a first movable body CB1, a second movable body CB2, a third movable body CB3) and a control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) shown in b), At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, the first movable body CB1 shown in FIG. 202 (b)), and the control means performs at least a plurality of types of processing. At least one of the plurality of types of processes is a first process (for example, the second movable body CB2 and the third movable body CB3 shown in FIG. 202B). Of the plurality of types of processing. At least one is a second process, and the second process includes at least a process of initially operating the first movable body (for example, a process of moving the first movable body CB1 downward). The control means is capable of executing at least the first process when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is an operation of the operation means. In this case, the control means is a means capable of starting execution of at least the first process during the execution of the second process. is there.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first movable body can be initially operated based on the operation by the operating means. Therefore, the first moving body can be operated based on the intention of the person who performs the operation (for example, a shop clerk). The initial operation of one movable body can be confirmed, and the operation can be confirmed more safely than in the past, so that a gaming machine characterized by the initial operation can be provided.

  Note that the “first condition” according to the present invention may not be satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may not be satisfied after a power failure recovery without RAM clearing. Even before the time has elapsed, if the condition is satisfied once, the condition may not be satisfied again within the predetermined time, and may not be satisfied when the symbol variation starts. Also good.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, the second movable body CB2 or the third movable body CB3 shown in FIG. 202B), and the first movable body The one process may be a process including at least a process of operating the second movable body.

  With such a configuration, in addition to the initial operation of the first movable body, the second movable body can be operated, so that the operation confirmation of the first and second movable bodies can be performed simultaneously. , May improve convenience. In addition, when operating a 1st movable body and a 2nd movable body simultaneously, both may be contactable and both may be unable to contact.

  The first movable body is a movable body provided at a position where the player cannot contact (for example, inside the glass frame), and the second movable body is a position where the player can contact. The movable body may be provided (for example, outside the glass frame, on the lower plate).

  The second movable body is a second operation means (for example, a second chance button separate from the ball launching handle 134, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, and the chance button 136). May be. In addition, a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) is provided, and the first processing is performed on the display means for a first display (for example, a display corresponding to an operation by the chance button 136, a touch operation on the touch panel). It may be a process including at least a process of executing a corresponding display).

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of processes is a third process, and the control unit starts at least the third process when the third condition is satisfied. The third condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated, and the third process may be a process related to an effect.

  The control means is means for starting execution of at least the second process when the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition is when power is supplied to the control means. In addition, there may be a condition that may be satisfied. In addition, the control unit may start the initial operation based on a command received from another control unit, or without receiving a command from another control unit when power is supplied. The initial operation may be started. Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position at least operable by a player (for example, a front side of a pachinko machine or a slot machine).

  The gaming machine includes a control unit, wherein the control unit is a unit capable of executing at least a plurality of processes, and at least one of the plurality of processes is a first process, At least one of the plurality of processes is a second process, the first process is a process that executes at least an initial operation, and the second process is a process that executes at least an operation. The control means is means for starting at least the second process in the first period, and the first period may be a period in which the first process is executed. .

  In addition, an operation means is provided, the operation means is provided at a position at least operable by the player, and the second process is an operation started when the first condition is satisfied. The first condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when an operation by the operation means is received.

  In addition, a detection unit is provided, the detection unit is a unit provided at a position where the player can contact at least, and the second process is an operation started when the second condition is satisfied. The second condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when contact with the detection unit is detected.

  In addition, a plurality of movable means are provided, at least one of the plurality of movable means is a first movable means, and the first movable means is provided at a position at which the player can contact at least. And the second process may be an operation of moving the first movable means.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of movable means is a second movable means, and the second movable means is a means provided at a position where the player cannot contact, and the first This process may be an operation of moving the second movable means.

  The first process is a process that is started when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when power is supplied to the control means. There may be. The second process may be an initial operation. The second process may be an effect. Further, the initial operation may be an operation including at least a return operation after the return from the power interruption.

<Functions of operation means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 209 and FIG. 210, the basic concept of the function of the operating means provided in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of the function of the operation unit in each state, and FIG. 210 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation unit.

  The game table according to the present embodiment is configured to have a plurality of operation means including at least a first operation means and a second operation means. The operation means is a means that can be operated by at least a player. As an example of the operation means, for example, as shown in FIG. 210, in addition to a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 137, a ball launching handle 134, a ball removal button 130, a touch panel 139, a ball discharge lever, a ball lending operation button (not shown) , A return operation button, a touch panel provided on the front frame door 106, and the like.

  Note that the operation means may be configured by a plurality of operation units (in this example, four buttons, up, down, left, and right, and one determination button) like the setting operation unit 137. In this case, the plurality of operation units May be defined as operation means, or at least one of a plurality of operation units (for example, two upper and lower buttons or one determination button). Button) may be defined as an operation means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 209 (a), when the game machine is in the first state (for example, when the setting screen is being displayed), the first function is displayed when an operation by the first operation unit is accepted. (For example, the function of volume adjustment (in the setting screen)) is executed, and nothing is executed when an operation by the second operation means is accepted. In addition, when the game table is in the second state (for example, during a big hit game), nothing is executed when the operation by the first operation means is accepted, and the operation by the second operation means is not performed. When received, it indicates that the first function (for example, a volume adjustment function (during a big hit game)) is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 209 (b), when the game machine is in the first state (for example, when the setting screen is being displayed), the first function is displayed when an operation by the first operation means is accepted. (For example, the function of volume adjustment (in the setting screen)) is executed, and nothing is executed when an operation by the second operation means is accepted. In addition, when the game table is in the second state (for example, during a big hit game), when the operation by the first operation means is accepted, the second function (for example, during the big hit game) It is shown that the first function (for example, the volume adjustment function (during a big hit game)) is executed when an operation by the second operation means is received.

  In the example shown in FIG. 209 (c), when the game table is in the first state (for example, when the setting screen is being displayed), the operation by the first operation means (or the second operation means) is performed. When received, it indicates that a first function (for example, a volume adjustment function (in the setting screen)) is executed. Note that when the gaming table is in the second state (for example, during a big hit game), it is the same as the example shown in FIG. 209 (b).

  In the example shown in FIG. 209 (d), when the game machine is in the first state (for example, when the setting screen is being displayed), the first function is accepted when an operation by the first operation means is accepted. (For example, a volume adjustment function (in the setting screen)), and a third function (for example, an item selection function (in the setting screen)) is executed when an operation by the second operation means is received. Is shown. Note that when the gaming table is in the second state (for example, during a big hit game), it is the same as the example shown in FIG. 209 (b).

  In the example shown in FIG. 209 (e), when the game table is in the third state (for example, when the special figure is being displayed in a variable manner), the operation by the first operation means (or the second operation means) is performed. This indicates that nothing is executed when the is received. Further, when the game table is in the fourth state (for example, when the special figure is being stopped and displayed), the first operation means (or the second operation means) receives the first operation. This indicates that a function (for example, a function for displaying a setting screen) is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 209 (f), when the game machine is in the first state (for example, when the setting screen is being displayed), the operation by the first operation means (or the third operation means) is performed. When received, it indicates that a first function (for example, a volume adjustment function (in the setting screen)) is executed. When the game table is in the second state (for example, during a big hit game), the first function is executed when an operation by the second operation means (or the third operation means) is accepted. It shows that

  Note that if a volume adjustment operation is accepted during a special figure variable game (or during a normal figure variable game), a volume adjustment operation during the special figure variable game (or during a normal figure variable game) is not accepted, but the special figure change After the game (or usual variable game) is finished, a display indicating that reception of the volume adjustment operation has started (for example, a character display such as “Press the chance button”) may be performed. In this case, the volume adjustment operation may be received before the display indicating that the reception of the volume adjustment operation is started, or the display indicating that the reception of the volume adjustment operation is started. The volume adjustment operation may be disabled before starting the operation. Further, in a specific gaming state such as during power support, a display indicating that reception of the volume adjustment operation has not started is not performed, but the volume adjustment operation may be validated. In this case, after the volume adjustment is completed, a display indicating that reception of the volume adjustment operation has started may be performed.

<Specific example of the structure of the operation means>
Next, a specific example of the structure of the operation unit according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the operation means.

  FIG. 211 (a) includes a production button 602a with the letters “PUSH” as the first operation means, and a right button 602b arranged on the right side of the decision button 602a as the second operation means, It is an example provided with the left button 602c arrange | positioned on the left side of the determination button 602a. Note that one of the right button 602b and the left button 602c may be defined as the second operation means, and the other of the right button 602b and the left button 602c may be defined as the third operation means.

  FIG. 211 (b) includes an effect button 604a as the first operation means, and a determination button 604b and a right button 604c arranged as a second operation means at a predetermined interval with respect to the effect button 604a. , And a left button 604d. One of the decision button 604b, right button 604c, and left button 604d is defined as a first operation means, the other one is defined as a second operation means, and the remaining one is defined as a third operation means. Alternatively, only the decision button 604b may be defined as the second operation means, and the right button 602b and the left button 602c may be defined as the third operation means.

  FIG. 211 (c) includes an effect button 606a, a right button 606b, and a left button 606c as the first operation means, and is arranged at a predetermined interval with respect to the effect button 604a as the second operation means. An example in which a second effect button 606d is provided. One of the effect button 606a, the right button 606b, and the left button 606c is defined as a first operation means, the other as a third operation means, and the remaining one as a fourth operation means. Alternatively, only the decision button 604b may be defined as the first operation means, and the right button 602b and the left button 602c may be defined as the third operation means.

  FIG. 211 (d) includes an upper button 608a, a right button 608b, a lower button 608c, and a left button 608d as the first operation means, and a predetermined interval with respect to these buttons as the second operation means. The example provided with the production | presentation button 608e arrange | positioned at intervals is shown. One of the up button 608a, the right button 608b, the down button 608c, and the left button 608d is a first operation means, the other is a third operation means, and the other is a fourth operation. The remaining one may be defined as the fifth operation means, the combination of the upper button 608a and the lower button 608c is the first operation means, and the combination of the right button 608b and the left button 608d is the third operation means. It may be defined as a means.

  FIG. 211 (e) includes an effect button 610a as the first operation means, and includes an up / down / left / right button 610b configured with a touch panel and a determination button 610c as the second operation means. An example in which an upper button 610d, a right button 610e, a lower button 610f, a left button 610g, and an enter button 610h are provided. Note that the up / down / left / right button 610b configured with the touch panel may be defined as the second operation means, and the enter button 610c configured with the touch panel may be defined as the fourth operation means. One of the up button 610d, the right button 610e, the down button 610f, the left button 610g, and the enter button 610h is the third operation means, the other is the fourth operation means, and the other is The fifth operation means, the other one may be defined as the sixth operation means, and the remaining one may be defined as the seventh operation means.

  FIG. 211 (f) includes a button 612a having a first thickness as the first operating means, and a button 612b having a second thickness smaller than the first thickness as the second operating means. An example is shown. According to this example, the player can easily make a difference between the first and second operation means depending on the difference in thickness (by tactile sensation), and can prevent an operation error in advance.

<Operation detection method by operation means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 212, an operation detection method by the operation means according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 212A is a diagram illustrating an example of the internal configuration of the operation information storage area, and FIG. 212B is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation information queue.

  In the various update processes (step S503) of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process described above, information on the presence / absence of a detection signal input from each operation means is stored as operation information in an operation information storage area provided in the RAM 408. In addition, when there is a change in the detection signal, the operation information is stored in an operation information queue provided in the RAM 408.

  If the detection signal of the operation means provided with four buttons on the top, bottom, left and right and one determination button is described as an example, the operation means buttons (up button, down button, right button, Information on the presence / absence of a detection signal (left button, determination button) (operation information) is read from the previous operation information storage area provided in the RAM 408, and this operation information is stored in the previous operation information storage area provided in the RAM 408. The operation information of the button of the operation means detected in the timer interruption process is read from the current operation information storage area provided in the RAM 408, and this operation information is stored in the previous operation information storage area. Further, the operation information of the button of the operation means detected this time is stored in the above-described current operation information storage area.

  Also, in the button control process (step S311) of the first sub control unit main process described above, the operation information queue is monitored, and when the operation information is stored in the operation information queue, one of the operation information queues is selected. The oldest operation information (stored first) is extracted, and processing corresponding to the operation information is performed. In this operation means control process, the operation information of the buttons of the respective operation means stored in the above-mentioned previous operation information storage area, the previous operation information storage area, and the current operation information storage area are compared, and the past three times for each button are compared. The presence / absence of the detection signal is predetermined determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that the previous operation information is 1 (ON), the previous operation information is 1 (ON), and the current operation information is 0 (OFF)). It is determined whether or not they match. When the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times for each button matches predetermined determination pattern information, processing corresponding to the operation information (for example, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, etc.) is performed.

<Specific examples of functions of operation means>
Next, a specific example of the function of the operation means will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 215 are diagrams showing specific examples of functions of the operation means in time series.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 213 (a-1) to (a-3), the first sub-control unit 400 detects an operation with the right button 620 once while the setting screen is displayed. A process of increasing the volume of the sound output means (speaker 12) by one level is executed, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 is instructed to perform a level display indicating the volume at one scale.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 213 (b-1) to (a-5), the first sub-control unit 400 performs the first time by the right button 620 during the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 213 (b-2). Based on the detected operation, a process of increasing the volume of the sound output means (speaker 12) by one level is executed, and a level display indicating the volume is displayed on the liquid crystal control unit 434 at a scale. Is instructed to do. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the second operation by the right button 620 during the special figure variable game shown in FIG. A process of increasing the volume of the speaker 12) by one more level is executed, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 is instructed to display a level display indicating the volume further.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 213 (c-1) to (c-5), the first sub-control unit 400 performs the first operation with the down button 622 during the big hit game shown in FIG. 213 (c-2). Based on the detected sound level, the sound output means (speaker 12) is increased by one level, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 performs a level display indicating the volume at a scale. I have instructed you to. Also, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 detects sound output means (speaker 12) based on detecting the second operation by the down button 622 during the big hit game shown in FIG. 213 (c-4). ) Is further increased by one level, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 is instructed to perform a level display indicating the volume further.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 214 (a) to (l), the first sub-control unit 400 detects the operation of the right button 620 in the character selection effect during the big hit game shown in FIG. 214 (c). Based on this, the liquid crystal control unit 434 is instructed to perform a display of moving a downward arrow pointing to the temporarily selected character from the character A to the character B. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the operation of the lower button 622 in the character selection effect during the big hit game shown in FIG. 214 (e), but the lower button 622 in the character selection effect during the big hit game. Since no function is provided, no processing corresponding to the down button 622 is performed.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the operation of the lower button 622 after the big hit shown in FIG. 214 (h), but the lower button 622 has no function after the big hit game ends. Therefore, no processing corresponding to the down button 622 is performed. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the operation of the left button 624 during the special figure variable game after the big hit shown in FIG. 214 (k), and the sound output means (speaker 12) A process of lowering the volume by one level is executed, and the liquid crystal control unit 434 is instructed to display a level display indicating the volume at one scale.

<Modification of operation means>
Next, a modified example of the operation means will be described. FIG. 215 is a diagram for describing a modification of the operation unit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 215 (a), a plurality of types of operation means having a volume adjustment function are provided. The first operation means 630, which is one of a plurality of types of operation means, is a rotary switch provided at a position where the player cannot operate the operation. For example, the first operation means 630 is disposed on the back of the game table. The On the other hand, the second operation means 632, which is one of a plurality of types of operation means, is a button provided at a position where the player can operate, for example, disposed on the front of a game table or the like. .

  The volume can be adjusted by either the operation by the first operation means 630 or the operation by the second operation means 632. In this example, the operation by the first operation means 630 (for example, a store clerk at a game shop) The volume adjusted by the operation according to (2) can be changed by an operation (for example, an operation by the player) by the second operation means 632. In addition to (or instead of) the volume adjustment, a light amount adjustment function may be provided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 215 (b), the function of the operating means is notified. For example, in the <specific example of the function of the operating means> described with reference to FIG. 213, it is possible to adjust the volume with the up and down buttons during the big hit at the timing before the big hit game shown in FIG. 213 (b-5). May be notified, or during the big hit game shown in FIG. 213 (c-3), it may be notified that the volume can be adjusted with the up and down buttons during the big hit. With such a configuration, the convenience of the player may be improved.

  The example shown in FIG. 215 (c) is an example of a game machine having an auto button function. Here, the auto button function is a function that performs the same processing as when the operation of the operation unit is received with a predetermined condition as a trigger even when the player does not operate the operation unit. In this example, while the auto button function is in operation, “auto button setting in progress” is displayed, and the volume cannot be adjusted even when an operation by the operation means is accepted. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the volume is adjusted against the player's intention due to the auto button function.

  The example shown in FIG. 215 (d) is an example in which the arrangement direction of the operation means is the same as the direction of the level display of the volume adjustment. In the example shown in the upper row, the left button and the right button are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the volume adjustment level display is also increased or decreased in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, in the example shown in the lower part, the arrangement of the upper button and the lower button is in the vertical direction, and the level display of the volume adjustment is configured to increase or decrease in the vertical direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to infer operation means having a volume adjustment function by using the volume adjustment level display as a clue, and it may be possible to improve the convenience of the player.

  The example shown in FIG. 215 (e) is an example of a game machine provided with a plurality of types of display means. The first display means 634 of the plurality of types is a liquid crystal display device of the first size, and the second display means 636 of the plurality of types is a second size smaller than the first size. Liquid crystal display device. In this example, the second display means 636 suggests an operation means having a volume adjustment function, while the first display means 634 separate from the second display means 636 displays the volume adjustment level. ing.

<Volume adjustment mode and menu screen>
Next, the volume adjustment mode and the menu screen will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, when a pressing operation of the enter button 702e of the operation unit 702 is accepted during the game, the menu screen shown in FIG. 216 (b-1) can be displayed, and the right of the operation unit 702 can be displayed during the game. When the pressing operation of either the button 702b or the left button 702d is accepted, the process proceeds to the volume adjustment mode shown in FIG. 216 (a-2) without going through the menu screen shown in FIG. 216 (b-1). Is possible.

<Volume adjustment mode>
Next, the volume adjustment mode will be described. FIG. 216 (a-1) to FIG. 216 (a-4) are diagrams showing an example of display transition in the volume adjustment mode in time series.

  The state shown in FIG. 216 (a-1) is a state in which a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In this state, in the display area above the decorative symbol display device 208, a display suggesting that a transition to the menu screen is possible by pressing the enter button 702e (in this example, an image display imitating the enter button 702e and , "Displays the menu screen display"), and in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is possible to enter the volume adjustment mode by pressing either the right button 702b or the left button 702d. In this example, the display (in this example, the image display imitating the right button 702b or the left button 702d and the character display “change volume”) is performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 216 (a-2) transitions to the volume adjustment mode when the pressing operation of either the right button 702b or the left button 702d is accepted in the state shown in FIG. 216 (a-1). The volume adjustment setting screen including the meter display is displayed. The display mode of the volume adjustment setting screen is not particularly limited, but in this example, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the volume (level 5 in this example) stored as a volume setting value in the RAM 308 is represented. The meter display is displayed.

  In this state, the operation sound for notifying that either the right button 702b or the left button 702d is pressed is output from the speaker 120 at the volume (level 5 in this example) stored as the volume setting value. Output. Note that the description of “operation sound 5” in the figure indicates that the operation sound is output at a volume level of 5.

  In this example, when the mode is switched to the volume adjustment mode, the volume adjustment setting screen including the meter display is displayed and the operation sound is output at the volume stored as the volume setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this example.

  Therefore, for example, when the volume adjustment mode is entered by pressing the right button 702b, the first volume (for example, level 5) stored as the volume setting value in the RAM 308 is increased by one step and the second volume is set. After changing to (for example, level 6), the volume adjustment setting including the meter display indicating the changed second volume (level 6) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right button 702b is pressed. The operation sound for notifying that may be configured to be output from the speaker 120 at the changed volume (level 6).

  In this case, when the first volume is set to a predetermined maximum volume, the meter display indicating the maximum volume is decorated while maintaining the maximum volume (without changing the volume). You may display on the symbol display apparatus 208, and you may output the warning display and warning sound which show that a volume cannot be adjusted.

  Also, for example, when the volume adjustment mode is entered by pressing the left button 702d, the first volume (for example, level 5) stored as the volume setting value in the RAM 308 is lowered by one step and the third volume is set. After changing to (for example, level 4), a meter display indicating the changed third volume (level 4) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and notification that the left button 702d has been pressed is displayed. You may comprise so that an operation sound may be output from the speaker 120 with the volume (level 4) after a change.

  In this case, when the first volume is set to a predetermined minimum volume, the meter display indicating the minimum volume is decorated while maintaining the minimum volume (without changing the volume). You may display on the symbol display apparatus 208, and you may output the warning display and warning sound which show that a volume cannot be adjusted.

  In addition, the state illustrated in FIG. 216 (a-3) is a state in which the pressing operation of the right button 702b is received in the state illustrated in FIG. 216 (a-2). In this state, the first sound volume (level 5 in this example) stored as a sound volume setting value in the RAM 308 is increased by one step and changed to the second sound volume (level 6 in this example), and then changed. A meter display representing the second volume (level 6) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an operation sound for notifying that the right button 702b has been pressed is displayed with the changed volume (level 6). Output from the speaker 120.

  In the state shown in FIG. 216 (a-4), the pressing operation of either the right button 702b or the left button 702d is not accepted for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in the state shown in FIG. 216 (a-3). It is in the state. In this state, the volume adjustment mode is terminated on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the volume adjustment setting screen including the meter display is erased, the right button 702b or the left button is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208. A display indicating that the transition to the volume adjustment mode is possible is performed by pressing one of the buttons 702d, and the state is the same as the state illustrated in FIG. 216 (a-1).

  In this example, the example of the volume adjustment of the sound output means (for example, the speaker 120) of the game table is shown. However, the sound output means is also used for the light amount adjustment of the light output means (for example, lamp, LED) of the game table. The same processing may be applied by replacing the (speaker 120) with a light output means (lamp or LED).

  In this example, the display of the volume adjustment setting screen is started and then the volume adjustment setting screen is deleted on the condition that a predetermined time (5 seconds) elapses. However, the predetermined time is not limited to 5 seconds. Needless to say. In addition, one, a plurality, or all of a plurality of items (for example, character selection etc.) included in a menu screen to be described later is the same time (for example, 5 seconds) as the predetermined time or a time longer than the predetermined time. The display may be erased on the condition of (for example, 10 seconds) or may not be erased. Further, even if the display is erased on the condition that the operation by the operation means is not received within the same time (for example, 5 seconds) as the predetermined time or within a time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the predetermined time. It does not have to be erased.

  Further, when the volume adjustment by the first output setting switch 190 (the volume adjustment by the player) is prohibited by the setting by the second output setting switch 194 described later, in the state shown in FIG. 216 (a-1). Even when the pressing operation of either the right button 702b or the left button 702d is accepted, the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed without shifting to the volume adjustment mode.

  On the other hand, even when the volume adjustment by the first output setting switch 190 (the volume adjustment by the player) is prohibited by the setting by the second output setting switch 194, in the state shown in FIG. 216 (a-1). When the pressing operation of either the right button 702b or the left button 702d is accepted, the sound volume adjustment screen may be displayed by shifting to the sound volume adjustment mode. Further, in this case, the display mode (for example, color, pattern, or shape) of the meter display is different depending on whether or not the volume adjustment (volume adjustment by the player) by the first output setting switch 190 is prohibited. They may be different (for example, the former is color and the latter is monochrome).

  Further, when the volume adjustment by the first output setting switch 190 (volume adjustment by the player) is prohibited by the setting by the second output setting switch 194, either the upper button 702a or the lower button 702c is pressed. If accepted, it may be configured not to shift to the volume adjustment mode and not to display the volume adjustment screen, or to shift to the volume adjustment mode and display the volume adjustment screen. Further, even when the volume adjustment mode is displayed and the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume adjustment may not be performed.

<Menu screen>
Next, the menu screen will be described. FIG. 216 (b-1) is a diagram showing an example of a menu screen, and FIG. 216 (b-2) is a diagram showing an example of a customization screen.

  As shown in FIG. 216 (b-1), in the menu screen of this example, “member registration” in which member information including a password can be input and “customization” in which various functions can be selected are displayed. ”,“ Character selection ”that can select a character image used for various effects, and“ Game history ”that can refer to the game history on the game table. The upper button 702a or the lower button 702c can be freely selected.

<Menu screen / Select character>
In the character selection setting screen that is displayed when “character selection” is selected from among a plurality of items included in the menu screen, a character image (for example, a character image used for the above-described ordinary drawing effect (for example, from among a plurality of types of character images) It is possible to select the character image NP11) shown in FIG. 195 (e).

  Characters that can be selected by “Character selection” are not limited to images of characters that are used for ordinary drawing effects (appear in ordinary drawing effects), and other types of displays other than ordinary drawing effects (for example, It may be possible to select an image or sound used for error display. Therefore, for example, the character displayed at the time of cut-in display in a specific effect may be selectable, and the voice (character voice) output at the time of error display such as a lower pan full error can be selected. It may be.

  Also, the timing for changing the character image used for the normal drawing effect to the character image selected on the character selection setting screen is not particularly limited, but may be immediately after the character image is changed on the character selection setting screen, for example. If the character image is changed by calling the character selection setting screen during execution of the ordinary drawing effect, the character image may be changed at the next execution of the ordinary drawing effect after the execution of the ordinary drawing effect is completed. Good.

  Moreover, although the example which selects a character image was shown in this example, you may comprise so that the selection setting screen which can select BGM, a sound effect, a background, etc. which are used for a usual drawing effect can be displayed, You may comprise so that the selection setting screen which can select the character image, BGM, sound effect, background, etc. which are used for effects (for example, the jackpot effect performed during a jackpot game) other than a usual figure effect may be comprised. .

<Menu screen / Customize>
On the function selection setting screen that is displayed when “Customize” is selected from among a plurality of items included in the menu screen, a character image used for a normal drawing effect is selected as shown in FIG. 216 (b-2). Although it is not possible, it is possible to select whether to enable or disable one, a plurality, or all of a plurality of types of functions of the game stand.

<Menu screen / Volume adjustment setting screen when menu screen is displayed>
FIG. 216 (c-1) to FIG. 216 (c-2) are diagrams showing, in time series, display transitions when shifting to the volume adjustment mode during display of the menu screen. In this example, when the pressing operation of either the right button 702b or the left button 702d of the operation unit 702 is accepted during the display of the menu screen, the volume adjustment mode is entered and the volume adjustment setting screen including the meter display is displayed. It is possible to display.

  In this example, at least a part of the menu screen (in this example, a part of the display suggesting an operation by the operating means) is covered with a volume adjustment setting screen including a meter display, so that the volume adjustment setting screen is displayed. It is configured to overlap the menu screen.

  The volume adjustment setting screen may be configured not to overlap at least a part of the menu screen. In addition, the volume adjustment setting screen may be configured to be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the image constituting the ordinary drawing effect, or may overlap with at least a part of the image constituting the ordinary drawing effect. You may comprise so that it may not be displayed. On the other hand, it may be configured such that images constituting the ordinary drawing effect are displayed so as to overlap at least part of the volume adjustment setting screen, or overlap at least part of the volume adjustment setting screen. You may comprise so that it may not be displayed.

<Notification sound>
Next, the notification sound will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the notification sound is a sound for notifying an abnormality (error) or a state change that has occurred in the game machine, for example, a door opening sound for notifying the occurrence of a front frame door opening error, For example, a ball removal notification sound for notifying the occurrence of the lower plate full tank error is applicable.

<Notification sound / Notification sound after volume adjustment>
FIGS. 217 (a-1) to (a-3) are diagrams showing, in time series, the state in which the door opening sound is output after the end of the volume adjustment mode. In the state shown in FIG. 217 (a-2), the process proceeds to the volume adjustment mode on condition that either the right button 702b or the left button 702d is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 217 (a-1). The volume adjustment setting screen including the meter display is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 217 (a-3), a door opening display (in this example, “door is open”) is displayed on the condition that the opening of the front door is detected. “Open” is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and the door opening sound for notifying the occurrence of the front frame door opening error is stored as a volume setting value (for example, level). The sound is output from the speaker 120 at a volume for notification sound different from 5) (for example, level 10 which is a predetermined maximum volume). The door opening sound may be output from the speaker 120 at the same volume (level 5 in this example) as the volume stored as the volume setting value.

<Notification sound / Notification sound during volume adjustment>
FIG. 217 (b-1) to FIG. 217 (b-4) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, the state in which the door opening sound is output during the volume adjustment mode. In the state shown in FIG. 217 (b-3), the door is opened from the speaker 120 on the condition that a front frame door opening error has occurred during the display of the volume adjustment setting screen including the meter display in the volume adjustment mode. In addition to outputting the opening sound, the display of the volume adjustment setting screen including the meter display is continued, and the door opening display (character display “door is open”) is performed.

  Further, the subsequent state shown in FIG. 217 (b-4) is a state in which the volume is adjusted during the occurrence of the front frame door opening error. In this example, it is possible to adjust the volume even when a front frame door opening error is occurring, and it is also possible to display a volume adjustment setting screen including a meter display indicating the changed volume. On the other hand, since the door opening sound is output from the speaker 120, it cannot be confirmed by the operation sound whether the operation by the operation means 700 is accepted.

  The volume of the operation sound may be reduced and output from the speaker 120 together with the door opening sound, or the operation sound may be muted and only the door opening sound may be output from the speaker. Alternatively, only the door opening display may be performed using the decorative symbol display device 208, and both the operation sound and the door opening sound may not be output from the speaker 120.

  Also, a door opening sound is output from the speaker 120 and a door opening display (on the condition that a front frame door opening error has occurred during the display of the volume adjustment setting screen including the meter display in the volume adjustment mode. The display of the volume adjustment setting screen including the meter display may be forcibly deleted while the “door is displayed” character display).

  If the maximum door opening sound output time (for example, 30 seconds) is predetermined, the operation sound is muted (or the volume is turned down) only during the door opening sound output, and the door opening sound output is stopped. Then, an operation sound may be output (or the volume is increased). Further, the overlap display may be performed by covering one of the door opening display and the meter display with the other.

  Further, when door closing is detected, the same (or different) door closing sound as the door opening sound may be output. In this case, the maximum output time (for example, 10 seconds) of the door closing sound is determined in advance. If it is, the operation sound is muted only during the door closing sound output (or the volume is lowered), and the operation sound is output (or the volume is increased) after the door closing sound output is stopped. May be.

  Further, when the door is closed, a door closing display (for example, a character display “door closed”) may or may not be performed. In this case, the overlap display may or may not be performed by covering one of the door closing display and the meter display with the other.

  Further, when the output of the door opening sound is started, the door opening sound may be continuously output until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses even when the door closing is detected. Good. When door closing is detected after the door opening sound is output, the door closing sound is output instead of the door opening sound until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Also good.

<Simultaneous island production during volume adjustment>
Next, island simultaneous effects during volume adjustment will be described with reference to FIGS. 218 (a-1) to (a-5).

  The state shown in FIG. 218 (a-3) is a state in which the island simultaneous effect is started during the volume adjustment mode shifted at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (a-2). In this example, if the condition for starting the island simultaneous production (the island simultaneous production start condition) is satisfied during the volume adjustment mode (while displaying the volume adjustment setting screen), Simultaneous production can be started (executed). On the other hand, when the condition for starting the island simultaneous production (the island simultaneous production start condition) is satisfied during the volume adjustment mode (while the volume adjustment setting screen is displayed), the speaker 120 gives priority to the operation sound. Production sound (sound effect of island simultaneous production) is output.

  Here, “island simultaneous production” is fixed from the start of timing of timing means (for example, a hardware timer provided in the CPU of the control means, a software timer realized by a user program of the control means, an RTC (real time clock), etc.). An effect that starts on the condition that time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed, an island simultaneous effect start condition (for example, a command from the main control unit such as a power-on command, Including an effect that starts when the support state etc. starts or ends and an island simultaneous effect mode is started, etc., or an effect that is executed with the gaming island as the minimum unit, The island simultaneous production shown in 242 (a) corresponds.

  The island simultaneous effect may be an effect constituted by an island simultaneous effect by a plurality of game machines. For example, the game table A can execute the island simultaneous effect A, the game table B can execute the island simultaneous effect B, and the game table B performs the island simultaneous effect A while the game table A executes the island simultaneous effect A. You may show the effect comprised by B being performed. Further, the island simultaneous effect B may not be executed by the game stand B during the period in which the island simultaneous effect A is executed by the game stand A, and even in that case, it may be called the island simultaneous effect. The same may be applied to the island simultaneous production B by the game stand B.

<Decoration change display during volume adjustment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 218 (b-1) to FIG. 218 (b-4), the decorative symbol variation display during volume adjustment will be described.

  The state shown in FIG. 218 (b-2) is a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started during the volume adjustment mode shifted at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (b-1). In this example, if the condition for starting the variation display of the decorative symbol is satisfied during the volume adjustment mode (while the volume adjustment setting screen is displayed) (for example, when a game ball enters the special figure start port), It is possible to start (execute) the decorative symbol variation display while continuing to display the adjustment setting screen.

  However, in this example, the display mode of the volume adjustment setting screen is different between the decorative symbol stop display and the decorative symbol fluctuation display. More specifically, the decorative symbol stop display is different from the decorative symbol stop display. The display mode of the volume adjustment setting screen is different between the first period after starting the variable display of symbols and the second period after the first period after starting the variable display of decorative symbols. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 218 (b-1), during the decorative symbol stop display, a meter display representing the current volume (in this example, level 6) is performed, and FIG. 218 (b-2) As shown in (b-3) in the figure, during the first period after the start of the decorative symbol variation display, the meter display indicating the current volume (in this example, level 6) is continued and then the meter display is continued. , And as shown in FIG. 218 (b-4), the current volume (in this example, level 6) during the second period after the first period has elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display. Is displayed in characters (in this example, a character display of “volume: 6”).

  For example, after shifting to the volume adjustment mode and starting the display of the volume adjustment setting screen, the display of the volume adjustment setting screen is continued for at least a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). Symbol variation display may start. In this case, during the period, the volume adjustment setting screen is set to a display mode of “decoration display of decorative symbols”. When the pressing operation of either the right button 702b or the left button 702d is received after the period has elapsed, the volume adjustment setting screen is set to a display mode of “decorating display of decorative symbols”.

  As shown in FIGS. 218 (c-1) to (c-3), the meter display is performed during the first period after the start of the decorative symbol variation display (FIG. 218 (b-)). When a pressing operation of either the right button 702b or the left button 702d is accepted during the period shown in 2), the volume can be adjusted and a volume adjustment setting screen including a meter display showing the changed volume May be displayable. In this case, after the display of the volume adjustment setting screen is started, the display of the volume adjustment setting screen may be continued at least for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

  In the case where the pressing operation of either the right button 702b or the left button 702d is received during the period when the meter is displayed during the first period (the period shown in FIG. 218 (b-2)) The volume adjustment setting screen may be changed from the display mode of “decorative display of decorative symbols” to the display mode of “decorative display of decorative symbols”.

<Modified example of ordinary drawing production>
Next, a modified example of the ordinary drawing effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining the universal drawing effect according to the modification.

<Modified example of ordinary drawing production / Modified example 1>
As shown in FIG. 219 (a-1), when the general drawing effect is started during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of various images related to the general symbol effect, while FIG. As shown in (a-2), when the general drawing effect is started during the variation display of the decorative symbol, various images related to the general symbol effect may be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. .

  With such a configuration, the visibility of the decorative symbol during the stop display can be improved, and game information based on the decorative symbol can be surely provided to the player.

<Modified example of ordinary drawing production / Modified example 2>
As will be described in detail later, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a DIP switch that functions as a power saving mode setting switch. This power saving mode setting switch is an operating means for switching ON / OFF of the power saving mode of the game machine.

  In this example, when the knob of the power saving mode setting switch is slid to the upper side, the first detection signal (for example, a high level signal) is input to the gaming machine, thereby reducing the power saving of the gaming machine. When the mode is set to ON and the knob of the power saving mode setting switch is slid downward, the second detection signal (for example, a low level signal) is input to the game table, The power saving mode of the stand is set to OFF.

  Further, the game machine is configured to shift from the normal mode to the power saving mode when the power saving mode shift condition is satisfied in a state where the power saving mode is set to ON. Here, the power saving mode means that the light amount of the light output means (LED, lamp) and the volume of the sound output means (speaker) are reduced or the light amount and volume cannot be adjusted in order to save power consumption in the game machine. It is a mode to do.

  In addition, the light output pattern of the light output means (LED, lamp) is changed (for example, the light emission mode is changed from lighting to blinking, the extinguishing time in blinking is increased, the full color LED is switched to single color lighting, etc.) The power saving mode may be realized by dimming the backlight of the liquid crystal display device.

  As shown in FIG. 219 (b-1), the normal drawing effect may be started (executed) during the power saving mode after shifting to the power saving mode. In this case, the display related to the normal drawing effect (character image display, etc.) ) On the other hand, it may be configured not to output a sound (sound effect, BGM, etc.) related to the ordinary drawing effect, or the light amount of the light output means (LED, lamp) and the volume of the sound output means (speaker) The ordinary drawing effect may be executed in the lowered state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the power consumption in the game machine while executing the ordinary drawing effect.

<Modified example of ordinary drawing production / Modified example 3>
FIG. 219 (c-1) shows a demonstration effect (the effect started on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has passed since the stop of the decoration symbol change). An ordinary drawing effect as shown in FIG. Further, in the guidance effects that can be selected on the menu screen (for example, effects that notify the game method and the like), a general effects effect as shown in FIG. Further, when the press operation of either the right button 702b or the left button 702d is accepted during execution of the demonstration effect (or guidance effect), the demonstration effect (or the guidance effect is ended, and FIG. 218 (b) Display as shown in -1) may be started.

<Modified example of ordinary drawing production / Modified example 4>
As shown in FIG. 219 (d-1), the ordinary drawing effect is started during the change of the decorative pattern, and the button effect (the effect suggesting the operation by the operation means) is generated in the ordinary drawing effect. As shown in FIG. 219 (d-2), when the operation is performed by the operation means, a display suggesting a benefit given to the player (in this example, indicating that the player has won the electric chew release) Character display of “help” may be performed. Even if no operation is performed by the operation means, a display indicating a benefit given to the player on the condition of elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (indicating that the player has won the electric-chu release) Character display) ”may be performed.

<Modified example of ordinary drawing production / Modified example 5>
As shown in FIG. 219 (e-1), the ordinary drawing effect is started during the stop display of the decorative symbol, and the button effect (the effect suggesting the operation by the operating means) is generated in the ordinary drawing effect. When the operation by the operation means is performed according to the following, a display suggesting the benefit given to the player as shown in FIG. And a menu screen may be displayed. Even if no operation is performed by the operation means, a display indicating a benefit given to the player on the condition of elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (indicating that the player has won the electric-chu release) And the menu screen may be displayed.

<Modified example of ordinary drawing production / Modified example 6>
As shown in FIGS. 219 (f-1) to (f-2), the display means A (main liquid crystal) 208a and the display means B (sub liquid crystal) 208b are provided. When the display of the decorative symbol is started on the display means A (main liquid crystal) 208a during the adjustment period, the volume adjustment on the display means B (sub liquid crystal) 208b may be ended. Each of the first, second, third, and fourth display means in this specification is a concept including both display means A (main liquid crystal) and display means B (sub liquid crystal) (a plurality of display means). A concept including only one of them.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has the third display means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. 218 (a-)) capable of executing a plurality of types of display. 1), a game table equipped with a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 1 and a main liquid crystal 208a, a sub liquid crystal 208b shown in FIG. 219 (e-1), and a touch panel. Production display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”. For example, island simultaneous production shown in FIGS. 218 (a-3) to (a-5), island simultaneous production shown in FIG. 242 (a), FIG. 219 (c). -1) demonstration effect (still image or moving image), tutorial display and guidance display shown in FIG. 219 (c-3), and one of the plurality of types of display is a variation of the decorative design. Display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”) 218 (b-2) to (b-4), and one of the plural types of displays is a display related to the effect setting (hereinafter referred to as “No. For example, the meter display (volume adjustment setting screen) shown in FIGS. 218 (a-2) to (a-5), the menu display shown in FIG. 216 (b-1), and the light output means of the game table Light amount adjustment setting screen for adjusting light amount (for example, lamp), password setting screen for inputting a password, selection screen for selecting a character or BGM, and for referencing a game history on a game table The first display is a game history reference screen according to the time after the power is turned on (for example, a timer unit provided in the CPU of the control unit (for example, a hardware program provided in the CPU of the control unit, a user program of the control unit) Software timer, RTC (real time clock), etc.) that can be executed) when the first time has elapsed since the first time has elapsed. It is a display that can be started in a state where the display is not executed (for example, a state where a special figure variable game has not occurred, a big hit game) (one of the start conditions of the first display is the second display The fourth display is a display that can be started in a state in which the second display is not executed, and the first display in the state in which the fourth display is executed. When the display of is started, the first display is started without ending the fourth display, and the second display is executed in a state where the fourth display is being executed. When the display starts, the fourth display ends. It is configured so that the second display is started upon completion.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the first display (effect display) is started in a state where the fourth display (display related to the effect setting) is being executed, the fourth display ( Since the first display (effect display) is started without ending the display related to the effect setting), the fourth display (related to the effect setting) is started while the first display (effect display) is started. Display) can be continued, the convenience of the player can be improved, and a game stand having characteristics of the display means can be provided in some cases.

  According to the present invention, “the first display is a display that can be started in a state where the second display is not executed” means “the first display is the second display It is a display that can be started at least when it is not executed "," The first display is a display that always starts when the second display is not executed ", and" The first display is , At least a display that can be started only when the second display is not executed ", and" the first display is a display that always starts only when the second display is not executed. " It is a concept that includes all the meanings of “Yes”.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is shown in the third display means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. 218 (a-1)) capable of executing a plurality of types of display. A game machine including a decorative symbol display device 208, a main liquid crystal 208a, a sub liquid crystal 208b, and a touch panel shown in FIG. 219 (e-1), wherein one of the plurality of types of display is an effect display ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “second display.” For example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. Display related to setting (first effect setting) (hereinafter referred to as “third display”. For example, meter display (volume adjustment setting screen) shown in FIGS. 218 (a-2) to (a-5)), FIG. 216 (b-1) menu display, light output of the game stand Light amount adjustment setting screen for adjusting light amount (for example, lamp), password setting screen for inputting a password, selection screen for selecting a character or BGM, and for referencing a game history on a game table One of the plurality of types of display is a display related to the effect setting (second effect setting) (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”). For example, the meter display (volume adjustment setting screen) shown in FIGS. 218 (a-2) to (a-5), the menu display shown in FIG. 216 (b-1), and the light output means (for example, lamp) of the game table. Light amount adjustment setting screen for performing light amount adjustment, password setting screen for inputting a password, selection screen for selecting a character and BGM, and a game for referring to a game history on a game table The third display is a display that can be started in a state where the second display is not executed, and the fourth display is the second display. When the second display is started with the third display being executed, the third display is terminated and the second display is started. When the second display is started in a state where the display is started and the fourth display is being executed, the second display is not terminated. This is a gaming table that is configured to start.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the second display (effect display) is started with the fourth display (display related to the effect setting) being executed, the fourth display ( Since the second display (effect display) is started without ending the display related to the effect setting), the fourth display (related to the effect setting) is started while the second display (effect display) is started. Display) can be continued, the convenience of the player can be improved, and a game stand having characteristics of the display means can be provided in some cases.

  Note that sound output means (for example, a speaker 120) capable of outputting sound may be provided, and the fourth display may be a display related to the adjustment of the sound volume. Further, when the fourth display is started in a state where the first display is being executed, the fourth display is configured to start without ending the first display. Also good. Further, when the second display is started in a state where the first display is being executed, the second display is started without ending the first display. Also good.

  In addition, the first display is a simultaneous display of islands (for example, timer means (for example, a hardware timer provided in the CPU of the control means, a software timer realized by a user program of the control means, an RTC (real time clock), etc.) An effect that starts on the condition that a fixed time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed since the start of timekeeping, or an island simultaneous effect start condition (for example, a command from the main control unit such as a power-on command is transmitted) Such as the start or end of the jackpot, the electric support state, etc., and the start of the mode for simultaneous production of islands, etc.) There may be. The island simultaneous effect may be an effect including a sound effect.

  The third display means is means capable of executing the first display in a first display area (for example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208), and the third display means. Is a means capable of executing the fourth display in a second display area (for example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208), and at least a part of the display area of the second display area is The display area may overlap with at least a part of the first display area.

  Further, the second control unit includes first control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 185) and second control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400 shown in FIG. 185). The means is means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means, and the second control means is capable of executing control of the third display means according to the command. It may be a means.

  Also, a plurality of control boards (for example, the main board 156, the first sub board 160, and the second sub board 164 shown in FIG. 2) are provided, and one of the plurality of control boards (for example, FIG. 2). The main board 156) shown is a first control board, and one control board of the plurality of control boards is a second control board (for example, the first sub board 160 shown in FIG. 2), The first control unit may be a unit configured to include the first control board, and the second control unit may be a unit configured to include the second control board. .

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is shown in the third display means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. A game machine including a decorative symbol display device 208, a main liquid crystal 208a, a sub liquid crystal 208b, and a touch panel shown in FIG. 219 (e-1), wherein one of the plurality of types of display is an effect display ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “first display.” For example, the island simultaneous effects shown in FIGS. 218 (a-3) to (a-5), the island simultaneous effects shown in FIG. Demonstrative demonstration (still image or moving image), tutorial display or guidance display shown in FIG. 219 (c-3), and one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as For example, FIG. 8 (b-2) to (b-4), and one of the plural types of displays is a display related to the first effect setting (hereinafter referred to as “the second display”). For example, the meter display (volume adjustment setting screen) shown in FIGS. 218 (a-2) to (a-5), the menu display shown in FIG. 216 (b-1), and the light output means of the game stand Light amount adjustment setting screen for adjusting light amount (for example, lamp), password setting screen for inputting a password, selection screen for selecting a character or BGM, and for referencing a game history on a game table One of the plurality of types of display is a display related to the second effect setting (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”. For example, FIG. 218). Meter shown in (a-2) to (a-5) Display (volume adjustment setting screen), menu display shown in FIG. 216 (b-1), light amount adjustment setting screen for adjusting the light amount of the light output means (for example, lamp) of the game table, password for inputting the password One of a setting screen, a selection screen for selecting a character and BGM, and a game history reference screen for referring to a game history in a game table, wherein the first display is the second display The third display is a display that can be started in a state where the second display is not executed, and the fourth display is the display that can be started in a state where the display is not executed. If the first display is started in a state where the second display is not executed and the third display is executed, the third display is not finished. The first display will start When the second display is started while the third display is being executed, the third display is ended and the second display is started. When the first display is started in a state where the fourth display is being executed, the first display is started without ending the fourth display. And when the second display is started in a state where the fourth display is being executed, the second display is started without ending the fourth display. It is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the second display (effect display) is started with the fourth display (display related to the effect setting) being executed, the fourth display ( Since the second display (effect display) is started without ending the display related to the effect setting), the fourth display (related to the effect setting) is started while the second display (effect display) is started. Display) can be continued, the convenience of the player can be improved, and a game stand having characteristics of the display means can be provided in some cases.

  Note that sound output means (for example, a speaker 120) capable of outputting sound may be provided, and the fourth display may be a display related to the adjustment of the sound volume. Further, the fourth display is a display that can be displayed in the first mode (or displayed in the first mode) during execution of the second display, and the fourth display is It is a display that can be displayed in the second mode (or displayed in the second mode) during the non-execution of the second display, and the second mode is a mode different from the first mode. There may be.

  The fourth display may be a display whose display mode changes after the second display is started. The fourth display may be a display whose display mode does not change even after the second display is started. In addition, light output means (for example, LED, lamp) that can output light is provided, and the third display may be a display related to the adjustment of the amount of light. Further, the second display may be a symbol variation display of a decorative symbol.

  The third display means is means capable of executing the first display in a first display area (for example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208), and the third display means. Is a means capable of executing the fourth display in a second display area (for example, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208), and at least a part of the display area of the second display area is The display area may overlap with at least a part of the first display area.

  Further, the second control unit includes first control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 185) and second control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400 shown in FIG. 185). The means is means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means, and the second control means is capable of executing control of the third display means according to the command. It may be a means.

  Also, a plurality of control boards (for example, the main board 156, the first sub board 160, and the second sub board 164 shown in FIG. 2) are provided, and one of the plurality of control boards (for example, FIG. 2). The main board 156) shown is a first control board, and one control board of the plurality of control boards is a second control board (for example, the first sub board 160 shown in FIG. 2), The first control unit may be a unit configured to include the first control board, and the second control unit may be a unit configured to include the second control board. .

  In addition, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is the same as the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment, with first display means (for example, the universal display device 210 shown in FIG. 199), A second display means (for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. 199), a third display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199), A gaming machine comprising first control means (for example, main control unit 300) and second control means (for example, first sub control unit 400), wherein the first display means is usually It is a means for executing symbol variation display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol variation display”), and the second display means is a symbol variation display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol variation display”). And the third display means includes a plurality of display means. The first control means can perform a hit operation (hereinafter referred to as a “first action”) after a symbol pattern (for example, a winning symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first display means. For example, it is means for starting execution of the opening / closing operation of the second special figure starting port 232, and the first control means hits the second display means and performs a design mode (for example, hitting operation). This is means for starting execution of a winning action (hereinafter referred to as “second winning action”, for example, an opening / closing action of the variable winning opening 234) after the symbol is stopped and displayed. May be executed in at least a part of the period from the start of the normal symbol variation display to the end of the first hit operation (hereinafter referred to as “first period”). Display (hereinafter referred to as “First Display”) For example, one of the plural types of displays is at least a part of a period from the start of the special symbol variation display to the end of the second hit operation. It is a display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”, for example, a decorative pattern variation display) executed in a period (hereinafter referred to as “second period”), and is one of the plurality of types of display. The display is a display related to the effect setting (hereinafter referred to as “third display”, for example, a display of a setting screen), and the first display is a display related to the first hit operation, The second display is a display related to the second hit operation, and the second control means displays the third display when the first display start condition is satisfied. Even if it has been executed, the first display is opened without ending the third display. (The second control means is also means for starting the first display when the first display start condition is satisfied), and the second control means is If the third display is executed when the second display start condition is satisfied, the third display is terminated and the second display is started. The display mode of the first display during execution of the third display (for example, the display mode of “general drawing effect” shown in FIG. 195 (d)) is the same as that of the third display during non-execution of the third display. This is a gaming machine characterized by having the same display mode as that of the display (for example, the display mode of “general effects” shown in FIG. 197 (e)).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the second hit operation can be executed during the display related to the effect setting (third display), the display related to the effect setting is replaced with the second Since the second display related to the hitting operation can be performed, it is possible to reliably provide information advantageous to the player even during the display related to the effect setting. In addition, generally, the profit that the player can obtain is relatively greater in the second hit action than in the first hit action, so by switching the display related to the effect setting to the second display, A player's expectation can be raised at a stretch. In addition, when the first hit operation having a smaller profit than the second hit operation can be executed during the display related to the effect setting, the first hit operation is continued while the display related to the effect setting is continued. Since the first display related to can be performed, information advantageous to the player can be provided by the first display while ensuring the convenience of the player. In addition, the display mode of the first display during execution of the display related to the effect setting is the same as the display mode of the first display during non-execution of the display related to the effect setting. Regardless of the execution, the first display can be displayed in the same display mode, and the information related to the first hit operation by the first display can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In some cases, a situation where a person suffers a disadvantage can be avoided.

  The second control means is configured to start the third display without ending the first display when the first display is being executed. When the second display is being executed, the second control means cannot start the third display without ending the second display. It may be configured as described above. The second control unit may include an operation unit, and the second control unit may receive the operation of the operation unit as valid when the third display is being executed. May be a means that may accept the operation of the operation means as valid when the second display is being executed.

  One of the plurality of types of display is a display that may be executed in the second period (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”), and the fourth display is: It is a notice display related to the second hit operation, the first display is a display including a display of the first image, and the fourth display is a display including a display of the first image. It may be. Further, the first display may be a display that may be executed even if the result of the normal symbol variation display is lost. The second display may be a display that is executed even when the result of the special symbol variation display is lost. Further, the second display may be a symbol variation display of a decorative symbol. The third display may be a display of an identification code related to the game result.

  Further, the second control means is means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means, and the second control means is configured to execute the third display according to the command. It may be a means capable of executing control of the means. The control board includes a plurality of control boards, one control board among the plurality of control boards is a first control board, and one control board among the plurality of control boards is a second control board. The first control means is a means including the first control board, and the second control means is a means including the second control board. May be.

  In addition, the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of operating means (for example, left and right buttons, up and down buttons) and a control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400). In this case, at least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a left / right button), and at least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means ( For example, an up / down button), the control means is means capable of at least shifting to a plurality of types of states, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (for example, an effect by a setting screen) At least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, during a big hit game), and the first state is an operation of the first operation means. The first control is less The second state is a state in which at least the first control can be performed when the second operation means is operated. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first control is control related to effect setting (for example, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the control related to the production setting is executed, the operation by the operation unit can be easily understood, so that an operation mistake can be prevented in advance. In some cases, it is possible to provide a gaming table with a characteristic.

  The second state is a state in which at least a second control (for example, a control related to character selection) can be executed when the first operation means is operated. The second control may be a control different from the first control. Further, the first state may be a state in which at least the second control is not executed when the second operation means is operated.

  The first state is a state in which at least a third control (for example, a control related to password setting) can be executed when the second operation unit is operated. The third control may be a control different from the first control, and the third control may be a control different from the second control.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of states is a third state (for example, during special figure fluctuation), and the third state is when the first operation means is operated. The first control is a state in which at least the first control is not executed, and the third state is a state in which the second control is not executed at least when the first operation means is operated. The third state is a state in which the third control is not executed at least when the first operation means is operated, and the third state is an operation of the second operation means. In this case, the first control is not executed at least, and the third state is a state where the second control is not executed at least when the second operation means is operated. In the third state, the second operating means is operated. When the, the third control may be in the state of at least not run.

  In addition, sound output means (for example, a speaker 120) capable of outputting sound may be provided, and the effect setting may be a setting related to adjustment of the sound volume. The first operation means may be a means provided at a position at least operable by a player (for example, a front side of a pachinko machine or a slot machine), or the second operation means. May be means provided at a position at least operable by the player (for example, the front side of a pachinko machine or a slot machine).

  A gaming machine comprising a plurality of operation means and a control means, wherein at least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means, of the plurality of operation means. At least one is a second operation means, the first operation means is a means provided at a position at least operable by a player, and the second operation means is provided by a player. It is a means provided at least at an operable position, the control means is a means capable of accepting an operation by the first operation means, and the control means can accept an operation by the second operation means The control means is a means capable of taking at least a plurality of states, at least one of the plurality of states being a first state, of the plurality of states. At least one The control means is means capable of executing at least a first function when an operation by the first operation means is received in the first state, and the control means When the operation by the second operation means is received in the second state, it may be a means capable of executing at least the first function.

  The control means is means for not executing the first function when an operation by the second operation means is received in the first state, and the control means is in the second state. When the operation by the first operation means is accepted, the first function may not be executed.

  Further, the control means is means capable of executing at least a second function when an operation by the first operation means is received in the second state, and the second function is: A function different from the first function may be used.

  Further, the control means is means capable of executing at least a third function when an operation by the second operation means is received in the first state, and the third function is: The third function may be a function different from the first function, and the third function may be a function different from the second function.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of states is a third state, at least one of the plurality of states is a fourth state, and the control unit is configured to transmit the fourth state. When the operation by the first operation means is received, at least the first function can be executed. The control means can be executed by the second operation means in the fourth state. It may be a means capable of executing at least the first function when an operation is accepted.

  The control means is means for not executing the first function when an operation by the first operation means is received in the third state, and the control means is in the third state. When the operation by the second operation means is received, the first function may not be executed.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of operation means is a third operation means, and the third operation means is a means provided at a position at least operable by a player, and the control The means is a means capable of accepting an operation by the third operation means, and the control means has at least a fourth function when an operation by the third operation means is accepted in the first state. The control means is a means capable of executing at least the fourth function when an operation by the third operation means is received in the second state. There may be.

  In addition, sound output means capable of outputting sound may be provided, and the first function may be a function capable of adjusting at least a volume of the sound. Moreover, the light output means which can output light is provided, and the said 1st function may be a function which can adjust the light quantity of the said light at least.

[Seventeenth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 220 to 270 are used only in the description of the seventeenth embodiment in principle, and the description of the seventeenth embodiment is provided even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. Then, priority is given to the code | symbol shown in FIGS. 220-270.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 222) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136, Chance button lamp 138 that causes the production button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 220 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 220, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

<Back of the game table>
FIG. 221 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 220 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by an operation of a game store clerk and an RWM by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a clear signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. doing.

  The RWM clear switch 180 is a switch that can perform RWM clear (RAM initialization) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100 while performing an operation. Note that the RAM clear switch 180 displays a predetermined notification (for example, “Please press again to clear RAM”) or a character display when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on while operating. If the operation is performed again, the RAM may be cleared.

  A second output setting switch (second operation means) 194 is disposed on the upper left of the first sub-board case 162. The second output setting switch 194 is configured to output a sound (eg, BGM, sound effect, error sound, etc.) output from a speaker (sound output means) 120 of the pachinko machine 100, various LEDs, various lamps ( This is a switch for adjusting the luminance (light quantity) of the light output means. Since the second output setting switch 194 is disposed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 100, a person who can lock and unlock the front frame door 106 (for example, a store clerk at a game shop) opens the front frame door 160. The operation can be performed by doing this, but a person (for example, a player) who cannot lock and unlock the front frame door 106 cannot be operated.

  A setting operation unit 195 including a plurality of DIP switches is disposed on the right side of the second output setting switch 194 when viewed from the back. Each DIP switch of the setting operation unit 195 is an operation means capable of various settings relating to the game machine. In this example, a DIP switch for selecting a specific island simultaneous performance to be executed on the game machine from a plurality of types of island simultaneous performance (details will be described later), and a volume setting mode for sound output from the speaker 120 (details) As will be described later, this example includes a DIP switch capable of switching between a normal business mode (normal mode), a power saving mode A, a power saving mode B, development and sales promotion, and application. . In this example, the DIP switch of the setting operation unit 195 is configured to set the type of island simultaneous effect and the mode of volume setting, but it may be configured to be set by other operation means.

<Front of game board>
FIG. 222 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 are referred to as “special symbol display device”, the normal symbol is “normal”, the special symbol is “special”, and the first special symbol display device 212. May be referred to as “Special Figure 1”, and the special figure displayed by the second special symbol display device 212 may be referred to as “Special Figure 2”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a right-handed lamp (not shown) is mounted. The right-handed lamp is used for display display setting processing described later according to the gaming state (for example, big hit gaming state, probability change state, time-short state, time-short state) set in the special figure state update processing of the main control unit 300 described later. The lighting control is performed.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, timer circuit 312 for measuring time and number of times, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a signal that is output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port. The sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special diagram display device 212 or the second special diagram display device 214. Drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the display and a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal display device 210. A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.); A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external gaming device (for example, a data display device or the like) via the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349. An external terminal board signal indicating game information of the pachinko machine 100 and the like is output to an information input circuit 350 included in the hall computer. The “external terminal board” denoted by reference numeral 349 may be referred to as an “external concentrated terminal board” in the slot machine, and is not limited to the name “external terminal board”.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled.

  The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600, and the main control unit can also send from the payout control unit 600. A signal such as a command can be transmitted to 300.

  The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 may be one-way communication. In this case, the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. However, the payout control unit 600 may be configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be bidirectional communication.

  The main control unit 300 may transmit “plural types of commands (hereinafter, transmission commands)” to the payout control unit 600. In addition, the transmission command here may be a command such as a communication confirmation command or a prize ball number command. Further, the payout control unit 600 may transmit “a plurality of types of commands (hereinafter, received commands)” to the main control unit 300. In addition, the reception command here is a command such as a communication confirmation command, a prize ball signal output request command (command for test firing test), a command related to various errors (command related to cancellation / occurrence of various errors), a command during payout operation, etc. It may be. Further, a command other than a payout command (in particular, an error command other than payout) may not be included.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor 426, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the first output setting switch 190 and the second output setting switch 194 to the basic circuit 402, a liquid crystal control unit (not shown), and a VDP 434 (video) via the liquid crystal control unit. -Display processor) is connected.

  Although details will be described later, information communication between the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit is bidirectional communication, and the first sub-control unit 400 can transmit a signal such as a command to the liquid crystal control unit. Also, a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also controls the front frame door 106 and the main body (inner frame) 104 based on control signals output from a frame sensor 605 including a front frame door open sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor. Open / close detection is performed. The frame sensor 605 may be included in the various sensors 320.

  Also, the payout control unit 600 is connected to an external terminal board 349 that is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external gaming device (for example, a data display or a hall computer). A board signal is output.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launcher 110 I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIG. 224 (a) to (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start-up sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been shot. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 224 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 224 (a) shows nine types of special drawings from “Special drawing A” to “Special drawing I”. In FIG. 224 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time for one opening of the tongue member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the tongue member 2321 is more likely to be opened than the non-electric support state (an increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the tongue member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then again for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of prize balls, and if the number of game balls won in the variable prize opening (attacker) 234, 235 is reduced, a player is disadvantaged. Because there are cases. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 186 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 224 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 224 (b), six types of special charts "Special Figure a" to "Special Figure f" are shown, and five types of special charts are jackpot symbols ("Special Figure a" to "Special Figure f"). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 224 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when 15R-RUB, 8R-RUB and 4R-RUB are notified, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 224 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol pattern. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 186 (d), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Basic circuit of main control unit>
Next, the basic circuit 302 of the main controller 300 will be described in detail. FIG. 225 is a diagram showing only the main part of the basic circuit 302 extracted from the main control unit 300.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes a CPU 304 that controls the entire main control unit 300, a ROM 306 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 304 and various data referred to by the CPU 304, and the CPU 304 temporarily stores data. RAM 308 for storing.

<Built-in register of CPU of main control unit>
The CPU 304 is a control register for controlling a counter circuit, a timer circuit, a serial communication circuit, a random number circuit, an arithmetic circuit, a reset / interrupt controller, and the like, and a built-in register such as a register used when the CPU 304 executes a control program Is provided.

  The built-in registers include a T register (special register), a general purpose register, a program counter (PC), an instruction register, and the like. The type of general-purpose register is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, an 8-bit register including an I register, an A register, an F register, a B register, a C register, a D register, an E register, an H register, and an L register is provided. The B and C registers, the D and E registers, and the H and L registers also function as 16-bit registers (pair registers) of the BC, DE, and HL registers that can perform 16-bit operations, respectively. It is configured.

  In this embodiment, the value of the interrupt vector (interrupt vector read from a predetermined device) output from the built-in device is the lower 8 bits, and the content of the I register (interrupt vector register, interrupt register) is the upper 8 bits. A 16-bit address is read as an interrupt processing address, and is branched (jumped) to a main control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later.

  For example, when an interrupt processing request is generated when the value of the I register is 00H and the value of the interrupt vector is 60H, this is indicated by 0060H (the upper byte is 00H of the I register and the lower byte is 60H of the interrupt vector). A 2-byte address (for example, 0412H) is loaded to the PC with the value (for example, 12H) stored at the address to be stored as the lower byte, and the value (for example, 04H) stored at the address indicated by 0061H as the upper byte. Thus, a branch (jump) is made to an interrupt process using this address as the head address.

  When an instruction is executed, the F register sequentially executes the S flag (sign flag), Z flag (zero flag), SZ flag (second zero flag), H flag (half carry flag) from bit 7 in the F register according to the execution result. , Bit 3 (empty bit), P / V flag (parity / overflow flag), N flag (subtract flag), and C flag (carry flag) change to 1 or 0 or do not change Or The SZ flag changes in the same manner as the Z flag except for some instructions (for example, CPI instruction, CPIR instruction, CPD instruction, CPDR instruction), and all LD instructions of Z80 compatible instructions. All 16-bit arithmetic operation instructions (including INC and DEC instructions), rotate shift instruction RLCA instruction, RLA instruction, RRCA instruction, RRA instruction, “IN A, (n)” instruction, INCENSOOU instruction, TENSOUINC instruction To do.

  Note that the Z flag does not change in the 16-bit arithmetic instruction ADD instruction, and the SZ flag changes in all the 16-bit arithmetic instructions. In addition, in the “INA, (n)” instruction, the SZ flag changes and the Z flag does not change. The position of the SZ flag or empty bit in the F register may be a bit other than the above-described bits. Note that the SZ flag may not be changed in the case of a special instruction.

  In the present embodiment, A ′, F ′, B ′, A ′, F ′, B ′, A ′, F ′, B ′, A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L are used as auxiliary registers (back registers) corresponding to the general-purpose registers (main registers). Each of the general-purpose registers C ′, D ′, E ′, H ′, and L ′ is provided, but only the T register that is a special register is not provided with an auxiliary register. Therefore, the usage of the T register is limited, and the usage frequency of the T register is lower than that of the general-purpose register. Therefore, a situation in which the value of the T register is inadvertently rewritten (the contents of the T register are destroyed). Situation) can be prevented in advance.

  Note that the value of the auxiliary register cannot be directly read / written by various instructions, and only the value of the main register and the value of the auxiliary register are allowed to be exchanged by a special exchange instruction (EX instruction, EXX instruction). Here, for convenience of explanation, a register whose register value can be easily changed by an instruction such as a PUSH instruction or a POP instruction is a general-purpose register. It is not necessary to include a register having a special role in the general-purpose register.

  Although an example in which the T register is built in the CPU 304 is shown here, for example, the T register may be provided outside the CPU 304 or may be provided in a part of the RAM 308 separate from the CPU 304. That is, it is preferable that the T register is provided at a location physically different from storage means (ROM 306 in the present embodiment) for storing the control program. Furthermore, it is preferable that a control unit that performs a process of writing a specific value (described later) in the T register is different from a control unit that reads a control program from the ROM 306 and performs game control. This is because it is possible to make it difficult to perform both modification of the control program and illegal acquisition of a specific value by making the control unit different.

<Memory space and I / O space of CPU of main controller>
Next, the memory space and I / O space of the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU 304, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an I / O map of the CPU 304.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in registers, ROM 306, RAM 308, etc., and an I / O space for inputting / outputting control signals to / from the above-mentioned I / O 310. doing. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 6A, the address / data signal line of the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 is the ROM area of the memory space (0000H to 2FFFH (H is 16 in this embodiment)). 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 304 reads the data from the ROM 306 by designating this ROM area.

  The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to a register area in the memory space (in this embodiment, FE00H to FEBFH), and the CPU 304 reads data from the built-in register to this register area and sends it to the register. Write the data.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 308 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 304 designates this RWM area and reads data from the RAM 308 and sends it to the RAM 308. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F4000H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Also, as shown in the I / O map of FIG. 10B, the I / O 310 of the main control unit 300 is assigned to the work area of the I / O space (in this embodiment, 00H to BFH). The control signal is input / output to / from the I / O 310 via the I / O space. In addition, the other area | region (0C0H-FFH in this embodiment) of I / O space is made into the non-use area | region.

<Initialization process>
Next, the initialization process of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the flow of initialization processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (system reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes this initialization process before shifting to a security mode or a user mode described later.

  Specifically, in step S51, a specific value (in this embodiment, F0H, which is the upper byte of the start address F000H of the RWM area described above) is stored in the T register built in the CPU 304. In step S52, an initial value is set in a register other than the T register, and then the process proceeds to step S53 to execute a main controller power-on process described later.

  Needless to say, the specific value stored in the T register is not limited to F0H. For example, FEH, which is the upper byte of the start address of the register area (FE00H in this embodiment), is stored in the T register. If configured, the access efficiency to the built-in register may be improved by the same principle as the access to the RAM 308. At the first timing, the upper byte of the head address of the RWM area is set in the T register, and the upper byte of the head address of the register area is set in the T register at the second timing thereafter (or before). You may comprise. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an L level signal is input to a predetermined terminal), the upper byte of the leading address of the RWM area is set in the T register, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. If not, the upper byte of the start address of the register area may be set in the T register.

  In this initialization process, the upper byte of the start address of the RWM area is set in the T register (or / and the upper byte of the start address of the register area is set in the T register) without depending on the control program. After this initialization processing, the control program (for example, internal register initialization in step S103 to be described later) (manually) sets the upper byte of the start address of the register area in the T register (or / and stores the RWM area in the T register) It may be configured such that the upper byte of the start address is set).

  Here, the above-mentioned reset interrupt includes a system reset interrupt (a reset interrupt caused by an external event such as inputting a reset signal for a certain period to the system reset terminal) and a user reset interrupt (a user reset terminal). There are two types of reset interrupts that are triggered by an external event, such as inputting a reset signal for a certain period, and reset interrupts that are triggered by an internal event, such as a WDT timeout or access outside a specified area) There is an interrupt. In a reset by a system reset interrupt, all internal circuits including a control register and a general-purpose register are initialized (for example, an initial value corresponding to the register (for example, 00H is set in the I register)). A part of the internal circuit is initialized.

  After executing the initialization process by the system reset, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an L level signal is input to a predetermined terminal), the security mode is entered and the predetermined condition is If not established, the user mode is entered. Here, the security mode is a mode for authenticating the user program. Specifically, when the system reset is input, re-calculate whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the result (security check result) is OK (no abnormality), this mode is terminated. When the security check result is NG (abnormal), the CPU 304 is configured to stop. The authentication code is written in the ROM 306 together with the user program (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “control program”) when writing into the ROM.

  The user mode is a mode in which the user program is executed from the ROM reset address (0000H, which is the start address of the ROM area described above), and the main control unit power-on process described later is started. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 executes the user program, the byte length of data read into the instruction register in one process (one state) is 1 byte (8 bits). The data length is not particularly limited, and may be 16 bits or 32 bits, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described initialization process is configured to be executed (automatically (regardless of the control program)) before shifting to the security mode or the user mode. You may comprise so that it may be performed after transfering to user mode. Further, the initialization processing execution timing may be different depending on the type of reset (the type of interrupt factor in the case of a user reset interrupt).

  Specifically, referring to a register (one of the built-in registers) for managing the reset factor that occurred immediately before, whether or not the reset factor that occurred immediately before is (1) a system reset. (2) It is determined whether or not a user reset is caused by a timeout of WDT, and (3) whether or not a user reset is caused by access outside the designated area, and the execution timing of the initialization process is determined according to the determination result. You may comprise. In addition, the specific value and the initial value set in the initialization process may be configured to be different depending on the type of reset and the type of register (for example, a general-purpose register has 00H as an initial value in both system reset and user reset). The T register is set such that F0H is set as a specific value at the time of system reset, but may not be initialized at the time of user reset).

  The security mode time can be extended by a set time or can be extended by a random time. By extending by a random amount of time, it may be difficult for the fraudster to aim at the start timing of the user program. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can set the time from user reset (for example, reset by timeout of WDT) to the start of execution of a user program to random time. With such a configuration, there is a case where fraud aimed at the start timing of the user program can be prevented in advance.

  Next, the main control unit power-on process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 228 (a) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on process, FIG. 228 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 228 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, stack pointer initialization is performed. In this stack pointer initial setting, a stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

  Subsequently, in step S102, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (this value). In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 9V) or higher. When the voltage value of the power source is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the process waits until the voltage value of the power source becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value, and when the voltage value exceeds the predetermined value (step S102: Yes) Proceed to step S103.

  In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initial setting, the WDT 314 is activated, the access permission to the RAM 308, the numerical value that determines the execution period of the main control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is set in each register of the timer circuit 312, and the main control unit 300 After initial processing of serial communication between the control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 and processing such as setting the maximum value of hardware random numbers, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is ON (the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the process goes to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether or not the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state, and an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated check It is determined whether or not the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal). If the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before the power interruption. Execute startup processing. On the other hand, when the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal) (No at Step S106), the process goes to Step S108 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed.

  Here, the return activation processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the return activation process is started, in step S201, initial setting at the time of return activation is performed. Specifically, a process for setting information indicating “return start” in the power status information, a process for setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and a device error (an error flag due to magnetic detection, winning abnormality, etc.) Processing for clearing, processing for clearing the previous device error status, processing for clearing the device error status for security signals, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, in step S202, the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S201 is set as an address for starting RAM clearing, and then the return activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (mainly set) to the stack pointer. In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in a sub-command transmission process in a timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. .

  Next, the initial activation process will be described with reference to FIG. When the initial activation process is started, initial setting of soft random numbers is performed in step S301. Specifically, an initial setting of soft random numbers used in special drawing or ordinary drawing is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S302, the addresses after the storage area that was initially set in step S301 are set as addresses for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the initial activation process, for example, setting of prohibition of interrupt, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial activation process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, as with the power recovery command. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 228 (a), after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, a RAM clear process is performed in step SS109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

  Subsequently, in step S110, a sub-control related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, processing for setting an initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

  In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, design data, firing position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, universal signal, normal electric accessory (second special figure starting port 232, electric chew) operating signal, normal figure operation Medium signal, easy winning status signal, special signal per special signal, special signal small hit signal (limited to models equipped with small hits), special signal changing signal, special signal variable time reduction status signal, special electric accessory (variable prize) Mouth 234, 235, Attacker) Operation signal, Condition device operation signal, character continuous operation device operation signal, large winning port solenoid signal, normal electric accessory solenoid signal, design LED data, external terminal board signal, etc. Set the output port. Moreover, after finishing the process of this step S111, it transfers to the main control part main loop process. Here, the winning easy state may indicate a power support state.

  Next, the main control unit main loop process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process.

  When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above main control power-on process, the main control unit main loop process starts to execute the main control unit main loop process. After setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, a basic random number initial value update process is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value updating process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and an initial value of the general figure determining random number counter is updated. The initial value generation random number counter can be updated by, for example, obtaining a value from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 and adding 1 to the obtained value when the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0-20. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S404, after setting interrupt permission, in step S405, a subcommand transmission process is performed). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If there is a command to be transmitted, a process for transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, after performing other determination random number update processing, it progresses to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the normal diagram variation time determination random number is performed.

  In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop process. In step S408, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to “suspend”. Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Thereafter, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms). The main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S502 and step S503, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value of the random number per special figure and the random number per common figure performed in step S403 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Two random number counters for generating the winning random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated.

  For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

  For example, a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 is obtained by acquiring a value from a random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the acquired value. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value stored in (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number value, The initial value set this time is set to the above-described initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number and to determine that the random counter for generating the normal winning random value has made one round next. Remember it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated). If the interrupt function is limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). ), The process proceeds to step S519, and if the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub control unit 400 is activated), the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in this example) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring, the process proceeds to step S520, and the specific error is not occurring. In the case, the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S507, processing such as input port status update is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), general map starting port 228, and out port 240 via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of input of signals relating to switches such as the variable prize opening (attacker) 234 and the prize winning opening (general winning opening 226) is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area. In addition, when it is determined that the winning at the start opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is deleted.

  In step S507, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning award winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  This main control unit timer interruption process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 4 ms is started several times while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S506 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input. Note that if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it may be determined that there has been a prize.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S507, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228.

  For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning opening counter updating process is also performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In this winning acceptance process, whether the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234 are won matches the winning determination pattern information. The determination result is used. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area.

  Further, when a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is read from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. In addition, when the random number of a special figure is acquired, special figure prefetching processing (presence / absence judgment, symbol, prefetch lottery of variation time) is also performed.

  In step S509, a prize-related error check process is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process for setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated.

  In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. In addition, as a command which the main control part 300 transmits to the payout control part 600, the communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control part 600) transmitted after progress of the starting waiting time of the 1st sub control part 400 after power activation is passed. And a command for notifying the starting method of the main control unit 300 (initial start and return start), and a prize ball number command for instructing payout of game balls for designated prize balls.

  The command received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 includes a communication confirmation return command (response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300), a test test signal Commands that contain information on the occurrence of commands (prize ball signal output request), information on the occurrence of payout errors (including no errors), and prize ball payout operation status commands (whether or not award balls are being paid out) There is a command indicating that the payout is in progress (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED etc.).

  Next, in step S512, special figure state update processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the special figure process state.

  If the special figure processing state is a change waiting state, a special figure related lottery process is executed. The presence / absence of the number of reserved balls shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 is determined. If there is a held ball, the number of held balls is subtracted, and the obtained random number is transferred. Thereafter, the special figure jackpot lottery is executed in the special figure jackpot lottery process. At that time, the lottery is drawn in different tables according to the setting state of the special figure probability variation flag. If the special figure big hit lottery is not a big hit, a special figure small hit lottery is performed. Here, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a miss flag, a miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and an ordinary figure probability variation flag, respectively. Depending on the result of the special figure small hit lottery, any special figure type flag of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, or the off flag is set. After setting the special figure type flag, the special figure variable time lottery process is performed. In the special figure fluctuation time lottery process, the special figure fluctuation time timer is set according to the special flag per special figure and the special figure fluctuation time random number. After these lottery processes, the special figure processing state is updated to the special figure changing state, and this process ends. On the other hand, the presence / absence of the number of reserved balls in the special figures 1 and 2 is determined, and if neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is on hold, the present process is terminated. In this embodiment, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start of the special figure 1 variable game are started. Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  If the special figure processing state is the special figure changing state, the special figure changing process is executed. When the fluctuation time timer is checked and it is determined that the special figure is changing, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device is selected according to the special figure to be changed (special figure 1 or special figure 2). Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off. On the other hand, the variable time timer is checked, and when it is determined that the special figure is stopped, the symbol data to be displayed on the special figure display device is set. Thereafter, the special figure processing state is updated to the special figure display confirmation wait state, a special figure display confirmation timer is set, and this process is terminated.

  If the special figure processing state is the special figure display confirmation wait state, the special figure display confirmation weight process is executed. While the special figure display confirmation timer set in the special figure changing process is in operation, this process is terminated (the special figure display confirmation wait state is entered). When the special figure display confirmation timer times out, the following processing is executed according to the lottery result of the special figure. If the special drawing lottery result is out of place, after executing a special figure fluctuation frequency update process, which will be described later, the special figure processing state is set to the fluctuation waiting state, and this process is terminated. If the lottery result of the special figure is a small hit, after executing the special figure fluctuation frequency update process described later, after setting the RAM clear start address set in the special figure display confirmation wait process as the RAM clear start address The RAM is cleared for the storage area from the set RAM clear start address to the RAM clear end address. The memory area where the RAM is cleared is the special figure rejection type (disconnected, big hit, small hit), special electric player operation frequency, special winning opening winning number, special electric action pattern, special electric operation state, total winning number per win, big prize Examples include storage areas such as an abnormality flag related to a mouth and a hit end timer type. After the RAM clear is completed, the special figure processing state is set to the hit start display wait state, a hit start display timer (timer for displaying that it is a hit) is set, and this process is ended. If the lottery result of the special figure is a big hit, after setting the RAM clear start address set in the special figure display determination wait process as the RAM clear start address, from the set RAM clear start address to the RAM clear end address The RAM is cleared for the storage area. The memory area where the RAM is cleared is the special figure rejection type (disappearance, big hit, small hit), special electric function activation frequency, special prize winning prize number, special electric action pattern, special electric action state, total winning prize per win, big prize Storage areas such as mouth abnormal flag, winning end timer type, easy-to-win status, special figure and ordinary figure status, special figure variable time reduction status, variable time lottery status, normal figure variable time reduction status, open extension status, etc. It is done. After the RAM clear is finished, the special figure processing state is changed to the hit start display wait state, then the hit start display timer is set, and this processing is ended.

  Here, the special figure fluctuation time update process will be described. In the special figure fluctuation time update process, when the special figure high probability fluctuation counter, the fluctuation time reduction counter, and the easy-to-win state counter (electric support state counter) are decremented by 1, and the various counters become zero Special figure status (special figure high probability status (status where special figure is set to high probability or low probability), special figure short-time status (status of whether special figure is in variable time reduction state)) and ordinary figure Status (ordinary short-time status (status of whether or not the normal time fluctuation time is reduced)), general-figure change status (status where the normal diagram is set to high probability or low probability), open extended status (general-purpose electric utility) The status for setting whether or not the open time is extended.In the open extended state, the open period of the electric chew becomes longer than the non-open extended state))). It should be noted that the update process of the special figure change time is executed regardless of the state of the special figure and the normal figure.

  If the special figure processing state is the hit start display wait state, the hit start display wait process is executed. While the hit start display timer set in the special figure display determination wait process is in operation, this process ends (the hit start display wait state is entered). When a hit of the hit start display timer occurs, a special power release process described later is executed. After the special electric character release process is completed, the special figure processing state is changed to the special electric character operating state, and the present process is terminated.

  If the special figure processing state is the special electric power operation state, the special electric power operation operation is executed. First, the maximum number of winners of the attacker and the number of winners to the attacker are acquired, and if the number of winners does not reach the maximum number of winners, the special electric utility operation timer is checked. If it is determined that the attacker is open by checking the special electric function activation timer, the process is terminated while the special figure processing state remains in the special electric character operation state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the attacker is closed, the special electric combination opening / closing control is executed according to the operation pattern of the special electric combination (attacker opening pattern). Here, the operation pattern of the special electric character is an opening / closing pattern of the special electric character within one round, a pattern for performing high-speed opening / closing within one round (paca paka), a pattern with a long open time within one round (for example, a pattern opening for 29s) ) And the like. If it is determined that the special electric combination is in operation after the special electric combination opening / closing control is completed, the processing is terminated while the special figure processing state remains in the special electric combination operation state. When the number of winnings has reached the maximum number of winnings, or when the special winning opening is closed and the special electric character is not operating, the special figure processing state is set to the special electric character remaining ball detection state. Thereafter, the special electric prize winning detection timer is set, and this process is terminated.

  If the special figure processing state is the special electric charge remaining sphere detection state, the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process is executed. While the special power combination winning detection timer set in the special power combination operating process is in operation, this process is terminated (waiting until the remaining ball detection time elapses). If the special electric winning prize detection timer times out, set the special electric action activation delay timer (timer from the end of the current round to the start of the next round), and the special figure processing status will be activated. The process is terminated after entering the end state.

  If the special figure processing state is the special power combination operation end state, the special power combination operation end processing is executed. This process is terminated while the special power combination operation delay timer set in the special power remaining ball detection process is in operation. When a timeout of the special power combination operation delay timer occurs, the number of operations of the special power combination (the maximum number of times the big prize opening is opened) is acquired, and the end of the hit is determined. When it is determined that the hit is ended, a hit end display timer is set, the special figure processing state is set to the hit end display wait state, and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is continued, the special power combination release process is executed.

  Here, the special power combination release process will be described. First, as a process when the special winning opening is opened, the special figure processing state is set to the special electric combination operating state, and the number of special winning combination winning prizes and the special electric combination operating state are cleared. Further, a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is set. After executing the process at the time of opening the big prize opening, the special electric role operation according to the hit type information (in the case of this embodiment, special figure A, special figure B, special figure a, special figure b) and the number of rounds to be started from now on Get the pattern (attacker release pattern). Thereafter, the number of operations of the special electric role is updated (the number of rounds is updated), and this process is terminated.

  If the special figure processing state is the hit end display wait state, hit end display wait processing is executed. This process is terminated while the hit end display timer set in the special electric utility operation end process is in operation. When a timeout of the hit end display timer occurs, data setting at the end of hit is performed according to hit type information (in this embodiment, big hit or small hit). In this embodiment, when the hit type information is a big hit or a small hit, the special symbol processing state is set to a waiting state for variation, and various types of big hit information (display symbol data, symbol type data, the total number of winnings during the big hit, etc.) Is cleared and this processing is terminated.

  After completion of one of the eight processes, a special game state is set. First, the easy-to-win status information is generated according to the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, the common figure probability fluctuation flag, and the opening time extension flag for one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232, and Combined with the special figure status generated by the process. Next, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined, and when the hit (big hit or small hit), the end of the hit operation is determined, and at other times, the end of one game is determined. Thereafter, a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is set, and the process is terminated.

  In step S513, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of either the winning symbol or the off symbol. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal state is not operating is set. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step SB23.

  In step S513, a general drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S517 are read, the presence or absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and when a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in transmission information to be transmitted. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In the external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, a subcommand management process is performed. In this sub-command management process, preparations for transmitting various commands to the first sub-control unit 400 are made. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, and bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a change stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included. In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is selected by the 15R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process. The information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set.

  Further, in the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step SB33, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S517, display display setting processing is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as “Number of reserved balls, combination of symbols”, status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing to set data to be output. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or LED, a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S519, a sub control activation waiting wait process is performed. In this sub-control activation wait wait process, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, the sub-control activation wait counter is decremented by 1, and this activation wait counter becomes 0. If so, preparations for transmitting a predetermined command are made. Note that the predetermined command includes one or more commands such as a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been canceled, a lower pan full error) A command indicating that there is a payout ball shortage error, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnected error There are a command indicating that is generated, a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state), and the like.

  In step S520, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop process. .

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, the first sub control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit main process.

  The first sub-control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) (not shown) that outputs a start signal (system reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the activation signal (system reset signal) from the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit), the first sub-control unit 400 executes the initialization process, and then performs a reset start by a reset interrupt. The sub-control unit main process is started. First, in step S601, initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of various variables (including processing for initializing a variable CNT described later to 0), and the like are performed.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not the variable CNT stored in the RAM 408 is 33 or more. If the variable CNT is applicable, the process proceeds to step S603. If the variable CNT is not applicable, the determination process of step S602 is repeatedly executed. Here, the variable CNT is a variable added every 1 ms in a 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Therefore, the process for determining whether or not the variable CNT is 33 or more in step S602 is the process for determining whether or not 33 ms has elapsed since the variable CNT was initialized to 0 in step S601 or step S603. It is synonymous with. In step S603, the variable CNT is initialized to 0, and then the process proceeds to step S604. Note that the process of step S602 is not limited to this example. For example, the main loop process (steps S602 to S612) may be executed three times in 100 ms (30 times per second).

  In step S604, liquid crystal control data analysis processing is performed. In the liquid crystal control data analysis processing, processing of commands received from the liquid crystal control unit is performed. In step S605, effect control data analysis processing is performed. In the effect control data analysis process, a command received from the second sub-control unit 500 is processed.

  In step S606, effect control main loop processing is performed. In this effect control main loop process, an unprocessed command received by a command reception interrupt process, which will be described later, is acquired from a command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and a process corresponding to the unprocessed command is performed. Control lamps and sounds based on the data.

  In step S607, a lamp control main loop process is performed. In this lamp control main loop process, control related to the lamp is performed based on the lamp data set in the effect control main loop process of step S606. In step S608, sound control main loop processing is performed. In this sound control main loop process, control related to the sound (sound) is performed based on the sound data set in the effect control main loop process of step S606.

  In step S609, lamp driver processing is performed. In this lamp driver process, the light output from the various lamps 418 and 440 is controlled based on the lamp control information set in the lamp control main loop process in step S607. In step S610, sound driver processing is performed. In this sound driver process, the sound output from the speaker 120 is controlled via the sound control circuit 431 based on the sound control information set in the sound control main loop process in step S608.

  In step S611, liquid crystal control communication driver processing is performed. In the liquid crystal control communication driver processing, processing for transmitting a command to the liquid crystal control unit is performed. In step S612, effect control communication driver processing is performed. In the effect control communication driver process, the process proceeds to step S602 after performing a process of transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 and the like.

  The first sub-control unit 400 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S602 to S612 except for interruption due to a command reception interrupt process, a 1 ms timer interrupt process, a 10 ms timer interrupt process, or a DMA interrupt process, which will be described later. .

<Command reception interrupt processing>
Next, a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of command reception interrupt processing.

  This command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 triggered by a command reception interrupt that occurs when a command from the main control unit 300 is received. In step S701, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command, and then the process ends.

<1ms timer interrupt processing>
Next, a 1 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once every predetermined time (1 ms in this example), and executes a 1 ms timer interrupt process triggered by this timer interrupt. To do. In step S801, the process ends after adding 1 to the variable CNT provided in the RAM 406.

<10ms timer interrupt processing>
Next, a 10 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of a 10 ms timer interrupt process.

  The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once every predetermined time (in this example, 10 ms), and executes a 10 ms timer interrupt process triggered by this timer interrupt. To do. In step S901, the first sensor reading process is performed. In the next step S902, the second sensor reading process is performed, and then the process ends. Here, in the first sensor reading process, for example, the detection signal of the first output setting switch 190 is acquired via the sensor circuit 428 (see FIG. 223), and the acquired detection signal is stored in the RAM 408 as a player setting value. A process of storing, a detection signal of the second output setting switch 194 is acquired via the sensor circuit 428 (see FIG. 223), and a process of storing the acquired detection signal in the RAM 408 as an administrator setting value is performed. In the second sensor reading process, a detection signal of another switch is acquired, and a process of storing the acquired detection signal in the RAM 408 is performed.

<DMA interrupt processing>
Next, a DMA interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 (e) is a flowchart showing the flow of DMA interrupt processing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a DMA interrupt notifying the end of the DMA transfer, and executes a DMA interrupt process triggered by this DMA interrupt. In step S1001, after performing various processes accompanying the end of the DMA transfer, the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S1201 in FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S1201. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1205.

  In step S1205, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S1207, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S1209, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S1207, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S1211, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S1213, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S1203.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1301 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S1401 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S1203 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S1203, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1403 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the process is terminated after the effect random number update process is performed.

<Processing of liquid crystal controller>
Next, processing of the liquid crystal control unit will be described with reference to FIG. 2A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit, and FIG. 2B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit, and FIG. 8D is a flowchart of the VDP image control process.

  The liquid crystal controller is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) (not shown) that outputs a start signal (system reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal (system reset signal) is input from the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit), the liquid crystal control unit 500 executes the initialization process, and then resets by a reset interrupt to start the liquid crystal control unit main. Start processing.

  First, in step S1501 of the liquid crystal control unit main process, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S1501. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM, liquid crystal loading process, and the like are performed.

  Here, the “liquid crystal loading process” executed in step S1501 is a process of transferring image data such as a still image or a moving image previously stored in a ROM or the like to a working storage area (for example, a RAM). Say. In the liquid crystal loading process according to this example, ROM coordinates (transfer source address of CGROM (not shown)), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. are set in the attribute register of VDP 434 based on the position information table. , After setting an instruction to start the transfer of image data from the CGROM to the VRAM 436, the VDP 434 transfers the image data from the CGROM to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. This is processing until the transfer end interrupt signal is output to the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the timer variable CNT is 33 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step S1505. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed as 33, 33, and 34 every time the process proceeds from step S1503 to step S1505. In step S1505, 0 is substituted into the timer variable CNT.

  In step S1507, command processing is performed. The CPU of the liquid crystal control unit determines whether a command is received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S1509, a VDP command transmission process is performed. For example, when there is an image display instruction from the first sub control unit 400, a command is transmitted to the VDP 434 in order to cause the VDP 434 to perform image control processing.

  In step S1511, return command transmission processing is performed. When the liquid crystal control unit controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the requested image, the liquid crystal control unit transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 and returns to step S1503.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the liquid crystal control unit detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1601 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit will be described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal control unit includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1 ms). With this timer interrupt as a trigger, timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle. Run.

  In step S1701 of the liquid crystal controller timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of the RAM, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Accordingly, in step S1503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms. In step S1703 of the liquid crystal control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of the VDP 434 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S1801, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit first swaps the designation of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

  Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of CGROM (not shown)), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434, and then from CGROM. An instruction for instructing the start of image data transfer to the VRAM 436 is set. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the CGROM to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  In step S1803, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1805. Otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S1805, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 434 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 434 in step S1801, the CPU sets information on image data (coordinate axis of VRAM 434, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are indicated to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S1807, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU. In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1811. Wait for input. In step S1811, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to this embodiment.

  234 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a general symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (a), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 234 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 234 (a), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 234 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 206 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 234 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG. 234 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 234 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 234 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, in FIG. 234 (f), the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  As shown in FIG. 234 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 where the decorative symbol variation display has started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 234 (h), the valid period is reduced. In FIG. 234 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, a reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P as shown in FIG. 234 (j). . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 234 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the vehicle enters the reach state as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 234 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed in FIG. 234 (n). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be a advance notice of progress to super reach.

  FIG. 235 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 234 step by step.

  In FIG. 235 (p) continuing from FIG. 234 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 235 (s). In FIG. 235 (s), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 235 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” of the 15R probability variation big hit decision is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown to FIG. 235 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 235 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 235 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is made together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached with different decorative symbols (substantially 5R probability big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 234 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 235 (t). In 235 (u ′), the fluctuation of the decoration pattern combination “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 235 (v ′) following FIG. 235 (u ′), “decoration 6—decoration”. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 235 (w ′) following FIG. 235 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 236 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of effects in another case following FIG. 235 (q).

  In FIG. 236 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 234 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 236 (b). In FIG. 236 (b), the hero Tono-sama loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 236 (c), as in FIG. Eventually, in FIG. 236 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative pattern combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236 (e), the fourth symbol (circular figure) in FIG. 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

<Example of special jackpot game>
Next, an example of the special jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 237 and 238. In addition, FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the state of the 15R special jackpot game in stages. 237 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, a second special symbol hold lamp 220, and A normal symbol hold lamp 216 is shown. FIG. 237 also shows a variable prize opening 234 that is an attacker and a door member 234a.

  In FIG. 237 (a), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit. In addition, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280, the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the 4th symbol display area 284 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 237 (b), one round, which is the first round of 15 round jackpot games, is started. The door member 234a shown in FIG. 237 (b) is opened, and the attacker is in the open state. Moreover, 1R character display (round number display) is made at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (b). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa that imitates a cactus appears as a big hit game effect, and an effect display dedicated to the first round including the character C1 is performed. In addition, “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This “decoration 7” continues to be displayed until the big hit game end effect is started. Therefore, it continues to be displayed even in the interval between rounds.

  Also in FIG. 237 (c), the door member 234a is opened, and the attacker is in the open state. In addition, the round number display is continued in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display dedicated to the first round is also continued.

  In FIG. 237 (d), the door member 234a is closed, and the attacker is in the closed state. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 1R characters in the upper left corner and “decoration 7” in the upper right corner. Furthermore, the effect display for the first round is also continued. One scene of the effect display dedicated to the first round including the character C1 (one scene with a different number of sparkling images br) shown in FIG. 237 (d) corresponds to the opening end effect of the attacker in the first round. .

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 237 (e), the 1R character display at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and the second round is started in FIG. The door member 234a shown in FIG. 5F is opened, and the attacker is in the open state. The decorative symbol display device 208 has an effect display dedicated to the second round including the character C1 (the number of brilliant images br is limited). A different production display) has been started. However, the display of the number of rounds in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 has not started. The period of FIG. 237 (e) may be the interval between rounds, and the effect display including the character C1 shown in FIG. 237 (d) to FIG. ) To (e) may be set as an interval between rounds.

  Also in FIG. 237 (g), the attacker is in the open state, and the round number display is started at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the third to fifth rounds are digested in the same manner, and in FIG. 237 (h), the fifth time the attacker is in the open state and the attacker is in the closed state, and the round in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is maintained. The number display also disappears. In FIG. 6 (i), the sixth round is started, the attacker is in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the effect display dedicated to the sixth round including the character C1. Also in FIG. 6J, the attacker is in an open state, and 6R character display is started at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 238 is a view showing the continuation of the 15R special jackpot game shown in FIG. 237 step by step. In FIG. 238 (k) following FIG. 237 (j), the sixth round of big hit game is being performed. In FIG. 238 (l), the sixth time the attacker is in the open state is over and the attacker is in the closed state. In FIG. 238 (m), the round number display at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also turned off.

  In FIG. 238 (n), the seventh round is started, the attacker is in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the special display for the seventh round including the character C1. Also in FIG. 5 (o), the attacker is in an open state, and the 7R character display is started at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the 8th to 14th rounds are digested in the same manner. In FIG. 238 (p), the big hit game of the 15th round, which is the final round, is being performed and the attacker is in an open state. A 15R character is displayed in the upper left corner, and an effect display dedicated to the 15th round is also performed.

  In FIG. 238 (q), the door member 234a is closed, and the attacker is in the closed state. In FIG. 238 (r), the character display of 15R at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, and FIG. ), The jackpot game end effect is started. In this big hit game end effect, the character of the main character appears in a dedicated background image (not shown here), and the character display of “probability change entry” is displayed. This character display notifies that the control state shifts to the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state and electric support state) when the jackpot game is finished.

  FIG. 238 (t) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure variable display start waiting time, and the control state has shifted to the probable change state and the electric support state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6 (t), the character display “probably changing” is made in the upper left, and the display of the variation icon display region 280 and the fourth symbol display region 284 is restored. Further, due to the shift to the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d (left side of the fluctuation icon display area 280). In FIG. 238 (t), the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0 as can be seen from the number of lighting of the second special symbol hold lamp 220, but there are four hold icons in the hold icon display area 282 in the special figure 2. In order to make it easy to understand that the icon is displayed, the hold icon that is not actually displayed is indicated by a dotted line in the default display mode.

  As described above, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. 238 (t), a dotted line is used to make the area easy to understand. This area corresponds to the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. In FIG. 238 (t), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is four as can be seen from the number of lighting of the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and four hold icons h11 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. ˜h14 is displayed.

<Various processes after power-on>
Next, various processes performed after the pachinko machine 100 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 243. FIG. 239 is a time chart showing an example of the flow of various processes performed after the pachinko machine 100 is turned on.

<Various processes after power-on / Main control unit>
First, processing after power-on in the main control unit 300 will be described. As described above, the main control unit 300 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (system reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a voltage having a predetermined voltage value is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the activation signal output circuit 340, the activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal toward the basic circuit 302.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that has input the activation signal first executes initialization processing (see FIG. 227), and then a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, an L level signal is input to a predetermined terminal). If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the process shifts to the user mode. FIG. 239 shows an example in which the mode is shifted to the security mode because a predetermined condition is satisfied after the initialization process is executed (an L level signal is input to a predetermined terminal).

  Further, the security mode time can be extended by a preset time (fixed time) or can be extended by a random time (random extension time) (random delay is performed). In FIG. 239, the time indicated by reference numeral T2 is a fixed time in the security mode, and if it is a gaming machine equipped with the same CPU 304, all gaming machines have the same time. On the other hand, the time indicated by reference numeral T3 in FIG. 239 is a random time in the security mode, and even a gaming machine equipped with the same CPU 304 may have a different time for each gaming machine. The problem of random delay will be described later.

  When the security mode ends, the main control unit 300 shifts to the user mode (mode for executing the user program), and starts executing the main control unit power-on process (see FIG. 228 (a)). In the main control unit power-on process, after the processing of steps S101 to S109 is completed, a subcommand (power-on command) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S110 (sub-control related activation setting). To do. In FIG. 239, the time indicated by the reference symbol T4 is a subcommand (from the start of the user mode (start of execution of the main control unit power-on process)) to the first sub control unit 400 in step S110 (sub control related activation setting). It is a time until a power-on command is transmitted, and in this example, is a certain time.

<Various processes after power-on / first sub-control unit>
Next, processing after power-on in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs the start signal (system reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a voltage having a predetermined voltage value is supplied from the power supply controller 660 to the activation signal output circuit, the activation signal output circuit outputs an activation signal toward the basic circuit 402.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 that has input this activation signal first executes the initialization process, then shifts to the user mode (mode in which the user program is executed), and the first sub-control unit main process (FIG. 231). The execution of (see (a)) is started. In the first sub-control unit main process, a process corresponding to the sub-command (power-on command) received by the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 231 (b)) in step S606 (production control main loop process) In the example, a process of setting lamp data and sound data for power-on notification is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S607 (lamp control main loop process), the first sub-control unit 400 relates to the lamp based on the power-on notification lamp data set in step S606 (effect control main loop process). After performing the control, in step S608 (sound control main loop process), control related to the sound (sound) is performed based on the power-on notification sound data set in step S606 (production control main loop process). Do.

  Subsequently, in step S609 (lamp driver processing), the first sub-control unit 400 determines the light output from the various lamps 418 and 440 based on the lamp control information set in step S607 (lamp control main loop processing). After the control, in step S610 (sound driver processing), control of the sound output from the speaker 120 via the sound control circuit 431 based on the sound control information set in step S608 (sound control main loop processing) I do. Thereby, power-on notification (sound / light emission) using the various lamps 418 and 440 and the speaker 120 is performed.

  239 in FIG. 239 is the time from the start of the user mode (start of execution of the first sub-control unit main process) to the start of power-on notification (sound / light emission). In FIG. 239, the time indicated by reference numeral T5 is the time from the start of power-on notification (sound / light emission) to the end of the notification.

<Various processing after power-on / problems of random delay>
Next, the problem of the above-described random delay will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 (a) is a front view showing a state in which power-on notification is performed only at the gaming table A of the plurality of gaming tables A and B, and FIG. 240 (b) shows the gaming tables A and B. 5 is a time chart showing an example of a flow of various processes after power-on in FIG.

  In this example, the game machines A and B are simultaneously turned on, so that activation signals are simultaneously input to the main controller 300 and the first sub controller 300 of the game machines A and B, respectively. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 240 (b), the main control unit 300 of the gaming machine A that has input the activation signal shifts to the security mode after executing the initialization process, and in this security mode, the preset fixed time After waiting for α, it is further waiting for the random extension time β. Further, after the end of the security mode, the mode is shifted to the user mode, and a power-on command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in this user mode.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 of the gaming machine A that has input the activation signal shifts to the user mode after executing the initialization process, and in this user mode, has received the power-on command from the main control unit 300. The power-on notification is started as an opportunity.

  On the other hand, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 240 (b), the main control unit 300 of the gaming table B that has input the activation signal shifts to the security mode after executing the initialization process, and is set in advance in this security mode. After waiting for the fixed time α, the system waits for the random extension time β ′ (= random delay time β + time T6 of the gaming table A). Further, after the end of the security mode, the mode is shifted to the user mode, and a power-on command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in this user mode.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 of the gaming machine B that has input the activation signal shifts to the user mode after executing the initialization process, and in this user mode, has received the power-on command from the main control unit 300. The power-on notification is started as an opportunity.

  In this example, since the random delay time β ′ of the main control unit 300 of the gaming table B is longer by the time T6 than the random delay time β of the main control unit 300 of the gaming table A, the main control unit of the gaming table B The timing at which 300 transmits a power-on command to the first sub-control unit 400 is longer than the timing at which the main control unit 300 of the game console A transmits a power-on command to the first sub-control unit 400 by a time T7 ( = T6).

  As a result, the start timing of the power-on notification in the gaming machine B is delayed by the time T7 (= T6) from the start timing of the power-on notification in the gaming machine A, as shown in FIG. 240 (a). In addition, there may be a situation in which the power-on notification is performed on the gaming table A of the gaming tables A and B, while the power-on notification is not performed on the gaming table B.

  That is, as in this example, when a plurality of game machines have a random delay function that randomly delays the start time of the user program, a shift occurs in the start timing of the user program in each game machine, and as a result, Since the start timing of the effect after power-on on the stand (in this example, power-on notification) does not match, there is a problem that it may give a sense of discomfort to the store clerk and player of the game store.

<Solutions for various processing after power-on / random delay>
Next, a solution to the above-described random delay problem will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 (a) is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of game machines A and B are simultaneously performing power-on notification (power-on simultaneous notification), and FIG. 5 is a time chart showing an example of a flow of various processes from power-on to simultaneous power-on notification in FIG.

  The game machine (pachinko machine 100) described below has time-counting means (for example, a hardware timer provided in the CPU of the control means, a software timer realized by a user program of the control means, an RTC) that measures time when power is turned on. (Real-time clock) etc.), “The start condition of the production (in this example, the start condition of the power-on notification) has been established, and the first time has elapsed since the time measurement by the time measuring means started. Is a condition for starting the island simultaneous effect (in this example, simultaneous power-on notification) in the first sub-control unit 400.

  For this reason, in this example, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 of the game machines A and B receives the power-on command from the main control unit 300, thereby starting the power-on notification start condition. Even if the above condition is satisfied, the power-on notification is not started only when the condition is satisfied, and the first time (in this example, FIG. 241 (b)) after the time measurement by the time measuring means is started. When the time indicated by T1 in FIG. 6 has elapsed, simultaneous power-on notification is started.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, even when a plurality of gaming machines have a random delay function and the start timing of the user program in each control means is shifted, the power is turned on in each gaming machine. The notification start timing can be matched, and as shown in FIG. 241 (a), the power-on notification (power-on simultaneous notification) can be started simultaneously on the plurality of game machines A and B.

  In the state shown in FIG. 241 (a), a liquid crystal loading display (to be described later) is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the power-on command is not received until the first time (in this example, the time indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 241 (b)) has elapsed since the time measurement by the time measuring means is started, and the first time ( If a power-on command is received after a further time has elapsed since T1) (for example, after T1 (seconds) + 3 seconds have elapsed), it is processed immediately after reception (for example, power-on by command reception interrupt processing) The command may be stored in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command and processed in an effect control main loop process in the first sub-control unit main process executed after the command reception interrupt process is completed.

<Various processes after power on / Demonstration screen after random delay>
FIG. 242 (a) is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of game machines A and B are simultaneously performing a demonstration screen display (demo screen simultaneous display), and FIG. 5 is a time chart showing an example of a flow of various processes from power-on to demo screen simultaneous display in FIG.

  The game machine according to the present example includes the above-described time measuring means, and “the start condition of the production (in this example, the start condition of the demonstration screen display) is satisfied, and the time measurement by the time measuring means is started first. After the elapse of time, a third time different from the first time has elapsed "starts the island simultaneous production (in this example, the demo screen simultaneous display) in the first sub-control unit 400. As a condition.

  Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 242 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 of the game machines A and B receives a power-on command from the main control unit 300 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) Has passed, the demonstration screen display start condition is satisfied, and the demonstration screen display is not started only when the condition is satisfied. After the elapse of time (in this example, the time indicated by reference numeral T8 in FIG. 242 (b)), a third time different from the first time (in this example, reference numeral T9 in FIG. 242 (b)). When the time indicated by () has elapsed, the demo screen simultaneous display starts.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, even if a plurality of gaming machines have a function of random delay and a deviation occurs in the start timing of the user program in each control means, the demonstration screen in each gaming machine The display start timings can be matched, and as shown in FIG. 242 (a), the demo screen display (simultaneous screen simultaneous display) can be started simultaneously on the plurality of game machines A and B.

<Various processes after turning on the power / Simultaneous directing after random delay>
FIG. 243 (a) is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of game machines A and B are simultaneously performing an island simultaneous production, and FIG. It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the various processes until production.

  The gaming machine according to the present example includes the above-described time measuring means, and “the start condition of the effect (in this example, the start condition of the island simultaneous effect) is satisfied, and the first time after the time measuring means starts. The first sub-control unit 400 starts the island simultaneous performance as “a third time different from the first time has elapsed after the elapse of time”.

  Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 243 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 of the game machines A and B receives a power-on command from the main control unit 300 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). ) Has passed, the start condition of the island simultaneous production is satisfied, and the island simultaneous production is not started only when the condition is satisfied. After the elapse of time (in this example, the time indicated by reference numeral T8 in FIG. 243 (b)), a third time different from the first time (in this example, reference numeral T9 in FIG. 243 (b)). When the time indicated by) elapses, the island simultaneous production starts.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, even if a plurality of gaming machines have a random delay function and a deviation occurs in the start timing of the user program in each control means, The start timings of the effects can be matched, and as shown in FIG. 243 (a), the island simultaneous effects can be started simultaneously on the plurality of game machines A and B. In this example, the game table A starts the island simultaneous production during the normal game, and the game table B starts the island simultaneous production during the special game (6 rounds of the big hit game in this example). .

  As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 243 includes the production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 241 (a)) and the time measuring means. (Means for starting timing when power is turned on, for example, a hardware timer provided in the CPU of the control means, a software timer realized by a user program of the control means, an RTC (real time clock), etc.) The production means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of effects, one of the effects is an island simultaneous effect, and the effect means is the island simultaneous effect. At least a means that can execute the production, the game stand can execute the island simultaneous production alone, and the start of the island simultaneous production is permitted (Hereinafter, referred to as “production start permission period”.) (For example, a period started by receiving a power-on command from the main control unit 300, a fixed time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed since the time was measured by the time measuring means. When the first time (for example, the time indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 241 (b)) has elapsed since the start of the time measurement by the time measuring means, the effecting means is started. The game table is characterized in that the island simultaneous production starts.

  According to such a game stand, when the start timing of the island simultaneous production is different, the store clerk can easily notice that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred, and the maintainability may be improved.

  In addition, “the requirement that the condition for starting the simultaneous start of the island simultaneous production is satisfied” is a requirement that includes the conditions for starting the simultaneous production of the island (conditions that enable the simultaneous production of the island; the same applies hereinafter). It may be. In addition, the “requirements including A” in this specification may be “requirements including only A”. In addition, the “requirement condition for the production means to start the island simultaneous production” means that the island simultaneous production start condition is established, and the first time has elapsed since the time measurement by the time measurement device was started. It may be a requirement including what has been done. The “requirements including A and B” in this specification may be “requirements for (and only) A and B”.

  Further, the effect means may be a means capable of executing a non-island simultaneous effect (for example, an effect for changing decorative symbols, an effect during reach, a jackpot effect, etc.). In addition, “the condition for the production means to start the island simultaneous production is that the island simultaneous production start condition is satisfied, and that the first time has elapsed since the time measurement by the time measurement means was started.” Indicates that the island simultaneous performance is started only when the first time has elapsed since the time measurement by the time measuring means was started and the island simultaneous production start condition is satisfied. Two or more conditions (for example, “power-on command has been transmitted” and “execution of island simultaneous performance”, when the first time has elapsed since the start of the time measurement by the means and the island simultaneous performance start condition has been established. When the two conditions “that is a period during which the period is permitted” are satisfied, the island simultaneous production may be started.

  The “period in which the execution of the island simultaneous performance is permitted” may be a period that starts after the third time described above, or a period that starts after the liquid crystal loading display ends. It may be a period that starts after the liquid crystal loading process is completed, or may be a period that starts after the display during return that is displayed after the liquid crystal loading display ends. It may be a period that is started when the display during return ends and when the island simultaneous production resumption is triggered.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the liquid crystal loading display is in progress, the island simultaneous performance start condition is satisfied, and when the first period has elapsed since the time measurement by the time measuring means has been started, the island simultaneous production is started. However, during the liquid crystal loading display, the conditions for starting the island simultaneous production are satisfied, and the island simultaneous production is not started even if the first period elapses after the time measurement is started. The island simultaneous production may be started after ending. In addition, the island simultaneous production start condition is established during the liquid crystal loading display, and the first period is not started even if the first period elapses after the time measurement is started. The island simultaneous performance may be started after the first period has elapsed since the elapse of time.

  In addition, the “island simultaneous production” according to the present invention may be an effect that starts on the condition that a fixed time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed since the time measurement means started. In addition, the island simultaneous production is a condition for starting the island simultaneous production (for example, a command from the main control unit such as a power-on command is transmitted, a big hit, a power support state is started or ended, and an island simultaneous production It may be an effect that starts when a mode or the like is started.

  Further, the “island simultaneous effect” according to the present invention may be an effect constituted by an island simultaneous effect by a plurality of game machines. For example, the game table A can execute the island simultaneous effect A, the game table B can execute the island simultaneous effect B, and the game table B performs the island simultaneous effect A while the game table A executes the island simultaneous effect A. You may show the effect comprised by B being performed. Further, the island simultaneous effect B may not be executed by the game stand B during the period in which the island simultaneous effect A is executed by the game stand A, and even in that case, it may be called the island simultaneous effect. The same may be applied to the island simultaneous production B by the game stand B.

  Further, the island simultaneous effect is an effect related to the island simultaneous effect by the effect means of the game table different from the game table, and before the first time has elapsed since the time measurement by the time measuring means was started. Even if the production start permission period is started, the production means may start the island simultaneous production after the first time has elapsed.

  With such a configuration, the island simultaneous production is not executed before the first time, so it is easy for amusement shop clerk to notice that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred, and improves maintainability There are cases where it is possible. If the first time elapses before the island simultaneous effect start condition is satisfied, the island simultaneous effect may be started when the island simultaneous effect start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, you may perform a production | presentation means island simultaneous production only after the island simultaneous production start permission period is started and 1st time passes. The production means is means for starting the island simultaneous production when the first time has elapsed after the time measurement by the time measuring unit is started when the island simultaneous production start condition is satisfied. There may be.

  The production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is a means capable of executing at least control of the production means, and the time measuring means has a power supply to the production control means. It is a means which starts time-measurement when thrown in, and the said effect control means may be a means which can perform the control which starts the said island simultaneous effect when the effect start conditions are satisfied.

  With such a configuration, timing starts when the power is turned on, so if the island simultaneous performance is executed before the first period, there may be an abnormality in the timing means or power on There is a case where it is easy for a store clerk or the like to notice that there is a characteristic, and the maintainability can be improved.

  The time counting means may be means for starting time measurement when power is supplied to the effect control means.

  The effect control means includes an effect control board (for example, a substrate constituting a sub-control unit that executes effect control other than liquid crystal control) and a display control board (for example, a board constituting a liquid crystal control unit). It may be a means or a means for receiving a command from the main control means. Further, the effect control means may be means for transmitting / receiving a command to / from the display control means. Further, the time counting means may be means for disclosing time measurement when a specific process (for example, each process in the first sub-control unit main loop process) by the effect control means is started. . Further, the time measuring means may be a time measuring means provided in the effect control means, and may be a means for starting time measurement when power is turned on to the effect control means.

  The main control means (for example, the main control unit 300) is a means capable of transmitting at least a plurality of types of commands (for example, subcommands) to the effect control means, and the main control means Performs control to transmit at least one command (hereinafter referred to as “first command”, for example, a power-on command) of the plurality of types of commands to the effect control means after the power is turned on. The effect start condition may be a condition including that the effect control unit has received the first command.

  With such a configuration, the reception of the command from the main control means is included in the island simultaneous production start condition, so that the communication between the main control means and the production control means is normally performed. In some cases, it is possible to make the store clerk and the like easier to recognize.

  The main control means may execute control for transmitting a second command different from the first command to the effect control means. The main control means is a means for performing “game control (for example, main control unit main loop processing or main control unit timer interruption processing)” including control for transmitting a plurality of types of commands to the effect control means. There may be.

  Here, as the second command, a game state command (special processing state, fluctuation pattern table, special figure high accuracy, time reduction, etc., normal drawing high accuracy, time reduction, electric power role (Den Chu) Command to be sent in response to a change in the open extension state, etc.), a prize command for a prize opening (a command to be sent in response to a prize at a start opening, a prize opening, a grand prize opening or passing through a gate), a launch position command (a launch position) Command to be sent when a change occurs, out ball command (command to be sent when a certain number of game balls are detected in the out mouth), error command (when various errors occur and the error has been canceled) Command), special figure look-ahead command (command different in special figure 1 and special figure 2), special figure change start command, special figure change stop command, special figure start command, special figure end command , Winning opening open command, winning opening closure command, Hiroshizu change start command, Hiroshizu change stop command, include Hiroshi electricity auditors closure command or the like.

  In addition, the main control means includes game control including control for transmitting the first command (for example, main control unit main loop processing shown in FIG. 229, main control unit timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 230, FIG. 239 The main control means is means capable of executing at least non-game control (for example, initialization processing and security mode control shown in FIG. 239), and The main control means is means for starting the non-game control when power is turned on, and the main control means is means for executing the game control after the non-game control ends, and the main control The period during which the non-game control is executed by the means (for example, the time required for the initialization process + the fixed time in the security mode + the random extension time) may be variable.

  With such a configuration, when the first time has elapsed since the start of timing when the island simultaneous production start condition is satisfied, the island simultaneous production starts, so it is difficult to understand the end timing of non-game control and the start timing of game control. In some cases, however, security against fraud can be improved.

  The non-game control means processing executed by the CPU constituting the main control means (for example, initialization processing and security mode processing executed without using a user program), and the power is turned on. It may be a process that is always started when it is performed. Further, the time from the completion of the non-game control process to the end of the non-game control (user program start timing in each CPU) may be variable.

  Further, the effect means is a sound output means (for example, the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 241), and the island simultaneous effect may be an island simultaneous sound.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a game shop clerk or the like to notice that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred when the start timing of the island simultaneous effect display is different, and it is possible to improve maintainability. There is a case. The island simultaneous effect may be an effect executed by only one effect means (for example, sound output means, display means).

  Further, the effect means is a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 241), and the island simultaneous effect may be an island simultaneous effect display.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a game shop clerk or the like to notice that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred when the start timing of the island simultaneous effect display is different, and it is possible to improve maintainability. There is a case.

  Further, the effect means is a notification means, the island simultaneous effect is a power-on notification (for example, a power-on sound), and the power-on notification is that the power is turned on. It may be a notification showing. Further, the island simultaneous production start condition may be a power-on notification execution condition.

  In addition, the second effect means is different from the effect means (hereinafter referred to as “first effect means”), and the second effect means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of effects. The island simultaneous production is a first island simultaneous production, and one of the plurality of productions by the second production means is a second island simultaneous production different from the first island simultaneous production. Yes, when the first start time has elapsed since the production start permission period is started and the time measurement by the time measurement unit is started, the second island simultaneous production is started by the second production unit, The second island simultaneous effect by the second effect means may be interlocked with the first island simultaneous effect by the first effect means.

  With such a configuration, if the start timing of the first island simultaneous production by the first production means is different, it is easy for a game shop clerk to notice that an abnormality may have occurred, and maintenance is easy May be improved. In addition, when the first island simultaneous production and the second island simultaneous production are different, it is easy for the store clerk to notice that there is a possibility that one of the production means is abnormal, and to improve the maintenance. May be possible. In addition, since the second island simultaneous performance is performed in conjunction with the first island simultaneous production, the production effect can be enhanced, and the entertainment of the game may be improved.

  It should be noted that the island simultaneous production is the first island simultaneous production (for example, island simultaneous production sound) by the first production unit (for example, sound output unit) and the second island by the second production unit (for example, display unit). It may be an effect composed of a simultaneous effect (for example, an island simultaneous effect display). In addition, the island simultaneous effect is a third island simultaneous effect display (light emission for the island simultaneous effect) by a third effect means (for example, a light emitting means) different from the first effect means and the second effect means. It may be included.

  In addition, the island simultaneous performance is a first island simultaneous production, the production start permission period is a first production start permission period, and is one of the plurality of productions by the production means. The second island simultaneous production is different from the island simultaneous production, and when the second production start permission period is started, the second island simultaneous production is started by the production means. Good.

  With such a configuration, since a plurality of island simultaneous effects are performed by one effect means, the effect of the effects can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved. The effect means may be a means capable of executing a third island simultaneous effect different from the first island simultaneous effect and the second island simultaneous effect.

  The second island simultaneous production start permission period may be a period that is started when the second island simultaneous production start condition is satisfied. In addition, the condition for the production means to start the second island simultaneous production is a second island simultaneous production start different from the island simultaneous production start condition (hereinafter referred to as “first island simultaneous production start condition”). It may be that the condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the second effect start permission period is a third time (for example, a time indicated by T8 in FIG. 243 (b)) different from the first time after the time measurement by the time measuring unit is started. It may be a period that starts when the total time of time indicated by T9 has elapsed.

  With such a configuration, different island simultaneous performances are started at different timings, so that it is possible to increase the opportunities for the player to experience the island simultaneous performance and improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the island simultaneous performance is started at different timings, there are cases where the store clerk can increase the chance of noticing that the start timing of the island simultaneous production is different and improve the maintainability.

  Note that the requirement that the second island simultaneous performance start condition is satisfied may include a requirement that a third time different from the first time has elapsed since the time measurement by the time measuring means was started. Good. The third time is a time longer than the first time, but may be a time shorter than the first time.

  Further, it is realized by a second time measuring means (for example, a user program of the control means) different from the time measuring means (hereinafter referred to as “first time measuring means”, for example, a hardware timer provided in the CPU of the control means). A second timer (for example, a time indicated by reference numeral T9 in FIG. 242 (b)) has elapsed since the time counting by the second time measuring means has started. It may be a period that is started.

  With such a configuration, by providing a plurality of time measuring means, it is possible to give variations to the timing at which the simultaneous production of islands is started, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the time measuring means different from said 1st time measuring means and said 2nd time measuring means may be provided.

  The effect means is a notification means (for example, speaker 120, various LEDs, various lamps), and the island simultaneous effect is a power-on notification (for example, FIGS. 241 (a) and (b)). The power-on notification is a notification indicating that the power is turned on, and the island simultaneous production start condition is a power-on notification execution condition. Also good.

  With such a configuration, when the start timing of power-on notification is different, it is easy for the store clerk to notice that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred at the timing of power-on, thereby improving maintainability. There are cases where it is possible.

  The power-on notification execution condition may be that a power-on command transmitted from the main control means has been received. In addition, a second informing unit different from the informing unit is provided, and a second power on informing by the second informing unit and a power on informing (hereinafter referred to as “first informing unit”) are provided. Hereinafter, it may be notified that the power is turned on by both “first power-on notification”. Note that the timing at which one power-on notification is started may be different from the timing at which the other power-on notification is started, or may be simultaneous.

  The power-on notification is a notification indicating that the main control means is turned on, and may be a notification that the notification is started when the effect control means receives the power-on command. . The power-on notification may be a notification indicating that the presentation control unit is turned on, or a notification indicating that the display control unit is turned on.

  Further, two or more notification means may be provided, but there may be notification means that does not perform power-on notification indicating that the main control means is turned on. For example, the sound output means outputs a power-on sound indicating that the main control means is turned on, but the display means does not display the power-on display indicating that the main control means is turned on. You may make it display the notification which shows that the power supply of the control means (or presentation control means) was turned on. Here, the notification indicating that the power is turned on may be a notification indicating that the power-on control by each control means is executed, and indicates that the power-on control by each control means is completed. Notification may be used.

  Further, the notification means is a sound output means, the power-on notification may be a power-on sound, the notification means is a display means, and the power-on notification is It may be a power-on display. Further, the notification means is a light emitting means, and the power-on notification may be light emission for power-on. Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  In addition, the island facility on which the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can be installed is an island facility on which a plurality of gaming machines (for example, pachinko machines 100) can be installed, and the gaming machine is a production means (for example, FIG. At least a decorative symbol display device 208 and a speaker 120) shown in 241 (a) and timing means (for example, a hardware timer provided in the CPU of the control means, a software timer realized by a user program of the control means, and an RTC (real time clock)) The island facility is an island facility configured to be able to power on the plurality of game machines by a single operation, and the effect means in the game table includes a plurality of effects At least one of the plurality of effects by the effect means of the game table is an island simultaneous effect, The condition for starting the island simultaneous production by the production means on the technical stand is that the island simultaneous production start condition is established, and the first time after the time measurement by the time measuring means is started (for example, the sign in FIG. 241). (Time indicated by T1) has elapsed, and when each of the plurality of game machines executes the island simultaneous effect, the island simultaneous effect executed by each of the plurality of game machines is arranged. It may be an island facility characterized by that.

  According to such an island facility, if there is a game machine with different start timings of the island simultaneous production among a plurality of game machines, the store clerk may indicate that an abnormality may have occurred in the game machine. It may be easy to notice and may improve maintainability. The “island facility” according to the present invention may be an island facility where only a pachinko machine can be installed, an island facility where only a slot machine can be installed, or an island where both a pachinko machine and a slot machine can be installed. Equipment may be used. Moreover, the island equipment which can install only another kind of game machine may be sufficient, and the island equipment which can install a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and another kind of game machine may be sufficient. The island facility may be an island facility configured to be able to individually turn on the power of each of the plurality of game machines.

  In addition, the island simultaneous production in the game table is a production related to the island simultaneous production by the production means of the game table different from the game table, and the game table different from the game table is the game table. (Hereinafter referred to as “first type gaming table”. For example, a gaming table A shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and (b)), which is a gaming table different from the gaming table. The plurality of gaming machines includes a fourth type gaming machine different from the first type gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine B including a gaming machine B shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and (b)). The fourth type of game stand directing means is a fourth island simultaneous effect different from the island simultaneous effect (hereinafter referred to as “first simultaneous effect”) of a plurality of effects. Is a means that can execute at least the fourth type of game stage production means, the condition for starting the fourth simultaneous production, The fourth simultaneous production start condition, which is different from the simultaneous production start condition, has been established, and the condition for the fourth type of game stage production means to start the fourth simultaneous production is as described above. The fourth island simultaneous performance start condition was established separately from the island simultaneous production start condition, and the start timing of the first island simultaneous production by the first type of game machine is the fourth type. It may be different from the start timing of the fourth island simultaneous performance by the game machine.

  With such a configuration, by shifting the start timing of the island simultaneous production of the first type of game machine among the plurality of game machines, it is possible to make it stand out that the island simultaneous production has started. You may be interested in one type of gaming table.

<Control of various displays after power-on>
Next, various display controls performed after the pachinko machine 100 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a time chart illustrating an example of a flow of various display controls performed after the pachinko machine 100 is turned on.

<Control of various displays after power-on / first sub-control unit>
First, a process after power-on in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. As described above, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 that has input the activation signal first executes the initialization process, then shifts to the user mode (mode in which the user program is executed), and the first sub-control unit main process The execution of (see FIG. 231 (a)) is started. Note that the timing indicated by reference numeral t11 in FIG. 244 is the timing at which the transition to the user mode (the mode in which the user program is executed) is started and the execution of the first sub control unit main process is started. In the first sub control unit main process, a command (for example, a return command) received from the liquid crystal control unit is processed in step S604 (liquid crystal reception driver process).

  In step S611 (liquid crystal communication driver process), a process of transmitting a command to the liquid crystal control unit is performed. For example, when the sub-command (power-on command) is not received from the main control unit 300, when the special figure is changing, when the big hit is being hit, or when the execution of the first sub-control unit main process is started When the fourth time (time indicated by T11 in FIG. 244, for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, a display start command during return (a command for instructing start of display during return) is transmitted to the liquid crystal controller. At the same time, execution of return control is started. Here, the “return control” is control for determining whether or not normal display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the game information. In the return control according to the present example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to transmit a return-in-display display command to the liquid crystal control unit based on the content of the command received from the main control unit 300 (normal display during return). Control for determining whether or not to switch to display).

  In addition, when the return display non-display condition is satisfied while the return control is being executed (for example, during special figure fluctuation or big hit) (for example, when the next special figure change start command is received from the main control unit 300). Ends the execution of the return control and transmits a display end command during return (a command for instructing the end of the display during return) to the liquid crystal control unit.

<Control of various displays after power-on / LCD controller>
Next, processing after power-on in the liquid crystal control unit will be described. As described above, the liquid crystal control unit is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs the start signal (system reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a voltage having a predetermined voltage value is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the activation signal output circuit, the activation signal output circuit outputs an activation signal to the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit.

  The CPU of the liquid crystal control unit that has input the activation signal first executes an initialization process, and then shifts to a user mode (a mode for executing a user program), and the liquid crystal control unit main process (see FIG. 233 (a)). Start running. Note that the timing indicated by reference numeral t11 in FIG. 244 is the timing at which the transition to the user mode (the mode for executing the user program) is started and the execution of the liquid crystal control unit main process is started.

  In the liquid crystal control unit main process, the above-described liquid crystal loading process is executed in step S1501 (initial setting). Note that the time indicated by reference numeral T12 in FIG. 244 is the execution time of the liquid crystal loading process.

  In step S1509 (VDP command transmission process) of the liquid crystal control unit main process, when the liquid crystal loading is started, a liquid crystal loading display (display indicating that the liquid crystal loading process is being executed) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A VDP command for display on the VDP 434 is transmitted to the VDP 434. Accordingly, a liquid crystal loading display (for example, see FIG. 245 (c) to FIG. 245 (e)) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Also, in this process, after the liquid crystal loading process is completed, the liquid crystal loading display is continuously displayed for a fourth time (for example, 35 seconds after the main process of the liquid crystal control unit is started). To keep time. That is, in this example, even when the liquid crystal loading process is completed, the liquid crystal loading display is continuously displayed until the fourth time has elapsed.

  In step S1511 (return command transmission process) of the liquid crystal control unit main process, when the liquid crystal loading process is completed, a return command indicating that the liquid crystal loading process is completed is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. . Note that the timing indicated by t12 in FIG. 244 is the timing at which the liquid crystal control unit returns a command to the first sub control unit 400, and the command can be transmitted and received between the liquid crystal control unit and the first sub control unit 400. It is.

  In this example, the time is measured by the liquid crystal control unit, but the first sub-control unit 400 measures the time, for example, a display start command during return (a command for instructing start of display during return) is controlled by the liquid crystal. By receiving the information, the liquid crystal loading display may be terminated and the returning display may be displayed. In addition, in step S1509 (VDP command transmission process) of the liquid crystal control unit main process after the liquid crystal loading display ends, a display during recovery (display indicating that the return control is being executed in the first sub control unit 400) is displayed. A VDP command to be displayed on the symbol display device 208 is transmitted to the VDP 434.

  Here, when a returning display start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400, a returning display (for example, see FIG. 245 (f)) is continuously displayed. Note that the timing indicated by reference numeral t13 in FIG. 244 is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the returning display start command to the liquid crystal control unit. On the other hand, in step S1509 (VDP command transmission process) of the liquid crystal control unit main process, a return display end command (command for instructing the end of return display) is received from the first sub-control unit 400 for return display. Then, a VDP command for displaying the normal display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is transmitted to the VDP 434. As a result, the display during return being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and a normal display (for example, see FIG. 245 (g)) is displayed. In FIG. 244, the timing indicated by reference numeral t14 is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the returning display end command to the liquid crystal control unit, and the time indicated by reference numeral T13 is the display time of the returning display. .

  In this way, in this example, the returning display is displayed by the liquid crystal control unit regardless of whether or not the return process is performed by the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the returning display may be displayed only when the returning display start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400 after the liquid crystal loading display is completed.

  In this example, even during the liquid crystal loading process in the liquid crystal control unit, if the initialization process is completed in the main control unit 300 and the main control unit 300 has shifted to a state in which the game can be controlled, the game is played. It is possible to proceed. When the liquid crystal loading process is being performed in the liquid crystal control unit, the game may be configured not to proceed even if the main control unit 300 has shifted to a state in which the game can be controlled.

<Various displays after power-on / Specific example 1>
Next, a specific example 1 of various displays after power-on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of various displays after power-on in time series.

  FIG. 245 (a) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 before the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. This state is a state in which no activation signal is input to the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit, and display control for the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed. For example, at t15 in FIG. The timing shown is applicable.

  Next, FIG. 245 (b) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. This state is a state in which the activation signal is input to the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit, and the initialization process by the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit is started. For example, in FIG. The timing indicated by t16 is applicable. In addition, the main control unit 300 performs initial startup processing in the main control unit power-on processing, and then starts main control unit main loop processing and main control unit timer interrupt processing, and main control unit timer interrupt processing In step S504, it is determined that the interrupt function is being limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated), and the interrupt function is limited.

  Next, FIG. 245 (c) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the liquid crystal control unit starts the liquid crystal loading process. In this state, the liquid crystal control unit starts liquid crystal loading, and transmits a VDP command for displaying the liquid crystal loading display (in this example, the character display “Now Loading”) on the decorative symbol display device 208 to the VDP 434. For example, the timing indicated by reference numeral t11 in FIG. Further, the time is measured from the start of the liquid crystal loading process to a fourth time (for example, 35 seconds).

  Next, FIG. 245 (d) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the liquid crystal control unit completes the liquid crystal loading process. This state is a state in which the liquid crystal control unit has completed the liquid crystal loading and has transmitted a return command indicating that the liquid crystal loading process has been completed to the first sub control unit 400. For example, in FIG. The timing indicated by As described above, in this example, even when the liquid crystal loading process is completed, if the time measurement for the fourth time (for example, 35 seconds) by the liquid crystal control unit is not completed, the liquid crystal loading display is continued. Do.

  Next, FIG. 245 (e) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the interrupt function limitation of the main control unit 300 is released. This state is that the interrupt function is not limited in step S504 of the main control unit timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 because the first sub control unit 400 is activated based on the return command from the liquid crystal control unit. (Interrupt function limitation is canceled), and the game control by the main control unit 300 is started. For example, the timing indicated by reference numeral t17 in FIG. The game control by the main control unit 300 may be started without waiting for the start of the first sub control unit 400 or the completion of liquid crystal loading of the liquid crystal control unit.

  Next, FIG. 245 (f) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the liquid crystal control unit starts displaying during restoration. In this state, the liquid crystal control unit determines that the fourth time (the time indicated by T11 in FIG. 244 described above has elapsed, for example, 35 seconds) has elapsed, and the display during recovery (in this example, the character display “Preparing”). ) Is transmitted to the VDP 434 for display on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the timing indicated by reference numeral t13 in FIG. It should be noted that the display during return may not be performed while the special figure is stopped. Here, the display before FIG. 245 (f) corresponds to the power-on display.

  Next, FIG. 245 (g) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the liquid crystal control unit starts normal display (in this example, the decorative symbol stop display). In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a display end command during return to the liquid crystal control unit, and the liquid crystal control unit that has received the display end command during return erases the display during return and displays the normal display as a decorative pattern. This is a state in which a VDP command to be displayed on the display device 208 is transmitted to the VDP 434. For example, the timing indicated by reference numeral t14 in FIG.

  Next, FIG. 245 (h) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the liquid crystal control unit starts the demonstration display. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 instructs the liquid crystal control unit to perform a demonstration display, and the liquid crystal control unit that has received the demonstration display instruction issues a VDP command for causing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the demonstration display. This is a state in which it is transmitted to the VDP 434. Note that the order in which the demonstration display is performed may be interchanged with the order in which the normal display (decorative symbol stop display) illustrated in FIG. 245 (g) is performed.

  The game control by the main control unit 300 is configured not to be started in the state of FIG. 245 (b), but may be configured to be started. Further, the game control by the main control unit 300 may be started before the state shown in FIGS. 245 (c) to 245 (f) is reached. Further, the game control by the main control unit 300 may be started in the state shown in FIG. 245 (f).

  In addition, it may be configured such that the time setting, the power saving mode, and the like can be set by the store clerk while the liquid crystal loading display is displayed, and a screen display for setting by the store clerk may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, after the liquid crystal loading display is finished, it may be configured such that the time setting, the power saving mode, etc. can be set by the store clerk, and a screen display for setting by the store clerk may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the game control of the main control unit 300 is executed while the setting screen is displayed by the store clerk after the liquid crystal loading display is ended, but the game control is not executed until the screen display for setting is ended by the store clerk. May be.

  In addition, a period in which the returning display can be displayed may be started after the liquid crystal loading display is completed, but may overlap with a period in which the display of the screen display for setting by the store clerk is displayed. For example, if the period during which the display of the screen display for setting by the store clerk ends first and the period during which the display during return can be displayed continues, the screen display for setting by the store clerk is not displayed. The return indication may be displayed immediately after (or immediately after), but the return indication may not be displayed. In addition, when the period during which the display during return can be displayed ends and the screen display for setting by the store clerk ends after that, the display during return is displayed after the screen display for setting is hidden (immediately after). Alternatively, the normal display may be displayed. Alternatively, the display during restoration may be displayed once, and the normal display may be displayed after the return display is hidden (immediately after). In these cases, the screen display for setting by the store clerk may be included in the liquid crystal loading display, but may not be included.

  Further, the display during return may be displayed only when the return start process is performed by the main control unit 300 and may not be displayed when the initial start process is performed. In such a case, a display during return may be displayed.

<Various displays after power-on / Specific example 2>
Next, a specific example 2 of various displays after power-on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 of various displays after power-on in time series.

  FIG. 246 (a) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 during a normal game (in this example, during a reach effect). Further, FIG. 246 (b) that follows shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is shut off due to a power failure or the like. In this state, the main control unit 300 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), performs the power interruption process, and performs the first sub-control. The power supply to the unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit is stopped, and the display control for the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed.

  Next, FIG. 246 (c) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the power to the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. This state is a state in which an activation signal is input to the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit, and initialization processing by the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit is started. In addition, the main control unit 300 starts the main control unit main loop process and the main control unit timer interrupt process after performing the recovery start process in the main control unit power-on process, and the main control unit timer interrupt process. In step S504, it is determined that the interrupt function is being limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated), and the interrupt function is limited.

  The subsequent FIGS. 246 (d) to (g) are in the same state as FIGS. 245 (c) to (f), and detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, FIG. 246 (d) to FIG. In (f), a liquid crystal loading display (in this example, a character display of “Now Loading”) is performed, and in FIG. 246 (g), a return display (in this example, a character display of “in preparation”) is performed. .

  FIG. 246 (h) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the liquid crystal control unit displays during return, and FIG. 246 (i) is a normal display (in this example, the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed). The state of the decorative symbol display device 208 performing the variable display is shown.

  In the state shown in FIG. 246 (i), the first sub-control unit 400 receives the special figure change stop command from the main control part 300 at the timing shown in FIG. Received state. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the next special figure change start command transmits a display end command during return to the liquid crystal control unit, and the liquid crystal control unit that has received the display end command during return erases the display during return. The VDP command for displaying the normal display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is transmitted to the VDP 434.

<Variations of various displays after power on / LCD loading display>
Next, a modified example of the liquid crystal loading display will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. 247 is a diagram showing Modification Example 1 of the liquid crystal loading display in time series, and FIG. 248 is a diagram showing Modification Example 2 of the liquid crystal loading display in time series.

  In the example shown in FIG. 247, the liquid crystal loading display shown in FIGS. 247 (d) ′ to (f) ′ is applied instead of the liquid crystal loading display shown in FIGS. 246 (d) to (f). In this liquid crystal loading display, the start time of the liquid crystal loading process is 0%, the completion time of the liquid crystal loading process is 100%, and the progress of the liquid crystal loading process can be expressed as a percentage (%). In this example, the liquid crystal controller completes the liquid crystal loading process at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (e) ′, and displays “Now Loading 100%” indicating that the liquid crystal loading process is completed. However, until the return display start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400 and the return display is started, the liquid crystal loading display of “Now Loading 100%” is displayed as shown in FIG. 247 (f) ′. continuing.

  The progress of the liquid crystal loading process and the percentage display of the liquid crystal loading display may correspond to each other. For example, continuous display increasing from 1% to 0% to 100%, 0%, 10% ... Stepwise display that increases by 10%, such as 90% and 100%, may be displayed. Further, the progress of the liquid crystal loading process and the display of the liquid crystal loading display do not necessarily coincide with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, the liquid crystal loading display shown in FIGS. 248 (d) ′ to (f) ′ is applied instead of the liquid crystal loading display shown in FIGS. 246 (d) to (f). To do. This liquid crystal loading display can be used for explanation display (tutorial display) regarding various settings of the gaming table. In this example, as the explanation display, among the plurality of DIP switches of the setting operation unit 195, a volume setting mode is provided. The DIP switch setting method for switching (power saving mode) is illustrated, and a display suggesting the timing for switching (in this example, “Please perform the operation when the power is turned off” is displayed) .

  In this way, display not related to the liquid crystal loading process may be performed during the liquid crystal loading display. Not only the explanation display but also the current time, the setting status of the second output setting switch 194 (display at 0 to F, display of the initial value of the user volume value of volume and brightness), operation of the setting operation unit 195 The situation (i.e. island simultaneous effects and power saving mode setting situation) may be displayed.

  As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 248 includes the display control unit (for example, the liquid crystal control unit illustrated in FIG. 244) and the display unit (for example, illustrated in FIG. 245). The display control means is a means capable of at least controlling the display means, and the display control means is turned on when power is turned on. Means for starting power-on control (for example, liquid crystal loading processing for transferring image data such as still images and moving images, which are stored in a fixed manner in a ROM or the like in advance) to a working storage area (for example, a RAM), The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display that is displayed while the power-on control is being executed (hereinafter referred to as “the power-on control”). For example, the liquid crystal loading display shown in FIG. 244 and FIGS. 245 (c) to 245 (e)), and the display means is at least first after the power-on control by the display control means is started. It is means for displaying at least the power-on display until four times (for example, time indicated by reference numeral T11 in FIG. 244) have passed, and the display means is provided when the first non-display condition is satisfied. The power-on display is a means for at least hiding, and the requirement that the first non-display condition is satisfied is that the power-on control ends and the fourth time from the start of the power-on control. It is a requirement characterized by including that elapses. The “requirements including A and B” in this specification may be “requirements for (and only) A and B”.

  According to such a game machine, since the power-on display is not displayed before the fourth time, if it is displayed before the fourth time, an abnormality of the display control means may have occurred. There is a case where it is easy for a store clerk or the like to notice that there is a characteristic, and the maintainability can be improved.

  The time corresponding to the “Mth (M is a positive number) time” according to the present invention is the same as the time corresponding to the “Nth (N is a positive integer) time” according to another invention. For example, the time corresponding to the fourth time and the first time may be 10 seconds after the power is turned on. In addition, it has time measuring means (hereinafter referred to as “third time measuring means”), and the third time measuring means starts counting on condition that the power is turned on. The power-on display by the display unit may be hidden on the condition that the fourth time has elapsed since the start.

  Further, the display means is configured to display the first power-on control after the power-on control is started, even if the power-on control is terminated before the fourth time has elapsed since the power-on control was started. The power-on display is a means for continuously displaying the power-on display until the fourth time elapses. The power-on display is from the start to the end of the power-on control and from the start of the power-on control to the fourth time. The display may be continuously displayed until the time elapses.

  With this configuration, the power-on display is displayed until the fourth time has elapsed even after the power-on control is completed, so the power-on display is not displayed before the fourth time. It is possible to determine whether or not an abnormality of the display control means has occurred by checking whether or not a power-on display is displayed before the fourth time by a store clerk of the amusement store, etc. May be improved. Note that, when the fourth time elapses before the power-on control is finished, the power-on display may be hidden when the power-on control is finished.

  Further, the power-on control is a control that ends before the fourth time elapses, and the power-on display indicates the progress status of the power-on control from the start to the end of the power-on control. A corresponding progress display (for example, a display showing the progress of the liquid crystal loading process shown in FIG. 247) is displayed, and the power-on display is from the end of the power-on control until the fourth time elapses. The progress display at the end of the power-on control may be continuously displayed.

  With such a configuration, the progress of the power-on control can be confirmed, and the maintainability may be improved.

  Further, it includes a fourth symbol display means (for example, the respective fourth symbol display areas 208e to 208g shown in FIGS. 234 and 245), and the fourth symbol display means has a variation in symbols (for example, a variation in special symbols). The fourth symbol display unit may start the variation display of the fourth symbol by being started, and the fourth symbol display unit may change the symbol during the period when the power-on display is displayed by the display unit. When is started, means for not starting the variable display of the fourth symbol may be used.

  With such a configuration, since the fourth symbol variation display is not displayed during the power-on display, the fourth symbol may be displayed after the stable control state is reached. The fourth symbol display means is a display means, and the fourth symbol may be displayed on a part of the display means. The fourth symbol display means may be a second display means provided separately from the first display means. In addition, during the power-on display, the display different from the fourth symbol variation display (for example, error display, decorative symbol display, presentation display, user setting display, demo display, etc.) is not displayed. You may make it display.

  In addition, when the display condition of the fourth symbol display is satisfied, the variation display of the fourth symbol display is displayed, and the requirement that the display condition of the fourth symbol display is satisfied is a period in which the power-on display is not displayed. It is a requirement that includes that. In addition, “... a means for not starting the variation display of the fourth symbol” means that “the fourth symbol display means is the fourth symbol only when the power-on display is not displayed by the display means. It is possible to start (displayable) the fluctuation display (or stop display).

  The display means can display at least a display for notifying that an error has occurred (hereinafter referred to as “error display”), and the display means satisfies the first error display display condition. If the first error display display condition is satisfied before the power-on control is completed, the display means displays the error display. It may be a means for displaying the error display after completion.

  With such a configuration, an error is displayed after the power-on control by the display control means is completed, so if there is an abnormality in the display control means, an error display is not displayed, so that maintainability may be improved. is there.

  The error display may be displayed during power-on control, or the error display may not be displayed during power-on display. Further, an error display may be displayed during the power-on display, or an error display may be displayed after the power-on control is finished and during the period when the power-on display is displayed on the display means. Further, the error display may not be displayed during the period when the power-on display is displayed on the display means after the power-on control is finished.

  Further, it includes an effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the display means displays the return indication (for example, the return indication shown in FIG. 244 or FIG. 245 (f)) during the period. When the second display condition is satisfied, the display means is a means for displaying the return display when the second display condition is satisfied, and the second display condition is satisfied. One of the requirements may be a requirement including that the power-on display is not displayed. With such a configuration, it may be easy to confirm that the return control by the effect control means is being executed, and the store clerk and the player may be relieved.

  It should be noted that one of the requirements (hereinafter referred to as “first requirement”) that satisfies the display display condition during recovery (hereinafter referred to as “first return display display condition”) is that the design is changing. It may be a requirement to include. Further, there may be a requirement (hereinafter referred to as “third requirement”) different from the first requirement that the first display indication condition during return is satisfied. Further, the requirement for satisfying the first return display display condition may be 3 or more, or only the first requirement and the third requirement. Further, the first display display condition during return may be satisfied when only the first requirement is satisfied. Here, the third requirement may be that the presentation control means receives the power-on command.

  In addition, one of the requirements (hereinafter referred to as “second requirement”) for satisfying the display display condition during recovery (hereinafter referred to as “second display indication condition during recovery”) includes a big hit. It may be a requirement. Note that what is described in the first display display condition during return is applicable. Here, the requirement different from the second requirement in which the second display indication condition during return is satisfied may be a fourth requirement different from the third requirement.

  Further, the first display display condition during return and the second display display condition during return may be different conditions. Further, the display display condition during return may be a condition that is satisfied when a plurality of requirements including the first requirement and the second requirement are satisfied. Note that the plurality of requirements may indicate only the two requirements of the first requirement and the second requirement, and the condition may be satisfied when three or more requirements including the two requirements are satisfied.

  In addition, during the period when the return indication is displayed on the display means, the fourth symbol variation display may not be displayed even if the symbol variation starts, but the fourth symbol variation display is displayed. You may make it do. In addition, during the period when the return indication is displayed on the display means, the fourth symbol variation display may not be displayed even if the symbol variation starts, but the fourth symbol variation display is displayed. You may make it do.

  Further, even if the error display display condition is satisfied during the period in which the return indication is displayed, the error display may not be displayed on the display unit, and the error display may be displayed after the return indication is completed. . Further, an error display may be displayed if the error display display condition is satisfied even during the period during which the return display is displayed.

  Further, one or a plurality of hitting indications may be displayed during the return display. Further, the effect control means may be a means composed of an effect control board and a display control board. Further, the effect control means may be control means including display control means. The fourth symbol display means is a means controlled by the effect control means, but may be a means controlled by the main control means or a means controlled by the display control means.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a normal display (for example, a normal display shown in FIGS. 244 and 245 (g)), and the normal display includes the power-on display and the returning display. The display during return is a display indicating that the display is not returned to the normal display, and the display means displays the second display condition during display of the display during return. When the above is established, the display during restoration may be hidden, and the normal display may be started.

  With such a configuration, it may be easy to confirm that the return control by the effect control means has been completed, and the store clerk or player may be relieved in some cases. Note that the normal display is a display according to the gaming state (for example, a decorative symbol variation display when the symbol variation starts, a big winning display when the big hit is started, and a decorative symbol stop when the symbol is stopped. Display (demo display)).

  Further, the effect control means may be means capable of transmitting at least a command to the display control means, and the display control means may be means capable of transmitting at least a command to the effect control means. With such a configuration, it may be easy to confirm that the return control by the effect control means has been completed, and the store clerk or player may be relieved in some cases. In addition, it may be possible to easily confirm the communication state between the effect control means and the display control means.

  Further, the power-on display may be a display including an explanation display for a store clerk (for example, an explanation display shown in FIG. 248). With this configuration, the power-on display is not displayed until the fourth time has elapsed even after the power-on control is completed. May be improved. Note that the explanation display to the store clerk refers to a description set by the store clerk (for example, a second output setting switch 194 (volume knob on the store clerk side) or a setting operation unit 195 (DIP switch)). May be.

<Notification of how to hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 249 and FIG. 250, the hitting notification performed by the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Control of how to hit>
FIG. 249 is a time chart illustrating an example of a control flow of how-to notification. In the timing indicated by reference numeral t20 in FIG. 249, the liquid crystal control unit starts the liquid crystal loading process, and transmits a VDP command for displaying the liquid crystal loading display on the decorative symbol display device 208 to the VDP 434, whereby the decorative symbol is displayed. Liquid crystal loading display is performed using the display device 208.

  Further, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 enters the activated state when shifting to the user mode without waiting for the return command from the liquid crystal control unit to be received, and the main control unit 300 performs the first sub-control. Without waiting for the unit 400 to enter the activated state, the transition to the user mode is made, and when the fixed time (the time indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 239) elapses after the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt function limitation is canceled. The game control is started.

  The main control unit 300 then supplies power to the first sub-control unit 400 when the start-waiting counter becomes 0 in the sub-control start wait wait process (step S519) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. After transmitting a subcommand (power-on command) indicating that it has been inserted, a subcommand (game state command) indicating the current gaming state, or a subcommand (launching position command) for notifying the firing position of the ball launching handle 134 And so on.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 notifies the liquid crystal control unit based on the information on the gaming state command and the launch position command received from the main control unit 300 (right-handed display, left-handed warning display, Alternatively, a command for notifying how to hit is transmitted.

  FIG. 250 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between a gaming state and a hitting notification. In FIG. 250, items indicated by “◯” indicate that corresponding hitting notification is performed when the corresponding game state is entered. For example, the gaming state included in the gaming state command received from the main control unit 300 is a short-time state (special high probability normal figure low probability state), a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or a big hit state In this case, since the item corresponding to the right-handed display is “◯”, a command for notifying the right-handed display is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit.

  In addition, when the gaming state included in the gaming state command received from the main control unit 300 is when the power is turned on (other than the normal state), the items corresponding to the right-handed display and the left-handed warning display are “◯”. Then, a direction notification command for instructing right-handed display and left-handed warning display is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. In addition, since the item corresponding to the right-handed warning display is “x”, a hitting notification command is not transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit (right-handed warning display is not performed). A right-handed warning display may be displayed when the power is turned on (other than the normal state).

  In addition, when the gaming state included in the gaming state command received from the main control unit 300 is a normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) or when the power is turned on (normal state), a right-handed display or left-handed display is performed. Since the item corresponding to the warning display is “x”, the hitting notification command is not transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit (right-handed display and left-handed warning display are not performed). The same applies to other items indicated by “x”.

  In addition, when the gaming state included in the gaming state command received from the main control unit 300 is a normal state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state), the item corresponding to the right-handed warning display is “Δ”. Therefore, it is determined whether or not a hitting method suitable for the gaming state is performed based on the information of the launch position command. When it is determined that the player is not hit in a suitable manner for the gaming state (for example, in a gaming state in which left-handed aiming at the left side of the gaming board 200 is suitable as in a normal game, the front view of the gaming board 200 (When a winning ball is detected at the winning entrance or starting port located on the right side), a right-handed warning display (a warning display to stop right-handing) is directed toward the LCD control unit. Send a command.

  In addition, the gaming state included in the gaming state command received from the main control unit 300 is a short-time state (special high probability normal figure low probability state), a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), or a big hit state In this case, since the item corresponding to the left strike warning display is “Δ”, it is determined whether or not a strike suitable for the gaming state is made based on the information of the firing position command. Then, when it is determined that a hitting method suitable for the gaming state has not been made (for example, a gaming state in which a right strike aiming at the right side of the gaming board 200 is suitable, such as a short-time state, a probability variation state, or a big hit state. , A left-handed warning display (a warning is given to stop the left-handed strike) toward the liquid crystal control unit in the case of entering a ball at the winning opening or the starting opening arranged on the left side of the game board 200 when viewed from the front. A hitting notification command instructing (display) is transmitted.

  Returning to FIG. 249, at the timing indicated by reference numeral t <b> 21, the liquid crystal control unit completes the liquid crystal loading process and transmits a VDP command for displaying the returning display on the decorative symbol display device 208 to the VDP 434. The decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display during return. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit receives, from the first sub-control unit 400, a VDP command for displaying the right-handed display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the VDP 434 by receiving a right-handed notification command for instructing right-handed display. By transmitting to the right, the right-handed display (for example, see FIG. 251 (g)) is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, the liquid crystal control unit receives a VDP command for causing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display a left-handed warning display when receiving a left-handed warning notification command for instructing a left-handed warning display from the first sub-control unit 400. By transmitting to the VDP 434, a left-handed warning display (for example, see FIG. 251 (g)) is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 gives an example of instructing the liquid crystal control unit of the type of hitting notification according to the game state and the launch position, but the game state and the launch position are indicated to the liquid crystal control unit. The information may be transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit may be configured to determine the type of hitting notification according to the gaming state and the launch position.

  In this example, there was only one left-handed display (right-handed warning display). However, there may be multiple displays displayed when left-handed. You may make it perform how to hit. Also, the right-handed display (right-handed display, left-handed warning display) is not displayed even when the power is turned on, even if the return is being displayed when the initial activation process is performed by the main control unit 300. It may be displayed only when the return activation process is performed.

  In addition, only the right-handed display is always displayed during the display of returning, and a right-handed warning display is displayed when it is determined that the right way for the gaming state is not performed. However, it may be configured not to be displayed even if it is determined that the hitting method suitable for the gaming state is not performed.

<Specific example of how to hit>
Next, a specific example of how to make a notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 is a diagram showing a specific example of how-to-notify in time series.

  FIG. 251 (a) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the probability changing state (in this example, during the reach effect). Here, since the gaming state is the probability changing state, the main control unit 300 transmits a gaming state command indicating that the gaming state is the probability changing state to the first sub-control unit 400, and the player A right-handed shot is performed, and a firing position command indicating that the rotation angle of the ball launching handle 134 is a rotation angle suitable for right-handed shot is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a right-hand-notification command for instructing right-handed display to the liquid crystal control unit. As a result, in the upper right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400 Strike display (in this example, a character display of “Right strike →→→”) is performed.

  Next, FIG. 251 (b) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is shut off due to a power failure or the like. In this state, the main control unit 300 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), performs the power interruption process, and performs the first sub-control. The power supply to the unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit is stopped, and the display control for the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed.

  Next, FIG. 251 (c) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. This state is a state in which an activation signal is input to the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit, and initialization processing by the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit is started. In addition, the main control unit 300 starts the main control unit main loop process and the main control unit timer interrupt process after performing the recovery start process in the main control unit power-on process, and the main control unit timer interrupt process. In step S504, it is determined that the interrupt function is being limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated), and the interrupt function is limited.

  The subsequent FIGS. 251 (d) to (f) are in the same state as FIGS. 245 (c) to (e), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted, but FIGS. 251 (d) to (f) are the same. In (f), a liquid crystal loading display (in this example, a character display of “Now Loading”) is performed.

  Next, FIG. 251 (g) to FIG. 251 (h) show the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 that is performing display during return. In this state, the liquid crystal control unit completes the liquid crystal loading process, and transmits a VDP command for displaying the returning display on the decorative symbol display device 208 to the VDP 434, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. For example, the timing indicated by reference numeral t21 in FIG.

  Further, here, since the gaming state is a probability variation state, the main control unit 300 transmits a gaming state command indicating that the gaming state is a certain probability variation state to the first sub control unit 400, and ( A first firing position command indicating that the player is not making a right turn (because the display during return is performed) and that the rotation angle of the ball launching handle 134 is not a rotation angle suitable for a right turn is the first. It is transmitted toward the sub-control unit 400.

  As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits to the liquid crystal control unit a hitting notification command for instructing a right-handed display and a left-handed warning display. In the display area, right-handed display (in this example, “right-handed →→→” character display) is performed, and in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, left-handed warning display (in this example, "Please make a right strike!"

  Next, FIG. 251 (i) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 that performs normal display (in this example, a decorative symbol stop display). In this state, the liquid crystal control unit that has received the returning display end command from the first sub-control unit 400 erases the returning display and displays a normal display on the decorative symbol display device 208 to the VDP 434. For example, the timing indicated by reference numeral t22 in FIG.

  Further, here, since the gaming state is a probability variation state, the main control unit 300 transmits a gaming state command indicating that the gaming state is a certain probability variation state to the first sub control unit 400, and ( A first sub-control of a firing position command indicating that the player is making a right turn and the rotation angle of the ball launching handle 134 is a rotation angle suitable for a right turn (because the display during return has changed to a normal display). It is transmitted toward the part 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command for instructing to erase the left-handed warning display to the liquid crystal control unit and transmits a command for informing the right-handed display. Here, the right-handed display is temporarily deleted.

  Next, FIG. 251 (j) shows a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 that performs normal display (in this example, decorative symbol stop display) and right-handed display. This state is a state in which the liquid crystal control unit transmits a VDP command for displaying a right-handed display on the decorative symbol display device 208 to the VDP 434 when a predetermined time has elapsed after starting the normal display. For example, the timing indicated by reference numeral t23 in FIG.

  In this example, after the right-handed display is temporarily erased at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (i), the right-handed display is displayed again at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (j). With such a configuration, it may be possible to attract the player's attention to the right-handed display as compared to the case where the right-handed display is continued. In a scene where it is not necessary to attract the player's attention, the right-handed display may be continuously displayed without being temporarily deleted.

  As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 251 includes the effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) and the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). ), And the display means displays a first right-handed display (for example, FIG. 249, FIG. 251 (g), (h) indicating that the launch position of the game ball is right-handed. ) Is a means capable of displaying at least a left-handed warning display), and the display means displays a second right-handed display (for example, FIG. 249 or FIG. g), a right-handed display shown in (h)), which can display at least, and the display means is a display during return (for example, a display during return shown in FIGS. 249, 251 (g), (h)) (For example, reference numeral 249 in FIG. 249) 22), the first right-handed display may be displayed, and the display means may display the second right-handed display in the period during which the returning display is displayed. The first right-handed display is different from the second right-handed display, and the display means is provided that the firing position corresponding to the returned gaming state is right-handed. Furthermore, in the period during which the display during return is displayed, the first right-handed display and the second right-handed display can be displayed.

  According to such a game machine, it may be possible to prevent the player from hitting other than right-handed during the period in which the returning display is displayed. Moreover, since it is easy to understand that the returned gaming state is right-handed, the player may be relieved in some cases.

  The display means is composed of a first display means and a second display means, and is a first display means (for example, a display means controlled by main control or a display means controlled by effect control means). ) Displays one of the first right-handed display and the second right-handed display, and the second display means (for example, the display means controlled by the effect control means) displays the first right-handed display and the second right-handed display. The other of the two right-handed displays may be displayed.

  The display means may be a means for displaying at least one of the first right-handed display and the second right-handed display in a state before power interruption.

  With such a configuration, it is easy to understand that the returned gaming state is right-handed, so the player may be relieved. In addition, it may be a means for displaying only one of the first right-handed display and the second right-handed display (one is displayed and the other is not displayed) in a state before power interruption.

  In addition, the display means may display a display according to a game state (hereinafter referred to as “normal display”) after the return display is not displayed when a period for displaying the return display by the effect control means ends. For example, it is means for displaying the normal display shown in Fig. 249, Fig. 251 (i), (j), and the return indication (for example, the return shown in Fig. 249, Fig. 251 (g), (h)). Middle display) is a display indicating that the normal display is not restored, and the display means displays the first right-handed display and the second right-hand display when the normal display is displayed. It may be a means for displaying at least one of the hit displays (for example, the right hit display shown in FIGS. 249 and 251 (j)).

  With such a configuration, it can be easily understood that the return control has been normally completed, and the player may be relieved. The display means is means for displaying a display according to the gaming state after the return display is not displayed after the return control by the effect control means is completed, and the display means When the normal display is displayed, the display unit may display only one of the first right-handed display and the second right-handed display.

  Further, the display means is an area that is not detected unless it is a launch position (hereinafter referred to as “second launch position”) different from the launch position (hereinafter referred to as “first launch position”) according to the gaming state. (In the case of right-handed hitting, the area on the left side of the front view on the game board surface. In the case of left-handed hitting, the area on the right side of the front view in the front view) The right-handed display (for example, the left-handed warning display shown in FIGS. 249, 251 (g), and (h)) is displayed at least, and the display means has the firing position in the gaming state as the first position. Means for displaying at least the second right-handed display (for example, the right-handed display shown in FIGS. 249, 251 (g), and (h)) when the position is the launch position; The condition for displaying the right-handed display for Showing return is displayed, and the firing position may be said a first firing position in accordance with the gaming state.

  With such a configuration, each hitting notification display is displayed at different timings at the end of the return control, so that the player can easily recognize that the display of the return indication is in a special state, and launch It may be possible to prompt confirmation of the position.

  The second right-handed display is a display that is always displayed when in the first launch position, and the first right-handed display is displayed when not in the first launch position. There may be a display in some cases. In addition, during the period when the display during return is displayed, when the launch position corresponding to the gaming state is the first launch position, the first hitting notification display is always displayed on the display means. Even during the period when is displayed, the first striking notification display may be displayed only when it is detected that a game ball has been launched at the second launch position.

  In addition, only one of the first right-handed display and the second right-handed display may be displayed during the period in which the returning display is displayed. In addition, during the period when the return indication is displayed, either the first right-handed display or the second right-handed display is always displayed, and the first right-handed display or the second right-handed display is displayed. The other display may be displayed or not displayed. Further, one display may be displayed without fail, and the other display may not be displayed. Further, it may be configured such that both the first right-handed display and the second right-handed display are always displayed during the period in which the display during return is displayed.

  Moreover, the main control means (for example, the main control unit 300) is provided, and the main control means sends a third command (for example, a left-handed state indicating a left-handed state) to the effect control means. Position command), and the main control means can transmit a fourth command (for example, a game state command indicating a normal game) of the plurality of types of commands to the effect control means. And the display means is means for displaying the first right-handed display when the effect control means receives the third command, and the display means is characterized in that the effect control means When the fourth command is received, the second right-handed display may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, the hitting notification display is displayed by a different command from the main control, so even if one command cannot be received at the time of return, the hitting notification is received if the other command is received. Since the display is displayed, it may be possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the launch position.

  The main control means can start at least game control (for example, main control unit main loop processing or main control unit timer interrupt processing) when an activation signal (for example, system reset signal) is input. The main control means is a control state when the low voltage signal is output when the start signal is input after the low voltage signal is input (hereinafter referred to as “pre-return control state”). ), And the main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command relating to a gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “gaming state command”) of the plurality of types of commands to the effect control means. The main control means is capable of transmitting a command related to the firing position (hereinafter referred to as “launch position command”) among the plurality of types of commands to the effect control means. And the gaming state command is a command including a command indicating a short-time state (hereinafter referred to as “first gaming state command”), and the gaming state command is a command indicating a jackpot state. (Hereinafter referred to as a “second gaming state command”), and the launch position command has a launch position on the right when the jackpot state or the time-short state is in one of the states. The display means is one of the first game state command and the second game state command. The display means is a command indicating that it is a strike (hereinafter referred to as “right-handed command”). Is displayed when the display control means receives the right-handed command. It may be a means for displaying the first right-handed display.

  With such a configuration, the hitting notification display is displayed by a different command from the main control, so even if one command cannot be received at the time of return, the hitting notification is received if the other command is received. Since the display is displayed, it may be possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the launch position.

  Note that a right-handed command may be transmitted even in the other state of the big hit state and the short time state. Further, when the gaming state is not the short-time state or the big hit state, a third gaming state command different from the first gaming state command and the second gaming state command may be transmitted. Further, when the launch position is not right-handed, a fire position command (for example, a left-handed command or a non-right-handed command) indicating that it is not right-handed may be transmitted.

  Also, the first right-handed display and the second right-handed display before power interruption may be different from the first right-handed display and the second right-handed display after power recovery, or the same display. It may be.

<Resume processing of island simultaneous production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the island simultaneous production resumption process will be described. FIG. 252 is a time chart showing an example of a flow until the game machines C and D start the island simultaneous performance.

  In the gaming tables C and D according to this example, each of the first sub-control units 400 includes the above-described time measuring means, and “is that the fifth time has elapsed since the time measurement by the time measuring means has started” This is a condition for starting production. For this reason, the game machines C and D simultaneously start the island simultaneous performance when the fifth time (in this example, the time indicated by T31 in FIG. 252) has elapsed from the timing indicated by reference t31 in FIG. In FIG. 252, the island simultaneous production is continued over the production time indicated by the symbol T32. Note that the gaming table C may be any of the above gaming tables A and B, and the gaming table D may be any of the above gaming tables A and B.

  FIG. 253 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the effect data constituting the island simultaneous effect, and FIG. 253 (b) is a time chart showing an example of the resumption process of the island simultaneous effect.

  As shown in FIG. 253 (a), the island simultaneous production according to this example is composed of four production data of data 1 to data 4, production using data 1 → production using data 2 → data. By performing effects in the order of effects using 3 → effects using data 4, island simultaneous effects are executed. Needless to say, the number of effect data constituting the island simultaneous effect is not limited to four.

  In FIG. 253 (b), the timing indicated by reference numeral t32 is a state in which the game machines C and D have simultaneously started an island effect. The gaming table D performs effects in the order of an effect using data 1 → an effect using data 2 → an effect using data 3 → an effect using data 4 over the effect time indicated by reference numeral T <b> 32. The island simultaneous production is executed. That is, it can be said that the island simultaneous effect according to this example is an effect that ends when the first effect period (T32) elapses after the island simultaneous effect starts.

  On the other hand, the game table C is in the middle of performing the presentation using the data 2, and after the power supply to the first sub-control unit 400 is temporarily cut off, the power is turned on again, and the start signal Is entered. The first sub-control unit 400 of the gaming machine C that has input the activation signal first executes the initialization process, then shifts to the user mode (mode in which the user program is executed), and executes the first sub-control unit main process. To start.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has started the main process of the first sub-control unit processes the return command received from the liquid crystal control unit, the process of transmitting a display start command during return and a display end command during return to the liquid crystal control unit, etc. I do. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit performs a standby display (for example, FIGS. 254 (g) and (g) in FIG. 254) until the production start timing of the effect using the data 3 comes after the power-on display including the liquid crystal loading display and the returning display. h)).

  FIG. 253 (c) is a diagram showing an example of island simultaneous production in time series. The left diagram in FIG. 253 (c) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the start of the simultaneous island effect. For example, the timing indicated by the symbol t32 in FIG. 253 (b) corresponds.

  In this state, the gaming table C performs a display relating to the game (in this example, a special figure or decorative symbol change display or a special figure change game hold display) as the first type display, and the second type display. As the type of display, a display related to the island simultaneous effect (in this example, an effect using the data 1 of the island simultaneous effect) is performed. On the other hand, the gaming table D displays a display relating to the game (in this example, a stop display of decorative symbols) as the first type of display, and a display related to island simultaneous effects (in this example) as the second type of display. , Production using data 1 of the island simultaneous production). In this state, the second type of display on the gaming table C (display related to the island simultaneous effect) and the second type of display on the gaming table D (display related to the island simultaneous effect) both use the data 1 of the island simultaneous effect. It was a production that was consistent.

  The subsequent central diagram of FIG. 253 (c) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing when the power is turned on in the gaming table C. For example, the timing indicated by the symbol t35 in FIG. 253 (b). Is applicable.

  In this state, the gaming table C performs the liquid crystal loading display indicating that the liquid crystal loading process is being executed as the first type display (display related to the game), but the second type display (simultaneous islands). (Display related to production) is not performed. On the other hand, the gaming table D displays a display relating to the game (in this example, a stop display of decorative symbols) as the first type of display, and a display related to island simultaneous effects (in this example) as the second type of display. , Production using data 2 of the island simultaneous production). In this state, the second type of display on the gaming table C (display related to the island simultaneous effect) and the second type of display on the gaming table D (display related to the island simultaneous effect) do not match.

  The subsequent right diagram in FIG. 253 (c) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing when the island simultaneous performance is resumed on the gaming table C. For example, the timing shown by the symbol t36 in FIG. 253 (b). Is applicable.

  In this state, the gaming table C performs a display relating to the game (in this example, a special figure or decorative symbol change display or a special figure change game hold display) as the first type display, and the second type display. As the type of display, display related to the island simultaneous effect (in this example, an effect using the data 3 of the island simultaneous effect) is performed. On the other hand, the gaming table D displays a display relating to the game (in this example, a stop display of decorative symbols) as the first type of display, and a display related to island simultaneous effects (in this example) as the second type of display. , Production using data 3 of the island simultaneous production). In this state, the second type of display on the gaming table C (display related to the island simultaneous effect) and the second type of display on the gaming table D (display related to the island simultaneous effect) both use the data 3 of the island simultaneous effect. It was a production that was consistent.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, even when the power is shut off / returned in the middle of the island simultaneous performance, it is possible to re-synchronize a plurality of game tables in the island simultaneous production, and the effect of the island simultaneous production is achieved. Can be sustained.

<Resume processing for island production / specific example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 254, a specific example of the restart process of the island simultaneous production will be described. FIG. 254 is a diagram showing, in time series, a specific example of the restart processing of the island simultaneous performance.

  FIG. 254 (a) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the start of the simultaneous island effect. For example, the timing indicated by the symbol t32 in FIG. 253 (b) corresponds. In this state, the gaming table displays the game as a first type of display (in this example, a special figure or decorative symbol change display or a special figure change game hold display) and a second type display. As for the display, display relating to the island simultaneous effect (in this example, an effect using the data 1 of the island simultaneous effect) is performed. Here, the display using the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output by the speaker 120 are started simultaneously by starting the effect using the data 1 of the island simultaneous effect.

  The subsequent FIG. 254 (b) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 that is executing the simultaneous island effect, and the subsequent FIG. 254 (c) shows a temporary supply of power to the first sub-control unit 400. It shows a blocked state. Here, the display by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output by the speaker 120 are interrupted due to the interruption of the power supply.

  Next, FIG. 254 (d) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing when the power is turned on. For example, the timing indicated by reference numeral t35 in FIG. 253 (b) corresponds to this state. In this state, the game table performs a liquid crystal loading display indicating that the liquid crystal loading process is being executed as the first type display (display related to the game), but the second type display (island simultaneous effect) Display) is not performed.

  Next, FIG. 254 (e) to FIG. 5 (f) show the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 that is performing a return display (in this example, the character display “preparing”), and FIG. 254 ( (g) to (h) in FIG. 5 show states of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the liquid crystal control unit performs standby display (in this example, the decorative symbol variation display).

  Next, FIG. 254 (i) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing when the island simultaneous effect is resumed on the game machine. For example, the timing indicated by reference numeral t36 in FIG. 253 (b) corresponds to this state.

  In this state, the gaming table displays the game as a first type of display (in this example, a special figure or decorative symbol change display or a special figure change game hold display) and a second type display. As the display, display regarding the island simultaneous effect (in this example, an effect using the data 3 of the island simultaneous effect) is performed. Here, the display using the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound output by the speaker 120 are resumed simultaneously by starting an effect using the data 3 of the island simultaneous effect.

  Next, FIG. 254 (j) shows the state of the decoration diagram display device 208 at the timing just before the end of the island simultaneous performance on the game table. For example, in FIG. 252 and FIG. 253 (b), immediately before the symbol t33 ( This corresponds to the timing of T33 seconds (for example, 5 seconds before) when the effect using the data 4 ends. The decoration diagram display device 208 displays the end effect of the island simultaneous effect (in this example, the character display “Princess LIVE, look forward to next time!”).

  In this state, the gaming table displays the game as a first type of display (in this example, a special figure or decorative symbol change display or a special figure change game hold display) and a second type display. As the display, display regarding the island simultaneous effect (in this example, an effect using the data 4 of the island simultaneous effect) is performed. In this example, the end of the island simultaneous production (for example, symbol stop, start of next variation, end of jackpot, end of current round during jackpot, at the timing indicated by reference numeral t33 in FIGS. 252 and 253 (b). When the next round of big hit, etc.) has arrived, the island simultaneous production ends. However, when the end of the island simultaneous production has not arrived, the time indicated by reference numeral T33 has elapsed. Until the end of the island simultaneous production arrives, the end of the island simultaneous production is continuously displayed.

  As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254 includes display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254) and time measuring means (for example, control means). A hardware timer provided in the CPU, a software timer realized by a user program of the control means, an RTC (real time clock), etc., an effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and a display control means (for example, liquid crystal) The display means is a display relating to a game among the plurality of types of display (hereinafter referred to as “first type display”), for example, in FIG. 253 (c). Display of the decorative pattern to be displayed), and the display means is a display (hereinafter referred to as “second type of display” regarding the island simultaneous effect among the plurality of types of display). For example, the game table is capable of displaying the island simultaneous performance data 2 shown in FIG. 253 (c), and the game stand can execute the island simultaneous performance alone. The condition that the production control means starts the island simultaneous production is that a fifth time (for example, a time indicated by reference numeral T31 in FIG. 252) has elapsed since the time measurement by the time measurement means was started, The effect control means is means for interrupting the island simultaneous effect when the display control means is in a low voltage state during the period in which the island simultaneous effect is being executed, and the display control means The control means is a means for executing the return control after the power is turned on again from the low voltage state, and the display control means displays the in-return display (for example, 254 (e) and (f) display during return), and the display control means performs the return by the display means when the period for displaying the return display is over. It is a means to hide the display, and after the island simultaneous production is resumed, the display of the second type is displayed on the display means, and the display during return is hidden, The gaming machine is characterized in that the island simultaneous performance resumes when an opportunity to resume the island simultaneous performance (hereinafter referred to as “resume opportunity”) arrives.

  According to such a game machine, even if the display control means is in a low voltage state, the display related to the island simultaneous production is resumed from the middle, so that the relation with another game machine is prevented from being lost, and the production effect is improved. There are cases where it can be increased.

  The time measuring means may be means for measuring time when power is supplied, or may be means provided in the effect control means. Further, even when the display control means is in a low voltage state, the time keeping by the time keeping means may be continued. In this case, the timing at which the island simultaneous effect is resumed is different from the timing at which the island simultaneous effect is interrupted, but may be restarted from the same timing as the timing at which the island simultaneous effect is interrupted. Further, when the display control means is in a low voltage state, the time counting by the time measuring means may be interrupted. In this case, the resuming timing may be a timing at which the island simultaneous performance is interrupted, but the island simultaneous performance may be started from the beginning. Further, “when the simultaneous production resumption opportunity arrives” may indicate “when the simultaneous production resumption timing arrives as the simultaneous production resumption opportunity”.

  Further, the island simultaneous performance is an effect related to a game table different from the game table, and the display control means displays the display according to the game state after the display during return is hidden. (Hereinafter referred to as “normal display”, for example, the normal display shown in FIG. 254 (i)), and the returning display is a display indicating that the display has not returned to the normal display. The display control means may be means for displaying the first type of display on the display means when the resumption opportunity has not arrived after the display of the normal display is started. .

  With such a configuration, the display relating to the game is displayed first without waiting until the island simultaneous performance is resumed, so that the player can recognize that the game is ready, and the player can be relieved. You may be able to play games with a sense of consciousness. In addition, after the display of the normal display is started, when it is not an island simultaneous production resumption opportunity, only the first type of display may be displayed on the display means. Different types of display (for example, a display for setting the volume and brightness by the user and a display indicating that the original mode is being set (for example, a level display or a “original mode is being set” display) are displayed) It may be.

  Further, the display control means may be means for continuously displaying the first type of display displayed before the restart opportunity arrives, even after the restart opportunity arrives.

  With such a configuration, since the game-related display is continuously displayed even after the island simultaneous performance is resumed, the player may be relieved. In addition, the display of the first type of display was started before the trigger for resuming the simultaneous production of islands, and after that, when the resumption of the simultaneous production of islands was initiated, the display of the first type was once hidden. You may make it display again. Here, the redisplay of the display of the first type may be started simultaneously with the display of the display of the second type, and one of the display of the first type and the display of the second type is After the display, the other display may be displayed. Further, the relationship between the other and the other may be opposite.

  Moreover, the sound output means (for example, the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 254) is provided, and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting at least a sound related to the island simultaneous effect (hereinafter referred to as “island simultaneous effect sound”). The sound output means is means for interrupting the output of the island simultaneous effect sound when the display control means is in a low voltage state during the period in which the island simultaneous effect is being executed. The means may be means for resuming the output of the island simultaneous performance sound only when the resumption opportunity arrives.

  With such a configuration, the sound related to the island simultaneous effect is not output until the display related to the island simultaneous effect is resumed, so that the effect can be enhanced. Note that the output of the island simultaneous effect sound may be resumed on condition that the normal display is changed from the returning display. Further, the island simultaneous effect sound may be resumed after the second type of display is displayed.

  The light emitting means (for example, various LEDs and various lamps) is a means capable of outputting at least light emission related to the island simultaneous effect (hereinafter referred to as “light emission for island simultaneous effect”), The light emitting means is means for interrupting the output of the island simultaneous effect light emission when the display control means is in a low voltage state during the period in which the island simultaneous effect is being executed. It may be means for resuming the output of the island simultaneous effect light emission only when the resumption opportunity arrives.

  With such a configuration, since the light emission related to the island simultaneous effect is not output until the display related to the island simultaneous effect is resumed, the effect may be enhanced.

  The second type of display includes video display related to a plurality of island simultaneous effects (hereinafter referred to as “multiple island simultaneous effect video displays”), and the display means starts the island simultaneous effects. And means for displaying one of the plurality of island simultaneous effect video displays (hereinafter referred to as “first island simultaneous effect video display”), wherein the display means displays the first island simultaneous effect video display. Is a means that does not display the video display included in the plurality of island simultaneous effect video displays other than the first island simultaneous effect video display, and the first island simultaneous effect video display includes a plurality of video data ( For example, it is composed of data 1 to data 4) shown in FIG. 253 (a), and the restart opportunity is first video data (for example, shown in FIG. 253 (a)) included in the plurality of video data. Day 1) is completed, the second video data (e.g., FIG. 253 (a) included in the plurality of video data may be a trigger for data 2) is started as shown in.

  With such a configuration, one island simultaneous effect display data is divided into a plurality of pieces of data, so that the data resumption opportunity may be increased. In addition, even if the control means does not have a playback function in the middle, the island simultaneous effect display can be reproduced from the middle, so even if the display control means is in a low voltage state, the player can have more opportunities to enjoy the island simultaneous effect from the middle There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the display means is means for not displaying the first type of display during the period in which the display during return is displayed, and the display means is provided during the period during which the display during return is displayed. The second type display may not be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make it easier for the store clerk to know that the display control means is in a low voltage state. In addition, during the period in which the display during return is displayed, another type of display different from the first type display and the second type display may be displayed.

  Further, the island facility on which the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can be installed is an island facility on which a plurality of gaming machines (for example, pachinko machines 100) can be installed, and the gaming machine is a display means (for example, FIG. 254 (decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254) and timing means (for example, a hardware timer provided in the CPU of the control means, a software timer realized by a user program of the control means, an RTC (real time clock), etc.) The island facility is an island facility configured to be able to power on the plurality of game machines by one operation, and the display means in the game machine includes a plurality of types of displays. It is a means capable of displaying a display relating to a game (hereinafter referred to as “first type display”. For example, a decorative symbol stop display shown in FIG. 253 (c)). The display means in the game table is a display related to the island simultaneous effect among the plurality of types of display (hereinafter referred to as “second type display”. For example, the data of the island simultaneous effect shown in FIG. 253 (c)). 2), and the island simultaneous effect in the game stand is an effect related to a game stand different from the game stand, and the effect control in the game stand The condition for the means to start the island simultaneous effect is that the island simultaneous effect start condition is satisfied, and the fifth time after the time measurement by the time measuring means is started (for example, the time indicated by T31 in FIG. 252). And when each of the plurality of game machines executes the island simultaneous effect, the island simultaneous effect executed by each of the plurality of game machines is aligned, and the effect on the game machine is achieved. The control means is means for interrupting the island simultaneous performance when the display control means is in a low voltage state during the period when the island simultaneous performance is being executed. The display control means is a means for executing return control after the power is turned on again from the low voltage state, and the display control means in the game machine is configured to display a display during return. , Display during return. For example, the display control unit in the game machine displays at least the display during return shown in FIGS. 254 (e) and (f). The display means is a means for hiding the display during the return, and the display control means in the game table is the opportunity for the island simultaneous effect to be resumed after the display during the return is hidden ( Hereinafter, it is means for displaying the second type of display on the display means only when the resumption opportunity has arrived. When the resumption opportunity has arrived at the game machine, the display means The island facility may be characterized in that the display of the second type displayed on the screen is aligned with the island simultaneous performance performed by each of the plurality of game machines other than the game machine.

  According to such an island facility, even if the display control means is in a low voltage state, it does not deviate from the island simultaneous effects of other game machines. There are cases where you can not. Moreover, even if there is a game machine in which the display control means is in a low voltage state, it may be possible to prevent the effect of the entire island from being impaired. The “island facility” according to the present invention may be an island facility where only a pachinko machine can be installed, an island facility where only a slot machine can be installed, or an island where both a pachinko machine and a slot machine can be installed. Equipment may be used. Moreover, the island equipment which can install only another kind of game machine may be sufficient, and the island equipment which can install a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and another kind of game machine may be sufficient. Further, the timing means in the game machine may be a means for measuring time when electric power is supplied.

<Volume setting during special production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 255 to FIG. 259, the volume setting during the special production (for example, the island simultaneous production and the demonstration production) will be described.

<Volume setting / volume setting table during special production>
FIG. 255 (a) is an example of a volume setting table showing set values of the volume (sound pressure) of the sound output from the speaker 120. This volume setting table is a table stored in advance in the storage means of the game table (in this example, the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400).

  The first sub-control unit 400 refers to this volume setting table in step S608 (sound control main loop process) of the first sub-control unit main process, and determines the volume based on the set value by the second output setting switch 192. Set the initial value and volume adjustable range.

  Note that the method for measuring the volume of the sound output from the gaming machine is not particularly limited. For example, the measurement is performed by attaching a microphone for measuring the volume to the center of the front of the gaming machine and about 500 mm above the glass surface. May be performed. Alternatively, the measurement may be performed by attaching to a position close to the head of a player having an average height (position of about 700 mm above the seat).

  The volume (sound pressure) is changed by changing the administrator setting value (scale 0 to F) by operating the second output setting switch 194 or by operating the first output setting switch 190 in the setting value adjustment mode. It can be adjusted by changing (scale 0 to 5).

  In this example, “1” to “F” among the settings by the second output setting switch 194 are used for normal business (normal mode), development and sales promotion, and “0” is used for application.

  When the setting is “F” to “D”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 181 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 5. That is, when transitioning to the setting value adjustment mode, the volume setting value is set to the scale 5 (sound pressure 181 dB) as a default. In the figure, the default value of the scale (sound pressure) in each setting is surrounded by a thick frame line. In the settings “F” to “D”, the sound pressure is 0 dB, 72 dB, 144 B, and 152 dB corresponding to the scales 0 to 5 on the volume adjustment screen by the operation of the first output setting switch 190 in the setting value adjustment mode. , 161 dB, and 181 dB.

  When the setting is “C” to “A”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 161 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 4. That is, when transitioning to the setting value adjustment mode, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 4 (sound pressure 161 dB) as a default. In the settings “C” to “A”, the sound pressure is 0 dB, 72 dB, 144 B, and 152 dB corresponding to the scales 0 to 5 on the volume adjustment screen by the operation of the first output setting switch 190 in the setting value adjustment mode. , 161 dB, and 181 dB.

  When the setting is “9” to “7”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 128 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 3. That is, when transitioning to the setting value adjustment mode, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 3 (sound pressure 128 dB) as a default. In addition, when the setting is “9” to “7”, the range of the sound pressure level that can be adjusted on the volume adjustment screen is generally narrower than the setting “A” to “F”. By operating the first output setting switch 190 in the value adjustment mode, the sound pressure levels of 0 dB, 72 dB, 114 dB, 128 dB, 144 dB, and 152 dB can be adjusted corresponding to the scales 0 to 5 on the volume adjustment screen. .

  Note that the appearance of the volume adjustment screen is the same as that of the settings “A” to “F” except for the default number of scales. Therefore, when the setting is “9” to “7”, for example, even if the user setting value of the volume is set to the maximum scale 5 on the volume adjustment screen, the sound pressure level is set when the setting is “A” to “F”. Thus, it is not set to 181 dB, but is set to 152 dB lower than that.

  When the setting is “6”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 114 dB and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 2. That is, when transitioning to the setting value adjustment mode, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 2 (sound pressure 114 dB) as a default. By operating the first output setting switch 190 in the setting value adjustment mode, the sound pressure can be adjusted to 0 dB, 72 dB, 114 B, 128 dB, 144 B, and 152 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 5 on the volume adjustment screen. It is.

  When the setting is “5” to “4”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 91 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 2. That is, when transitioning to the adjustment value setting mode, the volume user setting value is set to the scale 2 (sound pressure 91 dB) as a default. In addition, when the setting is “5” to “4”, the range of the sound pressure level that can be adjusted on the volume adjustment screen is generally narrower than that when the setting is “9” to “6”. By operating the first output setting switch 190 in the value adjustment mode, the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 0 dB, 72 dB, 91 dB, 102 dB, 108 dB, and 114 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 5 on the volume adjustment screen. It is.

  When the setting is “3”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 72 dB, which is lower than the sound pressure 91 dB when the setting is “4”. When the setting is “2” (for development and sales promotion), the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 72 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 1. That is, when transitioning to the setting value adjustment mode, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 1 (72 dB) as a default. By operating the first output setting switch 190 in the setting value adjustment mode, the sound pressure can be adjusted to 0 dB, 72 dB, 91 dB, 102 dB, 108 dB, and 114 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 5 on the volume adjustment screen.

  When the setting is “1”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 12 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 1. That is, when transitioning to the setting value adjustment mode, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 1 (12 dB) as a default. By operating the first output setting switch 190 in the setting value adjustment mode, the sound pressure is adjusted to each level of 0 dB, 12 dB, 91 dB, 102 dB, 108 dB, and 114 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 5 on the volume adjustment screen. Is possible. When the setting is “0” (for application), the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 0 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 0. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to 0 (0 dB) as a default. When the setting is “0”, since the sound pressure is fixed at 0 dB (silence), the sound pressure cannot be changed.

  When the setting is “F” to “0”, the initial value of the luminance setting is set to “bright (duty ratio 100%)”. The luminance setting can be adjusted in the setting value adjustment mode.

  The initial value of the luminance setting may be set according to the setting value. For example, when the setting is “F” to “A”, the initial value of the luminance setting is “bright (duty ratio 100%)”. When the setting is “9” to “8”, the initial value of the luminance setting is set to “medium (duty ratio 70%)”, and when the setting is “7” to “5”, the luminance setting is set. The initial value is set to “dark (duty ratio 40%)”, and when the setting is “4”, it is set to “extremely dark (duty ratio 10%)” lower than “dark (duty ratio 40%)”. When the setting is “3”, “light extinction (duty ratio 0%)” which is lower than “extreme darkness (duty ratio 10%)” may be set. Further, when the screen is changed to the luminance adjustment screen, the luminance user setting value may be set to “bright (duty ratio 100%)” having the highest luminance as a default.

<Volume setting during special production / first and second output setting switches>
Next, the first output setting switch 190 and the second output setting switch 192 will be described with reference to FIGS. 255 (b) and 255 (c).

<Volume setting / output setting switch / first output setting switch during special production>
FIG. 255B is a front view of the first output setting switch 190. As described above, the first output setting switch 190 has a volume (sound pressure) of sound (for example, BGM, sound effect, error sound, etc.) output from the speaker (sound output means) 120 of the pachinko machine 100, and various LEDs. Operation means for adjusting the luminance (light quantity) of various lamps (light output means; hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “light emitting means”).

  Note that the “error sound” in the present embodiment is a first type of error sound whose volume (sound pressure) can be adjusted by the operating means, and a volume (sound pressure) that cannot be adjusted by the operating means. It may be composed of two types of error sounds. With such a configuration, a minor abnormality (for example, an error for notifying that a game medium needs to be replenished) is assigned to the first type of error sound, and a serious abnormality (for example, an illegal act such as a magnetic error). Is assigned to the second type of error sound, a serious abnormality may be reliably notified to a game shop clerk or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 220, the first output setting switch 190 is an operating means that can be operated by the player, unlike the second output setting switch 194, because it is disposed in front of the pachinko machine 100. . The first output setting switch 190 of this example includes a determination button 190a disposed in the center, an upper button 190b, a lower button 190c, a left button 190d, and a right button 190e disposed on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the determination button 190a. , And a clear button 190f arranged at the lower right. In the following description, the first output setting switch 190 is illustrated in a simplified manner as shown in the right diagram of FIG.

<Volume setting / output setting switch / second output setting switch during special production>
FIG. 255 (c) is a front view of the second output setting switch 194. FIG. As described above, the second output setting switch 194 includes the volume (sound pressure) of sound (eg, BGM, sound effect, error sound, etc.) output from the speaker (sound output means) 120 of the pachinko machine 100, and various LEDs. Operation means for adjusting the luminance (light quantity) of various lamps (light output means; hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “light emitting means”).

  As shown in FIG. 221, since the second output setting switch 194 is disposed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 100, a person who can lock and unlock the front frame door 106 (for example, a store clerk at a game shop, etc.) ) Can be operated by opening the front frame door 160, but a person who cannot lock and unlock the front frame door 106 (for example, a player) cannot be operated. Yes.

  The second output setting switch 194 of the present example includes a ring-shaped rotating part 194a configured to be rotatable with 16 contacts, and a notch window 194b formed in the rotating part 194a. In addition, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers of 0 to F in this example) are applied to the back side of the rotation unit 194a corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotation unit 194a.

  The second output setting switch 194 is configured to be able to output the numerical information visible from the notch window 194b as a detection signal to the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 255 (c), the second output setting switch 194 is visible from the notch 194b. When the numerical value is “F”, numerical information of hexadecimal F can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, the control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) receives this detection signal, thereby allowing a numerical value (in this example, 0 to F in hexadecimal notation) to be seen from the notch 194b of the second output setting switch 194. Any one of the numerical values) can be detected.

<Volume setting during special production / Specific example 1>
Next, a specific example 1 of volume setting during a special effect (in this example, an island simultaneous effect) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, specific example 1 of volume setting during the special effect (island simultaneous effect).

  Here, the game machines according to the following specific examples can shift to the set value adjustment mode during the normal game. In this example, by operating the left button 190d or the right button 190e of the first output setting switch 190 during the normal game, the mode shifts to the setting value adjustment mode, and the volume adjustment screen is displayed (in this example, the characters “volume adjustment”). Display and a scale display indicating the current volume setting value). In addition, when the upper button 190b or the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 during the normal game is operated, the setting value adjustment mode is entered, and the brightness adjustment screen (in this example, “brightness adjustment” is displayed, Display of the scale indicating the brightness setting value).

  During the display of the volume adjustment screen in the set value adjustment mode, every time an operation of the right button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted, a setting is made to increase the volume (sound pressure) by one level. A scale indicating the volume setting value after adjustment is displayed, and every time an operation of the left button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted once, the volume (sound pressure) is set to be lowered by one step, and after the volume adjustment A scale indicating the volume setting value is displayed.

  In addition, during the display of the brightness adjustment screen in the set value adjustment mode, every time an operation of the upper button 190b of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted, a setting is made to increase the brightness by one level, and the brightness after the brightness adjustment is performed. A scale indicating the set value is displayed, and each time an operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted, the brightness is set to be lowered by one step, and a scale display indicating the brightness set value after the brightness adjustment is performed. Do.

  FIG. 256 (a) shows a state during the normal game before shifting to the set value adjustment mode, and FIG. 256 (b) follows the left button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 during the normal game. The state where the operation was performed is shown.

  Further, FIG. 256C shows a state where the volume adjustment screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 has accepted the operation of the left button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 in the state shown in FIG. 256B (the state before the transition to the set value adjustment mode). Based on this, the volume adjustment screen is displayed (in this example, the character display “volume adjustment” and the scale display indicating the current volume setting value).

  In this example, the current volume setting value is set to a volume corresponding to the scale 3. For example, when the setting by the second output setting switch 194 is “7”, the current volume setting value is It shows that the volume is set to 128 dB corresponding to the scale 3 of the setting “7”.

  Next, FIG. 256 (d) shows a state in which a scale display indicating the volume setting value after volume adjustment is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 decreases the sound volume by one step based on the reception of the operation of the left button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 in the setting value adjustment mode shown in FIG. 256 (c). In addition to setting, a scale display indicating the volume setting value after volume adjustment is performed. Here, the volume of 128 dB corresponding to the scale 3 of the setting “7” is lowered to the volume of 114 dB corresponding to the scale 2, and the scale display is changed from 3 to 2.

  Next, FIG. 256 (e) shows a state during normal game in which the set value adjustment mode is finished. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the setting value adjustment mode based on receiving the operation of the determination button 190a of the first output setting switch 190 in the setting value adjustment mode shown in FIG. 256 (d). Quit and clear the volume adjustment screen.

  Next, FIG. 256 (f) shows a state in which the symbol variation BGM is output at the volume after the volume adjustment. Here, the BGM for symbol variation is output at a volume of 114 dB corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7”. In addition, the scale display shown as “user volume value” in the figure represents the volume set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation).

  The following FIG. 256 (g) shows a state in which the island simultaneous production is started. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs the current volume setting value volume (first volume) as the first output level at the current volume value setting when the start condition of the simultaneous island effect is established. The maximum volume (second volume, which corresponds to the scale 5 in this example) that can be set by the setting switch 190 (player operation) is changed.

  It should be noted that here, a 114 dB volume (first volume) corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7” can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) at the setting “7”. The volume is changed to a volume (second volume) of 152 dB corresponding to the scale 5. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the island simultaneous effect using the sound set to the volume after volume adjustment (here, 152 dB). In addition, the scale display shown as “output volume value” in the figure represents the volume of the sound used for the island simultaneous production.

  The subsequent FIG. 256 (h) shows a state immediately before the end of the island simultaneous effect, and the subsequent FIG. 256 (i) shows a state immediately after the end of the simultaneous island effect. The first sub-control unit 400 confirms that the end condition of the island simultaneous performance has been established (in this example, that the special figure variation game being executed has ended. In the case of a big hit game, the start of the next round or When the jackpot game has ended), the current volume setting value (second volume) is changed to the volume value setting volume (first volume) before the start of the island simultaneous production (first volume) ( Is back).

  Here, the 152 dB volume (second volume) corresponding to the scale 5 of the setting “7” is changed to the 114 dB volume (first volume) corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7” (return). ing). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs the BGM for symbol variation of the next special symbol variation game using the sound set to the volume after the volume adjustment (114 dB in this example). Note that (a) the factory default setting (for example, “1”), or (b) the factory default setting (for example, “1”), and the game after the power is turned on. If the player has never changed the volume, or (c) if the player has never changed the volume since the power was turned on, It is possible to leave the setting value without changing the value and change only the luminance to the maximum value, but it is also possible to prevent both the volume and the luminance from maximizing, and leave the setting value without setting the luminance to the maximum value. Only the volume may be changed to the maximum value. Also, if the scale of the second output setting switch of the pachinko machine that is already installed on the island of the amusement store is the same as the factory setting, it may be the same as above, but it is installed on the island of the amusement store. If it can be confirmed (for example, memorizing that the setting by the DIP switch or the operation for the amusement store (setting of the store name, etc.) has been performed once) In some cases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the volume and / or luminance does not reach the maximum value during the simultaneous production of islands.

<Volume setting during special production / Specific example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, a specific example 2 of volume setting during a special effect (in this example, an island simultaneous effect) will be described. FIG. 257 is a diagram showing, in time series, a specific example 2 of volume setting during the special effect (island simultaneous effect).

  FIG. 257 (a) shows a state in which the island simultaneous production is started. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs the current volume setting value volume (first volume) as the first output level at the current volume value setting when the start condition of the simultaneous island effect is established. The maximum volume (second volume, which corresponds to the scale 5 in this example) that can be set by the setting switch 190 (player operation) is changed.

  It should be noted that here, a 114 dB volume (first volume) corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7” can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) at the setting “7”. The volume is changed to a volume (second volume) of 152 dB corresponding to the scale 5. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the island simultaneous effect using the sound set to the volume after volume adjustment (here, 152 dB). In the figure, the scale display indicated as “production output volume value” represents the volume of the sound used for the island simultaneous production.

  Next, FIG. 257 (b) shows a state during the simultaneous production of islands, and FIGS. 257 (c) through (d) show a state where an error has occurred during the simultaneous production of islands. The first sub-control unit 400 uses a sound (first type of sound) used for production triggered by the occurrence of a predetermined error (in this example, a door opening error indicating that the front frame door 106 has been opened). The volume of the sound (second type of sound) used for error notification is changed from the current volume setting value (first volume, 0 dB in this example) to the current volume. In the value setting, the volume is changed to the maximum volume (second volume, which corresponds to the scale 5 in this example) that can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation).

  Here, 0 dB which is the volume (first volume) of the sound (second type of sound) used for error notification is set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) in the setting “7”. The maximum volume (152 dB corresponding to the scale 5) can be changed to the volume (second volume). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs error notification using the sound set to the volume after volume adjustment (here, 152 dB). In the figure, the scale display shown as “error output output volume value” represents the volume of the sound used for error notification.

  Next, FIG. 257 (e) shows a state immediately after the error is released. The first sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the fact that the error has been canceled (in this example, the front frame door 106 is closed). (Second volume) is changed (returned) to the volume setting (first volume) before the error occurred, and the volume of the sound used for the production (first type of sound) is changed to the volume value before the error occurs. The volume has been changed (returned) to the set volume (second volume).

  Here, the volume (second volume) of the sound (second type sound) used for error notification is changed (returned) to 0 dB, and the volume of the sound (first type sound) used for the production is changed, The volume is changed (returned) from the 0 dB volume to the 152 dB volume (second volume) corresponding to the scale 5 of the setting “7”. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 resumes the island simultaneous effect using the sound set to the volume after the change (here, 152 dB).

  In this example, the volume (first volume) of the sound (second type of sound) used for error notification is the maximum volume that can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation). Although the example of changing to the volume (second volume) has been shown, the volume (first volume) of the sound (second type of sound) used for error notification is set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation). Volume that cannot be set (for example, a range that can be set by changing the setting from “F” to “A” by operating the second output setting switch 194, but cannot be set at the setting “7”. The volume may be changeable.

<Volume setting during special production / Specific example 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, a specific example 3 of volume setting during a special effect (in this example, a demonstration effect) will be described. FIG. 258 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of the volume setting during the special effect (demonstration effect) in time series.

  FIGS. 258 (a) to (c) show a state during the demonstration production. The first sub-control unit 400 sets the current volume setting triggered by the fact that the start condition for the demonstration effect is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed since the stop display of the special drawing or the normal drawing). The volume of the value (first volume) can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) in the current volume value setting (second volume. In this example, the scale 5 The corresponding volume is changed.

  It should be noted that here, a 114 dB volume (first volume) corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7” can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) at the setting “7”. The volume is changed to a volume (second volume) of 152 dB corresponding to the scale 5. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the demonstration effect using the sound set to the volume after volume adjustment (152 dB in this example). Note that the scale display shown as “production output volume value” in the figure represents the volume of the sound used for the demonstration production.

  Note that the sound used for the effect display can be obtained by setting the volume (first volume) of the current volume setting value to 0 dB when a predetermined time has passed since the stop display of the special figure or ordinary figure. The sound that is used for the demonstration effect can be set by setting the volume (first volume) of the current volume setting value to 0 dB, triggered by the start of the stop display of special drawings or ordinary drawings. You may mute.

  FIG. 258 (d) shows a state in which the left button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 is operated during the demonstration effect. FIG. 258 (e) shows a volume adjustment screen on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state of displaying. The first sub-control unit 400 performs sound volume based on receiving the operation of the left button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 in the state shown in FIG. 258 (d) (the state before transition to the set value adjustment mode). The adjustment screen is displayed (in this example, the character display “volume adjustment” and the scale display indicating the current volume setting value).

  In this example, the current volume setting value is set to the volume corresponding to the scale 2. For example, when the setting by the second output setting switch 194 is “7”, the current volume setting value is This indicates that the volume is set to 114 dB corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7”.

  Next, FIG. 258 (f) to FIG. 258 (g) show a state in which a scale display indicating the volume setting value after volume adjustment is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The first sub-control unit 400 stores the player setting stored in the RAM 408 based on receiving the operation of the right button 190e of the first output setting switch 190 in the set value adjustment mode shown in FIG. 258 (e). While the value (volume) is set to be increased by one level and the scale display indicating the volume setting value after the volume adjustment is performed, the actual volume is not changed.

  The following FIG. 256 (h) shows a state in which the island simultaneous production is started following the demonstration production. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs the current volume setting value volume (first volume) as the first output level at the current volume value setting when the start condition of the simultaneous island effect is established. The maximum volume (second volume, which corresponds to the scale 5 in this example) that can be set by the setting switch 190 (player operation) is changed.

  In this example, in the demonstration effect, the maximum volume (152 dB corresponding to the scale 5 of setting “7” in this example) that can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation). Since the volume is changed to the volume (second volume), the first sub-control unit 400 has started the island simultaneous production using the sound set to the volume during demonstration display (152 dB in this example). . In the figure, the scale display indicated as “production output volume value” represents the volume of the sound used for the island simultaneous production.

<Volume setting during special production / specific example 4>
Next, specific example 4 of volume setting during a special effect (in this example, an island simultaneous effect) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, specific example 4 of the volume setting during the special performance (island simultaneous production).

  FIG. 259 (a) shows a state in which the island simultaneous production is started. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs the current volume setting value volume (first volume) as the first output level at the current volume value setting when the start condition of the simultaneous island effect is established. The maximum volume (second volume, which corresponds to the scale 5 in this example) that can be set by the setting switch 190 (player operation) is changed.

  In this example, the 114 dB volume (first volume) corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “9” can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) in the setting “9”. The volume is changed to the maximum volume (152 dB corresponding to the scale 5) (second volume). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the island simultaneous effect using the sound set to the volume after adjusting the volume (152 dB in this example). In the figure, the scale display indicated as “production output volume value” represents the volume of the sound used for the island simultaneous production.

  FIG. 259 (b) continues to show a state during the simultaneous production of islands, and FIG. 259 (c) shows a state where the volume setting value has been changed by the second output setting switch 194 during the simultaneous production of islands. ing. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the second output setting switch 194 (game shop clerk operation) to change the sound volume setting value from “9” to “A”, and the management stored in the RAM 408 The player setting value (volume) is increased by one level to change from “9” to “A”, and the player setting value (volume) stored in the RAM 408 is the initial value of the setting “A” 4 Setting to change to (161 dB) is performed.

  As a result, in this example, the volume (first volume) of the maximum volume (152 dB corresponding to the scale 5) that can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) in the setting “9” before the change. ) Is changed to the volume (second volume) of the maximum volume (181 dB corresponding to the scale 5) that can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) in the changed setting “A”. The first sub-control unit 400 continues the island simultaneous effect using the sound set to the maximum volume (181 dB in this example) corresponding to the setting “A”. Thereby, the volume of the sound used for the island simultaneous production is increased from 152 dB to 181 dB.

  As described above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 255 to 259 is a gaming machine equipped with sound output means (for example, the speaker 20 shown in FIGS. 256 and 257), The sound output from the sound output means can be set at the first volume (for example, a 114 dB volume corresponding to the scale 2 of setting “7” shown in FIG. 256 (f)) by the volume setting operation by the player. Even if the first volume is set by the volume setting operation during the island simultaneous production period, the scale 5 of the setting “7” shown in FIG. Is set at the first volume by the volume setting operation by the player during the period of the island simultaneous performance. Have been , Sound output from the sound output means is the second volume, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to such a game machine, it can be noticed that the special effect has been started by changing the sound volume, and the special effect can be noticed in some cases. Note that the volume of the sound output from the sound output means may be changed by the volume setting operation by the store clerk. The second volume may be a volume of a sound that can be changed by a volume setting operation by a store clerk (for example, an operation of a volume changing knob), but can be set only by a volume setting operation by a player. Sound volume may be used.

  Further, the island simultaneous effect is an effect related to the island simultaneous effect by the sound output means of the game stand different from the game stand, and is output from the sound output means even when the island simultaneous effect is started. At least a display relating to the sound volume setting (hereinafter referred to as “volume setting display”) can be displayed, and the sound output from the sound output means can be set at a third volume by a player volume setting operation. The third volume is a volume different from the first volume, and the volume setting display is an indication indicating the first volume (hereinafter referred to as “first volume display”). The volume setting display is a display including at least a display indicating the third volume (hereinafter referred to as “third volume display”), and the island simultaneous display Even if the production is in progress, It is possible to change the setting from the first volume to the third volume by the volume setting operation by a person, and by changing the setting from the first volume to the third volume, the volume The setting display changes from the first volume display to the third volume display, and during the execution of the island simultaneous performance, the player sets the first volume to the third volume by the volume setting operation. Even if it is changed, the sound output from the sound output means may be the second volume.

  In addition, the first operation means (for example, the first output setting switch 190 shown in FIG. 255 (b)), the second operation means (for example, the second output setting switch 194 shown in FIG. 255 (c)), The first operation means is a means provided at a position where the volume setting operation (hereinafter referred to as “first volume setting operation”) can be received, and the second operation means includes: It is means provided at a position where a volume setting operation (hereinafter referred to as “second volume setting operation”) by a store clerk can be received, and the second operation means is different from the first operation means. Even if the island simultaneous production is started, the first volume is changed by the second volume setting operation, and the first volume setting operation is performed by the second volume setting operation. The volume range that can be set with

  With such a configuration, the volume can be changed by a store clerk operation even during execution of a special effect, so that maintainability may be improved. The second operation means may be provided at a position where the store clerk can operate by opening the door (front door and / or inner frame). Further, the first operation means may be provided at a position where it can be operated without opening the door (front door and / or inner frame) (even if the door is closed).

  Also, the sound volume set by the sound volume setting operation may be output from the sound output means only during a period when the island simultaneous performance is not executed.

  With such a configuration, since the volume setting operation cannot be performed during the period in which the special effect is being executed, the player may be able to concentrate on the special effect. Note that the volume setting operation may be performed even during execution of the special effect.

  When the island simultaneous performance is completed, the volume of the sound output from the sound output means is the volume of the sound set by the player before the island simultaneous production is started (for example, FIG. 256 (i The volume may be set back to 114 dB corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7” shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, after the special effect is finished, the original volume is restored, so that the player does not have to change the volume to the desired volume again, and the convenience of changing the volume is improved. There are cases where it is possible. If the sound before the special effect is started is set at the second volume, the second volume may be set after the special effect ends.

  Further, even if the island simultaneous production is started, a display relating to the volume setting of the sound output from the sound output means (hereinafter referred to as “volume setting display”. For example, the volume shown in FIGS. 256 (c) to (d)). The volume setting display during the execution of the simultaneous performance may be a display including at least a display indicating the third volume.

  With such a configuration, the volume after adjustment can be confirmed even during execution of the special effect, and thus maintainability may be improved.

  Further, the second volume may be a volume that can be set by the player by the volume setting operation.

  With such a configuration, the player can adjust the sound volume to his / her preference, which may increase the player's satisfaction.

  The second volume may be a maximum volume that can be set by the volume setting operation.

  With such a configuration, by making the start of the special effect the maximum volume that can be set by the player, it becomes easier to notice that the special effect has started, and the special effect can be noticed. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, a display relating to the volume setting of the sound output from the sound output means (hereinafter referred to as “volume setting display”, for example, a volume adjustment screen shown in FIGS. 256 (c) to (d)) is possible. When the simultaneous production is started, the volume setting display may be hidden.

  With such a configuration, it may be easy to notice that the special effect has started, and attention may be paid to the special effect.

  Further, the control unit includes an effect control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the effect control unit changes the first sound volume when the sound volume setting operation is performed (hereinafter referred to as “first sound volume”). The effect control means is a means for executing the control to change to the second volume when the island simultaneous effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “second volume change control”). The second volume change control is a volume change control different from the first volume change control, and the second volume is the first volume change control. It may be a sound volume that can be changed by control.

  With such a configuration, when the special effect is started by the second volume change control of the effect control means, the volume is automatically changed, so that it is easy to notice that the special effect has started and the special effect is started. You may be able to get attention.

  In addition, the island facility on which the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can be installed is an island facility on which a plurality of gaming machines (for example, pachinko machines 100) can be installed, and the island facility can be installed by a single operation. An island facility configured to be able to turn on the power to the game machine, the game machine having at least sound output means (for example, the speaker 120), and by a volume setting operation by the player The sound is output from the sound output means of the gaming table at a first volume (for example, a volume of 114 dB corresponding to the scale 2 of setting “7” shown in FIG. 256 (f)), Even if the first volume is set by the volume setting operation during the simultaneous production period, the second volume (for example, 152 dB corresponding to the scale 5 of the setting “7” shown in FIG. 256 (g)). ) Is set, The Kijima simultaneous production is an effect related to the island simultaneous production by sound output means of a game table different from the game table, and when each of the plurality of game tables starts the island simultaneous production, the plurality of games The island facility may be characterized in that the volume of the sound output from each sound output means of the platform is the second volume.

  With such an island facility, the volume of the sound during the special production is set to the same volume in each game machine on the island where the special production is performed. In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the players who are playing on the respective game tables. The “island facility” according to the present invention may be an island facility where only a pachinko machine can be installed, an island facility where only a slot machine can be installed, or an island where both a pachinko machine and a slot machine can be installed. Equipment may be used. Moreover, the island equipment which can install only another kind of game machine may be sufficient, and the island equipment which can install a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and another kind of game machine may be sufficient.

  In addition, the island simultaneous effect may include an island simultaneous effect (island simultaneous effect A) performed in an advantageous game state and an island simultaneous effect (island simultaneous effect B) executed regardless of the game state. Here, even when the island simultaneous production A is started, the volume can be set by the player's volume setting operation. However, when the island simultaneous production B is started, even if the player performs the volume setting operation, The volume may be forcibly set to one of the volumes that can be set by the user (for example, the second volume or the maximum volume that can be set). Further, the island simultaneous production in which the volume is forcibly set may be reversed between the island simultaneous production A and the island simultaneous production B. When both the island simultaneous production A and the island simultaneous production B are started, respectively. The volume may be forcibly set to one of the volumes that can be set by the player.

<Volume / brightness settings during special production>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 260 to 270, volume setting and luminance setting during special effects (for example, island simultaneous effects and demonstration effects) will be described.

<Volume / brightness setting / power saving mode setting switch during special production>
260 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the setting operation unit 195 described with reference to FIG. 221, and FIG. 260 (b) shows the power saving mode setting switch 195a arranged in the setting operation unit 195. It is a front view which expands and shows.

  In the gaming machine according to the present example, a DIP switch functioning as a power saving mode setting switch 195 a is arranged on the upper left of the setting operation unit 195 when viewed from the front. This power saving mode setting switch 195a is an operating means for switching ON / OFF of the power saving mode of the game machine.

  In this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 260 (b), when the knob of the power saving mode setting switch 195a is slid upward, a first detection signal (for example, a high level signal) When the power saving mode of the gaming machine is set to ON and the knob of the power saving mode setting switch 195a is slid downward, the second detection signal ( For example, when the low level signal) is input, the power saving mode of the game machine is set to OFF. In the following description, the setting of the power saving mode to ON may be simply referred to as “setting”, and the setting of the power saving mode to OFF may be simply referred to as “no setting”.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the power saving mode setting switch 195a, the production operation part setting switches 195b and 195c, the island simultaneous production execution switch 195d, and the island installation position setting switches 195e to 195h are provided in the setting operation unit 195. . These switches are also constituted by DIP switches.

  The effect part setting switches 195b and 195c can select from four types of effect contents to be executed in the island simultaneous effect and the link effect described later, by a combination of ON / OFF of these switches. For example, by combining the production part setting switches 195b and 195c, it is possible to select any of the appearing characters from lord, niece, princess, and back, or to switch between a male part and a female part.

  Further, the island simultaneous effect execution switch 195d can select whether or not to execute the island simultaneous effect or a link effect described later by turning the switch ON / OFF. For example, when the island simultaneous effect execution switch 195d is turned OFF, the normal effect can be continuously performed without starting the island simultaneous effect even when the start timing of the island simultaneous effect is reached. This island simultaneous performance execution switch 195d is useful in situations where it is difficult to achieve the effect of the island simultaneous performance, such as when only one is installed in a variety corner of a game arcade.

  Further, the island installation position setting switches 195e to 195h can recognize the position where the pachinko machine 100 is installed on the game island by a combination of ON / OFF of these switches. Thereby, for example, when performing the island simultaneous production, a plurality of pachinko machines 100 installed on the amusement island by shifting the light emission timing of the lamp little by little according to the combination of the island installation position setting switches 195e to 195h. This makes it possible to produce an effect in which light flows.

<Volume / brightness setting / volume / brightness setting table during special effects>
FIG. 261 is a diagram illustrating an example of a volume luminance setting table. This volume luminance setting table includes the sound volume (sound pressure) output from the sound output means (for example, the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 223) of the game table and the light emission means (for example, various types shown in FIG. 223). The table stipulates the setting value of the luminance of light output from the lamps 418, 440, the gaming board lamp 532, the gaming table frame lamp 542, etc., and is a storage means (for example, the first shown in FIG. 223). This is a table stored in advance in the ROM 406) of the sub-control unit 400.

  In this example, when the power saving mode setting switch 195a is “no setting”, the volume and brightness corresponding to the output setting switches (manager setting values) F to 0 shown in the upper half of the volume brightness setting table are set. The On the other hand, when the power saving mode setting switch 195a is “set”, the volume and brightness corresponding to the output switches (manager setting values) F to 0 shown in the lower half of the volume and brightness setting table are set. Note that the volume setting value is common to ON / OFF of the power saving mode, and is the same as the volume setting value shown in FIG.

  The volume luminance setting table is not limited to this example. For example, when the output setting switch (administrator set value) is set to 0, the volume and luminance may not be set. Further, in this case, when the output setting switch (administrator set value) is set to any one of 1 to F, the volume or brightness setting screen is displayed when the player performs a volume or brightness setting operation. The determination button (for example, the determination button 190a) may be lit after being performed (immediately or simultaneously). Further, when the output setting switch (administrator set value) is set to 0 and the volume or brightness setting operation is performed by the player, the volume or brightness adjustment screen is not displayed, but the enter button is lit. However, when the output setting switch is set to 0, the determination button may not be lit. Further, various operation means for setting the volume or the brightness can be applied instead of the determination button.

  In this example, scale 0 can also be set by the player, and the volume can be set to 0 by the player. However, scale 0 is not included in the table, and the volume is set by the player. You may comprise so that cannot be made 0.

  In this example, the initial value of the sound pressure is matched with the sound pressure at the initial volume setting position, but the initial sound pressure value may be different from the initial sound pressure at the volume setting position. As a result, once the volume is set, the power is turned off or the output setting switch is reset (for example, if it is set with F, it is once set to E and then set again with F). The sound pressure is configured so that it cannot be returned to the initial value.

<Volume / brightness settings / volume adjustment during special effects>
In step S608 (sound control main loop process) of the first sub-control unit main process, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the volume / luminance setting table shown in FIG. 261, and the first output setting switch 190 and the second output. Based on the setting value by the setting switch 192, the initial value of the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (for example, the speaker 120) is set and the volume is adjusted.

  Specifically, when the administrator set value (scale F to 0) is changed by operating the second output setting switch 194, the initial volume value corresponds to the administrator set value (scale F to 0). Set to the initial value. Further, in the setting value adjustment mode, when the player setting value of the volume (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “user volume value”) is changed by operating the first output setting switch 190, the volume before the volume adjustment is performed. Is set to the volume corresponding to the player setting value (scale 0 to 5) of the volume within the adjustable range corresponding to the administrator set value (scale 0 to F). Note that the initial value of the volume and the adjustable range of the volume are not limited to this example.

<Volume / brightness settings / brightness adjustment during special effects>
The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the volume / luminance setting table shown in FIG. 261 in step S607 (lamp control main loop processing) of the first sub-control unit main process, and is set by the power saving mode setting switch 195a. Further, based on the set value by the first output setting switch 190, the initial value of the luminance of light output from the light emitting means (for example, various lamps 418, 440, etc.) is set and the luminance is adjusted.

  In addition, the second sub-control unit 500 has a command (a command related to setting of an initial value of luminance or adjustment of luminance) to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542 from the first sub-control unit 400. In this case, by outputting this command to the serial communication control circuit 520, setting of the initial value of luminance of the light output from the light emitting means (for example, the game board lamp 532 and the game table frame lamp 542) and adjustment of the luminance are performed. I do.

  Specifically, when the power-saving mode of the gaming machine is set to ON by operating the power-saving mode setting switch 195a, the initial value of luminance is set to an initial value corresponding to “no setting” (in this example, the ) And the power-saving mode setting switch 195a is operated to set the power-saving mode of the gaming machine to OFF, the initial luminance value is set to an initial value corresponding to “set” (in this example, Set to (Dark).

  In addition, the power-saving mode is set to OFF, and in the setting value adjustment mode, the player setting value of luminance (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “user setting value”) is changed by operating the first output setting switch 190. In the case where the brightness is adjusted, the brightness before the brightness adjustment is set within the adjustable range corresponding to “no setting”, the brightness corresponding to the player setting values (scales 3 to 1) (in this example, bright, medium, or Set to 3 stages of darkness. On the other hand, when the power saving mode is set to ON, the luminance is maintained at an initial luminance corresponding to “set” (dark in this example) and cannot be adjusted. Note that the initial value of brightness and the adjustable range of brightness are not limited to this example.

<Volume / brightness settings during special effects / Example of light emission means>
FIGS. 262 (a) to (c) are front views showing a state in which light of different luminance is output from the light emitting means of the game table. The game table of this example includes one board-side illumination board 532a as the game board lamp 532 and three frame-side illumination boards 542a to 542c as the game board frame lamp 542. In addition, the number and arrangement | positioning location of the board | substrate side illumination board | substrate 532a and the frame side illumination board | substrates 542a-542c are not limited to this example.

  The panel-side illumination board 532a is composed of a first LED driver (not shown) and a plurality of LED groups controlled by the first LED driver, and allows the plurality of LED groups to emit light in the first light emission mode. It is a possible substrate. The three frame side illumination boards 542a to 542c are configured by second to fourth LED drivers (not shown) and a plurality of LED groups individually controlled by each of the second to fourth LED drivers. It is a board | substrate which can make a some LED group light-emit in the 2nd-4th light emission mode which is different from a 1st light emission mode and each light emission mode differs.

  Note that one type of LED driver may control a plurality or all of the LED groups of the panel side illumination board 532a and the frame side illumination boards 542a to 542c, or the board side illumination board 532a and the frame side illumination boards 542a to 542c. A plurality or all of the light emission modes of the LED group may be the same.

  FIG. 262 (a) schematically shows a light emission mode when the brightness of the LED groups of the panel side illumination board 532a and the frame side illumination boards 542a to 542c are all set to “bright (duty ratio 100%)”. FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing a light emission mode when all the luminances of the LED group are set to “medium (duty ratio 70%)”, and FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the light emission aspect at the time of setting all the brightness | luminances of the LED group to "dark (duty ratio 20%)."

  Here, in the gaming machine according to this example, the light emitting means is controlled by a duty control method (a method of controlling the brightness of the appearance by blinking the LED that is lit at a constant forward current at high speed). The “duty ratio” is a percentage of the lighting time with respect to the blinking cycle.

  Note that the luminance control method of the light emitting means is not limited to the duty control method. For example, PWM dimming (a method of controlling the luminance of the LED by changing the pulse width) or a phase control method (power control element) And a method of controlling the power supplied to the load) may be applied. In this example, the brightness of the light emitting means can be adjusted. However, it is sufficient that the light emitting mode of the light emitting means can be adjusted. For example, dimming, gradation, brightness, illuminance, hue, etc. of the light emitting means can be adjusted. It may be possible.

  In the gaming machine according to this example, the luminance resolution in the duty control method is set to 8 bits, so the luminance duty ratio is set to 0% (= 0/127 × 100%) to 100% (= 127/127 ×). 100%) can be adjusted in units of about 0.78% (= 1/127 × 100%). Accordingly, by setting the decimal 127 as the luminance setting value in the LED driver, the luminance (bright) with a duty ratio of 100% (= 100% × 127/127) can be set, and the luminance setting value is 10 By setting the decimal number 88 to the LED driver, the luminance (medium) with a duty ratio of about 70% (= 88/127 × 100%) can be set, and the decimal value 25 is set to the LED driver as the luminance setting value. By setting, it is possible to set a luminance (dark) with a duty ratio of about 20% (= 25/127 × 100%).

  In this example, the brightness can be adjusted to any one of the three levels of bright, medium, and dark. However, the brightness may be adjusted in one, two, or four or more stages. The dark duty ratio is not limited to three types of 100%, 70%, and 20%, but may be other numerical values. Also, the luminance resolution is not limited to 8 bits, and may be a resolution of less than 8 bits or greater than 8 bits.

  In addition, the luminance setting method is not limited to the method of setting the decimal setting value in the LED driver or the like. For example, the duty ratio is calculated by the control means when adjusting the luminance, and the duty ratio is set in the LED driver or the like. Alternatively, a numerical value corresponding to the duty ratio may be stored as a table in advance, and the numerical value corresponding to the duty ratio may be specified when adjusting the luminance to set the duty ratio in the LED driver or the like.

<Brightness setting during special production / Specific example 1>
Next, a specific example 1 of luminance setting during a special effect (in this example, an island simultaneous effect) will be described with reference to FIGS. 263 to 265. 263 to 265 are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of luminance setting in a special effect (island simultaneous effect) in time series.

<Brightness setting during special effects / specific example 1 / setting value adjustment mode>
Here, the game machines according to the following specific examples can shift to the set value adjustment mode during the normal game. In this example, when an operation of any one of the upper button 190b, the lower button 190c, the left button 190d, and the right button 190e of the first output setting switch 190 is received during the normal game, the mode shifts to the set value adjustment mode. Further, in the display area on the right side of the front view of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display (in this example, an image simulating the speaker 120) that notifies the user that the volume / brightness can be adjusted by shifting to the set value mode. An icon composed of characters “change volume with left / right keys”, an image simulating a light emitting means (LED), and an icon composed of characters “change brightness with up / down keys” are displayed.

  The normal game means a game other than the big hit game. For example, the hold 0 and the special figure stop state, the demo screen is displayed, the symbol variation display is being displayed, the hold 1 or more and The special figure stop state, the reach effect display, the symbol confirmation display (symbol stop display), the fluctuation fluctuation display, and the like can be mentioned.

<Brightness setting during special effects / specific example 1 / volume adjustment screen, brightness adjustment screen>
In addition, when the operation of the left button 190d or the right button 190e of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted after the transition to the set value adjustment mode, the display of the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume (in this example, “volume” “Adjustment” and a scale display indicating a player setting value of the current volume). Further, when the operation of the upper button 190b or the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted after the transition to the setting value adjustment mode, a luminance adjustment screen for adjusting the luminance (in this example, “brightness adjustment”). And a scale display indicating a player setting value of the current luminance).

  In addition, when the operation of the upper button 190b or the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 is received during the normal game, the setting value adjustment mode may be entered and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed. Further, when the operation of the left button 190d or the right button 190e of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted during the normal game, the brightness adjustment screen may be displayed as well as the setting value adjustment mode.

<Brightness setting during special effects / specific example 1 / volume adjustment, brightness adjustment>
In this example, while the volume adjustment screen is displayed in the setting value adjustment mode, the volume (sound pressure) is set to be increased by one step each time an operation of the right button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 is received once. In addition, a scale display indicating the player setting value of the volume after the change is performed, and every time an operation of the left button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted, a setting for decreasing the volume (sound pressure) by one step is performed. At the same time, a scale display indicating the player setting value of the volume after the change is performed.

  In the following drawings, the scale display shown as “user volume value” represents the player setting value of the volume, and the scale display shown as “output volume value” represents the volume of the sound actually output from the speaker 120. ing.

  When the operation of the upper button 190b or the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted during the normal game, the mode shifts to the set value adjustment mode, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the volume (sound The pressure may be adjusted in one step.

  Further, while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed in the set value adjustment mode, every time an operation of the upper button 190b of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted, a setting is made to increase the brightness by one level, and after the brightness after the change Is displayed on the scale indicating the player setting value of the player, and every time an operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted, the luminance is set to be lowered by one step, and the changed player setting value of the luminance is changed. A scale display is displayed.

  In the following drawings, the display shown as “user setting value” represents the player setting value of brightness, and the display shown as “LED brightness” is the board side lighting board 532a and the frame side lighting boards 542a to 542c, etc. It represents the luminance of light actually output from the light emitting means.

  In addition, when the operation of the left button 190d or the right button 190e of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted during the normal game, the mode shifts to the set value adjustment mode, the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, and the brightness is set to 1. You may comprise so that stage adjustment can be performed.

<Brightness setting during special performance / Specific example 1 / Brightness adjustment by player>
FIG. 263 (a) shows a display (in this example, an image simulating the speaker 120) that informs that the volume and brightness can be adjusted during a normal game (in this example, hold 0 and the special figure is stopped). Display of the characters “change volume with left / right keys”, an image simulating a light emitting means (LED), and display of characters “change brightness with up / down keys”).

  In this example, a display notifying that the volume and the brightness can be adjusted is displayed after a certain time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hold 0 and the special figure stopped state. The display may be started immediately after the special figure is stopped. In addition, a certain time (for example, 5 seconds, which is different from the certain time measured after the special figure is stopped) after the luminance setting screen (which may be the above-described volume setting screen) described later is hidden. It may be possible to display a display notifying that the volume / brightness can be adjusted again after the elapse of time), but the brightness setting screen (the above-mentioned volume setting screen may also be used) It may be configured not to be displayed again after is hidden.

  In addition, when the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 is operated during the normal game, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the operation of the first output setting switch 190 in the normal state before the transition to the set value adjustment mode. Based on the reception of the operation of the down button 190c, the display may be displayed informing that the volume / brightness can be adjusted by shifting to the setting value mode.

  FIG. 263 (b) shows a state where the operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted in the state shown in FIG. 263 (a), and FIG. 263 (c) is a decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a state where the brightness adjustment screen is displayed. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 in the state after the transition to the set value adjustment mode shown in FIG. 263 (b). Display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in 263 (c) (in this example, a character display of “brightness adjustment” and a scale display indicating the player setting value of the current brightness) is performed.

  In this example, the power saving mode set by the power saving mode setting switch 195a is set to “no setting”, and the administrator setting value set by the second output setting switch 194 is set to “7”. Further, in the state before the volume / brightness adjustment, the player setting value (user volume value) of the volume is set to a volume of 128 dB corresponding to the scale 3 of the setting “7”, and is output from the speaker 120. The sound volume is 128 dB. In addition, in the state before the volume / brightness adjustment, the player setting value (user setting value) of the luminance is set to a luminance with a duty ratio of 100% corresponding to the scale 3, and the board side lighting board 532a or the frame side is set. The brightness of the light output from the LEDs on the illumination boards 542a to 542c is bright (duty ratio 100%).

  FIG. 263 (c) shows a state in which an operation with the down button 190c is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 263 (d), the first sub-control unit 400 is a scale representing the player setting value of luminance based on the reception of the operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190. The display has been changed from 3 to 2. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (c), the brightness is adjusted at a volume of 128 dB corresponding to the scale 3 of the setting “7” based on the reception of the operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190. A luminance setting sound (first sound) suggesting that the sound has been received is output from the speaker 120. Note that the luminance setting sound (first sound) may not be output.

  FIG. 263 (d) shows a state in which an operation by the enter button 190a is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 lowers the luminance player setting value from “bright” to “medium” by one step based on accepting the operation of the determination button 190a of the first output setting switch 190, The changed brightness is set to the LED driver or the like. As a result, the brightness of the light output from the LEDs on the panel side illumination board 532a and the frame side illumination boards 542a to 542c corresponds to the scale 2 from the bright brightness (duty ratio 100%) corresponding to the scale 3 ( The luminance is changed to a luminance with a duty ratio of 70%. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (d), the luminance is determined at a volume of 128 dB corresponding to the scale 3 of the setting “7” based on the reception of the operation of the determination button 190a of the first output setting switch 190. A luminance definite sound (second sound) suggesting that the sound has been output is output from the speaker 120. In addition, you may comprise so that a brightness | luminance fixed sound (2nd sound) may not be output.

  In this example, after the brightness is changed by the operation of the down button 190c, the display of the brightness adjustment screen is changed to a display corresponding to the operation of the down button 190c. However, the brightness is changed by the operation of the down button 190c. At the same time, the display of the brightness adjustment screen may be changed to a display corresponding to the operation of the lower button 190c.

  FIG. 264 (e) shows a state in which the brightness adjustment screen has been deleted, and FIG. 264 (f) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is performed and the symbol variation BGM is being output. At the timing shown in FIG. 264 (f), the symbol variation BGM is output at a volume of 128 dB corresponding to the scale 3 of the setting “7” based on the sound player setting value.

  In this example, when the change of the symbol is started, the display notifying that the adjustment of the volume / brightness is possible is deleted, but the adjustment of the volume / brightness is not performed even if the change of the symbol is started. The display which notifies that it is possible may be displayed continuously. In addition, it is configured to display / erase a display that informs that the volume / brightness can be adjusted by the operation of the operation means by the player (for example, the operation of the enter button 190a and the up / down / left / right buttons 190b to 190e). It may be.

  Further, every time an operation for adjusting the brightness (in this example, an operation by the lower button 190c or the upper button 190b of the first output setting switch 190) is received, a setting for changing the brightness of the light emitting means (for example, LED driver setting) may be performed. Also, when an operation for adjusting the brightness is accepted, only the process of changing the scale display indicating the brightness player setting value is performed, and the setting for changing the brightness of the light emitting means is not performed. If an operation for determining the brightness (in this example, an operation using the enter button 190a) is accepted, a setting for changing the brightness of the light emitting means may be performed.

  Similarly, the volume of the sound output means is changed each time an operation for adjusting the volume (in this example, the operation using the left button 190d or the right button 190e of the first output setting switch 190) is received. Setting (for example, setting of a sound driver) may be performed. Also, when an operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, only the process of changing the scale display representing the player setting value of the volume is performed, and the setting for changing the volume of the sound output means is not performed. After that, when an operation for determining the volume (in this example, an operation using the enter button 190a) is received, a setting for changing the volume of the sound output unit may be performed.

  In addition, if symbol variation display is started while the volume adjustment screen or brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the setting value mode is forcibly terminated after changing to the volume or luminance being adjusted at the start of symbol variation display. Alternatively, the volume and brightness set as the player setting value may be adopted without setting the unconfirmed volume and brightness as the player setting value. Further, when there is an operation (for example, an operation for adjusting the volume) that is different from the operation for adjusting the luminance while the luminance adjustment screen is displayed, the operation may not be accepted. The operation may be accepted as an operation for adjusting the brightness, and a volume adjustment screen may be displayed instead of the brightness adjustment screen based on the reception of the operation.

<Luminance setting during special production / Specific example 1 / Volume / brightness adjustment by starting simultaneous production of islands>
FIG. 264 (g) shows a state in which the island simultaneous production is started. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the fact that the start condition of the island simultaneous production is satisfied, and the current volume (first volume. In this example, 114 dB corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7” Volume) can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) at the administrator setting value (setting “7”), corresponding to the scale 5 in this example. The volume is changed to 152 dB.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the island simultaneous production, with the current luminance (first luminance. In this example, the middle luminance corresponding to the scale 2 (duty ratio 70%) Brightness) can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) at the administrator setting value (setting “7”), the maximum brightness (second brightness. In this example, the setting “7”) The brightness is changed to bright (luminance of 100% duty) corresponding to the scale 3. In this example, the maximum brightness that can be set by the player's operation is set as the initial value of the brightness, so the brightness that is set when the island simultaneous performance of this example is started is the maximum brightness. And an initial value of luminance.

  The first sub-control unit 400 immediately after (or at the same time as) changing the volume and brightness settings, the sound set to the changed volume (here, 152 dB volume) and the changed brightness (here Then, the island simultaneous production is started using light set to bright (luminance of 100% duty).

  In this example, the brightness that is set when the island simultaneous effect is started is the maximum luminance and the initial value of the luminance, but the luminance that is set when the island simultaneous effect is started is the maximum. The luminance may be a luminance that is not the initial luminance value, or may be a luminance that is the initial luminance value and not the maximum luminance. Further, the maximum luminance and the initial luminance may be different from each other.

  Note that the luminance set when the island simultaneous performance of this example is started is luminance that can be set by player operation, but may be luminance that cannot be set by player operation. Further, the brightness that cannot be set by player operation may be higher than the maximum brightness that can be set by player operation, or may be lower than the maximum brightness that can be set by player operation. May be lower than the minimum brightness value that can be set by the player, or higher than the minimum brightness value that can be set by the player's operation.

  In this example, the volume is changed from the first volume to the second volume and the luminance is changed from the first luminance to the second luminance when the start condition of the island simultaneous production is satisfied. However, only the luminance may be changed from the first luminance to the second luminance while the volume is maintained at the first volume. On the other hand, only the volume may be changed from the first volume to the second volume while maintaining the luminance at the first luminance. In addition, during the period from the start to the end of the island simultaneous performance, the player may be configured not to accept volume and / or brightness adjustment operations.

<Luminance setting during special production / Specific example 1 / Volume / brightness adjustment at the end of the island production>
FIG. 265 (i) shows a state immediately before the end of the island simultaneous performance, and FIG. 265 (j) shows a state immediately after the end of the simultaneous island effect. The first sub-control unit 400 confirms that the end condition of the island simultaneous performance has been established (in this example, that the special figure variation game being executed has ended. In the case of a big hit game, the start of the next round or When the jackpot game has ended), the current volume setting value (second volume; in this example, 152 dB volume corresponding to the scale 5 of the setting “7”) is set before the island simultaneous production starts. (The first volume. In this example, the volume is 114 dB corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7”).

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the current luminance (second luminance. In this example, luminance (luminance with a duty ratio of 100%)) to the island when the end condition of the island simultaneous performance is satisfied. The brightness before the start of simultaneous production (first brightness. In this example, the brightness is medium (duty ratio 70%)) (returned).

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the speaker 120 in the mute state during the period from the end of the island simultaneous performance until the start condition of the next special figure variable game is satisfied, The LEDs on the board side lighting board 532a and the frame side lighting boards 542a to 542c are turned on in the light emitting mode for the end effect. It should be noted that the LEDs on the board side lighting board 532a and the frame side lighting boards 542a to 542c may be turned off during the period from the end of the island simultaneous performance until the next special figure variation game start condition is satisfied.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the changed volume (114 dB in this example) as shown in FIG. 265 (j) when the start condition for the next special figure variation game is satisfied. The BGM for symbol change of the next special figure variation game is output using the sound, and the light set to the changed luminance (in this example, the luminance of the medium (duty ratio 70%)) is used. Then, the next special figure variation game will be performed for symbol variation.

  On the other hand, if the number of suspensions of the special figure variable game is 0 when the end condition of the island simultaneous performance is satisfied, the end display of the island simultaneous performance ends (for example, “Look forward to the next time!” Is deleted) After a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. A demonstration display may be displayed after the predetermined time has elapsed, and the island simultaneous performance is continued until the start condition for the next special figure variable game is satisfied (for example, “Look forward to the next time!”). Display may be continued as it is).

<Luminance setting during special production / Specific example 2>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 266 to 268, specific example 2 of the luminance setting during the special effect (in this example, the island simultaneous effect) in the power saving mode will be described. FIG. 266 to FIG. 268 are diagrams showing a specific example 2 of luminance setting in a time series during the special effect (simultaneous island effect) in the power saving mode.

  The gaming machine of this example shifts to the power saving mode after the power is turned on by switching the power saving mode setting switch 195a to “with setting” when the power is turned off. In this example, the power saving mode switching by the power saving mode setting switch 195a is not accepted after the power is turned on. With such a configuration, there may be a case where a store clerk or the like of an amusement store with little experience can prevent a mistake that erroneously sets the power saving mode to ON. Note that the power saving mode may be switched after the power is turned on.

  As described above, when the power saving mode is set to ON, the luminance is maintained at an initial value (in this example, dark (duty ratio 20%)) and cannot be adjusted. In addition, when the game table is waiting for the game to start (for example, when a demonstration screen is displayed by animation, or when the number of special figure fluctuation games on hold is 0 and the special figure fluctuation is stopped), the game machine is saved. A power saving mode display indicating that the mode is the power mode is performed. Note that the brightness may be adjusted even in the power saving mode, and the power saving mode display may not be performed even in the power saving mode.

  FIG. 266 (a) shows a state when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, and FIG. 266 (b) shows a state after the power is turned on and the mode is shifted to the power saving mode. In the state shown in FIG. 266 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform decorative symbol stop display and power saving mode display.

  The display mode of the power saving mode display is not particularly limited, but here, as the power saving mode display, a character display “in power saving mode” and a display for notifying that the volume and brightness can be adjusted (this example) Then, an image imitating the speaker 120 and an icon composed of characters “change volume with left and right keys”, an image imitating a light emitting means (LED) and an icon composed of characters “luminance changed with up and down keys”) It is carried out. In this example, since the luminance cannot be adjusted, a display suggesting that the luminance can be adjusted (in this example, an image simulating a light emitting means (LED) and “brightness change with up / down keys”). (Display of icons made up of characters) may not be performed.

<Brightness setting during special performance / Specific example 2 / Brightness adjustment by player>
FIG. 266 (c) shows a state in which the operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 has been accepted, and FIG. 266 (d) follows the display of the brightness adjustment screen on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state.

  Here, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 in the state after the transition to the set value adjustment mode shown in FIG. 266 (b). The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 266 (c) (in this example, a character display “in power saving mode” and a display indicating that the brightness cannot be changed (in this example, “brightness cannot be changed”) Character display and scale display indicating the player setting value of the current brightness).

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 266 (d), from the speaker 120 at a volume of 128 dB corresponding to the scale 3 of the setting “7” based on accepting the operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190. A warning sound (third sound) indicating that the brightness cannot be changed is output. Note that a warning sound (third sound) may not be output.

  FIG. 267 (e) shows a state in which an operation by the enter button 190a is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 deletes the brightness adjustment screen as shown in FIG. 267 (f) based on the reception of the operation of the determination button 190a of the first output setting switch 190, A luminance fixed sound (second sound) suggesting that the luminance has been determined is output from the speaker 120 at a volume of 128 dB corresponding to the scale 3 of the setting “7”. In addition, you may comprise so that a brightness | luminance fixed sound (2nd sound) may not be output, and you may output the 4th sound different from a 2nd sound as a brightness | luminance fixed sound.

  FIG. 267 (f) shows a state in which the brightness adjustment screen is erased, and FIG. 267 (g) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is performed and the symbol variation BGM is being output. At the timing shown in FIG. 267 (f), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at a volume of 128 dB corresponding to the scale 3 of the setting “7” based on the player setting value of the volume.

<Brightness setting during special production / Specific example 2 / Volume / brightness adjustment by simultaneous production start on island>
FIG. 267 (h) shows a state in which the island simultaneous production is started. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the fact that the start condition of the island simultaneous production is satisfied, and the current volume (first volume. In this example, 114 dB corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7” Volume) can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) at the administrator setting value (setting “7”), corresponding to the scale 5 in this example. The volume is changed to 152 dB.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the establishment of the start condition for the simultaneous island effect, and the luminance of the current luminance (first luminance. In this example, the luminance of the darkness (duty ratio 20%), which is the initial value. ) Is changed to a brightness that cannot be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) (second brightness. In this example, brightness is bright (duty 100%)).

  The first sub-control unit 400 immediately after (or at the same time as) changing the volume and brightness settings, the sound set to the changed volume (here, 152 dB volume) and the changed brightness (here Then, the island simultaneous production is started using light set to bright (luminance of 100% duty).

<Luminance setting during special production / Specific example 1 / Volume / brightness adjustment at the end of the island production>
FIG. 268 (i) shows a state immediately before the end of the island simultaneous effect, and FIG. 268 (j) follows a state immediately after the end of the simultaneous island effect. The first sub-control unit 400 confirms that the end condition of the island simultaneous performance has been established (in this example, that the special figure variation game being executed has ended. In the case of a big hit game, the start of the next round or When the jackpot game is finished), the current player setting value volume (second volume. In this example, 152 dB volume corresponding to the scale “5” of the setting “7”) is started simultaneously. The volume has been changed (returned) to the previous player set value (first volume; in this example, a volume of 128 dB corresponding to the scale 3 of the setting “7”).

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the current luminance (second luminance. In this example, luminance (luminance with a duty ratio of 100%)) to the island when the end condition of the island simultaneous performance is satisfied. It is changed (returned) to the luminance before the start of simultaneous production (first luminance. In this example, the luminance is dark (duty ratio 20%)).

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 maintains the speaker 120 in the mute state during the period from the end of the island simultaneous performance until the start condition of the next special figure variable game is satisfied, The LEDs on the board side lighting board 532a and the frame side lighting boards 542a to 542c are turned on in the light emitting mode for the end effect. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the sound set to the volume after the change (in this example, 128 dB) when the start condition for the next special figure change game is satisfied, A BGM for changing the symbol of the game is output, and the symbol set for the next special symbol variation game is used by using the light set to the changed luminance (in this example, the luminance of the dark (duty ratio 20%)). The production of.

<Brightness setting during special effects / other examples>
Next, another example of luminance setting will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 and 270.

  FIG. 269 (a) is a diagram showing another example of setting by the power saving mode setting switch 195a. In this example, even when the power saving mode setting switch 195a is set from OFF to ON when the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming machine is configured to shift to the power saving mode after the power is turned on. With such a configuration, even if a game shop clerk notices that the power saving mode has not been set after the power is turned on, it can be set without turning off the power, thereby improving maintainability. There are cases where it is possible.

  FIG. 269 (b) shows another example of the volume adjustment screen. In this example, when the symbol fluctuation is stopped and the number of holds is 0, the volume adjustment screen of the first display mode (for example, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIGS. 256 (c) and (d)) is displayed. When the symbol variation is stopped and the number of holdings is other than 0 (for example, when symbol variation is being displayed), the second display mode different from the first display mode as shown in FIG. The volume adjustment screen is displayed. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp the gaming state at the time of volume adjustment based on the difference in the display mode of the volume adjustment screen, and the display mode of the volume adjustment screen is changed according to each gaming state. For example, it may be possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the rear symbol variation display is reduced by displaying the volume adjustment screen.

  In this example, the first display mode may be the same display mode as the second display mode. Alternatively, the volume adjustment screen may be deleted when an operation by the first output setting switch 190 is not accepted for a predetermined period.

  Further, in this example, while the volume adjustment screen of the first display mode is being displayed, the volume is set to be increased by one step each time an operation of the upper button 190b of the first output setting switch 190 is received and changed. A scale indicating the player setting value of the subsequent volume is displayed, and every time an operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted, the volume is set to be lowered by one level, and the changed volume game is performed. A scale indicating the user setting value is displayed.

  On the other hand, during the display of the volume adjustment screen in the second display mode, every time an operation of the right button 190e of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted, the volume is set to be increased by one step, and the volume of the volume after the change is set. A scale indicating the player setting value is displayed, and every time an operation of the left button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted once, the volume is set to be lowered by one step, and the player setting value of the changed volume is set. The scale is displayed.

  In addition, while the volume adjustment screen of the second display mode is being displayed, the operation of the right button 190e of the first output setting switch 190 and the operation of the left button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 are not accepted. Alternatively, it is configured such that the operation of the upper button 190b of the first output setting switch 190 and the operation of the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190 are not accepted during the display of the volume adjustment screen of the first display mode. May be.

  Further, in this example, the brightness adjustment screen can be displayed only when the symbol is stopped and the number of holdings is 0. While the brightness adjustment screen is being displayed, the left button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 or the right button The brightness can be adjusted by operating the button 190e. The brightness may be adjustable when the symbol is stopped and the number of holdings is other than 0. In this case, the operation by the operating means (in this example, when the symbol variation is stopped and the holding number is 0 is different). Although it is preferable that the luminance can be changed by an operation using the upper button 190b or the lower button 190c of the first output setting switch 190, the luminance may be changed by an operation by the same operation means.

  FIG. 270 (c) is a diagram illustrating an example in which brightness adjustment is possible during the simultaneous production of islands in time series. First, the first sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the fact that the start condition of the island simultaneous production is established, and the current volume (first volume. In this example, 114 dB corresponding to the scale 2 of the setting “7” Volume) can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) at the administrator setting value (setting “7”), corresponding to the scale 5 in this example. The volume is changed to 152 dB.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the island simultaneous production, with the current luminance (first luminance. In this example, the middle luminance corresponding to the scale 2 (duty ratio 70%) Brightness) can be set by the first output setting switch 190 (player operation) at the administrator setting value (setting “7”), the maximum brightness (second brightness. In this example, the setting “7”) The brightness is changed to bright (luminance of 100% duty) corresponding to the scale 3.

  The first sub-control unit 400 immediately after (or at the same time as) changing the volume and brightness settings, the sound set to the changed volume (here, 152 dB volume) and the changed brightness (here Then, the island simultaneous production is started using light set to bright (luminance of 100% duty).

  Further, in this example, only when the special figure fluctuation is stopped and the number of holdings is 0, the brightness can be adjusted even during the island simultaneous performance. Specifically, when an operation with the upper button 190b of the first output switch 190 is accepted, the mode is shifted to the set value adjustment mode and the brightness adjustment screen is displayed.

  Further, during the display of the brightness adjustment screen in the set value adjustment mode, every time an operation of the upper button 190b of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted, a scale display indicating brightness is increased by one, and the first display is performed. Every time an operation of the lower button 190c of the output setting switch 190 is received, a display that reduces the scale display indicating luminance is performed by one. In addition, here, when only the processing for changing the scale display is performed and the setting for changing the luminance of the light emitting means (such as setting of the LED driver) is not performed, and the island simultaneous performance is completed, or the island simultaneous production ends. When an operation for determining the luminance later (for example, an operation using the determination button 190a) is received, a setting for changing the luminance of the light emitting unit is performed.

  In addition, the example of the volume adjustment described with reference to FIG. 270 (b) may be applied to this example so that the volume can be adjusted during the island simultaneous performance. In this case, every time the operation of the right button 190e of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted, a display indicating the volume is increased by one, and the operation of the left button 190d of the first output setting switch 190 is performed once. Each time it is received, the display indicating the volume is reduced by one. In addition, here, only the process of changing the scale display is performed and the setting for changing the volume of the sound output means is not performed, and the operation for confirming the volume when the island simultaneous production ends or after the island simultaneous production ends. When (for example, an operation by the determination button 190a) is received, a setting for changing the volume of the sound output means is performed.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 270) has the light emitting means (for example, the various lamps 418 and 440 shown in FIG. 223, the game board lamp 532). , A game table frame lamp 542) and a transmissive region (for example, transparent plate member 118), and when the first effect is being performed, a luminance setting operation ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “first luminance setting operation.” For example, the light emitting means can emit light at a luminance (for example, a luminance with a medium (duty ratio 70%)) according to the operation by the first output setting switch 190. When the second effect is being performed, the light emitting means emits light at a luminance not corresponding to the first luminance setting operation (for example, bright (100% luminance)), and the first effect Is the island simultaneous production It is a reach production, the second production is the island simultaneous production, the light emitting means is a means provided above the transmission area, and the game stand is The game stand is characterized in that the island simultaneous performance can be executed independently.

  According to the game stand according to the present example, when the island simultaneous production is started, the light emitting means has a luminance that does not correspond to the first luminance setting operation, so that the island simultaneous production is normally performed. It may be easy for the store clerk to understand. In addition, even if the player has set the brightness of the light emitting means, when the island simultaneous production is started, the luminance does not correspond to the first luminance setting operation. In some cases, it is easy to understand and the island simultaneous production can be noticed.

  The “setting” according to the present invention may be “change”. In addition, the brightness according to the first brightness setting operation is a brightness within a range that can be set by the first brightness setting operation (for example, “bright”, “medium”, and “dark”). ”To“ dark ”in any range). In addition, the luminance that does not correspond to the first luminance setting operation is a luminance that can be set by the first luminance setting operation, but cannot be set by the first luminance setting operation (for example, “bright”, “medium” , “Dark” (brighter than “bright”), “Extremely dark (brighter than“ dark ”)”, “Bright” (“bright”) And “middle”), “dark (brightness between“ dark ”and“ middle ”)”, and the like.

  In addition, even if the brightness that has not been set according to the first brightness setting operation is set before the start of the island simultaneous performance, the brightness that has not been applied to the first brightness setting operation when the island simultaneous effect is started. It may be configured to perform the control to be set, but if a brightness that does not correspond to the first brightness setting operation is set before the island simultaneous production is started, the first brightness setting operation is performed. You may comprise so that control which does not perform the control which sets the brightness | luminance which does not respond may be performed. Further, the island simultaneous effect may be an effect related to the island simultaneous effect by sound output means of a game table different from the game table.

  In addition, when a brightness setting operation (hereinafter referred to as “second brightness setting operation” by the store clerk, for example, an operation by the second output setting switch 192) is performed by the store clerk, When the light emitting means does not emit light with the brightness according to the first brightness setting operation, the light emitting means emits light with the brightness according to the second brightness setting operation, and the second effect is started, You may comprise so that the said light emission means may light-emit with the brightness | luminance which does not respond to said 2nd brightness setting operation.

  With this configuration, even if the brightness is set by the operation by the store clerk, when the island simultaneous production starts, the luminance does not correspond to the second luminance setting operation, so the island simultaneous production has started. In some cases, it is easy for the player to understand this, and the player can pay attention to the island simultaneous performance. In addition, even if the store clerk has set the brightness, when the island simultaneous production is started, the light emitting means becomes a luminance that does not respond to the second luminance setting operation, so that the island simultaneous production is performed normally. It may be easy to understand.

  The brightness setting by the second brightness setting operation may be set only before the power is turned on, but may be set after the power is turned on. The operation means capable of performing the second brightness setting operation may be an operation means different from the operation means capable of performing the first brightness setting operation. It may be possible to perform the second brightness setting operation with the same operation means. In this case, the period in which the first luminance setting operation can be accepted and the period in which the second luminance setting operation can be accepted may not be configured to overlap (for example, the second luminance setting operation can be accepted). The period may be a period that starts after the liquid crystal loading display ends (immediately or simultaneously with the end) and ends after the operation to end the second brightness setting operation (immediately or simultaneously with the operation).

  Further, the start timing is not limited to the end, and the liquid crystal loading display may be started or displayed. Moreover, a part or all of the period during which the first luminance setting operation can be accepted and the period during which the second luminance setting operation can be accepted may overlap. In this case, the operation method may be different (for example, the second brightness setting operation can be received by a long press operation, and the first brightness setting operation can be received by a single press).

  Further, when the second effect is not performed, the light emitting unit may be able to emit light with a luminance according to the first luminance setting operation.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the player can be focused on the second effect (island simultaneous effect).

  The above-mentioned “brightness not responding to the first brightness setting operation” is a maximum value of brightness that can be set by the first brightness setting operation. The “brightness not depending on the operation” may be a luminance set as an initial setting.

  With such a configuration, when the island simultaneous production is started, light is emitted at the maximum luminance even if the luminance is lowered, so that there are cases where the production effect can be enhanced and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the second effect ends, the light emitting unit may be configured to be able to emit light with a luminance according to the first luminance setting operation.

  With such a configuration, the effect can be given sharpness, and the player may be able to easily recognize that the island simultaneous effect has ended. In addition, since the player returns to the brightness set by the player after the end of the island simultaneous performance, it is not necessary for the player to set the brightness again to the desired brightness, and the convenience of brightness setting can be improved. There is a case.

  Note that even when the period of the island simultaneous performance ends, the brightness set by the first brightness setting operation does not return, but is set to a brightness different from the brightness (for example, the initially set brightness). Alternatively, the brightness may be set as it is without returning to the brightness and not responding to the first brightness setting operation.

  Further, a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264) is provided, and even if the second effect is started, a display relating to the luminance of the light emitting means (hereinafter referred to as “brightness setting display”). For example, the display of the brightness adjustment screen) can be displayed at least, and the brightness setting display is a display including at least a display indicating brightness according to the first brightness setting operation, and the second effect is Even if it is performed, the said brightness setting display according to said 1st brightness setting operation may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, the brightness setting operation can be performed during the island simultaneous performance period, but since the luminance is not changed, the player feels uncomfortable and makes it easy to recognize that the island simultaneous performance is being executed. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, since the brightness setting operation can be performed even during the period of the island simultaneous performance, it may be possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the inability to perform the setting operation. In addition, the brightness setting operation can be performed during the island simultaneous performance period, but the brightness is not changed, so the player is guided not to perform the brightness setting operation during the island simultaneous performance period, and the player is You may be able to focus on the island production.

  Note that the brightness setting display may not be displayed when the island simultaneous effect is started, and the luminance setting display may be configured to be displayed in a period other than the period in which the island simultaneous effect is executed. In addition, a display indicating that the brightness setting is possible (hereinafter referred to as “brightness icon”) can be displayed. When the brightness icon is displayed, a display start operation of the brightness setting display (for example, a brightness setting operation) is displayed. ) May be configured to display a brightness setting display.

  In addition, a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264) is provided, and the display unit displays on the display unit the display relating to the luminance of the light emitting unit (hereinafter referred to as “brightness setting display”). Screen display) can be displayed at least, and when the second effect is started, the brightness setting display displayed on the display means may not be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible for the player to easily notice that the island simultaneous production has started.

  Moreover, even if island simultaneous production is started, you may comprise so that the brightness | luminance setting display currently displayed on the display means may be displayed continuously. In addition, when the island simultaneous performance is started and the luminance setting display displayed on the display means is not displayed, the luminance setting display is displayed again by the display operation of the luminance setting display during the period when the island simultaneous production is executed. You may comprise so that it can display. The brightness setting display displayed again here is the same display as before (immediately before) the non-display (for example, a display showing the brightness set by the first brightness setting operation before the brightness setting display is hidden, etc. It may be a different display (for example, a display showing the luminance determined last before the luminance setting display is not displayed).

  In addition, when the island simultaneous performance is started and the luminance setting display displayed on the display means is not displayed, the luminance setting display is displayed again by the display operation of the luminance setting display during the period when the island simultaneous production is executed. It may be configured so that it cannot be displayed, and the brightness setting display can be displayed again by the display operation of the brightness setting display after the island simultaneous effect is finished (immediately or simultaneously).

  In addition, an effect control unit (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) is provided, and the effect control unit sets a setting value corresponding to the luminance corresponding to the first luminance setting operation (hereinafter referred to as “first” The brightness control means is a means for executing at least the brightness setting control for the brightness not responding to the first brightness setting operation when the second effect is started. The second brightness setting control is a means for executing at least a control for setting a value (hereinafter referred to as “second brightness setting control”). The second brightness setting control is a brightness setting control different from the first brightness setting control. In addition, the luminance that does not correspond to the first luminance setting operation may be a luminance that can be set by the first luminance setting control.

  With such a configuration, when the island simultaneous production is started, the light emitting means has a luminance that does not correspond to the first luminance setting operation, so it is easy for the store clerk to understand that the island simultaneous production is performed normally. You may be able to. In addition, even if the player has set the brightness of the light emitting means, when the island simultaneous production is started, the luminance does not correspond to the first luminance setting operation. In some cases, it is easy to understand, and it is possible to draw attention to the island simultaneous production.

  The effect control means can execute effect control different from the first brightness setting control and the second brightness setting control (for example, effect control performed by the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500). It may be a simple control means. The effect control means may be a control means different from the main control means, but the effect control means and the main control means may be configured by one control means. The payout control means may be provided separately from the main control means, but the main control means and the payout control means may be configured by one control means.

  The second luminance setting control is control for causing the light emitting means to emit light at a luminance not corresponding to the first luminance setting operation, and the first luminance setting operation is changed to the first luminance setting operation. Even if it is set to a brightness other than the non-responsive brightness, it may be a control to forcibly emit light with a brightness not responding to the first brightness setting operation.

  A first operation unit; and a second operation unit. The first operation unit is a unit provided at a position where the first brightness setting operation can be received. The operation means is provided at a position where a brightness setting operation (hereinafter referred to as “second brightness setting operation”) by a store clerk can be received, and the second operation means is the first operation. The second brightness setting operation may determine a brightness range that can be set by the first brightness setting operation.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally performing the second brightness setting operation by providing the operation means for the brightness setting operation by the store clerk.

  Note that “the range of brightness that can be set by the first brightness setting operation is determined” means that the brightness that can be set by the first brightness setting operation is more limited than before the second brightness setting operation is performed. This may indicate that the range of brightness that can be set is larger than before the second brightness setting operation is performed.

  In addition, each of the “second luminance setting operations” described above may indicate the same operation, or may indicate different operations. When each operation indicates a different operation, an operation means that can be operated by a store clerk may be provided separately from the second operation means (for example, the first operation means and the second operation means). A third operation means different from the first operation means), different operation methods in one operation means (for example, the second operation means) (for example, “turn right” and “turn left” for a knob) It may be configured to be able to.

  Further, even when the light emitting means emits light with a luminance not corresponding to the first luminance setting operation during the island simultaneous performance, the sound volume set by the player may be output. Further, even during the island simultaneous performance, a specific light emission mode (for example, an error in which the luminance setting by the player is effective, such as a lower plate full tank error) may remain at the luminance set by the player. The specific sound may also be set as the second sound during the simultaneous production of the island.

  Further, the light emission pattern for specific notification (for example, error notification (may also include a lower pan full error)) in the light emission pattern of the light emitting means may be configured to be output with the highest priority (display). May be set to the frontmost layer). In addition, the brightness of specific notification light emission (various errors) cannot be set by the player, but a part of the specific notification light emission brightness (for example, a lower plate full tank error) can be set by the player. It may be.

  In addition, a door body is provided, and the door body is at least configured by a front door (or configured by a front door (for example, front frame door 106) and an inner frame (for example, main body 104)), The front door is a means provided with at least the transmission region, and the front door includes a movable means (for example, movable bodies 224A and 224C, a movable operation means (for example, a part of the operation means by a drive means ( For example, an operation means (for example, a chance button or the like) that moves to a position where the chance button cover portion protrudes from the initial position (or a depressed position (depressed position)), or a part or all of the operation means And / or a rotating operation means (for example, a chance button or a lever, a touch panel type liquid crystal display device). The movable means is a means provided with the light emitting means, and when the second effect is started, the light emission is performed according to the operation of the movable means. The means may emit light.

  Also, some of the light emitting means controlled by the effect control means (for example, the light emitting means for the 4th symbol and the light emitting means for holding) have the luminance according to the luminance setting by the player. It may be configured not to be changed. The backlight for the display means controlled by the liquid crystal control means is configured so that the brightness is not changed according to the brightness setting by the player, but the brightness is changed according to the brightness setting by the player. It may be configured to be possible.

  Further, the light emitting means (for example, special figure display device, universal map display device, hold display device, etc.) controlled by the main control means are configured so that the luminance is not changed according to the luminance setting by the player. Also good. Further, the light emitting means (CR unit, payout lamp, etc.) controlled by the payout control means may be configured such that the luminance is not changed according to the luminance setting by the player.

  In addition, the sound volume and / or brightness set for the player may be initialized when a certain time has elapsed (for example, 10 minutes have elapsed) since the symbol stopped. The volume and / or brightness set for the player may not be initialized until the power is turned off.

  In addition, movable means (for example, movable bodies 224A and 224C) and movable operating means (for example, a part of the operating means (for example, the cover part of the chance button) protruded from the initial position by the driving means on the front frame door 106. Operating means (for example, a chance button) that moves to a position (or a depressed position (depressed position)), or an operating means that a part or all of the operating means vibrates and / or rotates (for example, a chance button, lever, touch panel) The movable body 224A is a movable body provided at a position above the transmission region (transparent plate member 118). The light emitting means may be provided.

  In addition, when the island simultaneous production is started, the movable means operates (for example, the movement of the operation position from the initial position and the initial position (protrusion or depression (depression), if the door-like movable means is open to the closed state)) The light emitting means emits light according to the operation of the movable means (for example, turns on and off according to the operation of the movable means). Or changing the brightness).

<Examples of other game machines>
The game stand according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and corresponds to, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not the internal winning of plural types of winnings is successful by lottery, and stop of reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination predetermined for the winning combination internally A determination means for determining, and a payout control means for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode. Also, such as the slot machine is suitable.

<Examples of other game machines / slot machines>
Hereinafter, a slot machine 1000 which is an example of a game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 271 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 272 (a) is an external perspective view of the operation button unit provided in the slot machine 1000, and FIG. 272 (b) is a plan view of the operation button unit.

  A slot machine 100 illustrated in FIG. 271 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. In the center of the main body 1001, three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored and rotated inside the slot machine 1000. It is configured to be able to. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display device that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. In the present embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right The down line and the upper right line may be set as valid pay lines, and the same number of pay lines may be set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1041 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, the medal can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are 7 segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  A rectangular chance button 1100 arranged on the right side of the bet button 1032 and an operation button unit 1046 arranged on the right side of the chance button 1100 are one of operation means used for various operations by the player. . As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 272, the operation button unit 1046 has a rectangular base 1050. On the base 1050, an upper button 1046U, a lower button 1046D, a left button 1046L, and a right button 1046R. And an OK button 1046O and a clear button 1046C.

  Returning to FIG. 271, the medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing the medal return button 1033 and removing the medal when the inserted medal is jammed. The payment button 1034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted.

  Below the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various types of certificate stamps is provided. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (effect image) disposed on the back side of the shutter 1063. The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 appears on the front side (player side) of the slot machine 1000 when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057. It has become. It should be noted that the display device is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, the advantageous state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a BB gaming state (big bonus gaming state) or an RB gaming state (regular bonus gaming state).

  The BB gaming state is a gaming state in which the total number of medals to be acquired exceeds the total number of inserted medals. The BB gaming state is a gaming state that is started by winning a big bonus (BB) and is capable of repeatedly executing the RB gaming state (described later), and is a predetermined number ( For example, the gaming state ends when medals exceeding 465) are acquired. The BB gaming state is set to start the RB gaming state when the winning combination (for example, replay-replay-replay) is set and the winning combination is won or won. Alternatively, when the BB general gaming state excluding the RB gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), or when the number of executions of the RB gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). It may be a gaming state that ends at the end.

  The RB gaming state is a gaming state in which the total number of medals to be acquired exceeds the total number of inserted medals. The RB gaming state is a gaming state that starts when a regular bonus (RB) is won and ends when medals exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 120) are obtained during the game. The RB gaming state may be a gaming state that ends when it is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times).

  The advantageous state includes, for example, an AT gaming state (assist time gaming state) in addition to the above-described BB gaming state and RB gaming state. The AT gaming state is a gaming state in which an effect suggesting the operation timing of the stop operation means or the pressing order is performed so that the player can obtain an advantageous result. Specifically, when the internal winning combination is given to the push order small combination, it is a gaming state in which an effect suggesting an operation order for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the push order small combination on the active line is executed, and the operation timing Depending on the situation, when an internal winning is made for a missing small combination, the game state is such that an effect suggesting a symbol combination corresponding to the missing small combination is executed. This is a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) is reached during the game. If there is an additional number of games while a predetermined number of games are being executed during the game, the gaming state is terminated when the number of games including the added number of games is reached. The AT gaming state may further be accompanied by an RT gaming state (replay time) in which the internal winning probability of the re-gamer is increased (sometimes referred to as an ART gaming state). In addition, the AT gaming state may be a gaming state (pseudo bonus gaming state) in which an effect as if it is a big bonus gaming state or a regular bonus gaming state is executed.

  Further, the advantageous state may include a preparation state that is executed when it is determined that the big bonus gaming state, the regular bonus gaming state, or the AT gaming state is executed.

  On the other hand, the normal state is a state before a gaming state that is beneficial to the player (a gaming state that is the most disadvantageous to the player in the gaming state or a gaming state that has the longest set period) For example, there are a gaming state in which game media decreases, a non-BB gaming state, a non-RB gaming state, a non-AT gaming state, and a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of a re-gamer is the lowest probability.

[Eighteenth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Note that the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 and the contents of various processes in the present embodiment are the same as those in the sixteenth embodiment. Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the same reference numerals are used, and illustrations and detailed descriptions are omitted. In addition, symbols (examples A, B,...) Of examples of the present embodiment and symbols used for the description thereof are used only for the description of the present embodiment in principle. Examples and other examples of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted.
<Example of production by production means>
With reference to FIGS. 273 to 319, an example of the effect produced by the effect unit according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect of the present embodiment on the display means (decorative symbol display device 208).

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the gaming table of the present embodiment has an effect A that is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, a constant cycle), and an arbitrary effect as shown in FIG. Both effects B that are executed at timing (for example, aperiodically) can be executed. For example, the production A is a simultaneous production (also called an island simultaneous production) in which the same type of game machines introduced into the hall perform a special production at a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) after the power is turned on. The effect B is an effect different from the effect A, for example, an effect executed in an advantageous state where the player is advantageous. The advantageous state includes, for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, an electric support state, and the like. In addition, even if it is not in an advantageous state, when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when a normal game state is reached after the end of the big hit game), for example, 30 special symbol fluctuation displays after the end of the big hit game The production B may be executable even before is performed. That is, the effect B is an effect that starts when the first effect start condition such as the start of the big hit game, the transition to the probability change state or the electric support state, or the shift from the big hit game to the normal game state is satisfied. be able to. The production B may be executed by only one gaming machine 100 that is a big hit, or may be executed synchronously by a plurality of gaming machines 100 that are a big hit (or during probability change, during electric support, etc.). is there. In this way, an effect performed in synchronism with a plurality of game machines 100 may be referred to as a link effect. Here, the “link effect” of the present embodiment is an effect (for example, individual display) that is related to each other using the effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker, the movable body, etc.) of the plurality of game machines 100. Although the same display is produced by the production means, the same sound is output from each production means, the different display is given by each production means, or the different sounds are outputted from the individual production means. , As a whole, it means performing a grouped production, etc.).

  Further, the effects A and B can be executed simultaneously in at least a part of the period. In addition, when the effects A and B are simultaneously executed, at least a part of the effects A and at least a part of the effects B may be effects related to each other (for example, effects in which the effect modes are synchronized with each other). is there. This is the same in all examples of the present embodiment. In addition, when the production A and the production B are executed at the same time, one production may be displayed as a wipe, for example.

  With such a configuration, a player who is in an advantageous state (for example, getting a ball) while securing the execution frequency of the simultaneous performance (effect A) executed at a predetermined (periodic) timing. On the other hand, there may be a case where an effect (effect B) that further enhances the interest of the game can be experienced.

  FIG. 274 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the effect of the present embodiment on the display means (decorative symbol display device 208).

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has an effect A that is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, a predetermined cycle) in a certain period (for example, a decorative symbol). It can be executed in the display area (main display area) D1) of the display device 208, and other effects can be executed in other areas (for example, the display area (sub display area) D2 of the sub display device 208S). In addition, as shown in FIG. 4B, in a certain period, the effect B executed at an arbitrary timing (for example, aperiodically) is also one area (for example, the display area (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). It can be executed in the main display area (D1), and effects can be executed in other areas (for example, the display area (sub display area) D2 of the sub display device 208S).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 5C, when the effects A and B can be executed simultaneously in at least a part of the period, for example, the effect A is displayed in the main display area D1 (for example, a decorative symbol display device). 208 can be executed in the sub display area D2 (for example, the display area D2 of the sub display device 208S). In addition, when the operation means is operated during these executions, the effect A can be executed in the sub display area D2 and the effect B can be executed in the first main display area D1. In the following example, the effects shown in FIGS. 273 and 274 will be described in detail.

<Direction means>
FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram of effect means capable of executing the effects (effects A and B including effects B) shown in FIGS. 273 and 274 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the effects A (for example, simultaneous effects that are executed periodically) and effects B (the link effects in an advantageous game state that are executed aperiodically) shown in FIGS. 273 and 274 ) Can be executed not only by display means (decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S) but also by other effect means (for example, movable means such as movable bodies 224A, 224B, 224C). The production means also includes a speaker 120 and various lamps 418 (not shown). The various lamps 418 are, for example, LEDs provided on the gaming table 100. That is, the effects include effects due to sound output from the speaker 120 or effects due to light emission of various lamps (LEDs) 418.

  In addition, a plurality of patterns are prepared for effects including effects A and effects B, and each effect can be switched by, for example, effect switching means 650 shown in FIG. The effect switching means 650 is, for example, a DIP (Dual In-line Package) switch 650 that is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 and can be operated by a store clerk of the game shop. A plurality of (for example, four) DIP switches 650 are provided corresponding to the aspect of the effect, and are electrically connected to the first sub-control unit 400 (first sub-board 160) and the like.

  FIGS. 3C to 3E are schematic views showing a display area D of display means for displaying effects. The effects of this embodiment (effects including effects A and effects B) can be displayed in the display area D shown in FIGS.

  The display area D includes a main display area D1 and a sub display area D2. The main display area D1 is a main display area that is easy for the player to visually recognize. The sub display area D2 has a display area smaller than the main display area D1, for example, and is a sub display area. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, for example, the main display area D1 and the sub display area D2 are areas provided separately from each other. In this case, the main display area D1 is, for example, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display area D2 is, for example, the display area of the sub display device 208S. The main display area D1 and the sub display area D2 can display exactly the same effects, and can execute effects independently of each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4D, the sub display area D2 may be an area included in the main display area D1 (overlaps with a part of the main display area D1). Specifically, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the main display region D1, and a region provided in a part of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlapping the main display region D1 is the sub display region. D2. Even in this configuration, the main display area D1 and the sub display area D2 can display exactly the same effects, and can execute effects independently of each other, but the sub display area D2 has a so-called wipe shape. Since it is displayed so as to overlap a part of the display area D1, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the main display area D1 behind it while displaying the effect in the sub display area D2. On the other hand, when the effect in the sub display area D2 is not displayed, the effect (display) is visible in all the main display area D1.

  Further, the sub display area D2 of the present embodiment refers to an area where an effect can be displayed independently of the effect displayed in the main display area D1, and a plurality of sub display areas D2 are provided as shown in FIG. May be present. In this example, a wipe-like sub-display area D21 (wipe-like display area 208W) that overlaps a part of the main display area D1 in one decorative symbol display device 208 and display means separate from the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, two sub display areas D2 (D21, D22) of the sub display area D22 (sub display device 208S) are provided. Note that “an effect can be displayed independently of the effect displayed in the main display area D1” may indicate an effect completely different from the effect displayed in the main display area D1. An effect that is partially different from the effect displayed in the area D1 (partly the same or related (synchronized)) may be displayed, or the effect that is exactly the same as the effect displayed in the main display area D1 Can be displayed.

<Timekeeping means>
FIG. 276 is a diagram illustrating an example of a time measuring unit. As shown in FIG. 4A, the microcomputer (basic circuit 402) of the first sub-control unit 400 includes a time measuring means. The clocking means is a software timer or a hardware timer, and specifically includes a counter timer 412 and a timer circuit 652 that count one by one for each interrupt for a predetermined period. By these time measuring means, it is possible to execute a simultaneous effect after a certain period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on (periodically, every predetermined time). The basic circuit 402 also includes an RTC (real-time clock) circuit 654. The IC of the RTC circuit 654 has a built-in power supply, and when it comes to a preprogrammed time from the start of power supply, the same type of game machines introduced into the hall will produce special effects (RTC effects) all at once. You can also. In that sense, the RTC circuit 654 can be said to be a time measuring means, and the RTC effect can also be said to be a simultaneous effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the timer circuit 652 and the RTC circuit 654 may be provided separately from the first sub-control unit 400 (the basic circuit 402).

  In this embodiment, two or more timer circuits 652 may be provided, and one of the timer circuits 652 may be used as the first time measuring means, and the other one of the timer circuits 652 may be used as the second time measuring means. . Two or more RTC circuits 654 may be provided, and one of the timer circuits 652 may be used as the first time measuring means, and the other one RTC circuit 654 may be used as the second time measuring means. In addition, the timer circuit 652 may be used as the first time measuring means, and the RTC circuit 654 may be used as the second time measuring means. Alternatively, the timer circuit 652 may be used as the second time measuring means, and the RTC circuit 654 may be used as the first time measuring means. And you may comprise so that the production (for example, production B) managed by the 1st time measuring means and the production (for example, production E) managed by the 2nd time measuring means may be provided. In other words, the production E (sometimes referred to as the fourth production) is also configured in the same manner as the production B, for example, depending on the result of timing by the second timing means when the production E is started. It may be configured to start from the middle or may start from the beginning. For example, the effect B may be an effect or the like that is executed in the electric support state, while the effect E may be an effect or the like that is executed in a customer waiting state in which no special display is displayed. Further, the effects B and E may be executed under the same conditions. For example, when transitioning to the electric support state, which of the effects B and E is executed is determined by lottery or the like. It may be configured to.

  FIGS. 3C and 3D are tables showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the time measuring method by the time measuring means and the effects to be executed. Production A and production B of the present embodiment can be executed in relation to the time measured by the time measuring means. “Executable in relation to the time measured by the time measuring means” means that the time value is related to the start of execution of each of the effects A and B, or the time value is related to the contents of the effects of the effects A and B It may be related to both of these, and may be related to the time value itself, or may be related to data that changes in accordance with the time value. In the case where the effect B is executed during the big hit or the probability change, it can be said that the time value is not related to the start of the execution of the effect B, but the time value is related to the effect content of the effect B.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5C, the first sub-control unit 400 includes a counter 1 that can count from 1 to n. For example, the numerical value (timed value) of the counter 1 is 108000. When it becomes, the production A1a is executed, and when the timekeeping value becomes 216000, the production A2a is executed, and when the timekeeping value becomes 324,000, the production A3a is executed, and the timekeeping value becomes 540000. When it becomes, the effect A1b is executed, when the time value becomes 648,000, the effect A2b is executed, and when the time value becomes 756000, the effect A3b is executed.

  Here, the production A1a, the production A2a, the production A3a..., The production A1b, the production A2b, the production A3b... Represent each part (production part, production data) of the production A that changes over time, and the production A1a. The production A2a and the production A3a are productions related to the first production mode (for example, continuous), and the production A1b, the production A2b, and the production A3b are productions related to the second production mode (for example, continuous). is there.

  As an example, when the production A is a voice output production of singing, the production A1a is a singing part 1 by male vocal, the production A2a is a singing part 2 by male vocal, and an production A3a is a singing part 3 by male vocal, and the production A1b Is singing part 1 by female vocal, production A2b is singing part 2 by female vocal, production A3b is singing part 3 by female vocal, and so on. In this case, the singing by the male vocal and the singing by the female vocal may be the same or different. The production A may include an accompaniment in accordance with the singing, display of animation, etc., movement of the movable body 224, and production by light emission of various lamps (LEDs) 418. In the case of singing, it may be singing alone, or may be sung by a plurality of people such as singing, chorusing, heavy singing, and singing, and may be accompanied by a performance (accompaniment). Moreover, although singing was demonstrated here as an example, the performance (ensemble, solo, etc.) only of a music may be sufficient.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4D, the first sub-control unit 400 includes, for example, a counter 1 (timer means) capable of timing from 1 to 108000 and data based on the counter 1 (timer means) (for example, A counter 2 capable of storing data that is incremented when the time value of the counter 1 reaches 108000) may be provided, and a corresponding effect may be executed according to the data based on the time measuring means. That is, when the value of the counter 1 (time value) becomes 108000, the value of the counter 2 becomes 1 (counter 1 is cleared to 0), and when the time value of the counter 1 becomes 108000 again, When the value of the counter 2 becomes 2, and when the counter 1 clears to 0 and becomes 108000 again, the value of the counter 2 becomes 3, and when the counter 1 clears to 0 and becomes 108000 again, the counter 2 When the counter 1 is cleared to 0 and then reaches 108000 again, the value of the counter 2 is 5, and when the counter 1 is cleared to 0 and becomes 108000 again, the value of the counter 2 is Becomes 6.

  When the value of the counter 2 is 1, the effect A1a is executed. When the value of the counter 2 is 2, the effect A2a is executed. When the value of the counter 2 is 3, the effect A3a is executed. When the value of the counter 2 is 4, the effect A1b is executed, when the value of the counter 2 is 5, the effect A2b is executed, and when the value of the counter 2 is 6, the effect A3b Is executed.

<Mode of production>
Hereinafter, the aspect of the production including production A and production B will be described. FIG. 277 is a table showing an example of the relationship between execution of effects A and effects B and other functions.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the pachinko machine 100 has a plurality of functions (for example, function A to function G). Note that the functions A to G do not mean that the pachinko machine 100 has only seven functions, but simply means that the pachinko machine 100 has a plurality of arbitrary functions. Examples of functions A to G are: volume adjustment (change) function, song selection function, movement of hold icon indicating the number of hold of the change, animation display function such as change, tutorial display function, notice effect function , Light quantity change function, stage selection function, display area selection function, production favorite selection function, character selection function, menu display function, etc., including both functions that the player can select and functions that the player cannot select It is.

  FIG. 6A shows an example of the relationship between functions A to G that are valid (invalid) during execution of production A and production B and during non-execution thereof. For example, the function A is effective (○) during the execution of the production A, is effective during the execution of the production B, and is also effective during the non-execution of the production A (displayed as “non-production A” in the figure). This means that the effect is effective even when the effect B is not executed (displayed as “non-effect B” in the figure). Further, the function C is valid (◯) during the execution of the production A, but invalid (×) during the execution of the production B, and both are valid during the non-execution of the production A and the production B. It means that. In addition, the function G is invalid (×) during the execution of the production A and the execution B, but is valid (O) during the non-execution of the production A and the production B. I mean.

  For example, if the function G is a character selection function (or volume adjustment function), the character selection function (or volume adjustment function) is performed during the execution of the effects A and B. Although it is invalid, if the effects A and B are not being executed, it indicates that the character selection function (or volume control function) is enabled. Further, for example, if the function C is a hold icon movement animation display function, the hold icon movement animation display function is performed while the production A is being executed and the production A is not being executed and the production B is not being executed. Although it is valid (that is, the movement animation of the hold icon can be executed), the function for displaying the movement animation of the hold icon is disabled (that is, the movement animation of the hold icon cannot be executed) while the production B is being executed. When executed, the hold icon movement animation is canceled even during execution. The combination of valid (◯) and invalid (×) shown in the figure is also an example, and various combinations other than those shown are possible.

  FIG. 5B is a table showing an example of the relationship between the gaming state, effects A and B, and each function (here, function A).

  The state A is, for example, a state in which the symbol is changing, and the state B is, for example, a state that is not in the state A (not in the state of changing symbol). That is, the function A is effective during the execution of the effects A and B in the state of symbol variation (state A), and is effective during the non-execution of the effects A and B. On the other hand, in the state where the symbol is not changing (state B), it is valid during the execution of the production A and during the non-execution of the production A and the production B, but is invalid during the execution of the production B. Is shown. Although only the function A is shown in the figure, the functions B to G... Also correspond to the respective functions as shown in FIG. There is a valid / invalid relationship according to the combination.

  Examples of state A and state B (state A ≠ state B) include special figure change start, special figure change stop, big hit start, big prize opening open, big prize opening closed, V attacker released, V attacker closed, big hit end Specific game state start, specific game state end, general figure change start, general figure change stop, electric chew release, electric chew closure, decorative symbol change start, decorative symbol change stop, demo transition, demo end, etc.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5C, when the effects A and B are being executed simultaneously, the validity / invalidity of various functions (here, function A) may be associated. Although only the function A is shown in the figure, the functions B to G... Also correspond to the respective functions as shown in FIG. It has a valid / invalid relationship according to the combination.

  FIG. 278 is a table showing an example of the correspondence between execution patterns of effects A and effects B by the effect means. Here, as an example, the rendering means A, B, and C are movable bodies 224A, 224B, and 224C shown in FIG. 275 (a), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, for example, when the effect A is being executed and the effect B is not being executed, the effect means A to C all control the effect operation based on the control data of the effect A. Further, when the effect B is being executed and the effect A is not being executed, the effect means A to C are all controlled based on the control data of the effect B. When both the production A and the production B are being executed (simultaneous execution), the production means A and the production means B are controlled by the production operation based on the control data of the production A, and the production means C controls the production B. The production operation is controlled based on the data.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5B, for example, when the effect A is being executed and the effect B is not being executed, the effect means A and B are both controlled based on the control data of the effect A. However, the production means C is not used for the production A. Also, when the production B is being executed and the production A is not being executed, the production means A and C are both controlled based on the control data of the production B, but the production means B is not used for the production B. . When both the production A and the production B are being executed (simultaneous execution), the production means A and the production means B are controlled by the production operation based on the control data of the production A, and the production means C controls the production B. The production operation is controlled based on the data.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6C, for example, when the production A is being executed and the production B is not being executed, the production means A and B are both controlled based on the production data of the production A. However, the production means C is not used for the production A. Further, when the effect B is being executed and the effect A is not being executed, the effect means A to C are all controlled based on the control data of the effect B. When both the production A and the production B are being executed (simultaneous execution), the production means A and the production means B are controlled by the production operation based on the control data of the production A, and the production means C controls the production B. The production operation is controlled based on the data.

  In this example, the case where the production units A to C are the movable bodies 224A to 224C has been described as an example. It corresponds to all the rendering means such as the device 208 and the sub display device 208S). Further, the production means A to C do not limit that the number of production means is three, but simply means that the pachinko machine 100 has a plurality of arbitrary production means. Further, the correspondence relationship between the production means A to C and the productions A and B is not limited to the combination shown in FIG.

  FIG. 279 is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect (production part) of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5A, the pachinko machine 100 can execute a plurality of effects (effect A, effect B, effect C, effect D,...).

  As already described, the effect A is, for example, a simultaneous effect that is executed periodically, and the effect B is an effect that is executed aperiodically and has an advantageous gaming state (for example, during a big hit or during a probable change). This is a link effect that is executed at, and an effect that can be switched on and off by the DIP switch 650. On the other hand, effects C, D... Are effects other than effects A, B, for example, effects during symbol changes, effects during normal games, effects during super reach, etc. It is a production that does not depend on operation.

  The production A is, for example, a song (for example, 5 minutes) composed of a plurality of parts (production part (also referred to as production data)) of the production A1-1a, the production A1-2a, the production A1-3a,. And one piece of music composed of a plurality of parts of production A2-1a, production A2-2a, production A2-3a..., Production A1-1b, production A1-2b, production A1. -3b... 1 piece composed of a plurality of parts (for example, 5 minutes) and production A2-1b, production A2-2b, production A2-3b. And a song (for example, 5 minutes).

  Here, the difference in the notation of each part indicates the difference in the production mode (contents). For example, “Production A1XX” and “Production A2XX” indicate different tunes, and the end is “A” is a song by a male vocal, and “b” at the end indicates a song by a female vocal.

  Then, the effects described in each line are executed every day (for example, every hour after opening). That is, the music composed of a plurality of parts of production A1-1a, production A1-2a, production A1-3a,... (Production A1a) is executed at the time of simultaneous production at 10 o'clock every day. As for the music composed of a plurality of parts of A2-2a, production A2-3a... (Production A2a), a predetermined music is executed every hour so as to be executed every day at 11:00. As described above, in the present embodiment, the production A is an production that is always started from the head (for example, the production A1 and the production A2) when it is scheduled (when the first production start time is reached). It can be said. In the present embodiment, the start time of effect A is managed using the same timer circuit 652 that manages the effect time of effect B. However, the start time of effect A and the effect time of effect B are controlled. A separate timer circuit 652 may be used for management.

  Further, in the simultaneous production, the above-mentioned production is executed in some pachinko machines 100, and a plurality of parts of production A1-1b, production A1-2b, production A1-3b,. A music composed of a plurality of parts (production A2b, production A2-1b, production A2-2b, production A2-3b, etc.). ) May be executed every day at 11 o'clock at the same time. That is, at the time of simultaneous production at 10 o'clock every day, in two adjacent pachinko machines 100, on the right platform, production A1a started with production A1-1a (for example, music A1 by male vocal) is executed, At the stage, an effect A1b (for example, a musical piece A1 by female vocal) that is started at the effect A1-1b is executed. In addition, at the time of simultaneous production at 11 o'clock every day, on the right platform of the two adjacent pachinko machines 100, production A2a started with production A2-1a (for example, musical piece A2 by male vocal) is executed. On the stand, an effect A2b (for example, music A2 by female vocal) that is started at the effect A2-1b is executed.

  The production B is the same as the production A. For example, a piece of music (for example, 5 minutes) composed of a plurality of parts (production parts) of the production B1-1a, the production B1-2a, the production B1-3a,. (Production B1a), Production B2-1a, Production B2-2a, Production B2-3a, etc. One piece (for example, 5 minutes) of music (production B2a) and Production B1-1b , Production B1-2b, production B1-3b... One piece (for example, 5 minutes) music (production B1b), production B2-1b, production B2-2b, production B2-3b ... 1 piece (for example, 5 minutes) of music composed of a plurality of parts (production B2b).

  Moreover, the difference in the notation of each part shows the difference in production mode (contents). For example, “Production B1XX” and “Production B2XX” indicate different music pieces, and the suffix “ “a” is a song by a male vocal, and “b” at the end indicates a song by a female vocal.

  Then, the effects described in each row are executed at an arbitrary timing, such as a big hit effect or a probable change effect. Hereinafter, description will be given assuming that the effect B is executed in the case of the big hit effect, but the effect B may be executed in another advantageous state such as the probability variation effect. That is, the music composed of a plurality of parts of production B1-1a, production B1-2a, production B1-3a,... Is executed, for example, during the jackpot production, and production B2-1a, production B2-2a, production B2- The music composed of a plurality of parts 3a... Is also executed at the time of the big hit effect. In addition, the effect B may be, for example, an effect in the electric support state in addition to the effect of the big hit effect or the probability variation effect. That is, the effect B may be an effect that is started when the electric support state is reached. In addition, the game state may be executable even if the game state is not advantageous and a specific condition is satisfied, for example, a normal game state in which the game state after the end of the big hit game is neither a probability change state nor an electric support state In this case, the effect B may be executed during a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) after the end of the big hit game.

  Even in the case of a link effect in which the same jackpot effect is simultaneously executed by a plurality of pachinko machines 100, different effects may be executed by the pachinko machine 100. That is, in the two adjacent pachinko machines 100, the right base performs the effect B1a (for example, music B1 by male vocal) that is started at the effect B1-1a at the time of the big hit effect, while the left stand simultaneously At the time of the big hit effect to be executed, the effect B1b (for example, music B1 by female vocal) that is started with the effect B1-1b is executed. In addition, in the right base of the two adjacent pachinko machines 100, an effect B2a (for example, music B2 by male vocal) that is started at the effect B2-1a at the time of the big hit effect is executed, and in the left stand, the effect B2 Production B2b (for example, music B2 by female vocal) that starts at -1b may be executed.

  With respect to the production A and the production B, which production (in this example, the music described in each row) can be set by the DIP switch 650 for each pachinko machine 100.

  In this example, “production A1XX”, “production A2XX”, “production B1XX”, and “production B2XX” mean the difference in music, and the end is “a”. “,” “B” means a difference in vocals, but is not limited thereto. In other words, in a plurality of different effects (effects of each line) constituting the effect A (the effect of the effect B), a portion using the same number or the same alphabet is at least a part of one effect is a part of another effect It is related to. “A part of one production is related to a part of another production” means that even if one production and another production are executed at the same time, there will be no discomfort (no discomfort). It is related (something is in harmony). To give a specific example, at least a part of the music is the same melody, or different melody but harmonious (main melody and sub melody etc.) It means what is. When the music is singing, it means the same lyrics, the same (gender) vocal, chorus, singing, or singing. Moreover, it is not limited to singing, but may be a performance (ensemble, ensemble, performance of interaction) or the like.

  The effects A and B are not limited to music, but may be light emission by various lamps (LEDs), operation by the movable body 224, and display on the decorative symbol display device 208 (sub display device 208S). Further, the effects A and B may be executed by one or a combination of two or more of these effects. Examples of the light emission of the LED and the “operation related” of the movable body 224 include a state where the light emission or the operation is performed in the same timing, the same rhythm, or in response to each other. Examples of “display related” include the same characters appearing, characters talking to each other, and a portion of the display in common.

  In addition, a part of one effect is related to a part of another effect in a plurality of effects constituting the effect A, or a part of one effect in a plurality of effects constituting the effect B is one of the other effects. Not only the configuration related to the section, but also a configuration in which a part of one effect is related to a part of another effect between the effects A and the effects B.

  Furthermore, the effect C (for example, the effect during the pattern change) is also composed of, for example, a plurality of parts (effect part (also referred to as effect data)) of the effect C1-1, the effect C1-2, the effect C1-3,. 1 song (for example, 5 minutes) and 1 song (for example, 5 minutes) composed of a plurality of parts of production C2-1, production C2-2, production C2-3, etc. Consists of including.

  In addition, the production D (for example, production during super reach) is, for example, a plurality of parts (production part (also referred to as production data)) of production D1-1, production D1-2, production D1-3,. 1 music (for example, 5 minutes) composed, and 1 music (for example, 5 minutes) composed of a plurality of parts of production D2-1, production D2-2, production D2-3, It is comprised including.

  (B) in the figure is a table in which the simultaneous effects (effects A1) executed in a certain time (10 o'clock) after power-on in FIG.

  The production A1 is, for example, an production based on the music A1, and by preparing a plurality of production data for the same music A1 as shown in FIG. 5B, the same music A1 can be played in different modes. ing. For example, productions A1-1a, A1-2a, and A1-3a are production data (voice data) sung by male vocals, and productions A1-1b, A1-2b, and A1-3b are performed by female vocals. Production data (voice data) to be performed (for female part), and productions A1-1ab, A1-2ab, and A1-3ab are production data (voice data) for male vocals and female vocals. .

  In the pachinko machine 100, the sound source IC 416 (see FIG. 185) of the first sub-control unit 400 has a plurality of channels, and the production data (audio data) shown in FIG. Can be output. For example, channel 1 is used to output male part production data (productions A1-1a, A1-2a, A1-3a), channel 2 is used to output female part production data, and channel 3 is used for mixed voice. For example, part production data is output. These can be switched by the DIP switch 650, so that, for example, the male part production A1 can be executed on the right platform of the adjacent pachinko machine 100, and the female part production A1 can be executed simultaneously on the left. . In addition, the mixed part production A1 can be executed by one pachinko machine 100. The production part may be selected by the production part setting switches 195b and 195c described above.

  In addition, it is possible to associate the production data of only the male part (or female part), male part or female part, or mixed voice part with each of the plurality of channels.

  FIGS. 3C to 3E are diagrams showing the structure of effect data by a plurality of effect means. Here, effect means for executing effect A are the decorative symbol display device 208 (and the sub display device 208S) (displayed as “liquid crystal” in the figure), various lamps 418 (displayed as “LED” in the figure), and the speaker 120 (shown in the figure). Then, “sound” is displayed), and the case of the movable body 224 will be described as an example.

  As shown in (c) of the figure, as the production data related to the music A1 of the production A, each production means may have production data for each part, as shown in (d) of FIG. Part or all of the production means (here “liquid crystal”) may have each part (production A1-1a, production A1-2a, production A1-3a) as one data. Also, as shown in FIG. 5E, some effect means (here, “movable body”) may not have effect data for some parts (effect A1-0a).

  As described above, the production A has been described with reference to FIGS. 5B to 5E, but the production of the production B is the same.

  FIG. 280 is a table (time table) showing an example of the production times of productions A and B and the production start time. The production time is the time from the start to the end of each production (each part), and the start time is the time after the power is turned on (the time measured by the time measuring means).

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the production A1a (for example, the male part song A1) is started, for example, 60 minutes after the power is turned on, and the production time is set to 5 minutes. Also, the production A2a (for example, the male part song A2) starts 120 minutes after the power is turned on, the production time is 5 minutes and 20 seconds, and the production A3a (for example, the male part song A3) is turned on. 180 minutes later, the production time is set to 4 minutes. Similarly, production A1b (for example, female part song A1) starting 240 minutes after power-on, production A2b (for example, female part song A2) starting 300 minutes later, starting 360 minutes later Followed by production A3b (for example, female part song A3).

  As shown in FIG. 4B, when the production B1a, the production B2a,... Are each composed of a plurality of parts, the production time and the production start time after power-on are set for each part. Has been. For example, the part of the production B1-1a of the production B1a is started immediately after the power is turned on, the production time is 20 seconds, the part of the production B1-2a is started 20 seconds after the power is turned on, and the production time is 15 The part of the production B1-3a is started 35 seconds after the power is turned on, and the production time is 25 seconds. If the effects A1a to A3a shown in FIG. 5A are also composed of a plurality of parts, the effect time and the start time are similarly set for each part.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6C, the production B1a (for example, the male part song B1) starts internally immediately after the power is turned on, the production time is 3 minutes, and the production B2a (for example, male) Part song B2) starts 3 minutes after power-on, production time is 4 minutes 40 seconds, and production B3a (eg male part music B3) starts 7 minutes 40 seconds after power-on The production time is 4 minutes and 20 seconds, the production B1b (for example, the female part song B1) starts 12 minutes after the power is turned on, the production time is set to 3 minutes, and so on. Has been. Thus, it can be said that the effect B is an effect composed of three effect parts of music B1, B2, and B3. The music B2 is an effect part executed next to the music B1, the music B3 is an effect part executed next to the music B2, and the music B1 is an effect part executed next to the music B3. It can be said that.

  In this way, the effect A is executed every 60 minutes, and even after the effect A1a is finished, the effect A2a is not executed unless 120 minutes after the power is turned on. Also, the effect that is first executed after the power is turned on is always the first effect A1a in the time table.

  On the other hand, the effect B is set so that the effect B1a (part of the effect B1-1a) is started immediately after the power is turned on, and thereafter the effect B1-2a, the effect B1-3a,... The effect B2a, the effect B3a, It is set to be executed immediately after the end of the production time, that is, production B1b. In other words, the production B is controlled to be executed in accordance with the time table shown in the same figure immediately after the power is turned on (in a state invisible to the player). It is displayed in the display area D so that it can be visually recognized by the player from the effect whose execution is controlled (the effect B is executed in the display area D). That is, in FIG. 6C, the production B is controlled to be executed according to the timetable immediately after the power is turned on, but for example, when the big hit is made 36 minutes after the power is turned on, the production B B1b is displayed so as to be visible to the player (executed in the display area D), and if the big hit occurs 55 minutes and 40 seconds after the power is turned on, the effect B3a is displayed so as to be visible to the player ( Executed in the display area D). Further, when the effect B is a big hit 40 minutes after the power is turned on, the effect B2b may be displayed (executed in the display area D) so as to be visible to the player from the middle (for example, the effect B). B is not a movie, such as sound or LED light emission only). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5C, the effect B is composed of the effect B1a, the effect B2a, the effect B3a, the effect B1b, the effect B2b, and the effect B3b, which are looped. That is, it can be said that the production B is repeatedly executed in a 24-minute cycle. Therefore, for example, when a big hit is made 24 minutes after the power is turned on, it is displayed so as to be visible to the player from the beginning of the production B. In other words, the effect B is an effect that may be started from the middle depending on the result of the timer circuit 652 when the effect B is started, and may be started from the beginning. It can be called production. In other words, it can also be said that the effect B is an effect that starts according to the result of the time measurement by the timer circuit 652. In this embodiment, in the case of “execution of effect B”, the player can recognize the effect B mainly such as display by the display means, sound output from the speaker 120, and light emission of various lamps 418. (The state in which the player recognizes that the production B is being executed), and the internal execution control is performed according to the time table shown in FIG. When it is written together with the case where it is displayed, the fact is described and distinguished from this.

  In other words, the effect that is executed first after the power is turned on is not necessarily the first effect B1a in the time table, but is the effect B corresponding to the time when the first big hit has occurred. With such a configuration, the player executes sequentially from the beginning (effect B1a) of the time table shown in FIG. 5C by internal control immediately after power-on (actual execution process by the first sub-control unit 400). If the production B is a big hit, the production data (for example, the production B1b, the production B1a, etc., or the production B1b, whose execution is controlled internally at that time (starting time from turning on the power)) It is visually recognized from the middle), and the effect B is recognized as if it was executed from the middle.

  The production A may be configured in the same manner as the production B. That is, the effect A1a shown in FIG. 280 (a) is set to start immediately after the power is turned on, and thereafter, the effect A2a, the effect A3a, the effect A1b, the effect A2b, the effect A3b,. It may be set to be executed immediately after the end (that is, continuously). In other words, the production A is controlled to be executed continuously immediately after the power is turned on (in a state invisible to the player), and according to the time after the power is turned on (for example, every 60 minutes). It may be configured to be executed. When configured in this way, for example, there may be a case where an effect A that starts every 60 minutes is recognized as if it was executed halfway. That is, according to this modification, the island simultaneous effect (effect A) is determined according to the time measurement result (for example, the time value) by the time measuring means (for example, the timer circuit 652) when the island simultaneous effect is started. It can be said that this is an effect that may start from the middle or may start from the beginning.

  FIG. 281 is an example of a table (time table) when a plurality of effects are set corresponding to a certain start time. FIG. 6A is a time table when a plurality of effects A (two types in this case) are set every hour after the power is turned on, and FIG. It is a time table when a plurality (two types here) are set.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, in this example, the order of groups of effect data (effect part) executed in setting A and setting B is different. That is, setting A is performed every hour from 60 minutes after the power is turned on, after one effect data group (effect A1a → effect A2a → effect A3a) is executed, and another effect data group (effect A1b → effect). A2b → effect A3b)... Is executed. On the other hand, in setting B, after another group of effect data (effect A1b → effect A2b → effect A3b) is executed every hour from 60 minutes after power-on, one effect data group (effect A1a → effect A1b) A2a → production A3a)... Is executed. In other words, in the case of setting A, the effect that is executed 60 minutes after the power is turned on, that is, the first simultaneous effect is the first effect A1a of the time table, and the effect that is executed with the simultaneous effect 240 minutes later is the effect. A1b. In the case of setting B, the effect performed in the first simultaneous effect 60 minutes after the power is turned on is the first effect A1b in the time table, and the effect performed in the simultaneous effect 240 minutes later is the effect A1a. is there.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the setting B, in the setting A, the effect B1a, the effect B2a, the effect B3a, the effect B1b, the effect B2b, the effect B3b,... It is set to execute repeatedly in succession. Also, in the setting B, the effect B1b, the effect B2b, the effect B3b, the effect B1a, the effect B2a, the effect B3a,... In other words, for the effect B, both the setting A and the setting B are an effect of one group of effect data (effect B1a → effect B2a → effect B3a) and another group of effect data (effect B1b → effect B2b → effect). The effect of B3b) is repeatedly executed, but the setting A and the setting B are settings in which these repetitions are alternately executed in time series. In this example, in the case of setting A, when a big hit is made for the first time 27 minutes after power-on, the execution is performed from the stage B2a in the middle of the time table (not the stage B1a at the top of the time table). In the case of setting B, when a big hit is made for the first time 27 minutes after power-on, it is executed from the stage B2b in the middle of the time table (not the head stage B1b of the time table).

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the effect A may be a setting in which the repetition of a predetermined group of effect data is performed alternately in time series between the setting A and the setting B, and only the effect A is set. A and B may be set so that repetition of a group of predetermined effect data is executed alternately in time series.

  In both cases (a) and (b) in the figure, setting A and setting B can be switched (selected) by setting and switching of the DIP switch 650. That is, the order of the effects and the effects to be executed can be changed by setting and switching the DIP switch 650. In this example, the effects performed in the settings A and B are the same effects (effect data). However, even if there is effect data executed only by the settings A or effect data executed only by the settings B. Good.

  As described above, in the above example, the start condition of the effect A of the present embodiment is that the predetermined time after the power is turned on (the counter value of the first sub-control unit 400 (the time value measured by the timer circuit, the RTC In this case, the start condition of the effect B is a predetermined time after power-on (counter value of the first sub-control unit 400 (time value by timer circuit, Although it corresponds to the timing value by the RTC circuit), it is established at an arbitrary timing such as a big hit or a probability change, and may be executed in the middle of each production (part).

  In FIGS. 280 and 281, the effect A is performed every hour after the power is turned on as an example, but in addition to this, the month information is stored in the RTC circuit (first sub-control unit 400). Or an external circuit, which is obtained from an IC different from the basic circuit of the first sub-control unit 400). The simultaneous production set for each may be executed, and in this case, the RTC production is also used. In this case, the elapse of time is determined based on the counter value of the program of the first sub-control unit 400 or data that changes according to the counter value, and the month is determined based on the RTC circuit. Each included requirement.

  FIG. 282 is a diagram for explaining a case in which the production A and the production B are executed at the same time. FIGS. 28A and 20B are timing charts, and FIG. .

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the effects A and B at the same time (can be set to be performed at the same time). FIG. 6A is an example of a timing chart around 60 minutes after the power is turned on when the effects A and B are set according to the time table of FIG.

  For example, according to the time table of FIG. 280 (a), the effect A1a is set to be executed for 5 minutes from 60 minutes after the power is turned on. In addition, the effect B3a is executed from 55 minutes 40 seconds according to the time table of FIG. 280 (c), the effect B1b is executed from 60 minutes, the effect B2b is executed from 63 minutes, and the effect B3b is executed from 67 minutes 40 seconds. Is set. Then, when 60 minutes have elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect A1a is executed and ends in 5 minutes. If there is no big hit (or probability change) during this time, the effect B is not executed. On the other hand, for example, if there is a big hit between 60 minutes and 63 minutes, the production B1b is executed simultaneously with the production A1a. When production A and production B are simultaneously executed in one pachinko machine 100 in this way, either one (eg, production A1a) is executed in the main display area D1 (decorated symbol display device 208), and the other (For example, production B1b) is executed in the sub display area D2 (for example, the sub display device 208S). If the big hit state continues for 65 minutes or more, the production A1a ends, but after the production B1b is completed in 63 minutes, the production B2b starts to be executed. In this example, the start time of the effect A1a and the start time of the effect B1b (60 minutes after power-on) coincide with each other, and the end time of the effect A1a (65 minutes after power-on) is the time during the execution of the effect B2b. It becomes. In such a case, the effects A and B can be displayed at the same time (visible to the player), but there are cases where it is difficult for the player to concentrate on the effects B2b by finishing the effects A1a in the middle of the effects B2b. is there.

  FIG. 5B is a timing chart in the case where the end time of the effect A1a is made to coincide with the start time of the effect B2b (63 minutes after the power is turned on). In this way, the end time of effect A may be combined with the start time of effect B, and therefore effect A does not necessarily have to be executed every hour after power-on.

  FIG. 4C is an example of a time table in which the end time of each production A is matched with any start time of the production B. In this example, the start time of effect A1a is 58 minutes after power-on, the start time of effect A2a is 117 minutes and 40 seconds after power-on, the start time of effect A3a is 179 minutes after power-on, and the end of effect A The time is made to coincide with the start time of any of the effects B (effects B1a, effects B2a, effects B3a, effects B1b, effects B2b, effects B3b). By doing so, for example, when the production A1a is finished, the production B2b can be easily recognized by the player from the beginning.

  In this way, the effect A is not necessarily an effect that is executed every certain period (one hour), but an effect that is executed when a predetermined time (start time shown in FIG. 5C) has arrived. It may be.

  FIG. 283 is a timing chart showing the relationship between effects (for example, effects A and C) and display areas for displaying them. In the figure, the display area A is a main display area D1 (display area of the decorative symbol display device 208), and the display area B is a sub-display region D2 (wipe-like display region 208W of the decorative symbol display device 208), or This is a display area of the sub display device 208S.

  In the figure (a), during the design variation display, for example, production Cα other than the production A and the production B (for example, a variation display of decorative symbols (in particular, a super reach production etc.)) is executed in the display area A. Yes. In the display area B, an effect Cβ (decorative display of a decorative symbol (particularly, a super reach effect)) similar to that in the display area A is executed. In the following description, the production ○ α and the production ○ β are the productions displayed in the same state, but the production is slightly different due to the difference in the size of the display area (for example, the production ○ β is different from the production ○ α. Means simpler production). For example, the production Cα is a super reach production in which a plurality of characters appear, and the production Cβ is a super reach production in which one character appears.

  When the execution time T of the simultaneous effect arrives during the symbol variation display, the effect Cα continues to be executed in the display area A, but in the display area B, the effect Cβ (for example, an effect of a simple version of the effect Cα). Is finished (cancelled), and in the display area B, the effect Aα (simultaneous effect) that should be executed in the display area A starts to be executed. Then, when the symbol variation display is stopped and the effect Cα of the display area A is finished, the effect Aα starts to be executed in the display area A, and the effect Aβ (for example, a simplified version of the effect Aα at the same time) is also displayed in the display area B. Start execution. In this example, at the arrival of the start time of the simultaneous production, the production Aα should be executed in the display area A, but the display of the decorative pattern in the display area A (particularly, the super reach production that the player wants to pay attention to) Since Cα) is being executed, the content is executed as it is in the display area B, for example, by reducing the effect Aα to be executed in the display area A, and the effect Aα is displayed in the display area A at the timing when the effect Cα ends. Running.

  FIG. 5B shows another display example. In this example, during the symbol variation display, the effect Cα (for example, the variation symbol variation display) is executed in the display area A. In the display area B, an effect Cβ (decorative display of decorative symbols) which is the same effect as the display area A but whose contents are simplified, for example, is executed. When the execution time T of the simultaneous effect arrives during the symbol variation display, the effect Cα ends (cancelled) in the display area A, and the effect Aα starts executing in the display area A. On the other hand, in the display area B, the execution of the effect Cβ ends (cancelled), and the effect Cα executed in the display area A starts executing. The effect Cα in the display area B continues until the symbol variation display is stopped, and after the symbol variation display is stopped, the effect Aβ (same content as the effect Aα but simply effect) is executed. In the display area A, the execution of the effect Aα is continued. In this example, since the production Aα starts to be executed in the display area A at the start timing of the simultaneous production, the content is continuously executed as it is in the display area B by reducing the display of the suspended production Cα.

  FIG. 6C shows another display example. In this example, during the symbol variation display, an effect Cα (for example, a decorative symbol variation display) is executed in the display region A. In the display region B, for example, a simplified version of the effect Cβ (decorative symbol variation display) is performed. ) Is executed. When the execution time T of the simultaneous effect arrives during the symbol variation display, the effect Cα ends (cancelled) in the display area A, and the effect Aα starts executing in the display area A. In the display area B, the effect Cβ ends (cancelled) and the effect Aβ (for example, a simplified effect of the effect Aα) starts executing.

  FIG. 4D shows another display example. In this example, during the symbol variation display, the effect Cα (for example, the variation symbol variation display) is executed in the display area A. In the display area B, no effects are executed and the display area B is in a non-display state. When the execution time T of the simultaneous effect arrives during the symbol variation display, the effect Cα continues to be executed in the display area A, and the effect Aα starts executing in the display area B. After the symbol variation display is stopped and the execution of the effect Cα is finished in the display area A, the effect Aα is executed in the display area A. At this timing, in the display area B, for example, the execution of a simple version of the effect Aβ is started with the same content as the effect Aα.

  FIG. 4E shows another display example. In this example, during the symbol variation display, the effect Cα (for example, the variation symbol variation display) is executed in the display area A. In the display area B, no effects are executed and the display area B is in a non-display state. Then, when the execution time T of the simultaneous effect comes during the symbol variation display, the effect Aα starts executing in the display area A, and the effect Cα starts executing in the display area B. After the symbol variation display is stopped and the execution of the effect Cα is finished in the display area A, the effect Aα is executed in the display area A. At this timing, in the display area B, for example, the execution of a simple version of the effect Aβ is started with the same content as the effect Aα.

  Here, the relationship between the effects A and C and the display area for displaying them has been described. However, when the effects B and C are executed, the effects A and B are executed, or the effects A to A In the case where the effect C is executed, the display can be switched in the same manner.

  FIG. 284 is a timing chart showing the relationship between effects (for example, effects A and C) and display areas for displaying them. In the figure, the display area A is a main display area D1 (display area of the decorative symbol display device 208), and the display area B is one sub display area D21 (of the decorative symbol display device 208) overlapping the main display area D1. Wipe display area 208W), and display area C is another sub display area D22 (display area of sub display device 208S) separate from main display area D1.

  In the figure (a), during the symbol variation display, in the display area A, for example, the representation Cα other than the representation A and the representation B (for example, variation display of decorative symbols) is executed. In the display area B, no effects are executed and the display area B is not displayed. The display area C has the same content as the display area A, but for example, a simple effect Cβ (decorative display of decorative symbols) is executed rather than the effect Cα. When the execution time T of the simultaneous effect arrives during the symbol variation display, the effect Cα continues to be executed in the display area A and the effect Cβ continues to be executed in the display area C. The effect Aα to be displayed in the display area A is reduced and executed as it is. Then, when the symbol variation display is stopped and the effect Cα of the display area A and the effect Cβ of the display area C are finished, the effect Aα starts to be executed in the display area A. The execution of the production Aβ is started. In the display area B, any effects are not executed and are not displayed.

  Next, when the start time T of the simultaneous effect arrives, the effect Cα is started in the display area A, and the effect Cβ is executed in the display area C. In the display area B, the content is executed as it is, for example, by reducing the effect Aα to be executed in the display area A. Then, at the timing when the symbol variation display is stopped, the effect Aα is displayed in the display area A, the effect Aβ is displayed in the display area C, and the display area B is not displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 6B, during the symbol variation display, the effect Cα (for example, the variation symbol variation display) is executed in the display area A. In the display area B, no effects are executed and the display area B is not displayed. The display area C has the same content as the display area A, but for example, a simple effect Cβ (decorative display of decorative symbols) is executed rather than the effect Cα. When the execution time T of the simultaneous effects comes during the symbol variation display, the effect Cα continues to be executed in the display area A, and the effect Aα to be displayed in the display area A is reduced in the display area B. And execute as it is. The display area C has the same content as the effect Aα, but executes, for example, a simple effect Aβ. When the symbol variation display is stopped and the effect Cα of the display area A is finished, the effect Aα is executed in the display area A. The display area B is not displayed. In the display area C, the effect Aβ is continued.

  Next, when the simultaneous production start time T arrives, the production Cα is started in the display area A, and in the display area B, the production Aα to be executed in the display area A is reduced, and the content is executed as it is. In the display area C, an effect Cβ is executed. Then, at the timing when the symbol variation display is stopped, the effect Aα is displayed in the display area A, the effect Aβ is displayed in the display area C, and the display area B is not displayed.

  The display area D (main display area D1, sub display area D21) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 275 (d), the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the main display region D1, and a part of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the sub display region D21 (wipe display). In the case of the configuration of the area 208W), the sub display area D21 is displayed so as to be overlapped with a part of the main display area D1, so that when the effect is displayed in the sub display area D21, one of the main display areas D1 behind it is displayed. The part becomes difficult to visually recognize. Here, in a general pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the number of floating games held is notified by displaying a hold icon. The hold icon is also overlapped with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display area of the hold icon (hold display area) can be said to have the same configuration as the sub display area D21 of the present embodiment.

  For this reason, in FIG. 285, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the sub display area D21 will be described by taking a hold display area for displaying the hold number as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, a sub display area D21 is provided so as to overlap a part of the main display area D1. The sub display area D21 is an area for executing a predetermined effect (here, the display effect of the hold icon PI). In this case, the sub display area D21 is secured in a size necessary for displaying up to four hold icons PI. Specifically, the sub display area D21 is a rectangular area (area indicated by a broken line) including the four points of the most protruding parts of the four hold icons PI in the vertical and horizontal directions. That is, the hold icon PI is not displayed between the adjacent hold icons PI, but is the sub display area D21.

  FIGS. 7B and 7C are enlarged views of each holding icon PI. Each hold icon PI is image data having a size of 16 × 16 pixels at the maximum, and a blank portion other than the image data portion that can be visually recognized (the filled portion in FIGS. 5B and 5C) also holds the hold icon PI. This is an area for PI.

  That is, the wipe-like sub display area D21 of the present embodiment is an area that has a sufficient size to display the effect to be displayed in the sub display area D21 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and an effect display (effect image). Even if there is a blank part, if it is an area reserved for the effect display displayed in the sub display area D21 (the blank part in (b) and (c) of the figure), the area up to that is included. It is an area.

  FIGS. 5D to 5F show the sub display area D21 by filling in the blank portion. As shown in FIGS. 5 (f) and (g), the sub display area D21 partially overlaps the main display area D1, and the sub display area D21 provides an effect display of the main display area D1 (in this case, a decorative display of variable symbols). A part of is difficult to see.

<Timing chart of performance execution>
Hereinafter, execution examples of production A (for example, simultaneous production) and production B (for example, production in an advantageous state such as a big hit or probability change) will be described using a timing chart.

<Example A>
FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example of execution of effect A and effect B. FIGS. 286 and (b) are timing charts of effect A, and FIGS. It is a timing chart of B.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, all the productions A have the same production time (production execution time) (constant), and the time from the start time of the production A to the start time of the next production A (hereinafter referred to as this Time is also referred to as “start interval”). In this way, the production A is executed periodically, and the cycle is also constant.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the start interval of the effects A is constant, but the effect times of the effects A may not be constant. Also in this case, the start interval is constant, and the effect A is executed periodically.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5C, the production B starts executing at an arbitrary timing when a predetermined condition (start condition) such as a big hit or a probability change is satisfied. Further, the production time is not always constant. Thus, the start interval of effect B is not constant, and effect B is not executed periodically.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4D, when the start condition (for example, big hit) of effect B is established at a constant interval, the start interval of effect B is a constant interval. However, since the conditions for establishing an advantageous state such as big hit or probability change are not satisfied at predetermined intervals (time), even if the start interval becomes constant as a result, the “periodic” Is distinguished from “execution”. In this way, the effect B is an effect that is executed aperiodically or an effect that the arrival of a predetermined time is not a start condition.

<Example B>
FIG. 287 shows an example of the start condition (start requirement) and end condition (end requirement) of effect A and effect B. FIGS. 287 and (b) are timing charts of effect A. FIGS. 9C to 9F are timing charts of the effect B. In the following embodiments, the rectangular block shown at the bottom of each timing chart is the minimum unit of the production data (production part) of each production (production A1-1a, A1-1b, production B1-1a, etc. in FIG. 279). It is. The start condition is established when one or more requirements (start requirements) are provided, and the end condition is established when one or more requirements (start requirements) are provided. is there. In the following example, it is assumed that the start condition is satisfied when there is one requirement (start requirement = start condition), and the end condition is satisfied when there is one requirement (end requirement = end condition). .

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the effect A is periodically executed for a predetermined time. That is, the start condition (start requirement) for the production A is when the time value measured by the time measuring means or the data corresponding to the time value becomes a predetermined value. The time measured value by the time measuring means is a counter value shown in FIG. 276 (c) or an elapsed time (predetermined) that arrives periodically after the power is turned on shown in FIG. Further, the data corresponding to the time measurement value is a counter value shown in FIG. 276 (d). This is also the case when) becomes a predetermined value.

  Further, the end condition (end requirement) of the effect A is the end of the effect time (for example, 5 minutes in the effect A1a in FIG. 280 (a)), and the end timing of the effect data. Specifically, if the effect A (A1a) is composed of two effect data A1-1a and A1-2a, the end timing of the effect data A1-2a is the end condition of the effect A.

  FIG. 7B shows an example in which the production time of production A is different from the case of FIG. 10A, where production A is composed of three production data A1-1a, A1-2a, and A1-3a. Suppose that The start condition (start requirement) of the effect A in this case is a case where the time value by the time measuring means or the data corresponding to the time value becomes a predetermined value, and the end condition is the end timing of the effect data A1-3a It is.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5C, the production B starts to be executed (displayed to be visible to the player) at an arbitrary timing when a predetermined condition (start condition) such as a big hit or a probability change is satisfied. The execution (display that can be visually recognized by the player) is finished when the state such as the big hit or the probability change is finished.

  As described above, the production B is produced immediately after the power is turned on, as shown in the bottom block based on the time table as shown in FIG. 280 (c). B1-2a, production B1-3a, production B2-1a, production B2-2a, production B2-3a, production B3-1a) are controlled to be executed continuously. Therefore, at the timing when the start condition of the effect B is satisfied, the player recognizes that the execution has started from the middle of the effect B2-1a, and when the end condition is satisfied, the execution ends in the middle of the effect B2-3a. Recognize as you did. As described above, in the timing charts related to the effects B shown in the present embodiment and the following embodiments, the timing chart indicated by H / L indicates the execution timing of the effects B that can be recognized by the player, and each effect indicated by the block. It is assumed that the part B shows the effect B whose execution is controlled internally.

  FIG. 4D shows a case where the timing at which the start condition for effect B is established is in the middle of effect data that is internally controlled for execution, and the effect data (effect part) is composed of a movie. This is an execution example. When the production data is a movie, execution (display) cannot be started from the middle. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4D, when the start condition is satisfied, the next production data (production part) is waited for after the end of the production data (production part) whose execution is controlled internally. At the start timing, execution (display) of effect B is started. That is, as shown by a broken line, there is a time lag between the start condition being satisfied and the execution of the effect B being started. In this time lag period, an effect (display or the like) different from the effect B may be executed. Hereinafter, the effect executed during the time lag indicated by the broken line is referred to as “additional effect”.

  On the other hand, with respect to the end timing of the production B, the execution of the production B is finished at the timing when the end condition is satisfied. In other words, the performance data is recognized as if it was finished in the middle of the game (although the internal execution process continues) even though it was executed in the state where the end condition was satisfied. If the effect data is composed of a movie other than the movie, the player can be made to recognize that the execution of the effect B has ended even in the middle.

  In the same figure (e), as in the same figure (c), the timing at which the start condition for the production B is established is in the middle of the production data that is internally controlled to be executed. This is an execution example in the case where execution can be started (the player can be made to recognize that the execution of effect B has started). In this example, the timing at which the end condition is satisfied is also in the middle of the effect data that is internally controlled, but if the effect data is composed of a movie or the like, the effect data is ended in the middle. I can't. In other words, it may be possible for the player to recognize that the effect B has ended at the timing when the end condition is satisfied, but the next effect is at the timing when the end condition is satisfied, as indicated by a broken line. It is executed after the end of the production data whose execution is controlled internally. In this example, there is a time lag as shown by a broken line between the establishment of the condition for ending effect B (end of effect B) and the start of the next effect. An additional effect (display or the like) different from the effect B may also be executed during this time lag period.

  FIG. 8F shows the time lag at the start of the production B shown in FIG. 10D (the broken line portion from the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the time lag at the end of the production B shown in FIG. (Broken line portion from the time when the end condition is satisfied). During this time lag period, an additional effect (display or the like) different from the effect B may be executed.

<Example C>
FIG. 288 is a timing chart showing an example of execution of effect A and decorative symbol variation display (effect C).

  As shown in FIG. 5A, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display repeatedly changes and stops. Then, when the start condition for effect A (simultaneous effect) is established, effect A starts to be executed. For example, the effect A is executed using the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in the main display area D1). In the decorative symbol variation display, for example, the variation display and the stop display are repeated on the back of the effect A. The production A ends when the production based on the predetermined production data (production part) is completed. Thus, the start timing and end timing of the effect A (for example, the effect A1a shown in FIG. 280 (a)) are the effect data (for example, the effect A1-1a and the effect A1 shown in FIG. 279 (a)). -2a ...) and the start timing and end timing. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the effect A ends (is not displayed), the decorative symbol variation display (effect C) executed on the back surface becomes visible.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of executing an additional effect in FIG. For example, at the end timing of the production A where the production A end condition is satisfied, when the production A is finished (hidden), the decorative symbol variation display executed on the back of the production A can be seen from the middle. In such a case, an additional effect may be executed as indicated by a broken line after the end of effect A until the decorative symbol variation display becomes a stop display. As this additional effect, for example, the background image displayed before the start of the decorative symbol variation display may be stored in the storage means and displayed.

  FIG. 6C shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display becomes visible from the middle at the timing when the production A is finished, but all the suspensions are consumed and the next decorative symbol variation display does not start. Show. In such a case, as shown by a broken line, an additional effect (for example, display of a background image) may be executed after the end of effect A until the next decorative symbol variation display starts.

  In the following embodiments, unless otherwise specified, all of the effects A, effects B, and the decorative symbol variation display (effect C) are executed on the entire surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed. When the production A or the production B is started, these are executed in front of the decoration symbol variation display. When the production A or the production B is finished, the decoration design variation display is continued. Alternatively, it is assumed that after the effect B is not displayed, the decorative symbol variation display that has been executed on the back surface is displayed again.

<Example D>
FIG. 289 is a timing chart showing another example of the execution of the effect B, the specific game state, and the decorative symbol variation display (effect C). Here, the specific game state is an advantageous game state (for example, probability change, during electric support, etc.) that is an execution start condition of the effect B other than the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the effect B is executed with the start of the specific game state as a start condition, and the execution is ended with the end of the specific game state as an end condition. In the decorative symbol variation display, the variation display and the stop display are repeatedly executed according to the number of holdings with the start of the specific game state, but the stop display is performed with the end of the specific game state. In other words, it can be said that the effect B is an effect that can be executed across a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays. Further, the effect B is internally controlled so that a plurality of effect data are continuously executed based on a time table as shown in FIG. 280 (c) immediately after the power is turned on. In this example, both the start timing and the end timing of effect B are shifted from the start timing and end timing of effect data of effect B whose execution is controlled internally.

  FIG. 6B shows an execution example in which the additional effect is executed when the start condition of the effect B is satisfied, and the start timing of the effect B is waited until the start timing of the effect data immediately after that. Show. If the production data that is controlled internally when the start condition for production B is satisfied is a movie or the like, it cannot be displayed halfway, so the additional production is executed and the production data ends. At that time, the effect B is executed (execution of a state that can be recognized by the player).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 289 (a) and (b), the period (first period) during which the effect B is executed is the period from the start to the end of the decorative symbol variation (second period). It can be said that the period is longer than (period). Note that the period during which the effect B is executed may be shorter than the period from the start to the end of the decorative symbol variation.

<Example E>
FIG. 290 is another timing chart showing another example of the execution of the effect B, the specific game state, and the decorative symbol variation display (effect C).

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the effect B is executed with the start of the specific game state as a start condition, and the execution ends with the start of the next decorative symbol variation display after the end of the specific game state as the end condition. It may be a thing.

  FIG. 6B shows an execution example in which the additional effect is executed when the start condition of the effect B is satisfied, and the start timing of the effect B is waited until the start timing of the effect data immediately after that. Show. Since the end condition of the effect B is the same as FIG. 289 (b) except that the next decoration symbol variation display is started after the end of the specific gaming state, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 6C shows another example in which the end condition of the effect B is different. In this example, the start of the specific game state is executed as a start condition, and the effect B is ended during the last decorative symbol variation display that ends in accordance with the end of the specific game state. More specifically, effect B is the end of effect data (effect data with a black star) that ends immediately after the start of variable display of the last decorative symbol variable display that ends in accordance with the end of the specific gaming state. Is the end condition. For example, when the number of decorative symbol variation displays is determined to be 100, the last ornament symbol variation display can be grasped, and thus such control is possible. In addition, when the effect B ends (when it is not displayed), an additional effect is displayed as shown by a broken line after the end of the effect B in order to prevent the last decorative symbol variation display from being displayed again in the middle. May be executed. The additional effect ends execution in accordance with the end of the specific gaming state. In this example, when a plurality of effect data is included in the last decorative symbol variation display (effect data with a black star and effect data with a white star), which effect data The end may be the end condition of effect B, but here, effect data whose internal execution is controlled immediately after the last decorative symbol variation display is started (effect data with a black star) The end condition of the effect B is the end condition of the effect B.

<Example F>
FIG. 291 is a timing chart showing another example of the execution of the effect B, the specific game state, and the decorative symbol variation display (effect C).

  In FIG. 6A, since the start timing of the specific game state is in the middle of the effect data whose internal execution is controlled, the start condition of the effect B is sent from the start of the specific game state. It is another example which performs an additional production before the start of. The start condition of effect B is the start (end) timing of any effect data whose execution is controlled internally during the (first) decorative symbol variation display immediately after the specific game state starts.

  In this example, the period of the first decorative symbol variation display is set longer than the subsequent decorative symbol variation display period. As a result, many start (end) timings of the effect data can be provided during the first decorative symbol variation display period, so the start condition (start timing) of the effect B can be set in a fine period.

  FIG. 5B is another example in which the additional effect is executed after the end of the effect B, with the end condition of the effect B being set earlier than the end of the specific gaming state. The end condition of effect B is the start (end) timing of any effect data whose execution is controlled internally during the (last) decorative symbol variation display immediately before the end of the specific gaming state.

  Also in this case, as in FIG. 5A, by setting the last decorative symbol variation display period longer than the previous decorative symbol variation display period, the end condition (end timing) of effect B is set. It can be set with a fine period.

<Example G>
FIG. 292 is a timing chart showing an example of the execution of effect B, special game state (for example, jackpot game state), specific game state, and decorative symbol variation display (effect C).

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the specific game state (for example, probability change, electric support state) starts after the end of the special game state (big hit game state). Here, the effect B is executed with the start (end) of the effect data whose internal execution is controlled as the start condition after the special gaming state is started. The production B may be started on the condition that the special gaming state starts (simultaneously with the start of the special gaming state). In this example, the end condition of the production B is the start of the next decorative symbol variation display after the end of the specific gaming state.

  FIG. 6B is an example in which the start of the decoration symbol variation display several times before the specific gaming state ends (for example, four times before) becomes the condition for ending the effect B. For example, the ST machine is 100% probable after a big hit, but the number of changes is determined to be 100, for example. In such a case, the effect B is ended several times before the end of the number of changes, and the decorative symbol change display is displayed a plurality of times, thereby notifying that the end of the number of changes in the probability change state is near. Can provoke the euphoria of a person.

<Example H>
FIG. 293 is a timing chart showing another example of execution of the effect B, the special game state (for example, the jackpot game state), the specific game state, and the decorative symbol variation display (effect C).

  The start condition of the effect B is the end of the special game state, that is, the start of the specific game state. Further, the end condition of the effect B is the start of the next special game state, that is, the end of the specific game state. In this example, the last decorative symbol variation display period is longer than the previous ornament symbol variation display period.

<Example I>
FIG. 294 is a timing chart showing another example of execution of the effect B, the special game state (for example, the jackpot game state), the specific game state, and the decorative symbol variation display (effect C).

  In FIG. 6A, the start condition of the effect B is the start of the specific gaming state. In this example, the effect B is executed in the main display area D1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol variation display started in accordance with the start of the effect B starts to be executed on the back of the effect B. Then, it is assumed that the decorative symbol corresponding to “out” is stopped and displayed in the first stop display of the decorative symbol variation display (t1), and the super reach effect is started (t2) during the subsequent decorative symbol variation display. When the super reach effect is started, the effect (decorative symbol variation display) is switched to be executed on the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect B executed at the same time is switched to be executed in the sub display area D2 (wipe display area 208W or sub display device 208S) at the timing t2. When the decorative symbol corresponding to “out” is stopped and displayed in the super reach effect (t3), the effect B is executed in the first display area D1 at the start timing (t4) of the next decorative symbol variation display. Switch. Here, when the effect B is executed in the first display area D1, it has been described that the decorative symbol variation display is executed on the back side, but when the effect B is executed in the first display area D1. The decorative symbol variation display may be executed in the sub display area D2 (wipe display area 208W or sub display device 208S).

  FIG. 6B is an example in the case where the decorative symbol corresponding to “win” is stopped and displayed in the super reach effect in FIG.

  At the start of the super reach effect (t2), the effect (decorative symbol variation display) is switched to be executed on the front surface of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the effect B is the sub display area D2 (wipe display area) at the timing of t2. 208W or the sub display device 208S), but when the decorative symbol corresponding to “win” is stopped and displayed in the super reach effect (t3), the next variable symbol variable display start ( t4) is the condition for ending production B. Also, the special gaming state starts at the timing of t4. The decorative symbol variation display is continuously executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 when the super reach effect is executed.

<Example J>
FIG. 295 is a timing chart illustrating an execution example in which the effects A and B are simultaneously executed.

  FIG. 5A shows a case where the execution period of the effect A and the execution period of the effect B do not overlap (do not overlap). Since the execution periods do not overlap, both can be executed in the main display area D1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, one of the effects A and effects B is executed in the main display area D1, and the other May be executed in the sub display area D2 (wipe display area 208W or sub display device 208S).

  FIG. 5B shows a case where the execution period of the production A and the execution period of the production B overlap (overlap) in at least a part of the period (see FIG. 282). The case where the production B has started execution is shown. As described above, when the execution periods of the effects A and B overlap, it is preferable to switch between the main display area D1 and the sub display area D2. For example, when the effect B starts while the effect A is being executed in the main display area, the effect B is executed in the sub display area D2 (wipe-like display area 208W or sub display device 208S). Alternatively, the effect A is switched to the execution in the sub display area D2, and the effect B is executed in the main display area D1 (see FIG. 275).

  FIG. 6C shows a case where the execution period of the production A and the execution period of the production B overlap (overlap) in at least a part of the period. Here, the production A is executed during the execution of the production B. The case where it has started is shown. Also in this case, these effects may be switched and displayed by the main display area D1 and the sub display area D2.

  FIG. 6D shows a case where the execution period of the production A and the execution period of the production B overlap (overlap) in at least a part of the period. Here, the production B is performed during the execution of the first production A. Shows that the execution of the first effect A ends during the execution of the effect B, and the execution of the second effect A starts during the execution of the effect B. Also in this case, these effects may be switched and displayed by the main display area D1 and the sub display area D2. The effect switching between the main display area D1 and the sub display area D2 is the same in all examples of the present embodiment.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in one pachinko machine 100 or in a plurality of pachinko machines 100, the simultaneous effect production A and the production B executed in the special game state or the specific game state are performed. Can be executed at the same time. And when performing simultaneously in this way, the production A and the production B can at least partially execute the production that is related. For example, a plurality of pachinko machines 100 are performing a production A1 (production A1-1a, production A1-2a, production 1-3a,...) Shown in FIG. In addition, one or a plurality of pachinko machines 100 among them execute the effect B1 (effect B1-2a, effect B1-3a,...) Using the start of the specific gaming state as a start condition. In a single pachinko machine 100, when effect A and effect B are executed simultaneously, the main display area D1 and the sub display area D2 are used. In a plurality of pachinko machines 100, when production A and production B are executed simultaneously (for example, the right platform performs production A and the left platform performs production B), only the main display area D1 is used. Alternatively, the sub display area D2 may be used.

  Further, when the production A and the production B are executed simultaneously, a part of the production A1 (for example, the production A1-2a) and a part of the production B1 (for example, the production B1-2a) can be related productions. . That is, the production A1-2a and the production B1-2a in this case are related so that they do not become incongruent (no sense of incongruity) even if they are executed simultaneously (something is in harmony). Production data. To give a specific example, the music is the same melody, different melody but harmonious (main melody and sub melody, etc.) And so on. When the music is singing, it means the same lyrics, the same (gender) vocal, chorus, singing, or singing. Moreover, it is not limited to singing, but may be a performance (ensemble, ensemble, performance of interaction) or the like. Moreover, not only music but light emission by various lamps (LED), operation by the movable body 224, and display on the decorative symbol display device 208 (sub display device 208S) may be used. Here, as an example, a case is described in which one piece of effect data (part) is related, but a plurality of pieces of effect data (parts) constituting effect A and effect B may be related. The relevance between the effects A and B is the same in all examples of the present embodiment.

<Example K>
FIG. 296 is a timing chart illustrating another execution example in which the effect A and the effect B are simultaneously executed.

  FIG. 6A shows a case where the execution period of the production A and the execution period of the production B overlap (overlap) in at least a part of the period. Here, the production A is performed during the execution of the first production B. Shows that the execution of the first effect B ends during the execution of the effect A, and the execution of the second effect B starts during the execution of the effect A.

  FIG. 5B shows a case where the execution period of the production A and the execution period of the production B overlap (overlap) in at least a part of the period, and the production B is being executed (after the start). The execution is started, the execution of the effect B ends during the execution of the effect A (before the end), and then the execution of the effect A ends.

  FIG. 7C shows a case where the execution period of the production A and the execution period of the production B overlap (overlap) in at least a part of the period. The execution is started, and the execution of the effect A ends during the execution of the effect B (before the end), and then the execution of the effect B ends.

<Example L>
FIG. 297 is a timing chart illustrating another execution example in which the effects A and B are simultaneously executed. The lowermost row in the figure shows effect data constituting effect B in which internal execution control is performed.

  FIG. 6A shows that the start condition of the effect B (for example, the start of probability change) is established during the execution of the effect A, and the effect B can be executed. The case where the effect B is performed later is shown. As described above, when the start condition of the effect B is satisfied and cannot be executed simultaneously with the effect A, the effect B may be executed after the effect A is finished. In addition, the effect A is executed in the main display area D1, the effect B is executed in the sub display area D2 during the period of the broken line portion, and the effect B after the effect A is finished is switched to the main display area D1 and executed. It may be.

  In the same drawing (b), the effect B is executed after the end of the effect A, as in the case (a), but the end of the effect A is a timing in the middle of the effect data constituting the effect B. Therefore, this is an example of waiting for the start of the execution of the effect B until the end of the effect data. In such a case, a time lag occurs between the end of the effect A and the start of the effect B in the broken line portion, and nothing is displayed. Therefore, the additional effect may be executed during this period.

  FIG. 10C is an execution example when the execution periods of the effects A and B do not overlap. The production A ends at the end of the production time (t1). It is assumed that the performance B starts to be executed with a certain timing in the specific gaming state (for example, the third start (t2) of the decorative symbol variation display) as a start condition. However, at the timing of t2, since the effect data constituting the effect B for which internal execution control is performed is in the middle, the start of the effect B is waited until the end of the effect data (t3). In this case, an additional effect may be performed in a period from t1 to t2 after the end of the effect A and a period from t2 to t3 before the start of the effect B.

<Example display of production>
<Example M>
Next, an example of effects (effects A and B) on the display means will be described. In addition, in the following examples, it can implement similarly even if production A and production B are replaced. FIG. 298 is a diagram showing effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208 of Example M in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the decorative symbol display device 208 includes three symbol display areas 208a to 208c (a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, and a right symbol display area) for displaying a decorative symbol. 208c) and a hold display area 208d for displaying a hold icon PI indicating the number of hold of the variable game. The decorative symbol variation display is performed within the display range of each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state (including a temporary stop display of pseudo-continuous), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The decorative design is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of each display range.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area on the left side of the right symbol display area 208c, the fourth symbol display area 208e for the special figure 1 for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game are displayed. It has a 4th symbol display area 208f for special figure 2 for suggesting the result of success / failure.

  The states shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B show an example of the effect C (the effect during symbol variation). First, the timing shown in FIG. 6A is a state in which the fluctuation stop of FIG. 1 is performed. In the state of the fluctuation stop, the main control unit 300 stops and displays “off” on the special figure 1 display device 212, and lights all the LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to turn on the special figure 1 variable game. Is informed that the number of holds is four.

  Further, in the state where the change is stopped, the first sub-control unit 400 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation (in this example, “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. doing. In addition, the hold display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon display area 900, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500), when a predetermined hold display condition is satisfied (for example, the first display unit). On the special figure starting port 230, etc., one hold icon corresponding to the increased special figure 1 variable game hold can be displayed. Here, the holding means displays four holding icons PI in the holding display area 208d to notify that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game is four. In addition, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display area 208f for special figure 2 are turned off to notify that the fluctuation is being stopped. Moreover, the speaker 120 is outputting the sound of the effect (effect C) in the design fluctuation.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which one special figure 1 variable game is suspended and the fluctuation display of special figure 1 is started (variation start). In this fluctuation start state, the main control unit 300 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 using the special figure 1 display device 212 and blinks the fourth symbol display area 208e for the special figure 1 (in the figure). It is informed that it is changing. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 starts variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, the hold display means changes the rightmost hold icon PI in the hold display area 208d from a solid color to a white display, and notifies that the hold number of the special figure 1 variable game has become 3. Moreover, the speaker 120 is outputting the sound of the effect (effect C) in the design fluctuation.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the execution condition for effect A (simultaneous effect) is satisfied. That is, a predetermined time (for example, 60 minutes) shown in the time table of FIG. 280 (a) has elapsed since the power was turned on.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which the execution of effect A is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, while continuing the effect (effect C) during the same symbol variation as in FIG. 5B, a part of the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W) of the main display area D1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. ) Has started a simultaneous production (production A (production A1-1a). Specifically, a trailer indicating that the main production of the mass production (production A) is before the start of the main part is displayed (a little bit opened) In addition, the speaker 120 displays voice data of the effect A1-1a (trailer) constituting the effect A (for example, the effect A1- in FIGS. 279 (c) to (e)). 1a (sound), the same applies to audio data hereinafter) Note that, here, a case where the sub display area D2 is displayed in the wiped display area 208W (sub display area D21) is described as an example. Sub display device 08S may be those which appear in the (sub display area D22), which will be similar in all the following examples of the present embodiment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is the state where the fluctuation stop of FIG. 1 is performed. In this variable stop state, the main control unit 300 stops and displays “out” on the special figure 1 display device 212. Further, in the state where the fluctuation is stopped, the first sub-control unit 400 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation (in this example, “decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 7”) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. doing. At the timing of this fluctuation stop, the wipe-like display area 208W is once erased, and the effect C is displayed on the entire display area (main display area D1) of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, the speaker 120 outputs audio data of the effect A1-2a constituting the effect A, and notifies that the effect A (effect A1-2a) is continuing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the effect A (effect A1-3a) is being executed (displayed) on the entire surface of the main display area D1. Specifically, as a trailer of the effect A, an image (animation) in a state where the bag is slightly opened and a display (for example, “Preparing” characters indicating that the main part of the effect A is not started) Or “Countdown display until start of main part such as“ 60 more ”) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the main control unit 300 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 using the special figure 1 display device 212, and the fourth symbol display area 208e for the special figure 1 is blinked and displayed. Notifying that there is. In the sub display area D21 (wipe-shaped display area 208W), the decorative symbol variation display (effect C) is displayed. In addition, a decorative symbol variation display and a hold count display (here, “2”) are also displayed at the left end of the main display area D1. From the speaker 120, the audio data of the production A1-3a constituting the production A is output. At this timing, the effect displayed in the wipe display area 208W in FIG. 10C is displayed in the main display area D1, and the effect C displayed in the main display area D1 in FIG. The display area W is switched to display. In this example, the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W) is displayed in front of the main display area D1. For this reason, the effect A is executed on the entire surface of the main display area D1, but it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the effect by the sub display area D21.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G is a state in which the execution of the production A (trailer (production A1-7a)) is continued in the main display area D1, and the audio data of the production A1-4a is output from the speaker 120. The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state where the numerical value of the countdown display until the start of the main part is “0” and the audio data of the production A1-7a is being output from the speaker 120. Also, at this timing, the decorative symbol variation display and the number of reserved “4” are displayed at the left end of the main display area D1. Also in the sub display area D21, the decorative symbol variation display is continued.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6 (i), the main part of the production A (the production A1-8a in which the character “princess” appears) starts in the main display area D1, and the production A1-8a (main part) from the speaker 120. The audio data is being output. Further, at this timing, the decorative symbol variation display and the hold number “4” are continuously displayed at the left end portion of the main display region D1, and the decorative symbol variation display (execution of effect C) is also continued in the sub display region D21. doing.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the main part of the production A (production A1-10a) is continued in the main display area D1, and the audio data of the production A1-10a (main program) is output from the speaker 120. State. At this timing, one hold is consumed, and the next decorative symbol variation display is executed. The decorative symbol variation display and the number of suspensions “3” are displayed at the left end of the main display area D1, and the sub-display is performed. Also in the area D21, the decorative symbol variation display (execution of effect C) is continued.

  In the main display area D1, the ending (effect A1-11a) of the effect A is executed and the sound data of the effect A1-11a (ending) is output from the speaker 120 in the timing shown in FIG. It is. At this timing, the decorative symbol variation display and the hold number “3” are continuously displayed at the left end of the main display region D1, and the decorative symbol variation display (execution of effect C) is also continued in the sub-display region D21. ing.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6L, the ending of the effect A is continued in the main display area D1, the sound data of the effect A1-11a (ending) is output from the speaker 120, and the fluctuation is stopped. State. That is, the main control unit 300 stops and displays “displacement” on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays a symbol combination (in this example, “decoration” in the sub-display area D2. 5-decoration 4-decoration 5 ") is stopped. In the left end portion of the main display area D1, a number “545” indicating that the symbol combination corresponding to “displacement” has been stopped and a number “3” as the number of holds are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) is a state in which the ending of the effect A is continued in the main display area D1 and the audio data of the effect A1-11a (ending) is output from the speaker 120. In the sub display area D21, the stop display of the symbol combination (in this example, “decoration 5—decoration 4—decoration 5”) corresponding to the discontinuation is continued, and the stop display of the ornamental symbols is displayed at the left end of the main display area D1. The number “545” indicating “H” and the number “3” of the number of holds are displayed. On the other hand, the main control unit 300 informs that one LED of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned off (two are turned on), one hold is consumed, and the next variable game starts.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) is a state in which the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started (variation start). The main control unit 300 uses the special figure 1 display device 212 to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and also blinks the fourth symbol display area 208e for the special figure 1 (filled in the figure) and is changing. Notifying that there is. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 ends the execution of the effect A in the main display area D1, starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and has two hold icons PI in the hold display area 208d. Is displayed and the fact that the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 variable game is 2 is informed. Moreover, the speaker 120 is outputting the sound of the effect (effect C) in the design fluctuation. Simultaneously with the end of the production A, the display of the sub display area D21 is also erased.

  In this way, the production A has, for example, a trailer (figure (f) to (h)), a main part (figure (i) to (j)), and an ending (figure (k) to (m)). You may be comprised from the several part completed in a package. In this case, the trailer, the main part, and the ending are part of the production A. In particular, only the trailer, the main part, or the ending may be the effect A.

<Example N>
FIG. 299 is a diagram showing effects (effects B and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208 of Example N in time series. In the following examples, the main part of the present embodiment will be mainly described, and configurations not particularly specified are the same as those in Example M. In the figure, for example, in ST machine, for example, “Special Figure K” (16R special big hit (16R special probability variation)) is won, and the performance B is executed with the start condition as having entered into the probability variation state after the big hit. An example is shown. Further, the production B of the present embodiment is a simultaneous production by a plurality of pachinko machines 100.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B are the same as those shown in FIGS. 298A and 298B in Example M, and the description thereof is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the first sub-control unit 400 stops and displays “decoration 5” in the main display area D1 (symbol display areas 208a and 208c), and achieves a reach (super reach) effect (effect C). ).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the characters “SP reach” in the main display area D1, and displays the decorative design in the upper left of the main display area D1 in a super-reach manner. This is a state where an effect (effect C) is being performed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5E, the first sub-control unit 400 performs symbol combinations (for example, “16R probability variation big hit”) of “Special Figure K” in the main display area D1 (design display areas 208a to 208c). (Decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5 ") is displayed in the state of fluctuation fluctuation, and the timing shown in FIG. 8 (f) is a state in which the symbol combination of" special drawing K "is stopped and displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the jackpot effect has started, and the timing shown in FIG. 5H is a state in which the effect of the first round (1R) of the jackpot game is being executed. FIG. (I) shows a state in which the effect of the 16th round (16R) of the big hit game is being executed. In the big hit effect, a right-handed notification display for notifying that it is easy to win a winning opening by right-handed and the number of rounds are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (j) is a state in which a probability change has been made after the end of the 16R jackpot game, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays characters such as “probability change entry” in the main display area D1 to change the probability. Notify that the status has been reached. Here, the variation number of the probability variation is, for example, 150 times.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) is a state in which the production B has started to be executed on the condition that the state has changed to the probability variation state. The first sub-control unit 400 executes (displays) the effect B (Yoshimune link effect) on the entire surface of the main display area D1. The production B includes, for example, the production B1a, and the production B1a includes a plurality of production data (production parts) of the production B1-1a, the production B1-2a, the production B1-3a, etc. (FIG. 281). (B), see FIG. 279 (a)).

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the effect B1-1a of “Yoshimune link effect” in the main display area D1. Further, for example, the remaining number of fluctuations (remaining 149) is displayed above the main display area D1, and the decorative symbol fluctuation display and the number of holds “4” are displayed at the left end of the first display area D1. Further, the right-handed notification display is continued. In the sub display area D21, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and an effect (effect C) is displayed in which the four hold icons PI corresponding to the number of holds are displayed in a solid color. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs audio data of the effect B1-1a.

  In this example, the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W) is displayed in front of the main display area D1. For this reason, the effect B is executed on the entire surface of the main display area D1, but it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the effect by the sub display area D21.

  The effect B displayed at this timing is not necessarily the first (first) effect B1-1a. That is, as shown in FIG. 280 (c), the execution of the production B is controlled from the production B1-1a to the production B1-2a, the production B1-3a,... The production data corresponding to the elapsed time from when the power is turned on to the state of the certainty change (for example, the production B1-3a) is displayed so as to be recognizable to the player at this timing. Is done. This example also does not indicate that the first (first) effect data constituting the effect B is started. For example, in the case of the setting shown in FIG. 281 (b), when the probability of entering the start time is 12 minutes, the effect B1a (effect B1-1a...) Is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L is a state in which the next change is started and the effect B is continuously executed in the main display area D1. Specifically, an effect B1-2a of “Yoshimune link effect” is executed in the main display area D1. Further, for example, the remaining number of fluctuations (remaining 148) is displayed above the main display area D1, and the decorative symbol fluctuation display and the number of holds “3” are displayed at the left end of the first display area D1. Further, the right-handed notification display is continued. In the sub display area D21, the next decoration pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and an effect (effect C) is displayed in which the three hold icons PI corresponding to the number of holds are filled and displayed. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs sound data of the effect B1-2a.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) is a state in which the last variation is started and the effect B is continuously executed in the main display area D1. Specifically, the production B1-8a of “Yoshimune link production” is executed in the main display area D1. Further, for example, the remaining number of times of change (LAST) is displayed above the main display area D1, and the decoration pattern change display and the hold number “4” are displayed at the left end of the first display area D1. In addition, “right-handed notification” is continued. In the sub display area D21, the last decoration symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and an effect (effect C) is displayed in which the four hold icons PI corresponding to the number of holds are displayed in a solid color. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs sound data of the effect B1-8a.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) is a state in which the effect B is continuously executed in the main display area D1. Specifically, the production B1-9a of “Yoshimune link production” is executed in the main display area D1. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display and the number of reserved “4” are displayed at the left end of the first display area D1. Further, the right-handed notification display is continued. In the sub display area D21, the result display in the variable game of probability change (for example, display of the number of acquired balls and the number of consecutive changs, etc.) and the effect that the four hold icons PI corresponding to the number of holds are filled and displayed (effect C) ). In addition, the speaker 120 outputs sound data of the production B1-9a.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (o) is a state in which the effect B is continuously executed in the main display area D1. Specifically, the production B1-9a of “Yoshimune link production” is executed in the main display area D1. In addition, at the left end portion of the first display area D1, a number “787” indicating that the symbol combination corresponding to “displacement” has been stopped and “4” as the number of holds is displayed. Further, the right-handed notification display is continued. In the sub display area D21, the result in the variable game of probability change is continuously displayed, and an effect (effect C) is displayed in which the four hold icons PI corresponding to the number of holds are filled and displayed. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs sound data of the production B1-9a.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (p) is a state immediately before the state of probability change ends, one hold is consumed, and the next normal variation game is started (the end condition for effect B is satisfied). At this timing, the effect B is continuously executed in the main display area D1. Specifically, the production B1-9a of “Yoshimune link production” is executed in the main display area D1. In addition, at the left end of the first display area D1, the number “787” indicating the stop display of the decorative symbols and the number “4” of the number of holds are displayed. Further, the right-handed notification display is continued. In the sub display area D21, the result in the variable game of probability change is continuously displayed, and an effect (effect C) is displayed in which the four hold icons PI corresponding to the number of holds are filled and displayed. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs sound data of the production B1-9a.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (q) is a state in which the next normal variable game is started and the condition for ending production B is satisfied. When the condition for ending effect B is satisfied, execution of effect B is terminated in main display area D1, decorative display of variable symbols is performed in symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and three hold icons PI corresponding to the number of holds are displayed. It is filled and displayed. In addition, audio data of effect C is output from the speaker 120.

<Example O>
300 and 301 are diagrams showing other examples of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series. Example O is an example in which an effect is executed using the sub display device 208S (sub display area D22) instead of (or in addition to) the wiped display area 208W (sub display area D21) of Example M. .

  300 (a) to (j) show the same timing as FIGS. 298 (a) to (j), and FIGS. 301 (a) to (d) show the same timing as FIGS. 298 (k) to (n). Thus, the description of the same configuration as that of Example M is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, in this embodiment, the sub display device 208S is provided as the sub display area D2 (D22), and the effect C (decorative display of decorative symbols) is executed in the main display area D1. When doing so, the effect C is also executed in the sub display device 208S. In this case, in the sub display area D22 (sub display device 208S), the effect C having the same content as the effect C in the main display area D1 may be reduced and the content of the effect C executed in the main display area D1. It is also possible to execute an effect C ′ that is simplified.

  When the execution condition of effect A (simultaneous effect) is satisfied at the timing shown in FIG. 10C, the decorative display variable display (effect C) continues in the main display area D1 at the timing shown in FIG. The execution of the effect A (trailer) is started in the wiped display area 208W (sub display area D21). In addition, the effect C is continuously executed in the sub display device 208S (sub display area D22). Note that the wipe-like display area 208W may not be displayed at this timing, and the execution of the effect A (trailer) may be started on the sub display device 208S.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the decorative symbol stop display (effect C) is executed in the main display area D1, and the effect C is also executed in the sub display area D2 (D22).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the execution of the effect A (trailer (effect A1-1a)) is started in the main display area D1, and the execution of the effect C is continued in the sub display area D2 (D22). is there. Thereafter, in the same figure (g), the effect A (the trailer (effect A1-2a)) is executed in the main display area D1, and the effect C is continuously executed in the sub display area D2 (D22). Then, the production A (trailer (production A1-3a)) is executed in the main display area D1, and the execution of the production C is continued in the sub display area D2 (D22). In the same figure (i), in the main display area D1. Production A (main part (production A1-8a)) is executed, and execution of production C is continued in the sub-display area D2 (D22). In the figure (j), production A (main part (production A1) is performed in the main display area D1. -10a)) is executed, and the execution of the effect C is continued in the sub display area D2 (D22).

  Thereafter, FIGS. 301A to 301D are the same as Example N except that the effect C is executed in the sub display device (sub display area D22) instead of the wiped display area 208W (sub display area D21). Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  In all examples of the present embodiment, the configuration in which the effect is executed in the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W) is changed to the configuration in which the effect is executed in the sub display area D22 (sub display device 208S). The configuration in which the effect is executed in the sub display area D22 (sub display device 208S) may be replaced with the configuration in which the effect is executed in the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W).

<Example P>
FIG. 302 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  302 (a) to 302 (c) are diagrams showing an example of effects in the case of executing a normal effect C in time series. The effect C is an effect including a display for changing the hold icon PI.

  FIG. 18A is the same timing as FIG. 298B of the embodiment M, but is superimposed on the hold icon (third hold icon PI from the left) corresponding to the hold to be digested next to the change. In this state, an image (button operation icon BI) suggesting the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is displayed.

  When the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) in this state (during the decorative symbol variation display), as shown in FIG. 5B, the button operation icon BI is displayed as shown in FIG. The held hold icon PI changes from a black circle filled image to the icon of the character “don” (hereinafter referred to as “change display of hold icon PI”).

  In such a configuration, an example in which the effect A is executed is shown in FIGS.

  First, the timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the production A (trailer) has started execution at the timing shown in FIG. 4A (in the state where the button operation icon BI is displayed). The effect A is executed in the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (e) corresponds to a shift in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c because the chance button 136 is not operated even though the button operation icon BI is displayed during the variation display of the decorative symbol. The combination of symbols to be displayed (in this example, “decoration 2—decoration 1—decoration 7”) is stopped. The timing shown in FIG. 5F is the same as the timing shown in FIG. As described above, when the chance button 136 is not operated and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed even though the button operation icon BI is displayed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, the change display of the hold icon PI is displayed. Is not executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 4D and 4E, if the effect A is executed but not displayed in the main display area D1, the audio data output from the speaker 120 is the effect C of the effect C. As shown in FIG. 5F, when the effect A is displayed in the main display area D1, the audio data output from the speaker 120 may be the effect data of the effect A (effect A1-1a). .

  Further, (g) to (i) in the figure show other examples in which the change display of the hold icon PI is not executed. In the timings shown in FIGS. 5G and 5H, the chance button 136 is not operated and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not operated even though the button operation icon BI is displayed during the variation display of the decorative symbol. , Is a state in which the symbol combination (in this example, “decoration 2—decoration 1—decoration 7”) corresponding to the deviation is stopped and displayed. In this case, at the timing shown in FIG. 6 (i), the effect A (effect A1-3a) is executed in the main display area D1, and the next variable display of decorative symbols is displayed in the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W). Is executed, and the hold icon PI that does not change is displayed. Although one hold is consumed, none of the hold icons PI change, and two hold icons PI are displayed in black. Thus, in the present embodiment, the function for displaying the change of the hold icon is disabled during the execution of the effect A (see FIG. 277 (a)).

<Example Q>
FIG. 303 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  303 (a) to 303 (d) are diagrams showing an example of effects when the normal effect C is executed in time series. The effect C is an effect including an animation related to the hold icon.

  FIG. 19A shows the same timing as FIG. 298B of the embodiment M. The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the holding is increased by one. In this example, the hold display means moves the display position of a predetermined hold icon corresponding to the predetermined hold when a predetermined hold movement condition (for example, start of special figure variable game, increase in hold) is satisfied. It is possible to display a predetermined hold movement animation (for example, a move animation of a hold icon, an increase animation, an erase animation, and a move animation between hold / change icons).

  As shown in FIGS. 2B and 2C, the hold display means executes an increase animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon PI gradually rises from the lower end of the main display area D1 as the hold increases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5D is a state in which the increase animation of the hold icon is completed and the fourth hold icon PI is displayed in the hold display area 208d.

  In such a configuration, examples in the case where the effect A is executed are shown in FIGS.

  First, the timing shown in (e) and (f) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (a) and (b) of the figure.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G is a state in which the production A (trailer (production A1-1a)) has started to be executed in the sub-display area D21 during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon in the main display area D1. In this case, as shown in the figure, the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled halfway, and the fourth hold icon PI is displayed in the hold display area 208d in one frame. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11H, the effect A continues to execute the trailer (effect A1-2a) in the sub display area D21.

  In addition, FIGS. (I) to (l) show other examples in which the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled.

  First, the timings shown in (i) and (j) of the figure are the same as the timings shown in (a) and (b) of the figure.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 10 (k), during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the production A (trailer (production A1-1a)) starts executing in the main display area D1, and the production C ( This is a state in which execution of the decorative symbol variation display) has started. In this case, as shown in the figure, the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled halfway, and the fourth hold icon PI is displayed in the hold display area 208d in one frame. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10L, the effect A continues to execute the trailer (effect A1-2a) in the main display area D2. Thus, in the present embodiment, part of the animation function related to the hold icon is disabled during the execution of the effect A (see FIG. 277 (a)).

<Example R>
FIG. 304 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  304 (a) to 304 (f) are diagrams showing an example of effects when the normal effect C is executed in time series. The effect C is an effect including an animation related to the hold icon. In the present embodiment, as the hold display area 208d, there are a normal hold display area 208d1 for displaying the hold icon PI, and a change hold display area 208d2 for displaying the change icon CI indicating the hold icon related to the change. Is provided.

  In the timings shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the decorative display is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the main display area D1, and the change icon CI (star) for the change is displayed in the change hold display area 208d2. In the normal hold display area 208d1, the effect C is displayed in which three hold icons PI (black circle icons) corresponding to the number of holds are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation (in this example, “decoration 2—decoration 1—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The timing shown in (d) is a state in which one hold is exhausted, one LED of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned off, and the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to be two.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9E is a state in which the next decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c with the suspension of the reservation. At this timing, the hold icon PI corresponding to the hold suspended in the normal hold display area 208d1 is deleted, the change icon CI is deleted in the change hold display area 208d2, and the hold icon PI is moved to cope with the change. Movement (deletion) / change animation of the hold icon for redisplaying the change icon CI is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is a state in which the hold icon has been moved (deleted) / changed. At this timing, two hold icons PI are displayed in the normal hold display area 208d1, and the change icon CI is displayed in the change hold display area 208d2.

  In such a configuration, examples in the case where the effect A is executed are shown in FIGS.

  First, the timing shown in FIG. 6G is a state in which the effect C is executed in the main display area D1 and the effect A (A1-1a) is executed in the sub display area D21. In the effect C, the decorative display is changed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the change icon CI (star icon) related to the change is displayed in the change hold display area 208d2, and the normal hold display area 208d1 The effect is that three hold icons PI (black circle icons) corresponding to the number of holds are displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (h) is a state in which one hold is consumed, one LED of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned off, and a notice that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game has become 2 is shown. Yes, the timing shown in FIG. 5I is a state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation (in this example, “decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

The timing shown in FIG. 6J is a state immediately before the start condition of the production A is established. At this timing, the change icon CI in the change hold display area 208d2 is deleted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6 (k), the production A (trailer (production A1-1a)) starts executing in the main display area D1, and the production C (decorative display of decorative symbols) starts executing in the sub display area D21. The timing shown in FIG. 6L is a state in which the production A continues to execute the trailer (production A1-2a) in the main display area D1.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when only the normal effect C is executed, the variation icon CI is displayed during the stop display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. As shown in (e), the change icon CI is erased and the movement of the hold icon (erase) / change animation is executed at the timing when the display of the decorative symbol is started after the hold is digested, but the production A starts. When the condition is satisfied, the change icon CI is erased early as shown in FIG. 6J, and the effect A is started in the main display area D1 as shown in FIG.

  (M) to (p) in the figure show other examples in which the movement (deletion) / change animation of the hold icon is canceled.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (m) to (j), when the hold icon movement (deletion) / change animation is executed with the hold, the effect (for example, effect C) is produced in the main display area D1. When the execution is started, the movement (deletion) / change animation of the hold icon is cancelled, the change icon CI is displayed in the change hold display area 208d2 in one frame, and the normal hold display area 208d1 corresponds to the number of holds (here Then, it is good also as a structure which displays two hold icons PI. Thus, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the effect A, at least a part of the animation function related to the hold icon is disabled (see FIG. 277 (a)).

<Example S>
FIG. 305 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 305 (a) shows a state in which the effect C is being executed in the main display area D1. The effect C is an effect including the first display 700 and the second display 702.

  In this state, when the start condition for the effect A is satisfied, the effect A starts to be executed in the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W) as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, at this timing, the second display 702 that is a part of the effect C is displayed in the sub display area D21.

  Further, FIGS. 305 (c) and (d) show other examples. FIG. 6C shows a state in which the effect C is being executed in the main display area D1. The effect C includes a first display 700 and a second display 702.

  In this state, when the start condition for the effect A is satisfied, the effect A starts to be executed in the sub display area D22 (sub display device 208S) as shown in FIG. At this timing, the second display 702 that is part of the effect C is displayed in the sub display area D22.

  Specific examples of the first display 700 and the second display 702 will be described with reference to FIGS. The first display 700 and the second display 702 are, for example, related displays. In this example, the first display 700 is a character “please make a right strike” to notify the right strike, and the second display 702 is an arrow pointing to the right. As shown in FIG. 5E, during the performance C (only), the first display 700 and the second display 702 are displayed in the main display area D1. Then, as shown in FIG. 5E, at the timing when the production A starts to be executed in the sub display area D21, the second display 702 (right arrow) is erased from the main display area D1, and the sub display area D21. Is displayed. Here, the case where the second display 702 is moved and displayed in the sub display area D21 has been described as an example. However, the first display 700 may be moved and displayed in the sub display area D21. Further, the first display 700 and the second display 702 may be unrelated displays.

<Example T>
FIG. 306 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208. The present embodiment is a display example in the V prize winning change machine in which the possibility of entering a specific area (probability changing operation area, V winning area) is assigned by the operation of the structure (opening / closing operation of a plurality of attackers).

  FIG. 306 (a) shows a state in which the effect C is being executed in the main display area D1. The effect C here is an effect of notifying that it is a big hit that is easy to win right by making a right hit, the letter “V Aim” is displayed near the center of the main display area D1, and a big hit is shown in the upper left. A decorative symbol stop display (here, “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”) is displayed, and a right-handed notification display (a right-pointing arrow suggesting a right-handed strike and a character “right-handed”) is displayed at the upper right. Has been.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the effect A is executed in the main display area D1 in the configuration capable of executing the effect C shown in FIG. Is the state where the big hit that is easy to win V is won. The jackpot that is easy to win V is information advantageous to the player, so the effect A being executed in the main display area D1 is switched to the sub display area D21 and displayed, and the effect C is executed in the main display area D1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4D, even if the winning state is a big win that is easy to win a V prize (if the effect A is executed in the main display area D1 first, it continues as it is. The effect C may be executed in the secondary display area D21.

  Further, among the effects C, for example, the stop display (or variable display) of the decorative symbols is the first display 700 and the right-handed notification display is the second display 702, as shown in FIG. May be displayed in the sub display area D21, the second display 702 may be displayed in the sub display area D21. In this case, the first display 700 and the second display 702 are unrelated displays.

<Example U>
FIG. 307 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 307 (a) to 307 (d) show a state in which the effect C is being executed in the main display area D1. The effect C is an effect including a tutorial display. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 4A to 4D, a plurality of tutorials (Tutorial 1, Tutorial 2) are performed over a plurality of timings when a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable or stopped display in the main display area D1. 2, 3, 4) is displayed.

  In such a configuration, display examples of effects when effect A is executed are shown in chronological order in FIGS.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the effect C is executed in the main display area D1 and the tutorial 1 is displayed. In this state, when the start condition of the effect A is satisfied, the effect A starts to be executed in the wiped display area 208 </ b> W provided to overlap the display area of the tutorial 1 as shown in FIG. The production A is executed in front of the tutorial 1, so that the tutorial 1 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G is a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and at this timing, the effect A in the wipe-like display area 208W is once erased. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the tutorial 3 on the back surface of the wipe-shaped display area 208 </ b> W.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the effect A is executed in the main display area D1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started in the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W). In this state, when the effect A is executed in the main display area D1, the effect of displaying the tutorial (Tutorial 4) is stopped. As described above, in this embodiment, at least a part of the function of the tutorial display is disabled during the execution of the effect A (see FIG. 277 (a)).

<Example V>
FIG. 308 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 308A to 308C show a state in which the effect C is being executed in the main display area D1. The effect C is an effect including a tutorial display. Also in this example, as shown in FIGS. 5A to 5C, a plurality of tutorials are displayed over a plurality of timings when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the main display area D1. . The tutorial of the present embodiment is a display of characters “Princess” and “A reach is expected to develop”, and characters “爺” and “Let's appear when the spear appears!”.

  In such a configuration, display examples of effects when effect A is executed are shown in chronological order in FIGS.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is executed in the main display area D1, and the timing shown in FIG. 4E displays the tutorial of the character “princess”. The timing shown in FIG. 5F is a state in which a tutorial for the character “爺” is additionally displayed. When the start condition of the production A is satisfied at the timing of FIG. 5F, in the wipe-like display area 208W provided to overlap with both the tutorial of the character “princess” and the tutorial of the character “爺” Production A starts execution. The production A is executed in front of the two tutorials, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the two tutorials. As described above, in this embodiment, at least a part of the function of the tutorial display is disabled during the execution of the effect A (see FIG. 277 (a)).

<Example W>
FIG. 309 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208. This figure is a diagram showing in chronological order another display example of the effect A, particularly the trailer.

  The timing shown in FIG. 309 (a) is a state in which the menu screen (effect C) is displayed in the main display area D1.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which a trailer of the effect A (herein, “let's start soon”) is displayed in the sub display area D21 provided in front of the main display area D1. Due to the display of the effect A, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the menu screen. In this example, the sub display area D21 is a wipe-like display area 208W, but by making it equal to the width of the main display area D1 as shown in the figure, the effect A (trailer) may be displayed in a cut-in image style. it can.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is a state in which the execution of the main part of the production A is started in another sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W) after the execution of the trailer is completed. In this way, the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W) may be an area having a different shape depending on the contents of the effect A to be executed (for example, the trailer and the main part).

  Moreover, after the figure (a), you may make it perform the main part of the figure (c), without performing the trailer shown in the figure (b).

  FIGS. 9D to 9G show other display examples of the trailer.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is executed in the main display area D1, and the timing shown in FIG. This is a state in which the trailer of the effect A is displayed in the sub display area D21 so as to cover the front surface of the area D1. The timing shown in FIG. 5F is a state in which the decorative symbol stop display is performed, and the decorative symbol stop display is re-displayed on the front of the trailer of the production A, so that the trailer of the production A becomes difficult to visually recognize. Then, when the decorative symbol variation display is started again at the timing shown in FIG. 5G, the trailer of the effect A is redisplayed in front of the ornamental symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol variation display is difficult to visually recognize. Become.

<Example X>
FIG. 310 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208. This figure is a diagram showing in chronological order another display example of the effect A, particularly the trailer.

  310 (a) to 310 (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects when operating means (for example, chance button 136) is operated in the time series when effect C is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A to 9F, the decorative symbol change display (effect C) is executed in the main display area D1 (FIGS. 10A and 10B), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the operating means (for example, chance button 136) is operated in the state (FIG. (C), (d)) (FIG. (E)), a menu screen is displayed (FIG. (F)).

  In such a configuration, the case where the effect A is executed is shown in FIGS. While the decorative symbol variation display (effect C) is being executed in the main display area D1 ((g) in the figure), when the start condition for the effect A is satisfied, the execution of the effect A (trailer) is started in the sub display area D21. ((H) in the figure). Then, at the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect A in the sub display area D21 is once erased ((i) in the figure). After that, the effect A is executed in the main display area D1, and the effect C (decorative symbol stop display) is executed in the sub display area D21 so as to be displayed ((j) in the figure). When an operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is operated at this timing ((k) in the figure), the menu screen is not displayed ((l) in the figure). Thus, in the present embodiment, the menu display function is disabled during the execution of effect A (see FIG. 277 (a)).

<Example Y>
FIG. 311 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIGS. 311 (a) to 3 (e) are time series diagrams showing examples of effects when the normal effect C is executed. The effect C is an effect including a notice effect.

  (A) to (c) of FIG. 5 display decorative pattern variation display in the symbol variation regions 208a to 208c of the main display region D1, and perform normal symbol variation display in the common diagram variation display region 208h of the main display region D1. This is a state in which the first notice effect 704 (the notice icon of the character “Tono”) is displayed in the upper left of the main display area D1.

  (D) and (e) of the figure show a second notice effect 706 (an animation in which an arrow moves toward the normal fluctuation display area 208h) based on the determination of whether or not the normal fluctuation display area 208h is normal. In this state, the arrow reaches the normal map display area 208h and displays a “notice effect” in which a character “Geki” indicating a big hit is displayed.

  In such a configuration, display examples when the effect A is executed are shown in FIGS. When the start condition of the effect A is satisfied in the state where the decorative display of the decorative symbol is being displayed in the main display area D1, the effect A (trailer) is executed in the sub display area D21. The sub display area D21 is provided so as to overlap the front surface of the display area of the second notice effect 706 (that is, the usual figure change display area 208h). The figure change display area 208h) is difficult to view. Then, as shown in FIG. 5H, once the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect A is erased. Thereafter, as shown in (i) and (h) of the figure, effect A (trailer) is executed in the main display area D1, and variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the sub display area D21. Thus, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the notice display function is disabled during the execution of the effect A (see FIG. 277 (a)).

<Example Z>
FIG. 312 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 312 (a) shows a state in which an effect (effect C) including a character selection function is being executed in the main display area D1. In this state, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the production A starts to be executed in the sub display area D21, a part of the character selection function becomes invisible due to the production A. In other words, in this example, at least part of the character selection function is disabled during the execution of effect A (see FIG. 277 (a)).

  FIG. 10C shows a state in which an effect (effect C) including a song selection function is being executed in the main display area D1. In this state, when the effect A starts to be executed in the sub display area D21 as shown in FIG. That is, in this example, during the performance A, at least a part of the music selection function is disabled (see FIG. 277 (a)).

  FIG. 5E shows a state in which an effect (effect C) including a meter display function is being executed in the main display area D1. In this state, when the effect A starts to be executed in the sub display area D21 as shown in FIG. 5F, a part of the meter display function becomes invisible due to the effect A. That is, in this example, during execution of the effect A, at least a part of the meter display function is disabled (see FIG. 277 (a)).

<Example a>
FIG. 313 is a diagram showing another example of the effects (effects B and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208, and a table of effects when winning the jackpot of the latent probability change (hidden probability change) of “Special Figure E” An example is shown.

  When “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, after the jackpot game (opening time 100 ms × 2R) ends, the special figure high probability general figure low probability state (so-called latent probability variation state) If "Special Figure E" is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state will be entered after the jackpot game (opening time 29000 ms x 2R) ends. Transition. In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A is a state in which a notice effect of latent probability change (effect C, here “display of“ latent mode ”) is being executed, and FIG. This is a state in which (Production C) is being executed. In FIG. 9C, the effect B (Yoshimune link effect) is executed on the entire surface of the main display area D1 on the condition that the certainty change is confirmed. In this way, when winning the big hit of the latent probability change, the effect B may not be executed until the probability change is confirmed.

<Example b>
FIG. 314 is a diagram showing another example of effects (effects A and C) in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5A is a state in which the effect A (trailer) is being executed in the main display area D1, and the decorative symbol variation display (effect C) is being executed in the sub display area D22 (sub display device 208S). It is. In this effect A (trailer), a button operation notification (in this case, “upper and lower buttons can be switched”) indicating that the display area can be switched by button operation is displayed.

  In this state, when the operation means (operation button 710) is operated as shown in FIG. 6B, the effect A executed in the main display area D1 is displayed in the sub display area D22 as shown in FIG. The effect A is executed in the sub display area D22, so that the effect A is executed in the main display area D1.

<Example c>
FIG. 315 is a diagram showing a display example of effects (effects A and effects B) on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The production B is a link production performed in synchronism with a plurality of pachinko machines 100 during the big hit. When the big hit is won, the production B (Yoshimune song) is output from the speaker 120, and the main display area D1 An effect B (Yoshimune link effect) is executed, and an effect B (Yoshimune link effect) (for example, a simplified version) is also executed in the sub display area D22.

  If the start condition of effect A is satisfied during execution of effect B (when a certain time has elapsed since the power is turned on), effect B being executed in main display area D1 is sub-displayed in reduced display. It switches so that it may be performed in area | region D22, and execution of the effect A (Himeshima simultaneous effect) starts in the main display area D1. In addition, production A (princess song) is output from the speaker 120. In this case, the effect A of the main display area D1 and the effect B of the sub display area D22 can be switched by operating the operation means (for example, the operation button 710).

<Example d>
FIG. 316 is a diagram showing another display example of effects (effect A, effect C) on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5A, the effect A (main part) is being executed in the main display area D1, and the display switching notification (here, “the left and right buttons are used” as the effect C in the sub display area D22 (sub display device 208S)). "The character can be changed") is displayed. At this timing, an image in which the character “princess” dances with his eyes closed is displayed, and the audio data of the effect A1-8a is output from the speaker 120, for example. FIG. 5B shows a state where the right button of the operation means (operation button 710) is operated.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is a state where the effect A (main part) is being executed in the main display area D1, but the effect aspect (display aspect) of the effect A has changed. In this example, an image in which the character “princess” faces the front and sits down is displayed. In addition, the production A1-8a is maintained for the audio data output from the speaker 120.

  Thus, although it is the same effect A by operation of an operation means, the effect mode (display mode) may change. As the change of the production mode, all of the sound (sound) and display may be changed, for example, the sound (sound) is not changed, and other configurations of the production (for example, display, movable body, etc.) are changed. You may comprise.

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the effect C (decorative display of decorative symbols) is being executed in the main display area D1, and the effect A (trailer) in the one sub-display area D21 (wipe display area 208W). In the other sub-display area D22, and a button operation notification (for example, “participation = left not participating = right” character for selecting whether or not to perform the performance A) is selected. It is in the displayed state. From the speaker 120, audio data of the production A1-1a is output. FIG. 5B shows a state where the right button of the operation means (operation button 710) is operated.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which the effect C (decorative display of decorative symbols) is being executed in the main display area D1, and the display related to the effect C is being executed in the sub display area D22. Audio data of effect C is output from the speaker 120. That is, since the user has selected not to participate in the execution of the production A for which the trailer was displayed in FIG. 10A, the production A in the sub display area D21 is canceled and is not displayed.

  As described above, it may be possible to select (determine) whether or not the execution of the effect A (and / or the effect B) can be performed by operating the operation unit.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 5A, and the speaker 120 is outputting audio data of the production A1-8a (for example, male vocal singing). is there. When the operation button 710 is operated in this state ((h) in the figure), in the same figure (i), the audio data output from the speaker 120 is switched to the production A1-8b (for example, female vocal singing).

  As shown in FIG. 281, in the present embodiment, for example, with regard to the effect A executed at a certain timing (60 minutes after power-on), for example, the setting A for executing the effect A1a of male vocal singing and the female vocal A plurality of settings such as a setting B for performing the singing effect A1b can be performed, and the setting A and the setting B can be switched by the DIP switch 650.

  However, not only switching by the DIP switch 650, but as shown in this example, the operation A1-8a (male vocal song) and the effect A1-8b (female vocal song) can be switched by operating the operation button 710. You may comprise.

<Example e>
FIG. 317 is an external perspective view showing an example of simultaneous production by the movable body 224. For example, as shown in FIG. 6A, the fan-shaped movable body 224a provided on the upper portion of the front frame door 106 rotates in the vertical direction (opening direction and closing direction) around the upper side of the front frame door 106 as a rotation axis. It is possible. And at the time of execution of simultaneous production (either production A or production B may be both), movable body 224a is opened upward.

  In this state, for example, if there is an illegal act such as opening the front frame door 106, the movable unit 224a moves in the closing direction only in the gaming machine 100 that has performed the illegal act (returns to the initial position). In this way, when an illegal act is performed while the simultaneous production is being performed by the movable unit 224, only the movable unit 244 of the gaming machine 100 on which the illegal activity has been performed is set to be different from the operation of the simultaneous production. Thus, it can be notified that an illegal act has been performed.

  In addition to the illegal act of opening the door, entering a winning entrance that does not correspond to the gaming state, not entering the big winning entrance, opening the door, closing, full dish, magnetism, radio wave, vibration error, over-winning In the case of an error such as an error, the error may be notified by causing a specific operation to be performed on a part of the movable body 224 during the simultaneous production. Further, in this example, the case of notification by the movable body 224 has been described as an example, but notification by other effect means (for example, LED or the like) during simultaneous performance may be executed.

<Example f>
FIG. 318 is a diagram showing an example of amusement islands 30 and 30 ′ provided in the amusement store and simultaneous effects (island simultaneous effects). For example, island facilities (data display 20, light emitting means 32 of game island 30 are shown. Etc.) and the game island 30 (game table 100) performing simultaneous production by the movable body 224 of the game table 100, and the game island 30 ′ (game table 100 ′) not performing simultaneous production.

  As shown in the figure, the game island 30 (30 ′) includes a plurality of game machines 100 (100 ′) installed in the island facility, and data displays provided corresponding to the game machines 100, respectively. 20. In addition, a pedestal machine 18 is disposed between the game tables 100. Examples of the game table 100 installed on the game island 30 include a ball game machine (pachinko machine) described above, and a spinning game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, a medalless slot machine, and the like. Can be mentioned.

  Although not shown, the gaming system is connected to a management computer (sometimes referred to as a “Hall computer” or “Hall computer”) that controls the entire system via a network under the management computer. A plurality of island computers, a plurality of computer computers connected to the island computers via a network, and a plurality of intermediary machines 18 and a data display 20 connected to the computer computers via the network. And a plurality of game machines 100 connected to the computer via the data display 20.

  The simultaneous production (island simultaneous production) of the present embodiment is provided above the game stand (pachinko machine) 100, a data display 20 for displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a liquid crystal display unit provided in the inter-machine 18 The light emitting means 32 provided on the amusement island 30 may be configured to be executed by any one or a combination thereof or all of them.

  In this case, for example, an outer end signal from the pachinko machine 100 or other signals (for example, a signal output from the first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500)) is used as the data display 20 or the game island. Input to 30 and perform simultaneous production based on it. Alternatively, the hall computer may know the power-on (power-on) information and the power-on time, and output a signal to the data display 20 or the like at a predetermined timing to execute a simultaneous effect. Note that the simultaneous performance may be executed not by a signal from the hall computer but by a timing means provided in the pachinko machine 100, or a signal from the hall computer may be directly or indirectly received from the pachinko machine 100. The information may be input to the sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) and executed based on the input.

<Example g>
FIG. 319 is a diagram showing an example of an amusement island 30 provided in the amusement store and a simultaneous effect (island simultaneous effect). For example, an island facility (data display 20, light emitting means 32 of the game island 30, etc.) and The game island 30 (game table 100) which is performing simultaneous production in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the game table 100 is shown.

  As shown in the figure, the effect of the pachinko machine 100 (decorative symbol display device 208, movable means 224, speaker 120, various lamps (LEDs) 418) and the effect of the island facilities (data display) Device 20, stand machine 18, light emitting means 32 of game island 30, etc.) may be configured to be executed at the same time or configured to be executed at different times. May be. Further, the simultaneous production by the island facility may be configured such that the simultaneous production is started in order from one game stand (for example, the game stand at the end of the game island 30).

  Here, at least one of the simultaneous effect (effect A) and the link effect (effect B) of the present embodiment is an effect area (main display area D1) that is normally performed when the contents of the effect change significantly. It may be used to execute.

  In addition, at least one of the effects A and B is an effect in which only the background changes slightly in the case of display, and an effect in which at least a part of the effect changes to another effect, etc. as a whole The effect may be slightly changed.

  In addition, at least one of production A and production B constitutes a large production by gathering multiple small productions (parts, parts) such as a trailer (countdown) before the start of the main part, a main part, an ending, and a next notice. There may be.

  In addition, at least one of effect A and effect B may execute a special simultaneous effect according to the number of executions (for example, one of four times).

  In addition, the start condition of the effect A (simultaneous effect) is, for example, that the counter value starts at a predetermined value (periodically (a constant period, each period is different but becomes a predetermined value)), and depends on the counter value The data may start with predetermined data, start based on a counter value and a predetermined time table, start based on a combination with another counter value, and the like. If the effect B is not the same start condition as the effect A, any of these may be used as the start condition.

  In addition, the start condition of the effect B may be one that starts upon transition to a predetermined gaming state. The predetermined gaming state is, for example, a case where an advantageous gaming state is reached, and may be a case where a predetermined number of consecutive resorts or the remaining ST number is reached. Alternatively, it may be a case where a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 30 times) after the transition to an unfavorable gaming state is reached. Furthermore, it may be started on the condition that a specific effect is executed, or may be started by inputting a password, or a predetermined condition (big hit, mission) in a simultaneous effect (effect A) that is executed periodically. It may be started when the achievement is achieved.

  Further, the end condition of at least one of effect A and effect B may be a condition in which the counter value or the like ends with a predetermined value (for example, the end of the effect time). Further, the counter value or the like may be a predetermined value, and the process may be terminated in a predetermined control state (for example, decorative symbol stop display).

  In addition, description of "first ...", "second ...", etc. in the present embodiment is merely a description for convenience to mean that these are not the same, and corresponds to these. It is not a description for specifying a specific configuration.

  For example, when the production A in the embodiment is referred to as the first production and the production B in the embodiment is referred to as the second production, the description of “first” and “second” is the production A, production. In order to distinguish that B is a different production, it is only added for convenience, and it is not intended to specify that production A is the first production and production B is the second production (production A). Is the second production, and production B may be the first production).

  For example, when the production B is referred to as the first production, the other production can be referred to as the second production for convenience. For example, as the second effect, in addition to the above-described effect A, the decorative symbol change display performed during the period from the start of the special figure change to the stop display (an example of the second period) or the start of the big hit There is a jackpot effect or the like executed in the period from end to end (an example of the second period). These effects can be said to be effects that can be started from the top, regardless of the result of timing by the timing means. For example, in the case of a decorative display variation display effect, the start of special drawing variation can be referred to as a second effect start condition. In the case of a big hit effect, the start of a big hit game is the second effect start condition. In the production A, it can be said that the second production start condition is that a predetermined time (one hour) elapses.

  The gaming table 100 of the present embodiment has the following simultaneous performance functions. First, as a first function, in order to make it possible to realize a specific effect composed of a plurality of different effects on one or a plurality of game machines 100, a function that enables a plurality of different effects to be executed on each game machine 100. It is. As a simultaneous performance on a plurality of game machines constituting a conventional game island, when the same performance is executed at the same timing, the volume is simply increased, and when the same performance is executed at different timing Sounds like noise. Also, when different effects are executed at the same timing or when different effects are executed at different timings, it sounds like noise. In other words, conventionally, there is no gaming machine having a plurality of effects related to each other between a plurality of gaming machines.

  According to the present embodiment, each of one or a plurality of game machines 100 can execute a plurality of different effects (for example, a first effect and a second effect) constituting one specific effect.

  Thereby, depending on the timing, it is possible to realize one specific effect by the plurality of game machines 100.

  In addition, as the second function, in order to make it possible to realize a specific effect composed of a plurality of different effects on one or a plurality of game machines 100, a plurality of different effects can be executed on each of the game machines 100. This is a function for controlling the execution of a plurality of different effects with a predetermined counter in order to realize a specific effect at the timing.

  In the conventional simultaneous production, the same production is executed at different timings by chance, so that it may sound like a ring. Further, in a gaming machine having a so-called RTC effect function, it is possible to realize an effect by singing by shifting the power-on timing, but there is a problem that the power-on operation is troublesome.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of different effects (for example, a first effect and a second effect) constituting one specific effect can be executed on one or a plurality of game machines 100. Moreover, when a predetermined opportunity arrives, it can be set so that either one of a plurality of different effects or another effect is executed.

  Thereby, it is possible to realize one specific effect by the plurality of game machines 100 at a predetermined timing.

  Further, as a third function, it is advantageous to perform simultaneous production (for example, simultaneous production every hour) according to a predetermined schedule in one or a plurality of game machines, and during a big hit (during probability change, during electric support, etc.) State) can be performed simultaneously.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has a production means (for example, decorative symbol display means 208, movable body 224, speaker 120, various lamps (LED) 418, etc.), and timekeeping. Means (for example, a program counter, a timer circuit 652, an RTC circuit 654, etc.), wherein the time measuring means is means for starting time measurement when the power is turned on, An effect that can execute a plurality of types of effects, and one effect of the plurality of types of effects is an effect related to the time value of the time measuring means (hereinafter referred to as “first effect (for example, periodically executed). The one effect among the plurality of types of effects is an effect related to the time value of the time measuring means (hereinafter referred to as “second effect (for example, Aperiodically The second effect is an effect different from the first effect, and the first effect satisfies the first condition (for example, , A predetermined time after the power is turned on) is started, and the second effect is the establishment of the second condition (for example, winning a big hit game) The game machine is characterized in that the second condition is a condition different from the first condition.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to further experience the production (simultaneous production) to the player who is in an advantageous state (for example, getting a ball) while ensuring the execution frequency of the periodic simultaneous production. Because it is possible, there are cases where the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Here, the establishment requirement of the first condition is a requirement including the first requirement, and the establishment requirement of the second condition is a requirement including the second requirement, and the establishment of the first condition The requirement is a requirement that does not include the second requirement. For example, even if the first condition and the second condition are both conditions related to the time value of the same time measuring means, the start time of the effect A1a and the effect A2a shown in FIG. 280 (a) If the numerical value (start time) is different, such as the start time, the conditions are not different (in this case, both are the first conditions for the production A to start execution) ).

  One or both of the first effect and the second effect may end at a predetermined timing. For example, it may end at the same timing depending on the effect, or the end timing may differ depending on the effect.

  The “effect related to the timed value” refers to an effect that is started by the timed value, an effect that is configured such that the same effect can be executed at the time of the big hit by the timed value, and the like.

  In addition, regarding the production B, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a big hit) during the island simultaneous production performed once per hour, the number of characters that can be selected during the big hit increases. Also included is an effect that can be achieved by performing with the increased number of characters during support.

  In addition, one or both of the first effect and the second effect is the position of the distribution device managed by the main control unit 300 (such as an electric device that distributes the special map 1 to the special map 2). (For example, the first sub-control unit 400) outputs to the side, and when the timekeeping value reaches a predetermined value, the effect of notifying the information (instead of the simultaneous effect, the distribution device distributes to which one now) Production).

  The first effect may be an effect that is always executed when the second condition is satisfied, or may not be executed when the first condition is satisfied, It may be an effect that is executed only when the first condition is satisfied, or may be an effect that may be executed when the first condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the second effect may be an effect that is always executed when the second condition is satisfied, and may not be executed when the second condition is satisfied. The effect may be executed only when the second condition is satisfied, or the effect may be executed when the second condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the first condition is a condition including a predetermined timing (for example, a constant cycle such as every hour), and the second condition is a state advantageous to the player (for example, The first production is an island simultaneous production, the second production is an island simultaneous production, The game stand may be capable of executing the island simultaneous performance alone.

  In addition, the first effect may be always executed when it is a predetermined timing, and is always executed when it is a specific error when it is a predetermined timing. It may be a thing.

  In addition, the first effect may not be executed in the case of a predetermined timing, may be an effect executed only in the case of a predetermined timing, It may be an effect that may be executed in some cases.

  In addition, the first condition may be a condition that is periodically satisfied, and the second condition may be a condition that is aperiodically satisfied.

  The establishment requirement of the first condition is a requirement including the first requirement, the first requirement is that the timekeeping value is a predetermined value, and the second condition The establishment requirement may not include the first requirement.

  Note that the requirement for establishment of the second condition may include the first requirement.

  Further, a setting unit (for example, DIP switch 650) is provided, and one of the plurality of types of effects is an effect related to the time value of the time measuring means (hereinafter referred to as “third effect (for example, FIG. 281). After a group of other effect data (effect A1b → effect A2b → effect A3b) is executed at regular intervals shown in FIG. 5, one effect data group (effect A1a → effect A2a → effect A3a). The third effect is an effect that starts when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is different from the first condition. The establishment requirement of the first condition is a requirement including the second requirement, the establishment requirement of the third condition is a requirement including the first requirement, and The establishment requirement is a requirement including the third requirement, The first requirement is that a first setting (for example, setting A shown in FIG. 281) is performed by the setting unit, and the third requirement is that a second setting (for example, FIG. 281) is performed by the setting unit. The second setting may be a setting different from the first setting.

  Further, the effect means may be a means including a sound output means (for example, a speaker 120).

  Further, the second effect may be an effect configured to be executed in parallel with the first effect.

  The second effect may be an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.

  Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming table may be a slot machine.

  In addition, the game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the present embodiment includes an operation unit (for example, chance button 136, operation button 710) and a production unit (for example, decorative symbol display unit 208, movable body 224, speaker 120, Various lamps (LEDs 418, etc.) and timing means (for example, a program counter, a timer circuit 652, an RTC circuit 654, etc.), wherein the timing means counts the time when the power is turned on. The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effects, and one effect among the plurality of effects is an effect related to the time value of the time measuring means (hereinafter, “ The second effect (for example, an effect that is executed aperiodically (effect B)).) The second effect is an effect that starts when the second condition is satisfied. Ah The second effect is an effect started in connection with the operation of the operation means, and the second condition is a state advantageous to the player (for example, during a big hit or during a probability change, during an electric support) It is a game table characterized by the condition including that it is a state such as.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not to execute a periodic simultaneous effect and an effect (simultaneous effect) executed in an advantageous state (execution area), so that the interest of the game is enhanced. There are cases where it is possible.

  Also, one effect of the plurality of effects is an effect related to the time value of the time measuring means (hereinafter referred to as “first effect (for example, simultaneous effect (effect A) executed periodically)”). The first effect is an effect that starts when the first condition is satisfied, and the first effect is an effect different from the second effect, The first condition is a condition including a predetermined timing, the first condition is a condition different from the second condition, and the first effect is an island simultaneous effect. Yes, the second effect may be an island simultaneous effect, and the game stand may be capable of executing the island simultaneous effect alone.

  Further, the first condition may be a condition that is periodically satisfied, and the second condition may be a condition that is aperiodically satisfied.

  The establishment requirement of the first condition is a requirement including the first requirement, the first requirement is that the timekeeping value is a predetermined value, and the second condition The establishment requirement may not include the first requirement.

  Further, a setting unit (for example, DIP switch 650) is provided, and one of the plurality of types of effects is an effect related to the time value of the time measuring means (hereinafter referred to as “third effect (for example, FIG. 281). After a group of other effect data (effect A1b → effect A2b → effect A3b) is executed at regular intervals shown in FIG. 5, one effect data group (effect A1a → effect A2a → effect A3a). The third effect is an effect that starts when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is different from the first condition. The establishment requirement of the first condition is a requirement including the second requirement, the establishment requirement of the third condition is a requirement including the first requirement, and The establishment requirement is a requirement including the third requirement, The first requirement is that a first setting (for example, setting A shown in FIG. 281) is performed by the setting unit, and the third requirement is that a second setting (for example, FIG. 281) is performed by the setting unit. And the second setting may be a setting different from the first setting.

  Further, the effect means may be a means including a sound output means (for example, a speaker 120).

  Further, the second effect may be an effect configured to be executed in parallel with the first effect.

  The second effect may be an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.

  Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming table may be a slot machine.

[Nineteenth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 320 to FIG. 358 for a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention, using the drawings. However, it explains in detail. Note that the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 and the contents of various processes in the present embodiment are substantially the same as those in the sixteenth embodiment, and therefore, different configurations from the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be illustrated and described below. The same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the sixteenth embodiment unless otherwise specified, and illustrations and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

  320 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. This embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment in that a first output setting switch 190 is disposed on the upper left of the first sub-board case 162. As will be described in detail later, the first output setting switch 190 is a volume (volume) of sound (for example, BGM, sound effect, error sound, etc.) output from the speaker 120 of the pachinko machine 100, and brightness (light quantity) of various lamps. ) Is a switch for adjusting. Since the first output setting switch 190 is disposed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 100, a person who can lock and unlock the front frame door 106 (for example, a store clerk at a game shop) opens the front frame door 160. The operation can be performed by doing this, but a person (for example, a player) who cannot lock and unlock the front frame door 106 cannot be operated.

  Although not shown, the main board case 158, the first sub board case 162, and the second sub board case 164 are covered with a transparent case for protecting these boards. Therefore, in order to operate the first output setting switch 190, it is necessary to temporarily remove the case, but when there is no need for operation, the set value of the first output setting switch 190 can be easily set through the case. It can be visually recognized. Note that the case need not be provided when the operability of the first output setting switch 190 is emphasized.

  Further, the RWM clear switch 180 may or may not be covered by a case. Further, the first output setting switch 190 may not be covered with the case while the RWM clear switch 180 is covered with the case. Further, both the RWM clear switch 180 and the first output setting switch 190 may not be covered with the case, or both may be covered with the case.

  In this example, the RWM clear switch 180 is arranged at the lower left of the rear surface, while the first output setting switch 190 is arranged at the upper left of the rear surface, but the RWM clear switch 180 is operated more than the first output setting switch 190. It may be arranged at a difficult position (for example, a position far from the gap formed when the front frame door 106 is opened) or vice versa.

<First output setting switch>
FIG. 321 (a) is an enlarged view of the first output setting switch 190. FIG. The first output setting switch 190 of this example has 16 contact points, and is configured to be a circular rotating part 190a configured to be rotatable, and an instruction part 190b that protrudes outward from the rotating part 190a. And having. Further, around the first output setting switch 190, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers of 0 to F) are given corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotating portion 190a.

  The first output setting switch 190 is configured to be able to output numerical information indicated by the instruction unit 190b to the outside as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. When “B” is indicated, numerical information of hexadecimal “B” can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1011). Therefore, the control unit detects the numerical value indicated by the instruction unit 190b of the first output setting switch 190 (in this example, one of hexadecimal values 0 to F) by inputting this detection signal. The configuration is possible.

  The “second operating means” according to the present invention is not limited to the illustrated first output setting switch 190, and for example, a rotary switch 191 as shown in FIG. Alternatively, a slide switch 192 as shown in FIG.

  The rotary switch 191 shown in FIG. 6B has 16 contact points and has a ring-shaped rotating part 191a configured to be rotatable and a notch window 191b formed in the rotating part 191a. . In addition, 16 numbers (in this example, hexadecimal numbers of 0 to F) are given to the bottom of the rotary unit 191a of the rotary switch 191 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the rotary unit 191a. .

  The rotary switch 191 is configured to be able to output the numerical value information visible from the cutout window 191b as a detection signal to the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. In the case of "F", numerical information of hexadecimal F can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b1111). Therefore, the control unit can detect a numerical value (in this example, one of hexadecimal values 0 to F) that can be seen from the notch 191b of the rotary switch 191 by inputting this detection signal. It has a configuration.

  The slide switch 192 shown in FIG. 2C includes a rectangular guide groove 192a and a slide portion 192b having 16 contacts and slidable along the guide groove 192a. In addition, 16 numbers (hexadecimal numbers of 0 to F in this example) are given above the slide switch 192 corresponding to each of the 16 contacts of the slide portion 192b.

  The slide switch 192 is configured to be able to output information on the numerical value at which the slide part 192b is located to the outside as a detection signal. For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, the slide part 192b has a numerical value “0”. When it is located at a place, numerical value information of hexadecimal 0 can be output as a binary 4-bit detection signal (0b0000). Therefore, the control unit can detect the numerical value (in this example, one of hexadecimal values 0 to F) where the slide portion 192b of the slide switch 192 is located by inputting this detection signal. It has a configuration.

  Since these second operating means are mechanical (mechanical) switches, they can be operated even when they are not energized, and even if the power is cut off due to a power failure, etc. It is possible to hold Therefore, once the setting is made, the adjustment value can be held even when the power is turned off. For example, it is easy to adjust the volume to the level intended by the amusement store. Moreover, since the number (display means) which can confirm the adjustment value of a volume is provided, confirmation of an adjustment value is easy and it is convenient.

<Second output setting switch>
FIG. 321 (d) is an enlarged view of the second output setting switch 194. The second output setting switch 194 of this example is provided with the determination button 194a that also functions as the above-described chance button 136, the left button 194b provided on the left side of the determination button 194a, and the right side of the determination button 194a. And a right button 194c.

  The second output setting switch 194 can output a detection signal corresponding to each button when any of the enter button 194a, the left button 194b, or the right button 194c is operated. Therefore, the control unit is configured to be able to detect which of the decision button 194a, the left button 194b, or the right button 194c is operated by inputting this detection signal.

  The “first operation means” according to the present invention is not limited to the illustrated second output setting switch 194. For example, as shown in FIG. A cross key 195 having up / down / left / right buttons and a determination button may be provided, and the cross key 195 may be applied as the first operation means. Further, two types of operation means may be provided, and either one of the operation means may also serve as an effect button, or only one of the operation means may be the first operation means.

  In addition, a cut-in display is performed on the condition that the first operating means (or the second operating means) is operated, or one of the operating means is used for a button continuous striking effect and the other operating means is hidden. May be used. Here, the hidden command does not suggest the operation of the operation means, but some effect is produced when the operation means is operated (for example, at least one of the buttons not displayed on the screen and the button does not shine). One or both).

  Since these first operating means are not mechanical switches, they cannot operate in a state where they are not energized, and cannot themselves hold the adjustment value of the volume. A storage means for storing the adjustment value needs to be provided separately. In this example, the volume adjustment value is not backed up, but may be configured to be backed up.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. In the present embodiment, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 includes a sound control circuit 431 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and various lamps 440 (for example, a setting operation unit lamp, the remaining number of prize balls) Each segment of the display unit, each lamp of the information notification lamp group, payout display lamp, error display lamp), a switch sensor 426 connected to a sensor circuit 428 that detects the pressing operation of the second output setting switch 194, This is different from the sixteenth embodiment in that one output setting switch 190 is connected. The first output setting switch sensor 190 may be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 426 and the sensor circuit 428.

<Sound control circuit, peripheral circuit of lamp driving circuit>
FIG. 323 is a block diagram illustrating peripheral circuits of the sound control circuit 431 and the lamp control circuit 420 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402, a sound control circuit 431, a sound ROM 431a, an amplification circuit 442, a lighting control unit 450, and a lamp driving circuit 420. Note that the sound control circuit 431 may include a sound ROM 431a and an amplification circuit 442, or a storage means (for example, SDRAM) for temporarily storing information may be externally attached.

  The sound control circuit 431 includes a CPU I / F connected to the CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402, a control register for temporarily storing commands from the CPU 404, and a sound for storing sound information such as sound effects and BGM, which will be described later, and volume information. The ROM 431a includes a reproduction control unit that performs audio reproduction control in accordance with commands in the control register, and a D / A conversion unit that converts a digital audio signal into an analog audio signal. The amplification circuit 442 includes a volume amplification unit that amplifies the analog audio signal input from the sound control circuit 431, and an output unit that outputs the analog audio signal input from the volume amplification unit to the speaker 120.

  Based on the command from the basic circuit 402, the lighting control unit 450 is a lamp 440 (for example, each segment of the setting operation unit lamp, remaining prize ball number display unit, each lamp of the information notification lamp group, payout display lamp, error display) The lamp is controlled to be turned on without going through the lamp driving circuit 420, and various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138, the frame lamp, and the effect lamp) are controlled through the lamp driving circuit 420.

  The lamp drive circuit 420 includes a CPU I / F 420a connected to the lighting control unit 450, a control register 420b that temporarily stores commands from the lighting control unit 450, and brightness control of the lamp 418 according to the commands in the control register 420b (for example, And a luminance control unit 420c for controlling a duty ratio (a ratio of a time during which a current flows). The lamp driving circuit 420 is provided for each substrate on which a plurality of lamps 418 are provided.

  In this example, the luminance of the lamp 418 can be changed by the control of the lamp driving circuit 420, whereas the luminance of the lamp 440 cannot be changed because the lamp 440 is controlled without going through the lamp driving circuit (only turning on / off can be controlled). It is.

  FIG. 324 (a) is a block diagram showing various circuits (sound control related circuits) used for sound control extracted from the circuits constituting the first sub-control unit 400 described above.

  Input terminals P1 to P4 of the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 are connected to output terminals b0 to b3 of the first output setting switch 190. The output terminal b0 of the first output setting switch 190 outputs information of bit 0 (least significant bit) of the detection signal (in this example, a hexadecimal number of 0 to F) detected by the first output setting switch 190. The output terminal b1 is a terminal for outputting the information of bit 1 of the detection signal (hexadecimal number of 0 to F) detected by the first output setting switch 190. The output terminal b2 is a terminal for outputting bit 2 information of the detection signal (0 to F hexadecimal) detected by the first output setting switch 190, and the output terminal b3 is the first output setting. This is a terminal for outputting information of bit 3 (most significant bit) of a detection signal (hexadecimal number of 0 to F) detected by the switch 190.

  In other words, the CPU 404 converts the numerical value (in this example, one of the hexadecimal values 0 to F) indicated by the instruction unit 190b of the first output setting switch 190 through the input terminals P1 to P4 into the binary number 4. It can be detected as a bit detection signal.

  The serial terminals TxD, RxD, SCK, the interrupt input terminal IRQ, and the input / output terminals P5, P6 of the first sub control unit 400 are connected to corresponding terminals of the sound control circuit 431. The sound control circuit 431 is connected to a 1ch amplifier 433a (amplifier circuit 442) to which one speaker 120 is connected and a 2ch amplifier 433b (amplifier circuit 442) to which two speakers 120 are connected. ing. The sound control circuit 431 outputs an audio signal to the speaker 120 via the 1ch amplifier 433a and the 2ch amplifier 433b.

  In this example, the 1ch amplifier 433a and the 2ch amplifier 433b are separate bodies (separate boards). However, they may be configured as a single board, or some or all of these may be built in the sound control circuit 431. Also good. Although not shown, in addition to (or instead of) the ROM 406 and the RAM 408, a ROM and RAM dedicated to the sound control circuit 431 may be built in or externally attached to the sound control circuit 431.

<Reset signal for sound control related circuits>
FIG. 324 (b) is a block diagram showing an example of connection of reset signal lines of the sound control related circuit. In this example, the reset input terminal RESET of the CPU 404 is connected to the reset output terminal of the reset circuit 403. Therefore, the CPU 404 enters either the reset state or the reset release state in accordance with the voltage level of the reset signal output from the reset circuit 403.

  The output terminal P7 of the CPU 404 is connected to the reset input terminal RESET of the sound control circuit 431, the reset input terminal RESET of the 1ch amplifier 433a, and the reset input terminal RESET of the 2ch amplifier 433b. Therefore, the sound control circuit 431, the 1ch amplifier 433a, and the 2ch amplifier 433b are in a reset state or a reset release state according to the voltage level of the reset signal output from the CPU 404.

  FIG. 325 is a block diagram showing a modified example of the connection of the reset signal line. In this modification, in addition to the CPU 404, the reset output terminal RESET of the reset circuit 403 is connected to the sound control circuit 431, the 2ch amplifier 433b, and the reset input terminal RESET of the ROM 406, and the reset input terminal RESET of the 1ch amplifier 433a. Is connected to the output terminal of the 2ch amplifier 433b.

  Therefore, the sound control circuit 431 and the 2ch amplifier 433b are either in the reset state or the reset release state depending on the voltage level of the reset signal output from the CPU 404 or the voltage level of the reset signal output from the reset circuit 403. It becomes such a state. Further, the ROM 406 enters either the reset state or the reset release state in accordance with the voltage level of the reset signal output from the reset circuit 403, and the 1ch amplifier 433a is the voltage of the reset signal output from the 2ch amplifier 433b. Depending on the level, either the reset state or the reset release state is entered.

<Sound control circuit>
Next, the sound control circuit 431 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 2A is a block diagram schematically showing the sound control circuit 431, and FIG. 2B is a block diagram schematically showing various processes in the playback sound output setting of the sound control circuit 431. FIG. is there.

  In this example, the sound control circuit 431 is configured as a so-called DSP (Digital Signal Processor) having a variety of modules, which will be described later, in one package. As shown in FIG. 6A, the sound control circuit 431 includes a control unit 1 that controls reproduction sound output setting, and a CPU 404 that is an external host CPU via an I / F 2 and an SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface). It is connected.

  The control unit 1 is connected to an encode data input unit 3, and the encode data input unit 3 is connected to an external sound ROM 431a via an EMIF (External Memory Interface). The encode data input unit 3 is connected to various processing units 4 that perform various processes such as a decoding process, a mixing process, a stereophonic process, a sequencer process, and a filter process. The various processing units 4 are connected to a PCM output unit 5, and the PCM output unit 5 is connected to an external speaker 120 via an McASP as an interface. The control unit 1 is connected to the I / F 2, the encoded data input unit 3, the various processing units 4, and the PCM output unit 5 described above via a bus, and controls processing in each.

  Here, the reproduction sound output setting performed by the control unit 1 in the sound control circuit 431 will be described in more detail. First, the control unit 1 inputs sound source data acquired from the sound ROM 431a to the encode data input unit 3 via the EMIF based on the control of the CPU 404, and then takes it into the various processing units 4. The various processing units 4 perform the various processes described above on the input sound source data.

  Specifically, the various processes will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 5B, channel processing is performed in the channel module 41 on the sound source data captured via the EMIF. In the case of this example, the control unit 1 has a total of 32 channels from 1 to 32, and can simultaneously manage a plurality of sound source data by assigning a channel to each of a plurality of data called from the sound ROM 431a. It has become.

  Here, in the channel processing, first, decoding (reproduction) processing is performed on input sound source data (phrase data). The phrase data is a file compressed in the Muzip format, and includes sound source data of a type such as a stereo sound source, a monaural sound source, and a binaural sound source (a stereo sound source to which 3D sound processing is applied).

  Then, the phrase or slot volume adjustment is executed for the decoded phrase data. Here, the slot is data including a phrase number, a movement information code number that is data describing movement information of monaural 1ch, reproduction range designation information, and the like, and the phrase number and movement information code number are designated. It is used to play a 3D sound source as a slot and to designate a playback range. This 3D sound source becomes a binaural sound source by performing 3D sound processing in the sound control circuit 431.

  Next, phrase or slot pan adjustment is performed on the volume-adjusted phrase data. At this time, the pan adjustment is applied only when the monaural sound source is reproduced, and is not applied to the stereo sound source and the 3D sound source. Then, fade processing such as playback, stop, pause, and pause release is added to the phrase data after pan adjustment, and then loop processing that can specify 1 to 65,535 loops or an infinite loop. After the phrase being played back is completed, another phrase is automatically played back, and after performing phrase chain playback that allows multiple phrases to be played continuously without gaps, a stereo sound source / monaural Output as a sound source. When executing phrase chain reproduction, a desired phrase number and the number of loops can be set in advance.

  At this time, the control unit 1 monitors the compressor operation (whether the compressor function is operating) in parallel with the channel processing, and performs the compressor operation monitoring process described below. That is, in the compressor operation monitoring process, the control unit 1 first determines whether or not the input level of input phrase data (sound source data) exceeds a predetermined threshold (threshold level). At this time, if a negative result is obtained in which the input level of the input phrase data does not exceed the predetermined threshold value, this routine is repeated, and the process waits until phrase data having an input level exceeding the threshold value is input.

  On the other hand, when the control unit 1 obtains an affirmative result in which the input level of the input phrase data exceeds a predetermined threshold, the control unit 1 proceeds to the next step and exceeds the threshold (that is, compression processing as a compressor function). The phrase number in the phrase data being decoded (played) is written (enqueued) into the address port related to the phrase data prepared in the sound RAM, and the reproduced sound information related to the phrase data for which the compressor function is activated ( Status information) is created as a DRC status information queue (hereinafter referred to as a DRC status queue).

  Next, the control unit 1 writes (enqueues) various information related to the phrase data exceeding the threshold value to the data port related to the phrase data prepared in the sound RAM, and completes the DRC status queue. Then, the control unit 1 outputs the created DRC status queue to the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 as reproduced sound information regarding phrase data (sound source data) for which the compressor function is activated.

  The control unit 1 inputs the phrase data after the decoding process in the channel module 41 to the mixer module 43, and the mixer module 43 multiplies the input phrase data (sound source data) by the master volume. After the volume adjustment, the stereo sound source and the monaural sound source after pan adjustment are mixed, while the 3D sound source is multiplied by the 3D gain and the mixing process for adjusting the gain of the 3D sound source stored in the monaural buffer is performed.

  On the other hand, the control unit 1 inputs the phrase data after the mixing process in the mixer module 43 to the effect module 44 for performing the monaural mixing process, and the stereo sound source (stereo) after the mixing process by the mixer module 43 Signal) in mono. At this time, the monaural mix processing is executed by (Lch data + Rch data) / 2.

  Then, the control unit 1 inputs the phrase data after the monaural / mixing process to the LPF 45 and inputs the phrase data after the mixing process to the HPF 46. Here, the LPF 45 is a low-pass filter (LPF) that cuts off (attenuates) a frequency band higher than a predetermined frequency component (cut-off frequency), and executes filter processing according to a table of LPF control information. . The HPF 46 is a high-pass filter (HPF) that cuts off (attenuates) a frequency band lower than a predetermined frequency component (cut-off frequency), and executes filter processing according to a table of HPF control information.

  The LPF 45 and the HPF 46 function as a band division filter. Thereby, the phrase data obtained by dividing the phrase data after the monaural / mixing process and the phrase data after the mixing process into desired frequency bands can be generated.

  Thereafter, the control unit 1 inputs the phrase data after the filter processing divided by the LPF 45 and the HPF 46 to the corresponding volume adjusting units 47a and 47b, and multiplies the output channel volume. Then, the control unit 1 inputs the phrase data after volume adjustment to the corresponding DRC modules 48a and 48b.

  The control unit 1 uses the DRC modules 48a and 48b to perform compression processing as a compressor function on phrase data whose input level exceeds a predetermined threshold (threshold level) among the phrase data after volume adjustment, Data is output to the corresponding speaker 120 via the McASP.

  Here, the compressor function (compression processing) is the output of reproduced sound based on phrase data when the input level (input volume) of phrase data (sound source data) exceeds a predetermined threshold (threshold level). The difference between the maximum and minimum output volume (dynamic range) of the playback sound is compressed by the process of controlling the volume change by the set ratio (ratio, ratio, compression ratio) and releasing (release) it at the set time. It is processing to do.

  The control unit 1 inputs the sequence code fetched from the sound ROM 431a via the EMIF to the sequencer module 42. In the case of this example, the control unit 1 has eight system sequencer modules 42, and assigns a plurality of sequence codes input from the sound ROM 431a via the EMIF to each sequencer module 42. .

  The sequence code is information including a parameter for the sequencer to perform reproduction. The sequencer module 42 is based on the sequence code and other modules (for example, the channel module 41 and the mixer module 43). , Volume adjusting units 47a, 47b, etc.) for executing playback / stop / pause / pause / fade out / volume adjustment.

  Here, reproduction means reproduction of the sequence code, and stop means that the sequence code is stopped. By the stop, the sequencer module 42 stops the channel module 41 in use. The pause is to pause the sequence code, and the sequencer module 42 executes the following processing on the channel module 41 in use by the pause. That is, the sequencer module 42 first stops the channel module 41 that is in a fade-out stop state by the temporary stop. Next, the channel module 41 that is adjusting the fade volume during playback, fade-in, fade-out pause, or pause is paused.

  Also, the release of the pause is to resume the playback of the paused sequence code. By releasing the pause, the sequencer module 42 performs the following processing on the channel module 41 being used. Is supposed to run. That is, the sequencer module 42 first cancels the pause of the channel module 41 that was playing, faded in, or adjusted the fade volume when the sequencer module 42 was paused. (At this time, the fade is not added when the pause is canceled). Next, the channel module 41 that has been paused when the sequencer module 42 is paused or has been paused for fade-out is left suspended without being released as it is.

  The fade-out is to stop the sequence code by stopping the fade-out of the channel module 41 being used by the sequencer module 42. Further, the volume adjustment is to adjust the volume (volume) in the channel module 41 being played back by the sequencer module 42.

  As described above, the sound control circuit 431 controls the various modules by the control unit 1, and thus the phrase data (sound source data) after performing the various processes in the various processing units 3 as described above to the PCM output unit 5. input. The PCM output unit 5 outputs the phrase data after pulse code modulation (PCM) processing to the external speaker 120 via the McASP.

<Control RAM>
FIG. 327 (a) shows an example of a memory map of the control RAM provided in the sound control circuit 431. FIG. The address shown in FIG. 6A is an offset value from the start address of the control RAM. Note that the control RAM may be read as a known register.

  The sound control circuit 431 has a built-in control RAM (not shown), and the CPU 404 writes data to and reads data from various control RAMs (mapped) assigned to the control RAM. Thus, the sound control circuit 431 can be controlled.

  For example, a master control RAM allocated to a 4-byte area (0x0000 0000 to 0x0000 0003) from the start address of the control RAM is a control RAM used for control related to the master volume. The CPU 404 can read out the current master volume and set the master volume via the master control RAM.

  The output channel control RAM is a control RAM used for control relating to a monaural output volume or a stereo output volume. The CPU 404 can set a monaural output volume and a stereo output volume via the output channel control RAM.

  The mute control RAM is a control RAM used for control related to mute (silence). The CPU 404 can individually mute the channels 1 to 32 and cancel the mute of the channels 1 to 32 through the mute control RAM.

  The channel control RAM is a control RAM used for playback control of a phrase (compressed monaural sound source or stereo sound source). Channel 1 control RAM to channel 32 control corresponding to channels 1 to 32. 32 channel control RAMs of RAM are allocated. The CPU 404 designates a phrase to be played back in each of the channels 1 to 32, sets the volume of each of the channels 1 to 32, and controls playback of each of the channels 1 to 32 via the channel control RAM. Can be done.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram showing the correspondence between channels 1 and control RAM to channel 32 and control RAM, and the channel, and FIG. 4C is a diagram showing the correspondence between channels and uses of sound. It is.

  In this example, 20 channels of channels 1 to 20 are used as channels for reproducing stereo sound sources (stereo 01 to stereo 20), and 12 channels of channels 21 to 32 are channels for reproducing monaural sound sources ( They are used as monaural 01 to monaural 12). For example, stereo 01 and stereo 02 are mainly used as channels for reproducing stereo sound source BGM, monaural 01 is mainly used as a channel for reproducing mono sound source lines, and monaural 02 is mainly used. The monaural sound source is used as a channel for reproducing the sound effect, and the monaural 12 is used as a channel for reproducing the monaural sound source error sound.

  FIG. 6D is a diagram showing an example of a sound list stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to this sound list in the sound control main loop process to be described later, acquires various control information (volume information, pan information, etc.) corresponding to the sound source to be controlled, and then acquires the acquired control. Information is set in the corresponding control RAM.

<Production execution timing data>
FIG. 328 shows an example of effect execution timing data stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 controls each notification means based on the performance execution timing data set in the performance control main loop process described later.

  This effect execution timing data is the effect execution timing for normal reach A that is selected uniquely or based on a predetermined random number lottery when the special figure fluctuation time included in the command from the main control unit 300 is 10 seconds. It is data.

  The performance execution timing data is composed of three items of “time (ms)”, “lamp data”, and “sound data content”. For example, in response to time 0 ms, “normal fluctuation” is assigned to the ramp data, and “change start” is assigned to the sound data content. Corresponding to each of the time 33.3 ms, 66.6 ms, and 99.9 ms, “↑” (the lamp data set at that time is continuously set) is assigned to the ramp data, and the contents of the sound data are “-” (Not set) is assigned.

  Here, when setting silence or non-lighting, the lamp data or sound data content may be set unset on the performance execution timing data, or the non-lighted lamp data or silent sound data content may be set. Corresponding to the time 133.2 ms, “↑” is assigned to the ramp data, and “chance notification” is assigned to the sound data content.

  Corresponding to the time of 4995 ms, “−” is assigned to the ramp data, and “−” is assigned to the sound data content. Corresponding to the time of 5028.3 ms, “normal reach A” is assigned to the ramp data, and “reach notification” is assigned to the sound data contents. Corresponding to time 5061.6 ms, “↑” is assigned to the ramp data, and “−” is assigned to the sound data content. Corresponding to time 5094.9 ms, “↑” is assigned to the ramp data, and “effect A” is assigned to the sound data content.

  Corresponding to each of the times 9966.7 ms and 9990 ms, “↑” is assigned to the ramp data, and “−” is assigned to the sound data content. Corresponding to the time 1007.3 ms, “↑” is assigned to the ramp data, and “Fluctuation stop” is assigned to the sound data content. Here, the sound control circuit 431 can set whether or not to reproduce the loop when the sound data has been reproduced. When the sound control circuit 431 is set to perform loop reproduction, a command indicating the end of reproduction needs to be newly transmitted to the sound control circuit 431 when the reproduction is terminated.

<Ramp data>
FIG. 329 shows an example of lamp data stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6A shows the lamp data “normal fluctuation” read out at the timing when the lamp data is set to “normal fluctuation” based on the performance execution timing data.

  The lamp data is composed of three items of “time (ms)”, “target port”, and “luminance (duty ratio)”. Here, a large number of effect lamps (various lamps 418) of this example are provided on the front side of the front frame door 106, and each of the effect lamps is connected to one of the output ports 01 to 03 of the lamp drive circuit 420. It is connected. As a result, the plurality of effect lamps are grouped according to which output port is connected, and the brightness is controlled at an independent timing for each group. The range of luminance is 0 to 255, 0 represents a duty ratio of 0%, and 255 represents a duty ratio of 100%.

  In the ramp data “normal fluctuation”, the target port “01” and the luminance “0” (duty ratio 0%) are assigned corresponding to the time 0 ms, and the target port “01” and the luminance “0” corresponding to the time 33.3 ms. 5 ”(duty ratio of about 2% (= 5/255)) is allocated, and the target port“ 01 ”and luminance“ 10 ”(duty ratio of about 4% (= 10/255)) corresponding to the time 66.6 ms Is assigned. These data indicate that the luminance of the group effect lamps connected to the output port 01 is gradually increased with time.

  In addition, the target port “03” and the luminance “255” (duty ratio 100%) are assigned to correspond to the times 4928.4 ms, 4861.7 ms, and 4995 ms, respectively. These data represent that the brightness of the group effect lamps connected to the output port 03 is maintained at the maximum brightness.

  FIG. 5B shows lamp data “normal reach A” read at the timing when the lamp data is set to “normal reach A” based on the performance execution timing data. In the ramp data “normal reach A”, the target port “02” and the luminance “255” are allocated corresponding to the time 0 ms, and the target port “02” and the luminance “127” (duty ratio approximately) corresponding to the time 33.3 ms. 50% (= 127/255)) is assigned, and the target port “02” and the luminance “255” are assigned corresponding to the time 66.6 ms. Further, the target port “01, 02” and the luminance “10” are allocated corresponding to the time 996.7 ms, the target port “01, 02” and the luminance “5” are allocated corresponding to the time 9990 ms, and the time 10023 is allocated. The target port “01, 02” and the luminance “0” are assigned corresponding to 3 ms.

  The lamp data may be set for each target port, or when a plurality of lamp driving circuits 420 are provided, the lamp data may be set for each lamp driving circuit 420. Also, if a large number of lamp data having a complicated control pattern is prepared, various lamp effects can be executed, but the data capacity of the lamp data in the ROM 406 increases.

  For this reason, it is possible to prepare various lamp effects and reduce the data capacity of the lamp data by preparing several lamp data of simple control patterns and combining those lamp data in detail with the performance execution timing data. There is. For example, in the performance execution timing data shown in FIG. 328, two ramp data “normal fluctuation” and “normal reach A” are combined.

<Lamp brightness control>
FIG. 330 is a diagram for describing brightness control of a lamp (LED). FIG. 4A is a graph showing the relationship between the current I (mA) flowing through the LED and the relative luminous intensity. The relative luminous intensity of the LED is 0 when the current I is 0 mA, and rises almost in proportion to the current I. Thus, the brightness of the LED can be controlled by controlling the current I. Since the power consumption of the LED is proportional to the value of the flowing current, it can be seen that the power consumption increases as the relative luminous intensity of the LED increases. In the present embodiment, the luminance of the LED is controlled by controlling the duty ratio, but the luminance of the LED may be controlled by controlling the current value.

  Moreover, even if the light emission means which emits light by flowing an electric current like the above-mentioned lamp (LED) is low current, it is easy to recognize light emission itself, and it is hard for a player to overlook. Therefore, information related to profits that change as the game progresses (details will be described later, for example, information that is highly important to the player, such as information indicating the amount of profits paid to the player, such as lottery results). It is suitable as a means.

  FIG. 2B is a diagram for explaining the duty ratio of the LED. In each of the upper, middle, and lower graphs, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents the current value that flows through the LED. In the upper graph, in a minute unit time L, a constant current is passed through the LED for a time T (T ≦ L). In the middle graph, in the predetermined period L, the same current flows through the LED for a time T / 2. In the lower graph, in the predetermined period L, the same current is passed through the LED for a time T / 4. If the upper stage is a reference (duty ratio: 100%, brightness: bright), the middle stage duty ratio is slightly dark at 50%, and the lower stage duty ratio is 25% and dark. Thus, it is possible to control the brightness of the LED by controlling the duty ratio. However, even if the duty ratio is halved, the luminance of the LED is not halved as it is. Since the power consumption of the LED is almost proportional to the flow time if the current value is the same, the power consumption increases as the LED brightness (duty ratio) increases, and the power consumption decreases as the LED brightness decreases. I understand that

<Sound selection data>
FIG. 331 (a) shows an example of sound selection data stored in advance in the sound ROM 431 a of the sound control circuit 431. This sound selection data is composed of three items of “data content” (sound data content), “playback channel”, and “sound data”. The item “playback channel” is represented by “01” to “FF”, for example, and represents a priority level for each sound data. “FF” having the highest priority is assigned to system voice, abnormality notification voice, and the like. The item “sound data” represents data (for example, a file name) specifying compressed audio data (for example, WAV format).

  As shown in FIG. 5A, a reproduction channel “02” and sound data “paid out sound” are assigned corresponding to the data content “payout”, and a reproduction channel “01” is assigned corresponding to the data content “big hit announcement”. And the sound data “big hit notification sound” are assigned, the reproduction channel “03” and the sound data “BGM01” are assigned corresponding to the data content “BGM01”, and the reproduction channel “03” is assigned corresponding to the data content “BGM02”. And the sound data “BGM02” are assigned, the reproduction channel “03” and the sound data “BGM03” are assigned corresponding to the data content “BGM03”, and the reproduction channel “FF” is assigned corresponding to the data content “door open”. Sound data “door open notification sound” is assigned, and data content “payout error” Correspondingly, the reproduction channel “FF” and the sound data “payout abnormality notification sound” are allocated, and the reproduction channel “FF” and the sound data “magnetic field detection notification sound” are allocated corresponding to the data content “magnetic field detection”. .

  Although not shown in FIG. 5A, the sound selection data includes the contents of the sound data “change start”, “chance notification”, “reach notification”, and “effect A” shown in FIG. Naturally, “variation stop” and the like are included.

  In this example, since the playback time of sound data is controlled by a command from the basic circuit 402, the sound selection data does not include playback time data. As described above, the playback volume of the sound data is set to the maximum volume for the sound data of the playback channel “FF”, and the other sound data is set to the volume set in advance in the power saving mode or the user adjustment mode. The volume becomes high. The sound data is amplified by the amplification circuit 442 based on the information on the reproduction volume, whereby the volume of the reproduction sound output from the speaker 120 is determined.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of the waveform of sound data amplified by the amplifier circuit 442. The horizontal direction in the figure represents the time axis, and the vertical direction represents the volume (amplitude). The waveform (lower part in the figure) amplified to sound data with a relatively large playback volume has a larger amplitude than the waveform amplified to sound data with relatively low playback volume (upper part in the figure). It has become. In general, when the playback volume is increased, power consumption in the amplifier circuit 442 and the like is increased, and when the playback volume is decreased, power consumption in the amplifier circuit 442 and the like is decreased.

<Volume of speaker 120 and brightness of various lamps 418>
FIG. 332 (a) is a table showing an example of sound volume (sound pressure) output from the speaker 120 and brightness setting values of the various lamps 418. FIG. 5B is a table showing an example of usage, and FIG. 6C is a diagram showing an example of luminance.

  This table is stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400, for example. The first sub-control unit 400 sets the initial value and adjustable range of the sound volume and the brightness based on the setting of the first output setting switch 190 (or the second output setting switch 190) according to this table.

  In this example, the initial value and adjustable range of the volume and luminance based on the setting of the first output setting switch 190 and the initial value and adjustable range of the volume and luminance based on the setting of the second output setting switch 194 are the same. However, different settings may be used. Therefore, for example, only when one numerical value is a specific numerical value, the other numerical value may be settable. In addition, the other volume may be configured to be mutable only when one volume is a specific volume, or the other volume is set to a constant volume only when one volume is a specific volume. It may be configured. Further, when one volume is a specific volume, the other volume may not be adjusted.

  The method for measuring the volume of the sound output from the pachinko machine 100 is not particularly limited. For example, a microphone for measuring the volume is attached to the center of the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and at a position approximately 500 mm above the glass surface. May be measured. Alternatively, the measurement may be performed by attaching to a position close to the head of a player having an average height (position of about 700 mm above the seat).

  The volume (sound pressure) is changed by changing the administrator set value (scales 0 to F) by operating the first output setting switch 190 or in the set value adjustment mode (for example, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 346 (f)). The player can be adjusted by changing the player setting values (scales 1 to 15) by operating the second setting output switch 194 (details will be described later).

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 6B, among the settings by the first output setting switch 190 (or the second output setting switch 194), “5” to “F” are used for normal business use (normal mode). “4” is used for power saving mode A, “3” is used for power saving mode B, “1” and “2” are used for development and promotion, “0” is for application Used for.

  When the setting is “F”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 100 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 15. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 15 (sound pressure 100 dB) as a default. In the figure, the default value of the scale (sound pressure) in each setting is surrounded by a thick frame line. In the setting “F”, the sound pressure is 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, 94 dB, 95 dB, 96 dB, 97 dB, 98 dB, corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen. The level can be adjusted to 99 dB and 100 dB.

  When the setting is “F”, the initial value of the luminance setting is set to “bright (duty ratio 100%)”. The brightness setting can be adjusted by selecting and confirming one of the rectangular images (dark, medium, light) in the user adjustment mode (for example, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 346 (g)). However, when the screen is changed to the brightness adjustment screen, the brightness user setting value is set to “bright (duty ratio 100%)” having the highest brightness as a default.

  When the setting is “E”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 99 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 14. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 14 (sound pressure 99 dB) as a default. The sound pressure levels are 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, 94 dB, 95 dB, 96 dB, 97 dB, 98 dB, 99 dB, and 100 dB corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen. Is the same as the setting “F”. Also, the initial value of the brightness setting is “bright (duty ratio 100%)”, which is the same as the setting “F”.

  When the setting is “D”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 98 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 13. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 13 (sound pressure 98 dB) as a default. The sound pressure levels are 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, 94 dB, 95 dB, 96 dB, 97 dB, 98 dB, 99 dB, and 100 dB corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen. Is the same as in the case of the settings “E” and “F”. Also, the initial value of the brightness setting is “bright (duty ratio 100%)”, which is the same as when the settings are “E” and “F”.

  When the setting is “C”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 97 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 12. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 12 (sound pressure 97 dB) as a default. The sound pressure levels are 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, 94 dB, 95 dB, 96 dB, 97 dB, 98 dB, 99 dB, and 100 dB corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen. Is the same as in the case of the settings “D” to “F”. Further, the initial value of the brightness setting is “bright (duty ratio 100%)”, which is the same as in the case of the settings “D” to “F”.

  When the setting is “B”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 96 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 11. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 11 (sound pressure 96 dB) as a default. The sound pressure levels are 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, 94 dB, 95 dB, 96 dB, 97 dB, 98 dB, 99 dB, and 100 dB corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen. Is the same as in the case of the settings “C” to “F”. Also, the initial value of the brightness setting is “bright (duty ratio 100%)”, which is the same as in the case of the settings “C” to “F”.

  When the setting is “A”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 95 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 10. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 10 (sound pressure 95 dB) as a default. The sound pressure levels are 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, 94 dB, 95 dB, 96 dB, 97 dB, 98 dB, 99 dB, and 100 dB corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen. Is the same as in the case of the settings “B” to “F”.

  When the setting is “A”, the initial value of the luminance setting is set to “medium (duty ratio 70%)”. The brightness setting can be adjusted by selecting and confirming any of the rectangular images (dark, medium, and light) on the brightness adjustment screen in the user adjustment mode, which is the same as the settings “B” to “F”. It is. However, when the screen shifts to the brightness adjustment screen, a rectangular image (dark) indicating a setting with slightly low brightness is selected as a default.

  When the setting is “9”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 91 dB and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 9. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 9 (sound pressure 91 dB) as a default. When the setting is “9”, the range of the sound pressure level that can be adjusted on the volume adjustment screen is lower as compared with the settings “A” to “F”. Each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen corresponds to sound pressures of 74 dB, 76 dB, 78 dB, 79 dB, 80 dB, 83 dB, 86 dB, 89 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, 94 dB, 95 dB, 96 dB, and 97 dB. Note that the appearance of the volume adjustment screen is the same as that of the settings “A” to “F” except for the default number of scales. Therefore, when the setting is “9”, for example, even if the user setting value of the volume is set to the maximum scale 15 on the volume adjustment screen, the sound pressure level is set to 100 dB as in the case of the settings “A” to “F”. Is not set and is set to 97 dB lower than that. If the user setting value of the volume is set to a scale of 6 or less when the setting is “9”, the sound pressure level is 74 dB lower than the lowest sound pressure level 86 dB that can be set when the setting is “A” to “F”. It is set to 83 dB. The point that the initial value of the luminance setting is “medium (duty ratio 70%)” is the same as in the case of setting “A”.

  When the setting is “8”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 89 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 8. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 8 (sound pressure 89 dB) as a default. The sound pressure levels are 74 dB, 76 dB, 78 dB, 79 dB, 80 dB, 83 dB, 86 dB, 89 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, 94 dB, 95 dB, 96 dB, and 97 dB corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen. Is the same as the setting “9”. In addition, the initial value of the brightness setting is “medium (duty ratio 70%)”, which is the same as the settings “9” and “A”.

  When the setting is “7”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 86 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 7. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 7 (sound pressure 86 dB) as a default. The sound pressure levels are 74 dB, 76 dB, 78 dB, 79 dB, 80 dB, 83 dB, 86 dB, 89 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, 94 dB, 95 dB, 96 dB, and 97 dB corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen. This is the same as the setting “8” and “9”.

  When the setting is “7”, the initial value of the luminance setting is set to “dark (duty ratio 40%)”. The brightness setting can be adjusted by selecting and confirming any of the rectangular images (dark, medium, and light) on the brightness adjustment screen in the user adjustment mode, which is the same as the settings “8” to “F”. It is. However, when transitioning to the brightness adjustment screen, a rectangular image (dark) indicating a setting with low brightness is selected as a default.

  When the setting is “6”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 75 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 6. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 6 (sound pressure 75 dB) as a default. When the setting is “6”, the range of the sound pressure level that can be adjusted on the volume adjustment screen is further lower as compared with the settings “7” to “9”. Each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen corresponds to sound pressures 65 dB, 67 dB, 69 dB, 71 dB, 73 dB, 75 dB, 77 dB, 79 dB, 81 dB, 83 dB, 85 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, and 90 dB. Therefore, when the setting is “6”, for example, even if the user setting value of the volume is set to the maximum scale 15 on the volume adjustment screen, the sound pressure level is the highest sound pressure level when the setting is “7” to “9”. It is set to 90 dB which is lower than 97 dB. If the user setting value of the volume is set to 5 or less when the setting is “6”, the sound pressure level is 65 dB lower than the lowest sound pressure level 74 dB that can be set when the setting is “7” to “9”. 73 dB is set. The point that the initial value of the brightness setting is “dark (duty ratio 40%)” is the same as the setting “7”.

  Is set to “5”, the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 73 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 5. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 5 (sound pressure 73 dB) as a default. The sound pressure levels are 65 dB, 67 dB, 69 dB, 71 dB, 73 dB, 75 dB, 77 dB, 79 dB, 81 dB, 83 dB, 85 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, and 90 dB corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen. Is the same as the setting “6”. Also, the initial value of the brightness setting is “medium (duty ratio 70%)”, which is the same as the settings “6” and “7”.

  As described above, when the setting is in the range of “5” to “F” for normal sales, the lower the setting is (the closer it is “5”), the lower the volume set by default is adjustable. The volume range is lowered and the brightness set by default is lowered.

  When the setting is “4”, the operation mode is set to the power saving mode A, and the initial value of the sound pressure is the lowest sound pressure level that can be set when the setting is “5” to “F” (that is, The lowest sound pressure level that can be set by the player is set to 60 dB, which is lower than 65 dB. When the setting is “4”, the player cannot adjust the volume, and the sound pressure is fixed at 60 dB.

  When the setting is “4”, the initial value of the luminance setting is “dark (duty) that is the lowest luminance that can be set when the setting is“ 5 ”to“ F ”(that is, the lowest luminance that can be set by the player). Is set to “extremely dark (duty ratio 10%)”. When the setting is “4”, luminance adjustment by the player is impossible, and the luminance is fixed to “extremely dark (duty ratio 10%)”.

  When the setting is “3”, the operation mode is set to the power saving mode B, and the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 0 dB (silence) that is lower than the sound pressure of 60 dB when the setting is “4”. The Even when the setting is “3”, the player cannot adjust the volume, and the sound pressure is fixed at 0 dB. When the setting is “3”, the initial value of the luminance setting is set to “extinguish (duty ratio 0%)” lower than the luminance “extreme darkness (duty ratio 10%)” when the setting “4” is set. Is done. Even in the case of setting “3”, the player cannot adjust the luminance, and the luminance is fixed to “extinguish (duty ratio 0%)”.

  Thus, in the power saving modes A and B, the sound volume and the brightness are fixed to a level that cannot be set by the player (a level lower than the range that can be set by the player). In this example, the power saving modes A and B are set by operating the first output setting switch 190 (or the second output setting switch 194). However, the game store clerk confirms the setting of the pachinko machine 100. The power saving modes A and B may be set according to a predetermined operation such as a setting change.

  When the setting is “2” (for development and sales promotion), the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 70 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 2. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to the scale 2 (70 dB) as a default. When the setting is “2”, the sound pressure level that can be adjusted on the volume adjustment screen is different from any of the settings “5” to “F”. Each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen corresponds to sound pressures of 64 dB, 70 dB, 74 dB, 77 dB, 80 dB, 83 dB, 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 d, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, and 94 dB. The initial value of the brightness setting is “bright (duty ratio 100%)” which is the same as the settings “B” to “F”.

  When the setting is “1” (for development and sales promotion), the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 64 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 1. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of volume is set to scale 1 (64 dB) as a default. Corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen, the sound pressure levels are 64 dB, 70 dB, 74 dB, 77 dB, 80 dB, 83 dB, 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, and 94 dB. This is the same as the setting “2”. The point that the initial value of the brightness setting is “bright (duty ratio 100%)” is also the same as in the case of setting “2”.

  When the setting is “0” (for application), the initial value of the sound pressure is set to 0 dB, and the initial position of the volume setting is set to 0. That is, when transitioning to the volume adjustment screen, the user setting value of the volume is set to 0 (0 dB) as a default. Note that when the setting is “5” to “F”, the user setting value of the volume can be set only on the scales 1 to 15, and cannot be set to the scale 0. Each of the scales 0 to 15 on the volume adjustment screen corresponds to sound pressures 0 dB, 64 dB, 70 dB, 74 dB, 77 dB, 80 dB, 83 dB, 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 dB, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB, and 94 dB. The initial value of the brightness setting is “bright (duty ratio 100%)”, which is the same as when the settings are “1” and “2”.

<Brightness and lighting time of LED lamp>
FIG. 333 shows how the power consumption of the LED lamp changes with the above settings “F” (duty ratio 100%), “A” (duty ratio 70%), and “7” (duty ratio 40%). It is a figure explaining. In each of the settings “F”, “A”, and “7”, it is assumed that the duty ratio setting remains the initial setting. The LED lamp A emits light with a relatively high luminance (duty ratio) based on predetermined lamp data (see FIGS. 329 (a) and (b) above), and the LED lamp B is based on the lamp data. It is assumed that light is emitted with a luminance lower than A.

  Since the power consumption of the LED lamp largely depends on the product of the brightness (duty ratio in this example) and time, the LED power consumption of the LED lamps A and B at the setting “F” is used as a reference. The power consumption of the lamps A and B is reduced by about 30%, and the power consumption of the LED lamps A and B at the setting “7” is reduced by about 60%. As described above, the reduction rate of the power consumption by changing the setting is the same for the LED lamps A and B, but the reduction width of the power consumption is higher for the LED lamp A having a higher luminance as shown by the thick arrows in the figure. Is larger than the LED lamp B having a low luminance.

<First sub-control unit main process>
Next, the first sub control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit main process.

  When the first sub control unit 400 receives a reset signal from the reset circuit 403 described above, the first sub control unit 400 starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes processing according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 406. First, in step S301, initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of various variables (including processing for initializing a variable CNT described later to 0), and the like are performed.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the variable CNT stored in the RAM 408 is 33 or more. If the variable CNT is applicable, the process proceeds to step S303, and if not, the determination process of step S302 is repeatedly executed. Here, the variable CNT is a variable added every 1 ms in a 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Therefore, the process for determining whether or not the variable CNT is 33 or more in step S302 is the process for determining whether or not 33 ms has elapsed since the variable CNT was initialized to 0 in step S301 or step S303. It is synonymous with. In step S303, after the variable CNT is initialized to 0, the process proceeds to step S304. Note that the process of step S302 is not limited to this example, and for example, the main loop process (steps S302 to S312) may be executed three times in 100 ms (30 times per second).

  In step S304, liquid crystal reception driver processing is performed. In the liquid crystal reception driver processing, processing of a command received from a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) (control unit that controls the decorative symbol display device 208) is performed. In step S305, an effect control driver process is performed. In the effect control reception driver process, a command received from the second sub control unit 500 is processed.

  In step S306, effect control main loop processing is performed. In this effect control main loop process, an unprocessed command received by a command reception interrupt process to be described later is acquired from a command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and a process corresponding to the unprocessed command is performed. For example, FIG. The lamp and sound are controlled based on the performance execution timing data shown in FIG.

  In step S307, a lamp control main loop process is performed. In this lamp control main loop process, control related to the lamp is performed based on the lamp data set in the effect control main loop process of step S306. In step S308, sound control main loop processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this sound control main loop process, control related to the sound (sound) is performed based on the sound data set in the effect control main loop process of step S306.

  In step S309, lamp driver processing is performed. In this lamp driver process, the light output from the various lamps 418 and 440 is controlled based on the lamp control information set in the lamp control main loop process in step S307. In step S310, sound driver processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this sound driver process, the sound output from the speaker 120 is controlled via the sound control circuit 431 based on the sound control information set in the sound control main loop process in step S308.

  In step S311, liquid crystal communication driver processing is performed. In the liquid crystal communication driver process, a process of transmitting a command to a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) is performed. In step S312, the effect control unit communication driver process is performed. In the effect control communication driver process, the process proceeds to step S302 after performing a process of transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 and the like.

  The first sub-control unit 400 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S302 to S312 except for interruption due to a command reception interrupt process, a 1ms timer interrupt process, a 10ms timer interrupt process, or a DMA interrupt process, which will be described later. .

<Command reception interrupt processing>
Next, a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4B is a flowchart showing the flow of command reception interrupt processing.

  This command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 triggered by a command reception interrupt that occurs when a command from the main control unit 300 is received. In step S401, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command, and then the process ends.

<1ms timer interrupt processing>
Next, a 1 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10C is a flowchart showing the flow of 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once every predetermined time (1 ms in this example), and executes a 1 ms timer interrupt process triggered by this timer interrupt. To do. In step S501, the process ends after adding 1 to the variable CNT provided in the RAM 406.

<10ms timer interrupt processing>
Next, a 10 ms timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4D is a flowchart showing the flow of 10 ms timer interrupt processing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once every predetermined time (in this example, 10 ms), and executes a 10 ms timer interrupt process triggered by this timer interrupt. To do. In step S601, the first sensor reading process is performed. In the next step S602, the second sensor reading process is performed, and then the process ends. Here, in the first sensor reading process, for example, a detection signal of the second output setting switch 194 is acquired via the sensor circuit 428 (see FIG. 223), and the acquired detection signal is stored in the RAM 408 as a player setting value. Performs memorizing process. In the second sensor reading process, a detection signal of another switch is acquired, and a process of storing the acquired detection signal in the RAM 408 is performed.

<DMA interrupt processing>
Next, DMA interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5E is a flowchart showing the flow of DMA interrupt processing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a DMA interrupt notifying the end of the DMA transfer, and executes a DMA interrupt process triggered by this DMA interrupt. In step S <b> 701, after performing various processes accompanying the end of the DMA transfer, the process ends.

<Player setting screen display processing>
Next, the player setting screen display process executed in the effect control main loop process (step S306) in the first sub control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure (a) is the flowchart which showed the flow of the player setting screen display process.

  In step S801, it is determined whether or not a player setting screen display start condition is satisfied. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S802, and if not, the process proceeds to step S803. In step S802, display of a player setting screen (for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 346 (d)) is started, and then the process proceeds to step S803. Here, the player setting screen display start condition is, for example, that a specific operation means is operated in a state in which the fluctuation display of the general map or the special figure is not performed (during the non-fluctuation of the normal figure or the special figure). Such as when a specific operation means is operated during a demonstration display, or when a specific operation means is operated other than during a big hit game.

  In step S803, it is determined whether or not a player setting screen display end condition is satisfied. If yes, the process proceeds to step S804, and if not, the process ends. In step S804, the process is terminated after the display of the player setting screen is terminated. Here, the player setting screen display end condition is, for example, when a specific operation means is operated. Note that the processing of steps S801 to S802 and the processing of steps S803 to S804 may be separate modules. In this case, both may be executed each time in the production control main loop processing, or both may be executed at different periods. Also good.

<Sound control main loop processing>
Next, the sound control main loop process (step S308) in the first sub control unit main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 335 (b). FIG. 2B is a flowchart showing the flow of the sound control loop process.

  In step S1001, sound data update processing is performed. In this sound data update processing, control such as reproduction and stop of the sound included in the effect set in the effect control main loop process, and processing such as fade-in, fade-out, and pan for the sound being reproduced are performed. In the next step S1002, volume switch processing (details will be described later) is performed. Although details will be described later, in this volume switch processing, volume change processing by the first output setting switch 192 is performed.

<Sound driver processing>
Next, the sound driver process (step S310) in the first sub control unit main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 335 (c). FIG. 5B is a flowchart showing the flow of sound driver processing.

  In step S1101, an administrator setting value control process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this administrator setting value control process, an administrator setting value update process or the like is performed. In step S1102, other sound driver processing (initialization processing of the sound control circuit 431, diagnosis processing, error processing, etc.) is performed, and then the processing ends.

<Volume switch processing>
Next, the volume switch process (step S1002) in the sound control main loop process described above will be described using FIG. 336 (a). FIG. 9A is a flowchart showing the flow of volume switch processing.

  In step S1301, volume value change processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in the volume value changing process, a volume changing process or the like by the first output setting switch 190 is performed. In step S1302, the processing is terminated after other volume switch processing is performed.

<Volume value change processing>
Next, the volume value change process (step S1301) in the above-described volume switch process will be described with reference to FIG. 336 (b). FIG. 5B is a flowchart showing the flow of the volume value change process.

  In step S1501, the detection signal of the first output setting switch 190 is acquired, and the acquired detection signal is stored in the RAM 408 as the current administrator setting value. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the current administrator setting value acquired in step S1501 matches the previous administrator setting value stored in the RAM 408. If they do not match, the process proceeds to step S1503. Then, the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1503, the above-mentioned player setting value is acquired, and in step 1504, 1 is set to the variable CH_CNT. In step S1505, the processes of the next steps S1506 to S1509 are repeatedly executed until the variable CH_CNT becomes 1 to 32.

  In step S1506, it is determined whether there is a phrase being output in the channel (CH_CNT). If there is a phrase being output, the process proceeds to step S1507, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1507, the volume of the channel (CH_CNT) is calculated, and in the next step S1508, after processing for setting the volume of the channel (CH_CNT) is performed, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1509, 1 is added to CH_CNT, and then the process proceeds to step S1505.

  In step S1510, the current administrator setting value is set as the previous administrator setting value to update the previous administrator setting value, and the process ends. In this example, the volume of channel 1 to channel 32 is updated by repeatedly executing the processing from step S1506 to step S1509 until the variable CH_CNT is changed from 1 to 32. It may be configured to update the volume of channel 1 to channel 31 excluding channel 32 (error sound) by repeatedly executing the processing of step S1506 to step S1509 until it reaches 31.

<Administrator set value control processing>
Next, the administrator set value control process (step S1101) in the sound driver process described above will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the flowchart which showed the flow of the administrator setting value control processing.

  In step S1601, the current port value stored in the RAM 408 is saved to the previous port value stored in the RAM 408. In step S1602, the states of the input terminals P1 to P4 (b0 to b3 of the first output setting switch 190). Is set to the current port value.

  In step S1603, the current port value is compared with the previous port value, and if the values are the same, the process proceeds to step S1604, and if the values are different, the process proceeds to step S1608 to initialize the variable F_CNT to 0 and perform processing. finish. In step S1604, 1 is added to the variable F_CNT stored in the RAM 408. In step S1605, it is determined whether the variable F_CNT is 15 or more. As a result of the determination, if it is 15 or more, the value stored in the current port value is stored in the administrator setting value stored in the RAM 408 in step S1606, and the variable F_CNT is initialized to 0 in step S1607. To finish the process.

<Game control and production control>
Next, with reference to FIG. 338, the flow of game control by the main control unit 300 and production control by the first sub control unit 400 will be described. This figure is a time chart showing the relationship between the special figure variation display by the main control unit 300 and the decorative symbol variation display by the first sub-control unit 400.

  For example, when the main control unit 300 starts the special figure change display at the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the main control unit 300 transmits a change start command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this variation start command starts the decorative symbol variation display. However, it takes time for the command reception processing and command analysis processing from the main control unit 300, so that FIG. A command instructing the liquid crystal control unit to display the decorative symbols is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit at a timing shown in FIG. The liquid crystal control unit that has received this command starts displaying the decorative symbols, but it takes time for command reception processing, command analysis processing, etc. from the first sub-control unit 400, so from the timing shown in FIG. The display of the decorative design is started at the timing shown in FIG.

  In other words, the start timing of the special figure variation display and the decorative symbol display is not exactly the same in the strict sense, but this timing deviation is unavoidable due to communication between control units, interrupt cycles of each control unit, etc. It is.

  Therefore, “simultaneous” in the present invention is a concept that allows such an inevitable timing shift in addition to the completely same timing. For example, “the decorative symbol display starts simultaneously with the start of the special figure variation display”. In addition to the case where the special figure variation display and the decorative symbol display are started at exactly the same timing, for example, the special figure variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. This also includes the case where the decorative symbol display is started. “Stop the decorative symbol display at the same time as stopping the special symbol variation display” means that the special symbol variation display and the decorative symbol display are stopped at the same timing, for example, as shown in FIG. The case where the special-figure variation display is stopped at the timing and the decorative symbol display is stopped at the timing shown in FIG.

  Further, the timing shift may become longer or shorter due to fluctuations in the interrupt cycle. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the main processing at time X and time Y shown in FIG. Although it is the time from receiving a command from the control unit 300 to transmitting the command to the liquid crystal control unit, the time X may be longer or shorter than the time Y. Therefore, the time shown in FIGS. (A) to (c) may differ from the time shown in FIGS. (G) to (i). It is the timing to start. The same applies to the timing of “stopping the decorative symbol display simultaneously with the stop of the special figure variation display”.

<Display timing of setting screen>
Next, an example of the display timing of the setting screen will be described. Here, the setting screen means that the player uses the second output setting switch 194 to adjust the volume of sound output from the speaker 120 or adjust the luminance of light emitted from various lamps 418. For example, a menu screen shown in FIG. 346 (d).

  FIG. 339 (a) is a diagram showing a first example of the display timing of the special figure variation display and the demonstration screen. In this example, after the special chart fluctuation display is finished, when the time Ta (for example, 30 seconds) has passed without the special figure fluctuation display being performed, or after the last demonstration (demo screen display) is finished, When the time Ta has elapsed without the special figure fluctuation display being performed, a demonstration of the reproduction time Tb is started.

  FIG. 339 (b) is a diagram showing a second example of the display timing of the special figure variation display and the demonstration screen. In this example, after the special chart fluctuation display is finished, the first demonstration screen display is started after the time Ta (for example, 30 seconds) has passed without the special figure fluctuation display being performed, and the reproduction time Tb demonstration is started. When the time Ta elapses without the special-fluctuation display after the completion of 1 (first demonstration screen display, for example, still image display), the demo 2 (second display) with a playback time Tc different from the demo 1 is displayed. Second demo screen display (for example, video display) is started.

  FIG. 339 (c) is a diagram showing an example in which a setting screen is displayed before displaying the demonstration screen of the first embodiment shown in FIG. In this example, after the setting screen display is finished, the demonstration of the reproduction time Tb is started after the time Ta (for example, 30 seconds) has passed without the special figure fluctuation display being performed. In this example, the first compound control unit 400 receives a change button command from the main control unit 300 and accepts the operation of the setting button when the time until the next command can be received elapses. Display the screen.

  FIG. 340 (a) is a diagram showing an example in which the setting screen is displayed during the demonstration screen display of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 339 (a) and the demonstration screen display is interrupted. In this example, during the demonstration of the reproduction time Tb, the demonstration is temporarily interrupted and the setting screen is displayed, and then the demonstration of the reproduction time Tb is resumed. In this example, the demo playback time is adjusted so that the total time (Tb1 + Tb2) of the demo playback time Tb1 before the setting screen display and the demo playback time Tb2 after the setting screen display becomes Tb. Yes.

  FIG. 340 (b) is a diagram showing an example in which the setting screen is displayed without interrupting the demonstration screen display during the demonstration screen display of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 339 (a). In this example, during the demonstration of the reproduction time Tb, the setting screen is displayed without interrupting the demonstration, and then the demonstration of the reproduction time Tb is resumed. In this example, the setting screen display is displayed on top of the demonstration screen display at the start of the setting screen display, thereby making the demonstration screen display invisible and erasing the setting screen display at the end of the setting screen display. Thus, the demonstration screen display is made visible. With such a configuration, the process of interrupting / resuming the demonstration screen display becomes unnecessary, and the control burden may be reduced.

  FIG. 340 (c) is a diagram showing an example in which the setting screen is displayed without interrupting the demonstration screen display immediately before the end of the demonstration screen display of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 339 (a). In this example, the setting screen is displayed without interrupting the demo just before the end of the demonstration of the playback time Tb. In this example, the setting screen display is displayed on top of the demonstration screen display at the start of the setting screen display, thereby making the demonstration screen display invisible and erasing the setting screen display at the end of the setting screen display. However, the demonstration screen display can be visually recognized, but the demonstration screen is not displayed because the demonstration is terminated when the setting screen is displayed.

<Example of volume adjustment>
Next, an example of volume adjustment will be described. FIG. 341 (a) is a time chart showing an example in which the volume adjustment is not performed before the special figure variation display is started. In this example, since the volume is set to 96 dB over the entire period from 0 to 100, BGM01 (stereo 01), fluctuation start sound 01 (monaural 02), and serif 01 (monaural 01) are set to 0 to 100 ms. The sound is output with a sound pressure of 96 dB over the period. In this example, the unit of the numerical value shown in the figure (0 to 100 in this example) is ms, but the unit of the numerical value may be a frame.

  FIG. 341 (b) is a time chart showing an example in which the volume is adjusted before the special figure variation display is started. In this example, the volume is changed from 96 dB to 100 dB at a timing of 30 ms. For this reason, BGM01 (stereo 01) is output at a sound pressure of 96 dB at a timing before 30 ms, and BGM01 (stereo 01) is output at a sound pressure of 100 dB at a timing after 30 ms. The fluctuation start sound 01 (monaural 02) is output at a sound pressure of 100 dB.

  In this example, the sound data corresponding to BGM01 (stereo 01) is not rewritten at the volume change timing of 30 ms. However, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), BGM01 is updated at the same timing as the volume change. After (Stereo 01) is temporarily stopped, new sound data may be reset or new sound data may be overwritten at the same timing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 342 (a), a predetermined time has elapsed after BGM01 (stereo 01) is temporarily stopped by deleting sound data corresponding to BGM01 (stereo 01) at the timing of volume change. The sound data corresponding to BGM01 (stereo 01) may be set again later (after 10 ms in this example). In this example, at the timing of 30 ms, display of the setting screen is started by operation of the operating means, but no sound is output during a period of 30 ms to 40 ms. Further, the BGM02 (stereo 02) in the setting screen that is outputting sound in FIG. 342 (b) is configured not to output sound. While the setting screen is displayed, the volume of BGM01 (stereo 01) may be lowered or muted (the volume is set to 0 or muted).

  FIG. 342 (b) is a time chart showing an example in which volume adjustment is performed while the setting screen is displayed. In this example, the display of the setting screen is started at the timing of 30 ms, and BGM01 (stereo 1) is stopped, while BGM2 (stereo 02) and the screen display sound 01 (in accordance with the display of the setting screen). The sound of monaural 01) has started. Further, at the timing of 300 ms, the volume is changed from 96 dB to 98 dB and the sound of the sound volume determination sound (monaural 02) is started. Further, at the timing of 330 ms, the sound data corresponding to BGM02 (stereo 02) is deleted to stop BGM02 (stereo 02), and then the sound data corresponding to BGM01 (stereo 01) is set to set BGM01 (stereo). 01) is resumed.

  FIG. 342 (c) is a time chart showing an example in which the setting screen display is forcibly terminated. In this example, after the setting screen display is started at a timing of 30 ms, the setting screen display is forcibly terminated at a timing of 300 ms on the condition that a specific operation means is operated, and this corresponds to BGM02 (stereo 02). The sound data corresponding to BGM01 (stereo 01) is set and the sound output from BGM01 (stereo 01) is resumed after the BGM02 (stereo 02) is stopped by deleting the sound data to be played. When the setting screen display is forcibly terminated as shown in FIG. 343 (a), the sound data corresponding to BGM01 (stereo 01) is set again after a predetermined time (in this example, 10 ms). You may try again. Further, when the luminance is changed on the setting screen, the same sound as the sound volume determination sound that is output when the volume is changed may be output.

  FIG. 343 (b) is a time chart showing an example in which another event has occurred before the setting screen ends. In this example, since another event (for example, a ball entering the start port) occurs at a timing of 300 ms, the sound output of BGM01 (stereo 01) is resumed and the sound of the fluctuation start sound 01 (monaural 02) is output. Although started, the stop of BGM02 (stereo 02) corresponding to the setting screen is delayed, and sound is output overlapping BGM01 (stereo 01) and fluctuation start sound 01 (monaural 02).

  FIG. 344 (a) is a time chart showing an example in which the setting screen is displayed and the volume is adjusted during the demonstration. In this example, during a demonstration in which BGM03 (stereo 01) is being output, a setting screen is displayed at a timing of 30 ms, and on this setting screen, the volume is changed from 96 dB to 100 dB at a timing of 300 ms. As shown in FIG. 344 (b), the sound data corresponding to BGM03 (stereo 01) may be set again at the timing of volume change.

  FIG. 344 (c) is a time chart showing an example in which another event occurs before the end of the setting screen during the demonstration. In this example, since another event (for example, a ball entering the start port) occurs at a timing of 300 ms, the sound output from BGM03 (stereo 01) is resumed and the sound from the fluctuation start sound 01 (monaural 02) is output. Although started, the stop of BGM02 (stereo 02) corresponding to the setting screen is delayed, and sound is output overlapping BGM01 (stereo 01) and fluctuation start sound 01 (monaural 02).

  FIG. 345 (a) is a time chart showing an example in which the volume is changed on the setting screen during the demonstration. In this example, display of the setting screen is started at the timing of 30 ms, and the volume is changed from 96 dB to 98 dB by operating the second output setting switch 194 at the timing of 80 ms. Further, the sound output of the volume change sound 01 (monaural 02) is started at the timing of the volume change.

  In FIG. 345 (b), the volume is changed from 98 dB to 100 dB by operating the first output setting switch 190 at the timing of 300 ms in addition to FIG. Absent.

  FIG. 345 (c) is a time chart when an error occurs. In this example, since the abnormality is detected, the sound of the error sound (monaural 12) is continued for a long time irrespective of the demonstration, the setting screen display, and the like.

<Example of volume adjustment screen and brightness adjustment screen>
Next, an example of the volume adjustment screen and the brightness adjustment screen will be described. FIG. 346 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition until the volume adjustment screen and the brightness adjustment screen are displayed in time series.

  In the present example, when the special period stop display and the decorative symbol stop display shown in FIG. 5B are finished, a predetermined period elapses and the operation of the second output setting switch 194 is accepted. The menu display shown in FIG.

  Initially, the first sub-control unit 400 suggests that a menu can be displayed as shown in FIG. 5C on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed after the decorative symbol stop display is performed. Display suggestion notification is performed. In this example, as a menu display suggestion notification, an image imitating the appearance of the second output setting switch 194 is displayed by using the decorative symbol display device 208, and “menu screen display” is displayed on the right side of the image. Is displayed.

  Subsequently, on the condition that the operation of the second output setting switch 194 is accepted, the first sub control unit 400 shifts to the set value adjustment mode and displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. . In this example, as a menu display, a selection menu of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is displayed, and either one of the selection menus is highlighted according to the operation of the left button 194b and the right button 194c of the second output setting switch 194. By doing so, it becomes the state of temporary selection.

  Subsequently, when the first sub control unit 400 receives an operation of the determination button 194a of the second output setting switch 194, the first sub control unit 400 displays a screen corresponding to the temporarily selected selection menu. Specifically, when the operation of the enter button 194a is accepted while the volume adjustment is temporarily selected on the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen as shown in FIG. When the operation of the enter button 194a is accepted in a state where is temporarily selected, a brightness adjustment screen as shown in FIG.

  Note that the setting screen (menu screen, volume adjustment screen, brightness adjustment screen) cannot be displayed while the special map is changing, but may be displayed while the normal map is changing. Further, when the setting screen is displayed, a “predetermined effect” based on the usual map change may be displayed. Here, the “predetermined effect” may be executed when the electric figure is won for a long time (for example, the second normal symbol) that is open for a long time, or it may be executed even in the case of a fake (false). Of course, a predetermined display or a predetermined sound may be output before or during the opening of the electric chew. In addition, the “predetermined effects” are classified into effects 1 for winning the second normal symbol, effects 2A for notifying the winning, effects 2B for notifying the winning, effects 3 relating to the opening of the electric chew, etc. May be. Further, during the setting screen display, all of these effects 1 to 3 may be executed, or only the effect 3 may be executed.

  Further, in a predetermined effect, only sound may be output without displaying, and when this sound is output, volume adjustment may be enabled or disabled. Further, the setting screen may be deleted when the normal figure is won, or the volume of the sound of a predetermined effect may be lowered while the setting screen is displayed. Further, when the volume is adjusted during a predetermined performance, the confirmation sound may not be sounded, the sound may be sounded at the default sound volume, or may be sounded at a low sound.

<Volume adjustment example 1>
Next, volume adjustment example 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the volume adjustment example 1 in time series.

  Before the volume adjustment shown in FIG. 5A, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the administrator setting value is set to B and the player setting value is set to 11. . Further, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the volume (volume) setting value is set to a default value of 96 dB corresponding to the setting “B”.

  Subsequently, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received the selection operation of the menu screen at the timing shown in FIG. 10A, the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the setting value adjustment mode and displays the menu screen shown in FIG. Since the selection operation of the volume adjustment screen is accepted while this menu screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 has received the pressing operation of the right button 194c of the second output setting switch 194 twice during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. Is changed from “11” to “13”, and the set value of the volume is changed from 96 dB corresponding to “11” to 98 dB corresponding to “13”. Further, in response to the increase in the volume (volume) setting value by two steps, a display for increasing the volume adjustment scale from 11 to 13 is performed as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the set value adjustment mode because it has accepted the pressing operation of the determination button 194a of the second output setting switch 194 once at the timing shown in FIG. In this example, as a display to notify the end of the set value adjustment mode, the volume adjustment scale is erased and at the same time the character display “Volume changed” is displayed, but the screen returns to the normal game screen. Alternatively, the volume change may be notified by voice.

<Volume adjustment example 2>
Next, a volume adjustment example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the volume adjustment example 2 in time series.

  Before the volume adjustment shown in FIG. 5A, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the administrator setting value is set to B and the player setting value is set to 11. . Further, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the volume (volume) setting value is set to a default value of 96 dB corresponding to the setting “B”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 receives an operation of the first output setting switch 190 (for example, an operation by a store clerk at a game store) at the timing before the transition to the set value adjustment mode shown in FIG. The administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, and the volume (volume) setting value is changed from 96 dB corresponding to the default value of “B” to 100 dB corresponding to the default value of “F”. ing. Further, since the administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, the player setting value is changed from “11” corresponding to the administrator setting value “B” to the administrator setting value “F”. It is changed to “15” corresponding to.

  Subsequently, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received the selection operation of the menu screen at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the setting value adjustment mode and displays the menu screen shown in FIG. Since the selection operation of the volume adjustment screen is accepted while this menu screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. At this time, since the player setting value is “15”, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a display for setting the volume adjustment scale to 15.

  That is, in this example, the player does not adjust the volume in the set value adjustment mode, but the player's volume is adjusted by the first output setting switch 190 at the timing shown in FIG. Regardless of intention, the player setting value is forcibly changed to the administrator setting value. Therefore, not only the manager (such as a store clerk of the game shop) who has adjusted the volume by the first output setting switch 190 but also the player can grasp that the volume has been adjusted.

<Volume adjustment example 3>
Next, a volume adjustment example 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 349 and 350. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing volume adjustment example 3 in time series. Since FIGS. 349 (a) to 349 (c) are the same as FIGS. 347 (a) to (c) of the volume adjustment example 1 described above, description thereof is omitted.

  Since the first sub-control unit 400 has accepted the operation of the first output setting switch 190 during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in (c) to (d) of the figure, at the timing shown in (e) of the figure. The administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, and the volume (volume) setting value is changed from 96 dB corresponding to the default value of “B” to 100 dB corresponding to the default value of “F”. ing.

  As described above, in this example, the volume is adjusted at the timing shown in FIG. 4D, but the administrator setting value is changed at the timing shown in FIG. With such a configuration, since the timing at which the volume changes can be delayed as compared with the volume adjustment, the change in volume can be easily noticed in some cases.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 9E, the administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, so that the player setting value is “11” corresponding to the administrator setting value “B”. To “15” corresponding to the administrator setting value “F”.

  On the other hand, in this example, the set value of the volume (volume) is increased by four stages. However, since the volume is not adjusted by the second output setting switch 194, at the timings shown in FIGS. There is no display for raising the volume adjustment scale from 11 to 15 in four steps.

  FIGS. 350 (f) to (h) are time series diagrams showing how the volume adjustment screen is displayed again after the volume adjustment shown in FIG. 349. Before the volume adjustment shown in FIG. 350 (f), since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “F”, the administrator setting value is set to F and the player setting value is set to 15. . Further, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “F”, the volume (volume) setting value is set to a default value of 100 dB corresponding to the setting “F”.

  Subsequently, since the first sub-control unit 400 has accepted the selection operation of the menu screen at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the setting value adjustment mode and displays the menu screen shown in FIG. Since the selection operation of the volume adjustment screen is accepted while this menu screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. At this time, since the player setting value is “15”, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a display for setting the volume adjustment scale to 15.

  That is, in this example, the player does not adjust the volume in the set value adjustment mode, but the volume adjustment by the first output setting switch 190 is performed at the timing in the set value adjustment mode shown in FIG. 349 (d). As a result, the player setting value is forcibly changed to the administrator setting value regardless of the player's intention. Therefore, not only the manager (such as a store clerk of the game shop) who has adjusted the volume by the first output setting switch 190 but also the player can grasp that the volume has been adjusted.

<Volume adjustment example 4>
Next, volume adjustment example 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 and 352. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the volume adjustment example 4 in time series.

  Before the volume adjustment shown in FIG. 5A, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the administrator setting value is set to B and the player setting value is set to 11. . Further, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the volume (volume) setting value is set to a default value of 96 dB corresponding to the setting “B”.

  Since the first sub-control unit 400 has accepted the selection operation of the menu screen at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the setting value adjustment mode and displays the menu screen shown in FIG. Since the selection operation of the volume adjustment screen is accepted while the menu screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the pressing operation of the left button 194b of the second output setting switch 194 twice during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. Is changed from “11” to “9”, and the set value of the volume is changed from 96 dB corresponding to “11” to 94 dB corresponding to “9”. Corresponding to the lowering of the set value of the sound volume (volume) by two steps, a display for lowering the volume adjustment scale from 11 to 9 by two steps is performed as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the operation of the first output setting switch 190 during the display of the volume adjustment screens shown in FIGS. At the timing, the administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, and the volume (volume) setting value is changed from 94 dB to 100 dB corresponding to the default value of “F”. Further, since the administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, the player setting value is changed from “11” corresponding to the administrator setting value “B” to the administrator setting value “F”. It is changed to “15” corresponding to.

  On the other hand, in this example, the set value of the sound volume (volume) is lowered by 6 steps and then raised by 6 steps. However, the increase in 6 steps is not the volume adjustment by the second output setting switch 194, so FIG. e) At the timing shown in FIG. 352 (f), the display for raising the scale of the amount adjustment from 9 to 15 in six steps is not performed.

  FIGS. 352 (g) to (i) are diagrams showing, in time series, the state in which the volume adjustment screen is displayed again after the volume adjustment shown in FIG. Before the volume adjustment shown in FIG. 5G, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “F”, the administrator setting value is set to F and the player setting value is set to 15. . Further, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “F”, the volume (volume) setting value is set to a default value of 100 dB.

  Subsequently, since the first sub-control unit 400 has accepted the selection operation of the menu screen at the timing shown in FIG. 5G, the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the setting value adjustment mode and displays the menu screen shown in FIG. Since the selection operation of the volume adjustment screen is accepted while this menu screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. At this time, since the player setting value is “15”, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a display for setting the volume adjustment scale to 15.

  In other words, in this example, in the set value adjustment mode, the player makes an adjustment to decrease the volume and does not adjust to increase the volume, but increases the volume by the first output setting switch 190 at the timing shown in FIG. 351 (e). As a result of the adjustment, the player setting value is forcibly changed to the administrator setting value regardless of the player's intention. Therefore, not only the manager (such as a store clerk of the game shop) who has adjusted the volume by the first output setting switch 190 but also the player can grasp that the volume has been adjusted.

<Volume adjustment example 5>
Next, a volume adjustment example 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 353 is a diagram showing the volume adjustment example 5 in time series.

  Before the volume adjustment shown in FIG. 5A, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the administrator setting value is set to B and the player setting value is set to 11. . Further, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the volume (volume) setting value is set to a default value of 96 dB corresponding to the setting “B”.

  Since the first sub-control unit 400 has accepted the selection operation of the menu screen at the timing shown in FIG. 10A, the first sub-control unit 400 shifts to the setting value adjustment mode and displays the menu screen shown in FIGS. Since the selection operation of the brightness adjustment screen is accepted while the menu screen is displayed, the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, since the first sub-control unit 400 has accepted the operation of the first output setting switch 190 during the display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 4D, the management is performed at the timing shown in FIG. The user setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, and the volume setting value is changed from 96 dB corresponding to the default value of “B” to 100 dB corresponding to the default value of “F”. Yes. Further, since the administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, the player setting value is changed from “11” corresponding to the administrator setting value “B” to the administrator setting value “F”. It is changed to “15” corresponding to.

  In this example, since the operation of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted during the display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 4D, the set value adjustment mode is terminated and the volume adjustment scale is changed from 11 to 15. There is no display for raising the level by four levels.

  That is, in this example, the player does not adjust the volume in the set value adjustment mode, but the volume adjustment by the first output setting switch 190 is performed at the timing of the brightness adjustment screen display shown in FIG. 353 (d). Thus, the set value adjustment mode is forcibly terminated. Therefore, not only the manager (such as a store clerk of the game shop) who has adjusted the volume by the first output setting switch 190 but also the player can grasp that the volume has been adjusted.

<Volume adjustment example 6>
Next, a volume adjustment example 6 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 354 is a diagram showing volume adjustment example 6 in time series.

  FIGS. 7A and 7B show the state immediately after the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the administrator set value is set to B, and the player The set value is set to an initial value of 11. Since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the volume (volume) setting value corresponding to the setting “B” is set to the default value of 96 dB.

  The first sub-control unit 400 displays the explanation screen for the amusement store after the initial setting after power-on is completed at the timing shown in FIG. In this example, an image imitating the appearance of the first output setting switch 190, a set value, and setting contents are displayed as an explanation screen for a game store.

  Subsequently, since the first sub-control unit 400 has accepted the operation of the first output setting switch 190 during the display of the explanation screen for the amusement store shown in FIG. 4D, the timing is shown in FIG. The administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, and the volume (volume) setting value is changed from 96 dB corresponding to the default value of “B” to 100 dB corresponding to the default value of “F”. doing. Further, since the administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, the player setting value is changed from “11” corresponding to the administrator setting value “B” to the administrator setting value “F”. It is changed to “15” corresponding to.

  Further, in this example, since the operation of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted during the display of the explanation screen for the amusement shop shown in FIG. 4D, the display for raising the volume adjustment scale from 11 to 15 in four steps. Is not done.

<Volume adjustment example 7>
Next, a volume adjustment example 7 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 355 is a diagram showing volume adjustment example 7 in time series.

  Before the power saving mode shown in FIG. 5A, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the administrator setting value is set to B and the player setting value is set to 11. . Further, since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B”, the volume (volume) setting value is set to a default value of 96 dB corresponding to the setting “B”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 informs that it is in the power saving mode after shifting to the power saving mode (for example, the power saving mode A or the power saving mode B described above) at the timing shown in FIG. The mode notification screen is displayed. In this example, as the power saving mode notification screen, the background color is changed to black and the characters “power saving mode” are displayed.

  It should be noted that the player setting value may be lowered when the mode is shifted to the power saving mode, and the player setting value may be returned to the value immediately before the power saving mode when returning from the power saving mode to the demonstration screen or the like. In addition, when the power saving mode returns to the demonstration screen or the like, the player setting value may be returned to the default value. Further, the first output setting switch 190 may be configured so that the volume and luminance during the power saving mode and the volume and luminance after returning from the power saving mode can be set in advance.

  Subsequently, since the first sub-control unit 400 has accepted the operation of the first output setting switch 190 during the display of the power saving mode notification screen shown in FIG. 5C, at the timing shown in FIG. The administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, and the volume (volume) setting value is changed from 96 dB corresponding to the default value of “B” to 100 dB corresponding to the default value of “F”. ing. Further, since the administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “F”, the player setting value is changed from “11” corresponding to the administrator setting value “B” to the administrator setting value “F”. It is changed to “15” corresponding to.

  Further, in this example, since the operation of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted during the display of the power saving mode notification screen shown in FIG. 5C, the display for raising the volume adjustment scale from 11 to 15 in four steps is performed. Not done.

<Volume adjustment example 8>
Next, a volume adjustment example 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 356 is a diagram showing volume adjustment example 8 in time series.

  Since the setting of the first output setting switch 190 is “B” at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, the administrator setting value is set to B, and the setting by the second output setting switch 194 is “2”. Therefore, the player setting value is set to 2. Further, since the administrator setting value is “B” and the player setting value is “2”, the volume (volume) setting value is set to 87 dB.

  Since the first sub-control unit 400 has accepted the operation of the first output setting switch 190 during the special figure fluctuation stop display shown in FIG. 5B, at the timing shown in FIG. The value is changed from “B” to “9”, and the volume setting value is changed from 87 dB to 91 dB corresponding to the default value of “9”. Further, since the administrator setting value is changed from “B” to “9”, the player setting value is changed from “2” to “9” corresponding to the administrator setting value “9”. .

  In this example, since the operation of the first output setting switch 190 is accepted during the special figure fluctuation stop display shown in FIG. 5B, the volume adjustment scale is not displayed. Further, in this example, in the setting value adjustment mode, the player makes an adjustment to lower the volume and does not make an adjustment to increase the volume. However, the first output setting switch 190 performs the default volume adjustment at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (b). Due to the adjustment to change the value, the player setting value is forcibly changed to the administrator setting value regardless of the player's intention.

  Therefore, not only the manager (such as a store clerk of the game shop) who has adjusted the volume by the first output setting switch 190 but also the player can grasp that the volume has been adjusted.

<Example of volume adjustment during demonstration display>
Next, an example of volume adjustment during demonstration display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a diagram showing an example of the demonstration display in time series, and FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an example in which the demonstration display is performed from the beginning after the volume adjustment. c) is a diagram showing an example in which a demonstration display is performed halfway after the volume adjustment.

  In this example, the demonstration display is composed of a plurality of demonstration images 1 to n (n is a positive integer). The demo images 1 to n may be still images or moving images. In the example shown in FIG. 5B, when the volume adjustment screen is displayed during the demonstration display and the volume adjustment is performed, the demonstration display in progress is completely stopped, and after the volume adjustment, the demonstration image 1 (demo The demonstration display is resumed from the first image of the display).

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 7C, when the volume adjustment screen is displayed during the demonstration display and the volume adjustment is performed, the ongoing demonstration display is not interrupted and is continued behind the volume adjustment image. After the volume adjustment, the demonstration display is performed from the demonstration image n-1 (image in the middle of the demonstration display).

<Other screen displays>
Next, other screen displays will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 358 (a) is an example of an effect mode selection screen for selecting a specific effect mode from a plurality of effect modes. In such a production mode selection screen, when the operation of the determination button is accepted, the screen may not be deleted. The same applies to the song selection screen, synopsis screen, character selection screen, reach selection screen, item selection screen, and the like.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a membership menu related screen for inputting a password for log-in authentication. In such a membership system menu-related screen, when the operation of the determination button is accepted, the screen may be deleted. The same applies to the game history reference screen, the game table explanation selection screen, the character selection screen, and the like.

  FIG. 5C shows an example in which an error display is superimposed on at least a part of an image constituting the volume adjustment screen. When performing error display as in this example, if the display is performed so as to overlap at least part of other images, the player can be focused on the error display compared to simply performing error display, It may be possible to make the error display easy to notice. Further, when an error such as magnetic detection or radio wave detection is detected, the setting screen may be hidden.

  In addition, in the case of a game machine that can operate an accessory during a demonstration or can be moved by a player's operation, the setting screen may be displayed even when the accessory is moving. The setting screen may be displayed even when the accessory is operating and the accessory partially shields the display screen (with the accessory in front of the display unit).

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has a plurality of operation means and effect means (for example, the speaker 120, various lamps 418, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246). And a first control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein at least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a second control means). Output setting switch 194), at least one of the plurality of operation means being second operation means (for example, first output setting switch 190), and the first operation means being the first operation means The second operating means is at least provided at a second position, and the first position is a position at which a player can operate at least; Second position The first control means is capable of executing at least a first process when an execution condition is satisfied, wherein the first control means is capable of executing at least a first process. One process includes at least setting related to the production mode of the production means (for example, adjustment of volume of sound output from the speaker 120, adjustment of luminance of light emitted from the various lamps 418, adjustment of movement amount of the production movable body 224). The execution condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first operation means is operated in the first state, and the execution condition is the first condition in the first state. A condition that may be satisfied when the second operating means is operated, and the execution condition is a condition that is not satisfied when the first operating means is operated in the second state, and Line condition, gaming table, wherein if said in the second state the second operation means is operated, a condition that may be true, that.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the condition (only in the first state) where the setting relating to the effect mode of the effect means can be performed by the operation of the first operation means and the effect by the operation of the second operation means. Unlike the conditions (both the first state and the second state) in which the setting relating to the production mode of the means can be performed, the first operating means have more severe setting conditions than the second operating means. For this reason, a player who can operate the first operating means may be able to concentrate on the game without being distracted by the operation of the first operating means. Also, the first and second operation means can be used properly, and convenience may be improved. In addition, even when any one of the operation means cannot be used due to a failure or the like, the setting can be performed by the other operation means, and a game machine having a feature in processing by a plurality of operation means can be provided. .

  And a display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display (for example, the universal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the decorative symbol display device). The state may include a state including at least that the symbol variation display is not being executed, and the second state may include a state including at least that the symbol variation display is being performed.

  With such a configuration, the player can concentrate on the game without being distracted by the operation of the first operation means during the execution of the symbol variation display, so that the profits to be given can be ensured. May be earned.

  A game board (eg, game board 200) provided with at least a game area (eg, game area 124), wherein the first operating means is provided at least in front of the game area. The second operating means may be provided at least behind the game area. The second position may be a position where the player is at least more difficult to operate than the first position. The second position may be a position where the player cannot operate (for example, inside a door that can be locked and unlocked).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second operation means from being easily operated. For example, only a limited number of persons such as a game shop clerk are allowed to operate the second operation means. Can do.

  Further, the first control means can execute at least a second process (for example, a process for detecting operation acceptance of an operation means such as a chance button, a process for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500, etc.). It may be a thing. A second control unit (for example, the main control unit 300), wherein the first control unit is capable of executing at least control according to a command from the second control unit. Also good.

  With such a configuration, even when a plurality of control units are configured, the present invention can be easily applied and versatility can be provided.

  In addition, a success / failure determination means (for example, a general drawing related lottery process, a special figure 2 related lottery process, and a special figure 1 related lottery process) capable of at least executing a determination of whether or not to win (a determination of whether or not a normal figure is true or not) The second control means may include at least the success / failure determination means. The first control means may be capable of at least controlling the rendering means in response to the command.

  Also, a plurality of control boards are provided, and at least one of the plurality of control boards is a first control board (for example, the first sub board 160), and at least one of the plurality of control boards. Is a second control board (for example, main board 156), and the first control means includes at least the first control board, and the second control means includes: It may be configured to include at least the second control board.

  (1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first operation means (for example, a first output setting switch 190) that can be operated at least and a second operation means (for example, a second output setting) that can be operated at least. Switch 194) and sound output means (for example, sound control circuit 431, speaker 120) capable of outputting at least sound, wherein the first operation means is configured to control the sound volume (volume). , Sound pressure) is adjustable at least, and the second operating means is at least capable of adjusting the sound volume, and the first operating means is the first operating means. It is a game stand characterized by being different from the second operating means.

  According to such a game machine, the volume of the sound can be adjusted by different first and second operation means, so the usage applications of the first and second operation means can be divided, and the convenience is improved. There are cases where it can be increased. In addition, even when one of the operation means cannot be used due to a failure or the like, the volume can be adjusted by the other operation means, and a game table having a feature in the operation means can be provided.

  (2) Moreover, the gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first operating means cannot be operated by a player, and the second operating means is The game stand may be characterized in that it can be operated at least by the player.

  (3) Moreover, the gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), wherein the first operation means adjusts the volume of the sound to a first volume. The second operation means is at least capable of adjusting the volume of the sound to a second volume, and the sound output means has the first volume and The game machine is characterized in that the sound is output at the first volume when the second volume is different.

  (4) A gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), comprising light emitting means capable of emitting at least light, One operating means is at least capable of adjusting the brightness of the light, and the second operating means is at least capable of adjusting the brightness of the light. It is a game table to play.

  (5) Moreover, the gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, and is a first that can detect at least the operation of the first operating means. Detecting means and second detecting means capable of detecting at least an operation of the second operating means, wherein the first detecting means at least operates the first operating means in the main process. The game machine is characterized in that the second detection means detects at least an operation of the second operation means in an interrupt process.

  (6) A gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), comprising display means for visually recognizing the volume adjustment value, The first operating means includes at least the display means, and the second operating means does not include the display means.

  (7) A gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, and includes a volume adjustment mode capable of adjusting the volume, The adjustment mode is a mode in which the volume adjusted by the first operation means during the volume adjustment mode cannot be confirmed during the volume adjustment mode, and the volume adjustment mode is set during the volume adjustment mode. The game machine is characterized in that the volume adjusted by the second operation means can be confirmed during the volume adjustment mode.

  (8) Moreover, the gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7), and includes a power saving mode in which the volume cannot be adjusted. It is a game stand characterized by.

  (9) Moreover, the gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the above (4) to (8), wherein the volume of the sound is adjustable in a first stage. The light intensity can be adjusted in a second stage, and the first stage is different from the second stage.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above. For example, a plurality of liquid crystal display devices may be provided. In this case, adjustment by the first operation means is performed. The first liquid crystal display device may be used, and the adjustment by the second operation means may be performed using the second liquid crystal display device.

  Further, the player set value may be adjustable only during the installation value adjustment mode, or may be adjustable in other states.

[20th embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 359 to 399, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. However, it explains in detail. Note that the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 and the contents of various processes in the present embodiment are substantially the same as those in the sixteenth embodiment, and therefore, different configurations from the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be illustrated and described below. The same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the sixteenth embodiment unless otherwise specified, and illustrations and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Control unit>
The circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. In the present embodiment, the VRAM 436 and the VDP 434 in the first sub control unit 400 constitute a liquid crystal control unit 435, and the effect movable body 224 is provided in the basic circuit 502 of the second sub control unit 500. This is different from the sixteenth embodiment in that a drive circuit 550 for controlling the lamp 552 is connected.

<Various controls by sub-control unit, liquid crystal control unit, and production control unit>
Next, various controls by the sub control unit (first sub control unit) 400, the liquid crystal control unit 435, and the effect control unit (second sub control unit) 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 360 shows a part of the circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The display device (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) according to the present embodiment is controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 435 that receives a command (command) from the sub-control unit 400. In addition, the first movable body (for example, the rendering movable body 224) among the plurality of movable bodies according to the present embodiment is controlled by the rendering control section 500 that receives a command (command) from the sub-control section 400. .

  On the other hand, the lamp according to the present embodiment (for example, the effect movable body lamp 552), the sound output device (for example, the speaker 120), and the second movable body (for example, the shielding device 246) among the plurality of movable bodies. Is controlled by the sub-control unit 400 without going through the liquid crystal control unit 435 or the effect control unit 500.

  The first sub-board 160 described above is configured only by the first control unit (for example, the sub-control unit (first sub-control unit) 400), and a substrate separate from the first sub-board 160 is the first You may comprise only two control parts (for example, liquid crystal control part 435). Further, the first sub-board 160 may be composed of a plurality of control units (for example, the sub-control unit (first sub-control unit) 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 435). In addition, one, a plurality, or all of the sub-control unit (first sub-control unit) 400, the liquid crystal control unit 435, and the effect control unit (second sub-control unit) 500 are configured by a plurality of substrates. May be.

<"Operation" according to the present invention>
Next, the “operation” according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 361 (a) is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 361 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a movable body.

  The “operation” according to the present invention includes at least an operation of moving the movable body, an operation of changing the mode of light output using the light output means, an operation of changing the mode of sound output using the sound output means, An operation of changing the display mode using the display means is included. The game machine according to the present invention may include at least one, a plurality, or all of these operations.

<"Movable body" and "Movement of movable body">
As an example of the movable body, for example, the shielding device 246, the rendering movable body 224, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. As shown in b), the objects 564 and 566 disposed on the game board 200, the objects 562 disposed on the front frame door 106, a liquid crystal display device configured to be movable (not illustrated), a reel (not illustrated), An example of the operation of moving the movable body is a chance button 136 configured to be movable up and down by the driving means, and the movable body is continuously (or intermittently) moved from the first position to the second position. , Linear movement (or rotational movement), opening or closing of the movable body, movement of the movable body (or stop), movement of the movable body between the first position and the second position Etc. It is.

<"Light output means" and "Operation of light output means">
Further, as an example of the light output means, for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 shown in FIG. 361 (a), and various lamps 418 shown in FIG. , Production movable body lamp 552, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542, LED, etc., and the operation of changing the light mode from the first mode to the second mode is the lighting mode Examples include changing (lighting, turning off, blinking, etc.), changing the emission color, changing the blinking cycle, changing the brightness, and the like.

<"Sound output means" and "Operation of sound output means">
Moreover, as an example of the sound output means, for example, the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 359 and the like can be cited. As an operation for changing the sound mode from the first mode to the second mode, for example, changing the sound mode (Sound output, mute, etc.), sound volume change, fade-in, fade-out, etc.

<"Display means" and "Operation of display means">
Examples of the display means include, for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a common figure display device 210, a decorative symbol display device 208, and the like shown in FIG. Examples of the operation for changing the mode from the first mode to the second mode include, for example, symbol change display / stop display, start / stop of various effects, and switching of effect modes (for example, switching from normal effects to special effects). And enlargement (or reduction) of the display area.

<Triggers for starting and ending operations>
Next, the start trigger and end trigger of the “operation” according to the present invention will be described. As a condition (start opportunity) for starting the “motion” according to the present invention (or a condition (end trigger) for ending the “action”), for example, a special figure (or ordinary figure) variable game is started (or finished). If you start a big hit game (or end), start (or end) BB game or RB game, start (or end) return operation, start (or end) retry operation, When the timing of the specified time starts (or ends), when the game machine is turned on, when the power to the game machine is cut off (when power is cut off), or when the power to the game machine is restored ( When power is restored), when an operation by the operating means is detected, when a predetermined production starts (or ends), when a demonstration screen starts (or ends), or when an initial operation starts (or ends) Etc. It is.

  It should be noted that the corresponding operation may be executed only when these start triggers or end triggers arrive, or the corresponding actions may be executed whenever these start triggers or end triggers arrive, You may perform at least the operation | movement applicable when the start opportunity and the end opportunity come.

  In addition, the execution period of the “motion” refers to the time from the start timing to the end timing of these “motion”. For example, when the special figure variable game is started, the special figure variable game is ended. When the case is an end opportunity, the time from the start to the end of the special figure variable game is the “action” execution period. Also, for example, when the start of a special figure variable game is the start opportunity, and when the start of the special figure variable game next to the change is the end opportunity, the next special figure variable game is started from the start of the special figure variable game. The time until the start of is the “operation” execution period.

  Also, it has at least a first action (for example, a special figure variable game) and a second action (for example, a movement of a movable body), and has a start opportunity (for example, the start of a special figure variable game). The first start opportunity, the first operation end opportunity (for example, the end of the special figure variable game) is the first end opportunity, the second operation start opportunity (for example, the operation start of the movable body) is the second When the start timing, the end timing of the second operation (for example, the completion of the operation of the movable body) is set as the second end timing, the end timing of the first operation (end of the special figure variable game) and the second The operation start trigger (operation start of the movable body) may be the same. In this case, the time from the end of the special figure variable game (start of the operation of the movable body) to the completion of the operation of the movable body may be the execution period of the first operation.

<Pattern of execution time of multiple “actions”>
Next, with reference to FIG. 362, an execution time pattern when a plurality of “operations” according to the present invention are executed will be described. FIG. 362 is a time chart showing a pattern of execution times of the first operation and the second operation. “First operation”, “second operation”, and “third operation” in FIG. 362 indicate any one of the plurality of “operations” described above.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 362 (a), after the first operation is started on the condition that the start timing of the first operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T1, the second timing is indicated at the timing indicated by the symbol T2. The second operation is started on the condition that the start timing of the operation has arrived, and the first operation is ended on the condition that the end timing of the first operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the reference symbol T3. The second operation is terminated on the condition that the end timing of the second operation has arrived at the timing indicated by. Therefore, the execution period of the first operation is a period from the timing indicated by the symbol T1 to the timing indicated by the symbol T3, and the execution period of the second operation is from the timing indicated by the symbol T2 to the timing indicated by the symbol T4. A period in which the first and second operations are simultaneously performed (a period in which the operations overlap) is a period from the timing indicated by the symbol T2 to the timing indicated by the symbol T3.

  In the example shown in FIG. 362 (b), after the second operation is started on the condition that the start timing of the second operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T1, the first operation is performed at the timing indicated by the symbol T2. The first operation is started on the condition that the start timing has arrived, and the second operation is ended on the condition that the end timing of the second operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T3, and then indicated by the symbol T4. The first operation is terminated on the condition that the end timing of the first operation has arrived at the timing. Therefore, the execution period of the first operation is a period from the timing indicated by reference sign T2 to the timing indicated by reference sign T4, and the execution period of the second action is from the timing indicated by reference sign T1 to the timing indicated by reference sign T3. A period in which the first and second operations are simultaneously performed (a period in which the operations overlap) is a period from the timing indicated by the symbol T2 to the timing indicated by the symbol T3.

  In the example shown in FIG. 362 (c), after the first operation is started on the condition that the start timing of the first operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T1, the second operation is performed at the timing indicated by the symbol T2. The second operation is started on the condition that the start timing has arrived, and the second operation is ended on the condition that the end timing of the second operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T3, and then indicated by the symbol T4. The first operation is terminated on the condition that the end timing of the first operation has arrived at the timing. Therefore, the execution period of the first operation is a period from the timing indicated by the symbol T1 to the timing indicated by the symbol T4, and the execution period of the second operation is from the timing indicated by the symbol T2 to the timing indicated by the symbol T3. The period in which the first and second operations are executed simultaneously (period in which the operations overlap) is the period from the timing indicated by the symbol T2 to the timing indicated by the symbol T3 (the entire execution period of the second operation) It is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 362 (d), after the second operation is started on the condition that the start timing of the second operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T1, the first operation is performed at the timing indicated by the symbol T2. The first operation is started on the condition that the start timing has arrived, and the first operation is ended on the condition that the end timing of the first operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T3, and then indicated by the symbol T4. The second operation is completed on the condition that the end timing of the second operation has arrived at the timing. Therefore, the execution period of the first operation is a period from the timing indicated by reference sign T2 to the timing indicated by reference sign T3, and the execution period of the second operation is from the timing indicated by reference sign T1 to the timing indicated by reference sign T4. The period during which the first and second operations are executed simultaneously (period in which the operations overlap) is the period from the timing indicated by the symbol T2 to the timing indicated by the symbol T3 (all execution periods of the first operation) It is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 362 (e), after the first operation is started on the condition that the start timing of the first operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T1, the second operation is performed at the timing indicated by the symbol T2. The second operation is started on the condition that the start timing has arrived, and the first operation is ended on the condition that the end timing of the first operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T3, and then indicated by the symbol T4. The third operation starts on the condition that the timing for starting the third operation has arrived at the timing, and the second operation ends on the condition that the timing for the end of the second operation has arrived at the timing indicated by reference numeral T5 After that, the third operation is terminated on condition that the end timing of the third operation has arrived at the timing indicated by reference numeral T6. Therefore, the execution period of the first operation is a period from the timing indicated by reference numeral T1 to the timing indicated by reference numeral T3, and the execution period of the second operation is from the timing indicated by reference numeral T2 to the timing indicated by reference numeral T5. A period in which the first and second operations are simultaneously performed (a period in which the operations overlap) is a period from the timing indicated by the symbol T2 to the timing indicated by the symbol T3. The execution period of the third operation is a period from the timing indicated by reference numeral T4 to the timing indicated by reference numeral T6, and the period during which the second and third operations are simultaneously executed (period in which the operations overlap) This is a period from the timing indicated by reference numeral T4 to the timing indicated by reference numeral T5.

  In addition, each of the total operation period from the timing indicated by reference numeral T1 and the timing indicated by reference numeral T4 in FIGS. 10A to 10D, and the timing indicated by reference numeral T1 and reference numeral T6 in FIG. A plurality or all of the total operation period up to the timing may be the same, or may have a time relationship as illustrated in FIGS. In addition, for example, the timing indicated by the symbol T4 in FIGS. 10A and 10B may be the same as the timing indicated by the same symbol T4 in FIGS. The timing indicated by the reference symbol T4 in FIGS. 4A and 4B may be the same as the timing indicated by the same reference symbol T4 in FIG.

<Initial operation>
Next, an initial operation that is an example of the “operation” according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 363 is a time chart illustrating an example of the initial operation of the movable body.

  The example shown in FIG. 363 (a) shows an initial operation of a movable body that can move between a first position (initial position) and a second position (position different from the initial position). In this example, the moving body is moved from the first position to the second position on the condition that the start timing of the initial operation has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T1, and then from the second position to the first position. Has been moved to.

  The example shown in FIG. 363 (b) shows the initial operation of the first and second movable bodies that can move between the first position (initial position) and the second position (position different from the initial position). It is shown. In this example, after the first movable body is moved from the first position to the second position on the condition that the start timing of the initial operation of the first movable body has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T1, Synchronized with the operation of the first movable body on the condition that the start timing of the initial operation of the second movable body has arrived at the timing indicated by reference numeral T1 while being moved from the second position to the first position Thus, after the second movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, the second movable body is moved from the second position to the first position. In this example, the operations of the first movable body and the second movable body are completely synchronized, but the operation start timing (or end timing) may be different.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 363 (c), the first movable body is moved from the first position to the first position on the condition that the start timing of the initial operation of the first movable body has arrived at the timing indicated by reference numeral T1. After moving to the second position, the second position is moved from the second position to the first position, and on the condition that the start timing of the initial operation of the second movable body has arrived at the timing indicated by reference numeral T3 thereafter. The movable body is moved from the first position to the second position and then moved from the second position to the first position. In this example, the first movable body may always be moved from the second position to the first position, and then the initial operation of the second movable body may be started. You may comprise so that the initial operation | movement of a 2nd movable body may be started before moving a body from a 2nd position to a 1st position.

  In this example, the initial operation of the movable body has been described. However, as described above, the “operation” according to the present invention is not limited to the initial operation, and other operations (such as a return operation described later). There may be. In addition, the “initial operation” according to the present invention is not limited to the initial operation of the movable body, and includes an initial operation by the light output unit, an initial operation by the sound output unit, an initial operation by the display unit, and the like.

  Further, the movement mode of the first and second movable bodies in the initial operation is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIGS. 363 (d) (1), the first movable body CB1 is moved in the first direction (for example, , The second movable body CB2 may be moved in the second direction (for example, the horizontal direction). In this case, the first movable body CB1 and the second movable body CB2 are arranged on the same plane as shown in the side views of FIGS. It is good also as a structure which can contact both when the 2nd movable body CB2 moves, and as shown to the side view of the same figure (d) (3), it is 1st movable body Cb1 or 2nd movable body. It is good also as a structure which arrange | positions CB2 on a different plane and does not contact both when the 1st movable body CB1 and the 2nd movable body CB2 move.

  Further, the shape of the movable body is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in the front view of FIGS. 363 (e) and (1) and the side view of FIGS. On the other hand, the second movable body CB4 has a U-shape when viewed from the side, and a part of the first movable body CB3 can be accommodated in the inner space of the second movable body CB4. Good. In addition, when the second movable body CB4 is replaced with a fixedly arranged sensor, the first movable body CB3 is replaced with a first position (a position that can be detected by the sensor) and a second position (by the sensor). It may be configured to be movable in the vertical direction (or horizontal direction) between the position and the undetectable position.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 363 (f), after the first movable body CB5 and the second movable body CB6 are simultaneously moved from the first position to the second position, only the second movable body CB6 is moved. You may move from the second position to the third position.

<Return operation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 364, a return operation that is an example of the “operation” according to the present invention will be described. Note that FIG. 364 (a) is a time chart showing an example of the normal operation of the movable body, and FIG. 364 (b) is a time chart showing an example of the return operation of the movable body.

  The first movable body CB1 is between the first position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 364 (a) and (1) and the second position (closed position) shown in FIGS. 364 (a) and (4). The second movable body CB2 is configured to be movable, and includes a third position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 364 (a) (1) and (7) and a fourth position shown in FIGS. 364 (a) and (4). It is comprised so that movement between these positions (closed position) is possible.

  In the normal operation shown in FIG. 364 (a), the first movable body CB1 is moved from the first position (initial position) to the first position during the period shown in FIGS. The second movable body CB2 is moved to the second position (closed position) and the second movable body CB2 is moved from the third position (initial position) to the fourth position (closed position). The two movable bodies CB2 are brought into contact with each other, and the first movable body CB1 and the second movable body CB2 are changed from the open state to the closed state.

  In the following period (a) (4) to period (a) (7), the first movable body CB1 is moved from the second position (closed position) to the first position (initial position). At the same time, by moving the second movable body CB2 from the fourth position (closed position) to the third position (initial position), the first movable body CB1 and the second movable body CB2 are separated, One movable body CB1 and second movable body CB2 are changed from the closed state to the open state.

  In the return operation shown in FIG. 364 (b), when the normal operation shown in FIG. 364 (a) cannot be performed (for example, some abnormality occurs in the first movable body CB1, the first movable body CB1 The first movable body CB1 and the second movable body CB2 are temporarily returned to the initial position when the displacement of the second movable body CB2 occurs). This is an operation to re-synchronize.

  In this return operation, on condition that the start timing of the return operation has arrived, the first movable body CB1 is moved in the first period shown in FIGS. After moving to the second position (closed position), it is moved to the first position (initial position) in the second period shown in the following (b) (3) to (b) (6). On the other hand, the second movable body CB2 is moved to the fourth position (a period shorter than the first period) shown in (b) (1) to (b) (2) in FIG. After moving to (closed position), the third position (initial position) in the fourth period (same period as the second period) shown in FIGS. ).

<Example of operation of movable body>
Next, an example of the operation of the movable body will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 365 is a time chart showing an example of the operation of the movable body.

  In the example shown in FIG. 365 (a), the movable body is in the second position (for example, a mechanical end, a position that can be detected by a sensor, etc.), and the movable body operates at the timing indicated by T1 (described above). The movable body is moved from the second position to the first position (for example, a position that can be detected by a mechanical end, a sensor, etc.) on the condition that the start timing of the initial operation and return operation of the I am letting. In the example shown in FIG. 365 (b), the movable body is located at a midway position between the second position and the first position (for example, a position that cannot be detected by the position sensor). The movable body is moved to the first position on the condition that the start timing of the operation of the movable body has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T2.

  In the example shown in FIG. 365 (c), the movable body is moved to the first position on the condition that the movable body starts moving at the timing indicated by reference numeral T3 while the movable body is in the middle position. After moving to the second position, it is moved to the first position. In the example shown in FIG. 365 (d), the movable body is placed on the condition that the movable body starts moving at the timing indicated by reference numeral T4 while the movable body is in the middle position. After moving to the second position, moving to the first position, stopping at the middle position for a predetermined time, then moving again to the second position, then moving to the first position Yes. In this example, when the movable body cannot be moved to the first position, the movable body is once moved toward the second position and then moved again toward the first position. (Retry operation) may be repeatedly executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 365 (e), when the first and second movable bodies are located at midway positions, the start timing of the operations of the first and second movable bodies at the timing indicated by reference numeral T5. The first and second movable bodies are simultaneously moved to the first position on the condition that has arrived. In the example shown in FIG. 365 (f), the start timing of the operation of the first movable body has arrived at the timing indicated by reference numeral T6 in a state where the first and second movable bodies are located at intermediate positions. After moving the first movable body to the first position on the condition, the second movable body on the condition that the start timing of the operation of the second movable body has arrived at the timing indicated by reference numeral T7 Is moved to the first position. In this example, the second movable body may be moved to the first position on the condition that the first movable body at the timing indicated by reference numeral T7 has moved to the first position.

  In the example shown in FIG. 365 (g), it is a condition that the start timing of the operation of the first movable body has arrived at the timing indicated by reference numeral T8 in a state where the first movable body is located in the middle position. Then, after the first movable body is moved to the second position, the first movable body is moved to the first position, and then the second movable body is located at the midway position at the timing indicated by T9. The second movable body is moved to the first position on the condition that the start timing of the operation of the second movable body has arrived.

<Example of operation of movable body and light output means>
Next, an example of the operation of the movable body and the light output means will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 366 is a time chart showing an example of the operation of the movable body and the light output means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 366 (a), on the condition that the start timing of the operation of the light output means (for example, LED) has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T1 (for example, the trigger for starting the performance has arrived). The light output means is changed from the first mode (for example, lighting) to the second mode (for example, blinking), and the start timing of the operation of the movable body has arrived (for example, the start timing of the production has arrived) The movable body is moved from the first position to the second position and stopped at the second position. In addition, the movable body is moved from the second position to the first position on the condition that the start timing of the movement of the movable body has arrived at the timing indicated by T2 (for example, a predetermined time before the end of the performance execution). The light is moved to the position, stopped at the first position, and the light output means operation end timing has arrived at the timing indicated by T3 (for example, the performance execution end timing has arrived). The output means is changed from the second mode (for example, blinking) to the first mode (for example, lighting).

  In the example shown in FIG. 366 (b), the light output means is provided on the condition that the operation start timing of the light output means has arrived at the timing indicated by reference numeral T4 (for example, the execution start timing of the effect has arrived). The condition is changed from one mode (for example, extinguished) to the second mode (for example, lit) and the start timing of the operation of the movable body (for example, the timing for starting the execution of the performance has arrived) The movable body is periodically reciprocated between the first position and the second position.

  Further, the light output means is set to the second mode (for example, lighting) on the condition that the end timing of the operation of the light output means has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T5 (for example, the trigger for ending the execution of the effect has arrived). To the first mode (for example, extinguishes), and the movable body is changed to the first on the condition that the start timing of the operation of the movable body has arrived (for example, the execution end timing of the production has arrived). It is stopped at the position.

  The timing of changing the mode of the light output means is not limited to this example. For example, when the movable body is located at the first position, the mode of the light output means is the first mode, and the movable body Is in the second position, the mode of the light output means is changed to the second mode, or the mode of the light output means is the first mode during the movement of the movable body, and the movable body During the stop, the mode of the light output means may be changed to synchronize with the position and operation of the movable body, such as changing the mode of the light output means to the second mode.

  In addition, the start trigger (or end trigger) of the operation of the light output means may be the same as or different from the start trigger (or end trigger) of the operation of the movable body. Also, if there are multiple triggers (or triggers) for the operation of the light output means and triggers (or triggers for termination) of the movable body, one, plural, or all of the triggers are matched. (For example, in FIG. 366 (a), the start timing of the operation of the movable body indicated by the symbol T1, the start timing of the operation of the light output means indicated by the symbol T1, the movable timing indicated by the symbol T2). One, plural, or all of the start timing of the body operation, the end timing of the operation of the movable body indicated by the symbol T3, and the end timing of the operation of the light output means indicated by the symbol T3 may be matched, May be different).

<Example of operation of movable body and display means>
Next, an example of the operation of the movable body and the display unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 367 and 368. 367 and 368 are time charts showing an example of the operation of the movable body and the display means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 367 (a), any one of the display means (for example, any one of the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, and the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing indicated by T1. The display means is changed to the first mode (for example, stop display) and the second mode (for example, stop display) on the condition that the timing for starting the movement of () has arrived (for example, the timing for starting the execution of symbol variation has arrived). Change display) and the movable body is moved from the first position to the second on the condition that the start timing of the movement of the movable body has arrived (for example, the start timing of the execution of symbol fluctuation has arrived). It is moved to the position of and is stopped at the second position.

  In addition, the display means is set to the second mode (for example, fluctuation display) on the condition that the end timing of the operation of the display means has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T2 (for example, the timing to end the execution of symbol fluctuation has arrived). To the first mode (for example, stop display), and the movable body is moved to the second condition on the condition that the start timing of the movement of the movable body has arrived (for example, the timing to end the execution of symbol variation has arrived). The first position is moved from the first position and stopped at the first position.

  In the example shown in FIG. 367 (b), the display means is set on the condition that the start timing of the operation of the display means has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T3 (for example, the start timing of execution of symbol variation has arrived). Change from the mode (for example, stop display) to the second mode (for example, change display), and the start of the movement of the movable body (for example, the start of the execution of symbol change) As a condition, the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, then moved to the first position, and stopped at the first position. Thereafter, each time the start of the operation of the display means arrives, the display means is changed from the first mode (for example, stop display) to the second mode (for example, variable display) and the operation of the movable body is started. Each time an opportunity arrives, the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, then moved to the first position, and stopped at the first position.

  FIG. 367 (b) shows an example in which the change in the operation of the movable body and the change in the mode of the display means are synchronized. However, a part of the change in the operation of the movable body and the change in the mode of the display means are shown. Some of them may be made different without being synchronized. For example, in the third operation of the movable body shown in FIG. 5B, the movable body may be stopped at the first position without moving from the first position to the second position, or moved to the second position. You may move toward the first position before doing.

  In addition, the start trigger (or end trigger) of the operation of the display unit may be the same as the start trigger (or end trigger) of the operation of the movable body, or may be different. In addition, when there are multiple start triggers (or end triggers) for the display means and multiple start triggers (or end triggers) for the movable body, one, multiple, or all of the multiple triggers are matched. (For example, in FIG. 367 (a), the start timing of the operation of the movable body indicated by reference numeral T1, the start timing of the operation of the display means indicated by reference numeral T1, or the start time of the movable body indicated by reference numeral T2). One, a plurality, or all of the start timing of the operation and the end timing of the operation of the display unit indicated by the symbol T2 may be made to coincide with each other).

  In the example shown in FIG. 368, the display means is set to the second mode (on the condition that the operation end timing of the display means has arrived at the timing indicated by the symbol T1 (for example, the execution end timing of symbol variation has arrived). For example, it is changed from the change display) to the first mode (for example, stop display) and the start timing of the operation of the first movable body has arrived (for example, the execution end timing of the pattern change has arrived). As a condition, the first movable body is moved from the second position to the first position and stopped at the first position.

  Further, at the timing indicated by T2, the display stage is set to the first mode (for example, stop display) on the condition that the start timing of the operation of the display means has arrived (for example, the timing to start executing the symbol variation has arrived). ) To the second mode (for example, change display), and on the condition that the start timing for the movement of the second movable body has arrived (for example, the start timing for the execution of symbol change has arrived) The second movable body is moved from the second position to the first position and stopped at the first position.

  In addition, at the timing indicated by the symbol T3, the third movable body is operated on the condition that the start timing of the operation of the third movable body has arrived (for example, the time t1 has elapsed since the start of the latest symbol variation stop display). After moving the body from the first position to the second position at the first speed and stopping at the second position, the time t2 has elapsed since the start of the operation of the third movable body. The second position is moved from the second position to the first position at a second speed slower than the first speed, and is stopped at the first position.

  In addition, at the timing indicated by the symbol T4, the third movable body is operated on the condition that the start timing of the operation of the third movable body has arrived (for example, the time t3 has elapsed since the start of the latest symbol fluctuation display). After moving the body from the first position to the second position at the first speed and stopping at the second position, the time t4 has elapsed since the start of the operation of the third movable body. The second position is moved from the second position to the first position at a second speed slower than the first speed, and is stopped at the first position.

  In this example, the third movable body may be configured to always perform the return operation. For example, the display means is in the first mode (stop) and the third movable body is in the initial position. When the display means is in the second mode (variation) and the third movable body is not positioned at the initial position, the return operation may be performed. .

<Example of operation of movable body and light output means during return operation>
Next, an example of the operation of the movable body and the light output means during the return operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 369 is a time chart showing an example of the operation of the movable body and the light output means during the return operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 369 (a), during the execution of the return operation for moving the movable body from the second position to the first position (initial position), the execution start timing of the effect (predetermined in advance) at the timing indicated by T1. The condition of the light output means (for example, LED) is changed from the first mode (for example, lighting) to the second mode (for example, blinking) on the condition that the execution start timing of the production has arrived. . In addition, the movable body continues the returning operation of the movable body regardless of the trigger for starting the performance, and the movable body is rendered on the condition that it is detected that the movable body has moved to the first position at the timing indicated by T2. The operation corresponding to (the operation shown in FIG. 366 (a) above) is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 369 (b), the detection of the first position of the movable body (the movable body is the first one at the timing indicated by the reference T4 different from the “predetermined execution start timing of the effect” indicated by the reference T3). The condition of the light output means is changed from the first mode (for example, lighting) to the second mode (for example, blinking) and is movable on the condition that the return operation for moving to the position (initial position) is completed) The body has started the operation corresponding to the effect (the operation shown in FIG. 366 (a) above).

  In the example shown in FIG. 369 (c), even when the first position of the movable body is detected at the timing indicated by T6 different from the “predetermined execution start timing of the production indicated by T5” (the movable body is Even when the return operation to move to the first position (initial position) is completed, the operation of the light output means and the movable body is not started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 369 (d), after the movement of the movable body is temporarily disabled during execution of the return operation for moving the movable body from the second position to the first position (initial position), Detection of the first position of the movable body (return operation to move the movable body to the first position (initial position) at a timing indicated by reference numeral T8 different from the “predetermined execution start timing of the predetermined effect” indicated by reference numeral T7 On the condition that the light output means is changed from the first mode (for example, lighting) to the second mode (for example, blinking), and the movable body operates in response to the production (above) The operation shown in FIG. 366 (a) is started. In this example, the production time shown in FIGS. 369 (a) and (b) is reduced by reducing the production time by the movable body and the light output means for the period during which the movement of the movable body is temporarily disabled. The production time is adjusted by making it coincide with the end of.

<Relationship between motion data and motion>
Next, the relationship between operation data and operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 370 and 371. 370 and 371 are time charts showing an example of the relationship between the operation data and the operation.

  “Operation data” shown in the figure is data (control information) for controlling the operation. For example, data for controlling the operation of the movable body and data for controlling the operation of the light output means. This corresponds to data for controlling the operation of the sound output means, data for controlling the operation of the display means, and the like.

  The liquid crystal control unit 435 stores, for example, operation data for controlling the display device 208 in advance in a storage unit (for example, ROM), and reads out the operation data from the storage unit or based on the read operation data. The display device 208 is configured to perform various operations by executing a process of outputting the received command to the display device 208 or the like. In addition, the effect control unit 500 stores, for example, operation data for controlling the first movable body 224 in advance in a storage unit (for example, ROM), and reads out the operation data from the storage unit, The first movable body 224 is configured to perform various operations by executing a process for outputting a command based on the operation data to the first movable body 224.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 400 stores, for example, operation data for controlling the lamp 552, the sound output device 120, and the second movable body 246 in advance in a storage unit (for example, ROM). By executing processing to read from the storage means, processing to output a command based on the read operation data to the lamp 552, the sound output device 120, the second movable body 246, and the like, the lamp 552, the sound output device 120, the first output. The second movable body 246 is configured to perform various operations.

  In the example shown in FIG. 370 (a), the control unit of the gaming table executes in parallel the process of reading the operation data from the storage unit and the process of outputting a command based on the read operation data to the control target. The actual operation corresponding to the operation data is executed at almost the same timing as the execution of various processes. For example, the operation A-1 corresponding to the operation data A-1 is executed at almost the same timing as the various processes for the operation data A-1, and the same applies thereafter.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 370 (b), in addition to the processing shown in FIG. 370 (a), when the content of the operation data is changed, the next operation data is pre-read from the storage means. Yes. In this example, when the operation data is changed from the operation data A to the operation data B, the first operation data B-1 of the next operation data B is pre-read from the storage means. Further, in this example, the operation corresponding to the operation data B-2 is executed after the operation corresponding to the operation data A-3 without executing the operation corresponding to the operation data B-1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 371 (a), operation data A (operation data A-1 to A-3) and operation data B (operation data B-1 to B-3) are stored in a storage means (for example, ROM). Is stored, and the operation data A is managed by the variable i, and the operation data B is managed by the variable j.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the operation data A-1 is referred to based on the variable i = 0, the operation corresponding to the operation data A-1 is executed, and then one variable i is added. The operation data A-2 is referred to based on the variable i = 1, the operation corresponding to the operation data A-2 is executed, one variable i is added, and the operation data A based on the variable i = 2 after the addition is added. -3, the operation corresponding to the operation data A-3 is executed.

  Further, when referring to the operation data A-3 based on the variable i = 2, the operation data B-1 is referred to based on the variable j = 0, but the operation corresponding to the operation data B-1 is not executed. 1 is added to the variable j, the operation data B-2 is referred to based on the variable j = 1 after the addition, and the operation corresponding to the operation data B-2 is executed, and then one variable j is added and added. The operation data B-3 is referred to based on the subsequent variable j = 2, and the operation corresponding to the operation data B-3 is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5C, the operation data A-1 is referred to based on the variable i = 0, and the operation data B-1 is referred to based on the variable j = 0, and the operation data A-1 is referred to. After executing only the operation corresponding to the operation data A-1 of the operation data B-1, one is added to the variable i and the variable j, and the operation data A-2 is obtained based on the variable i = 1 after the addition. In addition to referring to the operation data B-2 based on the variable j = 1, after executing only the operation corresponding to the operation data A-2 of the operation data A-2 and the operation data B-2, the variable i , One variable j is added, the operation data A-3 is referred to based on the variable i = 2 after the addition, and the operation data B-3 is referred to based on the variable j = 2. And only the operation corresponding to the operation data A-3 of the operation data B-3 It is on the line.

  Subsequently, the motion data A-1 is referred to based on the variable i = 0, and the motion data B-1 is referred to based on the variable j = 0, so that the motion data A-1 and the motion data B-1 After executing only the operation corresponding to the operation data B-1, one of the variables i and j is added, and the operation data A-2 is referred to based on the variable i = 1 after the addition, and the variable j = The operation data B-2 is referred to based on 1 and only the operation corresponding to the operation data B-2 of the operation data A-2 and the operation data B-2 is executed.

<Example of multiple operations by display means>
Next, an example of a plurality of operations by the display unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 372 is a time chart showing an example of a plurality of operations by the display means.

  In this example, a plurality of operations (effects) can be executed by the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). One of the plurality of effects is a first effect composed of effect A (effect A1 + effect A2) and effect B (effect B1 + effect B2), and one of the effects is an effect C. This is a second effect composed of (effect C1 + effect C2) and effect D (effect D1 + effect D2).

  In the example shown in FIG. 372 (a), after the first half of the first effect (effect A1 + effect B1) is executed over the first period, the second half of the first effect (effect A2 + effect B2) is This is a normal performance that is performed over a period of two. In the example shown in FIG. 372 (b), the first half of the second effect (effect C1 + effect D1) is executed over the second period, and then the second half of the second effect (effect C2 + effect D2). Is a normal effect of executing over the third period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 372 (c), when the execution start timing of the second effect arrives during the execution of the first effect, the execution of the first effect is stopped and the second effect is performed. It is configured to run with priority. For example, after execution of the first half of the first production (production A1 + production B1) over the first period and when the execution start timing of the second production arrives, the second half of the first production ( After executing the first half of the second effect (effect C1 + effect D1) over the second period without executing the effect A2 + effect B2), the second half of the second effect (effect C2 + effect D2) is performed. Run over a third period.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 372 (d), when the execution start timing of the second effect arrives during the execution of the first effect, the execution of the first effect is temporarily interrupted. After giving priority to the production, the first production is resumed. For example, after executing the first half of the first production (production A1 + production B1) over the first period, when the execution start timing of the second production arrives, the first production is interrupted, After the first half of the second effect (effect C1 + effect D1) is executed over the second period, the second half of the second effect (effect C2 + effect C2) is executed over the third period. In addition, the second half of the first effect (effect A2 + effect B2) is executed over the fourth period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 372 (e), when the execution start timing of the second effect arrives during the execution of the first effect, the second effect is started. It is configured so that only the first effect is displayed, and the second effect is displayed when the end timing of the first effect arrives. For example, after the first half of the first production (production A1 + production B1) is executed over the first period, the second production starts when the second production execution trigger comes. Only the second half of the first production (production A2 + production B2) is displayed over the second period without displaying the second production, and then the second half of the second production (production C2 + production D2). For a third period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 372 (f), when the execution start timing of the second effect arrives during the execution of the first effect, the second effect is suspended and the end timing of the first effect is reached. It is configured to start the second performance when is arrived. For example, after the first half of the first effect (effect A1 + effect B1) is executed over the first period, when the second effect execution start trigger arrives, the second effect is suspended. The second half of the first effect (effect A2 + effect B2) is executed over the second period, and then the second effect is executed over the third and fourth periods.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 372 (g), when the execution start timing of the second effect arrives during the execution of the first effect, the second effect is not executed. For example, after the first half of the first effect (effect A1 + effect B1) is executed over the first period, when the second effect execution start timing arrives, the second effect is not performed. The second half of the first effect (effect A2 + effect B2) is executed over the second period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 372 (h), when the execution start timing of the second effect arrives during the execution of the first effect, a part of the second effect is executed together with the first effect. It is configured as follows. For example, after the first half of the first production (production A1 + production B1) is executed over the first period, when the second production execution start trigger arrives, the second half of the first production After executing a part (production A2) and a part of the first half of the second production (production D1) over the second period, the second half of the second production (production C2 + production D2) Run over a period of time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 372 (i), when the execution start timing of the second effect arrives during execution of the first effect, the first effect is stopped and the second effect is prepared for execution. After starting, the second effect is displayed at the next effect start timing. For example, after the first half of the first production (production A1 + production B1) is executed over the first period, when the execution start timing of the second production comes, the first production is stopped. After the execution preparation for the second effect is started, the second half of the second effect (effect C2 + effect D2) is executed over the third period at the next effect start timing. In addition, when the execution start timing of the second effect arrives, after the first effect is stopped and the preparation for executing the second effect is started, the first half of the second effect at the next effect start timing (Production C1 + Production D1) may be executed over the third period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 372 (j), when the execution start timing of the second effect arrives during execution of the first effect, the first effect is stopped and the second effect is started. It is configured not to. The opportunity to stop the first effect is not limited to the start of execution of the second effect, for example, it may be triggered by the start of execution of a third effect different from the first and second effects, It may be triggered by the fact that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the first effect.

<Specific Example of Operation / Example 1 of Operation of Movable Body during Prefetching Effect>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, an operation example 1 of the movable body during the pre-reading effect will be described. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing a first operation example of the movable body during the pre-reading effect in time series. Each figure in the subsequent drawings shows only a series of feature parts of a series of effects and symbol variation display, and is not necessarily extracted at the same time interval. Further, the context of various operations shown in the specific example is not limited to this example.

  The state shown in FIG. 373 (a) is a state in which the variable game of FIG. 1 is being executed. In this state, the main control unit 300 displays the variation of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212, and the liquid crystal control unit 435 (received a command from the sub control unit 400) displays the decorative symbol display device. 208 is used to display decorative symbols in a variable manner. In addition, the effect control unit 500 (received a command from the sub control unit 400) stops the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b at the first position (initial position), and performs sub control. The part 400 has set the aspect of LED with which the 1st effect movable body 610a and the 2nd effect movable body 610b are provided to a 1st aspect (light extinction).

  The state shown in FIG. 373 (b) is a state in which the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 variable game is 4 during the special game of the special figure 1. In this state, the main control unit 300 lights up the four first special figure holding lamps 218 to notify that the special figure 1 variable game has a holding number of 4, and the liquid crystal control unit 435 displays the decorative symbols. By displaying four hold icons PI1 to PI4 in the hold display area 208e provided in the display device 208, it is notified that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is four.

  The sub-control unit 400 determines the display mode of the hold icon based on the look-ahead information (result of determination of success / failure) of the special figure 1 variable game received from the main control unit 300, and issues a command regarding the display mode of the hold icon. It transmits to the liquid crystal control part 435. In this example, the look-ahead information of the special figure 1 variable game received from the main control unit 300 indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the first to third holds is lost and the special notice corresponding to the fourth hold. Since the result of determining whether or not the floating game is successful is a big hit, the sub-control unit 400 displays the hold icons PI11 to PI13 corresponding to the first to third hold in normal colors (for example, blue) and displays the fourth hold A command is issued to the liquid crystal control unit 435 so that the hold icon PI14 corresponding to is displayed in a special color (for example, red). In addition, the success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the fourth hold may be lost.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 373 (c) is a state where the variable game of FIG. In this state, the liquid crystal control unit 435 uses the decoration symbol display device 208 to perform a stop display of the decoration symbol (in this example, a combination display of “decoration 3—decoration 4—decoration 1”).

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 373 (d) is a state in which a prefetching effect is started. Here, the pre-reading effect refers to an effect having a different effect mode from the normal effect, for example, an effect in which at least a part of the display (for example, a background image) is different from the normal effect, an effect having a longer effect time than the normal effect ( For example, an effect performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays).

  The sub-control unit 400 determines an effect mode based on the pre-read information (result of determination of success / failure) of the special figure 1 variable game received from the main control unit 300, and issues a command related to the effect mode to the liquid crystal control unit 435 and the effect control unit 500. And control of the lamp, the sound output device, the second movable body, and the like is started according to the production mode. In this example, the pre-read information of the special figure 1 variable game received from the main control unit 300 is a big hit in the result of whether or not the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the fourth hold is a big hit. An instruction is given to the liquid crystal control unit 435 and the effect control unit 500 so as to decide to perform the effect and to execute the prefetch effect.

  The liquid crystal control unit 435 that has received the pre-reading effect command from the sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIGS. 373 (d) to (n), over the period from the start to the end of the special figure 1 variable game, A pre-reading effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the effect control unit 500 that has received the pre-reading effect command from the sub-control unit 400 causes the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b to be the same from the first position shown in FIG. 373 (a). It is moved to the second position shown in FIG. Moreover, the sub control part 400 is changing the aspect of LED of the 1st effect movable body 610a and the 2nd effect movable body 610b from the 1st aspect (light extinction) to the 2nd aspect (lighting).

  Thereafter, until the special figure and decorative symbols shown in FIG. 373 (m) are stopped and displayed, the effect control unit 500 places the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b in the first position and the second position. The sub-control unit 400 maintains the LED mode of the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b in the second mode (lighting) while performing the effect operation of reciprocating between the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b. Let In addition, after the elapse of a predetermined time for the stop display of the special figure and the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 5 (n), the effect control unit 500 displays the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b. , The sub-control unit 400 changes the LED mode of the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b from the second mode (lighting) to the first mode ( The first mode (off) is maintained.

<Specific Example of Operation / Example 2 of Operation of Movable Body during Prefetching Effect>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, an operation example 2 of the movable body during the pre-reading effect will be described. FIG. 374 is a diagram showing an operation example 2 of the movable body in the pre-reading effect in time series. In this example, the operation mode of the movable body during the pre-reading effect is different from the operation example 1 described with reference to FIG.

  Specifically, the effect control unit 500 that has received a prefetch effect command from the sub-control unit 400 converts the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b into the first effect shown in FIG. 374 (a). After being moved from the position to the second position shown in FIG. 4D, it is stopped at the second position until the special figure and decorative symbols shown in FIG. It is moved from the second position to the first position at the timing shown in FIG.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 400 starts the pre-reading effect using the decorative symbol display device 208, and at the same time, changes the LED state of the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b to the first aspect (lights off). ) To the second mode (lighting). Subsequently, the sub-control unit 400 causes the first effect movable body until the effect control unit 500 moves the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b from the second position to the first position. After maintaining the LED mode of 610a and the second effect movable body 610b in the second mode (lighting), the effect control unit 500 changes the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b to the first. Simultaneously with the movement to one position, the LED aspect of the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b is changed from the second aspect (lighted) to the first aspect (lighted off). . Note that only one of the operation of the movable body and the operation of the light output means may be maintained.

<Specific example of operation / Example 3 of operation of movable body during pre-reading effect>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, an operation example 3 of the movable body during the pre-reading effect will be described. FIG. 375 is a diagram showing an operation example 3 of the movable body in the pre-reading effect in time series. In this example, the structure of the movable body and the operation mode of the movable body during the pre-reading effect are different from the operation example 1 described using FIG. 373 and the operation example 2 described using FIG.

  Specifically, the game stand according to the present example includes disk-shaped production movable bodies 612a to 612d that imitate family crests, and the same number as the maximum number of reserved special game (four in this example), Each of the effect movable bodies 612a to 612d is configured to be able to rotate clockwise under the control of the effect control unit 500.

  In this example, the effect control unit 500 starts the prefetch effect at the timing shown in FIG. In the pre-reading effect of this example, the effect movable body (fourth movable body) is triggered by the fact that one special figure 1 variable game is digested at the timing shown in FIG. ) By changing the operation of 612d from the first operation (stop) to the second operation (rotation), the effect movable body (fourth movable body) 612d is rotated clockwise, ) When one special figure 1 variable game is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 2 and the number of reserves decreases from 3 to 2, the action of the production movable body (third movable body) 612c is the first action (stopped) ) To the second operation (rotation), the effect movable body (third movable body) 612c is rotated clockwise.

  In addition, when one special figure 1 variable game is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 6 (h) and the number of reserves is reduced from 2 to 1, the operation of the production movable body (second movable body) 612b is performed. By changing from the first operation (stop) to the second operation (rotation), the effect movable body (second movable body) 612b is rotated clockwise, and then at the timing shown in FIG. Special figure 1 When one variable game is consumed and the number of reserves decreases from 1 to 0, the operation of the production movable body (first movable body) 612a is changed from the first movement (stop) to the second movement. By changing the operation (rotation), the effect movable body (first movable body) 612a is rotated clockwise.

  Thereafter, the sub-control unit 400 executes a super reach effect using the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIG. 10 (k), and the effect control unit 500 performs the special drawing and decoration shown in FIG. After the rotation of the effect movable bodies 612a to 612d is continued until the symbol is stopped and displayed, the rotation of the effect movable bodies 612a to 612d is stopped as shown in FIG.

<Specific example of operation / Simultaneous island production>
Next, the island simultaneous production will be described as one specific example of the operation. FIG. 376 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of performance when the start condition of the simultaneous island effect is not satisfied, and FIG. 377 is an example of the flow of effect when the start condition of the simultaneous island effect is satisfied. FIG.

  The example shown in FIG. 376 shows a case where the start condition of the island simultaneous performance is not satisfied during the special game 1 variable game of 5 times. In this example, since the operation start timing of the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b is “start of the island simultaneous effect”, when the start condition of the island simultaneous effect is not satisfied, the effect control is performed. The part 500 does not change the operation of the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b, and the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b are in the first position (initial stage). Position).

  In this example, since the operation start timing of the light output means is also “start of the island simultaneous production”, if the start condition of the island simultaneous production is not satisfied, the sub-control unit 400 performs the first production movable body. The LED mode of the first stage movable body 610a and the second stage movable body 610b is the first mode (for example, extinguished) without changing the LED mode of the second stage movable body 610b and the second stage movable body 610b. It remains.

  On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 377 shows a case where the start condition of the island simultaneous performance is established during the second special figure 1 variable game. In this example, since the operation start timing of the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body 610b is “start of the island simultaneous effect”, the start condition of the island simultaneous effect is satisfied (for example, the game table When the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect control unit 500 performs the effect operation of reciprocating the first effect movable body 610a between the first position and the second position, The effect operation of reciprocating the effect movable body 610b between the first position and the second position is repeated in order. Note that the first position and the second position in the present embodiment may not be positions that can be detected by the sensor. For example, a position moved from the first position for a predetermined time may be set as the second position. However, it may be a limit position (mechanical end) on the mechanism.

  In this example, since the operation start timing of the light output means is also “start of the island simultaneous production”, when the start condition of the island simultaneous production is satisfied, the sub-control unit 400 performs the first production movable body. The mode of the LED of 610a and the second effect movable body 610b is changed from the first mode (for example, extinguished) to the second mode (for example, turned on), and the first effect movable body 610a and the second effect movable body are changed. The LED mode of the body 610b is maintained in the second mode (for example, lighting).

  Further, the sub-control unit 300 reduces the display area used for the decorative symbol variation display when the island simultaneous production start condition is satisfied, moves to the upper left of the front view, and displays the decorative symbol display device 208. Using the center display area, the display corresponding to the island simultaneous production is performed.

<Specific example of operation / initial operation of movable body after power-on>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, an initial operation of the movable body after the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 378 is a diagram showing an example of the initial operation of the movable body after power-on in time series.

  The state shown in FIG. 378 (a) is a state immediately after the game machine is turned on. In this example, since the operation start trigger of the first effect movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b is "a predetermined time has elapsed after power on", when a predetermined time has elapsed after power on, The effect control unit 500 moves the first effect movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b from the first position shown in FIG. 5A to the second position shown in FIG. After the operation, the second position is moved to the first position shown in FIG. In this example, since the operation start trigger of the light output means is not “the predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on”, even when the predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on, the sub-control unit 400 performs the first production. The LED mode of the movable body 610a and the second rendering movable body 610b is not changed from the first mode (for example, extinguishing) to the second mode (for example, lighting). In addition, the operation start trigger of the first effect movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b may be “a predetermined process (for example, initial setting) has been completed after the power is turned on” or the like.

<Specific example of operation / Returning operation of movable body while symbol fluctuation is stopped>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, the returning operation of the movable body while the symbol variation is stopped will be described. FIGS. 379 (a-1) to (f-1) and FIGS. (A-2) to (f-2) show an example of the returning operation of the movable body while the symbol variation is stopped in time series. It is a figure.

  In this example, the operation start timing of the return operation of the movable body is “symbol change stop”. In the example shown in FIGS. 379 (a-1) to (f-1), the effect control unit 500 triggers the first movable body 610a with the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. A return operation is performed to move the first position (initial position) from a position different from the first position (initial position), and after the return operation is completed (the first movable body 610a is moved to the first position). (After having completely moved to (initial position)), the pending floating game is started.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 379 (a-2) to (f-2), the effect control unit 500 is triggered by the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. Is moved from a position different from the first position (initial position) to the first position (initial position). However, before the return operation is completed (first movable body 610a). Before the first move to the first position (initial position) is completed). For this reason, the production control unit 500 continues the return operation even during symbol variation, and completes the return operation at the timing shown in FIG. (E-2) (the first movable body 610a is moved to the first position). Completely moved to (initial position)).

<Specific example of operation / Return operation of movable body based on opening of front frame door>
Next, the return operation of the movable body based on the opening of the front frame door will be described as one specific example of the operation. FIG. 380 is a diagram showing an example of the return operation of the movable body based on the opening of the front frame door in time series.

  In this example, the operation start triggers of the return operation of the movable body are “design variation stop” and “open front frame door 106”. The production control unit 500 takes the first movable body 610a from the position different from the first position (initial position) to the first position (initial position), triggered by the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 380 (b). The return operation to move to is executed, but the return operation is not completed.

  In this example, if the return operation is not completed even if the return operation is triggered multiple times by the symbol fluctuation stop, the return operation of the movable body is possible with the opening of the front frame door 106. In the examples shown in FIGS. (E) to (i), when the front frame door 106 is opened, the first movable body 610a is moved from a position different from the first position (initial position). A return operation for moving to the first position (initial position) is performed.

<Specific Example of Operation / Production Operation 1 of Movable Body During Symbol Variation Display>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, a description will be given of the rendering operation 1 of the movable body during the symbol variation display. FIGS. 381 (a-1) to (k-1) and FIGS. (A-2) to (f-2) are diagrams showing an example of the rendering operation 1 of the movable body during the symbol variation display in time series. is there.

  In this example, the operation start trigger of the movable body effect operation is “symbol change start”, and the operation end trigger of the movable object effect operation is “symbol change stop”. In the example shown in FIG. 381 (a-1) to FIG. 38 (k-1), the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. After moving the movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b from the first position (initial position) to the second position, the end of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 1), the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are moved from the second position to the first position (initial position).

  Further, in this example, the trigger for starting the performance operation of the light output means is “design variation start”, and the trigger for the end of the rendering operation of the light output means is “symbol variation stop”. In the example shown in FIGS. 381 (a-1) to (k-1), the first movable is triggered by the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 38 (h-1) (the fluctuation start of special figure 1). After changing the mode of the LEDs of the body 610a and the second movable body 610b from the first mode (light-off) to the second mode (for example, lighting in blue), the characteristics shown in FIG. 1 With the end of the floating game (stop display in FIG. 1) as an opportunity, the LED modes of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are changed from the second mode (for example, lit in blue) to the first mode. It is changed to one mode (light-off).

  In this example, even when the operation start timing of the moving operation of the movable body arrives (when the symbol variation is started), the moving operation of the movable body may not be started. For example, FIG. At the timing of the start of the special figure 1 variable game (start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1) shown in FIG. Therefore, it may be possible to produce an unexpected performance.

  In the example shown in FIG. 381 (a-2) to FIG. 38 (f-2), the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. After moving the movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b from the first position (initial position) to the second position, the end of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 1), the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are moved from the second position to the first position (initial position).

  Further, in this example, the trigger for starting the performance operation of the light output means is “design variation start”, and the trigger for the end of the rendering operation of the light output means is “symbol variation stop”. In the example shown in FIG. 381 (a-2) to FIG. 38 (f-2), the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. After changing the mode of the LEDs of the movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b from the first mode (extinguishment) to the third mode (for example, lighting in red), FIG. Triggered by the end of the special figure 1 variable game shown (stop display of special figure 1), the LED mode of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b is changed to the third mode (for example, lit in red). To the first mode (light-off).

  In this example, when the determination result of the special figure variation game is the first result (in this example, the loss), the mode of the light output means (in this example, the LED) is changed to the second mode (lights in blue). In the case where the determination result of the special figure variation game is a second result (in this example, a big hit) that is more advantageous to the player than the first result, the light output means (in this example, the LED) Since the aspect is changed to the third aspect (lighted in red), the player's expectation may be enhanced.

<Specific Example of Operation / Production Operation 2 of Movable Body During Symbol Variation Display>
Next, as a specific example of the operation, a description will be given of the rendering operation 2 of the movable body during the symbol variation display. FIGS. 382 (a-1) to (k-1) and FIGS. (A-2) to (f-2) show an example of the rendering operation 2 of the movable body during the symbol variation display in time series. FIGS. 382 (a-1) to (k-1) correspond to FIGS. 381 (a-1) to (k-1), and FIG. -2) to (f-2) are drawings corresponding to FIGS. 381 (a-2) to (f-2).

  In this example, the time for the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b to stay at the second position is shorter than the example described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 381 and 382, the first operation for stopping the movable body at the second position over the first period, and the second period over the second period shorter than the first period. If the second operation for stopping at the second position is provided, the operation of the movable body can be varied, and an unexpected production can be performed in some cases.

<Specific Example of Operation / Directing Operation 3 of Movable Body During Symbol Variation Display>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, the rendering operation 3 of the movable body during the symbol variation display will be described. FIGS. 383 (a) to (l) are diagrams showing an example of the rendering operation 3 of the movable body during symbol variation display in time series, and FIG. 381 (a-1) to FIG. It is drawing corresponding to 1).

  In this example, the time for the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b to stay at the second position is set longer than the example described with reference to FIG. 381 and FIG. The mode of the LED of the movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b of the first mode (light-off) shown in FIG. (G) → the second mode (for example, (h), (i)) (Lights in blue) → Third mode shown in (j) of the figure (for example, lights up in yellow) → Fourth mode (for example, in red) in the same figure (k) → Shown in (l) of the same figure It is changed stepwise in the order of the first mode (light extinction).

  As in this example, if the light output means (in this example, the LED) is configured to change stepwise in a plurality of modes during the operation of the movable body, the player's expectation can be gradually increased. There is a case.

<Specific Example of Operation / Directing Operation of Movable Body Based on Operation by Operating Means>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, an effect operation of the movable body based on the operation by the operation means will be described. FIG. 384 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation of the movable body based on the operation by the operation means in time series.

  In this example, the operation start trigger of the movable body effect operation is “detected operation by the operating means”, and the operation end trigger of the movable body effect operation is “symbol change stop”. The production control unit 500 detects the operation by the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 384 (h) as the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b as shown in FIG. The first movable body 610a and the second movable body are triggered by the symbol stop display shown in FIG. 1L after moving from the initial position to the second position shown in FIG. 610b is moved from the second position to the first position (initial position).

  Further, in this example, the operation start trigger of the light output means for the effect operation is “detected operation by the operation means”, and the operation end trigger of the light output means for the effect operation is “symbol change stop”. The sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the detection of an operation by the chance button 136 (operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate) shown in FIG. After changing the mode of the LED of the second movable body 610b from the first mode (light-off) to the second mode (for example, lighting in blue), the end of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. With the trigger display (stop display in FIG. 1) as an opportunity, the LED mode of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b is changed from the second mode (for example, lighted in blue) to the first mode (off). To change.

  The liquid crystal control unit 435 receives the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b from the first position (initial position) to the second position as a trigger. The effect image EG is displayed in the display area behind the second movable body 610b. Therefore, when the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are located at the second position, the effect image EG is partially generated by the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b. As shown in FIG. 6 (j), it becomes difficult to see from the front side. On the other hand, when the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are located at the first position, the effect image EG is obscured by the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6 (k), it is easily visible from the front side.

<Specific example of operation / Directing action of movable body based on start opening prize>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, the production operation of the movable body based on the start opening prize will be described. FIG. 385 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation of the movable body based on the start opening prize in time series.

  In this example, the operation start opportunity of the movable body production operation is “start opening prize (ball entering the start opening)”, and the operation end opportunity of the movable body production operation is “start opening prize (ball entry to the start opening). ) That a predetermined time has passed. The production control unit 500 receives a start (start opening prize) at the start opening shown in FIG. 385 (e) (for example, the ordinary start opening 228, the first special figure start opening 230, the second special figure start opening 232). As an opportunity, after the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are moved from the first position (initial position) shown in FIG. 4D to the second position shown in FIG. When the predetermined time has elapsed since winning the start opening (entering the start opening), the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are moved to the second position as shown in FIG. From the position to the first position (initial position).

  Also, in this example, the trigger for starting the performance operation of the light output means is “start opening prize (ball entering the start opening)”, and the trigger for the end of the rendering operation of the light output means is “start opening prize (start opening). It is said that a predetermined time has passed since the entry to the ball. The sub-control unit 400 enters a ball (starting port winning) into the starting port shown in FIG. 385 (e) (for example, the normal map starting port 228, the first special diagram starting port 230, the second special diagram starting port 232). As an opportunity, after changing the mode of the LED of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b from the first mode (lights off) to the second mode (for example, lighting in blue), the start opening prize is received. When a predetermined time has passed since the (entrance to the start opening), as shown in FIG. 11 (h), the LED modes of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are changed to the second mode. The mode (for example, lighting in blue) is changed to the first mode (off).

  In addition, even when there is a start opening prize (entering the start opening), it may be configured not to execute the effect operation of the movable body, for example, when the operation of the movable body is a kind of pre-reading effect, The special figure 2 priority variation machine may be configured not to operate in the special opening prize of FIG. 1 during the electric support and the special opening prize of special figure 1 during the big hit.

<Modification of movable body>
Next, a modification of the movable body will be described. FIG. 386 is a diagram showing a modification of the movable body. In this example, separately from the decorative symbol display device (main liquid crystal) 208, a first sub liquid crystal (first movable body) 614 and a second sub liquid crystal (second movable body) 616 that are movable in the horizontal direction. It has. As in this example, the gaming table according to the present invention may include a movable body that also serves as a display means. Although not shown, the sound output means (for example, a speaker) or the light output means (for example, a lamp) is configured to be movable so that the game table can be a movable body that also serves as the sound output means, or the light output means. You may provide the movable body which served as.

<Specific Example of Operation / Directing Operation 1 after the Returning Operation of the Movable Body While Stopping Symbol Variation>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, the rendering operation 1 after the returning operation of the movable body while the symbol variation is stopped will be described. FIGS. 387 (a-1) to (f-1) are time series diagrams showing the rendering operation of the movable body when the return operation of the movable body is completed while the symbol variation is stopped.

  In this example, the operation start timing of the return operation of the movable body is “symbol variation stop”, and the operation start timing of the rendering operation of the movable body is “symbol variation start”. In the example shown in FIGS. 387 (a-1) to (f-1), the effect control unit 500 triggers the first movable body 610a with the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. A return operation for moving from a position different from the first position (initial position) to the first position (initial position) is performed. In addition, the production control unit 500 takes the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b from the first position (initial position) to the second, triggered by the start of symbol variation shown in FIG. An effect operation for moving to the position is executed.

  Further, in this example, the trigger for starting the effect operation of the light output means is “design change start”. In the example shown in FIGS. 387 (a-1) to (f-1), the sub-control unit 400 starts the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. As a trigger, the LED mode of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b is changed from the first mode (light-off) to the second mode (for example, lighted in blue).

  On the other hand, FIGS. 387 (a-2) to (h-2) are diagrams showing, in time series, the rendering operation of the movable body when the return operation of the movable body is not completed while the symbol variation is stopped. . In this example, the production control unit 500 takes the first movable body 610a from the position different from the first position (initial position) from the position different from the first position, triggered by the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. Is returned to the position (initial position), but before the return operation is completed (before the first movable body 610a has completely moved to the first position (initial position)). Pending symbol variation has started.

  `` Design variation start '' is the operation start opportunity of the movable body production operation, but in this example, the movable body return operation is prioritized and executed over the movable body production operation, The effect control unit 500 continues the return operation even during symbol fluctuation, and the return operation is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 2E-2 (the first movable body 610a is moved to the first position (initial position). ) Completely moved up to). In addition, after the return operation is completed, an effect operation is performed in which the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are reciprocated between the first position and the second position.

  However, in this example, since the trigger for starting the effect operation of the light output means is “symbol change start”, the sub-control unit 400 starts the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. As a trigger of the fluctuation start in FIG. 1, the LED mode of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b during the return operation is changed from the first mode (off) to the second mode (for example, blue). The lighting operation is changed to (lit).

<Specific Example of Operation / Production Operation 2 After Returning Operation of Movable Body While Stopping Variation of Symbol>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, the rendering operation 2 after the return operation of the movable body while the symbol variation is stopped will be described. FIGS. 388 (a-1) to (f-1) are diagrams showing time-sequential presentation operations of the movable body when the return operation of the movable body is completed while the symbol fluctuation is stopped. It is the same drawing as (a-1)-the figure (f-1).

  On the other hand, FIGS. 388 (a-2) to (h-2) are diagrams showing, in time series, the rendering operation of the movable body when the return operation of the movable body is not completed while the symbol variation is stopped. . In this example, the operation start timing of the return operation of the movable body is “symbol variation stop”, and the operation start timing of the rendering operation of the movable body is “symbol variation start”. The production control unit 500 takes the first movable body 610a from a position different from the first position (initial position) from the first position (initial stage), triggered by the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. The return operation is performed until the first movable body 610a is completely moved to the first position (initial position). The fluctuation has begun.

  `` Design variation start '' is the operation start opportunity of the movable body production operation, but in this example, the movable body return operation is prioritized and executed over the movable body production operation, The effect control unit 500 continues the return operation even during symbol fluctuation, and the return operation is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 2E-2 (the first movable body 610a is moved to the first position (initial position). ) Completely moved up to). Further, in this example, after the return operation is completed, the rendering operation for reciprocating the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b between the first position and the second position is not executed. Yes.

  Also, in this example, the trigger for starting the performance operation of the light output means is “design variation start”, but the return operation of the movable body is prioritized and executed over the performance operation of the light output means. Therefore, the sub-control unit 400 uses the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b triggered by the start of the special figure 1 variable game shown in (d-2) of FIG. An effect operation for changing the LED mode is not executed.

<Specific Example of Operation / Production Operation 3 after Returning Operation of Movable Body While Stopping Variation of Symbol>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, the rendering operation 3 after the return operation of the movable body while the symbol variation is stopped will be described. FIGS. 389 (a-1) to (f-1) are time-series diagrams showing the rendering operation of the movable body when the return operation of the movable body is completed while the symbol variation is stopped. It is the same drawing as (a-1)-the figure (f-1).

  On the other hand, FIG. 389 (a-2) to FIG. 11 (h-2) are time-series diagrams showing the effect operations of the movable body when the return operation of the movable body is not completed while the symbol variation is stopped. . In this example, the production control unit 500 takes the first movable body 610a from the position different from the first position (initial position) from the position different from the first position, triggered by the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. Is returned to the position (initial position), but before the return operation is completed (before the first movable body 610a has completely moved to the first position (initial position)). Pending symbol variation has started.

  `` Design variation start '' is the operation start opportunity of the movable body production operation, but in this example, the movable body return operation is prioritized and executed over the movable body production operation, The effect control unit 500 continues the return operation even during symbol fluctuation, and the return operation is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 2E-2 (the first movable body 610a is moved to the first position (initial position). ) Completely moved up to). Further, in this example, after the return operation is completed, the rendering operation for reciprocating the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b between the first position and the second position is not executed. Yes.

  However, in this example, since the trigger for starting the effect operation of the light output means is “symbol change start”, the sub-control unit 400 starts the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. As a trigger of the fluctuation start in FIG. 1, the LED mode of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b during the return operation is changed from the first mode (off) to the second mode (for example, blue). The lighting operation is changed to (lit).

<Specific Example of Operation / Directing Operation 4 after the Returning Operation of the Movable Body While the Symbol Fluctuation is Stopped>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, the rendering operation 4 after the return operation of the movable body while the symbol variation is stopped will be described. FIGS. 390 (a) to (h) are diagrams showing time-sequential presentation operations of the movable body when the return operation of the movable body is not completed while the symbol variation is stopped.

  In this example, the production control unit 500 moves the first movable body 610a from the position different from the first position (initial position) to the first position, triggered by the symbol variation stop shown in FIG. A return operation to move to (initial position) is being executed, but is pending before the return operation is completed (before the first movable body 610a has completely moved to the first position (initial position)). The symbol variation of has started.

  In this example, the start of symbol variation is the trigger for starting the motion operation of the movable body, but since the configuration is such that the return operation of the movable body is prioritized over the motion operation of the movable body, the production control unit 500 continues the return operation even during symbol variation, and the return operation is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 5E (the first movable body 610a is completely moved to the first position (initial position)). doing). In addition, after the return operation is completed, an effect operation of reciprocating the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b between the first position and the second position is not executed.

  Also, in this example, the trigger for starting the reading of the operation data used for the rendering operation of the light output means is “design variation start”, and the trigger for starting the rendering operation of the light output means is “the completion of the return operation of the movable body”. " For this reason, the sub-control unit 400 uses the LEDs of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b as a trigger when the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. After the start of the reading of the operation data, the return operation is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 8F with the completion of the return operation of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b shown in FIG. An effect operation is performed to change the LED mode of the subsequent first movable body 610a and second movable body 610b from the first mode (off) to the second mode (for example, lighting in blue). .

  In this example, since the trigger for starting the reading of the operation data used for the rendering operation of the light output means is different from the trigger for starting the rendering operation of the light output means, the first movable body shown in FIG. 610a and the second movable body 610b LED mode (in this example, emission color), and the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b LED mode (in this example) shown in FIG. , Emission color) is different.

<Specific Example of Operation / Directing Operation 5 after Returning Operation of Movable Body while Stopping Variation of Symbol>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, the rendering operation 5 after the return operation of the movable body while the symbol variation is stopped will be described. FIGS. 391 (a) to (h) are diagrams showing, in time series, the rendering operation of the movable body when the return operation of the movable body is not completed while the symbol variation is stopped.

  In this example, the production control unit 500 moves the first movable body 610a from the position different from the first position (initial position) to the first position, triggered by the symbol variation stop shown in FIG. A return operation to move to (initial position) is being executed, but is pending before the return operation is completed (before the first movable body 610a has completely moved to the first position (initial position)). The symbol variation of has started.

  In this example, the start of symbol variation is the trigger for starting the motion operation of the movable body, but since the configuration is such that the return operation of the movable body is prioritized over the motion operation of the movable body, the production control unit 500 continues the return operation even during symbol variation, and the return operation is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 5E (the first movable body 610a is completely moved to the first position (initial position)). doing). In addition, after the return operation is completed, an effect operation of reciprocating the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b between the first position and the second position is executed.

  Also, in this example, the trigger for starting the reading of the operation data used for the rendering operation of the light output means is “design variation start”, and the trigger for starting the rendering operation of the light output means is “the completion of the return operation of the movable body”. " For this reason, the sub-control unit 400 uses the LEDs of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b as a trigger when the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. After the start of the reading of the operation data, the rendering operation is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 8 (f) with the completion of the return operation of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b shown in FIG. An effect operation is performed in which the LED mode of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b is changed from the first mode (light-off) to the second mode (for example, lighted blue). .

  In this example, since the trigger for starting the reading of the operation data used for the rendering operation of the light output means is different from the trigger for starting the rendering operation of the light output means, the first movable body shown in FIG. 610a and the second movable body 610b LED mode (in this example, emission color), and the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b LED mode (in this example) shown in FIG. , Emission color) is different.

<Specific Example of Operation / Directing Operation 6 after the Returning Operation of the Movable Body While Stopping Symbol Variation>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, the rendering operation 6 after the return operation of the movable body while the symbol variation is stopped will be described. FIGS. 392 (a-1) to (f-1) are time series diagrams showing the rendering operation of the movable body when the return operation of the movable body is completed while the symbol variation is stopped.

  In this example, the operation start timing of the return operation of the movable body is “symbol change stop”, and the operation start timing of the rendering operation of the movable body is “start pre-reading effect”. In the example shown in FIGS. 392 (a-1) to (f-1), the effect control unit 500 triggers the first movable body 610a with the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. A return operation for moving from a position different from the first position (initial position) to the first position (initial position) is performed. Further, the production control unit 500 takes the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b from the first position (initial position) to the second with the start of the prefetching production shown in FIG. An effect operation for moving to the position is executed.

  Further, in this example, the trigger for starting the production operation of the light output means is “pre-reading production start”. In the example shown in FIGS. 392 (a-1) to (f-1), the sub-control unit 400 uses the first movable body 610a and the first movable body 610a as a trigger when the pre-reading effect start shown in FIG. The mode of the LED of the second movable body 610b is changed from the first mode (off) to the second mode (for example, lighting in blue). The liquid crystal control unit 435 starts prefetching effects using the decorative symbol display device 208, triggered by the symbol variation start shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 392 (a-2) to (h-2) are diagrams showing, in time series, the rendering operation of the movable body when the return operation of the movable body is not completed while the symbol variation is stopped. . In this example, the production control unit 500 takes the first movable body 610a from the position different from the first position (initial position) from the position different from the first position, triggered by the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. Is returned to the position (initial position), but before the return operation is completed (before the first movable body 610a has completely moved to the first position (initial position)). Pre-reading production has started.

  Although the pre-reading production start is an operation start timing of the movable body production operation, in this example, since the movable body return operation is prioritized over the movable body production operation, production control is performed. The unit 500 continues the return operation during execution of the pre-reading effect, and the return operation is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 5E-2 (the first movable body 610a is in the first position (initial position). ) Completely moved up to). In addition, after the return operation is completed, an effect operation is performed in which the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are reciprocated between the first position and the second position.

  However, in this example, since the trigger for starting the effect operation of the light output means is “pre-reading effect start”, the sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the start of the pre-reading effect shown in FIG. An effect operation is performed in which the LED mode of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b is changed from the first mode (light-off) to the second mode (for example, lighted blue). .

<Specific example of operation / interruption / recovery during production of moving body>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, power interruption / power recovery during the moving operation of the movable body will be described. FIGS. 393 (a-1) to (f-1) are time-series diagrams showing the rendering operation of the movable body during the big hit game.

  In this example, the operation start trigger of the movable body effect operation is “start of round during jackpot game”, and the operation start trigger of the movable body effect operation is “end of round during jackpot game”. In the example shown in FIGS. 393 (a-1) to (f-1), the effect control unit 500 is triggered by the start of 6R (round) shown in FIG. And the second movable body 610b are reciprocally moved between the first position (initial position) and the second position.

  Further, in this example, the operation start trigger for the performance operation of the light output means body is “start of the round during the big hit game”, and the operation start trigger for the performance operation of the light output means is “the end of the round during the big hit game”. In the example shown in FIGS. 393 (a-1) to (f-1), the sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the start of 7R (round) shown in FIG. The LED mode of the second movable body 610b is changed from the first mode (for example, lighting in blue) to the second mode (for example, lighting in red). Note that the liquid crystal control unit 435 performs a big hit effect using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 393 (a-2) to (f-2) show the case where power interruption / recovery occurs during the big hit game shown in FIGS. (A-1) to (f-1). It is the figure which showed the operation | movement of the movable body in time series. In this example, the production control unit 500 uses the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610a as a trigger in response to the occurrence of a power interruption (power interruption) immediately after the 6R start of the big hit game shown in FIG. After the movable body 610b is moved from the first position (initial position) to the second position, a return operation is performed in which the movable body 610b is moved from the second position to the first position (initial position). In addition, the game table resumes the big hit game with the power recovery (return of power supply) shown in FIG.

  In this example, the operation start timing of the movable body effect operation is set to “start of the round during the big hit game”, and the operation start timing of the effect operation of the movable body is set to “the end of the round during the big hit game”. Takes the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b as the first position (initial position) and the second position, triggered by the start of 7R shown in FIG. An effect operation of reciprocating between positions is executed.

  Also, in this example, the operation start trigger of the light output means body operation is set to “round start during jackpot game”, and the operation start trigger of the light output means effect operation is set to “round end during jackpot game”. The sub-control unit 400 sets the LED modes of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b as the first, triggered by the start of 7R (resume of the big hit game) shown in FIG. The mode (for example, lighting in blue) is changed to the second mode (for example, lighting in red).

<Specific Example of Operation / Directing Operation after Returning Operation of Movable Body Based on Opening of Front Frame Door>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, an effect operation after the return operation of the movable body based on the opening of the front frame door will be described. FIG. 394 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation after the return operation of the movable body based on the opening of the front frame door in time series.

  In this example, the operation start triggers of the return operation of the movable body are “design variation stop” and “open front frame door 106”. The production control unit 500 takes the first movable body 610a from the position different from the first position (initial position) to the first position (initial position), triggered by the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 394 (c). The return operation to move to is executed, but the return operation is not completed.

  In this example, if the return operation is not completed even if the return operation triggered by the symbol fluctuation stop is executed multiple times, the return operation of the movable body is performed when the front frame door 106 is opened. Therefore, in the example shown in (f) to (h) in the same figure, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the first movable body 610a is moved to the first position (initial position). Is performing a return operation of moving from a different position to the first position (initial position).

  Further, in this example, the operation start trigger of the movable body effect operation is “detected operation by the operating means”, and the operation end trigger of the movable body effect operation is “symbol change stop”. In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is detected at the timing shown in FIG. 11H. However, since the movable body return operation is prioritized over the movable body effect operation, the operation is performed. The production control unit 500 continues the returning operation even after detecting the operation by the chance button 136, and completes the returning operation at the timing shown in FIG. Completely moved to the initial position).

  However, in this example, since the operation start trigger of the rendering operation of the light output means is “detection of operation by the operation means”, the sub-control unit 400 uses the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. When the operation is detected, the LED modes of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b during the return operation are changed from the first mode (off) to the second mode (for example, lighted in blue) ) Is being performed.

<Specific Example of Operation / Directing Operation of Movable Body Based on Start Port Prize during Returning Operation of Movable Body>
Next, as one specific example of the operation, a description will be given of the effect operation of the movable body based on the start opening winning during the return operation of the movable body. FIG. 395 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the effect operation of the movable body based on the start opening winning during the return operation of the movable body.

  In this example, the operation start opportunity of the return operation of the movable body is “symbol change stop”, and the operation start opportunity of the effect operation of the movable body is “start opening prize (entering the start opening)”. The production control unit 500 takes the first movable body 610a from the position different from the first position (initial position) from the first position (initial position), triggered by the symbol fluctuation stop shown in FIG. Although the return operation is performed until the first movable body 610a has completely moved to the first position (initial position), there is a change in the design that is on hold. It is started and a start opening prize is detected.

  In this example, the “start opening prize (entering the start opening)” is the trigger for starting the operation of the movable body, but the return operation of the movable body is prioritized over the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the production control unit 500 continues the return operation even after detecting the start opening winning, and completes the return operation at the timing shown in FIG. 5F (first movable body 610a). Is fully moved to the first position (initial position)). In addition, after the return operation is completed, an effect operation of reciprocating the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b between the first position and the second position is executed.

  Further, in this example, since the operation start timing of the rendering operation of the light output means is “start opening prize (ball entering the start opening)”, the sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the detection of the starting opening prize. As shown in FIGS. (F) to (h), the LED modes of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are changed from the first mode (off) to the second mode (for example, blue). The lighting operation is changed.

<Specific example of operation / Return operation of movable body based on opening of front frame door during production operation>
Next, a return operation of the movable body based on the opening of the front frame door during the production operation will be described as one specific example of the operation. FIG. 396 is a diagram showing an example of the return operation of the movable body based on the opening of the front frame door during the rendering operation in time series.

  In this example, the operation start trigger of the moving operation of the movable body is “design variation start”, and the operation start trigger of the return operation of the movable body is “opening the front frame door 106”. The production control unit 500 takes the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b as shown in FIG. 396 (b) at the first position (initial position) shown in FIG. To the second position shown in (c) of FIG.

  Further, in this example, since the operation start trigger of the rendering operation of the light output means is “symbol variation start”, the sub-control unit 400 is performing the rendering operation with the symbol variation start shown in FIG. An effect operation is performed in which the LED modes of the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b are changed from the first mode (light-off) to the second mode (for example, lighted blue).

  In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the production control unit 500 moves the first movable body 610a and the second movable body 610b from the first position (initial position) different from the first position. The return operation to move to the position (initial position) is executed.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has a plurality of types of presentation means (for example, the shielding device 246 illustrated in FIG. 361 (a), as illustrated in FIG. 397, Production movable body 224, blade member 232a of second special figure starting port 232, door member 234a of variable winning port 234, bonuses 564 and 566 arranged on game board 200 shown in FIG. 361 (b), front frame door 106, the special figure holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 361, various lamps 418 shown in FIG. Body lamp 552, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542, LED, speaker 120 shown in FIG. 359, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. Device 210 and decorative symbol display device 208), wherein at least one of the plurality of types of effect means is a first effect means, and the first effect means includes a plurality of types of effect means. At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation (eg, a production operation), and at least one of the plurality of types of operations is: It is a second operation (for example, a return operation), the first operation is an operation that can be executed in the first period, and the first operation is an operation that is not started in the second period. And the second period is a period in which the second operation is executed at least. According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where a gaming machine having a feature in the operation of the production means can be realized.

  The first effect means is means capable of executing at least a moving operation (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, and the door member 234a of the variable prize winning port 234). 361 (b) shown in FIG. 361, movable bodies 564, 566 disposed on the game board 200, movable bodies 562 disposed on the front frame door 106, and the like. The first producing means is an operation for moving to the first position, the second operation is an operation for moving the first producing means to the second position, and the second operation is for the first operation. It is an operation that may be started when one rendering means is not in the second position, the second position is an initial position of the first rendering means, and the second operation May be a return operation of the first rendering means.

  In addition, the first effect means is a means provided with at least a light emitting means (for example, LED) (for example, the ordinary map holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second shown in FIG. 361 (a)). Special figure holding lamp 220, various lamps 418, stage movable body lamp 552, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542, LED light output means shown in FIG. 359, and the light emitting means, A means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emission modes (for example, lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc.), and at least one of the plurality of types of light emission modes is a first light emission mode (for example, lighting). , At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a third operation, the third operation is an operation that can be started during the first period, and the third operation is Start running in the second period A capability operating, the third operation, the light emitting means may be an act of emitting by the first lighting mode.

  In addition, the first period is a period after a first time (for example, symbol variation time) has elapsed since the first trigger has arrived, and the first trigger is a symbol variation start. Also good. The second operation may be an operation in which the first effector moves to the second position after the first effector moves to the first position. Good. Further, at least one of the plurality of types of effect means is a second effect means (for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, and a common figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 3). , A decorative symbol display device 208).

  In addition, the first operation is an operation that is started to be executed in the first period in the second state, and in the second state, the first period does not overlap the second period. It may be in a state. Further, at least one of the plurality of types of light emission modes is a second light emission mode (for example, blinking), at least one of the plurality of types of operations is a fourth operation, The fourth operation may be an operation in which the light emitting unit emits light in the second light emission mode.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with a plurality of types of production means as shown in FIG. 398, for example, and the plurality of types of production means (for example, FIG. 361 (a), the shielding device 246, the production movable body 224, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the game board 200 shown in FIG. 361 (b). The provided features 564, 566, the feature 562 disposed on the front frame door 106, the ordinary holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 361 (a), 359, various lamps 418, effect movable body lamp 552, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542, LED, speaker 120 shown in FIG. 359, first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. At least one of the second special-figure display device 214, the general-purpose display device 210, and the decorative symbol display device 208) is a first effect means, and the first effect means performs at least a plurality of types of operations. It is an executable means, and at least one of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation (for example, a production operation), and at least one of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation. The first operation is an operation that may be started during the first period, and the first operation is an operation that is not started during the second period. The first operation is an operation that may be started in a third period, and the second period is a period in which the second operation is at least executed. It is a game table to play. According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where a gaming machine having a feature in the operation of the production means can be realized.

  In addition, said 1st production | presentation means is a means (for example, shielding apparatus 246, production | generation movable body 224, the blade member 232a of the 2nd special figure starting port 232, and the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234) which can perform a movement operation | movement at least. 361 (b) shown in FIG. 361, movable bodies 564, 566 disposed on the game board 200, movable bodies 562 disposed on the front frame door 106, and the like. The first producing means is an operation for moving to the first position, the second operation is an operation for moving the first producing means to the second position, and the second operation is for the first operation. It is an operation that may be started when one rendering means is not in the second position, the second position is an initial position of the first rendering means, and the second operation May be a return operation of the first rendering means.

  In addition, the first effect means is a means provided with at least a light emitting means (for example, LED) (for example, the ordinary map holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second shown in FIG. 361 (a)). Special figure holding lamp 220, various lamps 418, stage movable body lamp 552, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542, LED light output means shown in FIG. 359, and the light emitting means, A means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emission modes (for example, lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc.), and at least one of the plurality of types of light emission modes is a first light emission mode (for example, lighting). , At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a third operation, and the third operation is an operation that may be started during the first period, and the third operation Is the second period The third operation is an operation that may be started during the third period, and the third operation is the operation in which the light emitting unit emits light in the first light emission mode. The operation may be

  In addition, the first period is a period after a first time (for example, symbol variation time) has elapsed since the first trigger has arrived, and the first trigger is a symbol variation start. Also good. The second operation may be an operation in which the first effector moves to the second position after the first effector moves to the first position. Good.

  Moreover, the game machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has a plurality of types of effect means (for example, the shielding device 246 and the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 361 (a)) as shown in FIG. , The blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, the functions 564 and 566 disposed on the game board 200 shown in FIG. 361 (b), and the front frame door 106. 562, the special figure holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 361, the various lamps 418 shown in FIG. , A game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp 542, an LED, a speaker 120 shown in FIG. 359, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a universal figure display device 210, shown in FIG. A gaming machine equipped with a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein at least one of the plurality of types of production means is a first production means, and the first production means performs at least a plurality of types of operations. It is an executable means, and at least one of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation (for example, a production operation), and at least one of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation. The first operation is an operation that can be performed in the first period, the first operation is an operation that is not performed in the second period, and the second operation The period is a gaming machine in which the second operation is at least performed. According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where a gaming machine having a feature in the operation of the production means can be realized.

  Further, the first effect means is means capable of executing at least a moving operation (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, and the door member 234a of the variable winning award port 234). 361 (b) shown in FIG. 361, movable bodies 564, 566 disposed on the game board 200, movable bodies 562 disposed on the front frame door 106, and the like. The first producing means is an operation for moving to the first position, the second operation is an operation for moving the first producing means to the second position, and the second operation is for the first operation. It is an operation that may be started when one rendering means is not in the second position, the second position is an initial position of the first rendering means, and the second operation May be a return operation of the first rendering means.

  In addition, the first effect means is a means provided with at least a light emitting means (for example, LED) (for example, the ordinary map holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second shown in FIG. 361 (a)). Special figure holding lamp 220, various lamps 418, stage movable body lamp 552, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542, LED light output means shown in FIG. 359, and the light emitting means, A means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emission modes (for example, lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc.), and at least one of the plurality of types of light emission modes is a first light emission mode (for example, lighting). , At least one of the plurality of types of operations is a third operation, the third operation is an operation that can be executed in the first period, and the third operation is the first operation. Not run in the second period A work, the third operation, the light emitting means may be an act of emitting by the first lighting mode.

  In addition, the first period is a period after a first time (for example, symbol variation time) has elapsed since the first trigger has arrived, and the first trigger is a symbol variation start. Also good. The second operation may be an operation in which the first effector moves to the second position after the first effector moves to the first position. Good.

[Twenty-first embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, with reference to FIGS. 400 to 413, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to a twenty-first embodiment of the present invention will be described. However, it explains in detail. Note that the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 and the contents of various processes in the present embodiment are substantially the same as those in the nineteenth embodiment, and therefore, the configuration different from the pachinko machine 100 according to the nineteenth embodiment will be illustrated and described below. As for the same configuration as the pachinko machine 100 according to the nineteenth embodiment, the reference numerals are the same as those in the nineteenth embodiment unless otherwise specified, and illustration and detailed description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 400 is a timing chart showing an example of a sound effect in the present embodiment.

  In the timing chart shown in FIG. 400, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. FIG. 400 shows power-on by turning on the power switch 178, internal execution / non-execution of the first effect corresponding to an example of the sound effect, the volume (volume) of the first effect, and the sound. Internal execution / non-execution of the second effect corresponding to an example of the effect, volume (volume) of the second effect, operation / non-operation of the chance button 136, audibility (active) / Inaudible (inactive) and audible (active) / inaudible (inactive) of the second effect are shown. The internal execution / non-execution means execution / non-execution of control processing (for example, sound data update processing (step S1001) in FIG. 335) in the first sub-control unit 400 and the sound control circuit 431. Yes, it doesn't matter whether it's actually audible or inaudible. Whether it is actually audible or inaudible is indicated by audible / non-audible in the first effect and audible / inaudible in the second effect.

  The musical score surrounded by the one-dot chain line shown at the bottom of FIG. 400 represents the one phrase of the first effect and the one phrase of the second effect, respectively. Each phrase is repeated. That is, in the frame of the one-dot chain line shown at the bottom of FIG. 400, the score for one loop of the first effect and the score for one loop of the second effect are shown. In order to distinguish the two, the first effect is hatched. Further, in the audible / inaudible state of the first effect and the audible / inaudible state of the second effect, the gray period represents inaudible (inactive).

  After the power is turned on (after the initial setting is finished), both the first effect and the second effect are started internally, but the player cannot hear because the first effect is muted. On the other hand, the player can hear the second performance. Turning on the power (more precisely, completion of the initial setting) corresponds to an example of establishment of the second condition. In this example, when the second condition is established, the second effect is started. The production can be heard by the player.

  In this example, the first effect is selected by operating the chance button 136. Therefore, the button operation corresponds to an example of establishment of the first condition, and the player can select the operation timing for this button operation. Accordingly, the first condition here is a condition that allows the player to select at least the establishment time. The first effect may be selected by operating the chance button 136 from a plurality of types of effects, or the first effect may be performed by operating the chance button 136 in a situation where only the first effect can be selected. May be selected (corresponding to the start determination of the first effect). When the first effect is selected, the second effect is muted, a volume value is set for the first effect, and the first effect is activated. As a result, the player can recognize the state (audible state) from the middle of the phrase of the first effect at the timing of the player's button operation. That is, the first effect may be started halfway. Even if the second effect is muted, the second effect continues to be executed internally. The first effect may be started from the beginning. For example, depending on the operation timing of the chance button 136, the first effect may be started from the beginning or may be started from the middle.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated again, the second effect is selected. Here, the second effect may be selected by operating the chance button 136 from a plurality of effects, or the second button may be selected by operating the chance button 136 in a situation where only the second effect can be selected. May be selected (corresponding to the start determination of the second effect). When the second effect is selected, the first effect is now muted, a volume value is set for the second effect, and the second effect is activated. As a result, the player can recognize the state (audible state) from the middle of the phrase of the second effect according to the timing of the player's button operation. That is, the second effect may be resumed from a location different from the location at the time of muting.

  The two-dot chain line in the figure corresponds to the delimiter part of the effect. That is, it is time to finish one loop. In this example, the time length of one loop of the first effect and the time length of one loop of the second effect are the same, but may be different.

  FIG. 401 is a timing chart showing another example of the sound effect in the present embodiment.

  Also in the timing chart shown in FIG. 401, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the following, differences from the example shown in FIG. 400 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 401, the first effect corresponding to an example of the sound effect is executed by only the left speaker of the left speaker and the right speaker, and the second effect corresponding to the example of the sound effect is the left speaker. And executed by the right speaker only. Therefore, the volume (volume) of the first effect is the volume of the left speaker, and the volume (volume) of the second effect is the volume of the right speaker.

  In FIG. 401, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 is changing / stopping the special symbol variation, while the big hit game is being executed / not being executed, Execution / non-execution, volume (volume) of the first effect, internal execution / non-execution of the second effect, volume (volume) of the second effect, audibility of the first effect (active) ) / Inaudible (inactive) and audible (active) / inaudible (inactive) of the second performance are shown.

  In addition, the musical score surrounded by a one-dot chain line shown below in FIG. 401 represents the one phrase of the first effect and the one phrase of the second effect, respectively. Each one phrase is repeated in the production. That is, in the frame of the alternate long and short dash line shown at the bottom of FIG. 401, the score for one loop of the first effect and the score for one loop of the second effect are shown. The score for one loop of the first effect and the score of one loop for the second effect are 3 bars in length, and the time length of one loop of the first effect and the second effect. The time length for one loop is the same. The first measure in one loop of the first effect is the same as the third measure in one loop of the second effect, and the second measure in one loop of the first effect is the second measure. It is the same as the first measure in one loop of the production, and the third measure in one loop of the first production is the same as the second measure in one loop of the second production. That is, based on the second effect, the first effect is delayed by one measure from the second effect. Note that this relationship may be reversed.

  Both the first performance and the second performance are started internally at the same time as the special figure fluctuation stop or after the special figure fluctuation stop, or at the same time as the big hit game start or after the big hit game starts. The first performance is muted at first, so the player cannot hear it. On the other hand, the second effect is output (reproduced) from the right speaker as an audible sound. In this example, the stoppage of the special figure and the start of the big hit game correspond to an example of establishment of the second condition. In addition, the first effect is not started by a selection operation using a button, but can be heard with a delay of one measure from the start of the second effect. That is, when the second effect is started and one measure is completed, the mute of the first effect is released (volume up), and the player can hear the first effect together with the second effect. As described above, the configuration for one loop of the first effect and the configuration for one loop of the second effect are the same except that the first effect is delayed by one measure from the second effect. Therefore, when the first performance is started, the music is synchronized (synchronized) and output (reproduced) by the left and right speakers, so that the player can hear the ringing and the entertainment of the game is improved. There is. In this example, the first production and the second production were different by one measure with respect to the music synchronization (synchronization), but the first production and the second production were completely different. In the present embodiment, when the two are combined and heard as one piece of music, or the second effect complements the break in the first effect, it can be interpreted as a synchro.

  In this example, the second time elapses from the start timing of the second effect is an example of establishment of the first condition. However, in this example, since the first effect is not started by a button operation as in the example shown in FIG. 400, the stoppage of the special figure and the start of the big hit game will satisfy the first condition. It can also be seen as equivalent. That is, it can be said that the second condition and the first condition are the same. Note that the output (reproduction) of the first effect and the output (reproduction) of the second effect may be started simultaneously as an audible sound.

  FIG. 402 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a sound effect from the first effect to the third effect.

  Similarly to the timing charts shown in FIGS. 400 and 401, the timing chart shown in FIG. 402 also passes time from the left to the right in the figure, and in other points, the timing chart shown in FIGS. Is the same. Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the examples described so far, and repeated descriptions may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 400 and FIG. 401 is an example of sound production in one pachinko machine, but the example shown in FIG. 402 shows a plurality of pachinko machines (here, two game machines A and B). ) Is an example of the sound production performed.

  In FIG. 402, for each of gaming machine A and gaming machine B, power-on, internal execution / non-execution of a first effect corresponding to an example of a sound effect, and a second effect corresponding to an example of a sound effect Internal execution / non-execution, internal execution / non-execution of the third effect corresponding to an example of the sound effect, volume (volume) of the first effect, volume (volume) of the second effect, The volume (volume) of the third effect and the operation / no operation of the chance button 136 are shown. The power-on in this example is not the power switch 178 turned on in the pachinko machine but the power on the island facility. A plurality of game machines are turned on simultaneously when the island facilities are turned on. Therefore, the power-on timing is the same.

  In the example shown in FIG. 402, the start timing of the second measure in the first effect is the same as the start timing of the second measure in the second effect, and the start timing is also consistent after the third measure. Yes. A one-dot chain line shown in FIG. 402 represents the start timing of each measure in the first effect and the second effect. The first effect and the second effect are synchronized (synchronized) effects. On the other hand, the second measure in the third effect and the second measure in the first effect and the second effect are shifted in start timing, and the start timing is also shifted after the third measure. That is, the third effect and the first and second effects are effects that are not related to timing (asynchronous).

  After the power is turned on (after completion of the initial setting), both the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are started simultaneously at the game machine A and the game machine B at the same time. Since the first effect and the third effect are both muted, the player cannot hear them. On the other hand, the player can hear the second performance.

  A period indicated by an arrow 1 in FIG. 402 is a period in which the second effect is completely synchronized in the gaming machine A and the gaming machine B after the second condition is satisfied (power is turned on).

  In the gaming table B, the chance button 136 is operated, the first condition is established, and the second effect is switched to the first effect. That is, the mute of the first effect that has been muted is canceled (volume up), and the first effect is output from the speaker as an audible sound, while the second effect that has been output from the speaker as an audible sound until now. Will be muted and the second will not be heard. In this example, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the second effect is immediately muted, and the sound of the second effect is not heard. On the other hand, since the timing when the chance button 136 is operated is in the middle of the first measure, the mute release (volume up) of the first effect is performed until the break of the measure (here, the start timing of the second measure). Until delayed). Therefore, there is a period in which no sound effect is executed on the gaming table B. The period indicated by the arrow 2 on the time chart of the gaming table B in FIG. 402 corresponds to this period.

  On the gaming table A, the chance button 136 is not operated during the period of the first measure, and in the period indicated by the arrow 2 on the timing chart of the gaming table A in FIG. Yes. On the gaming table A, the chance button 136 is operated in the middle of the second measure, and the first condition is satisfied. Here, both the mute of the second effect and the release (volume up) of the mute of the first effect are delayed until the break of the measure (here, the start timing of the third measure). A period indicated by an arrow 4 in the time chart of the gaming table A in FIG. 402 is a delay period, and the second effect is still continued in this period. Therefore, in the period of the arrows 3 and 4 in FIG. 402, the second effect on the gaming machine A and the first effect on the gaming machine B are performed in synchronization.

  In the period indicated by the arrow 5 in FIG. 402, the first effect is performed on both the gaming table A and the gaming table B, and the first effect on the gaming table A and the first effect on the gaming table B are completely synchronized (synchronized). Done.

  On the game table B, the chance button 136 is operated again in the middle of the third measure, and the third condition is satisfied. When the third condition is satisfied, the mute of the third effect, which was previously mute, is immediately released (volume up), and the third effect is immediately output from the speaker as an audible sound, while the speaker The first effect that was output as an audible sound from is immediately muted, and the first effect cannot be heard immediately. As described above, since the third effect and the first and second effects are effects that are not related to timing, the period of arrows 6 and 7 in FIG. It is a period in which the third effect is performed in a state where the effect is not synchronized. In this way, the third effect in this example functions as an effect that allows the player to arbitrarily select synchronous or asynchronous with other game machines.

  In the example shown in FIG. 402 described above, the player may be able to select his / her favorite sound effect (for example, BGM) without impairing the sense of unity on the island.

  FIG. 403 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a sound effect produced by the fourth effect and the fifth effect.

  Similarly to the timing charts shown so far, the timing chart shown in FIG. 403 also passes from the left to the right in the figure, and is otherwise the same as the timing charts shown so far. . Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the examples described so far, and repeated descriptions may be omitted.

  The fourth effect is an effect that starts with an audible sound from the beginning when the power is turned on by turning on the power switch 178, but the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period (for example, the opening period) after the power is turned on. Switches to the fifth stage. The fourth effect starts with an audible sound from the beginning based on time information of an RTC (real time clock) which is a time measuring means for measuring the current time, and the chance button 136 within the operation effective period from the start is displayed. The operation switches to the fifth effect. When the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the fourth effect is temporarily switched to mute as the operation effective period elapses. Regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated, the fourth effect is performed from the beginning with an audible sound for the first time or for the first period, and when the first time has passed, When playback for the period is completed, it may be switched to mute. The fourth effect starts from the middle with an audible sound after the fourth time has elapsed since the power was turned on (1 hour in this case) based on the time information of the timer after the power is turned on. Is done. Furthermore, the fourth effect may be started with an audible sound from the middle by the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, after the power is turned on (after completion of the initial setting), both the fourth effect and the fifth effect are started internally, but the player is I can't hear it. On the other hand, the fourth effect can be heard by the player. The output of the audible sound by the fourth effect can be continued during the opening period, but if the chance button 136 is operated during the opening period, the fourth effect is muted and the volume value is set for the fifth effect. Is set, and the audible sound of the fifth effect is output for the fifth period. When the fifth period elapses, the fifth effect is muted, and neither the fourth effect nor the fifth effect is output as an audible sound.

  The timer after power-on corresponds to a timer relating to the second condition. The second condition here is a condition related to power-on, and in the second condition, in addition to a condition that is directly triggered by power-on itself, a fourth time has elapsed since power-on (here, one hour). Another condition that is indirectly triggered by power-on is also included. Even when this different condition is satisfied, the fourth effect starts with an audible sound halfway. The fourth effect started here is reproduced for the first period, and when reproduction for the first period is completed, the fourth effect is switched to mute.

  Also, at noon one month after the opening of the store where the game table A and the game table B are installed, the fourth effect is started with an audible sound from the beginning based on the time information of the RTC (real time clock). The The fact that the time information of the RTC (real time clock) has become predetermined first time information corresponds to an example of establishment of the first condition. When the first condition is satisfied, the fourth effect may be started with an audible sound from the middle, or may be started from the middle or from the beginning. When the chance effect 136 is operated in a state in which the fourth effect with the audible sound started based on the time information of the RTC is continued, the fourth effect is switched to the mute, and the fifth effect is performed instead. The mute of the effect is canceled (volume up), and the fifth effect is started from the middle as an audible sound.

  If the chance button 136 is operated again in a state where the fifth effect with the audible sound is continued, the fifth effect is switched to mute, and the mute of the fourth effect is released instead (volume). Up), and the fourth effect may be started halfway as an audible sound.

  As described above, the fourth effect may be started with an audible sound from the beginning, or may be started with an audible sound from the middle depending on the established condition.

  FIG. 404 is a diagram illustrating another example of the fourth effect started based on the RTC time information.

  In this example, a vibration error occurs immediately before the fourth timing (in this case, noon one month after the opening of a new store). In the pachinko machine 100 that detects the vibration error, an error occurrence notification is performed. In this error occurrence notification, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an error occurrence, and an audible error occurrence notification sound is output from the speaker 120. The error occurrence notification can be regarded as a kind of effect, and is referred to as a sixth effect here. Some notifications (effects) related to errors are performed during an error or when an error is resolved in addition to the occurrence of an error.

  In a state where the error notification that is the sixth effect is being executed, the fourth timing has arrived, the effect execution period (fourth effect execution period) by RTC is started, and the fourth effect is sent from the speaker 120. Although it should be output as an audible sound, priority is given to the output of the error occurrence notification sound by the sixth effect. Here, the mute of the fourth effect is not canceled (volume up), and the speaker 120 receives an error. Output of the generated notification sound continues.

  When the error occurrence notification end condition is satisfied, the sixth effect ends, the error occurrence notification sound is muted, and the fourth effect is output from the speaker 120 as an audible sound.

  Also, if an error occurs while the fourth effect is being output from the speaker 120 as an audible sound, the fourth effect is immediately muted, and an error occurrence notification sound due to the sixth effect is possible. The sound is immediately output from the speaker 120 as an audible sound.

  Even when the chance button 136 is operated, the operation is invalid during the period in which the error occurrence notification sound due to the sixth effect is output from the speaker 120. Note that the operation of the chance button 136 may be validated, and the mute of the fifth effect may be canceled (volume up) after the error is resolved, and the fifth effect may be started with an audible sound. That is, the mute release of the fifth effect may be delayed until the error is resolved.

  In addition, although it was an action related to profits (vibration) such as a vibration error here, priority should be given to the fourth effect for errors that are difficult to connect directly to the player's fraud, such as a lower plate full error. It may be. That is, the sixth effect may be immediately muted, and the fourth effect, which is the RTC effect, may be immediately released (volume up), or the fourth effect may be output from the speaker 120 as an audible sound. Even if a lower plate full tank error or the like occurs, the output of the audible sound by the fourth effect may be continued. Of course, even if a minor error such as a lower plate full error occurs, the fourth effect may be delayed until the error is resolved.

  FIG. 405 is a diagram for describing the effect mode in the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 405, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 are shown (hereinafter referred to as “the special symbol display device”). The same applies to the figure in Fig.). A fourth symbol is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. This 4th symbol notifies whether or not the symbol is changing (or when the symbol is stopped), the left side is the 4th symbol for Special Figure 1, and the right side is the 4th symbol for Special Figure 2. (The same applies to the following figures.) In any stage in FIG. 405, the 4th symbol is a crossed display, and the symbol is stopped for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In this embodiment, at least three production modes are prepared. If the effect modes described here are different, the types of background screens and characters appearing on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different. The effect in the effect mode is a selection effect.

  Display screens of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the Yatsushiro general mode, which is one of the three rendering modes, are shown in FIGS. 405 (a-1) to (a-6). In the first production mode (Yatsushiro Shogun mode), a circular display M1 in which four characters “eight”, “yo”, “general”, and “army” are written at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the background of the display screen. An animation that rotates clockwise without changing its position is displayed. FIG. 405 (a-5) shows a state where the circular display M1 is rotated once from the state shown in FIG. 405 (a-1) and returns to the state shown in FIG. 405 (a-1). Then, the animation from FIG. 405 (a-1) to immediately before (a-5) is repeated. In other words, the period from FIG. 405 (a-1) to immediately before FIG. (A-5) corresponds to one cycle of performance in the Yatsushiro general mode. An animation is a moving image in which a plurality of frames are continuous, and each of FIGS. 405 (a-1) to (a-6) corresponds to a screen of one frame (hereinafter the same). . In FIG. 405, the frame screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 surrounded by the dotted line is the screen of the start frame of the production cycle (the same applies to the following drawings).

  Display screens of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the number length mode which is one of the three effect modes are shown in FIGS. 405 (b-1) to (b-6). In the Bancho mode, an animation in which Bancho's character M2 swings a table tennis racket is displayed on the background of the display screen. FIG. 405 (b-4) shows that the watch character M2 returns to the state shown in FIG. 405 (b-1) after performing the continuous motion from the state shown in FIG. 405 (b-1). , The animation from FIG. 405 (b-1) to immediately before FIG. 405 (a-4) is repeated. In other words, the period from FIG. 405 (b-1) to immediately before FIG.

  Display screens of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the relax mode, which is one of the three rendering modes, are shown in FIGS. 405 (c-1) to (c-6). In the relax mode, an animation in which the soldier character M3 is reading a book while turning the page in a horizontal posture with one elbow is displayed on the background of the display screen. FIG. 405 (c-5) shows a situation where the soldier character M3 returns to the state shown in FIG. 405 (c-1) after performing the continuous action from the state shown in FIG. 405 (c-1). , The animation from FIG. 405 (c-1) to immediately before FIG. 405 (c-5) is repeated. That is, the period from FIG. 405 (c-1) to immediately before (c-5) corresponds to one cycle of the effect in the relax mode.

  As described above, in the Yatsushiro general mode and the relax mode, the length of one cycle of the production is the same, but in the Bancho mode, the length of one cycle of the production is different from these modes. In this way, the length of one cycle of the production may be the same or different.

  FIG. 406 is a diagram showing an animation of the effect mode that is started by the decorative symbol display device 208 after the effect mode is selected after the power is turned on.

  In FIG. 406 (α), the power is turned on, and an opening display such as “please wait for power on” is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Turning on the power corresponds to an example of establishment of the second condition.

  On the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (α) shown in FIG. 406 (α), a display prompting the user to select the effect mode by operating the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (β) shown in FIG. 406 (a-1) displays the start frame screen of the Yatsushiro general mode because the second condition of power-on is established. Has been. That is, the Yatsushiro general mode is a default production mode, and is selected first when the power is turned on. At the same time as the start frame screen of this Yatsushiro general mode is displayed, the effect mode selection period is started. The production in the Yatsushiro general mode corresponds to an example of the second production.

  The display screen shown in gray in FIG. 406 is not the display screen actually visible to the player, but the display screen shown in white is actually visible to the player. The gray diagram display screen is a diagram showing a screen that is drawn at the same time as the white diagram display screen in a layer below (the back of) the layer in which the white diagram display screen is rendered (hereinafter referred to as the “white diagram display screen”). The same applies to the figure.) The VDP 434 may draw a display screen corresponding to the presentation mode that is not selected in a layer below (back) the layer that renders the display screen corresponding to the selected presentation mode. Hereinafter, the display screen of the white diagram may be referred to as an active display screen, and the display screen of the gray diagram may be referred to as an inactive display screen.

  In FIG. 406 (a-2), the chance button 136 is operated while the display screen in the Yatsushiro general mode is active, and as shown in FIG. 406 (b-3), the display screen in the watch length mode is activated. That is, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched from the display screen in the Yatsushiro general mode to the display screen in the Bancho mode. The operation of the chance button 136 here is an operation for selecting one kind of effect from a plurality of kinds of effects, and corresponds to an example of establishment of the first condition. It corresponds to an example. The display screen of the number-length mode displayed here is a screen that is a continuation of the number-length mode that has been drawn in the inner layer so far, that is, a screen of a frame in the middle of a production cycle. On the other hand, the display screen of the Yatsushiro general mode that has been active until now becomes inactive, and the drawing process is continued in the lower (back) layer.

  FIG. 407 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 406.

  In FIG. 407 (b-5), the chance button 136 is operated again while the number-length mode display screen is active, and as shown in FIG. The frame screen becomes active, and the display screen in the number length mode that has been active becomes inactive, and drawing processing is continued in the lower (back) layer. The operation of the chance button 136 here is also an operation of selecting one kind of effect from a plurality of kinds of effects, which corresponds to an example of establishment of the first condition, and the effect of the relaxation mode is also the first effect. It corresponds to an example. Thus, there may be multiple types of effects as the first effect.

  In FIG. 407 (c-9), the chance button 136 is operated again while the display screen of the relax mode is active, and as shown in FIG. The screen of the frame becomes active, the display screen of the relax mode that has been active so far becomes inactive, and the drawing process is continued in the lower (back) layer. The operation of the chance button 136 here is an operation for selecting the production in the Yatsushiro general mode, which is the second production, and the Yatsushiro general mode is started from the middle. Thus, in this example, every time the chance button 136 is pressed once, the effect is switched to the effect in the next effect mode.

  FIG. 408 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of FIG. 407.

  In FIG. 408 (a-12), the first condition is established when the chance button 136 is operated while the display screen of the 8th general mode is active, and as shown in FIG. 408 (b-13), The display screen in the Bancho mode becomes active, the display screen in the Bancho mode that has been active so far becomes inactive, and drawing processing is continued in the lower (back) layer. Here, it is activated from the screen of the start frame of the production in the Bancho mode accidentally by the operation timing of the chance button 136. That is, the production in the watch length mode is started from the beginning.

  In FIG. 408 (d), there is one ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the special special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. Note that, at the time of FIG. 408 (e), the decorative symbol variation display on the ornamental symbol display device 208 has not yet been started, but has switched to the background screen of the variation display of the ornamental symbol variation display mode. On this background screen, the text “bancho mode” is displayed at the top, and the picture of the Bancho face is displayed on the right side. And on this background screen, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th symbol also remains in the design stop state.

  FIG. 409 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 409 (f) following FIG. 408 (e), the decorative symbol variation display is started in the non-electric support state. Moreover, the 4th symbol of the special figure 1 is changed to a “−” display indicating that the symbol is changing. The control state may be an electric support state, a probability variation state, or a non-probability variation state.

  In FIG. 409 (g), the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In FIG. 409 (h), the second stop of the decorative symbol is performed, and “decoration 7” is also stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. The word “reach” is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 409 (j), the character display “bancho mode” disappears, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the Banchou face pattern is also displayed in a reduced manner below the fourth symbol. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 409 (k), a character display that prompts the user to select a super reach effect by operating the chance button 136 and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed. In addition, on the lower right, a time display regarding the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is also made. Here, “3” representing the remaining period is displayed. The special symbol variation display (or decorative symbol variation display) for which the super reach effect is executed is started, or the super reach effect is won in the effect execution lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. The display of the screen shown in 409 (k) corresponds to an example of establishment of the second condition.

  There are two types of super reach production: subjugation reach production (equivalent to an example of the second production) and bowling reach production (equivalent to an example of the first production). One production can be selected. It is. That is, the super reach production is also a selection production. 409 (l-1) to (1-5) show the animation display of the defeat reach production, and the animation display of the boring reach production is shown in FIGS. 409 (m-1) to (m-5). Show. In FIG. 409, the frame screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 surrounded by a dotted line is the start frame screen in the animation of each reach effect (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, if the second condition is satisfied and the chance button 136 is not operated, the animation display of the subjugation reach effect is started from the beginning. That is, the subjugation reach production is the default production of the super reach production, and is selected first. As shown in the gray figure, the bowling reach production animation is also drawn in the back layer in synchronization with the subjugation reach production animation, but the player cannot recognize the display screen of the bowling reach production. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 409 (l-2), the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In other words, when the chance button 136 is operated while the display screen for the subjugation reach effect is active, the display screen for the bowling reach effect is activated as shown in FIG. 409 (m-3). The operation of the chance button 136 here is also an operation for selecting one kind of effect from a plurality of kinds of effects, and corresponds to an example of establishment of the first condition. The display screen of the bowling reach effect displayed here is a screen that is a continuation of the bowling reach effect that has been drawn in the inner layer so far, that is, a screen of an intermediate frame. On the other hand, the display screen of the subjugation reach effect that has been active until now becomes inactive, and the drawing process is continued in the lower (back) layer.

  Also, at the timing of FIG. 409 (m−3), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends (the remaining period is 0), but the chance button can be repeated any number of times as long as it is within the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The super reach production can be selected by operating 136. If it is a conventional pachinko machine, the selected reach was started from the beginning after the validity period of the button operation, but in this embodiment, it is necessary to direct the production using the operation validity period. In some cases, it is possible to obtain an effect that the production is not delayed. In addition, by assigning an operation effective period to the introduction part of each super reach production, it may be possible not to miss the main part of each reach.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 409 (m-4) and (l-4), the super-reach effect animation includes a cut-in image mc. The cut-in image mc is an image that overlaps the display that has been displayed so far, and the display that has been displayed so far becomes difficult to visually recognize. The cut-in image mc is a different image depending on the reliability of the big hit. For example, the higher the jackpot reliability, the larger the image, the appearance character may differ depending on the jackpot reliability, or the speech balloon may be different. Therefore, the cut-in image mc corresponds to an example of a main part of reach.

  It should be noted that the bowling reach animation and the subjugation reach animation may include the same display image, a similar display image, or a related display image (for example, a cut-in image mc).

  As shown in FIGS. 409 (m-4) and (l-4), in the final frame of the super reach effect, a display that tells whether or not a big hit is made is performed. Here, a display that fortune-telling the decorative symbols of the middle symbols that are changing is included.

  When the super reach effect ends, the special symbol variation display is terminated, the stop display is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol stop display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 409 (n), a combination of the big-decorated decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the 4th symbol of the special figure 1 is changed to a circle. Thereafter, the jackpot game is started, and the effects during the jackpot game will be described later.

  FIG. 410 is a diagram showing a modification example of the selection effect after FIG. 409 (k).

  The selection effect here starts from FIG. 410 (k ′). In this modified example, the active effect is switched every certain time (for example, one second) until the effect is selected. That is, the first production (boring reach production) and the second production (subjugation reach production) are alternately activated or deactivated at regular intervals. For this reason, in this modified example, the passage of a certain time from the start of the super reach production corresponds to the establishment of the first condition, and after the production is determined by the chance button 136, the selected production is It is executed continuously from the middle.

  When one second elapses from the time point of FIG. 410 (k ′), as shown in FIG. 410 (i′-1), the default subjugation reach effect is activated first, and after 2 seconds, the same figure (m As shown in '-2), this time the bowling reach production becomes active. Therefore, the first condition for starting the production of the first production (boring reach production) is satisfied 2 seconds after the selection production is started.

  As shown in FIG. 410 (l′-3), the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, and the subjugation reach effect is selected. As a result, after that, subjugation reach production continues and becomes active. In this way, the effect is determined by the button operation before the operation effective period ends, and the effect selected by the player including the remaining operation effective period can be executed, so that the effect can be performed without delaying. In some cases, it is possible to prompt the player to perform button operations quickly.

  Next, the effects during the big hit game will be described.

  FIG. 411 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect during a big hit game.

  In FIG. 411, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. Further, in FIG. 411, an animation effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a sound effect output from the speaker 120 are shown as musical scores.

  FIG. 411 (o) is a diagram illustrating the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 409 (n). In FIG. 411 (o), the big hit game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the big hit game. The production is displayed. The start of the big hit game corresponds to an example of establishment of the second condition.

  There are two types of effects during round digestion (round digestion effects): production A large board performance effect (corresponding to an example of the second effect) and production B 轟 GOGO effect (corresponding to an example of the first effect) Are provided, and one effect can be selected. That is, the round digest effect is also a selection effect. 411 (p-1) to FIG. 3 (p-3) show the animation display of the performance A large board performance, and FIG. 411 (q-1) to FIG. Shown in (q-4). In this example, the music (BGM) can be selected by operating the chance button 136 only in the first round of digestion, and FIGS. 411 (p-1) to (p-3) and FIG. In the animation shown in FIGS. 411 (q-1) to (q-3), a display prompting the user to select a song by operating the chance button 136 is displayed. As the songs, there are prepared a song with a production A large board effect and a song with a production B 轟 GOGO production, and the animation display is switched according to the selected song. That is, the display and sound are linked.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the second condition is satisfied, the loudspeaker 120 outputs an audible sound from the speaker 120, and the decorative symbol display device 208 outputs a large plate behavior of the effect A. Production animation is displayed from the beginning. That is, the large board performance effect of effect A is the default effect of the round digest effect, and is selected first. As shown in the gray figure, the song produced by 轟 GOGO is played internally in synchronization with the song produced by the large board performance, but is muted, and the song produced by 轟 GOGO is a game. Is unrecognizable. In addition, the animation of the 轟 GOGO effect is also drawn in the back layer in synchronization with the animation of the large board performance effect, but the player cannot recognize the display screen of the 轟 GOGO effect.

  When the chance button 136 is operated in the middle of one round, that is, at the timing when the frame reproduction in FIG. 411 (p-2) is finished, the music for the large board performance is muted and the volume value is set for the music for the 轟 GOGO effect. From the speaker 120, a song produced by 轟 GOGO is output as an audible sound. In addition, the display screen of 轟 GOGO production becomes active. The operation of the chance button 136 here is also an operation for selecting one kind of effect from a plurality of kinds of effects, and corresponds to an example of establishment of the first condition. The song of the “GOGO” effect started here is from the middle, and the animation of the “GOGO” effect is also from the middle.

  In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is a period during which one round is being executed, and the effect selected during the first round is continuously executed until the final round. Therefore, here, the 轟 GOGO effect is continuously executed until the final round. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, internal reproduction of the non-selected effect music is stopped, and the non-selected effect animation also stops the drawing process in the back layer. In the second and subsequent rounds, internal reproduction and drawing processing in the back layer may be continued.

  In FIG. 411 (q-4), the continuation of the song of the 轟 GOGO effect is output as an audible sound from the speaker 120, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the continuation of the animation display of the 轟 GOGO effect.

  FIG. 412 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect during the big hit game.

  Hereinafter, a description will be given focusing on differences from the example shown in FIG.

  In this example, power-on (see FIG. 412 (α)) corresponds to an example of the establishment of the third condition, and when the third condition is established, a large board performance effect of the production A (an example of the second production) The reproduction of both of the music of the equivalent) and the music of the production B 轟 GOGO production (corresponding to an example of the first production) are started internally. However, both are muted and cannot be recognized by the player.

  Thereafter, the jackpot is won, the jackpot game is started (see FIG. 412 (o)), and the second condition is also established. When the second condition is satisfied, an animation of a large board performance effect of effect A is displayed from the beginning on the decorative symbol display device 208 as in the example shown in FIG. On the other hand, since the internal playback of the song has been started since the power is turned on (the third condition is satisfied), it is output as an audible sound from the middle or by chance at the start timing of the first round. May be output from the beginning. That is, since the establishment timing of the second condition is irregular with respect to power-on, there may be a case where a variation can be provided in the combination of the display effect and the music effect.

  The chance button 136 is operated in the middle of one round, that is, at the timing when the frame reproduction in FIG. 412 (p-2) is finished, and the first condition is satisfied. When the first condition is satisfied, as in the example shown in FIG. 411, the music of the large board performance is muted, the volume value is set to the music of the 轟 GOGO effect, and the music of the 轟 GOGO effect is audible from the speaker 120. Is output from the middle. Also, the animation display of 轟 GOGO production becomes active halfway. Since the timing of establishment of the first condition is also irregular, there may be a case where a variation can be given to the combination of the display effect and the music effect.

  FIG. 413 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects based on RTC time information.

  Hereinafter, the description will focus on differences from the examples described so far.

  In this example as well, power-on (see FIG. 413 (α)) corresponds to an example of the establishment of the third condition, and when the third condition is established, a large board performance effect of production A (an example of the second production) The reproduction of both of the music of the equivalent) and the music of the production B 轟 GOGO production (corresponding to an example of the first production) are started internally. However, both are muted and cannot be recognized by the player.

  In this example, when the second condition is satisfied, the big hit game is not started, and the time information of the RTC (real time clock) becomes the predetermined time information. In FIG. 413 (r), the second condition is satisfied, and the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the effect of the number-length mode is executed is displayed with the characters “the event will start”. Note that the timing when the time information of the RTC (real time clock) becomes predetermined time information is the timing during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 during non-electric support. The control state may be an electric support state, a probability variation state, or a non-probability variation state.

  In this example, there are two types of events, the same as the round digest effect, a large board performance effect of effect A (corresponding to an example of the second effect) and a 轟 GOGO effect of effect B (corresponding to an example of the first effect). As shown in FIG. 413 (s-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the animation of the large board performance effect of effect A from the beginning. On the other hand, since the internal playback of the song has been started since the power is turned on (the third condition is established), it is output as an audible sound from the middle or accidentally at the beginning depending on the power-on timing. May be output from. That is, since the timing at which the third condition is satisfied (power-on timing) is irregular with respect to the RTC, there may be a case where there is a variation in the combination of the display effect and the music effect. In addition, in FIG. 413 (s-1), the losing symbol of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

  The chance button 136 is operated during the performance execution period by the RTC, that is, at the timing when the frame reproduction of FIG. 413 (s-2) is finished, and the first condition is satisfied. When the first condition is satisfied, as in the example shown in FIG. 411, the music of the large board performance is muted, the volume value is set to the music of the 轟 GOGO effect, and the music of the 轟 GOGO effect is audible from the speaker 120. Is output from the middle. Also, the animation display of 轟 GOGO production becomes active halfway. Also here, since the timing of establishment of the first condition is irregular, there may be a case where there is a variation in the combination of the display effect and the music effect. In addition, in FIG. 413 (s-2) and FIG. 413 (t-3), when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is being performed and the animation display of the selection effect based on the RTC time information is started, 4 symbols disappear.

  Note that the first condition taking as an example the button operation (more precisely, the operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136 received by the control means) may be the operation of the operation means itself. Further, it may be a condition that is established at the start of a big hit game (for example, selection of music, production, etc.), or may be a condition that is established during a big hit game (for example, at the time of selection of production such as probability change notification). Alternatively, the condition may be satisfied at the end of the big hit game (for example, music selection after the big hit, etc.). Further, the condition may be satisfied in relation to power-on (for example, an effect is executed in relation to RTC time information and the effect is started halfway at the time of power-on). Moreover, the conditions established using the time information of RTC may be sufficient. Further, the condition may be satisfied at the start of the demonstration production (for example, the demonstration production is started and switched from the second production to the demonstration production). Furthermore, a condition that is established by switching from the second effect to the first effect may be used.

  In addition, the term “start” used in this specification refers to a case where the player is in a recognizable state, and an effect performed in a state where the player cannot be recognized (difficult) is “start” ”May not be included, and“ execution ”may be interpreted as“ start ”.

  In addition, the first condition described here also includes an example in which the power-on itself is a direct or indirect trigger, a special condition fluctuation stop, a big hit game start, and RTC time information as an example. The same conditions as in other examples of the conditions may be used. Also, at the start of a big hit, etc. (assuming that the player's selection at the time of the selection effect is the first condition, the start of the effect before selection in the various selection effects described in the example of the first condition is the second condition It is good.

  Further, the first condition may function as the second condition, and the second condition may function as the first condition. Moreover, the structure by which at least one of a 1st effect and a 2nd effect is performed by 3rd conditions etc. which are other conditions may be sufficient.

  In addition, the first condition may be established in a state where the second effect is not executed or another effect such as the third effect is executed. In addition, when the second condition is satisfied, an arrangement other than the second effect may be performed first. Moreover, depending on the timing at which the first condition is satisfied, the first effect may be executed from the beginning. The second performance may also be started from the middle.

  Further, the first effect may not be an effect selected by the player by the selection operation. For example, it may be configured to be determined internally by lottery or the like, or an effect that should be selected from the beginning is determined, and an effect that makes it appear as if the player has made a pseudo-selection by operating a button There may be. Further, the second effect may not be synchronized with the first effect. Further, the second effect may be an effect that can be executed from the middle. Furthermore, the third effect or the like may be synchronized with at least one of the first effect and the second effect.

  Further, the first effect and the second effect may be constituted not only by the sound effect but also by a display effect, a lamp effect, or a combination thereof.

  In addition, the start position determination means that can determine at least the start position of the production when the condition is satisfied includes an accidental device in which the first production is performed behind the scene and becomes active. Including those determined by random number lottery or the like when the above condition is satisfied. In addition, the start position determination unit may determine a start position where the second effect is changed from active to inactive, or may be configured to be able to determine the start position of the third effect. Further, the first to sixth effects may all be started halfway through the determination of the start position determining means, or only a part of the effects may be started halfway.

  In addition, the start position determining means determines the start position of the first effect in addition to the one that activates the first effect that has progressed in accordance with the timing at which the first condition is satisfied and the effect is proceeding simultaneously. It may be selected from a plurality of patterns by random lottery, etc., or a special figure or ordinary game state (probability / non-probability change state or electric support / non-electric support state), a sub-control means effect mode, a player-specific It may be determined in association with whether or not the original mode is set.

  In addition, the first effect to the sixth effect may be effects that can all be synchronized, may be effects that can be partially synchronized, or all are independent and asynchronous. There may be. In addition, it may be possible to execute all of the first production to the sixth production at the same time on one game stand, or any one of the productions may be selected, or a plurality of games The structure which synchronizes with a stand may be sufficient.

  In addition, an error may occur during the synchronized performance execution period, but the error may be prioritized according to the type of error, and either the error or the synchronized performance is prioritized regardless of the type of error. It may be.

  Furthermore, with regard to synchronization (synchronization), for example, music A and music B are the same music, and music B is delayed from music A by a good amount (for example, one measure, one phrase, or one word). Synchronization is achieved by flowing. For example, it may be an example such that “... / Frog song is heard / audible” in response to “frog song is heard / audible / waggwagwatsu”. In order to do this, after the first condition is established, the execution of the first effect may be delayed to perform control for matching the timing. Further, the music B may be in a relationship of complementing at least a part of the music A. For example, even if the music A is a chorus and the music B is in a relationship such as a main vocal, the synchronization is realized. Furthermore, the synchronization is also realized by stereo-playing one piece of music A and music B. Moreover, when synchronizing with one game machine, you may make a speaker correspond to every music. For example, the music A may be output from a first speaker (for example, a left speaker), and the music B may be output from a second speaker (for example, a right speaker). Furthermore, the structure which synchronizes with another game machine may be sufficient, synchronizing with one game machine. For example, a music piece (music A) that is shifted by one measure may be played on the game table A, and may be played with a further shift from the music piece A on the game table B. The amount to be shifted may be constant (for example, one bar) or variable.

  In addition, as described above, with regard to music synchronization (synchronization), the first effect and the second effect are completely other than when the first effect and the second effect are delayed by a certain amount (for example, one bar). Although it is different from the above, even if the two are combined and heard as one piece of music, or the second effect complements the cut portion in the first effect, it can be interpreted as a synchro.

  Each example and modification described in the drawings can be combined with each other as long as there is no inconvenience or contradiction. For example, the first condition and the second condition are swapped, the production starts only from the middle, starts only from the beginning, sometimes from the middle, sometimes from the beginning Also good.

[Twenty-second embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, with reference to FIGS. 414 to 426 for a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention, using the drawings. However, it explains in detail. Note that the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 and the contents of various processes in the present embodiment are substantially the same as those in the eighteenth embodiment, and therefore, different configurations from the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be illustrated and described below. The same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the eighteenth embodiment unless otherwise specified, and illustration and detailed description thereof are omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although not particularly illustrated, a second output setting switch 194 and a setting operation unit 195 as shown in FIG. 221 are provided on the upper left of the first sub-board case 162. The setting operation unit 195 has the configuration described above with reference to FIG. 260, for example.

  FIG. 414 is a timing chart illustrating an example of an operation related to the effect B after the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. In the present embodiment, the effect B is an effect similar to the link effect (effect B) described above in the eighteenth embodiment, and is an effect executed in a specific state to be described later. That is, this effect B is an effect that starts immediately after the power is turned on, as in the eighteenth embodiment described above, but is configured such that the contents of the effect are manifested in a specific state. Therefore, when the power is turned on all at once for a plurality of pachinko machines 100 installed on the amusement island, they are executed in synchronization (linked) with a plurality of pachinko machines 100 in a specific state. It has become a production.

  In FIG. 414, the progress state of the production B, the execution state of the big hit game, the electric support state, the execution state of the production B, the invalid period of the production B, and the production B by the display means (decorative symbol display device 208) in order from the top. Display / non-display state, output / non-output state of effect B by speaker 120, execution / non-execution state of effect B by various lamps (LEDs), execution / non-execution of effect B by effect movable means (effect movable body 224) The execution state is shown. Here, the electric support state is a gaming state including a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state) and a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (short time state). The invalid period of the effect B is a period that is set to mask the execution of the effect B even in the execution state. In the present embodiment, for example, when the game shifts to the big hit game in the electric support state. The period during which the jackpot game is being executed is set as the invalid period of the effect B. Note that “effect B”, “display means”, “various lamps (LED)”, and “effect movable means” are expressed as “execution / non-execution”, but expressed as “output / non-output”. You can also. In other words, there is a case of “outputting” making the contents of the effect manifest by these effect means (interface).

  As shown in FIG. 414, when the timing t0 comes after the power is turned on, the timer circuit 652 (see FIG. 276) starts counting, and the first sub-control unit 400 starts the effect control by the effect B. The However, in this case, since it is not executed by any of the display means, the speaker, the LED, and the effect moving means, the player cannot recognize that the effect B is being performed. Here, production B is divided into production parts of production B1, production B2 and production B3, and is executed continuously in this order. Then, when the effect B3 is finished (when the effect B3 ends), the effect B1 is started. That is, the effect B is a loop effect by the effects B1, B2, and B3, and is configured to be repeatedly executed without interruption until the power is turned off.

  Then, after shifting to the big hit game with normal big hit (shifting to the execution state of the big hit game), when the big hit game is finished at the timing of t1 (shifting to the non-execution state of the big hit game), the electric support is operated from the non-operating state. Transition to the state. That is, the time shifts to a short time state. At this timing, the execution state of effect B shifts from the non-execution state to the execution state. At this time, in the first sub-control unit 400, the display control and the voice control related to the effect B are repeatedly executed internally, so that the display means (decorative symbol display device 208) and the speaker 120 are in the state where the effect B is executed. In this case, the display content at that time can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the music at that time can be output from the speaker 120. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 414, the display content at the timing t1 in the effect part of the effect B2 is displayed, and the music is output. For the effect display and audio output, the effect is not started at the timing t1, but the effect is started at a timing that is good for control or effect, such as the time when the next effect part is started. Also good. In addition, the effect by the lamp (LED) and the effect by the effect movable body 224 are executed when the operation data is set when the effect B is started. The timing is started after the start of the display by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the start of the audio output from the speaker 120 by adjusting the timing with other effect means. In particular, the production movable body 224 may be difficult to physically operate in cooperation with other production means even when the production B is started. Since it is necessary to prepare for the cooperation with the production means, the production is started after the production display and audio output. That is, for the light emitting means and the effect moving means among the plurality of effect means, the effect operation is started after the effect operation related to the effect B (first effect) by the display means and the sound output means is started. It can be said that it is configured as follows. Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp (LED) is, for example, right-handed to prompt a right-handed strike after the end of the big hit game and before the production by the production B is started. In order to execute the effect in the notification mode, lamp control data (for example, the extinguishing data) for performing the right-handed notification effect is set in the form of being overwritten on the lamp control data for executing the effect B. Note that the effect B may be executed without performing the right-handed notification effect by the lamp. Even in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is played, there may be a case where the effect B is not executed depending on whether the probability change state or the short-time state. In this case, when the lamp control data for performing the right-handed notification effect is configured to overwrite the lamp control data for performing the effect B, the right-handed game is switched to the gaming state in which the game is performed with the right-handed game. If the lamp control data for performing the effect B is overwritten with the lamp control data for performing the right-handed notification effect, the electric support for executing the effect B is surely executed. In the state (one of the probability change state or the time reduction state), the effect in the right-handed notification mode by the lamp is not executed, and only in the electric support state (the other of the probability change state or the time reduction state) that does not execute the effect B, The effect in the right-handed notification mode by the ramp is executed.

  Subsequently, at the timing t2, the light emission effect by the lamp (LED) related to the effect B is started. In the present embodiment, for example, when the effect B is started, a data table storing the blinking pattern of the lamp to be executed next is set, and the start timing of the light emission effect based on the set data table (for example, In the present embodiment, it is configured such that a light emission effect by a lamp (LED) is started when it becomes t2 timing). Further, the timing of t2 may be a timing at which the effect in the right-handed notification mode ends. In the present embodiment, with such a configuration, there may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced with simple control.

  Subsequently, at the timing of t3, an effect operation by the effect movable body 224 related to the effect B is started. At this timing, effect display by the decorative symbol display device 208, output of music by the speaker 120, various lamps (LEDs) 418, game board lamps 532, game table frame lamps 542 (hereinafter referred to as "various lamps 418, etc."). The production B is performed by integrating all of the light emission production and the production operation by the production movable body 224. In the present embodiment, for example, when the production B starts, a data table storing the operation pattern of the production movable body 224 to be executed next is set and the production movable body 224 based on the set data table is set. The effect movable body 224 is moved in advance to an operation start position (sometimes referred to as a standby position), and waits until the timing t3. Note that the standby position of the effect movable body 224 may be changed according to the contents of the set data table. In addition, in the operation pattern of the effect movable body 224 related to the effect B without moving to the standby position, the operation related to the effect B is triggered by the timing of the initial position (this timing may be the timing of t3). You may make it start. In this case, for example, the operation of the effect movable body 224 related to the effect B may not be started unless the timing of the initial position comes in the operation pattern of the effect movable body 224.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started at the timing of t4, since the big hit game is started in the electric support state, the invalid period of the effect B is set. For this reason, the effect B is maintained in the execution state, but the effect movable body 224 such as the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, the various lamps 418, and the like are all in the non-execution state. In this case, the operation of the effect movable body 224 performs control to interrupt the operation and return the effect movable body 224 to the initial position even during the operation based on the operation data related to the effect B. Even if the effects of other effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, various lamps 418, etc.) end, the operation of the effect movable body 224 is a so-called sharp point (for example, operation data is stored). It may be executed until the end of the rendering operation based on the data table being executed out of the plurality of data tables to be configured. Further, after the operation of the effect movable body 224 is interrupted (immediately after), the next operation (action for big hit) may be executed. Moreover, you may make it continue not only the effect movable body 224 but the part or all of other effect means to the point where the sharpness is good. When the big hit game is started, the electric support state becomes a non-operating state.

  After that, when the big hit game ends at the timing of t5, the electric support again shifts from the non-operating state to the operating state and becomes the time-saving state. At this timing, the invalid period of the effect B is canceled, and the effect B by the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, the various lamps 418, and the effect movable body 224 is resumed. As described above, first, the display content at the timing t5 is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, and the music is output. In other words, as shown in FIG. 414, the production part of production B1 is executed at the timing of t5, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the display content related to the production B1 at time t5. The music related to the production B1 at the timing t5 is output. Thereafter, in the manner described above, the light emission effect by the lamp (LED) related to the effect B is started at the timing of t6, and the effect by the effect movable body 224 related to the effect B is started at the timing of t7.

  Then, when the fluctuation of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the electric support state and the electric support state changes from the operating state to the non-operating state at the timing t8, the condition for ending the effect B is satisfied. However, since the production B1 is still in the middle of the production at the timing of t8, as shown by the broken line in the drawing, if the production B is terminated at this timing, it is terminated halfway and the interest may be lowered. is there. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the end condition of the effect B is satisfied, the effect B is continuously performed up to the end position of the effect part being executed. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 414, the effect B is continuously performed until the effect B1 ends at the timing of t9. Then, at the timing t9, the execution state of the effect B becomes the non-execution state, and the effect movable body 224 such as the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, and the various lamps 418 ends the effect related to the effect B. In the present embodiment, as shown by the broken line in the figure, the production B may be ended at the timing of t8 even during the production. At this time, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display of the last special figure (for example, the 100th rotation after the transition to the electric support state) that the condition for ending the effect B is satisfied, a fade-out effect described later is performed, The normal effect may be started at the timing when the next special drawing variation display is started. Also, at the timing of t8, the production B may be forcibly ended at that time to start the normal production.

  In the present embodiment, for example, at the time when an effect part being executed (for example, effect B1) is completed, for example, at the time when the effect part being executed (for example, effect B1) is ended, the normal effect is started after the effect B is ended. In the case where the variable display is being performed, for example, a display that gives an expectation that the production B will be performed again (for example, a character display or an animation display such as “Look forward to the next time”). Until the next variable display is completed, and when the next special figure variable display starts, the normal production is started. Note that, for example, a fade-out effect is performed at a timing that is a predetermined time before (for example, 5 seconds before) the end position of the effect part being executed, and the player may be made aware that the effect B ends. Good. Although the fade-out effect can be arbitrarily configured, for example, the effect display related to the effect B being executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 is gradually darkened, and the volume of the music output from the speaker 120 is also gradually increased. This may be realized by gradually reducing the brightness of the lamp (LED) and moving the effect movable body 224 to the initial position at a constant speed. In addition, the fade-out effect may be executed only by some of the effect means. Further, for example, the display of the effect B may be scrolled out of the screen and the display of the normal effect may be scrolled in, or the display of the effect B may be gradually reduced to fade out. Also good. Further, the display of the effect B may be switched to the display of the normal effect by using a so-called stage change effect method.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the electric support state shifts, the effect related to the effect B is started. However, the effect related to the effect B starts from the start of the big hit game that shifts to the electric support state. It may be configured to be.

  FIG. 415 is a diagram for explaining a specific effect example of effect B as an example of the link effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 416 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example of effect B shown in FIG. FIG. 417 is a diagram showing a continuation of a specific effect example of effect B shown in FIG.

  FIG. 415 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a general symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. That is, it is stopped and displayed with a combination of 15R big hit symbols. The background here is not particularly shown, but a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  FIG. 415 also shows the pachinko machine 100, the speaker 120, and the effect movable body 224. In the pachinko machine 100, various lamps 418 and the like are turned on according to the contents of the effect, an effect sound according to the contents of the effect is output from the speaker 120, and the effect movable body 224 is displaced according to the contents of the effect. . In the present embodiment, a lamp (LED) 418 is also provided inside the effect movable body 224, and the effect movable body 224 itself is configured to emit light from the inside. In FIG. 6A, the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect at the time of symbol determination, and various lamps 418 and the like are lit with the lighting pattern at the time of symbol determination, and the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position. It is in a stopped state.

  FIG. 2B shows a state in which a big hit game has started and a big hit start effect is being performed. That is, on the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display indicating that the big hit is normally started is performed, and a big hit start effect sound indicating that the big hit starts is output from the speaker 120. In addition, in the various lamps 418 and the like, the lamps are lit with the lighting pattern for the big hit start effect, and the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position.

  FIG. 6 (c) shows a state where the final round (for example, the 15th round) in the big hit game is finished and the big hit end effect is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the jackpot game is over, an effect display indicating that the state is shifted to the short-time state is performed, and from the speaker 120, a jackpot end effect sound indicating that the jackpot ends is output. In addition, in the various lamps 418 and the like, the lamps are lit in the lighting pattern for the big hit end effect, and the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the initial position. In this embodiment, since it was a normal big hit, after the big hit game, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (hereinafter referred to as “electric support”) until the special figure change display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). State "or" short-time state ").

  When the big hit game is finished and the state shifts to the short time state, as shown in FIG. 4D, the effect B as an example of the link effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 4D, a variation icon display region 280 is provided at the lower center of the effect display region 208d, and on the left side of the variation icon display region 280 is shown in FIG. A hold icon display area 282 is provided. In addition, a hold icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed vertically, the lower hold icon is the older hold icon, and in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2, the hold icons are displayed side by side. The higher the hold icon on the right, the older the win icon is.

  4D, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and these four hold icons h11, All of h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. Note that the reserved icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed.

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In addition, in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “short time” indicating the electric support state and the remaining number of symbol variation displays in which the electric support state is maintained are displayed side by side. Yes.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6D, when the electric support state is started, the effect display related to the effect B as an example of the link effect is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 4D shows that, for example, the production part of production B2 that constitutes production B is being executed. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 starts from the production contents corresponding to the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652 that starts timing after the power is turned on, the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652 is set. According to this, there may be a case where the production starts from the beginning of the production B2, or there is a case where the production starts from the middle of the production B2. In addition, in the same figure (d), a mode that it has started from the middle of production B2 is shown.

  Also, in the speaker 120, the output of the music related to the effect B2 is started so as to synchronize with the display content on the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the music output from the speaker 120 also starts from the content corresponding to the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652 may start from the beginning of the effect B2. However, it may start from the middle of the production B2. In addition, in the same figure (d), a mode that it has started from the middle of production B2 is shown. In the present embodiment, the effect display related to the effect B by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the output of the music related to the effect B output from the speaker 120 are started simultaneously, but after the effect display is started. The output of the music may be started, and the effect display may be started after the output of the music is started.

  In addition, in the figure (d), the production | presentation by the lamp which concerns on the production B by various lamps 418 grade | etc., Is not started. In the present embodiment, when the electric support state is started, various lamps 418 and the like are used for an effect that suggests a player to make a right strike (right strike notification effect). Until the notification effect ends, the start of the lamp effect related to the effect B is reserved. It is also possible to start the effect related to the effect B simultaneously with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 when the electric support state is started without performing the right-handed notification effect by the various lamps 418 and the like. In this embodiment, the lighting effect of the lamp related to the effect B does not depend on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, and the effect state at the start time of the effect related to the effect B is determined, and the lamp corresponding thereto The lighting pattern table is read from the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 and set, the lighting effect of the lamp related to the effect B is started at the start timing of the set pattern table, and various lamps are set according to the set pattern table. 418 and the like are configured to be turned on, turned off, or blinking. Therefore, the effect by the lamps related to the effect B by the various lamps 418 and the like is started at a timing later than the effect display and the output of the music. For example, the lighting control of the lamp may be configured to start from the content corresponding to the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, and may be started at the same time as the effect display or the output of the music.

  In addition, in the same figure (d), the production operation related to production B by production movable body 224 is not started. In the present embodiment, when the production B is started, the production B is not always started from the beginning, and for example, it is physically impossible to execute the production from the middle of the data table for operating the production movable body 224. is there. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect state at the start of the effect related to effect B is determined, and the operation data table of the effect movable body 224 corresponding to this is read from the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 and set. As described above, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a command instructing the second sub control unit 500. When the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 receives this command, the CPU 504 reads the corresponding operation data table from the ROM 506 and expands it in the RAM 508 to perform setting. Then, by performing the preparation operation before the operation start timing of the production movable body 224, the production operation related to the production B can be smoothly started, and the production can be produced in synchronization with other production means. It can be done. Therefore, the effect movable body 224 starts the effect related to the effect B at a timing later than other effect means (the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 4E, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a right-handed notification image for promoting the right-handedness to the player. This right-handed notification image is an image in which a character display of “right-handed” is attached on a translucent white belt-like image whose back side is visible. Note that the white band image of the right-handed notification image may not be translucent and the back side may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, when a predetermined error such as a lower pan full tank error or a door opening error occurs during the execution of the production B, an error display is performed so as to overlap the production display related to the production B, and the production related to the production B is performed. A part of the display may not be visible.

  Further, in FIG. 5E, a voice notification that prompts the user to make a right turn may be output from the speaker 120. This voice notification is performed by, for example, outputting a voice “Please turn right”. During the output of the voice notification, the volume value of the music related to the production B may be decreased or may be set to zero. Further, even when a predetermined error occurs during the execution of the production B, the volume value of the error notification sound is set to the maximum value so that the volume value of the music related to the production B is reduced or set to zero. Good.

  In FIG. 5E, the effect of the lamp related to the effect B by the various lamps 418 and the like has not started, and the right-handed notification effect is continuously performed. Also, the effect movable body 224 has not yet started the effect operation related to the effect B, and remains at the initial position. In addition, when a predetermined error occurs during the execution of the production B, the various lamps 418 and the like may be caused to emit light by the error notification light emission mode in preference to the light emission production of the lamp related to the production B. .

  FIG. 416 (f) shows a state in which the right-handed notification image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and the output of the voice notification for prompting the right-handed strike output from the speaker 120 is also completed. Yes. Therefore, the volume value of the music related to the effect B output from the speaker 120 is the maximum.

  Further, in FIG. 5F, the effect by the lamp related to the effect B by the various lamps 418 and the like is started. In other words, at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the execution related to the effect B displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the execution start timing of the lamp lighting pattern table set as described above. Various lamps 418 and the like blink so as to synchronize with the music related to the display B or the output B output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 8F, the effect movable body 224 has not yet started the effect operation related to the effect B, and remains in the initial position.

  Subsequently, in the same figure (g), in order to smoothly start the production operation related to the production B by the production movable body 224, the production movable body 224 is moved to the position corresponding to the operation data table set as described above. Perform the preparatory action to move. That is, in order to be able to accurately perform an operation based on the set operation data table, the effect movable body 224 is moved in advance to the operation start position determined by the set operation data table, and is made to wait at that position. Keep it. The operation start position may be different depending on the set operation data table, or may be the same. Further, such a preparatory operation may not be performed.

  Subsequently, in the same figure (h), the effect operation related to the effect B by the effect movable body 224 is performed according to the operation data table set as described above. As a result, the effect related to the effect B is synchronized with the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means, the speaker 120 as the sound output means, the various lamps 418 as the light emitting means, and the effect movable body 224 as the effect movable means. Will be done. In this embodiment, the operation is started from the head of the set operation data table. However, the operation may be started from the middle of the operation data table. In the present embodiment, as described above, the player can arbitrarily set the luminance and volume value of the lamp. However, during execution of the effect B, the luminance value and volume of the lamp set by the player are set. Regardless of the value, both may be configured to be the maximum value, and when a normal performance is performed, it may be configured such that the performance is performed based on the luminance value and volume value of the lamp set by the player.

  Then, when the production part of the production B2 is finished, the production part of the production B3 is continuously started from the head as shown in FIG. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a song name indicating the content of the effect B3 to be executed is displayed, and on the speaker 120, the music related to the effect B3 is output from the head. The various lamps 418 and the production movable body 224 also operate so that the production is performed in synchronization with the music output from the speaker 120. Note that (i) in the figure shows that the remaining number of symbol variation displays in which the electric support state is maintained is 20 times.

  FIG. 417 (j) shows a state in which the effect part B3 of effect B is being performed. Further, FIG. 6 (j) shows a state in which the last symbol variation display in which the electric support state is maintained is completed. In the present embodiment, the end of the power support state is the end condition of the effect B. However, in the same figure (j), since the production B3 is in the middle of the production, as shown in the same figure (k), the production B3 is finished even after the electric support state is finished and the state is shifted to the normal state. Until the end of production B3 (that is, until the end position of production B3), the production related to production B3 is performed. In the present embodiment, when the end condition for the production B is satisfied, even if the production of the production B3 is in the middle, the production B4 to be described later may be started immediately, and the production B4 may be started. It is also possible to start the normal production without any problem.

  Thereafter, when the production B3 is finished, the production part of the production B4, which is the production to the effect B, is continuously started as shown in FIG. The effect part of the effect B4 is an effect that is not included in the loop effect in the effect B, and is an effect part that is specially provided to notify the end of the effect B. As shown in (l) of the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the display of the effect B and gives an expectation for the start of the next effect B (for example, “LIVE end. Is displayed). Then, an effect sound corresponding to the effect B4 is output from the speaker 120, and the various lamps 418 and the like are also turned on, turned off, or blinked in a lighting pattern corresponding to the effect B4. On the other hand, the effect movable body 224 ends the effect operation related to the effect B, moves to the initial position, and enters a standby state. The effect movable body 224 may be operated even during the execution of the effect B4. This effect B4 is continuously performed until the symbol variation display being executed is completed, as shown in FIG. 5 (m), the symbol variation display is terminated, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. When the change display of the symbol is started, the effect related to the effect B4 is finished, and the normal effect is started. In the present embodiment, the effect B4 may be ended before the symbol variation display ends, and the normal effect may be started. Further, after the effect B3 is finished, the normal effect may be started without executing the effect B4.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been given of the effect B that can be started from the effect content corresponding to the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, but the effect B that can be started from the effect content corresponding to the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652 is. Another effect (for example, effect F) may be configured to be executable. The effect F is, for example, an animation effect managed by data different from the effect B, and may be generated in synchronization with the effect B.

  FIG. 418 is a diagram showing a state in which a plurality of pachinko machines A and B that are in the electric support state are performing a link effect in synchronization. In FIG. 418, (a-1) and (b-1) are the same timing in time, (a-2) and (b-2) are the same timing in time, (a -3) and (b-3) have the same timing in time, (a-4) and (b-4) have the same timing in time, and (a-5) and (b) -5) is the same timing in time. It is assumed that the pachinko machines A and B are installed, for example, on the same game island and are turned on at the same time.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the timer circuit 652 as the above-described time measuring means, and when a specific production state is entered, such as when the electric support state is started, the time after the power is turned on (timer The effect B as the link effect is started from the effect content corresponding to the counter value indicated by the circuit 652. Therefore, when power is turned on at the same timing for the same type of pachinko machine 100 installed on the amusement island, the same performance is performed in synchronism between the pachinko machines 100 in a specific performance state. In some cases, it is possible to improve interest.

  The figure (a-1) has shown the mode of the effect in the pachinko machine 100A which is a normal game state. As shown in (a-1) in the figure, since the pachinko machine 100A is not in a specific performance state, a normal performance is performed.

  On the other hand, (b-1) of the same figure shows the state of production in the pachinko machine 100B in the electric support state and in a specific production state. In the same figure (b-1), the mode immediately after the production | presentation which concerns on production parts of production B2 which comprises the production B mentioned above is shown. As shown in FIG. 5B-1, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the title of the effect B2 to be executed, and the speaker 120 outputs the song related to the effect B2. In addition, the effect movable body 224, the various lamps 418, and the like operate according to the effect content related to the effect B2.

  The figure (a-2) shows a situation where the result of the symbol variation display is 15R big hit. On the other hand, FIG. 2B-2 shows a state where the continuation of FIG. 1B-1 is performed.

  (A-3) of the same figure shows a state immediately after the big hit game ends and shifts to the electric support state. As shown in (a-3) in the figure, the pachinko machine 100A is in a specific effect state due to the transition to the electric support state, so the effect B is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display is started in the middle of the effect B2 corresponding to the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652. In addition, the music related to the effect B2 is started from the middle in synchronism with the effect display related to the effect B2. On the other hand, the production related to the production B2 by the production movable body 224 and the various lamps 418 has not yet started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a right-handed notification image is displayed, and a right-handed notification effect is performed by various lamps 418 and the like.

  On the other hand, FIG. 7B-3 shows a state where the continuation of FIG. 9B-2 is performed. At this time, the contents of the effect display related to the effect B2 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100B are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100A shown in FIG. The content of the effect display related to the effect B2 being performed is synchronized. This is because the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 in the pachinko machine 100A is substantially the same as the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 in the pachinko machine 100B. That is, both the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B are attached to the same game island, and the power is turned on at the same timing, so the count start timing of the timer circuit 652 is substantially the same. Therefore, the production can be synchronized between the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B. The music related to the production B2 output from the speaker 120 is also synchronized with the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B.

  FIG. 4A-4 shows a state where the continuation of FIG. 4A-3 is performed. At this time, in the pachinko machine 100A, an effect by the lamp related to the effect B2 by the various lamps 418 and the like is started.

  On the other hand, FIG. 4B-4 shows a state where the continuation of FIG. 5B-3 is performed. At this time, in the pachinko machine 100B, in addition to the effect display related to the effect B2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the music related to the effect B2 output from the speaker 120, the effect of the lamp related to the effect B2 by the various lamps 418 and the like is also pachinko. Synchronization with the machine 100A is started. That is, both the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B are turned on, off, and blinking at approximately the same timing, and the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B achieve a sense of unity. .

  (A-5) of the same figure shows a state where the continuation of (a-4) of the same figure is performed. At this time, in the pachinko machine 100A, an effect operation related to the effect B2 by the effect movable body 224 is started.

  On the other hand, FIG. 5B-5 shows a state where the continuation of FIG. 5B-4 is performed. At this time, in the pachinko machine 100B, in addition to the effect display related to the effect B2 on the decorative symbol display device 208, the music related to the effect B2 output from the speaker 120, and the effect based on the lamp related to the effect B2 such as various lamps 418, the effect is movable. The production operation related to the production B2 by the body 224 is also started to synchronize with the pachinko machine 100A. That is, the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100A and the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100B perform the same operation at substantially the same timing, and the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B provide a more integrated feeling. It has been realized.

  In this embodiment, since it is configured as described above, it is possible to synchronize the performance between the pachinko machines 100 in a specific performance state such as an electric support state.

  Hereinafter, an execution example of the effect B (for example, link effect) will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Example I>
FIG. 419 (a) is a timing chart showing the first embodiment showing the execution state of effect B. FIG. In the embodiment described below, the rectangular block shown at the top of each timing chart represents the effect B divided by the effect part (for example, the effect B1, the effect B2, the effect B3, etc.). The “state A” in the gaming state indicates one or more states among a big hit state, an electric support state, a probability change state, a short time state, a normal gaming state, and a non-electric support state. In these states, a state where a certain condition (for example, after the end of the big hit game until 30 symbol variations are executed) may be set as “state A”. In addition, the “output state of the effect means” includes the decorative design display device 208 as the display means, the speaker 120 as the sound output means, various lamps 418 as the light emission means, and the effect movable body 224 as the effect movable means. The contents of the effect being executed by one or more of these are shown, and “non-effect B” indicates that an effect other than effect B is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A”, and the condition for executing the effect B is not satisfied. The effect (non-effect B) is executed.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T1 is reached, the game condition shifts from “non-state A” to “state A”, whereby the execution condition of effect B is satisfied. At this time, the effect B3 is being executed internally, and each effect means starts the effect from the middle of the effect B3 according to the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 at the timing T1.

  After that, at the timing of T2, the game condition shifts from “state A” to “non-state A”, whereby the condition for ending effect B is satisfied. Here, as an example of the case where the gaming state transitions from “state A” to “non-state A”, for example, the transition from the time-saving state to the normal state, the transition from the big hit gaming state to the probability variation state, The condition is that the game state transition occurs under the control of the main control circuit 300, such as the transition to the state or the change of the variation pattern table to be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, at the timing of T2, the effect related to the effect B3 is in the middle, so at this timing, the effect B is not ended, and each effect means continues the effect related to the effect B3.

  Thereafter, when the effect related to the effect B3 ends and the timing of T3 comes, each effect means does not execute the effect B1 and starts the effect related to the effect B4. That is, when the effect B4 is executed, the player is notified that the link effect ends. In the present embodiment, the effect B4 is an effect part that constitutes the effect B, but is an effect part prepared separately from the effect part that is repeatedly executed. The effect B4 is performed, for example, until the symbol variation display being executed ends. The production content is not included in the production B, and the execution state of the production B is changed from the “execution state” to the “non-execution state” at the timing T3, and the production B4 is started. There may be.

  When the current symbol variation display is finished and the timing of T4 is reached, the effect relating to the effect B4 by each effecting unit is terminated, and the effect related to the normal symbol variation display (non-display) is started with the start of the next symbol variation display. An example of effect B) is started.

<Example II>
FIG. 419 (b) is a timing chart showing the second embodiment showing the execution state of effect B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A” and the condition for executing the effect B is not satisfied. The effect (non-effect B) is executed.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T1 is reached, the game condition shifts from “non-state A” to “state A”, whereby the execution condition of effect B is satisfied. At this time, the effect B3 is being executed internally, and each effect means starts the effect from the middle of the effect B3 according to the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 at the timing T1.

  In the present embodiment, after the effects related to the effect B3 are ended at the timing of T2, each effect means does not execute the effect B1 and starts the effect related to the effect B4. This effect B4 is performed until the end condition of the effect B is satisfied when the gaming state shifts from “state A” to “non-state A” at the timing of T3.

<Example III>
FIG. 420 (a) is a timing chart showing the third embodiment showing the execution state of effect B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A”, and the condition for executing the effect B is not satisfied. The effect (non-effect B) is executed.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T1 is reached, the game condition shifts from “non-state A” to “state A”, whereby the execution condition of effect B is satisfied. At this time, the effect B3 is being executed internally, and each effect means starts the effect from the middle of the effect B3 according to the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 at the timing T1.

  Thereafter, at the timing of T3, the game condition shifts from “state A” to “non-state A”, whereby the condition for ending production B is satisfied. In the present embodiment, at the timing of T3, the effect related to the effect B3 is in the middle, but at this timing, the effect B3 ends, and each effect means starts the effect related to the effect B4. This effect B4 is performed, for example, until the symbol variation display being executed is completed. That is, in this embodiment, when the end condition of the effect B is satisfied, the effect related to the effect part of the effect B that is being executed (for example, the effect B3) is forcibly ended without performing it to the end.

  When the current symbol variation display is finished and the timing of T4 is reached, the effect relating to the effect B4 by each effecting unit is terminated, and the effect related to the normal symbol variation display (non-display) is started with the start of the next symbol variation display. An example of effect B) is started.

<Example IV>
FIG. 420 (b) is a timing chart showing the fourth embodiment showing the execution state of effect B.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A” and the condition for executing the effect B is not satisfied. The effect (non-effect B) is executed.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T1 is reached, the game condition shifts from “non-state A” to “state A”, whereby the execution condition of effect B is satisfied. At this time, the effect B3 is being executed internally, and each effect means starts the effect from the middle of the effect B3 according to the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 at the timing T1.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined effect pre-termination condition is established at the timing of T2, even if the effect B3 is in the middle, it is ended, and each effect means starts the effect related to the effect B4. The production pre-end condition is, for example, a condition that is established before the game state is changed, and is, for example, a predetermined number of times before the symbol variation display that the time-short state or ST (special time) state ends (for example, This is established when the symbol variation display before 5 rotations ends, or when a round of a predetermined number of rounds before the final round of the big hit game (for example, 1 round before) ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing of T3, the game condition shifts from “state A” to “non-state A”, whereby the condition for ending production B is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the timing T3 comes, the effect B4 is ended, and then the effect related to the normal symbol variation display (an example of the non-effect B) is started.

<Example V>
FIG. 420 (c) is a timing chart illustrating a fifth example showing the execution state of effect B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A”, and the condition for executing the effect B is not satisfied. The effect (non-effect B) is executed.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T1 is reached, the game condition shifts from “non-state A” to “state A”, whereby the execution condition of effect B is satisfied. At this time, the effect B3 is being executed internally, and each effect means starts the effect from the middle of the effect B3 according to the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 at the timing T1.

  Thereafter, at the timing of T3, the game condition shifts from “state A” to “non-state A”, whereby the condition for ending production B is satisfied. In this example, at the timing of T3, the effect related to the effect B3 is in the middle. However, at this timing, the effect B3 ends, and unlike the example shown in FIG. For example, an effect (an example of non-effect B) related to a normal symbol variation display is started.

<Example VI>
FIG. 421 (a) is a timing chart showing the sixth embodiment showing the execution state of effect B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A”, and the condition for executing the effect B is not satisfied. The effect (non-effect B) is executed.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T1 is reached, the game condition shifts from “non-state A” to “state A”, whereby the execution condition of effect B is satisfied. At this time, the effect B2 is being executed internally, and each effect means starts the effect from the middle of the effect B2 according to the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 at the timing T1. Then, when the production B2 is finished, the production related to the production B3 is subsequently started by each production means.

  Thereafter, in the present embodiment, the end condition for effect B is satisfied at the timing of T3. For example, a predetermined period from the start of the production B (for example, a period from the start of the production B to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the symbol variation display is performed, or a predetermined time after the big hit starts. T3 when a period until a round (for example, a round before the last round) ends or a period until a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes elapses after the production B starts) elapses. The end condition of the production B may be satisfied at the timing. In the present embodiment, since the effect related to the effect B3 is in the middle at the timing of T3, the effect B does not end at this timing, and each effect means continues the effect related to the effect B3.

  Thereafter, at the timing of T4, the gaming state shifts from “state A” to “non-state A”, but each effecting unit continues the effect related to effect B3.

  Thereafter, when the effect related to the effect B3 ends and the timing of T5 is reached, each effect means does not execute the effect B1 and starts the effect related to the effect B4. That is, when the effect B4 is executed, the player is notified that the link effect ends. The effect B4 is performed, for example, until the symbol variation display being executed ends.

  When the current symbol variation display is finished and the timing of T6 is reached, the effect relating to the effect B4 by each effecting unit is terminated, and the effect related to the normal symbol variation display (non-display) is started with the start of the next symbol variation display. An example of effect B) is started.

<Example VII>
FIG. 421 (b) is a timing chart showing the seventh example showing the execution state of effect B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A” and the condition for executing the effect B is not satisfied. The effect (non-effect B) is executed.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T1 is reached, the game condition shifts from “non-state A” to “state A”, whereby the execution condition of effect B is satisfied. At this time, the effect B2 is being executed internally, and each effect means starts the effect from the middle of the effect B2 according to the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 at the timing T1. Then, when the production B2 is finished, the production related to the production B3 is subsequently started by each production means.

  Thereafter, at the timing of T2, the gaming state shifts from “state A” to “non-state A”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A and described above, the gaming state is changed from “state A” to “non-state A” before the end condition of the effect B is satisfied at the timing of T3. When the game state is shifted to “N”, the game condition is shifted from “state A” to “non-state A”, so that the condition for ending the effect B is established. As described above, a plurality of end conditions for the effect B may be set, and the end condition for the effect B may be satisfied when any one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied. In this embodiment, the end condition for the effect B may not be satisfied at the timing T2, and the end condition for the effect B may be satisfied at the timing T3.

  Thereafter, when the effect related to the effect B3 ends and the timing of T5 is reached, each effect means does not execute the effect B1 and starts the effect related to the effect B4. That is, when the effect B4 is executed, the player is notified that the link effect ends. The effect B4 is performed, for example, until the symbol variation display being executed ends.

  When the current symbol variation display is finished and the timing of T6 is reached, the effect relating to the effect B4 by each effecting unit is terminated, and the effect related to the normal symbol variation display (non-display) is started with the start of the next symbol variation display. An example of effect B) is started.

<Example VIII>
FIG. 422 (a) is a timing chart showing the eighth embodiment showing the execution state of effect B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A”, and the condition for executing the effect B is not satisfied. The effect (non-effect B) is executed.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T1 is reached, the game condition shifts from “non-state A” to “state A”, whereby the execution condition of effect B is satisfied. At this time, the effect B2 is being executed internally, and each effect means starts the effect from the middle of the effect B2 according to the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 at the timing T1.

  Thereafter, in the present embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 421 (a), the condition for ending the effect B is established at the timing of T3. In the present embodiment, since the effect related to the effect B2 is in the middle at the timing of T3, the effect B does not end at this timing, and each effect means continues the effect related to the effect B2.

  After that, when the effect related to the effect B2 ends and the timing of T4 comes, each effect means does not execute the effect B3 and starts the effect related to the effect B4. That is, when the effect B4 is executed, the player is notified that the link effect ends.

  After that, at the timing of T6, when the gaming state shifts from “state A” to “non-state A”, the effect related to the effect B4 by each effect means is terminated, and the normal symbol is displayed together with the start of the next symbol variation display. An effect related to the variable display (an example of non-effect B) is started.

<Example IX>
FIG. 422 (b) is a timing chart showing the ninth example showing the execution state of effect B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A” and the condition for executing the effect B is not satisfied. The effect (non-effect B) is executed.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T1 is reached, the game condition shifts from “non-state A” to “state A”, whereby the execution condition of effect B is satisfied. At this time, the effect B2 is being executed internally, and each effect means starts the effect from the middle of the effect B2 according to the count value indicated by the timer circuit 652 at the timing T1.

  Thereafter, at the timing of T2, the gaming state shifts from “state A” to “non-state A”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A and described above, the gaming state is changed from “state A” to “non-state A” before the end condition of the effect B is satisfied at the timing of T3. When the game state is shifted to “N”, the game condition is shifted from “state A” to “non-state A”, so that the condition for ending the effect B is established. In this embodiment, the end condition for effect B may not be satisfied at the timing T2, but the end condition for effect B may be satisfied at the timing T3.

  After that, when the effect related to the effect B2 ends and the timing of T4 comes, each effect means does not execute the effect B3 and starts the effect related to the effect B4. That is, when the effect B4 is executed, the player is notified that the link effect ends. The effect B4 is performed, for example, until the symbol variation display being executed ends.

  When the current symbol variation display is completed and the timing of T5 is reached, the effect related to the effect B4 by each effect means is terminated, and the effect related to the normal symbol variation display is set as the next symbol variation display starts (non- An example of effect B) is started.

<Example X>
FIG. 423 (a) is a timing chart showing the tenth example showing the execution state of effect B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, unlike the first to ninth embodiments described so far, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is “non-state A”, the effect B is executed. The non-effect B is executed when the state is “A”.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A”, and therefore, the effects relating to the effect B are executed by each effect means. In the present embodiment, an effect related to the effect B2 by each effect means is performed.

  Thereafter, when the effect B2 ends and the timing of T1 is reached, each effect means continues to start the effect related to the effect B3.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T2 is reached, the game state transitions from “non-state A” to “state A”, thereby satisfying the execution interruption condition of effect B. In the present embodiment, at the timing of T2, the effect related to the effect B3 is in the middle, but at this timing, the effect B3 ends, and each effect means, for example, relates to the non-effect B such as a jackpot effect or a short-time effect Start production.

  Thereafter, at the timing of T3, the game state transitions from “state A” to “non-state A”, whereby the execution restart condition for effect B is satisfied. In the present embodiment, at the timing of T3, the effect related to the effect B3 is in the middle of the stage. Therefore, the effect related to the effect B is not resumed at this timing, and the effect related to the non-effect B is continuously performed.

  Then, when the production B3 ends internally at the timing of T4, each production means starts the production related to the production B1 from the top. Thereafter, until the game state shifts from “non-state A” to “state A” again, the effects B1, B2 and B3 are repeatedly executed in this order.

<Example XI>
FIG. 423 (b) is a timing chart showing the eleventh example showing the execution state of effect B. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, in this embodiment, as in the tenth embodiment, when the gaming state is “non-state A”, the effect B is executed, and when the state is “state A”. The non-production B is configured to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, before the timing T1, the gaming state is “non-state A”, and therefore the effects related to the effect B are executed by each effect means. In the present embodiment, an effect related to the effect B2 by each effect means is performed.

  Thereafter, when the effect B2 ends and the timing of T1 is reached, each effect means continues to start the effect related to the effect B3.

  Thereafter, when the timing of T2 is reached, the game state transitions from “non-state A” to “state A”, thereby satisfying the execution interruption condition of effect B. In the present embodiment, at the timing of T2, the production related to the production B3 is in the middle, but the production B3 is terminated at this timing, and each production means is, for example, a jackpot production, a short-time production, an island simultaneous production, etc. The production related to production B is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of T3, the game state transitions from “state A” to “non-state A”, whereby the execution restart condition for effect B is satisfied. In the present embodiment, since the effect related to the effect B3 is in the middle at the timing of T3, the effect related to the effect B is not resumed at this timing. An effect relating to the effect B5, which is an effect of the effect, is executed by each effect means. The effect part of the effect B5 is an effect that is not included in the loop effect in the effect B, and is an effect part that is specially provided to notify that the effect B is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect B3 ends internally at the timing of T4, each effect means ends the effect related to the effect B5 and continues to start the effect related to the effect B1 from the top. Thereafter, until the game state shifts from “non-state A” to “state A” again, the effects B1, B2 and B3 are repeatedly executed in this order.

  Next, the progress of the game will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 424 is a timing chart illustrating an operation associated with the progress of a game.

  In FIG. 424, in order from the top, the variation state of the special symbol, the operation state of the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device, the operation state of the special electric accessory relating to the variable winning opening 234, and the big prize relating to the variable winning opening 234. The state of the mouth solenoid, the game state, and the remaining number of hours are shown. Also, in FIG. 424, the period indicated by “α” indicates a period in which the special figure display confirmation timer is set, and is in a special figure display confirmation state, and the period indicated by “β” , Indicates a period in which the big hit start display timer is set and the big hit start effect is performed, and the period indicated by “δ” is a period in which the remaining electric ball detection state is set by setting the special electric function operating interval timer. The period indicated by “ε” indicates a period in which the special electric utility operation end timer is set and the interval effect between rounds is performed, and the period indicated by “ζ” indicates a hit end display. Indicates the period when the big hit end effect is performed with the timer set, and the period indicated by “η” indicates the period when the special figure display interval timer is set and the special figure variation start is awaited Yes. The special figure display interval timer may not be set. In addition, when the game state is “normal”, it indicates that the special figure low-probability general figure is a low-probability state (normal game state), and when it is “probability change (with electric support)”, The figure shows that the state is a high probability state (probability change state), and the case of "short time" indicates that the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (short time state).

  As shown in FIG. 424, the changing special symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of Ta, and the special symbol changing display ends. At this time, for example, when the symbol pattern of 15R special jackpot is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, after the period (α) set by the special figure display confirmation timer has elapsed, the condition device at the timing of Tb And the accessory continuous actuating device changes from the unactuated state to the actuated state. That is, the big hit game is started at the timing of Tb. Then, the big hit start effect is started at this timing, and this big hit start effect is performed until the period (β) set by the hit start display timer elapses. At the timing of Tb, since the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the number of time reductions is “0”.

  When the big hit start effect is finished and the timing of Tc is reached, the first round is started, and the special electric accessory is changed from the non-actuated state to the activated state. The big prize opening solenoid is also driven at this time, and the variable prize opening 234 is opened. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied after the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the operation for closing the variable winning opening 234 and ending one round is repeatedly executed until the final round.

  When the round end condition is satisfied in the final round, the driving of the large winning opening solenoid is stopped at the timing Td, and the variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as the special electric utility operation interval timer. The period (δ) set by the special power combination operation interval timer is a period provided for discharging game balls staying in the variable winning opening 234 after the variable winning opening 234 is closed. When the period (δ) set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and the timing of Te is reached, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is subsequently set as a special power combination operation end timer. The period (ε) set by the special electric utility operation end timer corresponds to the period of the interval between rounds. And when the period ((epsilon)) set by the special electric power operation completion | finish timer passes and it becomes the timing of Tf, the last round will be complete | finished and a special electric combination thing will be in an inactive state from an operating state. At the timing of Tf, the big hit end effect is started, and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is set as the hit end display timer. The big hit end effect is executed in the period (ζ) set by the hit end display timer. In the present embodiment, the period from when the large winning opening solenoid is driven and the variable winning opening 234 is opened until the period (ε) set by the special electric power operation end timer elapses is referred to as a round. The period from when the winning prize solenoid is driven to open the variable winning opening 234 until the driving of the large winning prize solenoid is stopped and the variable winning opening 234 is closed may be referred to as a round. A period from when the variable winning award port 234 is driven to open until a period (δ) set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses may be referred to as a round.

  When the big hit end effect is finished and the timing of Tg is reached, the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. That is, the big hit game ends at the timing of Tg. At this time, since the big hit game by the 15R special big hit is completed, the gaming state shifts to a probable change state, and the electric support state is maintained until the next big hit, so the number of time reductions is set to “infinite”. Further, at the timing of Tg, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) is set as the special figure display interval timer. When the period (η) set by the special figure display interval timer elapses and the timing of Th is reached, the special symbol variation display is started. In the present embodiment, the time when the condition device or the accessory continuous operation device changes from the operating state to the non-operating state is referred to as the end of the big hit game, but the period ( When δ) has elapsed, the end of the jackpot game may be referred to as the end of the jackpot game, or when the period (ε) set by the special electric player operation end timer has elapsed in the final round, may be referred to as the end of the jackpot game, When the period (ζ) set by the hit end display timer has elapsed in the final round, it may be referred to as the end of the big hit game.

  Then, after the special symbol change display is performed one or more times, the changing special symbol is stopped at the timing of Ti, and the special symbol change display ends. At this time, for example, when the 15R jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214, after the period (α) set by the special figure display confirmation timer has elapsed, the condition device and the timing device The accessory continuous actuating device changes from the unactuated state to the activated state. That is, the big hit game is started at the timing of Tj. Then, the big hit start effect is started at this timing, and this big hit start effect is performed until the period (β) set by the hit start display timer elapses. Note that at the timing of Tj, the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, so the number of time reductions is set to “0”.

  When the big hit start effect is finished and the timing of Tk is reached, the first round is started, and the special electric accessory is changed from the non-actuated state to the activated state. The big prize opening solenoid is also driven at this time, and the variable prize opening 234 is opened. Thereafter, when the above-described round end condition is satisfied after the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the operation for closing the variable winning opening 234 and ending one round is repeatedly executed until the final round.

  When the round end condition is satisfied in the final round, the driving of the large winning opening solenoid is stopped at the timing of T1, and the variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as the special electric utility operation interval timer. Then, when the period (δ) set by the special electric power operation interval timer elapses and the timing reaches Tm, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is subsequently set as the special electric character operation end timer. And when the period ((epsilon)) set by the special electric power operation | movement end timer passes and it becomes the timing of Tn, the last round will be complete | finished and a special electric combination thing will be in an inactive state from an operating state. At the timing of Tn, the big hit end effect is started, and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is set as the hit end display timer. The big hit end effect is executed in the period (ζ) set by the hit end display timer.

  When the big hit end effect ends and the timing becomes To, the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device change from the operating state to the non-operating state. That is, the big hit game ends at the timing of To. At this time, since the big hit game with 15R jackpot is over, the game state shifts to the short-time state, and the electric support state is maintained until the fluctuation display of the special figure is performed 100 times. Is set. In addition, at the timing of To, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) is set as the special figure display interval timer. When the period (η) set by the special figure display interval timer elapses and the timing of Tp is reached, the special symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, the changing special symbol is stopped at the timing of Tq, and the special symbol changing display ends. At this time, for example, when the lost symbol form is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214, the state of being stopped and displayed for the period (α ′) set by the special figure display confirmation timer is maintained. In the present embodiment, the period (eg, 0.3 seconds) set by the special figure display confirmation timer in the short time state is shorter than the period (eg, 0.5 seconds) set in the normal gaming state. May be set at the same time.

  Then, when the period (α ′) set by the special figure display confirmation timer elapses and the timing of Tr is reached, the time reduction count is decremented and updated from “100” to “99”. At the timing of Tr, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as the special figure display interval timer. When the period (η ′) set by the special figure display interval timer elapses and the timing of Ts comes, the special symbol variation display is started. In the present embodiment, the period (for example, 0.5 seconds) set by the special figure display interval timer in the short time state is shorter than the period (for example, 1 second) set in the normal gaming state. It may be set at the same time.

  Thereafter, after the special symbol change display is performed 98 times, the changing special symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of Tt, and the special symbol change display ends. At this time, for example, when the lost symbol form is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214, the state of being stopped and displayed for the period (α ′) set by the special figure display confirmation timer is maintained.

  When the period (α ′) set by the special figure display confirmation timer elapses and the timing of Tu is reached, the number of time reductions is decremented and updated from “2” to “1”. At the timing of Tu, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as the special figure display interval timer. When the period (η ′) set by the special figure display interval timer elapses and the timing of Tv comes, the special symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, the changing special symbol is stopped at the timing of Tw, and the special symbol changing display is terminated. At this time, for example, when the lost symbol form is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214, the state of being stopped and displayed for the period (α ′) set by the special figure display confirmation timer is maintained.

  When the period (α ′) set by the special figure display confirmation timer elapses and the timing becomes Tx, the number of time reductions is decremented and updated from “1” to “0”. That is, the special symbol variation display has been performed 100 times after the time is short. Therefore, the gaming state shifts from the short time state to the normal gaming state at the timing of Tx. In addition, at the timing of Tx, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as the special figure display interval timer. When the period (η ′) set by the special figure display interval timer elapses and the timing of Ty is reached, the special symbol variation display is started.

  Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 425 and 426. Here, FIG. 425 (a) is a front view of another example of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 425 (b) is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 425 (a), the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is provided with a fan-like movable body 224A in a plan view at the upper right portion of the front frame door 106, and a cylindrical shape at the lower left portion of the front frame door 106. A movable body 224C is provided. Further, the game board 200 is provided with a movable body 224B above the decorative symbol display device 208 in addition to the above-described effect movable body 224.

  The movable body 224A and the movable body 224B have the same configuration as the third movable body CB3 and the first movable body CB1 shown in FIG. 202B, respectively, and perform the same operation. Detailed description is omitted. As shown in FIG. 405 (b), the movable body 224C produces an effect by moving in a front-rear direction relative to the front frame door 106. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize the link effect (effect B) described above using the movable bodies 224A, 224B, and 224C in addition to the effect movable body 224. When the above-described production B is produced using these movable bodies, the movable bodies 224A and 224C provided on the front frame door 106, the movable bodies 224B and the production movable body 224 provided on the game board 200, and The start timing of the rendering operation may be different, and the rendering operation may be started at the same timing. Further, among these movable bodies, an effect operation related to the effect B is performed only on some of the movable bodies (for example, the movable bodies 224A and 224C and the effect movable body 224 provided on the front frame door 106). Also good. In this case, the other movable body (the movable body 224B provided on the game board 200) may be operated in an effect different from the effect B, for example, when it is reached. Further, all of these movable bodies may not perform the rendering operation related to the rendering B.

  FIG. 426 is a conceptual diagram illustrating a data configuration example for executing the rendering operation by the movable body related to the rendering B. FIG. 426A illustrates a first data configuration example, and FIG. 2 shows a data configuration example, and FIG. 3C shows a third data configuration example.

  The data configuration example shown in FIG. 6A has a plurality of data for each effect part (effect B1, effect B2, effect B3, etc.) constituting the effect B, and executes these data in a predetermined order. By doing so, the rendering operation by each movable body is realized.

  When the effect B1 is executed, first, the parts of the effect B1-1 are executed. Specifically, in the a part (male vocal), a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the production B1-1a is performed, and the movable body 224A does not perform the operation. On the other hand, in the b part (female vocal), a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the production B1-1b and a series of operations of the movable body 224A corresponding to the production B1-1b are performed. Whether to execute the a part or the b part can be set in advance by operating the DIP switch in the setting operation unit 195 described above, for example. The operation based on these data is designed to be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  When the execution of the parts for the production B1-1 is completed, the parts for the production B1-2 are subsequently executed. Specifically, in the a part, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the effect B1-2a is performed, and a series of operations of the movable body 224A corresponding to the effect B1-2a is performed. On the other hand, in the b part (female vocal), a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the production B1-2b and a series of operations of the movable body 224A corresponding to the production B1-2b are performed.

  When the execution of the parts for the production B1-2 is completed, the parts for the production B1-3 are subsequently executed. Specifically, in the a part, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the effect B1-3a is performed, and a series of operations of the movable body 224A corresponding to the effect B1-3a is performed. On the other hand, in the b part (female vocal), a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the production B1-3b is performed, and the movable body 224A is not operated. Although the illustration of the contents of the subsequent parts is omitted, after that, the operation of each movable body is performed according to the contents of each part until the production B1 ends.

  In addition, when the effect B2 is executed, first, the parts of the effect B2-1 are executed. Specifically, in the a part, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the production B2-1a is performed, and a series of operations of the production movable body 224 corresponding to the production B2-1a is performed. A series of operations of the movable body 224A corresponding to B2-1a is performed.

  When the execution of the parts for the production B2-1 is completed, the parts for the production B2-2 are subsequently executed. Specifically, in the a part, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the production B2-2a is performed, and a series of operations of the production movable body 224 corresponding to the production B2-1a is performed. A series of operations of the movable body 224A corresponding to B1-2a is performed. That is, in the production movable body 224, the same operation as the production B2-1 is performed, and the movable body A performs the same operation as the production B1-2.

  When the execution of the parts for the production B2-2 is completed, the parts for the production B2-3 are subsequently executed. Specifically, in the a part, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the production B2-3a is performed, and a series of operations of the production movable body 224 corresponding to the production B2-1a is performed. A series of operations of the movable body 224A corresponding to B1-3a is performed. That is, the production movable body 224 performs the same operation as the production B2-1, and the movable body A performs the same operation as the production B1-3. Although the illustration of the contents of the subsequent parts is omitted, after that, the operation of each movable body is performed according to the contents of each part until the production B2 ends. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the content of the part of b part in production B2, the part to which the appropriate operation | movement content was set is contained.

  Further, in this data configuration example, an effect operation is not performed in a certain effect part (for example, an effect B1) and an effect operation is performed in a delimiter, such as an effect operation is performed in another effect part (for example, an effect B2). There may be no movable body.

  According to the first data configuration example, even if the production starts at the halfway position of the part (for example, in the middle of the part of the production B1-1), the next part is obtained by adopting the data configuration as described above. Since the production operation can be started from the beginning (for example, the part of production B1-2), the control may be simplified.

  In addition, when the operation of the movable body is started in the middle of the part, it may be physically difficult to perform the rendering operation along the operation data included in the part. In that case, (1) The effect operation related to the effect B is not performed on the movable body. (2) If the part to be executed next (for example, the part of the effect B2-1 is being executed, the effect B2 -2) is set as the preparation position, and the movable body is moved to the preparation position before the next executed part is started. (3) Parts (for example, production) When B2-2) is started, the movable body is quickly moved to the start position of the part. (4) During the execution of the part, the position of the movable body indicated by the part and the current actual movable body It is possible to adopt a control such as starting the production operation when the position matches the position.

  In the data configuration example shown in FIG. 5B, the entire effect B is controlled by one data for each movable body. That is, it is possible to control a series of effects on the movable body from the beginning to the end of effect B with this one data.

  Specifically, when the effect B is executed, in the a part, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the effect Ba (a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the effect B) are performed. A series of operations of the effect movable body 224 corresponding to the effect Ba (a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the effect B) are performed, and a series of operations of the movable body 224A corresponding to the effect Ba (from the beginning to the end of the effect B). A series of operations are performed. On the other hand, in the b part, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the production Bb (a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the production B) are performed. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted about another movable body, the part of production | generation Bb is similarly set for every movable body, and the production | generation operation | movement according to this will be performed.

  The data configuration example shown in FIG. 5C is controlled by one data for each movable body for one production part. That is, for example, when the effect part of the effect B1 is executed, a series of effect operations on the movable body from the beginning to the end of the effect B1 can be controlled by one data.

  Specifically, when the effect B1 is executed, in the a part, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the effect B1a (a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the effect B1) are performed. A series of operations of the effect movable body 224 corresponding to the effect B1a (a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the effect B1) is performed, and a series of operations of the movable body 224A corresponding to the effect B1a (from the beginning to the end of the effect B1). A series of operations are performed. On the other hand, in the part b, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the production B1a (a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the production B1) is performed. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted about another movable body, the part of production B1a is similarly set for every movable body, and the production | generation operation | movement according to this will be performed.

  Further, when the effect B2 is executed, in the a part, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the effect B2a (a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the effect B2) is performed, and the effect B2a A series of operations of the corresponding effect movable body 224 (a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the effect B2) are performed, and a series of operations of the movable body 224A corresponding to the effect B2a (a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the effect B2). Operation). On the other hand, in the b part, a series of operations of the movable body 224C corresponding to the production B2a (a series of operations from the beginning to the end of the production B2) are performed. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted about another movable body, the part of production B2a is similarly set for every movable body, and the production | generation operation | movement according to this will be performed.

  In this data configuration example, when the production B is started in the middle of the part being executed, the production operation by each movable body may be started from the middle of the part.

In the above explanation,
“A game machine including a rendering means (for example, a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a first rendering (for example,“ first rendering ”shown in FIG. 400),
The first effect is an effect that may start at least halfway (for example, as shown in FIG. 400).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  The first effect may be started from the beginning, or may be configured to start from the middle.

  In addition, the first effect may not be started when the first condition is satisfied, or the first effect may be always started.

Also,
“The effect means is means for starting at least the first effect when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the chance button 136 is operated);
The first effect is an effect that may start from the middle depending on when the first condition is satisfied,
The first effect is an effect that may be started from the beginning depending on when the first condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When the first condition is established at different times, the start position of the first effect may be the same. When the first condition is established at different times, the first condition must be The structure which the start position of production differs may be sufficient.

Also,
“The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a second effect (for example,“ second effect ”shown in FIG. 400),
The effect means is means for starting at least the second effect when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second effect is being executed (for example, the case shown in FIG. 400),
The second condition is a condition at least different from the first condition (for example, when power is turned on),
The second effect is an effect that can be started at least from the beginning,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the first condition and the second condition may be different only in the establishment time. For example, both conditions may be selected by button operation.

Also,
“A game machine equipped with production means (for example, a speaker 120) capable of executing at least a first production (for example,“ first production ”shown in FIG. 400),
The production means is a means capable of at least starting the first production when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the chance button 136 is operated),
The first effect is an effect that may start from the middle (for example, the case shown in FIG. 400) depending on the timing at which the first condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

  In other words, the first effect may be an effect that may be recognized by the player from the middle of the effect depending on the timing at which the first condition is satisfied. This is because the control itself has been executed in the background before the first condition is satisfied, and when the first condition is satisfied, the first effect has been executed in the background until then. As a result of appearing in the foreground, when it seems that it was started from the middle of the production, and the control itself is not executed in the background in advance, if the first condition is satisfied, at that time This includes both cases in which the first production is controlled for the first time. Including both the former case and the latter case, the production means may execute the first production from the middle depending on the timing when the first condition is satisfied.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the production means. In some cases, the progress of the game can be grasped according to the location where the first performance is started.

  In addition to the first effect, the effect means may be capable of executing a second effect, a third effect, etc., and when the first condition is satisfied, In addition to the production, the second production, the third production, and the like may be started.

It also has a real time clock,
The production means is capable of executing the first production from the middle when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition may be a condition that can be satisfied at least in relation to time information based on the real-time clock.
By doing so, the first effect can be executed from the middle despite using the real-time clock, and the player can be surprised and notice the first effect. There is. The real time clock is a time measuring means for measuring the current time.

  Further, the effect means may be a means capable of starting at least the first effect when the first condition is satisfied. That is, just because the first condition is satisfied, the first performance is not always started. For example, when an error occurs (for example, when a door opening error occurs), The first production may not start. On the other hand, as long as the first condition is satisfied, the first effect may always be started even if an error occurs.

  Furthermore, the first effect may be an effect that may start from the beginning depending on the timing at which the first condition is satisfied.

Also,
“The start position of the first effect is determined according to the timing at which the first condition is satisfied (for example, the timing of the left button operation shown in FIG. 400).
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

  For example, when the first condition is satisfied, an aspect may be provided that includes a start position determining unit that can determine at least the start position of the first effect (for example, can be determined by random number lottery). A mode (transition from the background to the foreground) may be determined naturally without performing the determination control.

  According to this game table, there may be a case where the start position of the first effect can have variations.

Also,
“The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a second effect (for example,“ second effect ”shown in FIG. 400).
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied in a state where the second effect is being executed (for example, a case shown in FIG. 400).
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

  The production means may be means capable of at least starting the first production when the first condition is satisfied while the second production is being executed. For example, the second effect may be an effect that may be started before the first condition is satisfied. In addition, when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the second effect is being executed, the effect means continues the second effect while starting the first effect. It may be. According to this aspect, the second effect and the first effect are performed together during the same period.

  Alternatively, the production means starts the first production in the middle instead of the second production when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the second production is being executed. There may be. According to this aspect, the second effect ends when the first condition is satisfied. By doing so, the first effect may be executed from the middle, and it may be easier to understand that the second effect has been switched to the first effect.

Also,
“The effect means is means for starting the second effect at least from the beginning when the second condition is satisfied (for example, when power is turned on),
The second condition is a condition at least different from the first condition.
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

  The production means may be capable of starting the second production only from the beginning when the second condition is satisfied. That is, the second effect may be an effect that starts only from the beginning.

  Further, the second condition may be different from a third condition described later.

  Further, the effect means may be a means capable of starting at least the second effect from the beginning when the second condition is satisfied. That is, just because the second condition is satisfied, the second performance is not always started. For example, when an error occurs (for example, when a door opening error occurs), The second performance may not start. On the other hand, as long as the second condition is satisfied, the second effect may be surely started even if an error occurs.

Further, the production means can start the second production from the beginning even when the second condition is satisfied at the first timing.
The production means can start the second production from the beginning even when the second condition is satisfied at the second timing,
The second timing may be at least different from the first timing.

  Furthermore, the production means may be capable of starting the second production from the beginning regardless of the timing when the second condition is satisfied.

In addition, it has multiple timing means,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a third effect,
The production means can start the third production at least from the beginning when the first condition is satisfied,
The production means can start the third production at least halfway when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition at least different from the first condition,
At least one of the plurality of time measuring means is a first time measuring means,
At least one of the plurality of time measuring means is a second time measuring means,
The first time measuring means is a real time clock,
The second time measuring means is capable of measuring at least an elapsed time from power-on,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least in relation to the time measured by the first time measuring means,
The second condition may be a condition that can be satisfied at least in relation to the time measured by the second time measuring means.

Also,
“When the second condition is satisfied (for example, when power is turned on), the effect means is capable of recognizing the second effect by the player (for example, the second condition shown in FIG. 400). It is a means that can be executed at least by turning the production volume ON)
When the second condition is satisfied, the effect means can at least execute the first effect in a state where the player cannot recognize the first effect (for example, the first effect volume OFF shown in FIG. 400) (for example, , Internal execution of the first effect shown in FIG. 400,
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the chance button 136 is operated), the effect means gives the player the second effect that has been executed in a state that is visible to the player. It is a means that can be executed at least in an invisible state (for example, the second effect volume OFF shown in FIG. 400),
When the first condition is satisfied, the effect means performs the first effect that has been executed in a state invisible to the player (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 400). It is a means that can be executed at least with a volume ON of one production)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the first production has progressed for the elapsed time of the second production, when the first production starts from the middle, the time from when the second condition is established You may be able to keep track of the progress.

  The effect means may be capable of executing a third effect different from the second effect in a state that the player can recognize when the second condition is satisfied, When the second condition is satisfied, the player may be able to execute a fourth effect different from the first effect in a state in which the player cannot recognize the player. If established, the third performance that was executed in a state visible to the player may be executable in a state invisible to the player, and the first condition is satisfied. In this case, the fourth effect that has been executed in a state invisible to the player may be executable in a state that is visible to the player.

Also,
“The second condition is power-on.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect that can be synchronized with at least the second effect,
When the first condition is satisfied, the effect means synchronizes the first effect with the second effect (for example, synchronizes by delaying the period of the arrow 4 shown in FIG. 402). A viable means,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the entertainment of the game may be improved by enabling the first effect started from the middle to be executed in synchronization with the second effect.

  The first effect may be an effect that can be synchronized with other effects such as the fourth effect.

  The first effect may be an effect related to the second effect.

  Further, the start position determination means may be capable of executing at least the first effect from a position that can be synchronized with the second effect when the first condition is satisfied.

  The production means may be capable of executing the first production and the second production in synchronization.

The production means can be executed in a state where any one of a plurality of productions can be recognized by the player,
At least one of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
At least one of the plurality of effects is the second effect,
The start position determining means determines a start position of the first effect as a position synchronized with the second effect being executed on another game machine when the first condition is satisfied. It may be.

Furthermore, at least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that is at least unrelated to the first effect,
The third effect is an effect that is at least unrelated to the second effect,
The production means can execute at least the third production when the third condition is satisfied,
The third effect is an effect that is executed at least in synchronization with the first effect,
The third effect may be an effect that is executed at least in synchronization with the second effect.

  By doing in this way, when the player can select an effect by selecting the player, while enjoying with a sense of unity with other game tables and players in the synchronized effect, select the effect not synchronized and other In some cases, the game can be enjoyed independently of the game stand or the player.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect including at least a sound effect (for example, a 轟 GOGO effect of effect B shown in FIG. 411),
The second effect is an effect including at least a sound effect (for example, a large board performance effect of effect A shown in FIG. 411).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first effect and the second effect may each include an effect other than the sound effect, or only the sound effect. Moreover, the structure which requires productions other than a sound production may be sufficient. That is, the first effect may include an image display effect and a light emission effect in addition to the sound effect, and the second effect includes an image display effect and a light emission effect in addition to the sound effect. It may be included.

Also,
“The effect means is capable of executing at least the first effect in a state in which the player cannot recognize the first effect in a first period (for example, a period in which the volume of the first effect is turned off as shown in FIG. 400). And
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period before the first condition is satisfied,
The effect means is capable of recognizing the first effect, which has been executed in a state unrecognizable by the player, from the timing when the first condition is satisfied (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 400). It is a means that can be executed at least with a volume ON of one production)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The effect means can execute an effect different from the first effect (for example, the third effect, the fourth effect,...) In a state in which the player cannot recognize the first effect. It may be a thing. Further, the first period may be only a part of the period before the first condition is satisfied, or the entire period before the first condition is satisfied. May be. Furthermore, the first period may be a period immediately before the first condition is satisfied, or may be a period after the second period has elapsed.

  Further, the start position determining means may be capable of executing the first effect in a state where the player can recognize the first effect when the first condition is satisfied. By doing so, the start position determining means may be able to easily determine the start position of the first effect at the timing when the first condition is satisfied.

Also,
“Equipped with operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate,
The first condition is a condition that a player can select at least by operating the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first condition is a condition at which the player can select at least the establishment time,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  In addition to the first condition, there may be a condition (for example, a third condition, a fourth condition,...) That allows the player to select an establishment time.

  Further, the first effect and the second effect may be effects that the player can select at least from a plurality of options. For example, the first effect selected by the player may be the second effect, and the second effect selected next by the first effect. Depending on the player's selection operation, the first effect and the second effect may be selected. The structure which may be replaced may be sufficient.

In addition, the player is provided with operating means at least at the operable position,
The first condition may be a condition that may be satisfied at least in relation to the operation of the operation means.

Further, the first effect is an effect that can be selected at least by the player as one of the options of the selection effect,
The production means can start at least in a state in which the player can recognize the second production when the second condition is satisfied,
When the first effect is selected, the effect means may be capable of at least starting the first effect in a state in which the player can recognize the first effect.

Furthermore, the production means can start the second production from the beginning when the second condition is satisfied,
The production means can start the second production halfway when the third condition is satisfied,
The third condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the player's operation is further performed and the start of the second effect is selected after the first effect is selected by the player's operation. It may be.

In addition, the first effect is an effect that the player can select at least as one of the options of the selection effect,
The second effect is an effect that a player can select at least as one of the options of the selection effect,
When the first effect is selected, the effect means can at least start the first effect in a state in which the player can recognize the first effect,
When the second effect is selected, the effect means may be capable of at least starting the second effect in a state in which the player can recognize the second effect.

  The operation means is a means provided with an operation effective period, and the first effect is an effect that may be started when the operation effective period ends without the operation means being operated. An aspect may be sufficient. According to this aspect, it may be possible to grasp how long the operation effective period of the operation means has elapsed from the start position of the first effect. Moreover, it may be possible to prevent the production time from becoming too long by incorporating the operation effective period of the operation means into the production time. The operation means may be any means that can be operated by the player, such as a button, a cross key, a touch sensor (touch panel), or a jog dial.

Furthermore, in the above explanation,
“Effect means (for example, speaker 120) capable of executing at least a first effect (for example, the fourth effect shown in FIG. 403);
Multiple timing means;
A game machine equipped with
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the RTC time information shown in FIG. 403 is noon one month after the opening of the newly renovated store), the production means performs at least the first production from the beginning. Is a means that can be started,
When the second condition is satisfied (for example, when one hour has passed since power-on by the timer after power-on shown in FIG. 403), the effect means is a means capable of starting the first effect at least halfway. Yes,
The second condition is a condition at least different from the first condition,
At least one of the plurality of time measuring means is a first time measuring means (for example, RTC shown in FIG. 403),
At least one of the plurality of time measuring means is a second time measuring means (for example, a power-on timer shown in FIG. 403),
The first time measuring means is a real time clock,
The second time measuring means is a means capable of measuring at least an elapsed time from power-on,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least in relation to the time measured by the first time measuring means,
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least in relation to the time measured by the second time measuring means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the production means. In addition, although the real time clock is used, the first effect can be executed from the middle, and the player may be surprised and notice the first effect.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above explanation,
“A game machine equipped with directing means [eg, speaker 120],
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first effect [e.g., a large board performance effect of effect A],
The production means is means for starting execution of the first production when a start condition is established,
The effect means is means for ending execution of the first effect when an end condition is established,
The production means is means capable of repeatedly executing the first production,
The start condition is a condition that is satisfied when an advantageous state [for example, a big hit game state (a game state in which an attacker opens)] is started,
The termination condition is a condition that is satisfied when the advantageous state is terminated,
The advantageous state is a state advantageous to the player that is started according to the result of the game by the player after the power is turned on.
When the advantageous state is finished, it is configured to shift to a normal state [for example, a non-hit gaming state (a gaming state in which an attacker does not release)],
The normal state is a state where the advantage to the player is lower than the advantageous state,
The production means, when starting execution of the first production, according to the time after the power is turned on [for example, according to the time when the big hit game is started after the power is turned on], There may be a case where an effect is started in the middle [for example, as shown in FIG. 412],
The execution of the first effect is a reproduction of a first song [for example, a song of a large board performance effect] that produces a game,
When the power is turned on all at once, the other gaming machines (for example, the gaming machine in which the first presentation has already started after the power is turned on at the same timing as the gaming machine), and the first One production can be synchronized [for example, on this game table, it starts to play along with a measure in the middle],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
“First control means [for example, main control unit 300];
A second control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500];
With
The first control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the second control means,
The second control means is means capable of executing control of the effect means based on the command.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
"With multiple control boards,
One of the plurality of control boards is a first control board [eg, main board 156],
One of the plurality of control boards is a second control board [for example, the first sub-board 160],
The first control unit is a control unit configured to include the first control board,
The second control means is a control means configured to include the second control board.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The advantageous state is a big hit gaming state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The advantageous state is a short time state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The production unit is a unit that may start the first production from the beginning depending on the time since the power was turned on when the execution of the first production is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The production unit is a unit that may start the second production from the beginning without depending on the time from when the power is turned on when the execution of the second production is started.
The execution of the second effect is the reproduction of the second song that produces the game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the “execution” may be interpreted as “start”, and conversely, the “start” may be interpreted as “execution”.

  What has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the description of “... in some cases” may be appropriately replaced with “may not be in some cases” or “is always in some cases”. is there.

In the above explanation,
"Amusement stand,
An island facility where the game machine is installed;
A gaming system comprising
The game table includes directing means [eg, speaker 120],
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first effect [e.g., a large board performance effect of effect A],
The production means is means for starting execution of the first production when a start condition is established,
The effect means is means for ending execution of the first effect when an end condition is established,
The production means is means capable of repeatedly executing the first production,
The start condition is a condition that is satisfied when an advantageous state [for example, a big hit game state (a game state in which an attacker opens)] is started,
The termination condition is a condition that is satisfied when the advantageous state is terminated,
The advantageous state is a state advantageous to the player that is started according to the result of the game by the player after the power is turned on.
When the advantageous state is finished, it is configured to shift to a normal state [for example, a non-hit gaming state (a gaming state in which an attacker does not release)],
The normal state is a state where the advantage to the player is lower than the advantageous state,
The production means, when starting execution of the first production, according to the time after the power is turned on [for example, according to the time when the big hit game is started after the power is turned on], There may be a case where an effect is started in the middle [for example, as shown in FIG. 412],
When power is simultaneously turned on to a plurality of the game machines [for example, after power is turned on at the same timing], the first effect can be synchronized [for example, between the plurality of game machines, Large board performances can be performed together]
A gaming system characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
The game machine includes first control means [for example, the main control unit 300] and second control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500]
The first control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the second control means,
The second control means is means capable of executing control of the effect means based on the command.
A gaming system characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The game table includes a plurality of control boards,
One of the plurality of control boards is a first control board [eg, main board 156],
One of the plurality of control boards is a second control board [for example, the first sub-board 160],
The first control unit is a control unit configured to include the first control board,
The second control means is a control means configured to include the second control board.
A gaming system characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The advantageous state is a big hit gaming state,
A gaming system characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The advantageous state is a short time state,
A gaming system characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
"The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A gaming system characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The game machine is a slot machine,
A gaming system characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Production means [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 120, various lamps 418, etc., production movable body 224]
First timing means [eg, timer circuit 652, RTC circuit 654];
A game machine equipped with
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, the Yoshimune link effect shown in FIG. 299 (k) to FIG. (P), or FIG. 415 (d) to FIG. 417 (k). Link production (production B)]
When the first effect is started, the first effect is an effect that may be started in the middle depending on the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means [for example, FIG. d), as shown in FIG. 418 (a-3), FIG. 419, etc., the production B may start from the middle of the production B2 by the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652],
The first effect is an effect that may be started from the beginning when the first effect is started, depending on the result of timing by the first time measuring means [for example, FIG. As shown in d), FIG. 418 (a-3), FIG. 419, etc., the effect B may start from the head of the effect B2 depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game machine, the production means can be characterized.

  Moreover, according to this game machine, since the first production is started from the beginning or in the middle depending on the timing when the first production is started, the start timing can be varied, and the production effect May be able to increase.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be able to execute effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the effect means may be constituted by one effect means, or may be constituted by two or more effect means. Moreover, you may be comprised by multiple types of production | presentation means.

  In addition, when the first effect is started, the first effect is started in the middle if the time measurement result by the first time measuring means is not the first time measurement result. When the result of the time measurement by the one time measuring means is the first time measurement result, the first effect may be started from the top. The first time measurement result may include, for example, the time measurement start time by the first time measuring means.

In addition, “the first effect is when the first effect end condition is satisfied [for example, as shown in FIG. 419 (a), the game state is state A (electric support state, jackpot game state at the timing of T2. In the case of transition from non-change state A to the non-state A], until the production end position of the first production [for example, the position where the production related to the production B3 is finished as shown in FIG. 419 (a)] It is an effect that continues the first effect,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the condition for ending the first effect is satisfied, the effect is continued until the end position of the first effect, so that it does not give the player a sense of incongruity. It may be possible to reduce the decrease in interest.

  Here, the production end position of the first production may be only one, or may be two or more. In addition, when there are two or more production end positions of the first production, it may be made to end at the production end position of the earliest time, and the first production is performed at any production end position. You may make it determine by lottery etc. whether it complete | finishes.

  In addition, the production end position of the first effect may be, for example, a timing at which the music ends (so-called “crisp timing”), or may be in the middle of the music (at a timing that is not sharp timing).

  For example, in a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed game machine, the first production starts at the start timing of the short-time state, and then the first production ends when the jackpot game that does not enter the short-time state ends. If the condition is satisfied, the first effect may be continued until the end point of the first effect without ending the first effect at the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the time-short state ends (so-called short-time omission) without shifting to the jackpot game after becoming the time-short state, without continuing the first production until the production end position of the first production, You may make it complete | finish a 1st production at the time of time-shortening.

  Further, for example, when the game is a big hit of 2 or more villas and the game is a big hit game that is not in a short-time state, the mode may be shifted to the limited number of times mode in which the first effect is continuously performed. . Here, the limited number mode is, for example, a mode in which the first effect is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the limited-time mode is shifted only when a big hit of two or more villas is reached, and is not changed when the first big hit is a short hit that is not in a time-short state (so-called single hit big hit). Also good. Also, in the case of a single big hit, the mode may be shifted to the limited number mode.

  Further, the main control means (for example, the main control unit 300) can execute control for ending the big hit game regardless of the contents of the effects controlled by the sub control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400). Then, the special symbol variation display can be started.

  In addition, for example, when the timing of the production end position of the first production comes before the timing at which the first production termination condition is satisfied, a clear timing (for example, on the control of the main control unit) The first production may be continued until the end of the big hit game or when the symbol is stopped), or an announcement that informs the end of the first production (for example, “next time “Look forward to the link effect” or the like) may be performed.

  In addition, as an example of ending at a timing that does not have a clear timing, the ST state is terminated (so-called ST missing), the time is missing, the probability variation big hit (abrupt probability variation big hit: Surprisingly, a normal big hit that can hardly be expected of the ball that will shift to the normal gaming state (sudden normal big hit: breakthrough), a short-hitting big hit that can hardly be expected of the ball that will shift to the short-time state (sudden short and big hit) : At the time of a collision), start of the island simultaneous production mentioned above, power interruption power recovery, etc. are mentioned. Here, when the island simultaneous production is started, if the conditions for continuously executing the first production are satisfied even after the completion of the island simultaneous production, the first production is resumed after the end of the island simultaneous production. You may make it make it.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect composed of a plurality of effect parts [for example, effect B1, effect B2, effect B3]
One effect part of the plurality of effect parts is a first effect part [for example, effect B2],
One effect part of the plurality of effect parts is a second effect part [for example, effect B3],
The second effect part is an effect part executed next to the first effect part [For example, as shown in FIG. 419 (a), the effect B3 is executed next to the effect B2. ], A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, since the production part to be started may differ depending on the timing at which the first production is started, the production effect may be enhanced.

  Here, the first effect may consist of only the first effect part and the second effect part, and also includes effect parts other than the first effect part and the second effect part. It may be configured. In addition, the first effect may necessarily include the first effect part and the second effect part, or includes at least one of the first effect part and the second effect part. There may be no cases. Further, the first effect may be composed only of the first effect part, or may be composed only of the second effect part.

  In addition, each production part constituting the first production may be able to start from the beginning of each, or may be able to start from the middle.

  Further, when the first effect is configured to include at least the first effect part and the second effect part, these effect parts may be configured to be repeatedly executed. For example, after the first production part, the second production part... The Nth production part are executed, the first production part may be executed again.

  The effect part includes one or more of music, moving images, images, operations by the effect moving means, light emission patterns by the lamp, and the like. For example, as long as the production part includes music, one production part may be constituted by one music, or one production part may be constituted by two or more music. May be. Further, if the production part is configured to include music, one music may be configured by two or more production parts.

  In addition, when the first effect is executed, it may be started from the head of the effect part depending on the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means, or may be started from the middle of the effect part. You may be comprised so that it can be started only from the head of the production part. Moreover, you may be comprised so that it can be started only from the middle of the production part.

  In addition, when the first effect end condition is satisfied, the first effect is ended only when a specific effect part (for example, the part including the last of the music) ends, and other effect parts are Even if the production part ends, the production part to be executed next may be started without ending the first production.

In addition, “One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an island simultaneous effect, an effect related to symbol variation display, a jackpot effect, etc.]
The second effect is an effect that can be started from the top regardless of the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the production can have variations.

  Here, the second effect may be one that can be started only from the beginning regardless of the result of the timing by the first timing means, or the first effect regardless of the result of the timing by the first timing means. It may be possible to start from other than. The second performance may always start from the top regardless of the result of timing by the first timing means, or start from the beginning regardless of the result of timing by the first timing means. You may not.

In addition, “providing production control means for controlling the production means [for example, the CPU 404 of the second sub-control unit 400],
The production control means is a means capable of executing control to start the first production by the production means in the middle according to a result of timing by the first time measurement means,
The production control means is a means capable of executing control to start the first production by the production means from the beginning, according to a result of timing by the first time measurement means,
The production control means is a means capable of executing control to start the second production by the production means from the top, regardless of the result of time measurement by the first time measurement means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to perform the effect control by the first time measuring means and the effect control not based on the first time measuring means, so that stable control can be performed while increasing the variation of the effects. There is a case.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the control for starting the first production by the production means halfway according to the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means. Control other than the control for starting the first effect by the effecting means from the middle may be executed in accordance with the result of the time measuring by the time measuring means. The production control means may always execute control for starting the first production by the production means halfway according to the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means, or the first time measurement means. There may be a case where the control for starting the first production by the production means is not executed depending on the result of the time measurement.

  Further, the production control means may be capable of executing only the control for starting the first production by the production means from the beginning in accordance with the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means, or the first time measurement Control other than the control for starting the first production by the production means from the beginning may be executed in accordance with the result of timing by the means. Further, the production control means may always execute control for starting the first production by the production means from the head according to the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means, or the first time measurement means. There may be a case where the control for starting the first production by the production means from the beginning is not executed according to the result of the time measurement by.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the control for starting the second effect by the effect means from the top, regardless of the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means. Regardless of the result of timing by the means, control other than the control for starting the second effect by the effect means from the beginning may be executed. Further, the production control means may always execute control for starting the second production by the production means from the top, regardless of the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means, or the first time measurement means. Regardless of the result of the timing of, there may be a case where the control for starting the second effect by the effect means from the beginning is not executed.

  In addition, main control means capable of executing game control may be provided, and game control by the main control means may be configured to be executed regardless of the control state of the effect control means. Further, for example, the main control means may be configured to start the game control after the rise of the effect control means or the like.

In addition, “including display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208],
The effect means is means including the display means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the display means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the display means and the display means.

Also, “light emitting means [for example, various lamps 418, game board lamps 532, game stand frame lamps 542]
The effect means is means including the light emitting means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the light emitting means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the light emitting means and the light emitting means.

In addition, “sound output means [for example, speaker 120],
The production means is means including the sound output means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the sound output means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the sound output means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the sound output means and the sound output means.

In addition, it includes an effect moving means [for example, an effect moving body 224] that can be displaced according to the contents of the effect,
The effect means is means including the effect moving means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the effect moving means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the effect moving means may be capable of being displaced only in accordance with the contents of the effect, or may be capable of being displaced even in cases other than the contents of the effect. Further, the effect moving means may be always displaced according to the contents of the effect, or may not be displaced according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, the first effect may be executed only by the effect moving means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the effect moving means and the effect moving means.

In addition, “One of the plurality of effects is a jackpot effect,
The first effect is an effect that starts when the electric support state is reached,
The effect means is a means capable of starting the jackpot effect in place of the first effect when a jackpot game is started during execution of the power support state,
The first effect is an effect that may be started from the middle depending on the result of time measurement by the first time measuring means when the jackpot game is ended and the electric support state is started. ,
The first effect is an effect that may be started from the top depending on the result of time measurement by the first time measuring means when the jackpot game is ended and the electric support state is started. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the big hit game is started during the execution of the electric support state, the effect means may be capable of starting only the big hit effect instead of the first effect, When the big hit game is started during execution, it may be possible to start an effect other than the big hit effect instead of the first effect. In addition, when the big hit game is started during the execution of the electric support state, the effect means may always start the big hit effect instead of the first effect, or the electric support state is being executed. When the big hit game is started, the big hit effect may not be started instead of the first effect.

  In addition, the first effect is that when the big hit game is ended and the electric support state is started, the first effect is obtained when the time measured by the first time measuring means is not the first time measured result. If the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means is the first time measurement result, the first effect may be started from the beginning. The first time measurement result may include, for example, the time measurement start time by the first time measuring means.

Also, “One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, Himeshima simultaneous effects shown in FIG. 243, FIG. 273, etc.]
The third effect is an effect that is always started from the beginning when the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means is the first effect start time [e.g., one hour has elapsed since the power was turned on],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the variation of the effect by the first time measuring means can be increased and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Here, the third effect may be able to be started only when the first effect start time has elapsed, or can be started other than when the first effect start time has elapsed. There may be. In addition, the third effect may be started when the first effect start time has elapsed, or may not be started even when the first effect start time has elapsed.

  Further, the third effect may be configured not to be executed even when the first effect start time has elapsed, and when a specific condition is not satisfied. Here, the specific conditions include, for example, a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of a DIP switch) by a store clerk or a predetermined operation (for example, a chance button operation or customization by a user mode) by a player. As a result, there is a case where execution of the third effect is turned on. Further, the specific condition may be a case where a predetermined demonstration effect (an animation demonstration effect or the like) is not being executed (that is, a state where it is determined that the player is playing a game).

  Further, the content of the third effect may be the same as or different from the content of the first effect. Further, the content of the third effect may be configured by a part of the content of the first effect (for example, the effect B2 constituting the effect B constitutes the third effect. Also good). Further, the production content of the first production may be constituted by a part of the production content of the third production.

  Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not it is the first effect start time by a time measuring means different from the first time measuring means.

Further, “the effect means is means including first effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] and second effect means [for example, effect movable body 224],
The first effect is an effect executed by at least the first effect means and the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, when both the first effect and the other effect are performed, or only one of them is performed according to the time from the start of timing by the first time measuring means. For example, the variation of the production can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

  Here, the effect means may include only the first effect means and the second effect means, or effect means other than the first effect means and the second effect means (for example, Nth It may further include a production means). Further, the production means may necessarily include the first production means and the second production means, and may not include at least one of the first production means and the second production means. Also good.

  In addition, the first presentation means and the second presentation means may be started at the same timing or at different timings. Moreover, the timing at which the first effect ends in the first effect means and the second effect means may be the same or different.

  Further, there may be a case where an effect portion in the first effect by the first effect means and an effect portion in the first effect by the second effect means cooperate. In other words, an effect in which the effect display by the display means is linked to the operation of the effect movable means (for example, by bringing the “effect movable means” imitating the shape of a bicep close to an image displayed as “Echigoya” to attack. You may make it perform the production to show as if doing. Further, there is no need for an effect such that the first effect means and the second effect means cooperate.

  In addition, the time measuring means for determining the start timing of the first effect by the first effect means and the time measuring means for determining the start timing of the first effect by the second effect means are different. It may be a time measuring means. Further, the time measuring means and the rendering means may be in one-to-one correspondence, not limited to one-to-one correspondence, and may be, for example, one-to-two correspondence or two-to-one correspondence.

In addition, “the first effect means is an effect means in which the timing of starting the first effect is different from that of the second effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 414, the start of the effect B by the display means. The start timing of the production B by the production moving means is later than the timing]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the start timing of the first effect by the first effect means may be earlier than the start timing of the first effect by the second effect, or may be later. Or it may be simultaneous.

In addition, “second timing means [for example, timer circuit 652, RTC 654] provided,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect [for example, effect E],
When the fourth effect is started, the fourth effect is an effect that may start in the middle depending on the result of the time measurement by the second time measuring means [for example, the effect E is Depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, it may start in the middle]
The fourth effect is an effect that, when the fourth effect is started, may be started from the beginning depending on the result of timing by the second timing means [for example, the effect E is Depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, there may be a case where it starts from the top]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effects using a plurality of timekeeping means, it is possible to increase the variations of the effects and improve the effects.

  Here, the timekeeping by the second timekeeping means may be synchronized with the timekeeping by the first timekeeping means or may not be synchronized.

  In addition, when the fourth effect is started, if the time measurement by the second timing means is not the second time measurement result when the fourth effect is started, the fourth effect is started from the middle. In the case where the time measurement result by the second time measuring means is the second time measurement result, the fourth effect may be started from the top. The second timing result may include, for example, a timing start time by the second timing means.

Further, “the first time measuring means is a timer [for example, a timer circuit 652] that starts time counting when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the timer may reset the counter value when the power is turned off.

Further, “the first time measuring means is a real time clock [for example, an RTC circuit 654].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also, “One of the plurality of effects is a fifth effect [for example, effect F],
When the fifth effect is started, the fifth effect is an effect that may start in the middle depending on the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means [for example, the effect F is Depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, it may start in the middle]
The fifth effect is an effect that may be started from the beginning when the fifth effect is started, depending on the result of timing by the first timing means [for example, the effect F is Depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, there may be a case where it starts from the top]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, both the first effect and the fifth effect are performed, or only one of them is performed according to the time from the start of timing by the first timing means. In some cases, production variations can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

  Here, the fifth effect may be an effect synchronized with the first effect, or may be an effect not synchronized.

  In addition, the start timing of the fifth effect may be the same as or different from the start timing of the first effect.

  In addition, the end timing of the fifth effect may be the same as or different from the end timing of the first effect.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000]. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A plurality of effect means [for example, a design symbol display device 208, a speaker 120, various lamps 418, etc., an effect movable body 224]
First timing means [eg, timer circuit 652, RTC circuit 654];
A game machine equipped with
One rendering means among the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120],
One effect means of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means [for example, various effect lamps 418, effect movable body 224],
The plurality of effect means are means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, the Yoshimune link effect shown in FIG. 299 (k) to FIG. (P), or FIG. 415 (d) to FIG. 417 (k). Link production (production B)]
The first effect is an effect that starts in accordance with the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means [for example, as shown in FIG. 415 (d), FIG. 418 (a-3), FIG. 419, etc. As described above, the effect B may start from the middle of the effect B2 depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, and may start from the beginning of the effect B2.
The first effect is configured to be executed by at least the first effect means and the second effect means,
When the first effect is started, the effect by the second effect means is started after the effect by the first effect means is started [for example, FIG. As shown in the above, after the effect related to the effect B by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 is started, the effect related to the effect B by the various lamps 418 and the effect movable body 224 is started].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game machine, the production means can be characterized.

  Moreover, according to this game machine, since the 1st production by the 2nd production means is started after the 1st production by the 1st production means is started, the 1st production is gradually raised. In some cases, the player can be entertained, and as a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the effect means may be constituted only by the first effect means and the second effect means, or effect means other than the first effect means and the second effect means are further configured. It may be. Further, the production means may necessarily include the first production means and the second production means, and may not include at least one of the first production means and the second production means. There may be.

  Further, the first effect may be executed by all the effect means among the plurality of effect means, or the first effect may be executed only by a part of the effect means of the plurality of effect means. . For example, the first effect is performed by the display unit, the sound output unit, and the light emitting unit, but the effect moving unit may not perform the first effect. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a first display means and a second display means, the first display means performs the first effect, but the second display means does the first effect. You may not perform. In addition, for example, in a game table provided with light emitting means provided on the frame of the game table and light emitting means provided on the game board, the first effect is performed for any one of the light emitting means. However, the other light emitting unit may not perform the first effect. In addition, for example, a game table including first sound output means (for example, sound output means capable of outputting a high sound range) and second sound output means (for example, sound output means capable of output of a low sound range). In this case, the first effect is performed for any one of the sound output means, but the first effect may not be performed for any other sound output means. In addition, for example, a first effect moving means (for example, an effect moving means provided on the frame of the game table) and a second effect moving means (for example, an effect moving means provided on the game board) are provided. In the game stand, the first effect is performed for any one of the effect moving means, but the first effect may not be performed for any other effect moving means.

  In addition, the plurality of effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects including the first effect, or may be able to execute effects other than the plurality of effects including the first effect. . In addition, the plurality of effects means may always execute a plurality of effects including the first effect, or may not execute a plurality of effects including the first effect.

  The first effect may be executed by the first effect means and the second effect means, or may be executed only by the first effect means and the second effect means. The first effect may be executed by an effect means other than the first effect means and the second effect means.

  In addition, when the first effect is started, after the effect by the first effect means is started, the effect by the second effect means may be always started, The production by the second production means may be started before the production by the first production means is started, or the production by the first production means is produced by the second production means. It may be started at the same time.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect that may be started from the middle depending on a result of time measurement by the first time measuring means when the first effect is started [for example, As shown in FIG. 415 (d), FIG. 418 (a-3), FIG. 419, etc., the effect B may start from the middle of the effect B2 depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there may be variations in the start position of the first effect, which can enhance the effect.

  Here, as for the first effect, when the first effect is started, if the time measured by the first time measuring means is not the first time measured result, the first effect is started from the middle. It may be a thing. The first time measurement result may include, for example, the time measurement start time by the first time measuring means.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect that may be started from the beginning when the first effect is started, depending on the result of timing by the first time measuring means [for example, As shown in FIG. 415 (d), FIG. 418 (a-3), FIG. 419, etc., the effect B may start from the head of the effect B2 depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect is started from the top when the first effect is started, and the result of timing by the first time measuring means is the first time measurement result. It may be a thing.

In addition, “the first effect is when the first effect end condition is satisfied [for example, as shown in FIG. 419 (a), the game state is state A (electric support state, jackpot game state at the timing of T2. In the case of transition from non-change state A to the non-state A], until the production end position of the first production [for example, the position where the production related to the production B3 is finished as shown in FIG. 419 (a)] It is an effect that continues the first effect,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the condition for ending the first effect is satisfied, the effect is continued until the end position of the first effect, so that it does not give the player a sense of incongruity. It may be possible to reduce the decrease in interest.

  Here, the production end position of the first production may be only one, or may be two or more. In addition, when there are two or more production end positions of the first production, it may be made to end at the production end position of the earliest time, and the first production is performed at any production end position. You may make it determine by lottery etc. whether it complete | finishes.

  In addition, the production end position of the first effect may be, for example, a timing at which the music ends (so-called “crisp timing”), or may be in the middle of the music (at a timing that is not sharp timing).

  For example, in a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed game machine, the first production starts at the start timing of the short-time state, and then the first production ends when the jackpot game that does not enter the short-time state ends. If the condition is satisfied, the first effect may be continued until the end point of the first effect without ending the first effect at the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the time-short state ends (so-called short-time omission) without shifting to the jackpot game after becoming the time-short state, without continuing the first production until the production end position of the first production, You may make it complete | finish a 1st production at the time of time-shortening.

  Further, for example, when the game is a big hit of 2 or more villas and the game is a big hit game that is not in a short-time state, the mode may be shifted to the limited number of times mode in which the first effect is continuously performed. . Here, the limited number mode is, for example, a mode in which the first effect is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the limited-time mode is shifted only when a big hit of two or more villas is reached, and is not changed when the first big hit is a short hit that is not in a time-short state (so-called single hit big hit). Also good. Also, in the case of a single big hit, the mode may be shifted to the limited number mode.

  Further, the main control means (for example, the main control unit 300) can execute control for ending the big hit game regardless of the contents of the effects controlled by the sub control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400). Then, the special symbol variation display can be started.

  In addition, for example, when the timing of the production end position of the first production comes before the timing at which the first production termination condition is satisfied, a clear timing (for example, on the control of the main control unit) The first production may be continued until the end of the big hit game or when the symbol is stopped), or an announcement that informs the end of the first production (for example, “next time “Look forward to the link effect” or the like) may be performed.

  In addition, as an example of ending at a timing that does not have a clear timing, the ST state is terminated (so-called ST missing), the time is missing, the probability variation big hit (abrupt probability variation big hit: Surprisingly, a normal big hit that can hardly be expected of the ball that will shift to the normal gaming state (sudden normal big hit: breakthrough), a short-hitting big hit that can hardly be expected of the ball that will shift to the short-time state (sudden short and big hit) : At the time of a collision), start of the island simultaneous production mentioned above, power interruption power recovery, etc. are mentioned. Here, when the island simultaneous production is started, if the conditions for continuously executing the first production are satisfied even after the completion of the island simultaneous production, the first production is resumed after the end of the island simultaneous production. You may make it make it.

In addition, “including display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208],
The plurality of presentation means are means including the display means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the display means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the display means and the display means.

Also, “light emitting means [for example, various lamps 418, game board lamps 532, game stand frame lamps 542]
The plurality of presentation means are means including the light emitting means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the light emitting means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the light emitting means and the light emitting means.

In addition, “sound output means [for example, speaker 120],
The plurality of rendering means are means including the sound output means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the sound output means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the sound output means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the sound output means and the sound output means.

In addition, it includes an effect moving means [for example, an effect moving body 224] that can be displaced according to the contents of the effect,
The plurality of effect means are means including the effect moving means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the effect moving means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the effect moving means may be capable of being displaced only in accordance with the contents of the effect, or may be capable of being displaced even in cases other than the contents of the effect. Further, the effect moving means may be always displaced according to the contents of the effect, or may not be displaced according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, the first effect may be executed only by the effect moving means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the effect moving means and the effect moving means.

In addition, “One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an island simultaneous effect, an effect related to symbol variation display, a jackpot effect, etc.]
The second effect is an effect that can be started from the top regardless of the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the production can have variations.

  Here, the second effect may be one that can be started only from the beginning regardless of the result of the timing by the first timing means, or the first effect regardless of the result of the timing by the first timing means. It may be possible to start from other than. The second performance may always start from the top regardless of the result of timing by the first timing means, or start from the beginning regardless of the result of timing by the first timing means. You may not.

Further, “providing production control means [for example, the CPU 404 of the second sub-control unit 400] for controlling the plurality of production means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing execution control of the first effect by the plurality of effect means according to a result of timing by the first time measuring means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the execution control of the first production by the plurality of production means according to the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means, or the first time measurement Control other than the execution control of the first effect by the plurality of effect means may be executable in accordance with the result of timing by the means. The effect control means may always execute execution control of the first effect by the plurality of effect means according to the result of time measurement by the first time measuring means, or by the first time measuring means. Depending on the result of timing, there may be cases where the execution control of the first effect by the plurality of effect means is not executed.

Further, “providing production control means [for example, the CPU 404 of the second sub-control unit 400] for controlling the plurality of production means,
The production control unit is a unit capable of executing execution control of the first production by the plurality of production units according to a result of timing by the first time measurement unit,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing execution control of the second effect by the plurality of effect means, regardless of the result of time measurement by the first time measuring means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to perform the effect control by the first time measuring means and the effect control not based on the first time measuring means, so that stable control can be performed while increasing the variation of the effects. There is a case.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the execution control of the first production by the plurality of production means according to the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means, or the first time measurement Control other than the execution control of the first effect by the plurality of effect means may be executable in accordance with the result of timing by the means. The effect control means may always execute execution control of the first effect by the plurality of effect means according to the result of time measurement by the first time measuring means, or by the first time measuring means. Depending on the result of timing, there may be cases where the execution control of the first effect by the plurality of effect means is not executed.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the execution control of the second effect by the plurality of effect means, regardless of the result of timing by the first time measuring means, or the first time measuring means. Regardless of the result of the time measurement by, control other than execution control of the second effect by a plurality of effect means may be executable. Further, the effect control means may always execute execution control of the second effect by the plurality of effect means regardless of the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means, or by the first time measuring means. Regardless of the result of timing, there may be cases where execution control of the second effect by a plurality of effect means is not executed.

Also, “One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, Himeshima simultaneous effects shown in FIG. 243, FIG. 273, etc.]
The third effect is an effect that is always started from the beginning when the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means is the first effect start time [e.g., one hour has elapsed since the power was turned on],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the variation of the effect by the first time measuring means can be increased and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Here, the third effect may be able to be started only when the first effect start time has elapsed, or can be started other than when the first effect start time has elapsed. There may be. In addition, the third effect may be started when the first effect start time has elapsed, or may not be started even when the first effect start time has elapsed.

  Further, the third effect may be configured not to be executed even when the first effect start time has elapsed, and when a specific condition is not satisfied. Here, the specific conditions include, for example, a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of a DIP switch) by a store clerk or a predetermined operation (for example, a chance button operation or customization by a user mode) by a player. As a result, there is a case where execution of the third effect is turned on. Further, the specific condition may be a case where a predetermined demonstration effect (an animation demonstration effect or the like) is not being executed (that is, a state where it is determined that the player is playing a game).

  Further, the content of the third effect may be the same as or different from the content of the first effect. Further, the content of the third effect may be configured by a part of the content of the first effect (for example, the effect B2 constituting the effect B constitutes the third effect. Also good). Further, the production content of the first production may be constituted by a part of the production content of the third production.

In addition, “second timing means [for example, timer circuit 652, RTC 654] provided,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect [for example, effect E],
When the fourth effect is started, the fourth effect is started according to the result of the time measurement by the second time measuring unit [for example, the effect E is determined by the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652. , May start in the middle and may start from the beginning],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effects using a plurality of timekeeping means, it is possible to increase the variations of the effects and improve the effects.

  Here, the timekeeping by the second timekeeping means may be synchronized with the timekeeping by the first timekeeping means or may not be synchronized.

  In addition, when the fourth effect is started, if the time measurement by the second timing means is not the second time measurement result when the fourth effect is started, the fourth effect is started from the middle. In the case where the time measurement result by the second time measuring means is the second time measurement result, the fourth effect may be started from the top. The second timing result may include, for example, a timing start time by the second timing means.

Further, “the first time measuring means is a timer [for example, a timer circuit 652] that starts time counting when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the timer may reset the counter value when the power is turned off.

Further, “the first time measuring means is a real time clock [for example, an RTC circuit 654].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also, “One of the plurality of effects is a fifth effect [for example, effect F],
When the fifth effect is started, the fifth effect is an effect that may start in the middle depending on the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means [for example, the effect F is Depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, it may start in the middle]
The fifth effect is an effect that may be started from the beginning when the fifth effect is started, depending on the result of timing by the first timing means [for example, the effect F is Depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652, there may be a case where it starts from the top]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, both the first effect and the fifth effect are performed, or only one of them is performed according to the time from the start of timing by the first timing means. In some cases, production variations can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

  Here, the fifth effect may be an effect synchronized with the first effect, or may be an effect not synchronized.

  In addition, the start timing of the fifth effect may be the same as or different from the start timing of the first effect.

  In addition, the end timing of the fifth effect may be the same as or different from the end timing of the first effect.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000]. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Production means [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 120, various lamps 418, etc., production movable body 224]
First timing means [eg, timer circuit 652, RTC circuit 654];
A game machine equipped with
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, the Yoshimune link effect shown in FIG. 299 (k) to FIG. (P), or FIG. 415 (d) to FIG. 417 (k). Link production (production B)]
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect [e.g., a variation display of decorative symbols in the electric support state shown in FIGS. 416 (f) to (h),
The first effect may be started from the middle depending on the result of timing by the first timing means when a first effect start condition [e.g., transition to jackpot gaming state] is satisfied. [For example, as shown in FIG. 415 (d), FIG. 418 (a-3), FIG. 419, etc., the effect B starts from the middle of the effect B2 by the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652. Sometimes
The first effect is an effect that can be executed from when the first effect start condition is satisfied until a first period [e.g., the end of the electric support state] elapses,
The second effect is an effect that can be started when a second effect start condition [for example, the start of symbol variation] is satisfied,
The second effect is an effect that can be executed from when the second effect start condition is satisfied until a second period [for example, the end of symbol variation] elapses,
The first period is a period longer than the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game machine, the production means can be characterized.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, since the 1st period is longer than the 2nd period, the 1st effect may be made to attract attention rather than the 2nd effect.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be able to execute effects other than the first effect and the second effect. Further, the production means may necessarily execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute at least one of the first production and the second production. Good.

  Further, the first effect may be executable only after the first effect start condition is satisfied and before the first period elapses, or the first effect start condition is satisfied. May be executed other than until the first period elapses. In addition, the first effect may be executed without fail until the first period starts after the first effect start condition is satisfied, or after the first effect start condition is satisfied. There may be cases where it is not executed until the first period has elapsed.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only when the second effect start condition is satisfied, or may be started other than when the second effect start condition is satisfied. May be. The second effect may be started when the second effect start condition is satisfied, or may not be started when the second effect start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the first period may be a period shorter than the second period. For example, the second period may be the maximum time from the start to the end of the jackpot. Here, the maximum time from the start to the end of the jackpot depends at least on the maximum opening time and the maximum number of rounds in one round of the variable winning means. For example, the maximum opening time in one round of the variable winning means is 30 seconds. When the maximum number of rounds is 15, the maximum time of the second period of the jackpot effect as the second effect is 8 minutes + α (the execution time of the jackpot start effect, the execution time of the interval between rounds × 15 Including the execution time of the big hit end effect).

  In addition, the second period may be the maximum change time or the minimum change time among the change display times of a plurality of types of special symbols that can be executed on the gaming machine.

  Further, the second period may be the minimum digestion time in the ST state or the short-time state, or may be the maximum digestion time. Here, when the minimum fluctuation time of the fluctuation display time of the special symbol in the ST state or the short time state is 0.5 s, and the number of symbol fluctuation display in which the ST state or the short time state is maintained is 100 times, the minimum digestion is performed. The time is 50 seconds + α (including the symbol determination time × 100 times).

  Further, part or all of the second period may overlap with part of the first period. For example, during the execution of the first effect, the second effect (for example, a decorative symbol variation display (an example of the second effect) during execution of the first effect) may be started. In addition, the first effect (for example, the first effect during the decorative symbol variation display (an example of the second effect)) may be started during the execution of the second effect. Further, the first effect may not be executed during the execution of the second effect. For example, the first effect may not be executed during the decorative symbol change display (an example of the second effect), and may be executed at the start of the next decorative symbol change display, or the effect related to the jackpot game (the first effect) The first effect is not executed during the execution of the second effect), and is started after the end of the jackpot game (for example, at the start of the first variation display of decorative symbols after the end of the jackpot game) Alternatively, it may not be performed during the execution of the island simultaneous production (an example of the second production), but may be performed after the end of the island simultaneous production. Further, the second effect may not be executed during the execution of the first effect.

  The first period may be a period having the same length as the second period.

In addition, “the symbol display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214] capable of executing the symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that can be performed over a plurality of times of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), the effect B is performed over a plurality of times of decorative symbol variation. Has been]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  The first effect may be executable only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be executable without straddling a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the first effect may be always executed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In addition, “the second effect start condition is an effect start condition established when the symbol variation display starts,
The second period is a period that ends when the symbol variation display stops.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since the first period is longer than the time at which one game is performed, there is a possibility that the first presentation may be executed in one or more games. Can be enjoyed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the second period may be the maximum time or the minimum time of the fluctuation time that can be selected at the time of electric support (including the probability variation state and the short time state). Further, the second period may be the maximum time of the variation time that can be selected during the non-electric support (including the probability variation state and the short time state), or may be the minimum time.

  A main control means, and an effect control means capable of executing an effect in accordance with a command from the main control means (for example, a command for identifying a special figure to be stopped or a command for specifying a variation time); In the gaming machine equipped with, the effect controlled by the effect control means may be the second effect.

  The symbol display means may be controlled by the main control means, or may be controlled by the effect control means (sub-control means).

In addition, “the second production start condition is a production start condition established when the big hit game is started,
The second period is a period that ends when the jackpot game ends.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first period is longer than the time (second period) in which one big hit game is performed, so that the player can be entertained for a long time, and the effect can be improved. There is a case.

  Here, the second period may be the second period including an advantageous state before and after the big hit game when an advantageous state is attached before and after the big hit game. For example, after transitioning to the power support state (including the probability change state and the short time state) and then transitioning to the big hit gaming state, the power support state (including the probability change and the time reduction state) is entered again and the power support state is terminated. In such a case, the second period may be from the first power support state to the end of the last power support state. Here, the maximum time from the start to the end of the jackpot depends at least on the maximum opening time and the maximum number of rounds in one round of the variable winning means. For example, the maximum opening time in one round of the variable winning means is 30 seconds. When the maximum number of rounds is 15, the maximum time of the second period of the jackpot effect as the second effect is 8 minutes + α (the execution time of the jackpot start effect, the execution time of the interval between rounds × 15 Including the execution time of the big hit end effect).

Also here
“The second period is the period that starts when the power support state starts,
The second period is a period that ends when the power support state ends.
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

Also,
“The second period is the period that starts when the probability change state starts,
The second period is a period that ends when the probability variation state ends.
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

Also,
“The second period is the period that starts when the short-time state starts,
The second period is a period that ends when the time-short state ends.
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

Also,
“It is configured to be able to enter the special mode when a specific hit (eg, latency or small hit) ends.
The first performance can be executed in the special mode.
A game stand characterized by that. "
It may be.

  Here, the special mode is, for example, a mode in which a special effect can be executed.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect that may be started from the beginning in accordance with the result of time measurement by the first time measuring means when the first effect start condition is satisfied [for example, As shown in FIG. 415 (d), FIG. 418 (a-3), FIG. 419, etc., the effect B may start from the head of the effect B2 depending on the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, since the first effect is started from the beginning at the timing when the first effect is started, the effect may be enhanced.

In addition, “the first effect is when the first effect end condition is satisfied [for example, as shown in FIG. 419 (a), the game state is state A (electric support state, jackpot game state at the timing of T2. In the case of transition from non-change state A to the non-state A], until the production end position of the first production [for example, the position where the production related to the production B3 is finished as shown in FIG. 419 (a)] It is an effect that continues the first effect,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the condition for ending the first effect is satisfied, the effect is continued until the end position of the first effect, so that it does not give the player a sense of incongruity. It may be possible to reduce the decrease in interest.

  Here, the production end position of the first production may be only one, or may be two or more. In addition, when there are two or more production end positions of the first production, it may be made to end at the production end position of the earliest time, and the first production is performed at any production end position. You may make it determine by lottery etc. whether it complete | finishes.

  In addition, the production end position of the first effect may be, for example, a timing at which the music ends (so-called “crisp timing”), or may be in the middle of the music (at a timing that is not sharp timing).

  For example, in a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed game machine, the first production starts at the start timing of the short-time state, and then the first production ends when the jackpot game that does not enter the short-time state ends. If the condition is satisfied, the first effect may be continued until the end point of the first effect without ending the first effect at the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the time-short state ends (so-called short-time omission) without shifting to the jackpot game after becoming the time-short state, without continuing the first production until the production end position of the first production, You may make it complete | finish a 1st production at the time of time-shortening.

  Further, for example, when the game is a big hit of 2 or more villas and the game is a big hit game that is not in a short-time state, the mode may be shifted to the limited number of times mode in which the first effect is continuously performed. . Here, the limited number mode is, for example, a mode in which the first effect is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the limited-time mode is shifted only when a big hit of two or more villas is reached, and is not changed when the first big hit is a short hit that is not in a time-short state (so-called single hit big hit). Also good. Also, in the case of a single big hit, the mode may be shifted to the limited number mode.

  Further, the main control means (for example, the main control unit 300) can execute control for ending the big hit game regardless of the contents of the effects controlled by the sub control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400). Then, the special symbol variation display can be started.

  In addition, for example, when the timing of the production end position of the first production comes before the timing at which the first production termination condition is satisfied, a clear timing (for example, on the control of the main control unit) The first production may be continued until the end of the big hit game or when the symbol is stopped), or an announcement that informs the end of the first production (for example, “next time “Look forward to the link effect” or the like) may be performed.

  Other examples of termination at timings that do not have a clear timing include the end of the ST state (so-called “ST missing”), the lack of time, and the probability variation big hit that can hardly be expected of the ball that has shifted to the probability variation state (abrupt probability variation big hit: abrupt) , The normal jackpot that can hardly be expected of the ball that has shifted to the probable state (sudden normal jackpot: rush), the jackpot with a short time that can hardly be expected of the ball (sudden time jackpot: suddenly), the start of the island simultaneous production described above, Examples include power interruption and power recovery. Here, when the island simultaneous production is started, if the conditions for continuously executing the first production are satisfied even after the completion of the island simultaneous production, the first production is resumed after the end of the island simultaneous production. You may make it make it.

In addition, “the first effect is an effect composed of a plurality of effect parts [for example, effect B1, effect B2, effect B3]
One effect part of the plurality of effect parts is a first effect part [for example, effect B2],
One effect part of the plurality of effect parts is a second effect part [for example, effect B3],
The second effect part is an effect part executed next to the first effect part [For example, as shown in FIG. 419 (a), the effect B3 is executed next to the effect B2. ], A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, since the production part to be started may differ depending on the timing at which the first production is started, the production effect may be enhanced.

  Here, the first effect may consist of only the first effect part and the second effect part, and also includes effect parts other than the first effect part and the second effect part. It may be configured. In addition, the first effect may necessarily include the first effect part and the second effect part, or includes at least one of the first effect part and the second effect part. There may be no cases. Further, the first effect may be composed only of the first effect part, or may be composed only of the second effect part.

  In addition, each production part constituting the first production may be able to start from the beginning of each, or may be able to start from the middle.

  Further, when the first effect is configured to include at least the first effect part and the second effect part, these effect parts may be configured to be repeatedly executed. For example, after the first production part, the second production part... The Nth production part are executed, the first production part may be executed again.

  The effect part includes one or more of music, moving images, images, operations by the effect moving means, light emission patterns by the lamp, and the like. For example, as long as the production part includes music, one production part may be constituted by one music, or one production part may be constituted by two or more music. May be. Further, if the production part is configured to include music, one music may be configured by two or more production parts.

  In addition, when the production is performed first, it may be started from the head of the production part depending on the result of the timing by the first time measuring means, and may be started from the middle of the production part. You may be comprised so that it can be started only from the head of the production part. Moreover, you may be comprised so that it can be started only from the middle of the production part.

  In addition, when the first effect end condition is satisfied, the first effect is ended only when a specific effect part (for example, the part including the last of the music) ends, and other effect parts are Even if the production part ends, the production part to be executed next may be started without ending the first production.

In addition, “including display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208],
The effect means is means including the display means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the display means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the display means and the display means.

Also, “light emitting means [for example, various lamps 418, game board lamps 532, game stand frame lamps 542]
The effect means is means including the light emitting means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the light emitting means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the light emitting means and the light emitting means.

In addition, “sound output means [for example, speaker 120],
The production means is means including the sound output means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the sound output means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the sound output means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the sound output means and the sound output means.

In addition, it includes an effect moving means [for example, an effect moving body 224] that can be displaced according to the contents of the effect,
The effect means is means including the effect moving means,
The first effect is an effect executed at least by the effect moving means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the effect moving means may be capable of being displaced only in accordance with the contents of the effect, or may be capable of being displaced even in cases other than the contents of the effect. Further, the effect moving means may be always displaced according to the contents of the effect, or may not be displaced according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, the first effect may be executed only by the effect moving means, or may be executed by an effect means different from the effect moving means and the effect moving means.

In addition, “the second effect is an effect that can be started from the top, regardless of the result of time measurement by the first time measuring means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be one that can be started only from the beginning regardless of the result of the timing by the first timing means, or the first effect regardless of the result of the timing by the first timing means. It may be possible to start from other than. The second performance may always start from the top regardless of the result of timing by the first timing means, or start from the beginning regardless of the result of timing by the first timing means. You may not.

In addition, “providing production control means for controlling the production means [for example, the CPU 404 of the second sub-control unit 400],
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control for starting the first effect by the effect means from the middle according to a result of timing by the first time measuring means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, the production control by the first time measuring means can be executed by the production control means, so that stable control may be possible.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the control for starting the first production by the production means halfway according to the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means. Control other than the control for starting the first effect by the effecting means from the middle may be executed in accordance with the result of the time measuring by the time measuring means. The production control means may always execute control for starting the first production by the production means halfway according to the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means, or the first time measurement means. There may be a case where the control for starting the first production by the production means is not executed depending on the result of the time measurement.

In addition, “providing production control means for controlling the production means [for example, the CPU 404 of the second sub-control unit 400],
The production control means is a means capable of executing control to start the first production by the production means in the middle according to a result of timing by the first time measurement means,
The production control means is a means capable of executing control to start the second production from the top, regardless of the result of time measurement by the first time measurement means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the production control means can execute production control by the first time measurement means and production control not by the first time measurement means, so that stable control can be performed while increasing variations in production. There are cases where it can be done.

  Here, the production control means may be capable of executing only the control for starting the first production by the production means halfway according to the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means. Control other than the control for starting the first effect by the effecting means from the middle may be executed in accordance with the result of the time measuring by the time measuring means. The production control means may always execute control for starting the first production by the production means halfway according to the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means, or the first time measurement means. There may be a case where the control for starting the first production by the production means is not executed depending on the result of the time measurement.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the control for starting the second effect by the effect means from the top, regardless of the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means. Regardless of the result of timing by the means, control other than the control for starting the second effect by the effect means from the beginning may be executed. Further, the production control means may always execute control for starting the second production by the production means from the top, regardless of the result of the time measurement by the first time measurement means, or the first time measurement means. Regardless of the result of the timing of, there may be a case where the control for starting the second effect by the effect means from the beginning is not executed.

Also, “One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, Himeshima simultaneous effects shown in FIG. 243, FIG. 273, etc.]
The third effect is an effect that is always started from the beginning when the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means is the first effect start time [e.g., one hour has elapsed since the power was turned on],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the variation of the effect by the first time measuring means can be increased and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Here, the third effect may be able to be started only when the first effect start time has elapsed, or can be started other than when the first effect start time has elapsed. There may be. In addition, the third effect may be started when the first effect start time has elapsed, or may not be started even when the first effect start time has elapsed.

  Further, the third effect may be configured not to be executed even when the first effect start time has elapsed, and when a specific condition is not satisfied. Here, the specific conditions include, for example, a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of a DIP switch) by a store clerk or a predetermined operation (for example, a chance button operation or customization by a user mode) by a player. As a result, there is a case where execution of the third effect is turned on. Further, the specific condition may be a case where a predetermined demonstration effect (an animation demonstration effect or the like) is not being executed (that is, a state where it is determined that the player is playing a game).

  Further, the content of the third effect may be the same as or different from the content of the first effect. Further, the content of the third effect may be configured by a part of the content of the first effect (for example, the effect B2 constituting the effect B constitutes the third effect. Also good). Further, the production content of the first production may be constituted by a part of the production content of the third production.

Further, “the effect means is means including first effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] and second effect means [for example, effect movable body 224],
The first effect is an effect executed by at least the first effect means and the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, when both the first effect and the other effect are performed, or only one of them is performed according to the time from the start of timing by the first time measuring means. For example, the variation of the production can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

  Here, the effect means may include only the first effect means and the second effect means, or effect means other than the first effect means and the second effect means (for example, Nth It may further include a production means). Further, the production means may necessarily include the first production means and the second production means, and may not include at least one of the first production means and the second production means. Also good.

  In addition, the first presentation means and the second presentation means may be started at the same timing or at different timings. Moreover, the timing at which the first effect ends in the first effect means and the second effect means may be the same or different.

  Further, there may be a case where an effect portion in the first effect by the first effect means and an effect portion in the first effect by the second effect means cooperate. In other words, an effect in which the effect display by the display means is linked to the operation of the effect movable means (for example, by bringing the “effect movable means” imitating the shape of a bicep close to an image displayed as “Echigoya” to attack. You may make it perform the production to show as if doing. Further, there is no need for an effect such that the first effect means and the second effect means cooperate.

  Further, the time measuring means for determining the start timing of the first effect by the first effect means and the time measuring means for determining the start timing of the first effect by the second effect means are different. Timekeeping means may be used. Further, the time measuring means and the rendering means may be in one-to-one correspondence, not limited to one-to-one correspondence, and may be, for example, one-to-two correspondence or two-to-one correspondence.

In addition, “second timing means [for example, timer circuit 652, RTC 654] provided,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect [for example, effect E],
When the fourth effect is started, the fourth effect is started according to the result of the time measurement by the second time measuring unit [for example, the effect E is determined by the counter value indicated by the timer circuit 652. , May start in the middle, or may start from the beginning],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effects using a plurality of timekeeping means, it is possible to increase the variations of the effects and improve the effects.

  Here, the timekeeping by the second timekeeping means may be synchronized with the timekeeping by the first timekeeping means or may not be synchronized.

  In addition, when the fourth effect is started, if the time measurement by the second timing means is not the second time measurement result when the fourth effect is started, the fourth effect is started from the middle. In the case where the time measurement result by the second time measuring means is the second time measurement result, the fourth effect may be started from the top. The second timing result may include, for example, a timing start time by the second timing means.

Further, “the first time measuring means is a timer [for example, a timer circuit 652] that starts time counting when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the timer may reset the counter value when the power is turned off.

Further, “the first time measuring means is a real time clock [for example, an RTC circuit 654].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the gaming machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000]. ]
Also explained.

  The game stand according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and corresponds to, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not the internal winning of plural types of winnings is successful by lottery, and stop of reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination predetermined for the winning combination internally A determination means for determining, and a payout control means for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode. Also, such as the slot machine is suitable.

  In addition, the gaming table according to the present invention includes a launching device that launches a ball into a predetermined gaming area, a winning opening configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, and a ball that has entered the winning opening. Detecting means for detecting, a payout means for paying out a ball when the detecting means detects a ball, and a variable display device for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a game ball enters the winning opening and wins With this as an opportunity, the variable display device is suitable for a pachinko machine that displays a stop after the symbols are changed and notifies the game state transition.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine.

  FIG. 427 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 427, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 427 is used to enclose a sphere, circulate the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and use the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured as one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit are bidirectional. You may comprise so that communication is possible. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

[Twenty-third embodiment]
Next, a twenty-third embodiment of the present invention is described. This embodiment is the same as the above-described twelfth embodiment, but the pachinko machine 100 in this embodiment is different from the twelfth embodiment in that it includes the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 133 and described above. In addition, as will be described below, in this embodiment, the special symbol jackpot stop symbol mode and the action pattern of the attacker for each round are different from those in the twelfth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the second count switch SW2 provided in the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 133 also functions as a V pass switch. In addition to the second count switch SW2 that also functions as a V-pass switch, a third count switch that can pass a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 and does not function as a V-pass switch is provided. You may make it provide, and you may comprise so that the game ball which entered the 2nd variable winning opening 235 can pass through either one of 2nd count switch SW2 and 3rd count switch. Furthermore, the second count switch SW2 may be provided with a V shutter as described above to control the passage of the game ball to the second count switch SW2. In this case, the V shutter opening / closing control and the second variable prize opening 235 opening / closing control may be performed so that only a specific round (for example, the 14th and 16th rounds) can pass through the second count switch SW2. For example, in a round other than a specific round, the second variable prize opening 235 may be opened only at a timing when the V shutter is opened and cannot pass through the second count switch SW2.

  FIG. 428 (a) shows an example of a special symbol jackpot stoppage pattern and an action pattern of an attacker for each round in the pachinko machine of the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 428 (b) shows a big hit in the jackpot game. An example of the specific operation | movement pattern of a winning opening (variable winning opening) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 428 (a), the jackpot symbols in the pachinko machine of the 23rd embodiment are “symbol 1” to “symbol 9”, “symbol A”, “symbol C”, “symbol E” and “symbol F”. ]. Among them, the jackpot symbols of Special Figure 1 are “symbol 1” to “symbol 9”, “symbol A”, “symbol C”, “symbol E”, and “symbol F”. , “Design 1”. In the present embodiment, the operation pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit game differs depending on the big hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the first round, the third round, the fifth round, the seventh round, the ninth round, the eleventh round, the thirteenth round, and the fifteenth round (that is, odd-numbered rounds) in any jackpot Then, the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened, and the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, the twelfth round, the fourteenth round, the sixteenth round ( That is, in the even number round), the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is opened. In other words, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are configured to be alternately opened for each round. In addition, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can display a lost symbol or a small hit symbol. In addition, you may not provide a small hit. In addition, the jackpot symbol of the special symbol 2 may be able to display symbols other than “symbol 1”.

  As shown in FIG. 428 (b), nine types of operation patterns for the special winning opening are prepared, and the operation of the special winning opening for each round is based on one of these operation patterns.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 1”, in the odd-numbered round, after the first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for a maximum of 29 seconds, it is closed for 0.4 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1). After that, it is closed for 0.1 seconds as an interval time between rounds (closed state 2) (pattern 6). In the even-numbered round, after the second variable winning opening 235 (second attacker) is opened for 29 seconds, it is closed for 0.4 seconds as a closing time after the round, and then is closed for 0.1 seconds as an interval time between rounds ( Pattern 9). In other words, “symbol 1” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls are 16 round big hits that can be entered into the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the even-numbered rounds and the game ball easily passes through the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-pass switch, “Symbol 1” is a big hit that is expected to win a probable change. It is a design showing that there is. In the case of a big hit with “symbol 1”, since the total time of the closing time after the round and the interval time between rounds is 0.5 seconds in any round, the first variable prize opening 234 is between rounds. In addition, the number of game balls that cannot be won in the second variable winning opening 235 may be reduced, and a decrease in the number of balls in the big hit game may be suppressed. In some cases, you will never be forced.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 2”, the operation of the attacker according to the above-described pattern 6 is performed in the odd-numbered round, and the operation of the attacker according to the above-described pattern 9 is performed in the even-numbered land excluding the 14th round. In the 14th round, the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) opened for 0.5 seconds, closed for 3 seconds, opened for 28 seconds, and then closed for 0.4 seconds as the closing time after the round. After that, it is closed for 0.1 second as an interval time between rounds (pattern 8). In other words, “symbol 2” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls are a 16-round big hit that can be entered into the variable winning opening in any round from 1 round to 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the even-numbered round and the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-passing switch is easy to pass through, the “symbol 2” is a big hit that is scheduled to acquire probability variation. It is a pattern to show. In addition, even if a big win is made with “symbol 2”, the total time of the closing time after the round and the interval time between rounds is 0.5 seconds in any round, so the first variable prize opening 234 is between rounds. In some cases, the number of game balls that cannot be won in the second variable winning opening 235 can be reduced.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 3”, the operation of the attacker according to the above-described pattern 6 is performed in the odd-numbered round, and the operation of the attacker according to the above-described pattern 9 is performed in the even-numbered round excluding the 14th round. In the 14th round, after the second variable prize opening 235 (second attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and then the interval between rounds The time (closed state 2) is closed for 0.1 second (pattern 7). In other words, “symbol 3” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls is a big hit of 15 rounds that can be entered into the variable winning opening in rounds 1 to 13, 15 and 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the even-numbered rounds except for the 14th round, and the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-passing switch is easy to pass through, “symbol 3” is scheduled to acquire probability variation. It is a design showing that it is a big hit. In the case of a big hit with “symbol 3”, the total time of the closing time after the round and the interval time between rounds is 0.5 seconds in any round except the 14th round. In some cases, the number of game balls that cannot be won in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 can be reduced.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 4”, the attack operation according to the above-described pattern 6 is performed in the odd-numbered rounds except for the 15th round, and the attacker according to the above-described pattern 9 is performed in the even-numbered rounds excluding the 14th and 16th rounds. Is performed. Also, in the 14th and 16th rounds, the attacker operation according to the pattern 7 described above is performed. In the 15th round, after the first variable winning opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and thereafter, the interval time between rounds As (closed state 2), it is closed for 0.1 second (pattern 1). In other words, “symbol 4” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be placed in the variable winning opening in the first to thirteenth rounds and is a big hit of 13 rounds. In addition, in the even number rounds except for the 14th and 16th rounds, the second attacker becomes long open, and the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V passing switch is easy to pass. It is a design showing that it is a planned big hit. In addition, in the case of a big hit with “symbol 4”, the total time of the closing time after round and the interval time between rounds is 0.5 seconds in any round except 14 rounds to 16 rounds. In some cases, the number of game balls that cannot be won in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 can be reduced.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 5”, the attacking operation by the pattern 6 is performed in the first round, and the attacking operation by the pattern 9 is performed in the second and sixteenth rounds. In the third, fifth, seventh, ninth, eleventh and fifteenth rounds, the attacker operates according to the above-described pattern 1, and the fourth, sixth and eighth rounds are performed. In the tenth and twelfth rounds, the attacker operates according to the pattern 7 described above. In the 13th round, after the first variable prize opening 234 (first attacker) is opened for 0.5 seconds, it is closed for 1.9 seconds as the closing time after the round (closed state 1), and then between rounds. It closes for 8.1 seconds as an interval time (closed state 2) (pattern 3). In the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In other words, “symbol 5” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls are a big hit of 4 rounds that can be entered into the variable winning opening in 1 round, 2 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the second round, the 14th round, and the 16th round, and the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-passing switch is easy to pass, It is a symbol showing that it is a big hit. In the case of a big hit with “symbol 5”, the total time of the closing time after the round and the interval time between rounds is 0.5 seconds in 1 round, 2 rounds, 14 rounds and 16 rounds. In some cases, the number of game balls that cannot be won in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 may be reduced.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 6” and “symbol 7”, the attacker operates according to the above-described pattern 6 in the first, third and fifth rounds, and the second, fourth and sixth rounds. In the eyes and the 16th round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 9 described above is performed. Then, in the seventh, ninth, eleventh and fifteenth rounds, the above-described attack operation by the pattern 1 is performed, and in the eighth, tenth and twelfth rounds, the attack by the above-described pattern 7 is performed. Is performed. Then, in the thirteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 3 described above is performed, and in the fourteenth round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. In other words, “symbol 6” is a symbol indicating that a lot of game balls can win a variable winning opening in 1 round to 6 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds, and that is a big hit of 8 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the 14th round, and the 16th round, and the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-passing switch is easily passed, The symbol “7” is a symbol indicating that it is a big hit that is scheduled to be acquired. In case of big wins for “symbol 6” and “symbol 7”, the total time of the closing time after the round and the interval time between rounds is as short as 0.5 seconds in rounds 1-6, 14 and 16 Therefore, there may be a case where the number of game balls that cannot be won in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 between rounds can be reduced.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 8”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first, third, fifth, thirteenth and fifteenth rounds, and the second, fourth and fourth rounds. In the sixth and sixth rounds, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. Then, in the seventh, ninth and eleventh rounds, the above-described attack operation by the pattern 1 is performed, and in the eighth, tenth, twelfth and fourteenth rounds, the attack by the above-described pattern 7 is performed. Is performed. Then, in the 16th round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed. That is, “symbol 8” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be put into a variable winning opening in 9 to 13 rounds, 13 rounds, 15 rounds, and 16 rounds, and is a big hit of 9 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the 16th round, and the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-passing switch is easy to pass, It is a design showing that it is a planned big hit. In addition, in the case of a big hit with “symbol 8”, the total time of the closing time after the round and the interval time between rounds is 0.5 seconds in 1 to 6 rounds, 13 rounds, 15 rounds and 16 rounds. Therefore, there may be a case where the number of game balls that cannot be won in the first variable winning slot 234 and the second variable winning slot 235 can be reduced between rounds.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol 9”, the attacker operates according to the pattern 6 described above in the first, third, fifth, thirteenth and fifteenth rounds, and the second, fourth, and fourth rounds. In the sixth and sixth rounds, the attacker operates according to the pattern 9 described above. In the seventh round, the ninth round, and the eleventh round, the attacking operation is performed according to the above-described pattern 1, and in the eighth round, the tenth round, the twelfth round, the fourteenth round, and the sixteenth round, the above-described attacks are performed. Attacker operation by pattern 7 is performed. That is, “symbol 9” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can win a variable winning opening in 1 to 6 rounds, 13 rounds, and 15 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the second round, the fourth round and the sixth round, and the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-passing switch is easy to pass, It is a symbol showing that it is a big hit. In addition, in the case of a big hit with “symbol 9”, since the total time of the closing time after the round and the interval time between rounds is 0.5 seconds in 1 to 6 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds, In some cases, the number of game balls that cannot be won in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 may be reduced.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol A” and “symbol F”, the attacker operates according to the above pattern 6 in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round, and the second round, the fourth round In the fifth, sixth, eighth and sixteenth rounds, the attacker operation according to the pattern 9 described above is performed. In the ninth, eleventh, thirteenth and fifteenth rounds, the above-described attacker operation is performed according to pattern 1, and in the tenth and twelfth rounds, the above-described attacker operation according to pattern 7 is performed. Is called. Then, in the 14th round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed, and in the 16th round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 9 described above is performed. That is, “symbol A” and “symbol F” are symbols indicating that a large number of game balls can be put into a variable winning opening in 10 to 16 rounds in 1 to 8 rounds, 14 rounds, and 16 rounds. . In addition, since the second attacker becomes long open in the 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 14th round and 16th round, the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-passing switch is easy to pass. "And" symbol F "are symbols indicating that it is a big hit that is expected to acquire probability variation. In the case of a big hit with “symbol A” and “symbol F”, the total time of the closing time after the round and the interval time between rounds is as short as 0.5 seconds in rounds 1 to 8, 13 and 15 Therefore, there may be a case where the number of game balls that cannot be won in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 between rounds can be reduced.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol C”, the operation of the attacker according to the above-described pattern 1 is performed in the odd-numbered rounds except the 13th round, and the operation of the attacker according to the above-described pattern 7 is performed in the even-numbered rounds excluding the 14th and 16th rounds. Is done. In the thirteenth round, the attacker operation according to the pattern 3 described above is performed. Then, in the 14th round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 8 described above is performed, and in the 16th round, the operation of the attacker by the pattern 9 described above is performed. In other words, “symbol C” is a symbol indicating that a large number of game balls can be placed in the variable winning opening in 14 rounds and 16 rounds, and that is a big hit of 2 rounds. In addition, since the second attacker is long open in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-passing switch is easy to pass, the “symbol C” It is a design showing that there is. In the case of a big hit with “symbol C”, the total time of the closing time after the round and the interval time between rounds is as short as 0.5 seconds in the 14th and 16th rounds. In some cases, the number of game balls that cannot be won in the mouth 234 and the second variable prize opening 235 can be reduced.

  In the case of a big hit with “symbol E”, the operation of the attacker according to the above-described pattern 1 is performed in the odd-numbered round, and the operation of the attacker according to the above-described pattern 7 is performed in the even-numbered round. That is, “symbol E” is a symbol indicating that all rounds of 1st to 16th rounds are short-opened and are substantially a big hit of 0 rounds. Also, in any even number round, the second attacker becomes short open and the second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-passing switch becomes difficult to pass. It is a design showing that there is.

  Next, modified examples of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 429 is a diagram schematically illustrating the shape and arrangement of the variable prize opening.

  FIG. 429 (a) shows an aspect in which the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 have the same width, and the second variable winning port 235 is arranged directly below the first variable winning port 234. This is the same as the arrangement of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 provided in the game board 200 in FIG.

  In FIG. 5B, the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235 have the same width, but the first variable prize opening 234 provided above the second variable prize opening 235 is arranged. A mode in which the position is shifted to the right side by a distance a in the left-right direction from the position where the second variable prize winning opening 235 is arranged is shown.

  In FIG. 5C, the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235 have the same width, but the first variable prize opening 234 provided above the second variable prize opening 235 is arranged. A mode in which the position is shifted to the left side by a distance b in the left-right direction from the position where the second variable prize winning opening 235 is arranged is shown.

  In FIG. 6D, the horizontal width d of the first variable prize winning opening 234 is shorter than the horizontal width c of the second variable winning prize opening 235, and the first variable winning prize opening 234 is in the vertical direction and the left and right sides of the second variable winning prize opening 235. The aspect arrange | positioned in the position which becomes in the range of both ends is shown. That is, an aspect is shown in which one of the two variable prize winning holes having different widths is arranged so as to be included in the horizontal width of the other variable prize winning hole in the vertical direction.

  In FIG. 5E, the first variable prize winning opening 234 and the second variable prize winning opening 235 have the same width as that shown in FIG. 4D, but the second variable prize winning opening 235 is provided above the second variable winning prize opening 235. The aspect in which the 1 variable winning a prize opening 234 protrudes to the right side by the distance e in the left-right direction from the second variable winning a prize opening 235 is shown. That is, an aspect is shown in which one of the two variable winning openings having different widths is arranged so as not to be included in the horizontal width of the other variable winning opening in the vertical direction.

  In FIG. 5F, the lateral width g of the second variable prize winning port 235 is shorter than the lateral width f of the first variable prize winning port 234, and the second variable prize winning port 235 is in the vertical direction and the left and right sides of the first variable prize winning port 234. The aspect arrange | positioned in the position which becomes in the range of both ends is shown. That is, an aspect is shown in which one of the two variable prize winning holes having different widths is arranged so as to be included in the horizontal width of the other variable prize winning hole in the vertical direction.

  In FIG. 5G, the horizontal widths of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are the same as those shown in FIG. 5F, but the first variable winning opening 234 is provided below the first variable winning opening 234. A mode is shown in which the two variable prize winning openings 235 are arranged to protrude to the left side by a distance h in the left-right direction from the first variable prize winning opening 234. That is, an aspect is shown in which one of the two variable winning openings having different widths is arranged so as not to be included in the horizontal width of the other variable winning opening in the vertical direction.

  In FIG. 11 (h), the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 have the same width, but a mode shorter than twice the diameter of the game ball is shown. In FIG. 11H, the second variable winning opening 235 is arranged with an interval i immediately below the first variable winning opening 234.

  In FIG. 5I, the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235 have the same width as that shown in FIG. A mode in which the distance j to the mouth 235 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball is shown.

  In FIG. 6 (j), the horizontal width of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 and the interval j between the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are shown in FIG. Although it is the same as an aspect, the aspect by which the 1st variable winning opening 234 is arrange | positioned under the 2nd variable winning opening is shown.

[Twenty-fourth embodiment]
Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention is described. This embodiment is the same as the twelfth embodiment described above, but is configured to further execute the island simultaneous effect (effect A) as shown in FIG. 243 (a), for example, as described above in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a thing.

  FIG. 430 is a diagram illustrating an example of specific effects in the pachinko machine according to the twenty-fourth embodiment.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 430 (19) to (30) are the same as the production examples shown in FIGS. 123 (19) to (30), but in the main display area D 1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which the island simultaneous effect (effect A) is executed in a part of the sub display area D21 (wipe display area 208W) is shown. The sub display area D21 is arranged at the lower center of the main display area D1.

  FIG. 430 (19) shows a state where the chance button 136 is pressed and an effect of the content displayed by the main character is displayed by cut-in. Here, the island simultaneous effect (effect A) displayed in the sub-display area D21 is arranged in a layer on the front side of the layer where the effect display in the big hit game is performed, and the effect in the big hit game It is configured to display the island simultaneous effect superimposed on the display. In FIG. 19 (19), since the cut-in display described above is arranged in a layer in front of the island simultaneous effect layer displayed in the sub display area D21, the cut-in display is the island simultaneous effect. It is displayed superimposed on. Here, the island simultaneous performance may be displayed superimposed on the front side of the cut-in display. Further, the effect display during the big hit game may be displayed superimposed on the front side of the island simultaneous effect.

  FIGS. (20) to (22) are the same as FIGS. 123 (20) to 123 (22) except that the island simultaneous performance is continuously performed.

  After that, when the big hit game progresses and becomes the 13th round, as shown in FIG. 23 (23), the above-described hitting instruction 1 effect (the effect including the display of “Aim for V at the next R”) is executed. Is done. This indication “Aim for V at the next R” is placed on the front layer of the island simultaneous effect layer displayed in the sub-display area D21, and is therefore displayed superimposed on the island simultaneous effect. ing. Here, the island simultaneous effect may be displayed superimposed on the front side of the display “Aim for V at next R”.

  After that, at the 14th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened long and the V passing is easy, and the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Direction indication 2 effect is executed. Since this “V Aim” display is arranged in a layer on the front side of the layer of island simultaneous effects displayed in the sub display area D21, the display is superimposed on the island simultaneous effects. Thereby, the player may be able to enjoy the island simultaneous production while being aware of the display of “V Aim”. Here, the island simultaneous performance may be displayed superimposed on the front side of the display “V Aim”.

  FIGS. (25) to (28) are the same as FIGS. 123 (25) to 123 (28) except that the island simultaneous performance is continuously performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 430 (28), if a game ball passes (V passing) to the V passing switch SW2 in the second variable winning opening 235a, as shown in FIG. The effect (effect including the display of “V”) is executed. Since the display of “V” is arranged in a layer on the front side of the layer of the island simultaneous effect displayed in the sub display area D21, the display is superimposed on the island simultaneous effect. Here, the island simultaneous performance may be displayed superimposed on the front side of “V”.

  When the 16th round is completed, the effect of the big hit end 2 described above is performed as shown in FIG. Here, the island simultaneous effect displayed in the sub display area D21 is arranged in a layer on the front side of the layer where the effect display of the big hit end 2 is performed, and is superimposed on the effect display of the big hit end 2 It is configured to display the island simultaneous production. Here, the effect display of jackpot end 2 may be displayed superimposed on the front side of the island simultaneous effect.

  When the jackpot end 2 effect is finished and the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 31 (31), the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the sub display area D21 and performs it on the sub display area D21. The island simultaneous production (production A) that has been performed continues in the main display area D1. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the island simultaneous effect (effect A) is an effect that can be executed other than during the execution of the big hit game.

In the above description,
“First variable winning means [for example, first variable winning opening 234];
A second variable winning means [for example, a second variable winning opening 235];
A second area in which the game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter (for example, an area in which a second count switch SW2 functioning as a V-pass switch is provided);
A notification means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of notification;
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area, the second game state [for example, probability variation state: special figure high probability normal figure high probability state] is configured to be able to start,
The jackpot game [for example, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 1” shown in FIG. 428 (a)] is composed of a plurality of rounds [for example, 16 rounds]
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “first round [for example, 14th round]”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in a second state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “second round [for example, 15th round]”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in a first state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “third round [for example, 16th round]”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The second round is a round in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter (for example, a closed state),
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter (for example, an open state),
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;
The third round is a round started after the second round;
One of the plurality of types of notifications (hereinafter referred to as “game ball entry promotion notification [for example, a“ V-target ”hitting instruction 2 effect shown in FIG. 123 (24)” ”). It is a notification that prompts the game ball to enter the second area,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round,
The jackpot game is a long-term round in which each of the plurality of rounds is in the second state for a long period of time [for example, as shown in FIG. 2 The round when the variable winning opening 235 is long open for a maximum of 28 seconds (Large winning opening operation pattern 8) or a maximum of 29 seconds (Large winning opening operation patterns 6 and 9)], and the period of the second state is short. Short period round [for example, as shown in FIG. 428 (b), the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is the shortest opening time for a maximum of 0.5 seconds (large winning opening operation pattern 1 to 5, 7) rounds that perform short opening]
The notifying means, when the first round and the third round are the long-term rounds, and the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round, A means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the second round [for example, the second variable winning opening 235 is opened long in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the second count switch in the 14th round; When there is no game ball passing to SW2 and the 14th round is completed, the hitting instruction 2 effect is continuously performed even after the 15th round. In other words, the hitting instruction 2 effect is performed continuously from the 14th round to the 15th round. On the other hand, if the second variable prize opening 235 is opened short in the 14th and 16th rounds, even if there is no game ball passing through the second count switch SW2 in the 14th round, the 15th round Direction instruction 2 production is not performed. ],
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “fourth round [eg, the 13th round]”) is a round in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
The fourth round is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the first state,
The first round is a round that starts after the fourth round;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the big hit game. According to this game stand, the big hit game can be characterized.

  In addition, according to this game table, the digestion speed in the jackpot game can be increased, and even in the jackpot game having a high digestion speed, the game ball has not entered the second area in the first round. May be noticed by the person.

  Here, the second area may be such that only a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter, or a game ball other than a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means. May also be capable of entering. In the second area, a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means may necessarily enter, or a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means may not enter. May be.

  Further, the first variable winning means may be changeable only from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state, or the first state and the second state. It may be possible to change to a state different from the state, or may always change from one of the first state and the second state to the other state. However, there may be a case where one of the first state and the second state does not change to the other state.

  In addition, the second variable winning means may be changeable only from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state, or the first state and the second state. It may be possible to change to a state different from the state, or may always change from one of the first state and the second state to the other state. However, there may be a case where one of the first state and the second state does not change to the other state.

  Further, the first state may be a state in which only a game ball cannot enter, or there may be a game ball other than a game ball that cannot enter.

  In addition, the second state may be a state where only a game ball can be entered, or there may be a game ball that can be entered in addition to a game ball, or a game ball must be entered. There may be a state in which a game ball may not be entered.

  Further, the notification means may be capable of executing only the game ball entry promotion notification, or may be capable of executing notification other than the game ball entry promotion notification. Further, the notification means may necessarily execute the game ball approach promotion notification or may not execute the game ball approach promotion notification.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second area, only the second game state may be configured to start, or when the game ball enters the second area, the second game state Other game states may be configured to be able to start. Further, it may be configured such that the second gaming state is always started when a game ball enters the second area, or when the game ball enters the second area, It may be configured such that the gaming state may not be started.

  The jackpot game may consist of only the first round, the second round, the third round, and the fourth round, or the first round, the second round, and the third round. There may be rounds other than the fourth round.

  In addition, the notification means may be capable of executing only the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round, or may perform notification other than the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round. Also good. Further, the notification means may always execute the game ball approach promotion notification in the first round, or may not execute the game ball approach promotion notification in the first round.

  In addition, the notification means, when the first round and the third round are long-term rounds, and the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round, in the second round Only the game ball entry promotion notification may be executable, the first round and the third round are long-term rounds, and the game ball is in the second area in the first round. When it does not enter, notification other than game ball approach promotion notification may be executable in the second round. In addition, the notification means, when the first round and the third round are long-term rounds, and the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round, in the second round The game ball entry promotion notification may be executed without fail, and the first round and the third round are long-term rounds, and the game ball enters the second area in the first round. If not, the game ball entry promotion notification may not be executed in the second round.

  The informing means is that the first round and the second round are long-term rounds, the third round is a short-term round, and a game ball enters the second area in the first round. If not, the game ball entry promotion notification may be executable in the second round. Further, the notification means is that the first round is a long-term round, the second round and the third round are short-term rounds, and a game ball enters the second area in the first round. If not, the game ball entry promotion notification may be executable in the second round. Further, the notification means is that the first round and the third round are long-term rounds, the second round is a short-term round, and a game ball enters the second area in the first round. If not, the game ball entry promotion notification may be executable in the second round.

Further, “the jackpot game is configured such that the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are alternately in the second state every round [eg, FIG. 428 (a) As shown in FIG. 4, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened in the odd round, and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened in the even round]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the digestion speed of the big hit game may be further improved.

  The jackpot game may be one in which the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are not alternately in the second state in each round. In some rounds, there may be a jackpot game in which the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are not alternately in the second state every round. Further, there may be a big hit game in which the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are not alternately changed to the second state every round in all rounds.

In addition, “the jackpot game is configured so that the first variable winning means is in a round in which the first state is first set to the second state [For example, as shown in FIG. 428 (a), in the first round, The first variable winning opening 234 opens],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The jackpot game may be configured so that the second variable winning means is in a round in which the second state is first set. Further, there may be a jackpot game in which the first variable winning means is in the second state first and a jackpot game in which the second variable winning means is in the second state first. .

Further, “the first variable winning means [for example, the first variable winning opening 234] is located upstream of the second variable winning means [for example, the second variable winning opening 235] in the flow direction of the game ball. It is a variable winning means arranged at the position,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to suppress a decrease in the number of balls between rounds. In addition, there is a case in which it is no longer forced to stop in order to suppress a decrease in the number of balls.

  The first variable winning means may be arranged at a position downstream of the second variable winning means in the flow-down direction of the game ball.

In addition, “the second variable winning means [for example, the second variable winning opening 235] does not enter the first variable winning means [for example, the first variable winning opening 234] without entering the first variable. The variable winning means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has passed in front of the winning means can enter without touching the game nail. [For example, as shown in FIG. Since the game nail 238 is not arranged between the variable winning opening 235, the game ball that has passed through the front of the first variable winning opening 234 without contacting the first variable winning opening 234 is brought into contact with the gaming nail 238. Without being able to enter the second variable prize opening 235],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to reduce that the game balls that have passed in front of the first variable winning means cannot be won by the second variable winning means due to the game balls being bounced by the game nails, and the digestion speed of the big hit game In some cases.

  Even if the game ball that has passed through the front of the first variable winning means without contacting the first variable winning means may contact the game nail and enter the second variable winning means. Good.

  Further, the second variable winning means can enter only the game balls that have passed through the front of the first variable winning means and have not touched the game nail without entering the first variable winning means. It may be configured, and a game ball other than a game ball that has passed through the front of the first variable winning means and has not touched the game nail without entering the first variable winning means can enter. It may be configured. In addition, the second variable winning means does not enter the first variable winning means, so that a game ball that has passed through the front of the first variable winning means and has not touched the game nail must enter. The game ball that has passed through the front of the first variable winning means and has not touched the game nail without entering the first variable winning means may not enter. May be configured.

Further, “the first variable winning means is variable winning means arranged at a position where there is no other winning means on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the first variable winning means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the game balls launched during the big hit game can reach the first variable winning means without winning the winning means other than the first variable winning means. In some cases, the speed can be further improved.

  Note that there may be other winning means upstream of the first variable winning means in the flow direction of the game ball.

In addition, “when a game ball does not enter the second area in the jackpot game, the first game state after the jackpot game ends [for example, electric support state: special figure low probability normal figure high probability state Is configured to start,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the game ball does not enter the second area in the big hit game, it may be configured so that only the first game state can be started after the big hit game ends, or the second area in the big hit game When the game ball does not enter the game state, a game state other than the first game state may be started after the big hit game is over. In addition, if the game ball does not enter the second area in the big hit game, the first game state may be surely started after the big hit game ends. If the game ball does not enter the area, the first game state may not be started after the big hit game ends.

  In addition, the first gaming state may be any gaming state, for example, a probability change state without electric support (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure). It may be a low probability normal figure high probability state) or a non-electric support state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). That is, the first gaming state is applicable to any gaming state as long as the gaming state is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-probable change state [eg, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state],
The second gaming state is a probabilistic state [for example, a special figure high probability common figure high probability state],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first gaming state may be an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure high probability state) or a non-electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure low probability state). It may be.

  The second gaming state may be an electric support state. That is, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state may be used. Further, a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state may be used.

In addition, “the second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter, or a game other than a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means. The ball may be an area where it cannot enter.

In addition, “the first area where the game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can enter [for example, an area provided with the first count switch SW1],
When a game ball enters the first area, a prize ball is paid out.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can enter, or a game ball other than a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means. May also be an accessible area. In addition, the first area may be an area where a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means enters, or a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means may not enter. It may be a region.

In addition, “One notification of the plurality of notifications (hereinafter referred to as“ game ball advancement advance notification [for example, aim at V at the next R ”shown in FIG. 123 (23)” 1 effect. ] ”)) Is a notification for informing the player in advance that the game ball should enter the second area in the first round,
The notification means is means capable of executing the game ball advance promotion advance notification in the fourth round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to surely notify the player that the game ball should enter the second area in the first round.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing only advance notification of game ball advancement promotion in the fourth round, or capable of executing notification other than advance notification of game ball advancement in the fourth round. It may be. Further, the notification means may be capable of executing the game ball advance promotion advance notification in rounds other than the fourth round. Further, the notification means may always execute advance notification of game ball advancement promotion in the fourth round, or may not perform advance notification of advancement of game ball in the fourth round.

In addition, in the case where a game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state [for example, the probability variation operation area effective state shown in FIG. 110 (a)], after the jackpot game is ended, The second gaming state is configured to start;
The second area effective state is a state in which the entry of a game ball into the second area is treated as effective.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to prevent cheating in which a game ball enters the second area in a state other than the second area effective state.

  Here, the second game state may be a case where a game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state, and may be started only after the big hit game ends. Even when a game ball enters the second area in a state different from the second area valid state, it may be possible to start after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the second gaming state may be a case where a game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state, and may be always started after the end of the big hit game. It may be a case where a game ball enters the second area in the area valid state, and may not be started after the end of the big hit game.

In addition, “one notification of the plurality of types of notification (hereinafter,“ game ball entry notification [for example, display of “V”, which is a notification that the probability change acquisition is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 119 (26) ”) Is a notification for informing that a game ball has entered the second area,
The notification means is means for executing the game ball entry notification when a game ball enters the second area in the first round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player may be able to reliably recognize that the game ball has entered the second area.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing the game ball entry notification only when the game ball enters the second area in the first round, or the second area in the first round. In addition to the case where a game ball enters the game ball, the game ball entry notification may be executed. In addition, the notification means may surely execute a game ball entry notification when a game ball enters the second area in the first round, or the game may enter the second area in the first round. There may be a case where the game ball entry notification is not executed when a ball enters.

Further, “the notification means is means for executing the game ball entry notification in the second round when a game ball enters the second area in the first round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player may be able to reliably recognize that the game ball has entered the second area.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing only the game ball entry notification in the second round when the game ball enters the second area in the first round, When a game ball enters the second area in the round, notification other than the game ball entry notification may be executable in the second round. Further, the notification means may be configured to always execute the game ball entry notification in the second round when the game ball enters the second area in the first round. When a game ball enters the second area, the game ball entry notification may not be executed in the second round.

Further, “the notification means is means for executing the game ball approach promotion notification in a part of the period in the first round,
The game ball entry promotion notification is a notification that prompts the player to enter the game ball into the second area,
The partial period in the first round is a period before the game ball enters the second area in the first round [for example, FIG. 119 (24) to FIG. ) After the 14th round is started and the hitting instruction 2 effect is started, if there is a game ball passing to the V pass switch SW2, the effect that the V prize is won is executed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to easily recognize the timing when the game ball has entered the second area.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing only the game ball entry promotion notification during a partial period in the first round, or the game ball advance promotion notification during a partial period in the first round. Other notifications may also be executable. In addition, the notification means may necessarily execute the game ball entry promotion notification during a part of the first round, or execute the game ball entry promotion notification during a part of the first round. You may not.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First variable winning means [for example, first variable winning opening 234a];
A second variable winning means [for example, a second variable winning opening 235a];
A second area [for example, V passage 2340g] into which the game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter;
A notification means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of notification;
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of performing a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area, the second game state [for example, probability variation state: special figure high probability normal figure high probability state] is configured to be able to start,
The jackpot game [for example, the jackpot game started by displaying “symbol 1” shown in FIG. 114 (a)] is composed of a plurality of rounds [for example, 16 rounds]
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “first round [for example, 14th round]”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in a second state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “second round [for example, 15th round]”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in a first state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “third round [for example, 16th round]”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The second round is a round in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter (for example, a closed state),
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter (for example, an open state),
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;
The third round is a round started after the second round;
One of the plurality of types of notifications (hereinafter referred to as “game ball approaching promotion notification [for example, a“ V-target ”hitting instruction 2 effect shown in FIG. 430 (24)”) ”. It is a notification that prompts the game ball to enter the second area,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round,
The jackpot game is a long-term round in which each of the plurality of rounds is in the second state for a long period of time [for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the first variable winning opening 234a or the first round 2 The round when the variable winning opening 235a is long open for a maximum of 28 seconds (Large winning opening operation pattern 8) and a maximum of 29 seconds (Large winning opening operation patterns 6 and 9); Short period round [for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a is the shortest opening time for a maximum of 0.5 seconds (large winning opening operation pattern 1 to 5, 7) rounds that perform short opening]
The notifying means, when the first round and the third round are the long-term rounds, and the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round, It is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the second round [for example, as shown in FIGS. 430 (24) to (29), the second variable winning opening in the 14th and 16th rounds. If the 235a is long open and the 14th round is completed without passing the game ball to the V-pass switch SW2, the direction instruction 2 effect continues even after the 15th round. Done. In other words, the hitting instruction 2 effect is performed continuously from the 14th round to the 15th round. On the other hand, when the second variable winning opening 235a is opened short in the 14th and 16th rounds, even if there is no passing of the game ball to the second count switch SW2 in the 14th round, it is hit in the 15th round. Direction instruction 2 production is not performed. ],
One effect of the multiple types of effects is an island simultaneous effect [for example, an island simultaneous effect (effect A) shown in FIG. 430],
The notification means is means capable of executing the game ball approach promotion notification during execution of the island simultaneous performance [For example, as shown in FIGS. 430 (24) to (27), execution of the island simultaneous performance is performed. In the middle, there is a directing instruction “How to hit V”.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the notification means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the notification means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to entertain the island simultaneous production while making the player aware of the game ball approach promotion notification.

  Here, the second area may be such that only a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter, or a game ball other than a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means. May also be capable of entering. In the second area, a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means may necessarily enter, or a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means may not enter. May be.

  Further, the first variable winning means may be changeable only from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state, or the first state and the second state. It may be possible to change to a state different from the state, or may always change from one of the first state and the second state to the other state. However, there may be a case where one of the first state and the second state does not change to the other state.

  In addition, the second variable winning means may be changeable only from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state, or the first state and the second state. It may be possible to change to a state different from the state, or may always change from one of the first state and the second state to the other state. However, there may be a case where one of the first state and the second state does not change to the other state.

  Further, the first state may be a state in which only a game ball cannot enter, or there may be a game ball other than a game ball that cannot enter.

  In addition, the second state may be a state where only a game ball can be entered, or there may be a game ball that can be entered in addition to a game ball, or a game ball must be entered. There may be a state in which a game ball may not be entered.

  Further, the notification means may be capable of executing only the game ball entry promotion notification, or may be capable of executing notification other than the game ball entry promotion notification. Further, the notification means may necessarily execute the game ball approach promotion notification or may not execute the game ball approach promotion notification.

  In addition, the effect means may be capable of executing only the island simultaneous effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the island simultaneous effect. Further, the directing means may always execute the island simultaneous effect, or may not execute the island simultaneous effect.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second area, only the second game state may be configured to start, or when the game ball enters the second area, the second game state Other game states may be configured to be able to start. Further, it may be configured such that the second gaming state is always started when a game ball enters the second area, or when the game ball enters the second area, It may be configured such that the gaming state may not be started.

  The jackpot game may consist of only the first round, the second round, and the third round, or there may be rounds other than the first round, the second round, and the third round. May be.

  In addition, the notification means may be capable of executing only the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round, or may perform notification other than the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round. Also good. Further, the notification means may always execute the game ball approach promotion notification in the first round, or may not execute the game ball approach promotion notification in the first round.

  In addition, the notification means, when the first round and the third round are long-term rounds, and the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round, in the second round Only the game ball entry promotion notification may be executable, the first round and the third round are long-term rounds, and the game ball is in the second area in the first round. When it does not enter, notification other than game ball approach promotion notification may be executable in the second round. In addition, the notification means, when the first round and the third round are long-term rounds, and the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round, in the second round The game ball entry promotion notification may be executed without fail, and the first round and the third round are long-term rounds, and the game ball enters the second area in the first round. If not, the game ball entry promotion notification may not be executed in the second round.

  The informing means is that the first round and the second round are long-term rounds, the third round is a short-term round, and a game ball enters the second area in the first round. If not, the game ball entry promotion notification may be executable in the second round. Further, the notification means is that the first round is a long-term round, the second round and the third round are short-term rounds, and a game ball enters the second area in the first round. If not, the game ball entry promotion notification may be executable in the second round. Further, the notification means is that the first round and the third round are long-term rounds, the second round is a short-term round, and a game ball enters the second area in the first round. If not, the game ball entry promotion notification may be executable in the second round.

In addition, “the island simultaneous performance is an effect that can be executed other than during the execution of the jackpot game [For example, as shown in FIG. 430 (31), the island simultaneous performance (production A) ) Is running],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player may be able to entertain the island all-in-one other than the big hit game.

  Here, the island simultaneous performance may be executed not only during the execution of the jackpot game, but may not be executed other than during the execution of the jackpot game.

In addition, “the island simultaneous effect is an effect that can be executed according to the time after the power is turned on [for example, every 60 minutes after the power is turned on],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the island simultaneous performance is executed at a timing different from the progress of the game and the player can be entertained.

  Here, the island simultaneous performance may be executable only according to the time after the power is turned on, or may be executed other than depending on the time after the power is turned on. There may be. Further, the island simultaneous performance may be always executed according to the time after the power is turned on, or may not be executed according to the time after the power is turned on.

In addition, “the island simultaneous production is the first production period after the island simultaneous production is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 280 (a), in the case of the production A1a, 5 minutes; 5 minutes 20 seconds, 4 minutes in case of production A3a]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to entertain the island at the same time for a certain period of time, and it may be possible to give limited fun to the player.

  Here, the island simultaneous production may end only when the first production period has elapsed after the island simultaneous production has started, or after the island simultaneous production has started, It may be ended other than when the performance period elapses. Also, the island simultaneous performance may end when the first performance period elapses after the island simultaneous production starts, or after the island simultaneous production starts, There may be a case where it does not end even if the period elapses.

In addition, “the effect means is means including display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the island simultaneous performance can be visually enjoyed.

  Here, the effect means may be configured to include only the display means, or may be configured to include means other than the display means. In addition, the rendering means may be configured to include the display means, or may not include the display means.

In addition, “the effect means is means including sound output means [for example, speaker 120].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the island simultaneous production can be audibly enjoyed.

  Here, the production means may be configured to include only the sound output means, or may be configured to include means other than the sound output means. Further, the production means may be configured to include the sound output means, or may not include the sound output means.

Also, “equipped with a first time measuring means [for example, timer circuit 652, RTC circuit 654],
The island simultaneous effect is an effect that may be started from the middle depending on the result of the time measurement by the first timing means when the island simultaneous effect is started [for example, the effect A is a timer. Depending on the counter value indicated by the circuit 652, it may start from the middle of the production A],
The island simultaneous effect is an effect that may be started from the beginning according to the time measurement result of the first time measuring means when the island simultaneous effect is started [for example, the effect A is a timer. Depending on the counter value indicated by the circuit 652, there may be a case where the effect A starts from the beginning]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the island simultaneous performance starts from the beginning or from the middle depending on the timing when the island simultaneous performance starts, it is possible to give variations to the start timing and enhance the production effect. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, when the island simultaneous performance is started, if the time measurement by the first time measuring means is not the first time measurement result when the island simultaneous production is started, the island simultaneous production starts from the middle. When the timekeeping result by the timekeeping means is the first timekeeping result, the island simultaneous performance may be started from the top. The first time measurement result may include, for example, the time measurement start time by the first time measuring means.

In addition, “when a game ball does not enter the second area in the jackpot game, the first game state after the jackpot game ends [for example, electric support state: special figure low probability normal figure high probability state Is configured to start,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the game ball does not enter the second area in the big hit game, it may be configured so that only the first game state can be started after the big hit game ends, or the second area in the big hit game When the game ball does not enter the game state, a game state other than the first game state may be started after the big hit game is over. In addition, if the game ball does not enter the second area in the big hit game, the first game state may be surely started after the big hit game ends. If the game ball does not enter the area, the first game state may not be started after the big hit game ends.

  In addition, the first gaming state may be any gaming state, for example, a probability change state without electric support (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state), or an electric support state (special figure). It may be a low probability normal figure high probability state) or a non-electric support state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). That is, the first gaming state is applicable to any gaming state as long as the gaming state is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-probable change state [eg, special figure low probability normal figure high probability state],
The second gaming state is a probabilistic state [for example, a special figure high probability common figure high probability state],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first gaming state may be an electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure high probability state) or a non-electric support state (for example, a special figure low probability general figure low probability state). It may be.

  The second gaming state may be an electric support state. That is, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state or a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state may be used. Further, a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state may be used.

In addition, “the second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter, or a game other than a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means. The ball may be an area where it cannot enter.

In addition, “including a first area [for example, a winning count switch SW4] into which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can enter,
When a game ball enters the first area, a prize ball is paid out.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first area may be an area in which only a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can enter, or a game ball other than a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means. May also be an accessible area. In addition, the first area may be an area where a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means enters, or a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means may not enter. It may be a region.

In addition, “One notification of the plurality of types of notification (hereinafter referred to as“ game ball advancement advance notification [eg, aim for V at next R ”as shown in FIG. 430 (23)”) ] ”)) Is a notification for informing the player in advance that the game ball should enter the second area in the first round,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “fourth round [eg, the 13th round]”) is a round in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
The fourth round is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the first state,
The first round is a round that starts after the fourth round;
The notification means is means capable of executing the game ball advance promotion advance notification in the fourth round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to surely notify the player that the game ball should enter the second area in the first round.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing only advance notification of game ball advancement promotion in the fourth round, or capable of executing notification other than advance notification of game ball advancement in the fourth round. It may be. Further, the notification means may be capable of executing the game ball advance promotion advance notification in rounds other than the fourth round. Further, the notification means may always execute advance notification of game ball advancement promotion in the fourth round, or may not perform advance notification of advancement of game ball in the fourth round.

In addition, in the case where a game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state [for example, the probability variation operation area effective state shown in FIG. 110 (a)], after the jackpot game is ended, The second gaming state is configured to start;
The second area effective state is a state in which the entry of a game ball into the second area is treated as effective.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to prevent cheating in which a game ball enters the second area in a state other than the second area effective state.

  Here, the second game state may be a case where a game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state, and may be started only after the big hit game ends. Even when a game ball enters the second area in a state different from the second area valid state, it may be possible to start after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the second gaming state may be a case where a game ball enters the second area in the second area effective state, and may be always started after the end of the big hit game. It may be a case where a game ball enters the second area in the area valid state, and may not be started after the end of the big hit game.

In addition, “one notification among the plurality of notifications (hereinafter,“ game ball entry notification [for example, display of “V”, which is notification indicating that the probability variation acquisition is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 430 (29) ”) Is a notification for informing that a game ball has entered the second area,
The notification means is means for executing the game ball entry notification when a game ball enters the second area in the first round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player may be able to reliably recognize that the game ball has entered the second area.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing the game ball entry notification only when the game ball enters the second area in the first round, or the second area in the first round. In addition to the case where a game ball enters the game ball, the game ball entry notification may be executed. In addition, the notification means may surely execute a game ball entry notification when a game ball enters the second area in the first round, or the game may enter the second area in the first round. There may be a case where the game ball entry notification is not executed when a ball enters.

Further, “the notification means is means for executing the game ball entry notification in the second round when a game ball enters the second area in the first round.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the player may be able to reliably recognize that the game ball has entered the second area.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing only the game ball entry notification in the second round when the game ball enters the second area in the first round, When a game ball enters the second area in the round, notification other than the game ball entry notification may be executable in the second round. Further, the notification means may be configured to always execute the game ball entry notification in the second round when the game ball enters the second area in the first round. When a game ball enters the second area, the game ball entry notification may not be executed in the second round.

Further, “the notification means is means for executing the game ball approach promotion notification in a part of the period in the first round,
The game ball entry promotion notification is a notification that prompts the player to enter the game ball into the second area,
The partial period in the first round is a period before the game ball enters the second area in the first round [for example, FIG. 119 (24) to FIG. ) After the 14th round is started and the hitting instruction 2 effect is started, if there is a game ball passing to the V pass switch SW2, the effect that the V prize is won is executed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to easily recognize the timing when the game ball has entered the second area.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing only the game ball entry promotion notification during a partial period in the first round, or the game ball advance promotion notification during a partial period in the first round. Other notifications may also be executable. In addition, the notification means may necessarily execute the game ball entry promotion notification during a part of the first round, or execute the game ball entry promotion notification during a part of the first round. You may not.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Storage means capable of storing at least the time of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “variation time”) into a plurality of groups;
A variation time determining means for determining one variation time from among the variation times stored in the storage means;
Control means capable of controlling at least one of a plurality of gaming states;
With
Each of the plurality of groups is capable of storing at least one or more variation times.
At least one of the plurality of groups is a second group;
At least one of the plurality of groups is a first group;
At least one gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state,
At least one gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state at least different from the first gaming state,
The control means is at least controllable to the second gaming state when the second condition and the third condition are satisfied,
When the second condition is satisfied and the third condition is not satisfied (hereinafter referred to as a “first special state”), the control means is at least in the first gaming state. Is controllable,
The control means is capable of controlling the first gaming state at least in a sixth period when the first condition is satisfied,
The control means is capable of controlling at least the second gaming state in a seventh period;
The control means is capable of controlling at least the first gaming state via the first special state in the sixth period,
When the second condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to satisfy the requirements for easily satisfying the third condition,
The sixth period is at least a part of the seventh period;
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least a variation time from the first group in the first gaming state due to the establishment of the first condition,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the second group in the second gaming state,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the second group in the first gaming state via the first special state,
The one or more variation times included in the second group include a variation time of at least a part of the variation times included in the first group.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that a dedicated prize area only for achieving the third condition may be provided, or may be shared with the attacker.

  Further, in the round distribution, if winning is made at 14R, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ends under 13R under the conditions such as the second gaming state determination.

  It is possible to refrain from the appearance of a specific notice at the part of the switching related to irregular or not to select a predetermined variation time.

(Appendix 2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1,
The control means is at least controllable to the first gaming state when the first condition is satisfied and the third condition is not satisfied.
The control means is at least controllable to the second gaming state when the first condition is satisfied and the third condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as “second special state”). And
The control means is capable of controlling at least the second gaming state via the second special state in the seventh period;
When the second condition is satisfied, the third condition is configured to be able to satisfy the requirement to be satisfied with a first probability,
When the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to satisfy the requirements for satisfying the third condition with a second probability,
The first probability is higher than the second probability;
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the first group in the second gaming state via the second special state.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the technical idea of Supplementary Note 2 does not depend on Supplementary Note 1, and is a technical idea that can be achieved independently.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
A determination unit for determining whether or not the determination is correct, and
A symbol determining means capable of determining at least the symbol aspect;
With
The symbol display means is capable of stopping and displaying at least a symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “symbol mode”) according to the result of the success / failure determination after performing the symbol variation display.
The determination result includes at least a specific determination result,
The control means is capable of at least starting a big hit gaming state after a symbol corresponding to the specific determination result (hereinafter referred to as “specific symbol mode”) is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. ,
There are a plurality of types of the specific design aspects,
At least one of the plurality of specific design aspects is a second design aspect,
At least one of the plurality of types of specific design aspects is a first design aspect,
The second symbol aspect is a symbol aspect different from the first symbol aspect,
By at least the symbol determining means determining the second symbol aspect, at least the second condition can be established,
At least the first condition can be satisfied by at least the symbol determining means determining the first symbol aspect,
The gaming table according to claim 3, wherein the third condition is a condition that can be established at least during the jackpot gaming state.

(Appendix 4)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 3,
A predetermined winning area where winning is allowed only during the jackpot gaming state,
The third condition can be established by at least winning a game ball in the predetermined winning area.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The predetermined winning area may be an attacker (234, 235) or, more specifically, a second attacker (235).

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

  For example, in the second gaming state, any one of the presence / absence of probability change, the presence / absence of electric support, etc. may be more advantageous than the first gaming state.

(Appendix 6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The symbol display means is a plurality of symbol display means,
At least one of the plurality of symbol display means is a first symbol display means,
At least one symbol display means of the plurality of symbol display means is a second symbol display means,
The first symbol display means is capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display,
The second symbol display means is capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display,
The second symbol variation display can be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display,
The control means is at least controllable in a time-short state and a non-time-short state,
In the time reduction state, the second symbol variation display is easier to be executed than in the non-time reduction state,
In the non-time reduction state, the first symbol variation display is more easily executed than the time reduction state.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the special figure 2 priority variation machine, at least one of the plurality of groups may be a group for the variation time of the second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “special group 2”). .

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of groups may be a group for the variation time of the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “special 1 group”), and the special 2 group and the special 1 group. May be a common group.

  On the other hand, the special 1 group may be a group different from the special 2 group.

There are several types of variation time available as a big hit variation time.
One variation time among the plurality of types of variation times is a first variation time (for example, a relatively long variation time),
The first group is a group including the first variation time,
The second group may be a group that does not include the first variation time.

  By doing so, during the second gaming state, short big hit variation is likely to be selected, and there are cases where it is possible to hit big hits with good tempo.

  Furthermore, even in the case of the first gaming state that occurred irregularly (the group has selected the second group, but is not in a favorable gaming state of probability change or electric support), it is easy to select a short jackpot variation In some cases, expectation can be higher than normal because it is a big hit.

(Appendix 7)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 6,
The second gaming state is at least the short-time state,
The second gaming state is at least a probable state,
The first gaming state is at least the short-time state,
The seventh period is a period that starts at least after the jackpot gaming state ends,
The sixth period is a period that starts at least after the jackpot gaming state ends,
The sixth period is shorter than the seventh period,
The period that is the difference between the seventh period and the sixth period is the third period,
The third period is a period after the end of the first gaming state,
The third period is at least a third gaming state that becomes the non-time-saving state,
The variation time determining means can determine at least the variation time from the second group when the gaming state in the third period is the second gaming state,
The variation time determination means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the first group when the gaming state in the third period is the third gaming state. To play.

  According to the gaming table described in appendix 7, although there is a complicated game characteristic, there is a case where it is possible to produce an effect without a sense of incongruity even when the third period occurs.

  In addition, for the special figure 2 deviation time that does not reach even reach, in the second group, it is easy to select a relatively long fluctuation time when the number of holdings is a predetermined number (for example, 0 or 1) or less. When the predetermined number is exceeded, it is easy to select a relatively short variation time. In the first group, even when the predetermined number is exceeded, a relatively long variation time may be easily selected.

  The third gaming state is a non-time-saving state (normal state). Therefore, even if it is a rare prize, there is a possibility that the interest of the game will be reduced by shortening and fluctuating and finalizing the loss early.

  In addition, when the state transitions from the first gaming state to the third gaming state due to switching of the electric support state (short-time state), the main symbol variation display changes from the second symbol variation display to the first symbol variation display. Although the display shifts to the change display, it only becomes long change only at that time, and there may be no sense of incongruity in the overall change time even through the first special state.

  Moreover, in a non-time-short state, the structure which does not win a start area | region (special figure 2 start winning opening) used as a trigger of said 2nd symbol fluctuation | variation display may be sufficient.

  For example, there may be a phenomenon in which the second symbol variation display can be digested when switching to the third period.

  Further, the lost reach probability may be different between the second gaming state and the first gaming state. In this way, the reach reliability may be maintained at an appropriate value.

  Moreover, even if the variation time is not completely the same, an approximate variation time may be adopted. In other words, a slight time lag or error is caused by the fluctuation time from the start of the change to the first stop, the change time from the first stop to the second stop, the change time from the second stop to the third stop, or the normal reach. May be absorbed by the length of time, the length of time of various super reach, and the length of fluctuation of shaking.

(Appendix 8)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 6,
The second gaming state is at least the short-time state,
The first gaming state is at least the non-time saving state,
The sixth period has the same timing as the seventh period,
The timing is from the first symbol variation display after the jackpot ends,
The variation time determining means can determine at least the variation time from the second group when the gaming state in the seventh period is the second gaming state,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the first group when the gaming state in the seventh period is the first gaming state. To play.

  According to the gaming machine described in appendix 8, there may be no sense of incongruity due to a common variation time even when the presence or absence of electric support is irregular.

  Note that the number of times of the second gaming state is fixed, and the sixth period may be longer than the seventh period.

  The sixth period may be until the next big hit.

  Furthermore, the sixth period may be shortened depending on the result of the determination.

  The second gaming state may be a probability change state.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The firing area is different between the short-time state and the non-short-time state.
A game stand characterized by that.

  For example, it may have a configuration in which the left region and the right region are divided across the decorative symbol display means.

(Appendix 10)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Storage means capable of storing at least the execution time of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “variation time”);
A variation time determination means capable of determining at least one variation time among a plurality of variation times stored in the storage means;
Multiple gaming states,
A game machine equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing at least the plurality of fluctuation times divided into a plurality of tables,
At least one of the plurality of tables is an eleventh table;
At least one of the plurality of tables is a twelfth table;
At least one of the plurality of variation times is an eleventh variation time;
The eleventh table is a table including at least the eleventh variation time;
The twelfth table is a table including at least the eleventh variation time;
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is an eleventh gaming state,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a twelfth gaming state,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a thirteenth gaming state,
The twelfth gaming state is a gaming state that is at least more advantageous than the eleventh gaming state,
The eleventh gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the thirteenth condition is not satisfied after the eleventh condition is satisfied;
The twelfth gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the thirteenth condition is satisfied after the twelfth condition is satisfied;
The thirteenth gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the thirteenth condition is not satisfied after the twelfth condition is satisfied,
The thirteenth gaming state is the same gaming state as the eleventh gaming state,
The twelfth condition is a condition that is at least different from the eleventh condition;
The eleventh gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the eleventh period;
The twelfth gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the twelfth period;
The thirteenth gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the eleventh period;
The eleventh period is a period at least partially overlapping the twelfth period,
The variable time determining means is capable of determining at least the variable time from the eleventh table in the eleventh gaming state,
The variable time determining means is capable of determining at least the variable time from the twelfth table in the twelfth gaming state,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the twelfth table in the thirteenth gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The gaming machine according to appendix 10, wherein
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a fourteenth gaming state,
The fourteenth gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the thirteenth condition is satisfied after the eleventh condition is satisfied;
The fourteenth gaming state is the same gaming state as the twelfth gaming state,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the eleventh table in the fourteenth gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game table according to appendix 10 or 11,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the twelfth table when the eleventh condition is satisfied,
The variation time determination means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the eleventh table when the twelfth condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 10 to 12,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a twelfth variation time;
The twelfth variation time is a variation time that is at least different from the eleventh variation time,
One of the eleventh table and the twelfth table is a table including at least the twelfth variation time;
The other table of the eleventh table and the twelfth table is a table that does not include at least the twelfth variation time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 10 to 13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
It is provided with a determination unit for determining whether or not the determination is correct,
The symbol variation display is capable of at least stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after starting symbol variation,
The symbol variation display is capable of stopping and displaying at least the eleventh symbol aspect when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit,
The symbol variation display is capable of stopping and displaying at least the twelfth symbol aspect when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit,
The twelfth symbol aspect is a symbol aspect that is at least different from the eleventh symbol aspect,
The eleventh condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the eleventh symbol aspect is stopped and displayed.
The twelfth condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the twelfth symbol aspect is stopped and displayed,
The gaming table according to claim 13, wherein the thirteenth condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least during execution of the jackpot game.

(Appendix 15)
The game stand according to appendix 14,
A winning area in which at least a game ball can win in the thirteenth period during execution of the jackpot game,
The thirteenth condition is established when a game ball wins the winning area during the thirteenth period,
The thirteenth condition is not established when the game ball does not win the winning area during the thirteenth period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The game stand according to appendix 14 or 15,
The symbol display means is a plurality of symbol display means,
At least one of the plurality of symbol display means is an eleventh symbol display means,
At least one of the plurality of symbol display means is a twelfth symbol display means,
The eleventh symbol display means is capable of displaying at least the eleventh symbol variation display,
The twelfth symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a twelfth symbol variation display,
The twelfth symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be executed in preference to the eleventh symbol variation display,
The eleventh gaming state is at least an electric support state,
The eleventh gaming state is at least an uncertain change state,
The twelfth gaming state is at least an electric support state,
The twelfth gaming state is at least a probable change state,
The eleventh period is a period that starts at least after the jackpot game ends,
The twelfth period is a period that starts at least after the jackpot game ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 14 or 15,
The symbol display means is a plurality of symbol display means,
At least one of the plurality of symbol display means is an eleventh symbol display means,
At least one of the plurality of symbol display means is a twelfth symbol display means,
The eleventh symbol display means is capable of displaying at least the eleventh symbol variation display,
The twelfth symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a twelfth symbol variation display,
The twelfth symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be executed in preference to the eleventh symbol variation display,
The eleventh gaming state is at least a non-electric support state,
The eleventh gaming state is at least a probable state,
The twelfth gaming state is at least an electric support state,
The twelfth gaming state is at least a probable change state,
The eleventh period is a period that starts at least after the jackpot game ends,
The twelfth period is a period that starts at least after the jackpot game ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 10 to 17,
The thirteenth condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the twelfth condition is established than after the eleventh condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
A symbol display means capable of displaying at least symbol variations;
Storage means capable of storing at least the time of symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as “variation time”) into a plurality of groups;
A variation time determining means for determining one variation time from among the variation times stored in the storage means;
Control means capable of starting at least one of the plurality of gaming states;
With
Each of the plurality of groups includes one or more variable times,
At least one of the plurality of groups is an eleventh group;
At least one of the plurality of groups is a twelfth group;
At least one gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is an eleventh gaming state,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a twelfth gaming state,
The twelfth gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the eleventh gaming state,
The eleventh gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the fifteenth condition is not satisfied,
The twelfth gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the fifteenth condition is satisfied,
The fifteenth condition is a condition that cannot be established when it is the eleventh jackpot,
The fifteenth condition is a condition that can be established if it is the twelfth jackpot,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the eleventh group when the eleventh big hit.
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the twelfth group when the twelfth big hit.
The one or more variation times included in the twelfth group is the same variation time as at least some of the variation times included in the eleventh group.
A game stand characterized by that.

By summing up the game tables described in Appendix 19, if the 12th jackpot (Special Figure A) is won, the 12th group (table set 1) will be selected, and the 11th condition (2nd attacker wins) ) Is established, the twelfth gaming state (probable substation support) is started. On the other hand, if the eleventh condition is not satisfied, the first gaming state (non-probable transformation support) is started. Then, when the eleventh big hit (special figure C) is won, the eleventh group (table set 2) is selected. In other words, the table used when determining the variation time is determined by the type of the jackpot symbol (the jackpot type) and then the variation time is determined, but the gaming state is determined only by the symbol type of the jackpot Instead, it is determined in relation to other factors (other conditions).
(Appendix 20)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A variation time determining means capable of determining at least one variation time from a plurality of variation times;
Control means capable of starting at least one jackpot game of the plurality of jackpot games;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is a means for confirming and displaying a symbol corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after the symbol variation display,
The variation time is a variation time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of jackpot games is a first jackpot game,
At least one of the plurality of jackpot games is a second jackpot game,
The first jackpot game is a game that is started at least after the first symbol is confirmed and displayed,
The second jackpot game is a game that is started at least after the second symbol is confirmed and displayed,
The second symbol is a symbol different from the first symbol,
The control means is means capable of starting at least one gaming state of a plurality of gaming states,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is started at least after the first jackpot game has ended,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is started at least when the first condition is not satisfied during the execution of the second jackpot game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is started at least when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the second jackpot game,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time,
The first gaming state started after the first jackpot game has ended is a state in which the variation time determining means can determine the first variation time,
The second gaming state started when the first condition is satisfied is a state in which the variation time determining means can determine the second variation time,
The first gaming state started without satisfying the first condition is a state in which the variation time determining means can determine the second variation time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to appendix 20, wherein
The first variation time is a variation time used at least over a first period in the first gaming state started after the first jackpot game has ended,
The second variation time is a variation time used at least over a second period in the second gaming state started when the first condition is satisfied,
The second variation time is a variation time used at least over the second period in the first gaming state started without the first condition being satisfied,
The first period is the same period as the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The gaming machine according to appendix 20, wherein
The first variation time is a variation time used at least over a first period in the first gaming state started after the first jackpot game has ended,
The second variation time is a variation time used at least over a second period in the second gaming state started when the first condition is satisfied,
The second variation time is a variation time used at least over the second period in the first gaming state started without the first condition being satisfied,
The first period is a period different from the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 20 to 22,
The first variation time includes at least a variation time different from the second variation time,
The second variation time includes at least a variation time different from the first variation time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 20 to 22,
The first variation time includes at least a variation time different from the second variation time,
The second variation time includes at least the same variation time as the first variation time,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 20 to 24,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
It has a winning area where game balls can win at least,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied when a game ball wins the winning area,
The first condition is a condition that is not satisfied when the game ball does not win the winning area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A variation time determining means capable of determining at least one variation time from a plurality of variation times;
Multiple variable time tables;
A game machine equipped with
The variation time is an execution time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a first variable time table,
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a second variable time table;
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the first period,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the second period,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the first variation time table in the first gaming state in the first period,
The variation time determination means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the second variation time table in the first gaming state in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
A gaming machine according to appendix 26,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time,
The first variation time is at least included in the first variation time table,
The first variation time is at least included in the second variation time table,
The second variation time is at least included in the first variation time table,
The second variation time is at least not included in the second variation time table.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to appendix 26 or 27,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the third period,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the fourth period,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the first variation time table in the second gaming state in the third period,
The variation time determining means is capable of determining at least the variation time from the second variation time table in the second gaming state in the fourth period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming machine according to appendix 28,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the first period when the third condition is not satisfied after the first condition is satisfied;
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the second period when the third condition is not satisfied after the second condition is satisfied;
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the third period when the third condition is satisfied after the first condition is satisfied;
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be executed at least in the fourth period when the third condition is satisfied after the second condition is satisfied;
The first condition is different from the second condition,
The first period is the same period as the second period,
The third period is the same period as the fourth period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 30)
A gaming machine according to appendix 29,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
It is provided with a determination unit for determining whether or not the determination is correct,
The symbol variation display is capable of at least stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after starting symbol variation,
The symbol variation display is capable of stopping and displaying at least the first symbol aspect when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit,
The symbol variation display is capable of stopping and displaying at least the second symbol aspect when the result of the determination is a big hit.
The second symbol aspect is a symbol aspect that is at least different from the first symbol aspect,
The first condition is a condition that can be established at least when the first symbol aspect is stopped and displayed,
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least when the second symbol form is stopped and displayed,
The third condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least during the execution of the jackpot game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
A winning area in which a game ball can win at least in a fifth period during execution of the jackpot game,
The third condition is established when a game ball wins the winning area in the fifth period,
The third condition is not established when the game ball does not win the winning area in the fifth period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 29 to 31,
The third condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the second condition is established than after the first condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A variation time determining means capable of determining at least one variation time from a plurality of variation times;
Multiple variable time tables;
Control means capable of starting at least one jackpot game of the plurality of jackpot games;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol variation display is capable of stopping and displaying at least a symbol corresponding to the result of determination of success / failure (hereinafter referred to as “stop symbol”) after the symbol variation is started.
The variation time is an execution time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of jackpot games is a first jackpot game,
At least one of the plurality of jackpot games is a second jackpot game,
The first jackpot game is a game that starts at least after the first symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol,
The second jackpot game is a game that starts at least after the second symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol,
The second symbol is a symbol different from the first symbol,
The control means is means capable of starting at least one gaming state of a plurality of gaming states,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is started at least after the first jackpot game has ended,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is started at least when the first condition is not satisfied during the execution of the second jackpot game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is started at least when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the second jackpot game,
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a first variable time table,
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a second variable time table;
The determination of the variation time by the variation time determination means uses at least the first variation time table in the symbol variation display started after the first jackpot game ends.
The determination of the variation time by the variation time determination means uses at least the second variation time table in the symbol variation display that is started after the second jackpot game has ended,
The first variation time table is a table different from the second variation time table.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
A gaming machine according to attachment 33,
The first variable time table is a table used at least in the first gaming state started after the first jackpot game is ended,
The second variation time table is a table used at least in the second gaming state started when the first condition is satisfied,
The second variation time table is a table used at least in the first gaming state started without the first condition being satisfied,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
The game stand according to appendix 33 or 34,
The first variable time table is a table used at least over a first period in the first gaming state started after the first jackpot game has ended,
The second variation time table is a table used at least over a second period in the second gaming state started when the first condition is satisfied,
The second variation time table is a table used at least over the second period in the first gaming state started without the first condition being satisfied,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 33 to 35,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time,
The first variation time is a variation time included at least in the first variation time table,
The first variation time is a variation time that is at least not included in the second variation time table,
The second variation time is a variation time that is at least not included in the first variation time table,
The second variation time is a variation time included at least in the second variation time table.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 33 to 35,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time,
The first variation time is a variation time included at least in the first variation time table,
The first variation time is a variation time that is at least not included in the second variation time table,
The second variation time is a variation time included at least in the first variation time table,
The second variation time is a variation time included at least in the second variation time table.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 33 to 37,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
It has a winning area where game balls can win at least,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied when a game ball wins the winning area,
The first condition is a condition that is not satisfied when the game ball does not win the winning area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A variation time determining means capable of determining at least one variation time from a plurality of variation times;
Multiple variable time tables;
Control means capable of starting at least one jackpot game of the plurality of jackpot games;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is a means for confirming and displaying a symbol corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after the symbol variation display,
The variation time is a variation time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of jackpot games is a first jackpot game,
At least one of the plurality of jackpot games is a second jackpot game,
The first jackpot game is a game that is started at least after the first symbol is confirmed and displayed,
The second jackpot game is a game that is started at least after the second symbol is confirmed and displayed,
The second symbol is a symbol different from the first symbol,
The control means is means capable of starting at least one gaming state of a plurality of gaming states,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is started at least after the first jackpot game has ended,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is started at least when the first condition is not satisfied during the execution of the second jackpot game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is started at least when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the second jackpot game,
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a first variable time table,
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a second variable time table;
The first variation time table is a table different from the second variation time table,
The first variable time table is a table used at least in the first gaming state started after the first jackpot game is ended,
The second variation time table is a table used at least in the second gaming state started when the first condition is satisfied,
The second variation time table is a table used at least in the first gaming state started without the first condition being satisfied,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
A gaming machine according to appendix 39,
The first variable time table is a table used at least over a first period in the first gaming state started after the first jackpot game has ended,
The second variation time table is a table used at least over a second period in the second gaming state started when the first condition is satisfied,
The second variation time table is a table used at least over the second period in the first gaming state started without the first condition being satisfied,
The first period is the same period as the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
A gaming machine according to appendix 39,
The first variable time table is a table used at least over a first period in the first gaming state started after the first jackpot game has ended,
The second variation time table is a table used at least over a second period in the second gaming state started when the first condition is satisfied,
The second variation time table is a table used at least over the second period in the first gaming state started without the first condition being satisfied,
The first period is a period different from the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 39 to 41,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time,
The first variation time is a variation time included at least in the first variation time table,
The first variation time is a variation time that is at least not included in the second variation time table,
The second variation time is a variation time that is at least not included in the first variation time table,
The second variation time is a variation time included at least in the second variation time table.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 43)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 39 to 41,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time,
The first variation time is a variation time included at least in the first variation time table,
The first variation time is a variation time that is at least not included in the second variation time table,
The second variation time is a variation time included at least in the first variation time table,
The second variation time is a variation time included at least in the second variation time table.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 39 to 43,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
It has a winning area where game balls can win at least,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied when a game ball wins the winning area,
The first condition is a condition that is not satisfied when the game ball does not win the winning area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
Production means capable of executing at least the first production;
Control means capable of initiating at least one of a plurality of states;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state;
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state;
The first state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied,
The second state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The second state is a more advantageous state than the first state,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the first performance is performed,
The first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is easily satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 46)
In the game stand described in Appendix 45,
The control means is means capable of starting at least one gaming state of a plurality of gaming states,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state at least included in the first state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state at least included in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 47)
The game stand according to appendix 46,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a second effect,
At least one of the plurality of states is a third state;
The third state is a disadvantageous state than the second state,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the second performance is performed,
The third state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the second performance is performed,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 48)
An amusement machine according to appendix 47,
At least one of the plurality of states is a fourth state;
The fourth state is an advantageous state over the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state,
The fourth state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the second performance is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming machine according to appendix 48, wherein
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A variation time determining means capable of determining at least one variation time from a plurality of variation times;
With
The variation time is an execution time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time,
The first variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the first gaming state,
The second variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the second gaming state,
The first state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the second variation time,
The second state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the second variation time,
The third state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the first variation time,
The fourth state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the first variation time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 50)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 47 to 49,
Provided with a display means capable of executing at least a variable display of decorative symbols,
The variation display of the decorative symbol is a display that can at least confirm the decorative symbol in the first combination when the result of the determination is a big hit,
The variation display of the decorative design is a display that can at least confirm the decorative design in a second combination when the result of the determination is a big hit,
The first effect is an effect including at least that the second combination is confirmed and displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second effect is an effect including at least the fact that the first combination is fixedly displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second combination is a combination different from the first combination.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 51)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 47 to 50,
The control means is means capable of at least starting a big hit game,
The first effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the jackpot game,
The second effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the jackpot game,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied during execution of the jackpot game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 52)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 47 to 51,
The first condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the first effect is performed than after the second effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 47 to 52,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the third state is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 54,
The second state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the first performance is performed,
The first state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the first performance is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 55)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 54,
A game ball has at least an entry area where a game ball can enter,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when a game ball enters the entrance area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 56)
A game stand according to any one of claims 45 to 55,
The first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the second state is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 57)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 56,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
Production means capable of executing at least the first production;
Control means capable of at least starting the second gaming state;
A game machine equipped with
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the first performance is performed,
The first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is likely to be satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied even when the first performance is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
The game stand according to appendix 58, wherein
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a second effect,
The control means is means capable of at least starting the first gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the second performance is performed,
The first condition is a condition that is more likely to be established after the first effect is performed than after the second effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming machine according to appendix 59,
The control means is means capable of at least starting a big hit game,
The first effect is an effect that can be started before the jackpot game is started,
The second effect is an effect that can be started before the jackpot game is started,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied during execution of the jackpot game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 61)
The game stand according to appendix 59 or 60,
Provided with a display means capable of executing at least a variable display of decorative symbols,
The variation display of the decorative symbol is a display that can at least confirm the decorative symbol in the first combination when the result of the determination is a big hit,
The variation display of the decorative design is a display that can at least confirm the decorative design in a second combination when the result of the determination is a big hit,
The first effect is an effect including at least that the second combination is confirmed and displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second effect is an effect including at least the fact that the first combination is fixedly displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second combination is a combination different from the first combination.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 62)
The gaming machine according to appendix 59,
The control means is means capable of at least starting a big hit game,
The first effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the jackpot game,
The second effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the jackpot game,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied during execution of the jackpot game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 63)
The game stand according to appendix 62,
Provided with a display means capable of executing at least a variable display of decorative symbols,
The variation display of the decorative symbol is a display that can at least confirm the decorative symbol in the first combination when the result of the determination is a big hit,
The variation display of the decorative design is a display that can at least confirm the decorative design in a second combination when the result of the determination is a big hit,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a third effect,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a fourth effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started before the jackpot game is started,
The fourth effect is an effect that can be started before the jackpot game is started,
The third effect is an effect including at least that the second combination is fixedly displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The fourth effect is an effect including at least that the first combination is confirmed and displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second combination is a combination different from the first combination,
The first effect is an effect executed after the third effect is performed,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed after the fourth effect is performed,
The second effect is an effect executed after the fourth effect is performed,
The second effect is an effect that is not executed after the third effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 63, wherein
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A variation time determining means capable of determining at least one variation time from a plurality of variation times;
With
The variation time is an execution time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time,
The first variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the first gaming state,
The second variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the second gaming state,
The control means is means capable of starting at least one of a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state;
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state;
At least one of the plurality of states is a third state;
At least one of the plurality of states is a fourth state;
The first state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the second variation time,
The second state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the second variation time,
The third state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the first variation time,
The fourth state is a state in which the variation time determination means can determine the first variation time,
The first state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the first performance is performed,
The second state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the first performance is performed,
The third state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the second performance is performed,
The fourth state is a state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the second performance is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 65)
A game stand according to any one of claims 59 to 64, wherein
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first gaming state is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 66)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 58 to 65,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a fifth effect,
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a sixth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect informing that the first condition is not satisfied,
The sixth effect is an effect informing that the first condition is satisfied,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 67)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 58 to 66,
The first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the second gaming state is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 68)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 58 to 67,
A game ball has at least an entry area where a game ball can enter,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when a game ball enters the entrance area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 58 to 68,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
Production means capable of executing at least the first production;
Control means capable of starting at least one gaming state of a plurality of gaming states;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state,
The first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is likely to be satisfied,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the first performance is performed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the first performance is performed (hereinafter referred to as “second case”). Yes,
The effect means is a means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the second gaming state in the first case,
The effect means is means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the first gaming state in the second case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
The game machine according to appendix 70, wherein
The effect means is means capable of executing at least a second effect,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first condition is difficult to be satisfied,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is not satisfied after the second performance is performed (hereinafter referred to as “third case”). Yes,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied after the second presentation is performed (hereinafter referred to as “fourth case”),
The effect means is means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the first gaming state in the third case,
The effect means is means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the second gaming state in the fourth case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming machine according to appendix 71, wherein
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied during the execution of the jackpot game,
The first condition is a condition that is more easily established when the first effect is performed than when the second effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game stand according to appendix 71 or 72,
Provided with a display means capable of executing at least a variable display of decorative symbols,
The variation display of the decorative symbol is a display that can at least confirm the decorative symbol in the first combination when the result of the determination is a big hit,
The variation display of the decorative design is a display that can at least confirm the decorative design in a second combination when the result of the determination is a big hit,
The first effect is an effect including at least that the second combination is confirmed and displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second effect is an effect including at least the fact that the first combination is fixedly displayed in the variation display of the decorative design,
The second combination is a combination different from the first combination.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 74)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The second effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first gaming state is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 70 to 74,
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
The control means is means capable of determining at least one variation time from a plurality of variation times,
The variation time is an execution time of the symbol variation display,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time,
The first variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the first gaming state,
The second variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 76)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 70 to 75,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 77)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 70 to 76,
Provide notice means that can execute at least multiple kinds of notices,
At least one of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice,
At least one of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice,
The second notice is a notice different from the first notice,
The first notice is a notice that may be executed in the first gaming state,
The first notice is a notice that is not executed in the second gaming state,
The second notice is a notice that may be executed in the second gaming state,
The second notice is a notice that is not executed in the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game stand according to appendix 77,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice with a hold icon,
The second notice is a look-ahead notice with a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
A game stand according to any one of claims 70 to 78, wherein
The first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the second gaming state is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 70 to 79,
A game ball has at least an entry area where a game ball can enter,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when a game ball enters the entrance area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 70 to 80,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 82)
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
Control means capable of starting at least one gaming state of a plurality of gaming states;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
At least one of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the second condition is satisfied,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied including at least the first requirement,
The second condition is a condition established including at least the second requirement,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed after satisfying the first requirement,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed after satisfying the second requirement.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The game stand according to appendix 82,
A first area where game balls can enter at least;
Detection means capable of at least detecting that a game ball has entered the first area;
With
The second requirement is a requirement that it is detected that a game ball has entered the first region at least in the first detection period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The game stand according to appendix 83, wherein
The control means is means capable of starting at least one jackpot gaming state among a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states,
At least one of the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states is a first jackpot gaming state,
At least one of the plurality of types of jackpot gaming states is a second jackpot gaming state,
The second jackpot gaming state is a jackpot gaming state in which the second gaming state is easier to start than the first jackpot gaming state,
The second requirement is a requirement that may be satisfied at least in the first jackpot gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The gaming machine according to appendix 84, wherein
With a first variable winning means,
The first variable winning means is means that can be changed at least from either one of the first state and the second state to the other in the first jackpot gaming state,
The first variable winning means is means capable of changing at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other in the second jackpot gaming state,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to enter the first variable winning means than the first state,
The first area is an area in which a game ball that has entered at least the first variable winning means can enter,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
A gaming machine according to appendix 85,
The first variable winning means is means for at least the second state in the first period in the first jackpot gaming state,
The first detection period is a period at least partially overlapping the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 87)
The game stand according to appendix 86,
The first variable winning means is means for entering at least the second state in a second period longer than the first period in the second jackpot gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 88)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 85 to 87,
It has variable pitching means that can be changed to multiple states,
The variable pitching means is a means that can be changed at least from one of the third state and the fourth state to the other,
The fourth state is a state in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means is more likely to enter the first region than the third state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 85 to 88,
With a second variable winning means,
The second variable winning means is means that can be changed at least from one of the fifth state and the sixth state to the other in the first jackpot gaming state,
The second variable winning means is means capable of changing at least from one of the fifth state and the sixth state to the other in the second jackpot gaming state,
The sixth state is a state in which a game ball is easier to enter the second variable winning means than the fifth state,
The first variable winning means is means for entering the second state at least in the first round in the first jackpot gaming state,
The second variable winning means is means for entering the sixth state at least in the second round in the first jackpot gaming state,
The second round is a round different from the first round,
The first variable winning means is means for entering the second state at least in the first round in the second jackpot gaming state,
The second variable winning means is means for entering the sixth state at least in the second round in the second jackpot gaming state,
The first area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means cannot enter at least.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 84 to 89,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of symbols,
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is a first symbol,
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is a second symbol,
The control means is means capable of at least starting the first jackpot gaming state when the first symbol is displayed;
The control means is means capable of at least starting the second jackpot gaming state when the second symbol is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The game machine according to appendix 90,
A variation time determining means capable of determining at least one variation time from a plurality of variation times;
The symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least symbol variation display,
The variation time is a time for executing the symbol variation display.
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time,
At least one of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time,
The first variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the first gaming state,
The second variation time is a variation time corresponding at least to the second gaming state,
The variation time determination means is a means capable of determining the first variation time in the second gaming state started when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 92)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 83 to 91,
The first requirement is a requirement that it was not detected that a game ball entered the first region.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 93)
The gaming machine according to appendix 92,
The first requirement is a requirement that it was not detected that a game ball entered the first region at least during the first detection period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming machine according to appendix 92,
The first requirement is a requirement that it was not detected that a game ball entered the first region at least in the second detection period,
The second detection period is a period that is at least longer than the first detection period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 82 to 94,
The first effect is an effect that at least suggests that the first gaming state is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 82 to 95,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 82 to 96,
The first condition is a condition that is satisfied including at least the third requirement,
The second condition is a condition that is satisfied including at least the third requirement,
The third requirement is a requirement that the jackpot gaming state is at least finished.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the first condition may be a condition that is satisfied by including the third requirement, or may be a condition that is satisfied by including only the third requirement.

  Further, the second condition may be a condition that is satisfied by including the third requirement, or may be a condition that is satisfied by including only the third requirement.

  The third requirement may be a requirement that must be satisfied when the jackpot gaming state ends, or a requirement that is satisfied only when the jackpot gaming state ends.

(Appendix 98)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 82 to 97,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a third effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the third effect is an effect that includes at least one or more of a notice effect, a pre-read notice effect, an effect executed during a decorative pattern change display, a reach effect, a super reach effect, and the like. .

(Appendix 99)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A second area where game balls can enter at least;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is a means capable of at least starting the symbol variation display when a symbol variation start condition is established,
The second area is a starting area;
The symbol variation start condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least when a game ball enters the second area.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the second area may be an area where game balls always enter, or may be an area where only game balls can enter.

  The symbol display means may be a unit that always starts symbol variation display when the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, or starts symbol variation display only when the symbol variation start condition is satisfied. Possible means may be used.

  Further, the symbol variation start condition may be a condition that is always satisfied when a game ball enters the second area, or may be satisfied only when a game ball enters the second area. It may be.

(Appendix 100)
Control means capable of at least starting a plurality of types of gaming states;
A first variable winning means;
A second variable winning means that can change at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state;
The first area,
A game machine equipped with
The first state is a state where a game ball cannot enter at least,
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter at least,
The first area is an area where at least a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter,
The first area is an area where a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter at least,
At least one of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition including at least the first requirement as a formation requirement,
The first requirement is a requirement that a game ball enters the first region,
The control means is means capable of starting at least a plurality of types of jackpot games,
At least one of the plurality of types of jackpot games is a first jackpot game,
The partial period in the first jackpot game is the first period,
The partial period in the first jackpot game is the second period,
The partial period in the first jackpot game is a third period,
The first period is a period in which the second variable winning means is at least in the second state,
The second period is a period in which the second variable winning means is at least in the first state,
The third period is a period in which the second variable winning means is at least in the second state,
The second period is a period starting after the first period;
The third period is a period starting after the second period;
The third period is a period longer than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
A gaming machine according to attachment 100,
The first jackpot game is a jackpot game capable of executing at least a plurality of rounds,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round;
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a third round;
The first round is a round including at least the first period;
The third round is a round including at least the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
A gaming machine according to appendix 101,
The first variable winning means is variable winning means that can change at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state,
The second period is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a second round;
The second round is a round including at least the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 100 to 102,
The second gaming state is a probability variation state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 100 to 103,
At least one of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that includes at least the second requirement as a formation requirement,
The second requirement is a requirement that a game ball does not enter the first area during the execution of the first jackpot game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
A gaming machine according to appendix 104,
The first gaming state is a non-probable change state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
First variable winning means that can change at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state;
A second variable winning means that can change at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state;
The first area,
Production means capable of executing at least multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
The first state is a state where a game ball cannot enter at least,
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter at least,
The first area is an area where at least a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter,
The first area is an area where a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter at least,
At least one of the plurality of types of gaming states is the second gaming state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition including at least the first requirement as a formation requirement,
The first requirement is a requirement that a game ball enters the first region,
The control means is means capable of starting at least a plurality of types of jackpot games,
At least one of the plurality of types of jackpot games is a first jackpot game,
The partial period in the first jackpot game is the first period,
The partial period in the first jackpot game is the second period,
The first period is a period in which the first variable winning means is at least in the second state,
The second period is a period in which the second variable winning means is at least in the second state,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the first period,
The first effect is an effect that is not executed at least in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The game stand according to appendix 106,
At least one of the plurality of types of jackpot games is a second jackpot game,
A part of the period in the second jackpot game is a third period,
The third period is a period in which the second variable winning means is at least in the second state,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
A gaming machine according to appendix 106 or 107,
The first effect is an effect related to the big hit round,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 106 to 108,
The second gaming state is a probability variation state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 106 to 109,
At least one of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that can be started at least when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that includes at least the second requirement as a formation requirement,
The second requirement is a requirement that a game ball does not enter the first area during the execution of the first jackpot game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The gaming machine according to attachment 110,
The first gaming state is a non-probable change state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 106 to 111,
The first jackpot game is a jackpot game capable of executing at least a plurality of rounds,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round;
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a third round;
The first round is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The third round is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The third round is a round started after the first round;
The first round is a round having a shorter execution period than the third round.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
A first symbol display means capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display;
A game machine equipped with
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display,
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the second gaming state is more easily started than the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
A first variable winning means;
A second variable winning means that can change at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state;
A second area,
A game machine equipped with
The first state is a state where a game ball cannot enter at least,
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter at least,
The second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter at least,
The second area is an area where a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter at least,
When a game ball enters the second area during execution of the second jackpot game, the second gaming state is configured to be at least startable after the second jackpot game is finished,
At least a part of the second jackpot game is a period in which the second variable winning means is in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “first period”).
At least a part of the second jackpot game is a period in which the second variable winning means is in the first state (hereinafter referred to as “second period”).
At least a part of the second jackpot game is a period in which the second variable winning means is in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “third period”).
The second period is a period starting after the first period;
The third period is a period starting after the second period;
The third period is a period longer than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 115)
The gaming machine according to appendix 114,
The second jackpot game is a jackpot game capable of executing at least a plurality of rounds,
A first round of the plurality of rounds is a round including at least the first period;
A third round of the plurality of rounds is a round including at least the third period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 116)
The game stand according to appendix 115,
The first variable winning means is variable winning means that can change at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state,
The second period is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
A second round of the plurality of rounds is a round including at least the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 117)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 114 to 116,
The second gaming state is a probability variation state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 118)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 114 to 117,
The second game state is a game state that can be started at least when a game ball enters the second region in the second region effective state in the second jackpot game,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 119)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 114 to 118,
The second period is a period longer than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 120)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 114 to 119, wherein
When the game ball does not enter the second area during the execution of the second jackpot game, the first game state is configured to be able to start at least,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 121)
A gaming machine according to attachment 120, wherein
The first gaming state is a non-probable change state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 122)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 114 to 121,
A first symbol display means capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display;
With
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the second jackpot game is easier to start than the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 123)
First variable winning means that can change at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state;
A second variable winning means that can change at least from one of the first state and the second state to the other state;
A second area,
Production means capable of executing at least multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
The first state is a state where a game ball cannot enter at least,
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter at least,
The second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter at least,
The second area is an area where a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter at least,
When a game ball enters the second area during execution of the second jackpot game, the second gaming state is configured to be at least startable after the second jackpot game is finished,
At least a part of the second jackpot game is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “fourth period”).
At least a part of the second jackpot game is a period in which the second variable winning means is in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “fifth period”).
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the fourth period,
The first effect is an effect that is not executed at least in the fifth period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 124)
A gaming machine according to attachment 123,
When a game ball enters the second area during the execution of the third jackpot game, the second gaming state is configured to be at least startable after the third jackpot game is finished,
At least a part of the third jackpot game is a period during which the second variable winning means is at least in the second state (hereinafter referred to as “sixth period”).
The first effect is an effect executed at least in the sixth period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 125)
The game stand according to appendix 124,
A first symbol display means capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display;
With
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be executed in preference to the first symbol variation display,
The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the third jackpot game is easier to start than the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 126)
The game stand according to attachment 125,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which the second jackpot game is easier to start than the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 127)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 123 to 126,
The first effect is an effect related to the big hit round,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 128)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 123 to 127,
The second gaming state is a probability variation state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 129)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 123 to 128,
The second game state is a game state that can be started at least when a game ball enters the second region in the second region effective state in the second jackpot game,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 130)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 123 to 129,
When the game ball does not enter the second area during the execution of the second jackpot game, the first game state is configured to be able to start at least,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 131)
The game stand according to attachment 130,
The first gaming state is a non-probable change state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 132)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 123 to 131,
The first effect is an effect executed in at least a part of the fourth period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 133)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 123 to 132,
The second jackpot game is a jackpot game capable of executing at least a plurality of rounds,
The first round of the plurality of rounds is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
A third round of the plurality of rounds is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The third round is a round started after the first round;
The first round is a round having a shorter execution period than the third round.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 134)
A first variable winning means;
A second variable winning means,
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area provided in the second variable winning means, the second game state can be started,
A part of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
A part of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “second period”) is a period in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
A part of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “third period”) is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
A part of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “fourth period”) is a period in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The first state is a state in which the game ball cannot enter,
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter,
One effect (hereinafter referred to as “first effect”) of the plurality of types of effects is an effect that prompts a game ball to enter the second area in a period after the second period. Yes,
One of the multiple types of effects (hereinafter referred to as “second effect”) is an effect that prompts a game ball to enter the second area,
One of the multiple types of effects (hereinafter referred to as “third effect”) is an effect indicating that the transition to the second gaming state has been confirmed.
The first effect is an effect configured to be executed in at least a part of the first period,
The second effect is an effect that can be executed or executed in at least a part of the second period,
The second effect is an effect configured to be executable in at least a part of the third period,
The second effect is an effect configured to be executable in at least a part of the fourth period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 135)
A gaming machine according to attachment 134,
The first period is a period in which the second variable winning means is in the first state,
The second period is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the first state,
The third period is a period in which the second variable winning means is in the first state,
The fourth period is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 136)
The game stand according to appendix 134 or 135,
The first effect is an effect configured not to be executed in the second period,
The first effect is an effect configured not to be executed in the third period,
The first effect is an effect configured not to be executed in the fourth period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 137)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 134 to 136,
The second effect is configured to be executed in at least a part of the third period when a game ball does not enter the second area in the second period. Directing,
The second effect is configured to be executed in at least a part of the fourth period when a game ball does not enter the second area in the second period. Directing,
The second effect is an effect configured such that when a game ball enters the second area in the second period, the second effect is not performed in the third period.
The second effect is an effect configured such that when a game ball enters the second area in the second period, the second effect is not executed in the fourth period.
The second effect is that at least a part of the second period or the game ball enters the second area until the game ball enters the second area in the second period. It is a production that is configured to be executed in the period up to
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 138)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 134 to 137,
The third effect is an effect configured to be executed in at least a part of the second period when a game ball enters the second area in the second period. Yes,
The third effect is an effect configured to be executed in at least a part of the third period when a game ball enters the second area in the second period. Yes,
The third effect is an effect configured to be executed in at least a part of the fourth period when a game ball enters the second area in the second period. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 139)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 134 to 138,
The third effect is an effect configured not to be executed in the first period,
The third effect is an effect that is configured not to be executed in the second period when a game ball does not enter the second area in the second period.
The third effect is an effect that is configured not to be executed in the third period when a game ball does not enter the second area in the second period,
The third effect is an effect that is configured not to be executed in the fourth period when a game ball does not enter the second area in the fourth period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 140)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 134 to 139,
The third effect is an effect configured to be executed in at least a part of the fourth period when a game ball enters the second area in the fourth period. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 141)
A first variable winning means;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
A part of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “fifth period”) is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
A part of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “sixth period”) is a period in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
One effect (hereinafter referred to as “fifth effect”) of the plurality of effects is a jackpot effect,
One of the multiple types of effects (hereinafter referred to as “sixth effect”) is a jackpot effect,
The fifth effect is an effect configured to be executed in at least a part of the fifth period,
The sixth effect is an effect configured to be executed in at least a part of the sixth period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 142)
Sound output means;
A first variable winning means capable of changing between an easy entry state where a game ball is easy to enter and a difficult entry state where a game ball is difficult to enter;
A second variable winning means capable of changing between the easy entry state and the difficult entry state;
A first passing area through which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass;
First passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the first passage region;
A game machine equipped with
The first variable winning means is in the difficult to enter state when there is a passing of the first maximum winning number of game balls to the first passing area after entering the easy entering state. Variable winning means that change to
The first passing detection means moves to the first passing area until the first effective period elapses after the first variable winning means changes from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state. Is a passage detection means that can handle the passage of game balls as effective,
The sound output means passes the first passing area through the first maximum number of winning balls, and the first variable winning means changes from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state. After the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state, if there is a game ball passing to the first passing area before the first effective period elapses, It is a means that can output the over winning sound of
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 143)
The game stand according to appendix 142,
The first passage detection means can handle the passage of the game ball to the first passage area as effective even during the period when the first variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state. A passage detection means,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 144)
The game stand according to appendix 142 or 143,
The sound output means passes the first maximum winning number of game balls to the first passing area and the first variable winning means changes from the easy to enter state to the difficult to enter state. After the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state, when the game ball has passed to the first passing area before the first effective period elapses, A means for outputting the first over winning sound,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 145)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 142 to 144,
A second passing area through which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can pass;
Second passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the second passage region;
With
The second variable winning means is in the difficult to enter state when the second maximum winning number of game balls has passed to the second passing area after entering the easy entering state. Variable winning means that change to
The second passage detecting means is a passage capable of handling the passage of the game ball to the second passage area as an effective one during the period in which the second variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state. Detection means,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 146)
The game stand according to appendix 145,
The second passage detection means moves to the second passage area until the second effective period elapses after the second variable winning means changes from the easy entry state to the difficult entry state. Is a passage detection means that can handle the passage of game balls as effective,
The sound output means passes the second passing area through the second maximum winning game ball, and the second variable winning means changes from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state. After the first variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state, if there is a game ball passing to the second passing area before the second valid period elapses, It is a means that can output the over winning sound of
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 147)
In the game stand according to appendix 145 or 146,
Provided with display means capable of executing multiple types of effect display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passing area (hereinafter referred to as “first passing display”).
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display that changes in accordance with the number of game balls that have passed through the second passing area (hereinafter referred to as “second passing display”).
The display means is means capable of starting display of the first passing display when the first variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state.
The display means is means capable of starting display of the second passing display when the second variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 148)
The game stand according to appendix 147,
The display means, when the second variable winning means is in the easy entering state after the first variable winning means is changed from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state, It is means for starting display of the second passage display instead of the first passage display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 149)
The game stand according to appendix 147 or 148,
The display means, when the first variable winning means is in the easy entering state after the second variable winning means is changed from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state, It is means for starting display of the first passage display instead of the second passage display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 150)
The game stand according to appendix 147,
The display means, when the second variable winning means is in the easy entering state after the first variable winning means is changed from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state, Means for starting display of the second passage display while displaying the first passage display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 151)
The game stand according to appendix 147 or 150,
The display means, when the first variable winning means is in the easy entering state after the second variable winning means is changed from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state, Means for starting display of the first passage display while displaying the second passage display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 152)
The game stand according to appendix 145 or 146,
A game control means capable of executing a jackpot game;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of effect display;
With
The display means is a display that changes in accordance with the total number of game balls that have passed through the first passing area and game balls that have passed through the second passing area during the execution of the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “first game”). It is a means that can display 3)
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 153)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 142 to 152,
The second variable winning means is variable winning means that enters the difficult to enter state during the period in which the first variable winning means is in the easy entering state.
The first variable winning means is variable winning means that enters the difficult to enter state during the period in which the second variable winning means is in the easy entering state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 154)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 142 to 153, wherein:
A first control means;
Second control means capable of executing control of the sound output means;
With
The first control means can transmit first passage information to the second control means when the first passage detection means detects the passage of a game ball to the first passage area. Control means,
The second control means is a control means having a first storage area,
The second control means receives the first passage information (hereinafter referred to as “the first pass information”) after the first variable winning means has entered the easy-to-enter state and the first effective period has elapsed. It is a control means that can count "first pass count"),
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counted first passage count in the first storage area,
When the value indicating the first number of passes stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, the second control means sends the first output to the sound output means. It is a control means capable of executing control to output an over winning sound,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 155)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 142 to 154,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 156)
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game control means capable of executing a jackpot game;
A first variable winning means capable of changing between an easy entry state where a game ball is easy to enter and a difficult entry state where a game ball is difficult to enter;
A second variable winning means capable of changing between the easy entry state and the difficult entry state;
A first passing area through which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass;
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first entrance effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second entrance effect,
The first entry effect is an entry effect that can be started when a game ball passes through the first passage area during execution of the jackpot game,
The second entry effect is an entry effect that can be started when a game ball enters the second variable winning means during execution of the jackpot game,
The second pitching effect is a pitching effect that can be started even when a game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means has changed to the pitching easy state. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 157)
The game stand according to appendix 156,
The first entry effect is an entry effect that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area,
The second pitching effect is a pitching effect that changes according to the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 158)
The game stand according to appendix 156 or 157,
When the second variable winning means is in the easy entering state after the first variable winning means is changed from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state, A means for ending the first entrance effect and starting the second entrance effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 159)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 156 to 158,
Comprising first passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the first passage region;
The first passing detection means moves to the first passing area until the first effective period elapses after the first variable winning means changes from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state. Is a passage detection means that can handle the passage of game balls as effective,
In the second winning effect, the first variable winning means changes from the easy entering state to the difficult entering state, and then the second variable winning means changes to the easy entering state. When the game ball has passed to the first passing area by the time the first valid period has elapsed, it is a ballistic effect that starts in place of the first ballistic effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 160)
The game stand according to appendix 159,
The first passage detection means can handle the passage of the game ball to the first passage area as effective even during the period when the first variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state. A passage detection means,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 161)
The game stand according to appendix 159 or 160,
A second passing area through which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can pass;
Second passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the second passage region;
With
The second passage detection means is a game ball to the second passage area during a period when the second variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state (hereinafter referred to as “fourth effective period”). It is a passage detection means that can handle the passage of
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 162)
The game stand according to appendix 161,
The second entry effect is the first entry when the game ball passes through the first passage area in a period in which the first validity period and the fourth validity period overlap. It is a pitching effect that is executed in place of the performance.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 163)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 156 to 162,
One of the multiple types of effects is a third entrance effect,
The third winning effect is based on the total number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning means and game balls that have entered the second variable winning means during execution of the jackpot game. It is a changing pitching production,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 164)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 156 to 163,
The effect means is means including display means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effect display,
The first entry effect is a first entry effect display of the plurality of types of effect display,
The second entry effect is a second entry effect display of the plurality of types of effect display,
The first entry effect display is an entry effect display that can be started when a game ball passes through the first passage area during execution of the jackpot game,
The second entry effect display is an entry effect display that can be started when a game ball enters the second variable winning means during execution of the jackpot game,
The second entry effect display is an entry effect that can be started even when a game ball passes through the first passage area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy entry state. Display
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 165)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 156 to 164,
The second variable winning means is variable winning means that enters the difficult to enter state during the period in which the first variable winning means is in the easy entering state.
The first variable winning means is variable winning means that enters the difficult to enter state during the period in which the second variable winning means is in the easy entering state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 166)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 156 to 165, wherein:
Sound output means;
Counting means capable of starting counting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning means when the second variable winning means has changed to the easy entering state;
With
The second variable winning means is variable winning means that changes to the difficult-to-enter state when the second maximum winning number of game balls has entered after entering the easy-to-enter state. Yes,
The counting means also enters the second variable winning means even when a game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy entering state. Means to count as a game ball
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a third over winning sound when the number of game balls counted by the counting means exceeds the second maximum winning number.
A game ball characterized by that.

(Appendix 167)
The game stand according to appendix 166,
A first control means;
Second control means capable of executing control of the sound output means;
With
The first control means is a control means capable of transmitting first passage information to the second control means when a game ball passes through the first passage area,
The first control means is a control means capable of transmitting second passage information to the second control means when a game ball enters the second variable winning means,
The second control means is a control means having a third storage area,
The counting means is a means for counting the number of times the second control means has received the second passing information after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state,
The counting means is a means for counting the number of times the first passing information is received after the second variable winning means is changed to the easy-to-enter state.
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counting result of the counting means in the third storage area,
When the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number, the second control means sends the third output to the sound output means. It is a means that can output over winning sound,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 168)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 156 to 167,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 169)
A game machine provided with a production means capable of executing at least the first production,
The production means can start at least the first production when the first condition is satisfied,
The production means may execute the first production from the middle according to the timing when the first condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 170)
The game stand according to appendix 169,
The production means is capable of executing at least a second production,
The production means is capable of at least starting the first production when the first condition is satisfied while the second production is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 171)
The game stand according to appendix 169 or 170,
The production means is capable of at least starting the second production from the beginning when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition at least different from the first condition.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 172)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 169 to 171,
The production means is capable of executing at least the first production in a state in which the player cannot recognize the first production,
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period before the first condition is satisfied,
The start position determining means is capable of executing the first effect in a state where the player can recognize the first effect when the first condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 173)
A gaming machine according to appendix 171,
The production means is capable of executing at least the second production in a state where the player can recognize the second production when the second condition is satisfied,
The production means is capable of executing at least the first production in a state in which the player cannot recognize the first production when the second condition is satisfied,
The production means is capable of at least executing the second production (performed in a state visible to the player) in a state invisible to the player when the first condition is satisfied. Yes,
The production means is capable of at least executing the first production (performed in a state invisible to the player) in a state visible to the player when the first condition is satisfied. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 174)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 169 to 173,
The first effect is an effect that a player can select at least.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 175)
A gaming machine according to appendix 171,
The first effect is an effect related to at least the second effect,
The start position determining means is capable of executing at least the first effect from a position that can be synchronized with the second effect when the first condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 176)
The gaming table according to appendixes 171 and 175,
The second condition is power on,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 177)
The game stand according to appendixes 171, 175, and 176,
The first effect includes at least a sound effect,
The second effect includes at least a sound effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 178)
Production means capable of executing at least the first production;
Multiple timing means;
A game machine equipped with
The production means is capable of at least starting the first production from the beginning when the first condition is satisfied,
The production means is capable of starting the first production at least halfway when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition at least different from the first condition,
At least one of the plurality of time measuring means is a first time measuring means,
At least one of the plurality of time measuring means is a second time measuring means,
The first time measuring means is a real time clock,
The second time measuring means is capable of at least grasping an elapsed time from power-on,
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least in relation to the time measured by the first time measuring means,
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied at least in relation to the time measured by the second time measuring means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 179)
A first variable winning means;
A second variable winning means,
A second area into which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter;
A notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification;
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area, the second game state can be started,
The jackpot game consists of multiple rounds,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “first round”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in a second state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “second round”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in a first state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “third round”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The second round is a round in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter,
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;
The third round is a round started after the second round;
One of the plurality of types of notification (hereinafter referred to as “game ball entry promotion notification”) is a notification that prompts entry of a game ball into the second area,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round,
In the jackpot game, each of the plurality of rounds is either a long-term round in which the period of the second state is long or a short-period round in which the period of the second state is short Configured to be one side,
The notifying means, when the first round and the third round are the long-term rounds, and the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round, It is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the second round,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “fourth round”) is a round in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
The fourth round is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the first state,
The first round is a round that starts after the fourth round;
It is characterized by that.

(Appendix 180)
A first variable winning means;
A second variable winning means,
A second area into which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter;
A notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area, the second game state can be started,
The jackpot game consists of multiple rounds,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “first round”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in a second state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “second round”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in a first state,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “third round”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the second state,
The second round is a round in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter,
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;
The third round is a round started after the second round;
One of the plurality of types of notification (hereinafter referred to as “game ball entry promotion notification”) is a notification that prompts entry of a game ball into the second area,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round,
In the jackpot game, each of the plurality of rounds is either a long-term round in which the period of the second state is long or a short-period round in which the period of the second state is short Configured to be one side,
The notifying means, when the first round and the third round are the long-term rounds, and the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round, It is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the second round,
One of the multiple types of effects is an island simultaneous effect,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball approach promotion notification during execution of the island simultaneous production.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. Moreover, even if it is a structural requirement contained only in description of embodiment, the modification, or additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or additional remarks.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Production button 208 Decorative symbol display device 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 230 First special figure start port 232 Second special figure start port 234, 234a, 234b First variable prize 235, 235a, 235b second variable prize opening 300 main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 Second sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit

Claims (18)

A first variable winning means;
A second variable winning means,
A second area into which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning means can enter;
A notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the second area, the second game state can be started,
The first jackpot game consists of multiple rounds,
One round of the plurality of rounds (hereinafter referred to as “first round”) is a round in which the second variable winning means is in a second state,
One round (hereinafter referred to as “second round”) started after the first round among the plurality of rounds is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the first state. And
One round (hereinafter referred to as “third round”) that is started after the second round of the plurality of rounds, the second variable winning means is in the second state. Round,
The second round is a round in which the first variable winning means is in the second state,
The first state is a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
The second state is a state in which a game ball can enter,
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications is a notification prompting entry of a game ball into the second area (hereinafter referred to as “game ball entry promotion notification”),
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the first round,
The first round is a round that is longer than a round in which the period of the second state is the shortest period;
The third round is a round having a longer period than the round in which the period of the second state is the shortest period;
The notifying means is means for executing the game ball entry promotion notification in the second round when the game ball does not enter the second area in the first round,
One of the multiple types of effects is an island simultaneous effect,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the game ball approach promotion notification during execution of the island simultaneous production.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The island simultaneous performance is an effect that can be executed other than during the execution of the first jackpot game,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The island simultaneous effect is an effect that can be executed according to the time since the power was turned on.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The island simultaneous effect is an effect that ends when the first effect period elapses after the island simultaneous effect is started.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The effect means is means including display means,
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The rendering means is means including sound output means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
Having a first timing means,
When the island simultaneous performance is started, the island simultaneous production is an effect that may be started from the middle according to the result of the time measurement by the first time measuring means,
The island simultaneous performance is an effect that may be started from the top according to the time measurement result by the first time measuring means when the island simultaneous production is started.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
In the first jackpot game, when a game ball does not enter the second area, the first gaming state is configured to start after the first jackpot game ends,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 8,
The first gaming state is a non-probable change state,
The second gaming state is a probability variation state.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The second area is an area in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means cannot enter,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10,
A first area into which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can enter;
When a game ball enters the first area, a prize ball is paid out.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
One notification of the plurality of notifications is a notification that notifies a player in advance that a game ball should enter the second area in the first round (hereinafter referred to as “game ball advance promotion advance”). It is called “notification”.)
In one round (hereinafter referred to as “fourth round”) that starts before the first round among the plurality of rounds, the first variable winning means is in the second state. Round,
The fourth round is a round in which the second variable winning means is in the first state,
The notification means is means capable of executing the game ball advance promotion advance notification in the fourth round.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
When the game ball enters the second area in the second area valid state, the second game state is configured to start after the end of the first big hit game,
The second area effective state is a state in which the entry of a game ball into the second area is treated as effective.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 13,
One notification of the plurality of types of notifications is notification for notifying that a game ball has entered the second area (hereinafter referred to as “game ball entry notification”).
The notification means is means for executing the game ball entry notification when a game ball enters the second area in the first round.
A game stand characterized by that. 15. The game table according to claim 14, wherein
The notification means is means for executing the game ball entry notification in the second round when a game ball enters the second area in the first round.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
The informing means is means for executing the game ball entry promotion notice in a partial period in the first round,
The game ball entry promotion notification is a notification that prompts the player to enter the game ball into the second area,
The partial period in the first round is a period before a game ball enters the second area in the first round.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
The first jackpot game is a jackpot game not including a round in which the period of the second state is the shortest period,
The second jackpot game consists of multiple rounds,
The second jackpot game is a jackpot game including a round in which the period of the second state is the shortest period.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 17,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.